Labc Warranty Technical Manual v9 PDF

TECHNICAL MANUAL
TECHNICAL
MANUAL
T 0800 183 1755 E [email protected]
Version 9
V9
MD Insurance Services Ltd. is the scheme administrator for LABC Warranty and is authorised and regulated by the Financial Conduct Authority. Registered in England No: 3642459. TS-011A-9.00-010420
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
The LABC Warranty Technical Manual Version 9 is produced for the purposes of identifying our technical The difference between Building Control and Warranty
requirements applicable to the design and construction of buildings to be covered.
What's the difference between Building Control and Warranty? Why do Warranty Surveyors sometimes ask for
Version 9 has been assembled in a more logical 'Building Part' format, which will allow users to find information more information or more detail, than a Building Control surveyor?
more easily.
It can be for a number of reasons, whilst it should be remembered that on occasion the Building Control
LABC Warranty has always prided itself on offering flexible solutions to meet Warranty Requirements, and surveyor will, for certain elements, require more information than the Warranty Surveyor, for example smoke
although there is substantial guidance within this Technical Manual, flexibility can still be maintained. control to common areas of an apartment type development. The Building Regulations are statutory
requirements; the Approved Documents provide guidance on how these Regulations may be achieved.
Meeting the Functional Requirements However, these are minimum standards, derived in the main from building failures. Warranty technical
requirements are generally founded on the Building Regulations, but in many instances go into greater depth
The Functional Requirements in this Technical Manual, are broken down into three specific requirements due to claims experience.
covering:
For example:
· Workmanship Basements; a Warranty Surveyor will ask for strict compliance with the British Standard, referred to in the
· Materials Building Regulations whereas the Building Control Surveyor may only require compliance in principle.
· Design
The Building Control Surveyor is interested mainly in compliance on the day that they visit, or at the time that a
The Functional Requirements are fundamental issues which must be complied with in all cases to achieve completion certificate is issued. Warranty Surveyors are generally required to consider the performance on an
Warranty standards. ongoing basis, therefore have to be satisfied that a basement waterproofing is appropriate for all ground
conditions and water table events.
Structure of the Technical Manual
This Technical Manual begins with 'General Functional Requirements' which are applicable in all cases i.e.
covering all Building Part sections and Appendices (except where noted).
The Manual is then divided into Building Part sections which:
· Include additional Functional Requirements (where necessary), that are specific to that section. These
must be read in addition to the 'General Functional Requirements', followed by;
· Guidance which provides suggested solutions for meeting the Functional Requirements*.
*Please Note:
The guidance in the Building Part sections are suggested solutions, if an alternative solution is selected, then
this must still meet the Functional Requirements.
All the 'Building Part' sections are listed on the Contents page of this Manual.
The Manual concludes with Appendix Sections, covering guidance for Finishes, Coastal Locations, Materials,
Products, and Building Systems, and Warranty requirements for Conversions and Refurbishment projects.
These Appendices should be read in conjunction with the 'Building Part' sections, and also contain 'Additional
Functional Requirements' that (where necessary) need to be met.
A digital version of this manual, and individual sections, are available on our website should you wish to view
digitally, email, or print drawing sheets in A3 format as required.
©
© MD
MD Insurance
Insurance Services
Services Limited
Limited 2020
2020 1 1
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Main Changes in the Technical Manual Version 9 Windows and Doors

· Further guidance has been issued on nickel sulphide inclusions in glazing and when heat soak testing is
Building Part sections required. This is to provide further clarification of our requirements.
The previous Chapters have been replaced, and the guidance has now been put together in more logical · Additional new Functional Requirements for Design provided.
'Building Part' sections. This will make the Functional Requirements and the guidance easier to find.
Stairs
The guidance, which provides suggested solutions*, is now in a 'drawing sheet' format and has been · Additional new Functional Requirements for Design provided.
assembled in a logical build order.
Upper Floors
Basements · Further guidance on timber joist connections with steel beams (to allow for shrinkage in the timbers).
· Additional text added regarding the joint between the below ground waterproofing and the DPC stating · Notching and drilling guidance updated with a maximum notch depth and max drill diameter now specified.
that the CSSW design should also take responsibility for this junction. · Additional guidance added for metal web floor joists and I-joists.
· Additional new Functional Requirements for Design provided.
Ground Floors · The requirements in Chapter 8.4 of the previous Technical Manual for providing layouts showing positions
· Additional text added on screeds, forming movement joints etc. Information on anhydrite screeds and the of internal compartment walls, floors and other lines of fire resistance in flats and apartments with a floor
treatment of screeds before tiling. four or more storeys above the ground, has now changed the height requirement to a building where the
· Further information on underfloor heating used in conjunction with floor screeds. floor is 4.5m above ground level.
Roofs
Foundations · Further guidance provided regarding ventilation of batten space when using LR underlay and closefitting
· Updated guidance added from the 'Good Practice Guides' (available on our website for downloading) has roof covering.
been provided for 'Raft', 'Vibratory Ground Improvement', and 'Engineered Fill' etc. · Additional guidance added in regards to where testing of flat roof coverings is required.
Drainage
· New Functional Requirement added: Outfall drainage from any sewerage treatment plant or septic tank, Balconies and Terraces
should discharge to a suitable outfall that has been given full consent to do so. · Additional guidance added in regards to where testing of coverings to balconies and terraces forming a
· Additional new Functional Requirements for Design provided. roof is required.
External Walls
· Guidance has been updated to provide further information on the mechanical fixing of copings (traditional Chimneys, Driveways and Paving, Heating Services, Ventilation, Electrical Services and
masonry cavity walls and timber frame walls). Water Services
· Movement joints: Additional section drawing and notes provided regarding concrete bricks. · Additional new Functional Requirements for design provided.
· A new stepped cavity tray detail has been provided as this is a common high risk area.
· Additional guidance on cavities of fair faced masonry with partial fill insulation. This is for severe exposed Outbuildings
locations where the risk of water ingress is increased due to driving rain.
· Additional guidance on fire stopping of garages on party wall lines.
· Timber frame: Additional guidance for Radon barriers where a suspended ground floor is proposed and a
solution for venting the sole plate becomes difficult.
· Additional new Functional Requirements for Design provided. Appendices
· A change from the previous Technical Manual. More general guidance are located in the Appendices
Internal Walls relating to: 'Finishes', 'Coastal Locations' (formerly Chapter 13), 'Materials, Products, and Building
· Additional new Functional Requirements for Design provided. Systems' (formerly Chapters 2 and 3) and 'Conversions and Refurbishments' (formerly Chapter 12).
· The requirements in Chapter 8.4 of the previous Manual version for providing layouts showing positions · 'Conversions and Refurbishments': Former agricultural buildings of any nature are not considered suitable
of internal compartment walls, floors and other lines of fire resistance in flats and apartments with a floor for cover.
four or more storeys above the ground, has now changed the height requirement to a building where the
floor is 4.5m above ground level.
© MD Insurance Services Limited 2020 2

CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
General
General
General Functional
Functional
Functional Requirements
Requirements
Requirements 44 4 7.7. 7.Internal
Internal
Internal Walls
Walls
Walls 14.14.
14. Driveways
Driveways
Drivewaysand and Paving
Paving
and Paving
Functional
Functional
Requirements
Requirements 194194
194 Functional
Functional
Requirements
Requirements 378378
378
Tolerances
1.1. 1.Tolerances
Tolerances 7.1 7.1
7.1 Masonry
Masonry
Masonry 196196
196 14.1 14.1
14.1 Driveways
Driveways
Driveways and and Paving
Paving
and Paving 380380
380
Functional
Requirements
Functional Requirements 66 6 7.2 7.2
7.2 TimberTimber
TimberStud Stud
Stud 202202
202
1.1 1.1
1.1 Tolerances
Tolerances
Tolerances 88 8 7.3 7.3
7.3 Metal Metal
Stud
Metal Stud
Stud 208208
208 15.15.
15. Heating
Heating
Heating Services
Services
Services
7.4 7.4
7.4 General
General
General Requirements
Requirements
Requirements - Cavity
- Cavity
- Cavity Barriers
Barriers and
Barriers andand
Fire Fire Stopping
Stopping
Fire Stopping 213213
213 Functional
Requirements
Functional Requirements 390390
390
2.2. 2.Basements
Basements
Basements 15.1 15.1
15.1 Standard
Standard Boiler
Standard Boiler
- Gas
Boiler - Gas
- Gas 392392
392
Functional
Requirements
Functional Requirements 1414 14 8.8. 8.Windows
Windows
Windowsandand
and Doors
Doors
Doors
2.1 2.1
2.1 General
Requirements
General Requirements 1616 16 Functional
Functional
Requirements
Requirements 216216
216 16.16.
16. Ventilation
Ventilation
Ventilation
2.2 2.2
2.2 Waterproofing
Waterproofing Systems
Systems
Waterproofing Systems 2121 21 8.1 8.1
8.1 uPVC uPVC
uPVC 218218
218 Functional
Functional
Requirements
Requirements 396396
396
8.2 8.2
8.2 TimberTimber
Timber 222222
222 16.1 16.1
16.1 System
System
System -1 - Background
1 -1Background
Background Ventilators
Ventilators and
Ventilators and and Intermittent
Intermittent
Intermittent Extract
Extract
ExtractFans
FansFans 398398
398
3.3. 3.Foundations
Foundations 8.3 8.3
8.3 General
General
Requirements
Requirements 226226
226 16.2 16.2
16.2 System
System
System -2 - Passive
2 -2Passive Stack
Passive Stack Ventilation
Ventilation
Stack Ventilation 401401
401
Foundations
Functional Requirements 16.3 16.3
16.3 System
System
System -3 - Continuous
3 -3Continuous
Continuous Mechanical
Mechanical
Mechanical Extract
Extract
Extract(MEV) (MEV)
(MEV) 404404
404
Functional
Requirements 2828 28
9.9. 9.Stairs
Stairs
Stairs 16.4 16.4
16.4 System
System
System -4 - Continuous
4 -4Continuous
Continuous Mechanical
Mechanical
Mechanical SupplySupply
Supply with with
Heat
with HeatHeat Recovery
Recovery
Recovery 407407
407
3.1 3.1
3.1 Mass
MassMass
FillFill Fill 3030 30
3.2 3.2
3.2 Strip Strip
Strip 3333 33 Functional
Requirements
230
3.3 3.3
3.3 Piles
PilesPiles 3636 36 9.1 9.1
9.1 TimberTimber
Timber 232232
232 17.17.
17. Electrical
Electrical
Electrical Services
Services
Services
3.4 3.4
3.4 RaftRaft
Raft 4141 41 Functional
Functional
Requirements
Requirements 410410
410
3.5 3.5
3.5 Engineered
Engineered
Engineered FillFill Fill 4444 44 10.10.
10. Upper
Upper
Upper Floors
Floors
Floors 17.1 17.1
17.1 Mains
Mains
Mains 412412
412
3.6 3.6
3.6 Vibratory
Vibratory
Vibratory Ground
GroundGround Improvement
Improvement
Improvement 4848 48 Functional
Functional
Requirements
Requirements 236236
236
3.7 3.7
3.7 Trees Trees
Treesand and and
Clay
Clay Clay 5252 52 10.1 10.1
10.1 Suspended
Suspended
Suspended TimberTimber
Timber 238238
238 18.18.
18. Water
Water
Water Services
Services
Services
10.2 10.2
10.2 I-joists
I-joists
I-joists 243243
243 Functional
Functional
Requirements
Requirements 416416
416
4.4. 4.Ground
Ground
Ground Floors
Floors
Floors 10.3 10.3
10.3 Metal Metal
Metal Web
Web Web 248248
248 18.1 18.1
18.1 Cold Cold
Water
Cold Water
Water Supply
Supply to to
Supply to Plumbing,
Plumbing, Boilers,
Boilers,
Plumbing, and
Boilers, and and Appliances
Appliances
Appliances 418418
418
Functional
Requirements
Functional Requirements 5858 58 10.4 10.4
10.4 Floor Floor
Floor Boarding
Boarding
Boardingforfor for
Timber Timber
Timber Upper Upper
UpperFloorsFloors
Floors 254254
254
4.1 4.1
4.1 Suspended
Suspended
SuspendedBeam Beam
Beam and and
Block
and BlockBlock 6060 60 10.5 10.5
10.5 PlasterPlaster
Plaster Boarding
Boarding
Boardingforfor for
Timber
TimberTimber
UpperUpper
UpperFloorsFloors
Floors 256256
256 19.19.
19. Outbuildings
Outbuildings
Outbuildings
4.2 4.2
4.2 Ground
Ground
Ground Supported
Supported
SupportedSlab
SlabSlab 6262 62 10.6 10.6
10.6 Suspended
Suspended
Suspended Beam
BeamBeam
andand and
Block
BlockBlock 258258
258 Functional
Functional
Requirements
Requirements 422422
422
4.3 4.3
4.3 Suspended
Suspended
SuspendedSlab Slab
Slab 6464 64 10.7 10.7
10.7 Concrete
Concrete
Concrete Plank Plank
Plank 262262
262 19.1 19.1
19.1 Garages
Garages
Garages 424424
424
4.4 4.4
4.4 General
Requirements
General Requirementsforfor for Concrete
Concrete Floors
Concrete Floors
Floors 6767 67 10.8 10.8
10.8 GeneralGeneral
Requirements
Requirements forfor for Concrete
Concrete
Concrete UpperUpper
UpperFloorsFloors
Floors 267267
267
4.5 4.5
4.5 Suspended
Suspended
Suspended Timber
Timber
Timber 7272 72 10.9 10.9
10.9 GeneralGeneral
Requirements
Requirements - Cavity
- Cavity
- Cavity Barriers
Barriers
Barriersand
andand
Fire Fire
Fire Stopping
Stopping
Stopping 271271
271
Ground
20.20.
20. Ground
Ground Conditions
Conditions
Conditions
Functional
Functional
Requirements
Requirements 428428
428
Drainage
5.5. 5.Drainage
Drainage 11.11.
11. Roofs
Roofs
Roofs 20.1 20.1
20.1 Site Site Investigation
Investigation
Site Requirements
Requirements
Investigation Requirements 430430
430
Functional
Functional
Requirements
Requirements 7878 78 Functional
Functional
Requirements
Requirements 274274
274
5.1 5.1
5.1 Above Above
Ground
Above Ground
Ground- Foul - Drainage
- FoulFoul Drainage
Drainage 8080 80 11.1 11.1
11.1 Pitched
Pitched
Pitched - Pre-formed
- Pre-formed
- Pre-formed Truss Truss
Truss 276276
276 Appendix
Appendix AA A
Appendix
5.2 5.2
5.2 Above Above
Ground
Above Ground
Ground- Storm- Storm
- Storm Drainage
Drainage
Drainage 8383 83 11.2 11.2
11.2 Pitched
Pitched
Pitched - Traditional
- Traditional CutCut
Cut
- Traditional 290290
290
442
5.3 5.3
5.3 Below Below
Ground
Below Ground
Ground - General
- General
- General Requirements
Requirements
Requirements 8686 86 11.3 11.3
11.3 Concrete
Concrete
Concrete Interlocking
Interlocking
InterlockingTiles Tiles
Tiles 302302
302
A.1A.1
A.1 Finishes
Finishes
Finishes 444444
444
5.4 5.4
5.4 Below Below
Ground
Below Ground
- Foul Foul Drainage
Drainage- to -Mains
to Mains
Mains
- to SewerSewer
Sewer 8989 89 11.4 11.4
11.4 Plain Plain
Tiles
Plain Tiles
Tiles 310310
310
5.5 5.5
5.5 Below Below
Ground
Below Ground
- Foul Foul Drainage
Drainage - Septic
- -to to to Septic
Septic Tank Tank
Tank 9191 91 11.5 11.5
11.5 Slate Slate
Slate 317317
317
5.6 5.6
5.6 Below Below
Ground
Below Ground
- Storm Drainage
Drainage
Drainage- to -Mains
to Mains
Mains
- to SewerSewer
Sewer 9494 94 11.6 11.6
11.6 Flat Flat
Roofs
Flat Roofs
Roofs 325325
325 Appendix
Appendix
AppendixBB B
5.7 5.7
5.7 Below Below
Ground
Below Ground
- Storm Drainage
Drainage
Drainage- to -Soakaway
to Soakaway
Soakaway
- to 9696 96 11.7 11.7
11.7 Green Green
Green Roofs
RoofsRoofs 340340
340 Functional
Functional
Requirements
Requirements 448448
448
11.8 11.8
11.8 Metal Metal
MetalDeck
Deck Deck Roofing
Roofing
Roofing 346346
346 B.1B.1
B.1 Coastal
Coastal Locations
Locations
Coastal Locations 450450
450
External
6.6. 6.External
External Walls
Walls
Walls
Functional
Functional
Requirements
Requirements 9898 98 12.12.
12. Balconies
Balconies
Balconiesandand
and Terraces
Terraces
Terraces Appendix
Appendix
AppendixCC C
6.1 6.1
6.1 Traditional
Traditional Masonry
Traditional Masonry
Masonry CavityCavity
Wall
Cavity -Wall
Wall - Brick
Brick Clad
- Brick CladClad 100100
100 Functional
Functional
Requirements
Requirements 350350
350 Functional
Functional
Requirements
Requirements 454454
454
6.2 6.2
6.2 Traditional
Traditional Masonry
Traditional Masonry
Masonry CavityCavity
Wall
Cavity -Wall
Wall - Rendered
Rendered
- Rendered Masonry
Masonry
MasonryClad Clad
Clad 114114
114 12.1 12.1
12.1 Forming
Forming
Forminga Roofa Roof
a Roof 352352
352 C.1C.1
C.1 Materials,
Materials,
Materials, Products,
Products, and
Products, and and Building
Building
Building Systems
Systems
Systems 456456
456
6.3 6.3
6.3 TimberTimber
TimberFrame Frame
Frame - Brick
- Brick Clad
- Brick Clad
Clad 130130
130 C.2C.2
C.2 Suitability
Suitability of of
Suitability of Products
Products and
Products and and Systems
Systems
Systems 468468
468
6.4 6.4
6.4 TimberTimber
TimberFrame Frame
Frame - Rendered
- Rendered
- Rendered Masonry
Masonry
Masonry Clad Clad
Clad 151151
151 13.13.
13. Chimneys
Chimneys
Chimneysandand
and Flues
Flues
Flues
6.5 6.5
6.5 TimberTimber
TimberFrame Frame
Frame - Directly
- Directly Applied
Applied
- Directly Applied Claddings
Claddings
Claddings 174174
174 Functional
Requirements
368
Appendix
Appendix
AppendixDD D
6.6 6.6
6.6 Light Light
Gauge
Light Gauge
Gauge Steel Steel
Frame
Steel Frame
Frame 177177
177 13.1 13.1
13.1 Masonry
Masonry
Masonry 370370
370 Functional
Functional
Requirements
Requirements 472472
472
6.7 6.7
6.7 Claddings
Claddings
Claddings 191191
191 13.2 13.2
13.2 FluesFlues
- Gas
Flues - Gas
- Gas 373373
373 D.1D.1
D.1 Conversions
Conversions
Conversions and
andand Refurbishments
Refurbishments
Refurbishments - Existing
- Existing Elements
Elements
- Existing Elements 474474
474
D.2D.2
D.2 Conversions
Conversions
Conversions and and Refurbishments
Refurbishments
and - New
Refurbishments - Elements
- New New Elements
Elements Connecting
Connecting
Connecting to to to
Existing
Existing Structures
Structures
Existing Structures 483483
483
D.3D.3
D.3 Conversions
Conversions
Conversions and and Refurbishments
Refurbishments
and - Buildings
- Buildings
Refurbishments - Buildingswith with Historic
Historic
with Significance
Significance
Historic Significance 485485
485
©©
MD©Insurance
MD
© MD Insurance
Insurance
MD Services
Services
Services
Insurance Services Limited
Limited 2020
Limited 2020
2020
Limited 2020 333 3
GENERAL FUNCTIONAL
GENERAL FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE
APPLICABLE IN CASES
IN ALL ALL CASES (EXCEPT
(EXCEPT WHEREWHERE
NOTED)NOTED)
Workmanship 6. Precast structural elements must have structural calculations that prove their adequacy, as endorsed by
1. All workmanship must be within the tolerance requirements set out in this Technical Manual. the manufacturer.
2. All work is to be carried out by a technically competent person in a workmanlike manner. 7. Any engineered beams/posts manufactured off-site must have structural calculations endorsed by the
3. Concreting shall not take place during cold weather periods where the working temperature is below 2 manufacturer.
degrees C or where ground conditions are frozen. 8. Damp proofing works should prevent any external moisture passing into the internal environment of the
building.
Materials 9. Projects consisting of Non-standard/Modern methods of construction must be supported with evidence of
1. All materials should be stored correctly in a manner that will not cause damage or deterioration of the valid independent third party product conformity certification before an offer of Warranty is provided.
product.
2. All materials, products and building systems shall be appropriately tested and approved for their intended Limitations of Functional Requirements
purpose. 1. These Functional Requirements do not and will not apply to create any policy liability for any remedial
3. The structure shall, unless specifically agreed otherwise with the Warranty provider, have a life of not less works carried out by the contractor or otherwise, nor to any materials used in those remedial works (not
than 60 years. Individual components and assemblies, not integral to the structure, may have a lesser applicable to: 'Ground Conditions' guidance).
durability, but not in any circumstances less than 15 years. 2. A more stringent tolerance may be stated within an existing National or European standard, however, for
4. Whilst there is and can be no Policy responsibility and/or liability for a roof covering, window and/or door the purposes of coverage under the relevant policy, where we have identified a tolerance requirement,
performance life of 60 years or less, roof coverings, windows and/or doors shall be designed and this would be deemed suitable to meet our Functional Requirements (not applicable to: 'Ground
constructed so they have an intended life of not less than 15 years. Conditions', 'Foundations' and 'Stairs' guidance).
5. 'Decorative Claddings': Whilst there is and can be no Policy responsibility and/or liability for a 3. The guidance provided in each of the Building Part sections is guidance that provides a suggested
performance life of 60 years or less for a 'cladding' which has a 'decorative function only' (i.e. with the solution to meeting the Functional Requirements. If an alternative solution is selected, then this must still
main substrate wall or roof construction, providing the main weatherproof barrier); a 'decorative' type meet the Functional Requirements.
cladding shall be designed and constructed so they have an intended life of not less than 15 years.
6. Timber should be adequately treated or finished to resist insect attacks and be suitable for the position
used within the structure. All timber treatment should be in accordance with relevant British standards and
Codes of Practice.
7. Timber used in the building to provide support to the structure must be appropriately seasoned to prevent
excessive shrinkage and movement.
8. All materials should be suitable for the relative exposure of the building in accordance with the relevant
British Standards.
Design
1. The design and specifications shall provide a clear indication of the design intent and demonstrate a
satisfactory level of performance.
2. Structural elements outside the parameters of regional Building Regulations must be supported by
structural calculations provided by a suitably qualified expert.
3. The materials, design and construction must meet the relevant regional Building Regulations.
4. Specialist works must be provided and supported by structural calculations completed by a suitably
qualified Engineer where necessary.
5. Reinforced concrete elements must be supported by structural calculations and details produced by a
suitably qualified Structural Engineer.

CONTENTS
1.
Contents
Tolerances
1.1 Tolerances

FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
Additional Functional Requirements Ad

In addition to the general Functional Requirements, the following additional Functional Requirements are also In a
applicable to this specific Building Part section as follows: app
Workmanship Ba
No additional requirements. Ab
Thi
Materials
No additional requirements. Wo
1.
Design
No additional requirements. Ma
No
Limitations of Functional Requirements
1. A more stringent tolerance may be stated within an existing National or European Standard however, for De
the purposes of coverage under the relevant policy, where we have identified a tolerance requirement, 1.
this would be deemed suitable to meet the requirements of this Technical Manual.
2. We only measure tolerances which are identified within this Technical Manual.
3. These Functional Requirements do not and will not apply to create any policy liability for any remedial
works carried out by the contractor or otherwise, nor to any materials used in those remedial works.
Lim
1.
TOLERANCES
© MD Insurance Services Limited 2020 6 6
TOLERANCES
1. 1.1
Tolerances
Tolerances

1.1.11.1.1TOLERANCES:
TOLERANCES: External
External walls
walls
External walls
Brickwork: straightness in section Brickwork: straightness on plan Plumb of wall: overall height Plumb line of wall: storey height
The maximum deviation Max deviation +/-
25mm x 25mm is 10mm in any 2.5m 10mm in any 5m wide
spacing blocks height of wall. Using wall 50mm x 50mm
25mm wide spacing Brick Wall spacing block
blocks, the masonry line There should be a
should be anywhere maximum deviation in
Max 10mm between 15mm and Max 10mm any length of wall up
35mm from the deviation to 5m
Max 35mm reference line
deviation
Max 35mm
Plumb line
Overall Storey
Height height
2.5m 5m
Reference line Reference line
Max 10mm
Min 15mm Min 15mm
Nominal line of
Nominal line wall
of wall
25mm x 25mm
spacing blocks
Straightness in section Brickwork straightness in plan Plumb of wall: overall height Plumb of wall: storey height
The maximum deviation is 10mm in any 2.5m height of wall. Using 25mm There should be a 10mm maximum deviation in any length of wall up There should be a maximum deviation of 20mm in the The maximum deviation is 10mm in a storey height of
wide spacing blocks, the masonry line should be anywhere between 15mm to 5m overall height of a wall approximately 2.5m. Using a 50mm wide spacing
and 35mm from the reference line block, the plumb bob should be between 40mm and
60mm away from the wall
Level of bed joints

Thickness of bed joint Rendered walls (plain)
+/- 10mm deviation +/- 10mm deviation
for walls 5m long for walls 5m long The thickness of an individual bed joint should Unless otherwise specified, apply the render coats to produce as flat a surface as possible, and where appropriate check
Line of bed joint Horizontal not vary from the average of any eight the surface by measuring between the face and any point along a 1.8m straight edge placed against it. The flatness of the
reference line successive joints by more than 5mm. rendered finish will depend upon the accuracy to which the background has been constructed, the thickness of the render
specified and whether grounds and linings are provided and fixed to a true plane. For render less than 13mm thick, a no
Perpendicular alignment tolerance limit is realistic. Significant cracks in the render, or other damage, such as chips and marks greater than 15mm in
diameter, are considered unacceptable.
Vertical alignments of perpend joints should not
deviate from the perpendicular to an extent Fair-faced brickwork and blockwork
which impairs the structural stability of the wall.
Fair-faced masonry should be completed to a reasonable level, ensuring texture, finish and appearance are consistent. A
5m As a result of the manufacturing process, not all reasonable appearance for single leaf 102.5mm brick walls should be to have one finished side only. A neat and tidy finish
bricks are uniform in length. Therefore, not all should be applied to the other side. Shrinkage due to drying out could lead to the fracturing of un-plastered blockwork
A 10mm deviation is suggested for walls 5m long (a pro rata tolerance is applicable for walls less perpend joints will align. However, there should walls, although cracks of up to 3mm are generally normal due to thermal movement and drying shrinkage.
than 5m long), and a 15mm maximum deviation for walls over 5m long. There should be no be no collective displacement of the perpend
recurrent variations in the level of the bed joint line joints in a wall. Tile hanging
The uniform appearance is to be maintained for panels of tile hanging, especially at abutments.
TOLERANCES
© MD Insurance ServicesServices
© MD Insurance Limited 2020
Limited 2020 8 8
TOLERANCES
1.1.21.1.2 TOLERANCES:
TOLERANCES: Steel
Steel frame
frame and
and timberframe
timber frame
Steel frame Timber frame
Steel frame: wall panel erection tolerances Timber frame: wall panel erection tolerances
+/- 10mm
per storey
+/- 5mm
per storey
+/- 15mm over full +/- 10mm +/- 10mm over full
height of wall 3 stories or per storey height of building
+/- 10mm in overall height
of wall 2 stories
Site tolerances Manufacturing tolerances Location
It is essential that the accuracy of setting out foundations and ground beams are checked well in advance of materials Based on the tolerances given in prEN 14732 (dated Sole plates should:
being delivered to site. 17/12/2013) wall panels shall be manufactured to the following
tolerances: · Be levelled to +/-5mm from datum.
For accurate erection of the frame the following tolerances are required at the level of the base of the wall frame: · Not overhang or be set back from the foundation edge by
· Length: +3mm, -3mm. more than 10mm.
· Length of wall frame: +/-10mm in 10m. · Height: +/-2mm. · Be set out within +/-10mm in length and in line within
· Line of wall frame: +/-5mm from outer face of plate. · Diagonals should be equal, acceptable deviation is +/-5mm. +/-5mm, as defined by the timber frame drawings.
· Level of base of wall frame: +/-5mm over complete wall line. · Opening dimensions: 0mm, +5mm. · Diagonals should be within +/-5mm up to 10m, and
+/-10mm for more than 10m.
Metal stud framework Foundations
Wall panel erection tolerances
The wall panel usually consists of a head rail, base rail (sole plate) and possibly horizontal noggins at mid-height, It is important that the tight tolerances for timber frame are
together with vertical wall studs. understood, getting the location and level of the foundation Wall panels should be erected to the following tolerances:
correct is one of the most important parts of the build process.
Vertical tolerances are: The foundations or upstands that support the timber frame · +/-10mm from plumb per storey height.
should be set out to the dimensions noted on the timber frame · +/-10mm from plumb over the full height of the building.
· +/-15mm in overall height of wall 3 storey or; drawings: · +/-3mm from line of sole plate, with maximum +/-5mm
· +/-10mm in overall height of wall 2 storey or; deviation from drawing.
· +/-5mm in storey height (approx. 2.5m). · Within +/-10mm in length, width and line. · +/-5mm from line at mid height of wall panel.
· Diagonals should be within +/-5mm up to 10m, and · Inside faces of adjacent wall panels should be flush.
+/-10mm more than 10m. · Adjacent wall panels should be tightly butted.
· Levelled to +/-5mm from datum.
Limited Limited
2020 2020 9 TOLERANCES
© MD Insurance 9
TOLERANCES
TOLERANCES: Curtain
Curtain walling,
walling, rainscreen
rain screencladding
cladding systems,
systems, internal
internalwalls,
walls,ceilings,
ceilings,and service
and ducts
service ducts
Curtain walling Plum of internal wall Level of ceiling
Tolerances Max 10mm deviation in 2m

Design should allow for the line, level, plumb and plane of the completed
curtain wall to be within the acceptable tolerances of:
· Line: +/-2mm in any one storey height or structural bay width, and
+/-5mm overall.
· Level: +/-2mm of horizontal in any one structural bay width, and +/-5mm
overall.
· Plumb: +/-2mm of vertical in any one structural bay width, and +/-5mm
overall.
· Plane: +/-2mm of the principle plane in any one storey height or
structural bay width, and +/-5mm overall.
Rain screen cladding systems
Design should allow for the line, level, plumb and plane of the completed
curtain wall to be within the acceptable tolerances of:
· Line: +/-2mm in any one storey height or structural bay width, and
+/-5mm overall.
· Level: +/-2mm of horizontal in any one structural bay width, and +/-5mm
overall.
· Plumb: +/-2mm of vertical in any one structural bay width, and +/-5mm
overall.
· Plane: +/-2mm of the principle plane in any one storey height or
structural bay width, and +/-5mm overall.
Internal walls and ceilings

Service ducts
Walls and ceilings (plastered and dry lined) +/- 8mm in 200mm
There should be no sharp differences of more than 4mm in any 300mm
flatness of wall; the maximum deviation is +/-5mm from a 2m straight edge
Plum of wall finish
with equal offsets, horizontally and vertically, for all wall and ceiling surfaces.
· Max 10mm out of plumb in a storey height up to 2.5m, or
· max 20mm out of plumb for a continuous wall height greater than 2.5m
Flatness of internal wall
90°
Max deviation +/- 5mm from 2m Junctions

straight edge with equal offsets,
horizontally and vertically +/- 8mm
5mm If there are changes in the construction materials used due to shrinkage and the differential
movement of materials; small cracks (up to 3mm wide) may become visible in the surface at in 200mm
90°
wall, floor and ceiling junctions.
Max 8mm deviation on
internal finish of service
2m ducts
Flatness of ceiling
5mm
Internal corners
Max Max
5mm 5mm
Non load-bearing timber partitions 2m
Partitions should be robust and form a smooth, stable, plane surface to receive 90° 90°
Max +/- 5mm deviation from 2m straight edge with equal offsets
decoration:
· Supporting members should be accurately spaced, aligned and levelled. Max 15mm
· The tolerance of horizontal straightness of a partition should be +/-10mm deviation using
over a 5m length. 500mm square
· The deviation in vertical alignment of a partition in any storey height should
be +/-10mm.
15mm 15mm
TOLERANCES
Limited 2020 10 10
TOLERANCES
1.1.41.1.4 TOLERANCES:
TOLERANCES: Floors,
Floors, doors,
doors, windowsand
windows andglazing
glazing
Floors Windows
Level For square reveals, a maximum +/-8mm deviation off square is applicable for a reveal up to 200mm deep.
Floors up to 6m across can be a maximum of 4mm out of level per metre, and a maximum of 25mm overall for
larger spans. The effects of normal drying shrinkage on screeded floors could cause some fracturing. Shrinkage of
Distortion in window reveals
timber floors and staircases is a natural occurrence when drying out, which could result in the squeaking of materials
as they move against each other. This again is a natural occurrence, and cannot be eliminated entirely. Window frames up to 1.5m in height - max 6mm out of plumb. Over 1.5m in
height max 10mm out of plumb
Level of floor
Head and sill:
Max out of level tolerance 6mm for openings up to 1.5m wide. 10mm for openings
more than 1.5m wide
Window frame should not be distorted in the opening

Max 4mm out of level per
Floors up to 6m across can be metre, up to 6m across.
a max 4mm out of level per Max 25mm overall in any Max 3mm out of level across reveal (measured from frame)
metre, and a maximum of other case
25mm overall for larger spans
Deflection
Reveals:
For upper floors (intermediate floors), designers and engineers must observe our tolerances requirements in this Max out of plumb tolerance from 6mm for openings up to 1.5m high.
Technical Manual for levelness of floors. Although a joist might be designed using British standards or Eurocodes to 10mm for openings more than 1.5m high
meet permissible deflections; our tolerances requirement will take precedence.
These dimensions are without prejudice to satisfactory performance in terms of
Doors and Windows
weather tightness, exclusion of draughts and fire resistance where appropriate
Doors
Reference of +/-3mm maximum deviation in 1m head and sill. The maximum out of level tolerance is 5mm for
openings up to 1.5m wide, and 8mm for openings more than 1.5m wide.
Gaps and distortion in doors Straightness of external reveals Glazing
Glass must meet the visual assessment criteria of CWCT Technical Note 35 (TN 35). The total number
Max 10mm out of plumb over height of of faults permitted in a glass unit shall be the sum total of those permitted by the relevant BS EN
frame (in one direction only) Standard for each pane of glass incorporated into the unit concerned.
Distortion across doors: Acceptable faults include:

Max 5mm across width Maximum 6mm
Max 9mm in height deviation · Bubbles or blisters.
Straight edge · Hairlines or blobs.
Door frame should not be distorted in the (1m long) · Fine scratches not more than 25mm long.
opening and be fitted in accordance with · Minute particles.
the manufacturers recommendations
Straightness
When assessing the appearance of glass:
Max 5mm gap between door and head of reveal
of jamb (for fire doors, use
· The viewing distance used shall be the furthest stated in any of the BS EN Standards for the glass
manufacturers recommendations). For
types incorporated in the glazed unit. In the event of doubt, the viewing distance shall be 3m.
double doors, the gap at the meeting
· The viewing shall commence at the viewing distance, and shall not be preceded by viewing at a
styles should be max 5mm
closer distance.
· The viewing shall be undertaken in normal daylight conditions, without use of magnification.
The gap between the underside of an · The above does not apply within 6mm of the edge of the pane, where minor scratching is
internal door and unfinished floor acceptable.
(concrete, screed etc.) should be a min
5mm and max 22mm Scratches on doors, windows and frames
These dimensions are without prejudice Factory-finished door and window components should not have conspicuous abrasions or scratches
to satisfactory performance in terms of when viewed from a distance of 0.5m.
weather tightness, exclusion of draughts
and fire resistance where appropriate
· Surface abrasions caused during the building-in process should be removed in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions, which may include polishing out, re-spraying or painting.
· In rooms where there is no daylight, scratches should be viewed in artificial light from fixed wall or
ceiling outlets, and not from portable equipment.
© MD Insurance Services Limited Limited

2020 2020 11 11 TOLERANCES
© MD Insurance Services
TOLERANCES
TOLERANCES: Finishes
Finishes andand externalworks
external works
Finishes
Skirtings
It is possible that there will be joints in skirting's on long walls. When viewed from a distance of 2m in daylight, joints
will need to show a consistent appearance. It is anticipated that there will be some initial shrinkage of the skirting
after occupation of the building.
Finishes and fitted furniture

Fitted furniture with doors and drawers should be aligned vertically, horizontally and in plan. It should also function
as designed by the manufacturer. Adjacent doors and/or drawers with any gaps between them should be consistent.
At the intersection of adjacent worktops, there should not be a visible change in level.
Painted and varnished surfaces

All surfaces should be reasonably smooth as practicably possible when viewed in daylight from a 2 metre distance
and not by shining any artificial light onto the surface. Significant nail holes, cracks and splits should not be seen and
should be filled to reduce their visible appearance. Colour, texture and finish should be reasonably consistent and
any joints are to be filled where necessary.
Knots in timber
Some seeping of resin from knots is a natural occurrence that may cause paintwork discolouration both internally
and externally. The standard will be met providing the Developer finishes the timber in accordance with Functional
Requirements.
External Works
Drives and paths: standing water

Surface variation should not exceed +/-10mm from a 2m straight edge with equal offsets. Some fracturing or
weathering may also appear if using natural stone due to the make-up of the material. This tolerance applies to
principle pathways and driveways to the building that are required to meet the standards of Part M (Access to and
use of buildings).
Drainage system covers

Drainage system covers in hard standing areas should line up neatly with the adjacent ground.
TOLERANCES
Limited 2020 12 12
TOLERANCES
CONTENTS
2.
Contents
Basements
2.1 General Requirements
2.2 Waterproofing Systems


Basement definition Wo
A basement is defined as a storey or storeys of a building that is constructed partially or entirely below ground. 1.
This includes: basement walls, floors and below ground roofs including podium decks.
Workmanship
1. Evidence of certification is required for any work completed by an approved installer.
Materials
No additional requirements.
Design
1. Foundation type and depth must be suitable to resist any movement including that due to the influence of
Ma
nearby trees. No
2. Basements shall be appropriately designed to ensure that they adequately provide a suitable barrier
against contaminants, ground gases and ground water. De
3. Design details of the basement waterproofing techniques must be provided prior to commencement 1.
onsite.
4. All basements must be designed and constructed to meet the requirements of BS 8102: 2009 and
achieve a minimum of Grade 2 standard except where defined in the supporting technical guidance.
5. The basement waterproofing design should be completed by a suitably qualified Waterproofing Specialist.
The Waterproofing Specialist must take responsibility for the design liability of the waterproofing system
and have appropriate professional indemnity cover which covers their business activities. They must also
have an understanding of hydrogeology and soil mechanics and hold a relevant professional qualification
i.e. Certificated Surveyor in Structural Waterproofing (CSSW).
6. The CSSW (or similar) designer should provide a design philosophy which clearly sets out the desired
grade of the environment to be achieved. The design philosophy should clearly set out how the specified
design will provide the required environmental grade based on the specific hydrology and ground
conditions of the site.
Limitations of Functional Requirements Lim

1. The Functional Requirements are limited by the recommendations applied in this specific Building Part 1.
guidance.
BASEMENTS
BASEMENTS
2. 2.1
Basements

2.1.1
2.1.1 GENERALREQUIREMENTS
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Definition
Where relying on the use of waterproofing product manufacturer 'standard details', they typically disclaim design responsibility, so it is incumbent on the
For the purposes of this guidance, a basement is defined as a storey or storeys of a building that is constructed partially or entirely below ground. Waterproofing Design Specialist to ensure that such details are correct and appropriate for the site and structure or offer suitable variation.
The early involvement of a Waterproofing Designer is an important consideration because the waterproofing design typically has an influence on
Foundations elements of the structural and/or architectural design. Early involvement allows the waterproofing to be duly considered in association with these other
aspects and prevents situations where design fees are increased as a result of necessary redesign, or where waterproofing is compromised by working
All basement foundation structures should be supported by design and structural calculations from a structurally qualified consultant. within the constraints of an ill-considered structure relative to achieving the required standard of environment.
Walls below ground Site and risk assessment

The degree of water present within the ground and the propensity for waterlogging to occur over the lifetime of a structure is a principal driver in
Bricks and blocks below ground assessing risk and the degree of waterproofing required. Simplistically, if a basement is constructed into a permanent high water table then the degree of
· All basement structures should be supported by design and structural calculations from a structurally qualified consultant. protection will necessarily be greater than a similar structure constructed into a generally dry site.
· The selected bricks should be appropriately durable against saturation in accordance with EN 771-1 and PD 6697.
· Mortars below DPC are exposed to higher saturation and therefore require a higher durability. · An assessment of a site must be based on the results of the site investigation and other site-specific factors.
· Seasonal variations in the water table must be accounted for unless long-term monitoring is undertaken.
For further details on brick, blockwork and mortar classifications for below DPC, please refer to 'Appendix C - Materials, Products, and Building · Where standing water levels are not noted during a pre-start site investigation, the drainage characteristics of the ground must receive particular
Systems' for suitable brick and blockwork classifications. attention.
· Soils with low permeability represent a risk of waterlogging or encouraging a 'perched water table', where water stands temporarily or permanently
If there are sulphates in the ground and/or there is ground water present, confirmation by the manufacturer that the brick or block is suitable for use within the ground against a structure, and arguably this affects more properties with basements versus the true water table level.
below ground should be provided.
Other factors such as topography and orientation, may have an impact on the propensity for pressure to come to bear and should also receive
General Requirements consideration. Further guidance on the drainage characteristics associated with different types of ground is included within the Basement Information
Centre publication Basements: Waterproofing - General Guidance to BS 8102: 2009.
This section provides guidance on the requirements associated with the design and construction of basements and other below ground structures.
Principally, this concerns the process by which the risk of ground water penetration is appraised and addressed so that problems associated with Ground gases and contaminants must also be considered within the risk assessment.
penetration do not occur while consideration is also given to economic construction.
Note:
This process and rationale is primarily detailed within BS 8102 (2009) Code of Practice for protection of below ground structures against water from the 1. While the site investigation forms part of what guides the waterproofing design, an equally important consideration is the intended use of the space
ground (and other associated design guides). However, further practical guidance on this and compliance with Warranty requirements is included and implicit consequences in the event that water penetration occurs. For example, in properties where the consequences of water penetration
herein. would be severe, such as in habitable space, suitably low-risk methods must be provided.
2. Whilst in theory it could be assumed that based upon a site investigation, the risk of water pressure ever occurring is low. BS 8102 advises that
Limitations of guidance consideration is given to the effects of climate change and burst water mains and sewers, as well as stating that it should be assumed that there is
· This document is not intended as a standalone design guide and does not include full details of what must be considered to comply with BS 8102. risk of waterlogging “even where site examination indicated dry conditions”.
Please see the 'Bibliography' at the end of BS 8102:2009 for details of other associated design guides.
· It must also be noted that structural waterproofing design and geotechnical investigations are specialist fields, and while general guidance is In summary:
provided, advice must be sought from suitably experienced parties. An appropriate structural design must be undertaken by a Chartered Structural
Engineer. · The site investigation guides the design, but it should never be assumed that some degree of water pressure will not occur.
· If no site investigation has been undertaken or there is reasonable doubt as to ground water conditions, hydrostatic water pressure to the full height
of the below ground structure must be assumed at some point in the life of the structure.
General principle of waterproofing design
· The Warranty Surveyor may request a copy of the Site Investigation Report, Designer's and associated design rationale.
The approach detailed within BS 8102 involves assessment of a given site to determine the characteristics that influence risk. With the benefit of
knowledge gained through this investigation and assessment, suitable designs for dealing with ground water, gases and contaminants can then be
devised and constructed. Water-resisting design
The principle of this is to consider and design for the pressures that the structure and waterproofing must resist based upon the site investigation and risk
assessment detailed above. However, it also concerns the means by which the degree of water in the ground can be influenced by design.
Design responsibility
· Production of a suitable design is one of the most important aspects of achieving a successful outcome, where the required standard of
environment is created within the basement space and maintained in the long term. Structural resistance
· A common assumption in waterproofing is that workmanship is the most 'critical factor' and whilst this is undeniably important, the highest The ability of the structure to provide resistance to the penetration of water has a bearing upon all forms of waterproofing. Retaining walls in plain or
standards of workmanship will not make-up for inadequate design; hence the correct design is the first step in achieving the desired outcome. reinforced masonry provide comparatively little resistance to the penetration of water under pressure because of the crack pattern associated with the
· BS 8102 includes a section on the 'design team', which states that the advice of a Geotechnical Specialist be sought for assessment of the degree of joints (mortar beds) present.
geology and hydrogeology, and that a Waterproofing Specialist be included as part of the design team from the earliest stages. This is so that an
integrated and practical waterproofing solution is created. The degree of water excluded by concrete elements (walls and slab) is influenced by the nature of the design and construction. While concrete itself is
· The Waterproofing Specialist must take responsibility for the design liability of the waterproofing and have appropriate professional indemnity relatively impermeable, the degree to which water is excluded will be greatly influenced by crack sizes and the detailing of construction joints and service
cover which covers their business activities. They must also have an understanding of hydrogeology and soil mechanics and hold a relevant penetrations.
professional qualification i.e. Certificated Surveyor in Structural Waterproofing (CSSW) or similar.
· Designers must have ongoing involvement during the build, maintaining good communication with site management and providing supervision and Defects and remedial measures
guidance wherever necessary. Within BS 8102, designers are advised to consider the probability that systems may not be installed perfectly and that defects may occur as a result of
this, or defects may be present in the supplied materials.
Note: The need for a dedicated Waterproofing Specialist within the design team is intended to reduce the incidence of issues where systems are
designed without following the advice and considerations detailed within BS 8102 and associated design guides. Designing on the assumption that a system will not be totally perfect or free of defects necessitates that consideration is given to the feasibility of
repairing those defects, or ensuring that they are of no consequence i.e. where systems are not accessible for repair. Different structures, waterproofing
Such scenarios may occur where Project Designers take on the role of Waterproofing Designer without sufficient reference to the stated guides, systems and sites have a bearing upon this consideration. For Warranty purposes a Grade 3 environment basement must be designed so that the
commonly relying on standard design details and without considering all appropriate factors. Please refer to BS 8102 for a list of requirements that a consideration of reparability is essential.
designer must meet in order to fulfil the Waterproofing Designer role which includes carrying professional indemnity insurance cover appropriate to the
project. Strategies for repair of a Grade 1 or 2 environment basement must be considered as part of the design process. Further commentary is provided within
each of the specific system type sections.
The detail of an appropriate repair strategy may be requested by the Warranty Surveyor in relation to a given waterproofing design.
BASEMENTS
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 16
16
BASEMENTS
2.1.22.1.2 GENERAL
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
REQUIREMENTS: Formsofofwaterproofing
Forms waterproofing
Forms of waterproofing
BS 8102 defines three forms of waterproofing protection, Type A barrier protection (commonly referred to as 'tanking'), Type
B, structurally integral protection and Type C drained protection.
These drawing sheets discuss type A, B, and C protection.
Example of combined waterproofing A, B, and C
Reinforced concrete designed and constructed Cavity membrane fixed to retaining wall
to support vertical and lateral loads and to resist via sealed plugs
penetration of water
Geo-drainage membrane provides continuous Dry lining fixed over membrane linings via
drainage space against the external tanking to waterproof sealing plugs, or installed
reduce hydrostatic pressure. Appropriate independently
protection must be included over to protect
during backfilling
Water-stops included at all construction
Externally applied tanking barrier joints to protect this vulnerable position
External land drain positioned below slab level

and drained to a reliable outlet. Rodding points Accessible & maintainable drainage
included to facilitate maintenance channel concealed within floor
construction, linked to sump system
Land drain should be positioned below the level
of the horizontal waterproofing
Cavity membrane concealed within floor
construction
Sump pump system within concrete

chamber or cast in sump liner
45° line of foundation loading

not to be undermined by land
drain

2020 2020 17 17 BASEMENTS
BASEMENTS
2.1.3
2.1.3 GENERALREQUIREMENTS:
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: Internal
Internalenvironment
environment
Intended use and required standard of environment The degree of seepage or dampness (water tightness) that can be tolerated for this particular end use needs to be
established and agreed with all interested parties, including the Warranty Surveyor at the design stage. To assist with
Usage dictates the required 'grade' of environment, i.e. how 'dry' a given basement space must be in order to be suitable for quantifying an acceptable level of moisture ingress, the following definitions of water tightness are provided.
a given usage.
· Damp patch: When touched, a damp patch may leave a slight film of moisture on the hand, but no droplets of water or
The designer must therefore consider how this will be achieved in a particular site and structure. BS 8102: 2009 Table 2 greater degrees of wetness are left on the hand. On a concrete surface a damp patch is discernible from a darkening of
provides three definitions of environmental grades (Grades 1, 2 and 3) as shown in the table below: the colour of the concrete.
· Beading of water: Beading of water is the state in which individual droplets of water (held by surface tension effects)
form on the surface of the wall and adhere to the wall. The water beads do not coalesce and do not flow.
· Weeping of water (seepage): Weeping of water is the state in which droplets of water form on the surface of the wall
Grade Example of use of structure Performance level and coalesce with other droplets. The coalesced water does not remain stationary on the wall surface, but instead flows
down the wall.
Car parking, plantrooms (excluding electrical Some seepage and damp areas tolerable,
1 These are taken from the publication 'Specification for piling and embedded retaining walls'.
equipment), workshops. dependent on intended use.
No water penetration acceptable. Section 2.2.3 of CIRIA Report 139 provides guidance on quantifying the required internal environment and places limits on
Plant rooms and workshops requiring a drier
2 Damp areas tolerable; ventilation might be Grade 1 basements:
environment (than Grade 1), storage areas.
required.
It identifies:
No water penetration acceptable.
Ventilated residential and commercial areas
3 Ventilation, dehumidification or air conditioning
including offices, restaurants, leisure centres. · The functioning of mechanical plant and electrical switchgear is normally unaffected by seepage through walls and
necessary, appropriate to the intended use.
floors, provided the water does not impinge directly onto the equipment. However, a wet floor can be hazard to
maintenance staff as well as increase the rate of corrosion of steel casings and frames in contact with it. Generally, a
Grades of waterproofing protection raised working area may be desirable and all equipment should be mounted on plinths.
· Atmospheric moisture is unlikely to affect mechanical plant unless it is continually at such a level as to cause an
unreasonable fast rate of corrosion. One exception is that air compressors need to be fitted with air-driers if they are to
· For Warranty purposes we require all basements to be designed and constructed to a minimum of Grade 2, with Grade
operate in constantly damp conditions. Ferrous pipes, conduits, wall brackets and their fixings etc. will corrode if
3 being necessary for occupied space. An exception to this is a basement used solely for underground car parking,
unprotected.
where a Grade 1 could be accepted. See 'Underground car parking' below for specific guidance.
· Damp air may cause electrical installations to malfunction. Permanently damp conditions may encourage biological
degradation of plastic insulation. Ventilation of the plant space is therefore important.
· Habitable space is Grade 3 where water penetration is unacceptable. Appropriately designed environmental controls
· Water ingress to underground car parks must similarly be controlled. Cars are likely to introduce significant amounts of
such as vapour barriers, insulation, heating, ventilation and dehumidification must be included to control vapour,
water on wet days, which should be drained away. There is also the danger of corrosion and discoloration of paintwork
introduced via occupation sufficiently thereby preventing problems of condensation.
on the cars due to seepage through the ceiling slab (podium deck).
· An example usage for Grade 2 includes store rooms and again, water penetration is not acceptable however, heating
Summary of environmental parameters:
and ventilation is not necessarily required, albeit that some degree of ventilation is recommended even in basic storage
space, which may otherwise suffer condensation-related dampness.
· Relative humidity (RH): Items stored in such basements should not normally be unduly affected by high relative
humidity. Ventilation provision draws air directly from the atmosphere and conditions equivalent to prevailing
Underground car parking atmosphere, RH greater than 65% (normally UK external range), are therefore acceptable.
· Temperature: Grade 1 basement would not normally be heated.
In the case of underground car parking with associated underground refuse stores and cycle stores; some seepage, · Dampness: The requirements for dampness will depend on whether the basement is to be decorated in any way and
dampness or condensation as well as standing water (from vehicles) is to be expected. the sensitivity of any electrical equipment to be installed (i.e. light fittings, switches, cable runs/conduits etc.). If the
basement is not to be decorated, visible damp patches may be tolerated. A higher waterproofing specification may be
For this type of use, a design by water proofing design specialist to a BS 8102 Grade 1 standard could be accepted. For required if the walls are to be painted etc. It is normally expected that the construction materials will not be wetter than
plant rooms (that do not house items of plant that directly service the building), lifts/escalators, access stairs and lobbies that 85% RH.
are associated within an underground car park, a Grade 2 standard is the minimum grade to be expected. A Grade 2 · Wetness: Minor seepage would be acceptable through the walls and joints if the basement is not to be decorated.
standard is the minimum grade to be expected for plant rooms (that do not house items of plant that directly service the · The need for drainage within the basement, i.e. channels along perimeter walls and across car parking areas, should
building), lifts/escalators, access stairs and lobbies that are associated within an underground car park. also be determined, together with requirements for ventilation.
· Where necessary, consideration should also be given to whether additional protection measures are required to plant
and equipment, electrical switchgear, support brackets etc.
Once the most appropriate level of water tightness has been determined, the Waterproofing Specialist should factor this into
his design and specify a suitable waterproofing system that will achieve the required level of performance. Full design details
and justification of the proposed method of waterproofing must be submitted and approved by the Warranty Surveyor prior to
work commencing on site.
BASEMENTS
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 18
18
BASEMENTS
2.1.42.1.4 GENERAL
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
REQUIREMENTS: Sub-surfacedrainage
Sub-surface drainage
Land Drain Positioning & External Drainage Exclusion of surface water
Surfaces external of the basement structure at ground level can act to limit or attenuate penetration into vulnerable
positions, i.e. the more permeable excavated and backfilled ground directly around the basement structure. The
inclusion of surface and cut-off drains which remove standing water away from the vulnerable areas are also of
benefit.
Sub-surface drainage
When the land drain is positioned
The use of land drainage can act to remove water from around the structure, thus alleviating pressure and should be
above top of slab level, water will
considered in all cases to reduce the risk of water ingress where practical.
stand within the excavation below
the level of the drain before
However, the use of land drainage might not be viable on all sites, examples being:
accessing the drain. This can
result in hydrostatic pressure
· Where there is no available location to discharge collected ground water.
upon the structure and associated
· Where high water tables and permeable ground conditions make it impractical to sufficiently remove the
waterproofing. This design
quantities of water present.
assumes perfect workmanship,
· Restrictions on the site curtilage due adjacent buildings close to or on the site boundary.
and is not therefore acceptable
· Draw down, i.e. affecting the stability of other structures by the introduction of a land drain.
unless viable proven repair
strategies are in place to address
Depending on the required 'environment', if land drainage is not feasible, a combination of at least two systems in
penetration through potential
order to mitigate the risk of water ingress will need to be adopted. The Waterproofing Specialist will be required to
defects
provide a solution specific to the site conditions.
Land drains should be included Notwithstanding such conditions, the provision of effective land drains is often an economic means of greatly
below the level of the horizontal reducing risk and must be included where viable.
waterproofing and this position
would therefore be acceptable The following considerations apply:
in the event of a barrier system
being included internally · Perforated land drains must be surrounded in clean graded stone and wrapped in a suitable geo-textile filter
fabric to reduce the risk of clogging. This is particularly important in fine granular and clay soils where land
Land drain below slab level drains are susceptible to clogging.
(not within 45 degree zone of · Rodding points must be included (ideally at changes in direction) to facilitate maintenance, which will allow the
loading), preventing hydrostatic system to function in the long term (this particularly applies to land drains where there is no viable access for
groundwater pressure from repair). This maintenance should be undertaken at suitable intervals (annually as a minimum), with the detail of
bearing upon structure and this being written into the documentation passed to homeowners.
waterproofing · Land drains must be positioned at a low enough position to prevent pressure from bearing upon the structure
and waterproofing.
45° line of foundation loading, not
· The use of geo-drainage membranes applied to the external face of a retaining wall can provide a continuous
Note: structural slab includes drainage space external of the structure, which assists in encouraging water to drain down to the level of the
to be undermined by land drain
'toe' detail, however the same land drains without pressuring the structure.
applies for structures where · Land drains must link to a reliable point of discharge. Where sump pump systems are employed, the
this is not included implications of power cuts should be considered in that land drains may in such scenarios not function as
intended. The effectiveness of battery back-up systems, where employed in sumps servicing land drains,
should be considered in relation to assessment of the likely degree of ground water.
· Land drains must not be directly linked to soakaways by gravity, unless it is not possible for water to surcharge,
· Where land drains are included this should be in association with a permeable stone backfill compacted in layers, which also encourages i.e. where the top of the soakaway is below the level of the actual land drains.
water to drain down to the level of the land drains without perching and pressuring the structure.
· The use of maintainable land drains is a necessity when employed in association with some forms of inaccessible/external tanking
systems, i.e. where the structure itself provides little resistance. In such cases if it is not feasible to include reliable land drains, alternative
methods of waterproofing must be used.
The Warranty Surveyor is to be supplied with design details where external land drainage is included.

2020 2020 19 19 BASEMENTS
BASEMENTS
2. 2.2
Waterproofing Systems
Basements

2.2.12.2.1 WATERPROOFING
WATERPROOFING SYSTEMS:Type
SYSTEMS: TypeAA-- Barrier
Barrier protection
protection
Combined protection Commentary on Type A barrier protection
This guidance is for the protection Type A tanked (barrier) protection. A combination of forms of waterproofing may need to · Whilst BS 8102 advises that 'reparability' must be considered, the use of external adhesive membrane tanking systems on
be employed to substantially lower the risk, and may be necessary where the consequences of failure are particularly great, permeable constructions is precluded, unless employed in association with long-term strategies for preventing ground
and/or where difficult site conditions result in an unacceptably high risk when employing a single system. water from pressuring, e.g. serviceable land drains.
· External systems have a greater implication, in that accessibility for repair is typically impractical post-construction and
Type A barrier protection where combined with relatively permeable wall constructions, makes it difficult to confidently determine the point of a
defect externally, because water can track within the wall construction to show itself internally at a position not local to the
external defect.
This form of waterproofing relies on the inclusion of a physical barrier material applied on or within the structure, often
· Internal systems have the benefit of greater accessibility meaning that repair is more feasible. Where this system is
where the structure itself provides little resistance to the penetration of water.
chosen, the strength of the substrate, its surface preparation and the bond of the waterproofing system are critical
considerations and need to be properly considered by the waterproofing specialist.
A variety of considerations apply:
· The correct use of land drains assists to minimise the potential for hydrostatic pressure coming to bear on to the structure.
· Risk can be lessened by using a 'fully bonded' tanking system, where the bond is such that water cannot track along
· Suitability of the substrate, primarily applicable where tanking products are applied internally in that the bond between
between the structure and tanking product, in association with a structure of lesser permeability which would allow
the product and the substrate on which it is applied, must be sufficient to resist hydrostatic ground water pressure.
localised repair to be undertaken.
· The requirement for preparation of substrates to accept tanking mediums.
· Product guarantees, quality assurance schemes and product certification does not negate the Functional Requirement
· Movement which in rigid tanking systems may encourage cracking through which water may penetrate, where
that a waterproofing specialist is required to take responsibility for the design liability of the waterproofing.
pressure comes to bear.
· Loading, where hydrostatic pressure is applied to the structure as a result of exclusion via the tanking medium, i.e.
structures must be designed to resist loads applied to them. Other considerations
· Continuity, in that systems must in virtually all cases be 'continuous'. A gap in a barrier system represents a point at
which water under pressure can penetrate. Ground gases and contaminants
· 'Buildability', namely whereby sheet membrane products are proposed with the consideration being the practicality of
wrapping a flat sheet around complex three dimensional shapes, such as external corners and beneath raft slab Aggressive ground conditions may require the inclusion of a suitable ground barrier to protect the structure appropriately.
thickened toe details. Specialist advice must be sought in respect of dealing with ground gases, and designers are advised to check current
standards at the time of construction for suitable guidance.
Type A barrier protection Existing structures

Waterproofing existing structures differs from new construction in that designers must work within the confines of the existing
Geo-drainage membrane provides structure. However, many of the same considerations apply in that the required standard of environment appropriate to usage
continuous drainage space against the Externally applied tanking barrier
external tanking. Appropriate protection must be created and maintained in the long term.
must be included over to protect during Installation of external tanking, which
backfilling typically precludes access for repair,
necessitates the inclusion of reliable Interface with external wall damp proof courses
External land drain positioned below slab land drainage to prevent build up of
level and drained to reliable outlet to hydrostatic groundwater pressure and Whichever type of waterproofing system is deemed appropriate, there must be a continuation provided with the horizontal
prevent hydrostatic pressure bearing upon potential penetration
damp proof courses above ground level. Waterproofing materials used must be compatible with the damp proof course
structure. Rodding points included to
facilitate maintenance Alternatively, tanking applied to the components and adequately lapped and bonded.
internal face allows greater access for
Land drain should be positioned below the repair but necessitates formation of a
level of the horizontal waterproofing and suitably strong bond to adequately The CSSW designer should take responsibility for this junction as part of the tanking design.
hence is shown here below slab level, this resist potential hydrostatic pressure
being below the level of the external
horizontal tanking barrier
45° line of foundation Type A assumes no or limited resistance to penetration

loading, not to be provided by structure. However, risk is reduced where
undermined by employing structures with greater or total water
land drain. resistance (combined protection).

2020 2020 21 21 BASEMENTS
BASEMENTS
2.2.2
2.2.2 WATERPROOFING SYSTEMS:
WATERPROOFING SYSTEMS:Type
TypeB B- Structurally integral
- Structurally protection
integral protection
Combined protection Commentary on Type B protection
This guidance is for the protection Type B structurally integral protection. A combination of forms of waterproofing may · With regard to appraisal of repair, this method has a benefit in that; the point of penetration is typically the point of the
need to be employed to substantially lower the risk, and may be necessary where the consequences of failure are
defect or pathway through which water penetration occurs. Coupled with the impermeable nature of the structure
particularly great and/or where difficult site conditions result in an unacceptably high risk when employing a single system.
generally, this allows localised repair to be undertaken via resin injection, grouting and associated repair methods.
Type B structurally integral protection · The main consideration is locating the point of any penetration, and it is therefore beneficial where reasonable access
to the concrete structure remains viable.
Type B also relies on the exclusion of water, but employs the structure itself as opposed to barrier products included on or · Product guarantees, quality assurance schemes and product certification does not negate the Functional Requirement
within it. In the main, as shown in the image below Type B Structurally Integral Protection is formed using reinforced that a waterproofing specialist is required to take responsibility for the design liability of the waterproofing.
concrete however, this may take several forms.
Other considerations
Type B structurally integral
protection Ground gases and contaminants
Reinforced concrete designed Aggressive ground conditions may require the inclusion of a suitable ground barrier to protect the structure appropriately.
A land drain is not specifically required with a and constructed to resist Specialist advice must be sought in respect of dealing with ground gases, and designers are advised to check current
single Type B protection, however the inclusion penetration of water
of land drainage will further reduce risk if standards at the time of construction for suitable guidance.
practical to include. Degree of resistance
dependent on concrete and Existing structures
Where a Type B protection is used as part of a structural design, and quality of Waterproofing existing structures differs from new construction, in that designers must work within the confines of the
combined system (AB, BC, or ABC), the CSSW
workmanship in construction existing structure. However, many of the same considerations apply in that the required standard of environment
designer should consider the provision of a land
drain. appropriate to usage must be created and maintained in the long term.
Water-stops included at all
construction joints to protect
this vulnerable position Interface with external wall damp proof courses
Whichever type of water proofing system is deemed appropriate, there must be a continuation provided with the horizontal
damp proof courses above ground level. Water proofing materials used must be compatible with the damp proof course
components and adequately lapped and bonded.
The CSSW designer should take responsibility for this junction as part of the tanking design.
45° line of foundation

loading, not to be
undermined by land
drain
Concrete without additives and including typical levels of steel reinforcement (with cracking <0.3mm); whilst providing good
resistance to the penetration of water, will allow seepage given hydrostatic pressure, and as such is not suitable in isolation
unless forming basic (non-habitable, non-storage) standards of environment. Further guidance can be found on controlling
crack widths in BS EN 1992-3: 2006 and CIRIA publication C:660.
As with any structure that aims to entirely block out water, this must be free of defects which would otherwise allow water to
penetrate. In achieving this, the following must be considered:
· Structural design and specification of materials (based in part on-site assessment).

· Water stop detailing at construction joints.
· Service penetration detailing.
· Appropriate specialist site supervision to ensure high standards of workmanship.
· Good placement and compaction.
· Curing.
Particular consideration must be given to the formation of construction joint details, which form a typical weak point in Type
B structures. Furthermore, specialist supervision is required on site during construction.
Systems which function by excluding water may not be tested until the ground water pressure comes to bear. Therefore, it
is advantageous where external water pressure comes to bear prior to completion, that any areas of penetration can be
remedied during construction.
BASEMENTS
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 22
22
BASEMENTS
2.2.3
2.2.3 WATERPROOFING SYSTEMS:Type
WATERPROOFING SYSTEMS: TypeCC- Drained
- Drained Protection
Protection
Combined protection Type C drained protection
This guidance is for Type C drained protection. A combination of forms of waterproofing may need to be employed to substantially lower the risk, and may be Dry lining fixed over membrane linings
necessary where the consequences of failure are particularly great and/or where difficult site conditions result in an unacceptably high risk when employing a single via plugs, or installed independently
system.
Cavity membrane fixed to retaining wall
Type C drained protection via sealed plugs
Example of reinforced masonry wall
This method of waterproofing differs from Type A and Type B as the structure is employed to limit penetration while an internal drainage system collects and removes construction (minimal integral
any seepage water.
Cavity membrane concealed within
resistance to penetration of water). floor construction
Greater resistance provided by
The Structure reinforced concrete
· The 'structure' provides the primary resistance to ground water pressure. A Type C drainage system is designed to mitigate the risk by removing any minor Sump pump system within concrete
water seepage through the structure and in doing so maintains the required internal environment. chamber or cast in sump liner.
· An assessment of the structure is required to ensure it provides the primary level of water resistance by the Waterproofing Specialist. Accessible & maintainable drainage
Systems must include suitable battery
channel concealed within floor back-up protection in habitable
Internal drainage construction, linked to sump system accommodation
The internal drainage system comprises of three elements:
· A drainage channel detail recessed into the floor construction.
· A means of water discharge, which in a basement fully below ground, requires a sump pump system or in a sloping site may be via gravity.
· Vapour barrier drainage membranes included above or internal of the drainage system which isolate the internal environment from the damp substrates behind.
Whilst the drainage channel is intended only to deal with minor seepage water and could alternatively be linked into deeper fixed drains to drain out via gravity, the
risks associated with the surcharge of external drains are high and this practice is excluded from Warranty cover.
Drained protection systems are reliant on their ability to remove seepage water and so the mechanism by which water is removed requires careful consideration. The
extent of seepage water penetration also has a bearing on the capacity required, with the degree of penetration being influenced by the permeability of the structure
and the ground water conditions externally.
Notwithstanding the above, the capacity of such systems to remove water must be adequate to deal with a worst-case scenario and should be engineered with this in
mind to provide a suitably low-risk system.
· Sump pump systems must include mechanical redundancy (dual mains powered pumps) to protect against pump failure and also sufficient battery back-up Land drainage is not a specific requirement with this method of waterproofing; however it
protection to protect in the event of a power cut. acts to reduce risk further if practical to include
· Each pump within a given system should have independent direct spur RCD/power supply so that in the event of an issue with a pump the others will still have
power. Direct spur is advised to prevent accidental turning off by homeowners. Land drainage may be advisable depending on the permeability of the structure, in
· A Commissioning certificate for the pump system should be provided upon completion. association with the nature of the ground conditions, which must be assessed as part of the
· Drainage systems typically discharge into surface water gullies at external ground floor level, and an overflow detail must be formed at the point of discharge to design process
allow water to spill out externally in the event of drains blocking or surcharging.
· Systems can drain by gravity to low ground externally, i.e. where properties are part retaining and constructed into sloping sites. As with pumped systems, if External land drain positioned at or below slab level and drained to reliable outlet to prevent
connecting to mains drains, an overflow detail must be employed to allow water to spill externally in the event of an issue. or limit hydrostatic pressure bearing upon structure. Rodding points included to facilitate
· Internal drained protection systems must include drainage channels local to the external wall floor junctions which facilitates maintenance and allows systems to maintenance
function and protect in the long term. Where larger footprints are involved, cross floor channels must be included, ideally local to construction joints where the
structure is more vulnerable to ground water penetration. Land drain positioned at the side of the slab remains below the level of internal slab
membrane
Maintenance
Type C Systems must be maintained annually as a minimum. The detail of this requirement must be included in the documentation provided to the homeowner who Commentary to Type C
will then be responsible for ongoing operation and maintenance of the system. The ongoing maintenance should include:
· The service records of the maintenance of the system. In consideration of the repair of defects, the inclusion of drained protection systems internally, generally ensures that systems can be
· Accessibility to drainage channels and sumps are available at all times. accessed for localised repair. However, this may be lessened where systems are sandwiched within the structure, i.e. within cavities.
· That the drainage channels and sumps are checked at the service intervals to ensure they are clear and free of any free lime build up. · Part of the underlying rationale of drained protection is that water is removed continuously, so that it does not collect and removes
· Ensure that the electrical supply, battery back-up and alarm systems are fully operational at all times. pressure upon membrane linings installed over the drainage. If water does not place pressure upon such membranes, then the incidence
of any defects within them is generally of no consequence, and so maintaining the efficiency of the drainage in the long term ensures that
Free lime such defects are negated.
· Product guarantees, quality assurance schemes and product certification does not negate the Functional Requirement that a
Water moving over and through new concrete walls and floors leaches free lime within the early life of the structure, and suitable treatments should be applied to waterproofing specialist is required to take responsibility for the design liability of the waterproofing.
concrete to minimise this.
· The Waterproofing Specialist should provide a specification of the treatments to be used appropriate for the particular construction and made available to the
Other considerations
Warranty Surveyor if requested.
· Where basements are formed under existing buildings in conjunction with new under pinning works; the choice of dry packing should be carefully specified and
a waterproof expanding type mortar is recommended to help avoid free lime occurrences. Ground gases and contaminants
· Substrates should be clean and free of loose or friable materials prior to the application of membrane linings. Aggressive ground conditions may require the inclusion of a suitable ground barrier to protect the structure appropriately. Specialist advice
must be sought in respect of dealing with ground gases, and designers are advised to check current standards at the time of construction for
General suitable guidance.
· Flood testing of a system should be undertaken during construction to check efficiency and that water flows freely to the discharge point. Testing in this manner Existing structures
to prove that the system functions as intended, is a key benefit of this method of waterproofing and must be part of the process. Waterproofing existing structures differs from new construction in that designers must work within the confines of the existing structure.
· Systems creating a habitable space require the inclusion of vapour barrier drainage membranes within the wall and floor construction. However, many of the same considerations apply in that the required standard of environment appropriate to usage must be created and
· Where elements of the drained protection system are included within cavities, the cavities must be kept clear of mortar snots and debris.
maintained in the long term.
· Continuity of the structure must be considered because the resistance to water provided by a given structure is reduced by apertures through which water can
freely move. Examples could include holes present within existing buildings, or in new construction where land drains are linked to sump pump systems, with
the sumps being installed internal of the retaining shell, e.g. in light wells, thus providing a pathway for water to enter. Interface with external wall damp proof courses
· Temporary 110v pumps should be included during construction to address water penetration as necessary; 240v systems should be installed and Whichever type of waterproofing system is deemed appropriate, there must be a continuation provided with the horizontal damp proof courses
commissioned as soon as viable once the 240v supply is installed. above ground level. Waterproofing materials used must be compatible with the damp proof course components and adequately lapped and
· Systems must not link directly by gravity to soakaways where any of the previously stated scenarios occur, and because of the danger of backflow of water bonded.
through the pipes or waterlogging of the local ground above slab/DPM level. However, where such conditions are not present, sump pump systems may be
employed to lift water up to ground level externally, discharging into gullies linked to soakaways. This detail should be designed by the Waterproofing Specialist. The CSSW designer should take responsibility for this junction as part of the tanking design.
© MD Insurance Services Limited 2020 23 BASEMENTS

BASEMENTS
2.2.4
WATERPROOFING SYSTEMS:Typical
Typicalexample
exampleof of
a combined system
a combined - Type
system A+B A+B
- Type
Externally applied tanking barrier.
Installation of external tanking, which

typically precludes access for repair,
necessitates the inclusion of reliable land
drainage to prevent build up of
hydrostatic groundwater pressure and
potential penetration
Alternatively, tanking applied to the

internal face allows greater access for
repair but necessitates formation of a
suitably strong bond to adequately resist
potential hydrostatic pressure
Reinforced concrete
designed and constructed
Geo-drainage membrane provides to resist penetration of
continuous drainage space against the water
external tanking. Appropriate protection
must be included to protect during
Degree of resistance
backfilling dependent on concrete and
structural design, and
Type A assumes no or limited resistance quality of workmanship in
to penetration provided by structure, construction
however risk is reduced where employing
structures with greater or total water
resistance (combined protection)
Water-stops included at
all construction joints
External land drain positioned below slab level and drained to

reliable outlet to prevent hydrostatic pressure bearing upon the
structure. Rodding points included to facilitate maintenance.
45° line of foundation
loading, not to be Land drain should be positioned below the level of the horizontal
undermined by land drain waterproofing and hence is shown here below slab level, this
being below the level of the external horizontal tanking barrier
BASEMENTS
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 24
24
BASEMENTS
2.2.52.2.5 WATERPROOFING
SYSTEMS: Typicalexample
example of
of a
a combined
combinedsystem
system- Type A+C
- Type A+C
Example of reinforced masonry wall

construction (minimal integral resistance to
Geo-drainage membrane provides penetration of water). Greater resistance
continuous drainage space against provided by reinforced concrete
the external tanking. Appropriate
protection must be included over to
protect during backfilling
Cavity membrane fixed to retaining wall via
sealed plugs
Externally applied tanking barrier
Dry lining fixed over membrane linings via

plugs, or installed independently
Cavity membrane concealed

within floor construction
Sump pump system within

concrete chamber or cast in
sump liner. Systems must
include suitable battery
back-up protection in
habitable accommodation
External land drain positioned below slab level

and drained to reliable outlet to prevent
hydrostatic pressure bearing upon the structure.
Rodding points included to facilitate maintenance
floor construction
Land drain should be positioned below the level
of the horizontal waterproofing and hence is
shown here below slab level, this being below the Accessible & maintainable drainage
level of the external horizontal tanking barrier channel concealed within floor

2020 2020 25 25 BASEMENTS
BASEMENTS
2.2.6
Typicalexample
exampleof of
a combined system
a combined - Type
system B+C B+C
- Type
Reinforced concrete designed and constructed

to resist penetration of water
Degree of resistance dependent on concrete

and structural design, and quality of
workmanship in construction
Cavity membrane fixed to retaining wall via

Water-stops included at all construction joints sealed plugs
to protect this vulnerable position
Dry lining fixed over membrane linings via

plugs, or installed independently
Cavity membrane concealed

within floor construction
Sump pump system within

concrete chamber or cast in
sump liner. Systems must
include suitable battery
back-up protection in habitable
accommodation

floor construction
Accessible & maintainable drainage

channel concealed within floor
BASEMENTS
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 26
26
BASEMENTS
CONTENTS
3.
Contents
Foundations
3.1 Mass Fill
3.2 Strip
3.3 Piles
3.4 Raft
3.5 Engineered Fill
3.6 Vibratory Ground Improvement
3.7 Trees and Clay


Workmanship W
1. Ground improvement schemes should be appropriately tested to confirm that the completed works meet 1.
design specifications. The testing regime must be agreed with the Warranty Surveyor prior to
commencement of work (applicable to: 'Engineered Fill' and Vibratory Ground Improvement' only). Ma
2. The developer shall ensure that adequate quality control procedures are in place. The quality control must No
identify that site work meets the design intention. All procedures should be auditable and available for
inspection (applicable to: 'Engineered Fill' and 'Vibratory Ground Improvement' only). De
3. Foundations should be of a suitable depth in order to achieve a satisfactory level of performance. 1.
4. Excavations for foundations shall be accurate in line, width and depth, and suitable for the type of
foundation which form the basis of the design.
Materials
Design Lim
1. Site Investigation by an appropriately qualified person should be supplied and provide the following 1.
information (applicable to: 'Engineered Fill' and 'Vibratory Ground Improvement' only):
a. Depth of original soil types below the structure.
b. Details of any filled ground and its suitability to accept ground improvements techniques.
c. Gas generation or spontaneous combustion from ground conditions.
The investigation must be endorsed by the Specialist Foundations Contractor.
2. The ground improvement works must meet the relevant regional Building Regulations (applicable to
'Engineered Fill' and 'Vibratory Ground Improvement' only).
3. Foundation type and depth must be suitable to resist movement due to the influence of nearby trees.
4. Piled foundation designs must be supported by structural calculations provided by a suitably qualified
expert. Calculations for full piling systems must be provided by, or endorsed by, the piling manufacturer.
5. Raft foundation designs must be supported by structural calculations provided by a suitably qualified
expert.

1. The Functional Requirements are limited by the recommendations applied in this specific Building Part
guidance.
FOUNDATIONS
FOUNDATIONS
3. 3.1
Mass Fill
Foundations

3.1.1 MASS
3.1.1 MASS FILL:
FILL: Foundationdepths
Foundation depths
Limitations of guidance Typical mass filled foundation Internal wall foundation

The following situations are not covered by this guidance:
· Mass filled foundations for buildings other than dwellings.
· Buildings greater than three storeys. Concrete filling to DPC to be provided
· Foundations on filled ground. cavity kept minimum and linked to floor
· Mass fill foundations where foundation depths exceed 2.5m. 225mm below DPC DPM
Internal floor level
Design
Centre line of wall to
Mass filled foundations shall be designed to ensure that the building is appropriately supported at all times without coincide with centre
excessive settlement. This foundation type should only bear onto original ground if the foundation has been line of foundation
designed by a Structural Engineer and is appropriately reinforced. It is therefore important that site conditions are Masonry load
appropriately assessed prior to the building design. Please refer to the 'Ground Conditions' section. bearing partitions to
Depth of foundation (below ground level) Solum level be supported off
For 'low rise structures', the foundations should be designed to ensure a maximum settlement of 25mm is not suitable foundations
exceeded. to be taken to:
· Suitable virgin sub-soil. · Foundation to be centrally

In relation to differential settlements, a design limit for maximum tilt of 1/500 is appropriate. More stringent values
· A depth that gives sufficient bearing located under the wall.
may be required due to the particular circumstances (e.g. medium and high rise structures).
and protection from frost. · The foundation width
· When building on cohesive soils, is at should be in accordance
Foundations: Trees and Clay with the relevant regional
a depth that is not under potential
influence of nearby trees. Building Regulations.
Foundation design should take into account influence from nearby trees. Where construction is to take place in
cohesive soils and trees are/were/will be present: · Below the invert level of any adjacent
Minimum width drain/sewer (see detail below).
· If the foundation depth is greater than 1.5m, heave protection will be required. 600mm
· Where foundation depths exceed 2m, short bored piles with ground beams are recommended. All pile designs
should be undertaken by a Chartered structural engineer.
Min150mm
· Foundation depths required to exceed 2.5m are beyond the scope of the online foundation depth calculator
projection
and must be a piled engineered solution.
Drainage positions situated within angle of
Minimum foundation dimensions
repose and adjacent to foundation by 1m
· Mass fill foundations should be of a 600mm minimum width for external walls.
· For single leaf internal walls up to 150mm thick, foundations may be reduced in width to 450mm ensuring that Ground level
a 150mm projection either side of the internal wall is provided.
· Foundations should be situated centrally below the wall.
Foundation depths
The depth of all foundations should be determined by specific site conditions. All foundations must bear onto virgin
stable subsoil and, except where strip foundations are founded on rock. The foundations should have a minimum Drains in this area do
depth of 450mm, measured from finished ground level to their underside, to avoid the action of frost. This depth not require additional
however, will commonly need to be increased in areas subject to long periods of frost or in order that loads are protection
transferred to suitable ground.
Drainage and other services:
Where trees are situated close to a proposed building founded on a clay soil, the foundation depth/design will be
affected; further guidance is available in the 'Foundations - Trees and Clay' section. In clay soils with a plasticity Mass foundations must be:
index greater than or equal to 10%, foundations should be taken to a depth where anticipated ground movement
will not impair the stability of any part of the building, taking into account the influence of vegetation and trees on or
adjacent to the site. The depth to the underside of foundations on clay soils should not be less than 750mm, as
· Constructed to a depth which will not be
measured from finished ground level, and depths may need to be increased in order that loads are transferred to affected by nearby drainage or other services.
45° angle · Any drain or service pipe must not pass through
suitable ground.
of repose the base of the foundation. Where such services
For minimum depths of foundations in cohesive soils where trees are/were/will be present, please use the online are at the same level, the base of the foundation
Alternative positions of
foundation depth calculator. Further guidance can be found in the 'Foundations - Trees and Clay' section. must be stepped below and the drain/services
encased drainage within sleeved through the substructure wall above.
1m from foundation, and · Existing ground water drains should be diverted
below angle of repose to a suitable outfall.
Minimum foundation depths
Volume change potential 40%

Modified plasticity index (x) Minimum foundation depth (m)
and greater
≥1m
x ≥ 40% High 1.00
40% > x < 20% Medium 0.9*
x > 20% Low 0.75*
Note: *If the modified plasticity index is not confirmed, the minimum foundation depths should be 1m.
© MD©Insurance
MD Insurance Services
Services Limited
Limited 2020 2020 30 30 FOUNDATIONS
FOUNDATIONS
3.1.2
3.1.2 MASS
MASSFILL: Joints,
FILL: steps
Joints, andand
steps setting out out
setting
Reinforcing Steps in foundations
Mass fill foundations should be reinforced where necessary to suit localised ground conditions. Reinforcement, if needed, Steps in foundations must not be of a greater dimension than the thickness of the foundation. Where
foundations are stepped (on elevation), they should overlap by twice the height of the step, or 1m
should be clean and free from loose rust and should also be placed correctly. Bars, of an appropriate size, should be
whichever is the largest.
supported to guarantee that they are 75mm above the base of the foundation, or as indicated in the design. They should be
secured at laps and crossings. If in doubt about any soft spots, the engineer's advice should be taken prior to placing the
concrete.
Foundation joints S
If construction joints are necessary, they should not be positioned within 2m of a corner or junction in the foundation. All
shuttering should be removed before work progresses beyond the construction joint.
Mass foundations
The overlap should not

Using reinforcement bars across a joint T be less than:
· 2 x S, or
· 1m, or
whichever is the largest
Overlap
Excavation
· Excavations should be to a depth that gives sufficient bearing and protection from frost damage.
· To avoid damage caused by frost, the depth of the foundation(s) in frost-susceptible ground
should be at a minimum of 450mm below ground level. If the finished ground level will be above
the existing ground level then, the foundation depth should be calculated from the existing, not
finished, ground level.
· Where the depth of mass fill foundations is in excess of 2.5m, they must be designed by a
Chartered Structural Engineer in accordance with current British Standards and Codes of Practice.
For trench fill, it is imperative to check that the finished foundation level is correct and horizontal. It
will be difficult to adjust for discrepancies in the small number of brick courses between foundation
and DPC level.
· Prior to concreting, excavations should be 'bottomed out' to remove any debris that may have
fallen into the trench; the excavations should be free from water, and if it has been left open for a
long period of time, further excavation may be required to a non-weathered strata.
Note: It is important that Health and Safety obligations are met and that excavations are appropriately
supported to prevent collapse.
Setting out foundations
The accuracy of setting out foundations should be checked by set controlled trench measurements,
including their location relative to site borders and neighbouring buildings. Levels should be checked
against benchmarks, where appropriate. In particular, for excavations check:
· Trench widths
· Trench lengths
· Length of diagonals between external corners
Section
Shutter Walls should be located centrally upon the foundation, unless specifically designed otherwise. Any
discrepancy in dimensions should be reported promptly to the designer. Resulting variations should be
Reinforcing distributed to all concerned with site works, including the Warranty Surveyor.
bars
Standards referred to
· BS 8004 Code of Practice for foundations

· BS 5950-1 Structural use of steelwork in buildings
· BS 6399 Loadings for buildings
· BS 8103 Structural design of low rise buildings
· BS 8110 Structural use of concrete
FOUNDATIONS
©©
MDMD Insurance
Insurance Services
Services Limited
Limited 2020
2020 31 31
FOUNDATIONS
3. 3.2
Strip
Foundations

3.2.1 STRIP: Foundation depths
3.2.1 STRIP: Foundation depths
Limitations of guidance Typical strip foundation Internal wall foundation
The following situations are not covered by this guidance:
· Traditional strip foundations for buildings other than dwellings.
· Buildings greater than three storeys. Concrete filling to DPC to be provided
· Foundations on filled ground. cavity kept 225mm and linked to floor
· Strip foundations where foundation depths exceed 2.5m. below DPC DPM
Design
Centre line of wall to
Strip filled foundations shall be designed to ensure that the building is appropriately supported at all times coincide with centre
without excessive settlement. This foundation type should only bear onto original ground if the foundation line of foundation
has been designed by a Structural Engineer and is appropriately reinforced. It is therefore important that Masonry load
site conditions are appropriately assessed prior to the building design. Please refer to the 'Ground bearing partitions to
Conditions' section. Solum level be supported off
Depth of Foundation (below ground level)
to be taken to: suitable foundations
For 'low rise structures', the foundations should be designed to ensure a maximum settlement of 25mm is
not exceeded. Minimum
Minimum · Suitable virgin sub-soil. thickness
· Foundation to be centrally
thickness · A depth that gives sufficient bearing located under the wall.
In relation to differential settlements, a design limit for maximum tilt of 1/500 is appropriate. More stringent 150mm
values may be required due to the particular circumstances (e.g. medium and high rise structures). 150mm and protection from frost. · Width of strip foundation to
· When building on cohesive soils, is at ensure a 150mm minimum
projection either side of
Foundations: Trees and clay a depth that is not under potential
influence of nearby trees. the wall is provided.
· Below the invert level of any adjacent · The thickness of the strip
Foundation design should take into account influence from near-by trees. Minimum width Min150mm
drain/sewer (see detail below). foundation should be at
600mm projection
least 150mm.
· Where construction is to take place in cohesive soils and trees are/were/will be present, and the
foundation depth is required (using the online foundation depth calculator) to exceed 1.5m, heave
protection will be necessary and strip foundations will not be suitable. Mass fill or short bored piles
should be adopted (see the 'Foundations - Mass Fill' and 'Foundations - Piles' guidance).
Minimum foundation dimensions Drainage positions situated within angle of

· Strip foundations should be of a 600mm minimum width for external walls.
· For single leaf internal walls up to 150mm thick, foundations may be reduced in width to 450mm Ground level
ensuring that a 150mm projection either side of the internal wall is provided.
· The minimum thickness of strip foundations should be 150mm.
· Foundations should be situated centrally below the wall.
Foundation depths
The depth of all foundations should be determined by specific site conditions. All foundations must bear Drains in this area do
onto virgin stable subsoil and, except where strip foundations are founded on rock. The strip foundations not require additional
should have a minimum depth of 450mm, measured from finished ground level to their underside, to protection
avoid the action of frost. This depth however, will commonly need to be increased in areas subject to long
periods of frost or in order that loads are transferred to suitable ground. Drainage and other services:
Where trees are situated close to a proposed building founded on a clay soil, the foundation depth/design
Strip foundations must be:
will require to be assessed by following the recommendations available in the 'Foundations - Trees and
Clay' section. In clay soils with a plasticity index greater than or equal to 10%, strip foundations should be
taken to a depth where anticipated ground movement will not impair the stability of any part of the · Constructed to a depth which will not be
building, taking into account the influence of vegetation and trees on or adjacent to the site. The depth to affected by nearby drainage or other services.
45° angle · Any drain or service pipe must not pass through
the underside of foundations on clay soils should not be less than 750mm, as measured from finished
ground level, and depths may need to be increased in order that loads are transferred to suitable ground. of repose the strip foundation. Where such services are at
the same level, the strip foundation must be
Minimum foundation depths stepped below and the drain / services sleeved
encased drainage within through the substructure wall above.
1m from foundation, and · Existing ground water drains should be diverted
below angle of repose to a suitable outfall.
Volume change potential
Modified plasticity index (x) Minimum foundation depth (m)
40% and greater
x ≥ 40% High 1.00

≥1m
40% > x < 20% Medium 0.9*
x > 20% Low 0.75*
Note: *If the modified plasticity index is not confirmed, the minimum foundation depths should be 1m.
© MD©Insurance
Services Limited
Limited 20202020 3333 FOUNDATIONS
FOUNDATIONS
3.2.2 STRIP:
3.2.2 STRIP: Joints,
Joints, steps,and
steps, andsetting
setting out
out
Reinforcing Steps in foundations
Strip foundations should be reinforced where necessary to suit localised ground conditions. Reinforcement, if needed, Steps in foundations must not be of a greater dimension than the thickness of the foundation. Where
foundations are stepped (on elevation), they should overlap by twice the height of the step, or 300mm,
should be clean and free from loose rust and should also be placed correctly. Bars of an appropriate size, should be
whichever is the largest.
supported to guarantee that they are 75mm above the base of the foundation, or as indicated in the design. They should be
secured at laps and crossings and if in doubt about any soft spots, the engineer's advice should be taken prior to placing
the concrete.
Foundation joints S
If construction joints are necessary, they should not be positioned within 2m of a corner or junction in the foundation. All
shuttering should be removed before work progresses beyond the construction joint.
Strip foundations
T
Using reinforcement bars across a joint The overlap should not be less than:
· 2 x S, or
· T (maximum 500mm), or
· 300mm,
whichever is the largest
Overlap
Excavation
· Excavation should be to a depth that gives sufficient bearing and protection from frost damage.
· To avoid damage caused by frost, the depth of the foundation(s) in frost-susceptible ground
should be at a minimum of 450mm below ground level. If the finished ground level will be above
the existing ground level then, the foundation depth should be calculated from the existing, not
finished, ground level.
· Where the depth of strip foundations is in excess of 2.5m, they must be designed by a Chartered
Structural Engineer in accordance with current British Standards and Codes of Practice.
· Prior to concreting, excavations should be 'bottomed out' to remove any debris that may have
fallen into the trench; the excavations should be free from water, and if it has been left open for a
long period of time, further excavation may be required to a non-weathered strata.
Note: It is important that Health and Safety obligations are met and that excavations are appropriately
supported to prevent collapse.
Setting out foundations
The accuracy of setting out foundations should be checked by set controlled trench measurements,
including their location relative to site borders and neighbouring buildings. Levels should be checked
against benchmarks, where appropriate. In particular, for excavations check:
· Trench widths
· Trench lengths
· Length of diagonals between external corners
Walls should be located centrally upon the foundation, unless specifically designed otherwise. Any
Section discrepancy in dimensions should be reported promptly to the designer. Resulting variations should
Shutter be distributed to all concerned with site works, including the Warranty Surveyor.
Standards referred to:
Reinforcing
bar
· BS 8004 Code of Practice for foundations
· BS 5950-1 Structural use of steelwork in buildings
· BS 6399 Loadings for buildings
· BS 8103 Structural design of low rise buildings
· BS 8110 Structural use of concrete
© MD©Insurance
Services Limited
FOUNDATIONS
3. 3.3
Piles
Foundations

3.3.1 PILES:
3.3.1 PILES:
PilePile construction
construction selection
selection
Piled Foundations
Piles are used to transfer loads from buildings to the supporting ground and are utilised in a wide range
of applications where conventional strip footings are inappropriate. They are particularly employed
where soft or loose soils overlay strong soils or rocks at depths that can be reached conveniently by
driving or boring. They are often the most economical type of foundation when very heavy loads must be
supported or uplift forces need to be resisted. Large piles are extremely useful for limiting the
settlements of large structures on deep stiff clays; smaller versions can provide appropriate foundations
for houses and other small buildings on stiff clays liable to shrinkage and swelling. The technique has
been in use for many years.
Limitations of guidance
The following situations are beyond the scope of this guidance.
· Innovative foundation systems that do not have third-party approval or accreditation.

· Piling systems where the structural design is not endorsed by the Specialist Piling Contractor.
Foundations: Trees and clay
Foundation design should take into account influence from nearby trees. Where construction is to take
place in cohesive soils and trees are/were/will be present:
· Suitable heave precautions should be included in the design details for the protection of the piles
and ground beams.
· The piles must be deep enough to cater for heave.
For more information on this, please see the 'Foundations - Trees and Clay' section.
Pile classification
Piles of many different types and methods of installation have been developed to suit the wide variety of
soils. Piles generally fall into two main types:
· Bored and dug, including short bored and secant (replacement piles).
· Driven and jacked piles, steel, concrete and timber (displacement piles).
How piling systems work Beam and block

flooring
There are two groupings of piles, based on the way that they transfer loads to the ground:
Where floor beams
· End bearing piles derive the greater part of their support from bearing forces at the base. They act bear onto substructure,
largely as columns transferring loads through soft deposits, usually to dense granular soil or rock at a DPC underneath
the foot of the pile.
must be provided
· Friction piles on the other hand, develop most of their support from friction between the shaft and
the soil, usually firm clay.
DPM
Choosing the right piled solution Final ground level
at completion of DPC
The choice of piling system to support the structure will depend entirely upon the ground conditions. It is
building
important to have the appropriate site investigation works carried out to determine depths of filled
ground, the bearing capacity of soils, soil type and any existing workings or services that may clash with Typical ground
pile locations. beam
Note: For further guidance on ground condition assessments, please refer to the 'Ground Conditions' Designed pile
section. Structural Engineers
Analysis of the site investigation report should be completed by a Specialist Piling Contractor and calculations and details to
Structural Engineer, as they are best placed to design the most economical piling system. Site levelled to detail the physical link
approx 375mm below between the pile top and
Piles are particularly appropriate for heave sites (trees removed), for which they are strongly finished floor prior to the ground beam using
recommended. commencement of reinforcement bars and
piling and ground links to meet the specific
Pile layouts can be readily designed to accommodate an individual plot. A good design will seek to design requirements for
beam construction
achieve cost savings in foundation excavation and materials through incorporation of large ground beam the project
spans between piles and a small number of piles.
© MD©Insurance
Services Limited
FOUNDATIONS
3.3.2
3.3.2 PILES:
PILES:Choice
Choiceof piles
of piles
Ground beams The range of piling types (BRE publication)
The Piling Contractor should take care to ensure that the piles are inserted vertically and pile tops are correctly aligned to
support the foundation beams.
Piles should be capped with an appropriate ground beam system. There should be adequate connections between the beam
and the pile to ensure that the loads are transmitted effectively, or that the beams are adequately restrained to the pile to Bearing piles
resist uplift on sites that are susceptible to heave. All external, internal, partition and party walls can be accommodated using
this system. The ring beam and its connections should be part of the piled foundation design, and should be supported by
structural calculations provided by a Structural Engineer.
Pile construction records

Displacement
(driven jacked or Replacement
Pile construction records should be made available for all piles installed. The records should include the following information: (bored)
screwed)
· Pile type (driven tube, Continuous Flight Auger (CFA), auger bored, etc.).
· Pile dimensions (diameter or width/breadth).
· Pile depth.
· Driving records from driven piles, including hammer type, weight, drop height, sets, hammer efficiency.
· Pile verticality confirmation, which should be no more than 1:75 from vertical.
For CFA and concrete screw piles, the Warranty Surveyor should be given the computer output for concrete volume and
rig performance. Preformed Partially Driven Percussion Flush Grab Rotary
preformed in situ bored bored bored bored
(precast + (temporary
in situ steel lining)
concrete)
Cavity tray DPC
DPM Timber Concrete Steel Large Small Short

Diameter Diameter Bored
Telescopic Beam and block flooring
ventilator
Final ground level Normal Prestressed Cylinder Under-reamed

at completion Where floor beams bear onto
substructure, a DPC under must
be provided
Void Box Tube "H" Screw

(Small
displacement)
Site levelled to approx 375mm
below finished floor prior to
commencement of piling and
ground beam construction
Typical ground beam
Rebar projecting from pile
Designed pile
Structural engineers calculations and

details to detail the physical link between
the pile top and the ground beam using
reinforcement bars and links to meet the
specific design requirements for the
project
© MD Insurance Services Limited 2020 37 FOUNDATIONS

FOUNDATIONS
3.3.33.3.3 PILES:
PILES:
KeyKey design
design requirements
requirements
Key requirements Pile design

The piling scheme shall be designed to clearly demonstrate that the piles are capable of supporting and transferring the foundation design A pile layout drawing and piling schedule should be prepared by the Project Structural Engineer, indicating the pile reference numbers, all
loads safely to known soil strata that are, in turn, capable of supporting the pile loads using the appropriate soil properties obtained from loadings to which each pile will be subjected and details of connections between piles and the substructure. Calculations should clearly
geotechnical testing and contained in the appropriate site investigation report. The piles shall be designed in accordance with BS 8004:2015 demonstrate how the load on each pile was derived.
and shall ensure that long term settlement does not exceed 10mm or 1:500 (differential, between adjacent piles) at working load and 15mm
at 1.5 times working load, unless more stringent criteria are required by the Project Structural Engineer. The piles shall be designed in accordance with BS 8004:2015 and shall ensure that long term settlement does not exceed 10mm or 1:500
(differential, between adjacent piles) at working load and 15mm at 1.5 times working load, unless more stringent criteria are required by the
Pile installation record sheets shall show clearly that all piles installed have achieved sufficient depth with respect to the pile design Project Structural Engineer.
calculations. Where there is any doubt concerning the depth of the piles, as a result of any encountered voids or boulders, or there is any
other reason to suspect underperformance, the capacity of the questionable piles shall be demonstrated by means of static load testing and In all cases, a geotechnical and structural design should be carried out to current standards in order to confirm the required pile length,
it shall be confirmed by the Project Structural Engineer that the piles are fit for purpose. reinforcement etc. and to reflect the ground conditions as confirmed by the site specific Site Investigation Report. The pile design should
prove that the pile can support all expected vertical, horizontal, tensile, heave and negative skin friction forces.
Technical documentation required
The skin friction adhesion factor (α) should be in accordance with BS 8004:2015 (clause 6.4.1.2.3).
The following documentation shall be submitted to the Warranty Surveyor for assessment. Items 1-5 below should be submitted prior to
commencement of piling on site. In the absence of approval, works are proceeding at the Developer's own risk. Items 6-10 below shall be BS 8004:2015 (clause 6.1.1) and BS EN1997-1 (clause 7.4.1) permits pile design to be carried out by:
submitted as soon as they become available, prior to construction continuing over the piles.
1. Static pile formulae based on ground parameters from the site investigation and appropriate safety factors, and/or
Prior to commencement on site 2. The results of dynamic load tests (provided they have been verified by static tests in comparable situations), and/or
3. Pile driving formula (provided they have been verified by static tests in comparable situations).
1. Desk study, investigative and interpretive Site Investigation Report(s) (to at least 5m below the pile toe) with associated geotechnical
testing sufficient for pile design including DS / ACEC requirements for buried concrete, heave and shrinkage. If the results of appropriate static load testing are not available for the site, then the 1st option applies. In this case, all driven piles should be
2. Foundation drawings, pile layouts and pile schedule (with pile reference numbers and loadings). installed to the lengths indicated in the static pile design calculation and representative dynamic tests with settlement analysis (e.g.
3. Project Structural Engineer's specification for piling works to include the allowable pile settlements and testing requirements. CAPWAP) are carried out (typically 3% to 5% per static pile design), but this may need to be increased if there are any concerns regarding
4. Calculations demonstrating how the load on each pile was derived. the pile installation or if required by the Project Structural Engineer.
5. Pile design calculation (for vertical, horizontal, tensile, and heave forces) to geotechnical parameters in the Site Investigation Report and
a copy of the pile set design (for driven piles, if applicable). This should include the pile designer's written confirmation that the site However, if the piles cannot be driven to the lengths indicated in the static pile design (as is often the case), then reliance switches to
investigation is adequate to ensure that the pile design complies with British Standards. This should also include confirmation, dynamic tests and/or dynamic formulae, both of which need to be verified by previous evidence of acceptable performance in static load
justification, type and number of any preliminary and/or working pile load tests required to satisfy the design. tests on the same type of pile, of similar length and cross section and in similar ground conditions (the static tests don't necessarily need to
have been carried out on the particular site), as required by BS 8004:2015.
Prior to construction continuing over the piles A pile schedule should be produced indicating the pile numbers (referenced to the drawings), pile loads, pile type and diameter, pile length,
required rock socket length, and details of required reinforcement. Piles for new developments should be not less than 150mm diameter
6. Pile installation logs (with pile numbers cross-referenced to the pile layout drawing), including details of re-strikes, rock sockets, rig or equivalent.
telemetry records, and concrete volume.
7. Concrete mix details and cube test results for the concrete used in the piles with tabulated results similar to that in Concrete Advice
Note. No.30 (The Concrete Society) Tables 1 and 3. Delivery records, cross-referenced to the pile layout/numbers, should also be kept
Alternative pile types and design methods
for possible future reference.
8. Integrity testing of all concrete piles with interpretive summary and conclusion. If alternative pile types or non-standard design methods are being considered, please contact the Warranty Surveyor prior to commencement
9. Dynamic load testing results (where applicable) with analysis of long-term settlement, interpretive summary and conclusion. of piling.
10. Static load test results with interpretive summary and conclusion.
Pile design factor of safety
Reference documents The factor of safety is dependent on the extent of site investigation, design method/code/standard, confidence in the design, the proposed
pile load testing regime, and should be in accordance with design method being used.
· BS EN 1997-1:2004 + A1:2013 - Eurocode 7: Geotechnical design (EC7)
· BS 8004:2015 - Code of practice for foundations BS 8004: 2015/EC7 Partial factors depending upon load testing undertaken (for bored or continuous flight auger piles)
· BS EN 1997-2:2007 - Ground investigation and testing
· BS 5930: 2015 - Code of practice for ground investigations
· ICE Specification for piling and embedded retaining walls (3rd edition 2016) Partial factor for shaft Partial factor for base
Direction of load Load tests Model factor
· London district surveyors association (LDSA) - Guidance notes for the design of straight shafted bored piles in London clay (2017) resistance resistance
Compression None 1.6 2.0 1.4
Geotechnical site investigation WPT only 1.4 1.7 1.4
A detailed, site specific, interpretive, Phase 2 Geotechnical Site Investigation should take place and be in accordance with PPT and WPT 1.4 1.7 1.2
BS 5930 / BS EN1997-2 and extend to depths beneath the pile toe of at least 3 x pile diameter or 5m or the smallest plan dimension Tension None 2.0 - 1.4
encompassing the pile group (whichever is the greatest). Refer to 'Published Minimum Requirements for Site Investigation' by the Federation
of Piling Specialists (July 2013). Generally, boreholes should be at centres of 10m to 30m for structures and at a minimum of 3 points, but
closer borehole spacing's should be used where there are site-specific hazards (e.g. soluble soils, mining features etc.) or where there are Alternative factors of safety depending upon load testing undertaken (using traditional approach)
large variations in soil properties.
The investigation should include sufficient geotechnical testing throughout the length and beneath the pile to enable an accurate Preliminary Pile Tests (PPT) Working Pile Tests (WPT) Typical factor of safety
geotechnical design of the pile in accordance with proven design methods.
No No load testing on WP 3.0
If the Site Investigation is found to contain insufficient information to verify the proposed design of the piles, additional investigation and No Load testing on 1% min of WP 2.5
testing will be required e.g. by carrying out additional boreholes to the above depth, as considered necessary to establish the required Yes (rate to be agreed) Load testing on 1% min of WP 2.0
geotechnical parameters.
Note: It is not acceptable to adopt a higher factor of safety in place of an adequately detailed Site Investigation.
The guidelines contained in LDSA guidance should be used for the design of straight shafted bored piles in London clay.
FOUNDATIONS
© MD Insurance
Services LimitedLimited
2020 2020 38 38
FOUNDATIONS
3.3.4
3.3.4 PILES:
PILES:Key
Keydesign requirements
design continued
requirements continued
Piling in rock/boulders Concrete mix and cube test results
If rock sockets are required by the pile design, then the achievement of such sockets during pile installation should be demonstrated. Where Concrete mix details and cube test results for the concrete used in the piles shall be provided with tabulated results, similar to that in
there are boulders, it needs to be demonstrated that piles are not founded on, or partly on, boulders. It is advisable to ensure that piles are Concrete Advice Note No.30 (The Concrete Society) Tables 1 and 3. Delivery records, cross referenced to the pile layout/numbers, should
taken down through strata containing cobbles/boulders. Pre-drilling may be required. also be kept for possible future reference. The Project Structural Engineer shall review all concrete cube testing results and, in the case of
any unusual results or failures, advise on any remedial works proposals necessary.
Piling in chalk
Pile integrity testing
Reference should be made to CIRIA PR86 and CIRIA C574 for pile design and installation. Where the risk of solution features as obtained
from a Groundsure or Envirocheck hazard map is moderate or high (i.e. not low), probing should be carried out at each pile location in The integrity of the full depth and cross-section of all CFA, SFA, CHD, bored piles (including retaining walls) should be established by
accordance with CIRIA PR86. Piles should be designed to take into account the risk of a solution feature around, adjacent or beneath the integrity testing using recognised methods. Should integrity testing indicate anomalies, then the Project Structural Engineer should advise on
pile (refer to clause 7.10.2 of CIRIA C574). Should concrete flows significantly exceed the volume of the pile during installation (suggestive of the remedial measures proposed and seek agreement with us. It is recommended that such agreement is obtained prior to work continuing.
a solution feature/void), measures should be taken immediately to mitigate the risk e.g. additional probing, deeper piles, relocation of piles,
load testing etc. Note: Integrity testing should not be considered as replacement for sufficient site investigation or other types of testing, particularly static load
testing. 100% of such piles shall be integrity tested.
Piling in ground subject to cavitation
Dynamic load testing
Where the ground is subject to potential cavitation as a result of gypsum dissolution, brine dissolution etc., the pile design and installation
Dynamic load testing shall be carried out in accordance with BS 8004:2015 and shall include analysis of long term settlements. There should
should take into account any existing and future cavitation. As such, some form of redundancy may need to be considered within the design
be adequate site investigation to 5m below the pile toe as required by the British Standards.
to counteract any unknown conditions. As the presence of dissolution features cannot be readily identified during the installation of the piles,
it is recommended that probing be undertaken at each pile location. Geophysical investigation or similar is recommended in order to locate
BS 8004:2015 (clause 6.1.1) & BS EN1997-1 (clause 7.4.1) permits pile design to be carried out by:
existing cavities.
1. Static pile formulae based on ground parameters from the site investigation and appropriate safety factors, and/or
Piling over mine workings 2. The results of dynamic tests (provided they have been verified by static load tests in comparable situations), and/or
3. Pile driving formula (provided they have been verified by static load tests in comparable situations).
With regard to piling over or near to historical mine workings reference should be made to CIRIA SP32. Piles are not generally suitable
unless founded below the grouted horizons. When piling adjacent to existing mine entries, assurance needs to be provided that adequate st
If the results of appropriate static load testing are not available for the site, then the 1 option applies. In this case, all driven piles should be
competent rock is available, that stipulated rock sockets are achieved and that piles will not be affected by any potential future collapse or installed to the lengths indicated in the static pile design and representative dynamic tests with settlement analysis (e.g. CAPWAP) are
partial collapse of the mine entry. carried out (typically 3% to 5% per static pile design but this may need to be increased if there are any concerns regarding the pile installation
or if required by the Project Structural Engineer).
Piling in made ground
However, if the piles cannot be driven to the lengths indicated in the static design (as is often the case), then reliance switches to dynamic
Piles terminating in, or relying on, made ground are not acceptable. tests and/or dynamic formulae, both of which need to be verified by previous evidence of acceptable performance in static load tests on the
same type of pile, of similar length and cross section and in similar ground conditions (the static tests don't necessarily need to have been
carried out on the particular site), as required by BS 8004:2015.
Pile installation and testing
Static load testing
Piles should be installed and tested to ensure that they meet the design requirements. The Project Structural Engineer shall review all pile
installation records and testing results and advise on remedial works to address any unusual results or failures.
Preliminary Pile Tests (PPT): Maintained load (ML) testing up to the unfactored ultimate resistance (commonly defined as settlement
equivalent to 10% of the pile diameter) in accordance with BS 8004, SPERW, or other accepted standards; normally carried out before work
Pile installation records (logs) starts on site or at the very beginning of a project.
Copies of the site-recorded pile installation records (logs) shall be provided for each pile indicating the pile number (correctly referenced to Working Pile Tests (WPT): Maintained load (ML) testing up to at least 1.5 times working load in accordance with BS 8004, SPERW, or other
the drawing), pile load, pile length, reinforcement details and any sleeving requirements. accepted standards. Working Pile Tests shall be carried out at a rate of 1 per 100 piles or part thereof (not less than 1%).
For driven piles, the first pile driven should record the number of blows for the first 100mm of each metre of depth, and the set (including Note: Where there are large variations in substrata revealed either by the Site Investigation or during the construction of piles, load tests
dates) achieved during installation and on re-strike should be indicated. should be carried out in each zone and the level of testing reassessed accordingly for each design situation. Similarly, load testing should
reflect the various pile lengths and loadings.
Should driven piles vary considerably in length across short distances, then the pile installation should be immediately re-assessed and
details (including subsequent results of further investigation) submitted to the Warranty Surveyor for review. Installing piles to “rig-refusal” or If there are queries with regard to anything not covered within this document and/or it is intended that the Site Investigation, pile design,
reference to the limitations of the piling rig shall not be accepted as the sole proof of adequacy of the pile length. If the pile static design installation or testing is to deviate from the above guidance, then please contact the Warranty Surveyor for agreement prior to
lengths are not being achieved on site, then static pile load tests may be required in order to ensure compliance with the British Standards commencement.
and/or carrying out additional site investigation to prove the adequacy of the pile.
Re-strikes shall be carried out on driven piles (typically at a rate of 10%) following a suitable time allowance. If sets have relaxed on
re-strike, the adequacy of the piles shall be re-evaluated (e.g. by additional testing).
Rig telemetry should be recorded, stored and provided as a matter of course for projects with continuous flight auger (CFA), sectional flight
auger (SFA) or continuous helical displacement (CHD) piles.
© MD Insurance Services Limited 2020 39 FOUNDATIONS

FOUNDATIONS
3. 3.4
Raft
Foundations

3.4.1 RAFT: Key requirements
3.4.1 RAFT: Key requirements
Raft foundations Where thermal insulation products are used below the structural raft they should:
Introduction · Meet the requirements of BS EN 1606 Thermal insulation products for building applications.
A raft foundation consists of a reinforced concrete slab, whose thickness and stiffness are designed to spread the applied wall · Meet BS EN 13163 (for EPS insulation).
and column loads over a large area. · Meet BS EN 13164 (for XPS insulation).
· The Structural Engineer should ensure that the design limits 'compressive creep' to a maximum 2% reduction for a 50/60 years period.
For domestic applications, rafts are often built with thickened perimeters to provide protection against frost heave, in which · The insulation product must have third party product approval certification for use below a structural raft foundation (including below external walls).
case they are effectively trench fill foundations with integral ground bearing floor slabs. Down stand edge beams also serve to
stiffen the foundation's structure. The design should provide sufficient information to ensure correct installation of the raft and its reinforcing. The minimum recommended information is as
follows:
Rafts are used where it is necessary to limit the load applied to the underlying soil or to reduce the effects of differential
foundation movements due to variable soil conditions or variations in loading. · Plans and details of the proposed raft showing reinforcing positions, etc.
· Structural calculations confirming that the raft is suitable for the proposed loads applied.
· A bar schedule, to be used by the reinforcing steel supplier and installer.
Rafts are not considered an accepted method of foundations where the ground conditions are susceptible to heave or
shrinkage (e.g. where trees are present or have been removed). For further clarification, please refer to the 'Foundations -
Trees and Clay' section. Typical raft foundation
Materials
Materials and workmanship should meet the requirements set out in the 'Appendix C - Materials, Products, and Building
Systems' section.
Ground conditions
Raft foundations are usually designed for sites with ground conditions with low ground bearing capacity or where there are
pockets of filled ground. It is therefore important to complete a suitable Site Investigation to meet the requirements of the
'Ground Conditions' section and ascertain the bearing capacity and suitability of the ground.
Structural design
Structural calculations should be provided by a suitably qualified Structural Engineer, confirming that the raft design is suitable
for bearing onto the ground and that the ground bearing capacity safely supports the structure.
Key requirements
The raft foundations shall be designed to clearly demonstrate that the rafts, insulation and any treated ground are capable of
supporting and transferring the foundation design loads safely to known soil strata that are, in turn, capable of supporting the
loads, using the appropriate soil properties obtained from geotechnical testing and contained in the appropriate Site
Investigation report. The rafts shall be designed in accordance with BS 8004:2015 and shall ensure that long term settlement
does not exceed 25mm or 1:500 (differential), unless more stringent criteria are required by the Project Structural Engineer.

The following documentation shall be submitted to the Warranty Surveyor for assessment.
Please Note: In the absence of approval, works proceed at the Developer's own risk.
1. Site Investigation Reports including site-specific recommendations for raft foundations to ensure long term settlement
does not exceed 25mm or 1/500 (differential).
2. Structural drawings:
a) GA and RC drawings, including a drawing register sheet.
b) Details of internal and external thickenings to cater for loadings and the effects of frost.
c) Details of any insulation beneath the raft.
3. Structural calculations:
a) Demonstrating that the ground bearing pressure does not exceed the allowable value specified in the Site
Plasterboard on dabs
Investigation report. Localised areas of higher bearing pressures (e.g. beneath load-bearing walls, thickenings or
point loads) should be considered. Skirting board
b) Demonstrating that the raft (i.e. the thickenings, slab and beams) can span a 3 metre 'soft spot' or cantilever 1.5
metres. Screed
c) Demonstrating the adequacy of any insulation beneath the raft (in relation to loadings, creep and groundwater). Perimeter insulation
4. Confirmation that all made ground beneath the foundation has / will be removed or treated.
5. Details of engineered granular fill below the raft (including its depth and later extent, ensuring a 45° spread from the edge), Insulation
along with its compaction specification, testing and validation.
DPC to lap with the
6. Calculations demonstrating how the depth of granular fill has been determined to cater for the effects of heave and
shrinkage (if shrinkable soils are present). DPM on the inner
7. Details of any ground treatment (e.g. vibro treatment, cement-lime stabilisation etc.). leaf
DPC 150mm DPM
If there are queries with regard to anything not covered or it is intended to deviate from the above guidance, then please minimum above
contact the Warranty Surveyor for agreement prior to commencement. Following acceptance of the proposals, please refer DPC between
ground level
back to the Warranty Surveyor if anything is subsequently discovered on site, which affects the design and/or construction of
fresh mortar
the raft.
Reinforcing as
Reference Documents designed by a
Structural Engineer
· BS EN 1997-1:2004 + A1:2013 - Eurocode 7: Geotechnical design (EC7).
· BS 8004:2015 - Code of practice for foundations.
· BS EN 1997-2:2007 - Ground investigation and testing. Ducts and sleeving
· BS 5930: 2015 - Code of practice for ground investigations.
Any service penetrations that pass through the raft should be appropriately sleeved to protect the service duct. Service duct positions should be planned and
indicated on drawings to prevent reinforcing bars from being cut, unless the structural design has catered for this.
© MD
© MD Insurance
Insurance Services
Services Limited
Limited 2020
2020 41 41 FOUNDATIONS
FOUNDATIONS
3.4.23.4.2 RAFT:
RAFT: Damp
Damp proof
proof membranes
membranes
Damp proof membranes (DPM), damp proof courses (DPC), and floor finishes Typical raft foundation design
The raft foundation and the junction with the wall should be appropriately constructed to resist ground moisture
penetration.
A DPM can be placed beneath the raft, wrapped around the external toe and lapped into the internal DPC. However, this
detail can be difficult to implement on-site, and puncturing of the membrane can commonly occur when placing
reinforcing. The preferred method is to place the DPM on top of the raft slab beneath the floor insulation or screed.
Plasterboard on dabs
Stepped membranes
DPM should be continuous where floors are stepped, a waterproof specialist must select an approved waterproof DPC
membrane to meet the requirements of BS 8120 to provide a continuous barrier that is compatible with the floor
DPM/DPC.
Lap DPM into DPC
Damp proofing
Damp proof courses (DPC) Screed

DPC's should be of a flexible material that is suitable for its intended use and the DPC should have appropriate
third-party certification. Blue brick or slates will not be accepted as a DPC.
Insulation
DPC's should be laid on a mortar bed and correctly lapped at junctions and corners. The depth of lap should be the same
as the width of the DPC.
DPC's should not bridge any cavities unless it is acting as a cavity tray. Where a cavity tray is required (e.g. over a
DPM
telescopic floor vent) please refer to the 'External Walls' section for cavity tray, weep holes and stop end requirements.
Damp proof membranes (DPM)

Reinforcing as designed
A DPM should be provided beneath all ground-supported slabs or cast in-situ reinforced slabs. DPM's should be linked to
by a structural engineer
the DPC and be a minimum 1200g polythene. Other DPM's may be considered if they have appropriate third-party
certification and are installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Concreting of floors Blinding layer as specified

by the structural engineer
Prior to concreting, any water or debris that may have collected on top of the DPM should be removed. Expansion joints
should be provided and constructed in accordance with the Structural Engineers design.
Bricks and blocks below ground
The selected bricks should be appropriately durable against saturation. See 'Appendix C - Materials, Products, and
Building Systems' for further guidance.
If there are sulphates in the ground and/or there is ground water present, confirmation by the manufacturer that the brick
or block is suitable for use below ground should be provided.
FOUNDATIONS
© MD Insurance
2020 2020 42 42
FOUNDATIONS
3. 3.5
Engineered Fill
Foundations

3.5.1
3.5.1 ENGINEERED FILL:
ENGINEERED FILL: Design
Designofofengineered
engineeredfillfill
forfor
supporting structures
supporting structures
Limitations of guidance Special fill is high-quality material, such as well-graded natural sands and gravels, crushed rock or clean demolition rubble. Its use will often have to be reserved
for specifically defined purposes, such as a capping layer or backfill to retaining walls. Where possible though, granular soils should be used as general fill since
The following situations are beyond the scope of this guidance: these materials drain readily and consolidate quickly. The smaller the predominant particle size, the longer the potential time required for consolidation under the
· Where the original ground or sub-strata is unstable or will continue to settle. self-weight of the fill.
· Sites with soft clays with a low bearing capacity (30kN/m2 undrained).
· Filled ground where high levels of voids are anticipated.
· Clay fill, where the water will influence the foundation or where collapse may occur. Materials considered to be unsuitable for use as fill are:
Each development site has its own specific characteristics, and where conditions do not clearly fall within the guidance given, clarification should be · Swamp or marsh land materials.
sought from the Warranty Surveyor or a suitably qualified and experienced expert.
· All organic or part organic materials.
Fill or made ground can be divided into 2 main types: · Materials subject to spontaneous combustion.
· Colliery shales, ironstone shales and similar materials which have the potential for expansion due to oxidation of pyrites.
Engineered Fill: When placed as part of the construction process and carried out to an engineered specification to high standards with good quality · Frozen materials or materials which are frost susceptible.
control and adequate engineering supervision, then risks can be assessed and may be quite small.
· Any materials which have a higher moisture content than the maximum permitted for such materials as defined in the specification.
· Clays with high plasticity index exceeding 55%.
Non-Engineered Fill/Made Ground: Risks associated with sites covered with existing fill are more difficult to assess and short of complete excavation, The following materials require testing to ensure their suitability for use as fill to support structural foundations and slabs, or as backfill to associated
the risks cannot be fully quantified. Therefore, alternative foundation solutions where loads can be transferred to competent strata are required. trenches:
Engineered fill · Acid wastes.

· Reactive materials.
Generally cohesive/granular homogenous material specifically selected to replace either made ground or infill voids left by other processes is adopted. · Materials that include sulphates (e.g. gypsum).
Fill has been divided into 2 further categories. These are: · Organic materials.
· Toxic materials.
· Shallow fill (i.e. less than 2.5m depth below ground level). · Materials that cause noxious fumes, rot, undue settlement or damage to surrounding materials.
· Deep fill (i.e. greater than 2.5m).
The sample tests should be carried out by a suitably qualified person and it may be necessary to take a number of samples to identify the material
For further guidance on foundation types suitable for building on 'Shallow' and 'Deep' fill, please refer to our Warranty good practice guide 'Building on characteristics of the fill accurately.
Fill' which can be found on the website.
End product criteria
Design of engineered fill
Careful selection of the material and controlled placement should ensure that the engineered fill forms an adequate foundation material; however, in The greatest threats to successful in-service performance are:
some circumstances, significant ground movements can occur.
· Collapse settlement due to inundation of dry or inadequately compacted fills.
Engineered fill should be designed and placed in accordance with recognised good practice, as noted in the references at the end of this section. · Excessive consolidation settlement of wet compressible fill.
· Heave or settlement of clay fill due to climatic changes or vegetation.
Engineered fills used to produce suitably shaped landforms for structures should be constructed to high standards to minimise the risk of ground
movements causing damage to property built on shallow foundations.
These ground movements depend on moisture movement, so by reducing the voids in a fill, the opportunities for excessive in-service movements should be
In designing and specifying a fill to form a foundation for buildings, the following technical requirements should be established: restricted. A maximum allowable air-voids content of 5% is a suitable criterion for most clay fills. However, specifying a 5% air-voids content is insufficient, as this
value may easily be achieved by adding water to the fill without increasing compactive effort.
· A well-constructed excavation, safely executed, with all soft and hard spots removed and made reasonably dry and well drained.
· Sound fill without undesirable material and capable of compaction as specified, provided with starter and capping layers as necessary. A suitable alternative control method is to specify a minimum acceptable density as a proportion of the maximum dry density measured in a standard laboratory
· Placement and compaction to ensure that the performance of the fill will meet required criteria as a foundation fill.
· Appropriate monitoring; the Designer must ensure that all work can be carried out safely as required by the Health and Safety Executive compaction test. Limits on moisture content are also required.
Construction Design and Management Regulations.
If the fill is too wet, there could be excessive consolidation settlement and if the fill is too dry, it might be vulnerable to collapse compression.
Typical engineered fill construction - Figure 1
Placing engineered fill
Car Park Property Road 5m or D/2 Landscape area A successful engineered fill requires not only an appropriate specification but also adequate control during placement. All the work must be carried out with due
regard to safety, as required by the Construction Design and Management Regulations.
Site preparation and disposition of fill
The site should be cleared of all topsoil and other unsuitable material.
Soft spots and hard spots, such as derelict foundations, should be removed together with ponds and surface water from depressions. Removing water by pumping
may be necessary when filling some excavations below the ground water level.
When a variety of material types are used as fill, they should be deposited in horizontal layers across the site. If there is only a limited amount of good granular
material, it will be best to use it in layers interspersed between layers of poorer cohesive fill.
Fill engineered to
reduced specification The fill thickness should be reasonably constant beneath a structure to minimise differential settlement.
Engineered Fill
Feather-edges, resulting in foundations set partly on fill and partly on natural ground, should be avoided, and the site worked in such a way that structures are
D
7025,26
located either directly on natural ground or directly over fill of a consistent thickness.
If fill is to be placed over sloping natural ground, some stepping of the ground may be necessary. Construction over the face of a quarry or an opencast mining high
Fill selection wall should be avoided.
Special measures may have to be taken by providing flexible connections for services at the location of high walls and by thickening construction for service and
Fill should be clearly categorised into material that may and may not be used: unsuitable fill, general fill, restricted fill and special fill. Fill materials estate roads.
must not present an environmental or health hazard.
Unsuitable fill should not be used at any location on the site. If the natural ground on which the fill rests is soft and compressible (for example, layers of peat or soft clay), the surface of the fill may settle appreciably and
unevenly as a result of the weight of the fill consolidating the soft layers below. This settlement will, of course, be additional to that resulting from the compression
General fill is all material except that which is unsuitable, restricted or special, and is normally the majority of the material used. It may include natural of the fill itself.
soils as well as some waste products.
Sensitive structures may warrant a surface (or capping) layer formed from special fill compacted to more onerous standards than the underlying fill. This should
Restricted fill is material that would be general fill except that it contains minerals hostile to the built environment. It can include natural materials such help minimise the differential settlement suffered by the structure.
as pyritic shales, sulphate-bearing clays and waste materials, including burnt colliery discard and steel slag. Its use is precluded where ground water
could rise to the underside of the deepest foundation, or where it is rejected for pollution reasons. For some developments, such as housing with
gardens, restricted fills would include fills that are harmful to people. Where landscaped or other non-load bearing areas form part of a development, they need less compaction than the load-bearing areas. There should be a
transition zone around the load-bearing area, as shown in Figure 1.
FOUNDATIONS
© MD
© MD Insurance
Insurance Services
Services Limited
Limited 2020
2020 44
FOUNDATIONS
3.5.2 ENGINEERED FILL: Quality control of fill placement
3.5.2 ENGINEERED FILL: Quality control of fill placement
Fill placement Modern compaction control requires laboratory and field testing during the Site Investigation, and during, and possibly following, the earthworks. The results of this work must be
recorded, collated and presented to demonstrate the quality of the operation. The required documentation includes:
Fill should be placed in horizontal layers, with each layer separately compacted.
· Summary of the specification requirements and the end product in terms of the selected geotechnical parameters for the various fills (based on-site investigation information).
For a given item of plant, compaction performance will be determined by fill layer thickness, fill moisture content and the · List of the required suitability tests; one form to be completed for each borrow pit under investigation.
number of passes of the compaction equipment. There are however, other factors such as the need to avoid excessive · Suitability test results for each borrow pit.
handling. · List of the required control tests.
· Results of the control tests on each fill type, layer or area, as appropriate.
Whenever possible, site trials should be undertaken to determine the correct criteria. Some general information about · A list of post-compaction monitoring requirements.
placing fills is given in BS 6031. · The results of post-compaction monitoring; all completed forms should be signed and dated by the person responsible and a list prepared of any required action or remedial
work to be carried out.
Each layer should be of a thickness that allows the compactive energy to spread throughout the layer, producing the
specified fill density and low air-voids content. Loose layers with a thickness greater than 250mm are unlikely to be
satisfactory for earth fills compacted to support low rise structures. It may be necessary to use layers of 200mm or less.
Figure 2 - Number of tests
Moisture content at the time of placing a fill is fundamental to subsequent performance, particularly where the fill contains 6
Test numbers for small
a large proportion of fine grained cohesive material. If the fill is too dry, there is the possibility of heave or collapse
Number of tests per 1000 m3 fill

quantities of fill to depend on
settlement; if it is too wet, there is the possibility of insufficient strength and high compressibility. It will be difficult to
achieve air-voids content of 5% or less when the moisture content is low. In the same way that the addition of too much 5 particular circumstances
water can detract from the performance of engineered fill, soil can be over-compacted.
Granular soils and cohesive soils drier than optimum, when rolled excessively, become over-stressed and what should 4
have been a firm compacted surface becomes a loose tilth. This should be avoided whenever possible. Where a fill
containing a large proportion of fine grained cohesive material (for example, clay) is used, filling during wet weather
should be avoided. 3
Quality control and testing of fill during placement

2
Quality control procedures should be implemented to ensure compliance with the specification. The nature of the control
procedure will depend on the type of specification adopted.
1
The end product specification requires an appropriate type and quantity of testing of the fill during placement to ensure 100 1000 10 000 100 000
that the desired end product is being achieved. Depending upon the type of contract, quality control may be the Compacted volume - m3
responsibility of the engineer or of the contractor working under the supervision of the engineer.
Control parameters should be the same as those determined during the site investigation stage. Both design and control Monitoring of fill performance - post compaction
parameters must be reproducible, a term that denotes the range within which measurements made on the same fill by
different operators using different equipment should agree. Monitoring provides a check on the performance of the fill after compaction and is particularly important where vulnerable structures are to be built or foundation loading is unusually
large. It is also required where the fill is relatively deep or substantial ground water rise within the fill is expected.
The following are the most significant control parameters:
Monitoring techniques include:
· Moisture content, in respect of an optimum moisture content established at the Site Investigation stage. · Surface levelling stations to measure the settlement of the fill surface.
· Dry density, in respect of the already established maximum dry density. · Magnet extensometers to measure the settlement of incremental depths of fill.
· Air-voids content, which depends on moisture content and dry density. · Standpipe piezometers to measure the rise in the ground water table in the fill after placement.
· Undrained shear strength, which is an alternative to monitoring moisture content and dry density for clay fills. · Load tests for direct estimation of settlement of surface layers produced by loadings.
The laboratory compaction tests and the associated field control tests are suitable for a wide range of fill types and form Surface levelling stations are easy to install and very effective. By optical levelling of the stations, measurement can be made of the total vertical movement of the fill upon which they
the most generally applicable approach. For cohesive soils, undrained shear strength forms an alternative basis for rest, together with any movement of the underlying natural ground. Although this is unlikely to be large if all soft material has been removed prior to compaction.
specification and control testing. However, different methods of measuring the undrained shear strength, such as the
unconfined compression test and the vane test, can give significantly different values. The measured value of cohesion Levelling stations should be sufficiently robust to resist damage due to construction traffic. A round headed bolt cast into a 1m concrete cube set 300mm into the fill has been found to
can be sensitive to a detailed test procedure, such as the rate of shearing. be effective.
It is important for the method of testing to be strictly specified. Where a cohesive fill contains gravel, it may not be possible Magnet extensometers are unlikely to be necessary in shallow-depth fill. Standpipes or piezometers will be of advantage if there is reason to suspect that ground water will rise into the
to obtain sufficiently undisturbed samples for strength tests. On larger sites, employing in-situ methods, such as the cone fill at any time in the future, with consequent settlement.
penetrometer (BS 1377: Part 9), could be considered.
Relevant British Standards and guidance documents
Small sites are generally more difficult to work than large sites, as finished work may be damaged more easily in confined
working areas and deficiencies in site preparation usually reflect more readily in poorer quality compaction than on larger Relevant British Standards Codes of Practice and authoritative documents include:
sites. Consequently, it is necessary to test more frequently on a small site than on a large one.
· BS 6031 Code of Practice for earthworks
A suggested minimum test frequency is presented in Figure 2. However, each site should be judged on its own merits, · BS 1377: Part 9 Methods of tests for soils for civil engineering purposes. In-situ tests
with careful note taken of any problems revealed during site investigation. In very variable or difficult conditions, more · BS 10175 Investigation of potentially contaminated sites - Code of practice
frequent testing may be required. Tests in visually doubtful areas, and re-tests of failed areas, should be carried out in · BS EN 1991 Actions on structures
addition to those recommended in Figure 2. · BS EN 14731 Execution of special geotechnical works. Ground treatment by deep vibration
· BS EN 1997-1 General rules
· BS EN 1997-2 Ground investigation and testing
· BS EN ISO 14688 Geotechnical investigation and testing - Identification and classification of soil
· BS EN ISO 14689 Geotechnical investigation and testing - Identification and classification of rock
· BS EN ISO 22476 Geotechnical investigation and testing - Field testing
· BR 391 Specifying vibro stone columns
· Institute of Civil Engineers (ICE) specification for ground treatment: Notes for guidance, 1987
· CIRIA C572: Treated ground: Engineering properties and performance, 2002
· CIRIA C573: A guide to ground treatment, 2002
· BRE 424: Building on fill: Geotechnical aspects
· BRE Information Paper 5/97: Collapse compression on inundation
© MD
© MD Insurance
Insurance Services
Services Limited
Limited 2020
2020 45 45 FOUNDATIONS
FOUNDATIONS
3.5.33.5.3 ENGINEERED
ENGINEERED FILL:
FILL: Buildingon
Building onfilled
filledground
ground
Introduction Reference Documents
The following guidance outlines recognised good practice in relation to building on fill. The structural design and construction should be in · Current Regional Building Regulations
accordance with the Functional Requirements of this Technical Manual and recognised publications from British Standards, Eurocodes, CIRIA, · BS EN 1997-1:2004 + A1:2013 - Eurocode 7: Geotechnical Design (EC7)
BRE and ICE. · BS 8004:2015 - Code of Practice for Foundations
· BS EN 1997-2:2007 - Ground Investigation and testing
Key requirements · BS 5930: 2015 - Code of Practice for Ground Investigations
· BS 1377-9:1990 - Methods of test for soils for civil engineering purposes. In-situ tests
The foundation scheme shall be designed to clearly demonstrate that the foundations are capable of supporting and transferring the design loads · BRE IP 5/97 - Building on Fill: collapse compression on inundation
safely to known soil strata that can be demonstrated from the appropriate project site investigation reports to be capable of carrying the load, using · BRE Building on Fill 3rd edition: geotechnical aspects
the appropriate soil properties obtained from geotechnical and load testing. · Department of Transport Specification for Highway Works, Part 2, Series 600 Earthworks
· Warranty Good practice guides, to ensure long term and differential settlement criteria remain compliant:
Groundworks shall be designed and validated by a suitably qualified Chartered Geotechnical Engineer to ensure that settlement will not exceed 25 · Raft Foundations (Long term settlement 25mm and 1/500 differential)
mm (10mm for piles) or differential settlement tilt greater than 1:500 for low-rise buildings unless more stringent criteria are required by the Project · Piling (Long term settlement 10mm and 1/500 differential)
Structural Engineer. · Vibro ground improvement (Long term settlement 25mm and 1/500 differential)
Partial depth foundation solutions where either piles or ground improvement techniques (i.e. vibro stone columns, vibro concrete columns etc.) Testing
terminate in the fill material, and do not penetrate to naturally occurring competent strata below, are not acceptable.
Testing is carried out to confirm that the ground improvement works meet the design criteria. The tests are usually completed to determine the
Made ground/fill material is inherently variable in nature and unpredictable when considering its settlement properties. Foundations proposing to ground bearing capacity.
bear upon made ground /fill as a formation for strip, trench or raft type foundations are unacceptable.
The engineer shall require the specialist contractor to verify that the ground treatment has been completed to a satisfactory standard. This will
Technical documentation required usually include carrying out suitable testing to establish the degree of ground improvement, its load-bearing characteristics and settlement potential.
These tests may include:
The following documentation shall be submitted to the Warranty surveyor for assessment. In the absence of approval, works proceed at the
Developer's own risk. Plate tests
1. Site Investigation Reports including site-specific recommendations for foundations to ensure long term settlement does not exceed 25mm
This test will not determine the design but will allow for an assessment of the workmanship on the stone columns. Plate tests should be carried out
(10mm for piles) or 1/500 (differential).
on stone columns or treated ground at a frequency of at least one test per day per rig.
2. Structural drawings:
a. Site layout plan including proposed finished floor levels for all plots. The plate tests should be carried out with a 600mm diameter plate and minimum test load of 11 tonnes.
b. Topographical survey confirming existing ground levels. Subsequent site level surveys indicating areas where earthworks are required
to achieve final construction levels. If piling or ground improvement techniques are to be adopted, piling platform and/or vibro platform
Mini zone tests
levels are required.
a. GA and RC drawings, including a drawing register sheet.
d. Piling & Vibro layout drawings (if applicable), including a drawing register sheet. A mini zone test (dummy footing) can be used as a limited substitute for zone tests. The test should be applied to at least two stone columns and
e. The design of the dwellings should allow a degree of articulation with movement joints sufficient to accommodate the maximum the area of foundation they support. To be useful, mini zone tests should be continued for long enough to establish the presence of creep
allowable differential settlement above, also at thresholds and service entries. behaviour.
3. Structural calculations:
a. Demonstrating that the ground bearing pressure does not exceed the allowable value specified in the Site Investigation Report. Mini zone tests (dummy footing) should be carried out at a rate of one test per 1000m2-3000m2 of treated ground, along with penetration tests at a
b. Piled foundation calculations (please refer to the 'Piling Good Practice Guide' available on our website). rate of one test for 20-50 stone columns, or one test for not more than 500m2 of treated ground, with a minimum of one test per structural unit.
c. Vibro foundation calculations (please refer to the 'Piling Good Practice Guide' available on our website). Alternatively, in the absence of penetration tests, one test per ten houses (with a minimum of two tests per site) would suffice.
4. Earthworks Specification including:
a. Confirmation that works are supervised by a suitably experienced independent Chartered Geotechnical Engineer. Zone tests
b. Proposals for load testing to determine the expected long-term settlement and differential settlement of the fill.
Please note: We consider that plate load tests do not confirm the expected long-term performance of the ground. An isolated pad or strip footing is used to test up to eight stone columns and the intervening ground. Loadings, which should simulate the building
c. Allowable bearing pressures, expected settlement and differential settlement. loads, are held for 24 hours at predetermined stages to examine creep behaviour.
d. Consideration of the effects of slag, burnt shale and expansive soils.
e. Consideration of self-weight settlement of the fill. In-situ tests
f. Collapse compression analysis in accordance with BRE IP5/97.
g. Details of any ground treatment (e.g. vibro treatment, cement-lime stabilisation etc.). Where vibration will improve the ground itself, e.g. granular materials, then in-situ testing is appropriate. The improvement can be assessed when
5. Geotechnical validation report including: the test results are compared with the in-situ test results recorded during the pre-treatment investigation.
a. Confirmation that all made ground and organic matter was removed.
b. Details of formation levels prior to filling works. Trial pits
c. Depths of all cut and fill carried out across the site with levels linked to the original site investigation.
d. Details demonstrating compliance with Clause 610 of the Specification for Highway Works (for structural fills).
e. Details and locations of all tests and interpretation by the Geotechnical Engineer. Trial pits can be excavated around trial stone columns to prove that they are fully formed and to the required depth and diameter. This is a
f. Confirmation of the bearing capacity achieved by the earthworks and confirmation that long-term settlement will not exceed 25 mm or destructive test, and allowance should be made accordingly.
1:500 differential settlement.
On completion of the treatment, the engineer is to confirm that the treated ground has achieved the anticipated condition assumed in the design,
If there are queries with regard to anything not covered within this document and/or it is intended to deviate from the above guidance, then please and provide evidence in writing to the Warranty Surveyor.
contact the Warranty Engineers for agreement prior to commencement. Following acceptance of the proposals, if anything is subsequently
discovered on site, which affects the design and/or construction, please contact the Warranty Surveyor immediately.
FOUNDATIONS
© MD Insurance
2020 2020 46 46
FOUNDATIONS
3. 3.6
Vibratory Ground
Foundations Improvement

3.6.1 VIBRATORY
3.6.1 VIBRATORY GROUNDIMPROVEMENT:
GROUND IMPROVEMENT: Ground
Groundimprovement
improvementtechniques
techniques
Introduction Vibratory techniques: dry top feed method
Ground improvement enables sites with poor load-bearing capacity to be strengthened; meaning the loadings of the proposed building can be adequately supported off
suitable foundations. The following guidance will be accepted as a satisfactory method of meeting the Functional Requirements of this Technical Manual.
The following situations are beyond the scope of this guidance:
· Where the original ground or sub-strata is unstable or will continue to settle. Compacted
Granular
· Sites with soft clays with a low bearing capacity (30kN/m2 undrained). zone
material
· Filled ground where high levels of voids are anticipated.
· Clay fill, where the water will influence the foundation or where collapse may occur.
Each development site has its own specific characteristics, and where conditions do not clearly fall within the guidance given, clarification should be sought from the
Warranty Surveyor or a suitably qualified and experienced expert.
Vibratory ground improvement
Vibro displacement using vibro stone columns is a method of enhancing ground bearing capacity and limiting settlement. Typical applications include the support of
foundations, slabs, hard standings, pavements, tanks or embankments. Vibrator displaces the ground Granular material is placed Existing ground is compacted
into the bore
Soft soils can be reinforced to achieve improved specification requirements, whilst slopes can be treated to prevent slip failure, both natural soils and made ground can be
improved.
In the dry top feed method, the vibroflot penetrates the weak soil or fill again using its mass, air flush and vibration to form
Vibro treatment should be carried out in accordance with the 'Institute of Civil Engineers: 1987 Specification for ground treatment: Notes for guidance' and to a depth a borehole. Once refusal or design depth is reached, the vibroflot is removed and stone fill is introduced into the bore, with
sufficient to reach an adequate bearing stratum. the 'charge' typically 500mm-800mm deep. The vibroflot is re-inserted and 'packs' the stone into the surrounding strata.
Successive charges of stone are added and compacted, bringing the column up to working level. Typically, the stone
Vibratory techniques grading is 40mm-75mm.
The vibratory process is applied to weak natural soils and filled ground with a view to improving the load-bearing capacity and providing an adequate bearing stratum for the
building's foundations. There are two vibratory techniques commonly used in the UK. These are known as the 'dry bottom feed' and 'dry top feed' methods; a third
technique, less frequently used in the UK, is known as the 'wet bottom feed' method.
Vibratory techniques: dry top feed method

Vibratory techniques: dry bottom feed method
Water Clean, hard,

Compressed jet inert stone
Clean, hard,
air inert stone
Void is formed as vibrator Stone backfill is placed into Continuous stone column
Void is formed as vibrator Stone backfill is placed into Continuous stone column displaces the ground void during withdrawal of formed
displaces the ground void during withdrawal of formed vibrator
vibrator
Where the ground contains fines and silts, water jetting from the tip of the vibroflot is used to remove loose materials and
form a cavity for charges of stone to be added to replace and densify the soft ground. The carbon footprint of this activity is
The dry bottom feed method is used in weaker soil conditions or where there is a high water table and the borehole is liable to collapse between vibroflot insertions. The
generally less than with comparable piling solutions.
vibroflot penetrates using its mass, air flush and vibration, but at design depth, the stone is introduced via a hopper into a pipe fixed to the side of the vibroflot. The stone
usually 40mm in size, exits the pipe at the tip of the vibroflot and reaches the bottom of the borehole. The stone is then compacted into the surrounding soil by repeated
withdrawal and insertion of the vibroflot.
© MD Insurance Services Limited 2020

48
FOUNDATIONS
FOUNDATIONS
3.6.2
3.6.2 VIBRATORY GROUND
VIBRATORY GROUNDIMPROVEMENT:
IMPROVEMENT:KeyKey
requirements and and
requirements documentation required
documentation required
Key requirements The intersection of adjacent reinforced concrete strips
The scheme shall be designed to clearly demonstrate that the foundations and treatment of the ground with vibro stone columns are capable of 2m 2m 2m
supporting and transferring the foundation design loads safely to known natural soil strata that are, in turn, capable of supporting the foundation loads maximum maximum maximum
using the appropriate soil properties obtained from geotechnical testing and contained in the appropriate Site Investigation report. The foundations and centres centres centres
vibro stone columns shall be designed in accordance with BS 8004:2015 and shall ensure that long term settlement does not exceed 25mm or 1:500
(differential) at working load, unless more stringent criteria are required by the Project Structural Engineer.
The following documentation shall be submitted to the Warranty Surveyor for assessment. Items 1-3d should be submitted prior to commencement of 2m maximum centres
vibro treatment on site. In the absence of approval, works are proceeding at the Developer's own risk. Items 3e-3g shall be submitted as soon as they
become available, prior to construction continuing over the piles.
1. Geotechnical Site Investigation report with appropriate geotechnical testing.

2. Foundation drawings and design calculations. Strip footings should be designed for the specified bearing pressures and be designed to span
between vibro stone columns.
3. Vibro stone columns:
a. Written confirmation from the vibro designer that the ground conditions are suitable for vibro treatment and that the Site Investigation report is
adequate for the purposes of the design and installation of stone columns. Strip foundations
b. Vibro stone column layout drawings.
c. Vibro design calculations confirming full-depth of made ground and soft/loose natural strata.
Foundation drawings and calculations should be prepared by the Structural Engineer indicating the required bearing capacity and settlement
d. Confirmation of proposed testing regime (i.e. plate and dummy footing tests etc., see notes below). A minimum of 1% of stone columns
characteristics for the purposes of design of vibro stone columns. In general foundations should be designed for maximum settlements of 25mm or
should be subject to dummy footing test.
differential settlement of 1 in 500 unless more stringent measures are required by the Structural Engineer. Strip foundations should be designed to span
e. Vibro installation logs (with vibro column numbers referenced to the vibro layout drawing). Logs should include date, column number, depth,
diameter, weight of stone and surface level. Confirmation of the platform level in relation to the finished floor levels and Site Investigations between vibro stone columns and must incorporate top and bottom reinforcement. Irrespective of the provision of vibro foundations, regard must be
and details demonstrating that all made ground and soft/loose natural strata. made to the requirements for building strip foundations near trees where heave protection is required. See the 'Foundations - Strip' guidance.
f. Copies of all testing carried out (with the locations referenced to the drawings) and interpretation of test results.
g. Written confirmation from the vibro designer that the as-built installation has achieved the required bearing capacity and settlement Please note: The vibro treatment must not be affected by the deepening of any foundations.
characteristics.
Vibro Design
Reference Documents
The ground must be suitable for vibro treatment (refer to the above mentioned references for details). Vibro stone columns should be designed in
· BS EN 1997-1:2004 + A1:2013 - Eurocode 7: Geotechnical Design (EC7) accordance with recognised methods (e.g. Priebe) and must extend through the full extent of filled or poor ground and reach natural competent ground.
· BS 8004:2015 - Code of Practice for Foundations Partial-depth treatment of made ground or poor strength (loose/soft) natural soils is not acceptable.
· BS EN 1997-2:2007 - Ground Investigation and testing
· BS 5930: 2015 - Code of Practice for Ground Investigations Vibro Testing
Geotechnical Site Investigation Report Testing should be carried out across the full site and cover all of the various ground conditions to confirm that the ground improvement works meet the
design criteria. The tests are usually completed to determine the ground bearing capacity.
A site specific geotechnical Site Investigation should take place and be in accordance with BS 5930/EC7 and extend into adequate strata beneath the
filled or poor-strength strata above. The investigation should include enough geotechnical testing to enable accurate geotechnical design of the vibro The engineer shall require the specialist contractor to verify that the ground treatment has been completed to a satisfactory standard. This will usually
stone columns in accordance with proven design methods. include carrying out suitable testing to establish the degree of ground improvement, its load-bearing characteristics and settlement potential.
Suitability of ground conditions Plate Tests should be carried out
Through the process of a Site Investigation, it should first be established by the appointed engineer or suitably qualified specialist that the ground is · With 600mm diameter plates loaded to 3 times working load or 11 tonnes, whichever is greater.
capable of being improved by a vibratory ground improvement technique. The Site Investigation should determine the depths and properties of the · At a minimum rate of 1 per 100 vibro stone columns or 1 per rig per day, or a minimum of 2 tests, whichever is greater.
natural materials under the site, including the presence of cavities, mines, rocks or soils that may dissolve or erode when water passes over them. · Note that plate tests do not provide a direct indication of the anticipated settlement of the completed structure and therefore can't be considered as
the sole means of load testing.
It should also be established at an early stage whether the site has previously contained any buildings or structures, and whether they have been
completely removed, including basement walls, floor slabs, etc. The presence and extent of any existing or redundant services and drains should be Dummy Footing Tests should be carried out
investigated, and the associated backfill to the excavations. In addition, the effect that any proposed sustainable drainage system (SuDS) might have on
the ground conditions should be identified. 2
· With 1500 x 600mm plates, loaded to at least 1.5 times working load (kN/m ) for a minimum period of 13 hours.
The engineer should supervise the Site Investigation, taking account of the findings of the desk study, and first establish whether there are any · At a minimum rate of 1 per 100 stone columns or 1 per 10 houses, whichever is greater.
contaminated substances or gases present. Data should be gathered using a suitable method for comparison with the site post treatment. Investigations
should be made into the presence, level and nature of any ground water, and if it is likely to rise and cause heave or collapse by saturation. Penetration Tests should be carried out
The extent of any areas of made-up ground on the site should be established, including: · At a rate of 1 per 20-50 stone columns or 1 test for not more than 500m2, with a minimum of 1 test for each structural unit.
· The proportions, compaction and distribution of constituent materials throughout its depth. · Penetration tests will not be required if dummy footing tests are carried out at the above rate.
· The grading and particle size distribution of fill materials.
· The potential for gas generation from fill materials, and the risk of combustion of natural deposits.
Trial pits
The appointed specialist contractor should be satisfied that the Site Investigation report provides adequate and representative information in order to
design the ground improvement. The results of the investigation should be presented to the Warranty Surveyor prior to the commencement of the work. Trial pits can be excavated around trial stone columns to prove that they are fully formed and to the required depth and diameter. This is a destructive
test, and allowance should be made accordingly.
The developer shall obtain written confirmation from the engineer and specialist contractor that the site is suitable for the proposed ground improvement
system, and that all detrimental factors associated with the site and the proposed development have been taken into account. On completion of the treatment, the engineer is to confirm that the treated ground has achieved the anticipated condition assumed in the design, and
This is to be made available to the Warranty Surveyor prior to the commencement of any work on the site. provide evidence in writing to the Warranty Surveyor.
Site workmanship
The specialist contractor should appoint an engineer to supervise the vibratory foundation works at all times and ensure that:
· The required depth and bearing capacity of stone columns are achieved.
· The stone columns are correctly located beneath the proposed foundation and in accordance with design drawings.
©©
MD Insurance Services Limited 2020 49 FOUNDATIONS
MD Insurance Services Limited 2020 49
FOUNDATIONS
3.6.3 VIBRATORY GROUND IMPROVEMENT: Key requirements and documentation required
3.6.3 VIBRATORY GROUND IMPROVEMENT: Key requirements and documentation required
Fill materials
The following materials require testing to ensure their suitability for use as fill to support structural foundations and slabs, or as backfill to
associated trenches:
· Acid wastes.
· Reactive materials.
· Materials that include sulphates (e.g. gypsum).
· Organic materials.
· Toxic materials.
· Materials that cause noxious fumes, rot, undue settlement or damage to surrounding materials.
The sample tests should be carried out by a suitably qualified person, and it may be necessary to take a number of samples to identify
the material characteristics of the fill accurately.
Sources of fill material
Where the material is of a stable and uniform type from one source, the testing regime may be reduced. However if the material is
variable, or from a number of sources, then regular inspections and/or testing may be required.
Recycled aggregate or other building materials, such as crushed brick, should only be used following an inspection by the Warranty
Surveyor.
Colliery shale and any other residue from mineral extraction or industrial process bi-products should only be used with specialist approval.
Suitable foundations for sites with improved ground
Foundations on sites with improved ground should either be of a reinforced strip or raft type. Both foundations will require a full design by
a Structural Engineer.
For 'low rise structures', the foundations should be designed to ensure a maximum settlement of 25mm is not exceeded.
In relation to differential settlement, a design limit for maximum tilt of 1/500 is appropriate. More stringent values may be required due to
the particular circumstances (e.g. medium and high rise structures).
Where foundations bear on cohesive soils or cohesive fill materials, the functional requirements regarding foundations trees and clay
should be met. Further guidance can be found in the 'Foundations - Trees and Clay' section.
Relevant British Standards and guidance documents
Relevant British Standards Codes of Practice and authoritative documents include:
· BS 6031 Code of Practice for earthworks.

· BS 1377: Part 9 Methods of tests for soils for civil engineering purposes. In-situ tests.
· BS 10175 Investigation of potentially contaminated sites - Code of Practice.
· BS EN 1991 Actions on structures.
· BS EN 14731 Execution of special geotechnical works. Ground treatment by deep vibration.
· BS EN 1997-1 General rules.
· BS EN 1997-2 Ground investigation and testing.
· BS EN ISO 14688 Geotechnical investigation and testing - Identification and classification of soil.
· BS EN ISO 14689 Geotechnical investigation and testing - Identification and classification of rock.
· BS EN ISO 22476 Geotechnical investigation and testing - Field testing.
· BR 391 Specifying vibro stone columns.
· Institute of Civil Engineers (ICE) Specification for ground treatment: Notes for guidance, 1987.
· CIRIA C572: Treated ground: Engineering properties and performance, 2002.
· CIRIA C573: A guide to ground treatment, 2002.
· BRE 424: Building on fill: Geotechnical aspects.
· BRE Information Paper 5/97: Collapse compression on inundation.

50
50
FOUNDATIONS
FOUNDATIONS
3. 3.7
Trees and Clay
Foundations

3.7.1 TREES AND CLAY: Risk of building on clay soils near trees
3.7.1 TREES AND CLAY: Risk of building on clay soils near trees
Introduction The soil
The following guidance is provided for foundation design when building near trees. Soils may be broadly classified into two types:
· Cohesive soils comprise mainly of clay or fine silt particles. When moist they are plastic and can be moulded, and will remain intact if placed into
Limitations of guidance water. As they dry, they will become stiffer, and will eventually crumble if dried beyond a certain point. These soils can potentially cause problems.
· Non-cohesive soils, comprised mainly of sand or with only a proportion of clay or silt, cannot be moulded and will break up if placed in water. They
Heave precautions must be incorporated into the foundation design as detailed in this Technical Manual. are not subject to significant swelling or shrinkage.
The following situations are beyond the scope of this guidance, and will require a site-specific assessment by a suitably qualified and experienced The clay component of cohesive soils can vary widely; very few soils are pure clay, but they contain varying quantities of sand or silt. Clay soils are
expert: defined by their particle size (less than two microns), and it is only these clay particles that will shrink or swell. The particles are made-up of a complex
· Foundations with depths greater than 2.5m within the influence of trees in cohesive soils (note: Mass Fill or Piled Foundations should be adopted). molecular lattice structure that is capable of absorbing water, and as it absorbs water the particles will swell, and vice versa. There are many different
· Ground with a slope greater than 1:7. types of clay with different molecular structures, and all of which have different swelling characteristics. The extent of swelling and shrinkage that can
· Manmade slopes, such as embankments and cuttings. occur will therefore depend on the type of clay particles and the proportion of clay, as opposed to silt or sand, within the soil.
· Underpinning.
· Engineered foundation designs. The potential of soil to swell or shrink can be determined by simple tests to determine its plastic limit (the moisture content below which it changes from
being plastic and mouldable, and starts to crumble) and liquid limit (the moisture content above which it changes from being plastic, and starts to flow like
Each development site has its own specific characteristics, and where conditions do not clearly fall within the guidance given, clarification should be a liquid). The plastic and liquid limits can be determined by simple laboratory tests in accordance with BS 1377. The difference between the plastic and
sought from the Warranty Surveyor or a suitably qualified expert. liquid limits is the plasticity index; the higher the plasticity index, the greater the potential volume changes.
Raft foundations Potential of the tree species to cause soil drying
Where a raft foundation is proposed, it must meet the following: Tree species differ in the ability of their roots to grow and exploit the available water in a cohesive soil, particularly if it has high clay content. This is
· The foundation depth should be determined using the guidance in this document and the online foundation depth calculator, and; commonly referred to as their 'water demand'. Species such as Oak, Poplar and Eucalyptus are deemed as high water demand as they are particularly
· If the resulting foundation depth is less than 1.5m deep and no foundation heave protection is required, a raft can be deemed suitable in this efficient at exploiting clay soils, rooting to considerable depth. A few species only rarely cause damage and are deemed of low water demand, whilst the
location and; majority fall into the moderate category.
· The raft toe must be at least 600mm below the ground and there should be at least 500mm of compacted stone beneath the toe (i.e. total depth for
excavation would be 1100mm or greater). Hardwood species tend to have a broad spreading root system, extending considerable distances laterally as well as to depth. By contrast, the influence
of most conifers is more localised, but just as deep. A few species (of both hardwoods and conifers) have intermediate characteristics. The guidance
Note: If the resulting foundation depth required is 1.5m or greater, structural raft foundations are not accepted as a suitable foundation. An alternative takes account of the different patterns of rooting, but it must be emphasised that the distribution of roots can be variable, meaning the guidance should
foundation design will be required. not be taken as indicating a 'zone of influence' of a tree.
Please use the following guidance to determine the required depth of foundations. Size of tree
Strip foundations The amount of water taken by the roots relates to the leaf area and the vigour of the tree. With open grown trees, height is usually considered the best
indicator of leaf area. The greatest water uptake occurs as the tree reaches maturity, and so 'mature height' is the determining factor. Individual trees
Conventional strip foundations may be constructed practically and economically to a maximum depth of 1.5m. However, strip foundations will not be within a group or row will have a smaller leaf area, but as they compete with each other, the mature height of the individual trees remains the relevant
suitable where heave precautions are required. factor.
Please note: Where building near trees in clay soils; If a required foundation depth is greater than 1.5m, 'heave precautions' in the form of a proprietary Although some trees are managed as pollards or are subject to periodic reduction to control their size, unless such treatment can be assured in the
compressible material must be placed on all inside surfaces of the peripheral foundations to allow for lateral soil swelling. In this instance strip future, mature height should be used.
foundations will not be acceptable and another foundation type should be selected.
Proximity
The nature of the problem
The closer the tree, the deeper the potential influence, and the guidance indicates the required foundation depth at any distance. The parts of the
foundations closest to the tree require the greatest depth, but if preferred can be stepped down for more distant parts.
The roots of all vegetation take water from the soil to make good the water lost from the leaves. If the soil contains clay, it will shrink as it is dried, or
swell if it is allowed to rehydrate. If the shrinking or swelling extends below the foundations, they will subside or heave respectively. If the movements are
in excess of those that can be tolerated by the building, damage is likely to occur.
Likely climatic conditions
Although all vegetation can cause soil drying, the roots of trees extend deeper and further and are thus particularly prone to causing damage. Large Weather conditions play a major role in determining the extent of soil drying. Hot sunny weather will increase the rate of water uptake by the roots,
shrubs can also root to considerable depths, but their influence is more localised. Herbaceous plants and grass can also cause soil drying down to 1.5m, whereas rainfall during the summer can restore the water that has been taken. As the hottest and driest conditions tend to be in South East England, it
and require some precautions. has the greatest risk. For other, wetter, parts of the country, the guidance allows for reducing the required foundation depth.
Damage is best avoided by increasing foundation depth to below the level where significant changes in moisture content are likely to occur. Root
barriers are not acceptable as an alternative solution.
This guidance defines the depths that are required and the most suitable types of foundations. The extent of soil drying can be variable and
unpredictable. If all risk of damage is to be avoided, the required depths would be punitive; instead, the guidance seeks to minimise the risk by striking a
balance between the extent of risk and the costs of increasing foundation depth.
The extent of risk depends on:

· The soil.
· The potential for the tree species to cause soil drying.
· The size of the tree.
· The proximity of the tree to the foundations.
· The likely climatic conditions in the locality.
The pile depth required to meet the Structural Engineers design requirements may well exceed the minimum depth required by the foundation depth
calculator.
These factors are considered in greater detail in the following sections.

52
52 FOUNDATIONS
FOUNDATIONS
3.7.2 TREES AND CLAY: Determining foundation depth in clay soils near trees
3.7.2 TREES AND CLAY: Determining foundation depth in clay soils near trees
Establishing ground conditions Foundation depths to allow for future tree planting
The British Geological Survey website (www.bgs.ac.uk) can indicate the likely soil conditions in any locality. Enter the postcode to locate the site, and a Where there is a landscape plan specifying future tree planting, foundation depths should be calculated on the basis of the proposed species of tree and
left click on the location brings up a box that shows the bedrock geology and the superficial deposits (if present). The name of the bedrock or superficial its proximity. If no species has been specified, they should be assumed to be moderate water demand.
deposits are often sufficient to indicate probable soil conditions (e.g. London Clay or Plateau Gravel), but if not, clicking on the name will bring up further
details.
Even if no tree planting has been specified, it is advisable to allow for reasonable future tree or shrub planting, or for the growth of self-seeded trees or
Unless there is clear evidence that a cohesive soil is not present, Site Investigations will be required to determine the soil type to at least the depth of shrubs, as shown in column 2 of Table 1.
potential influence of adjacent trees. Usually, trial holes are an acceptable method for determining the soil strata, but specialist Site Investigation reports If the building design or location is such that no tree planting is likely at any time in the future, minimum foundation depths, as shown in column 3 of the
are preferred if available.
table below, should be used.
Soil samples should be taken from at least two depths, at 1.5m and 2.5m (or the base of the trial hole, whichever is the shallower), and sent to a soil
laboratory for determination of plastic and liquid limit (and thus plasticity index). In addition, the moisture content of the samples is usually determined.
Table 1: Minimum foundation depths
The highest value of plasticity index should be used for determining foundation depth*. Also see 'Limitations of guidance' at the start of this section.
Minimum depth to allow for reasonable future Minimum depth if no future tree/shrub
Identification of trees Plasticity index
tree/shrub planting (m) planting likely (m)
Many Local Authorities will require a Tree Survey and Arboricultural Method Statement as part of the planning application. This will usually serve to
identify all relevant trees both on and off-site. If a tree survey is not available, assistance with identification of all of the more common trees can be >40 1.50 1.00
obtained from various websites:
20-40 1.25 0.90

Natural History Museum
www.nhm.ac.uk/nature-online/british-natural-history/urban-tree-survey/identify-trees/tree-key/ index.html
10-20 1.00 0.75
Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew
apps.kew.org/trees * Note: Where a minimum depth of 1.5m or greater is required: Strip foundations must not be used. Mass fill or Piled foundations must be adopted.
Science and Plants for School Foundation design

(Particularly useful for winter identification, using twig characteristics)
www-saps.plantsci.cam.ac.uk/trees/index.htm Depths in excess of 2.5m
Where the required foundation depths, are in excess of 2.5m, foundations must be designed by a suitable expert, i.e. a Chartered Structural Engineer,
If a tree cannot be identified, it must be assumed to have high water demand (deep rooting).
taking account of the likely effect of soil movement on the foundations and substructure. Short bored piles with ground beams are recommended, and
may prove to be the most economical form of construction. Short bored piles are an essential requirement for depths in excess of 3m. See the
Mature height of tree 'Foundations - Piles' section for further information.
The mature heights of common tree species are provided in our online foundation depth calculator. Mature height should be used unless an
Arboricultural report is obtained, indicating that a lesser height is appropriate for the conditions of the site. Foundation depths less than 2.5m
Mass fill foundations are likely to be most economic at depths below 1.5m, but can be economic to depths up to 2.5m. However, shored bored piles are
Woodlands, groups or rows with mixed species of trees recommended.
Foundation depth should be determined on the basis of the individual tree that requires the greatest depth.
For foundation depths in excess of 2m, short bored piles with ground beams are recommended. All pile designs should be undertaken by a suitable
Proximity of tree expert, i.e. a Chartered Structural Engineer. See the 'Foundations - Piles' section for further information.
Measurement should be taken from the centre of the trunk to the nearest part of the foundations. If preferred, foundations depths can be stepped down
at greater distances, by measurement to other locations around the building. Heave precautions
Allowance must be made for the probability that any existing tree is likely to die sometime during the life of the building. If the tree has dried the soil prior
Regional and climatic conditions to the foundations being laid, when it dies (or becomes over-mature) the soil will rehydrate and swell, causing upward or lateral heave movement of the
The foundation depth calculator will allow for regional and climatic conditions by entering the details of the post code of the proposed site. foundations. Severing roots within the footprint of a building foundation will also allow the soil to rehydrate.
Foundation Depth Calculator If foundation depth is greater than 1.5m, a proprietary compressible material must be placed on all inside surfaces of the peripheral foundations to allow
for lateral soil swelling, as shown in the details on the next page. Material is not required on internal foundations (as swelling pressures are likely to be
Foundation depth* (see also 'Limitations of guidance' at the start of this section) can be determined using the foundation depth calculator found on our similar on both sides).
website. The depth of foundation is determined by inputting the:
· Plasticity index of soil. For piled foundations greater than 1.5m, a proprietary compressible material must be placed on:
· Tree type (this will determine the water demand of the tree). · All inside faces of the external ground beams and,
· Mature height of the tree will automatically be determined. · The underside face of external and internal ground beams.
· Distance of the relevant tree to the nearest part of foundations and distances elsewhere if stepping foundations.
· Allowance for climatic conditions. The material must be capable of compressing to allow for lateral swelling, in accordance with column 3 of Table 2.
Internal walls should also be taken to a suitable depth to avoid the effects of heave. Ground bearing slabs should not be used in ground conditions where heave can occur or where the foundation depth is greater than 1.5m. Under these
circumstances, a suspended floor construction should be used (e.g. cast in-situ concrete, precast concrete or timber). This must incorporate either a
Where the foundation depth calculator identifies a minimum depth exceeding 1.5m, raft foundations and strip foundations must not be used. Mass fill or clear minimum void of a specified depth under the suspended floor or a proprietary compressible material/void former below the underside of the floor
piled foundations must be adopted. construction.
Note: the compressible material/void former must have a third party approval for use in this situation.
The depth of the void should be in accordance with Table 2, or if a compressible material is used, it should be capable of compressing to provide a void
of this thickness. The manufacturer's specifications must be checked to establish the actual thickness of compressible material required to both
accommodate movement and be able to compress to the dimensions in Table 2.
Note: On suspended floors where a minimum void dimension between the oversite level and the ground floor construction should be maintained, the
figures in Table 2 should be added to the minimum void depth to ensure that the minimum void depth is maintained after any potential heave has
occurred. See the 'Ground Floors' section for further information.

53
53 FOUNDATIONS
FOUNDATIONS
3.7.3
3.7.3 TREESAND
TREES AND CLAY:
CLAY: Heave
Heaveprecautions
precautions
Table 2: Minimum void dimensions for foundations, ground beams, and suspended floor slabs Plan of heave protection to a mass filled foundation
Depth of void below the

Thickness of void underside of edge beam or
Plasticity index of Required foundation depth against side of floor construction (mm)
soil (m) foundation or ground (or minimum resulting
beam (mm) thickness of compressible
material/void former) Compressible
material
>40 >2.5 Engineer design
2.0-2.5 35 100
1.5-2.0 25 75
Internal
20-40 >2.5 Engineer Design load-bearing wall
2.0-2.5 25 75
1.5-2.0 25 50
External wall
<20 2.0-2.5 - 50
<2.0 No special precautions
Typical foundation designs to allow for heave are shown in the following details.
Heave protection - Section through pile and beam foundation
Heave protection - Section through a typical mass filled foundation
DPC
Void to allow for

Void ground heave
Backfill
Backfill
Embedment of pile tension
reinforcement to be 40 bar
diameters or designed by
Engineer
Vertical face
to foundation
Compressible material or void
former to inside face of
Pile cap external ground beams Compressible
Pile sleeve material
Ground beam
Pile length to
Engineer's design Compressible material or void
former beneath ground
beams 500mm
FOUNDATIONS
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 54
54
FOUNDATIONS
3.7.4 TREES AND CLAY: Removal of trees, sloping sites and made ground
3.7.4 TREES AND CLAY: Removal of trees, sloping sites and made ground
Special situations Changes in level
Trees removed prior to construction Changes in ground level (either raising or lowering soil levels) beneath the branch spread of the tree can damage the tree, and should be avoided if
If trees have been removed prior to construction, precautions must be taken against potential rehydration and swelling of the soil. If they have been possible.
removed within 12 months of the foundations being laid, the design should be drawn up as if the tree was still present. If the height of the former trees is
known, the depth should be determined using actual height. If the identity is not known, it should be assumed to be of high water demand, and if height is If ground levels are altered in proximity to existing trees that are to remain, the foundation depth should be determined on the basis of the mature height
not known, it should be assumed to be 20m. of the tree and original ground level.
If trees have been removed more than 12 months prior to construction, precautions should be taken in accordance with Table 3. If ground levels are altered in proximity to trees that are to be removed, foundation depth should be determined on the basis of the existing height of the
tree and original ground level.
Table 3: Minimum void dimensions for foundations, ground beams, and Varying foundation depths
suspended floor slabs where trees have been removed As foundation depth depends on the proximity of the tree, the depth* (see also 'Limitations of guidance' at the start of this section) can be reduced in
steps with increasing distance. Steps should be in accordance with the 'Foundations - Mass Fill' section.
Thickness of void Depth of void below the underside of edge
Time since tree felled against side of beam or floor construction (mm) (or
Protection for drains
Plasticity index
(years) foundation or ground thickness of compressible material/void
beam (mm) former) In addition to the requirements of the 'Drainage' section, drainage near trees should incorporate additional provisions. Where there is a volume change
potential within the ground, the provisions include:
2-3 35 100
>40 · Increased falls to cater for any ground movement.
· Deeper and wider backfill of granular material.
4-5 25 75 · A drainage system that is capable of movement should heave and shrinkage occur.
· Drainage pipes should not be encased in concrete.
20-40 2-3 25 75 · Additional clearance is required where drains pass through the structure of a building to allow for additional movement.
Made-up ground
Sloping sites
This refers to land or ground created by filling in a low area with non-original soils or other fill material. Often, such created land is not suitable for building
without the use of specialist foundations. If there is high clay content within the made-up ground, specialist foundations may require additional heave
If the slope is greater than 1:7, foundations should be engineer designed. For slopes less than 1:7, distance should be measured down the angle of the
protection. It is also important to establish the depth of the made-up ground, because if it is a relatively shallow depth, the original soil below may be
slope. If there is a retaining wall, include the height of the retaining wall in the distance.
cohesive and within the zone of influence of the tree.
Measuring foundation distance on sloping sites Mass fill foundations in non-shrinkable soils overlying shrinkable soils
If non-shrinkable soils such as sand and gravels overlie shrinkable clays, increased foundation depths are not required if the depth of the non-shrinkable
soil is greater than 0.8 of the depth, which would be required for the underlying shrinkable soil. See details below for further clarification.
Foundation depth required to be taken down using foundation calculator and plasticity index of underlying clay
Measurement taken from centre Non-shrinkable Non-shrinkable

line of trunk to nearest part of soil e.g. sand soil e.g. sand
foundation gravel gravel
<Dx0.80
Measurement to follow the slope >Dx0.80
of the ground including retaining
walls
D D
Max 1:7 slope
Shrinkable soil Shrinkable soil

e.g. clay e.g. clay
© Insurance
© MD MD Insurance Services
Services Limited
Limited 20202020 55
55 FOUNDATIONS
FOUNDATIONS
CONTENTS
4.
Contents
Ground
4.1 Suspended Beam and Block
4.2 Ground Supported Slab
Floors 4.3
4.4
Suspended Slab
General Requirements for Concrete Floors
4.5 Suspended Timber


Workmanship W
1. Certification is required for any specialists works or systems completed by an approved installer. 1.
Materials
1.
Design
1. Ground floors shall be designed and constructed so that they:
a. Provide a suitable surface for normal dwelling activities;
b. Are structurally sound; De
c. Are durable and resistant to moisture; 1.
d. Have an adequate thermal performance;
e. Prevent the entry of hazardous substances from the ground into the building.

guidance.
GROUND FLOORS
GROUND FLOORS
4. 4.1
Suspended Beam and Block
Ground
Floors

4.1.1 SUSPENDED
4.1.1 SUSPENDED BEAMAND
BEAM ANDBLOCK:
BLOCK: Construction
Construction requirements
requirements
Influence of trees and clay Resistance to ground moisture
In clay soils if the foundation depth is greater than 1.5m, allowance should be made in the design for heave. This The precast beam and block substructure floor shall be designed to prevent water ingress. There are two common methods of achieving this:
must incorporate either a clear void of a specified minimum depth under the suspended floor, or a proprietary
compressible material/void former below the underside of the floor construction. Further guidance can be found in
the 'Foundations - Trees and Clay' section.
Method 1 - Damp proof Full fill cavity Partial fill cavity
Precast beam and block floors
membrane (DPM)
Site preparation
All topsoil and organic matter should be removed from beneath the suspended floor. The ground level should be at · A DPM should be provided beneath
least the same as the external ground level unless the ground below the floor is free draining.
the screed or insulation; the floor
Alternatively, a DPM linked to the DPC can be provided. void beneath the beams should be DPM lapped under DPC Floor screed
appropriately vented, ensuring that
Suitability of beam and block floors a cross flow of air between two Perimeter insulation Infill blocks
All beam and block flooring systems must have appropriate third-party certification. DPC min DPC min
external walls is achieved.
· The minimum area of ventilation 150mm above 150mm above
The manufacturer's details and specification for the floor must include: ground level ground level
should equate to at least 1500mm2
· Structural calculations for the floor indicating depth and centres of the precast floor beams. per metre run of external wall. This
· The minimum specification of walls supporting the beam and block floor.
· Specifications for the blocks infilling between the beams, including compressive strength and thickness of the roughly equates to an air brick
block. every 3m centres for a typical PVC DPC
Precast concrete
225mm x 75mm air brick. beams
All beam and block floors shall be installed ensuring that the following standards are met: · The ventilated void must have a
· Floor beams and blocks are grouted together using cement/sand slurry with a mix ratio of 1:6 respectively. minimum depth of 150mm from the
· The beam and block floor should not be used to support load-bearing walls. underside of the floor.
· All walls should be built off an appropriate foundation, as indicated in the 'Foundations' section.
· A suitable mortar bed is required where block work between the floor beams bear onto loadbearing walls, e.g.
perimeter walls.
· Holes must not be made through the floor beams and any service penetrations should pass through the holes
made in the infill blocks. Any gaps around service penetrations should be filled with concrete (ST3) mix before Solum
screeding.
Where beam and block floors are to be installed to areas with higher potential point loads such as garages,
additional reinforcing of the screed will be required to distribute loads effectively. This reinforcing should be of at Note: Cavity insulation must be installed to meet the manufacturers installation requirements
least an 'A' mesh quality, and the screed should be thick enough to give an appropriate depth of cover.
Damp proof courses (DPC)

Method 2 - No damp proof
DPC's should be laid on a mortar bed and correctly lapped at junctions and corners. The depth of lap should be the Note: Where the solum level is
membrane (DPM)
same as the width of the DPC. below the external ground line, a
suitable drainage provision to
DPC's should be of a flexible material that is suitable for its intended use, and the DPC should have appropriate Where no DPM is incorporated into the avoid build up of ground water
third-party certification. precast beam and block floor, the following Screed must be provided
provisions will apply: Insulation
DPC's should not bridge any cavities unless it is acting as a cavity tray. Where a cavity tray is required, please refer
to the 'External Walls' section for cavity tray, weep holes, and stop end requirements. Infill block Note: If ground conditions
· The beam and block floor must be laid
consist of clay soils and trees
above the DPC. DPC
Damp proof membranes (DPM) that are, were, or are likely to be
· The floor void beneath the beams present, the void under must
should be appropriately vented to Minimum
A DPM should be a minimum thickness of 1200g polythene and linked to the DPC with a minimum 100mm overlap. allow for heave potential in the
150mm
DPM sheets should be overlapped by at least 300mm. DPM's must be carefully protected where folded up the ensure that a cross flow of air between solum
perimeter walls, and lapped under the DPC particularly at door openings. Temporary protection should be given two external walls is achieved.
whilst exposed. The DPM should not be cut at the floor junction as this will prevent correct lapping with the DPC. · The minimum area of ventilation
Note: At party wall junctions,
should equate to at least 1500mm2 where required, the floor should
Other DPM's may be considered if they have appropriate third-party certification and are installed in accordance with per metre run of external wall. This have appropriate sound and fire
the manufacturer's instructions. roughly equates to an air brick every resistance in accordance with
3m centres for a typical PVC 225mm x the relevant regional Building
Insulation 75mm air brick. Regulations
· The ventilated void must have a
The insulation should be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and be durable enough to
minimum depth of 150mm from the
withstand the floor loadings and moisture.
underside of the floor. Note: Cavity insulation must be installed to meet the
Note: A number of insulation products require an additional DPM to protect the surface of the insulation. It is · The solum level must be at the same manufacturers installation requirements
important that this additional membrane is incorporated in these situations. level as the external ground level.
GROUND FLOORS
© MD ©
Insurance Services
MD Insurance LimitedLimited
Services 2020 2020 60 60
GROUND FLOORS
4. 4.2
Ground Supported Slab
Ground
Floors

4.2.1 GROUND
4.2.1 GROUNDSUPPORTED
SUPPORTED SLAB:
SLAB: Construction
Constructionrequirements
requirements
Ground bearing floor - insulation below slab Influence of trees and clay
Ground bearing slabs should not be used in ground conditions where heave can occur or where the foundation
Cavity insulation must be installed to depth is greater than 1.5m. Under these circumstances a suspended floor construction should be used.
meet the manufacturers installation
requirements Site preparation
DPM to lap under the DPC The ground beneath the floor should be stripped of all topsoil, organic matter or tree roots prior to filling and
compaction.
Cavity insulation to be taken
to bottom of floor level Suitable hard core would include inert quarried material such as limestone or granite. Recycled aggregates may be
Perimeter insulation
used, which include crushed concrete or broken brick; however, these must be completely free of contaminants and
plaster and should be delivered to site from a supplier that has a quality audit process in place.
Concrete slab 100mm minimum thickness
Materials available as a result of any site demolition should not be used as hard core beneath floor slabs unless
DPC min 150mm above ground specifically agreed by the Warranty Surveyor and only then if it can be demonstrated that the material is completely
level free of contaminants and plaster.
DPM minimum 1200 gauge
Hard core should be placed and compacted in 150mm nominal layers and be fully consolidated using a mechanical
Sand blinding compactor. A ground supported concrete floor will not be acceptable where the depth of the hard core exceeds
600mm and an alternative suspended ground floor construction must be used. Hard core material should not be
saturated and should be taken to ensure that the new walls are not disturbed by compaction of the hard core.
Clean inert hardcore back fill compacted in
All services placed under the floor construction must be suitably protected and sleeved where penetrating through
150mm max thick layers (must not exceed
the floor slab. DPM's must be correctly sealed around these penetrations.
600mm total thickness)
A DPM should be provided beneath all ground-supported slabs. DPM's should be a minimum thickness of 1200g
polythene and linked to the DPC with a minimum 100mm overlap. DPM sheets should be overlapped by at least
300mm. DPM's must be carefully protected where folded up the perimeter walls, and lapped under the DPC
particularly at door openings. Temporary protection should be given whilst exposed. The DPM should not be cut at
Note: If ground conditions consist of the floor junction as this will prevent correct lapping with the DPC.
clay soils and trees that are, were, or
are likely to be present, a suspended Membranes should be laid either onto a concrete slab or onto a minimum 5mm sand blinding (if laid below a floor
floor construction should be used slab).
Ground bearing floor - insulation above slab
Note: Where required the floor should Other DPM's may be considered if they have appropriate third-party certification and are installed in accordance with
have appropriate sound and fire the manufacturer's instructions.
resistance in accordance with the
relevant regional Building Regulations Insulation
Cavity insulation to be taken to
bottom of floor level
Insulation that is to be provided to ground floors can be placed either above or below the concrete slab. The
insulation should be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and be durable enough to withstand
Cavity insulation must be installed
to meet the manufacturers the floor loadings and moisture.
installation requirements
Note: A number of insulation products require an additional DPM to protect the surface of the insulation. It is
Screed important that this additional membrane is incorporated in these situations.
Vapour control layer Concreting of floors

DPC min 150mm Prior to concreting, any water or debris that may have collected on top of the DPM should be removed. Concrete
above ground level Insulation
should ideally be ready mixed and be of at least GEN3. Expansion joints should be provided in accordance with
'Appendix C - Materials, Products, and Building Systems' section.
DPM
Concrete slab DPC's should be laid on a mortar bed and correctly lapped at junctions and corners. The depth of lap should be the
same as the width of the DPC.
Hardcore
DPC's should be of a flexible material that is suitable for its intended use, and the DPC should have appropriate
third-party certification.
DPC's should not bridge any cavities unless it is acting as a cavity tray. Where a cavity tray is required, please refer
to the 'External Walls' section for cavity tray, weep holes, and stop end requirements.
GROUND FLOORS
© MD
© Insurance Services
MD Insurance Limited
Services 20202020
Limited 6262
GROUND FLOORS
4. 4.3
Suspended Slab
Ground
Floors

4.3.1
4.3.1 SUSPENDED SLAB:
SUSPENDED SLAB:Construction
Construction requirements
requirements
Influence of trees and clay
In clay soils if the foundation depth is greater than 1.5m, allowance should be made in the
design for heave. This must incorporate either a clear minimum void of a specified depth under
the suspended floor or a proprietary compressible material / void former below the underside of
the floor construction. Further guidance can be found in the 'Foundations - Trees and Clay'
section.
Damp proof courses (DPC) Cavity insulation must be

installed to meet the
Typical suspended slab manufacturers installation
DPC's should be of a flexible material that is suitable for its intended use and the DPC should
requirements
have appropriate third-part certification. Blue brick or slates will not be accepted as a DPC.
DPC's should be laid on a mortar bed and correctly lapped at junctions and corners. The depth DPM to lap under
of lap should be the same as the width of the DPC. the DPC
DPC's should not bridge any cavities unless it is acting as a cavity tray. Where a cavity tray is
required (e.g. over a telescopic floor vent) please refer to the 'External Walls' guidance for Perimeter insulation
cavity tray, weep holes, and stop end requirements.
Suspended reinforced in-situ slabs

600mm top layer of
Structural design mesh around perimeter
A cast in-situ suspended concrete slab should be designed by a qualified Structural Engineer.
The structural design should include the following information:
· Adequacy of walls that support the concrete slab (intermediate and perimeter walls).
· Suitable thickness, correct durability of concrete and correct provision of reinforcing. Screed
· Provision of anti-crack reinforcing to the perimeter of floors.
Site preparation DPC min 150mm Insulation

above ground level
The material below the proposed floor slab should be compacted sufficiently to support the
slab during the pouring and curing stages. Any backfill material should not contain any organic
matter, or contaminants that could react with the concrete or be susceptible to swelling, such DPM
as colliery waste.

Reinforced
DPM's should be provided beneath all reinforced suspended slab.DPM's should be a minimum suspended slab to
thickness of 1200g polythene and linked to the DPC with a minimum 100mm overlap. DPM engineered design
sheets should be overlapped by at least 300mm. DPM's must be carefully protected where Cavity insulation to be taken
folded up the perimeter walls, and lapped under the DPC particularly at door openings. to the bottom of the floor level
Temporary protection should be given whilst exposed. The DPM should not be cut at the floor
junction as this will prevent correct lapping with the DPC.
DPM (alternative
Other DPM may be considered if they have appropriate third-party certification and are
position)
installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Insulation
Insulation that is to be provided to ground floor should be placed above the concrete slab. Clean inert backfill
Insulation should be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and be
durable enough to withstand floor loadings and moisture. A number of insulation products Concrete cavity fill to be a NOTE: If ground conditions consist of clay soils and
require an additional DPM to protect the surface of the insulation. minimum 225mm below DPC trees that are, were, or likely to be present, the void
under must allow for heave potential in the solum.
Concreting of floors
Prior to concreting, any water or debris that may have collected on top of the DPM should be NOTE: Where required the floor should have
removed. appropriate sound and fire resistance in accordance
with the relevant regional Building Regulations.
The depth of concrete will vary depending upon the load conditions and the span of the floor.
The overall reinforced concrete slab design should be designed by a suitably qualified
Structural Engineer.
· The reinforced concrete should have a minimum strength of RC35 and be ready mixed
and delivered on-site.
· Site mixing is not considered suitable for concrete suspended floors.
· The poured concrete should be lightly vibrated and well tamped to ensure that no voids
are left within the floor slab.
The floor slab should be appropriately shuttered around its perimeter to enable a cavity to be
formed between it and the external wall. The shuttering can be expanded polystyrene (which is
removed once the concrete has set) or a proprietary shuttering system.
© MD Insurance Services Limited 2020 64 GROUND FLOORS

GROUND FLOORS
4.3.2 SUSPENDED SLAB: Slab reinforcement
4.3.2 SUSPENDED SLAB: Slab reinforcement
Reinforcing
Table 2: Minimum laps for reinforcing
Reinforcing cover
The main reinforcing bars must have a minimum concrete cover of 40mm. Suitable spacers should be provided to support the
reinforcing prior to concreting. Minimum laps for main reinforcing bars in fabric mesh (1)
Fabric Type Minimum lap (mm)

Cast in-situ suspended concrete floor -
reinforcing cover and support Secondary bar
B1131 500
Primary bar
B785 400
B503 350
B385 300
B283 250
40mm B196 200

cover to
reinforcement Note: (1) A minimum lap of 300mm is required for secondary reinforcing bars.
Concrete or plastic
spacers at max 1m
centres in both directions
Standard of fabric reinforcing

Typical reinforcing lap
Reinforcing fabric should be free from loose rust, oil, grease, mud and any other contaminants that may affect the durability of
the concrete. Reinforcing fabric should be of a 'B' mesh grade. This can be identified by the size of the primary and secondary
bars. Primary bars are spaced at 100mm centres and secondary bars are placed at 200mm centres, as indicated in Table 1.
Lapping of reinforcing
It is accepted that reinforcing can consist of a number of sheets that can be joined together as identified in Table 2. The depth
of cover may need to be increased to maintain minimum cover depending on the thickness of mesh reinforcing. All loose
reinforcement that acts as part of the reinforcing layers must be adequately tied together.
Table 1: Standard 'B' mesh reinforcing details
BS Primary Bar Secondary Bar

Reference
Spacing of Spacing of
Size (mm) Area (mm²/m) Size (mm) Area (mm²/m)
bars (mm) bars (mm)
B1131 12 100 1131 8 200 252
B785 10 100 785 8 200 252
B503 8 100 503 8 200 252
B385 7 100 385 7 200 193
B283 6 100 283 7 200 193
B196 5 100 196 7 200 193
© Insurance
Services Limited
Limited 20202020 65
65 GROUNDFLOORS
GROUND FLOORS
4. 4.4
General Requirements for
Ground Concrete Floors
Floors

4.4.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CONCRETE FLOORS: Stepped floors and damp proofing
4.4.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CONCRETE FLOORS: Stepped floors and damp proofing
Stepped party walls up to 150mm Stepped party walls up to 600mm

DPC
DPC Structural stability of wall to Project

Structural stability of wall to Project Engineers details
Engineers details High side
Ground floor slab to be
suspended if fill material
exceeds 600mm Max 600mm
Note: Where the fill exceeds

Max 150mm 600mm a traditional ground
bearing slab will not be suitable
High side
DPM
Low side Proprietary waterproof membrane

Low side
with suitable third party product
conformity Certification, that is
compatible with the DPC and DPM
DPM
DPC DPC
Joints between membranes should Joints between membranes should

be sealed in accordance with the be sealed in accordance with the
DPM DPM
manufacturers recommendations manufacturers recommendations
Where radon is present on site the

radon barrier should be continuous
through the party wall. Further
details should be provided in these
events.
Stepped party walls up to 150mm
Where the difference between finished floor level (FFL)/DPC does not exceed 150mm and the external ground levels are a minimum of 150mm below DPC in all locations, a waterproofing specialist solution is not required, however in sites where Radon is present it is important that
the continuity of the Radon barrier is maintained through the party wall.
Stepped party walls up to 600mm

Where the difference between finished floor level (FFL)/DPC does not exceed 600mm and the external ground levels are a minimum of 150mm below DPC in all locations, a proprietary waterproof membrane with suitable third party product conformity certification, that demonstrates
suitability and resistance to hydrostatic pressure, and that is suitable for the site conditions to ensure a grade 3 environment, should be adopted.
Stepped party walls exceeding 600mm

Where the difference between finished floor level (FFL)/DPC exceeds 600mm a waterproofing solution from a CSSW qualified waterproofing specialist should be provided, see the 'Basements' section for further information. The Waterproofing Specialist must take responsibility for
the design liability of the waterproofing and have appropriate professional indemnity cover which covers their business activities. They must also have an understanding of hydrogeology and soil mechanics and hold a relevant professional qualification i.e. Certificated Surveyor in
Structural Waterproofing (CSSW) or similar.
© MD
© MD Insurance
Insurance Services
Services Limited
Limited 2020
2020 67 67 GROUND
GROUND FLOORS
FLOORS
4.2 4.4.2 GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS FORFOR CONCRETE
CONCRETE FLOORS:
FLOORS: Floorscreeds
Floor screedsand
and tiling
tiling
Floor finishes Maximum areas of screed
Screeds should be laid room by room. Unreinforced screeds should have a maximum area of 40m2. Expansion joints should be
Screeding provided and consistent with joints in the floor slab below.
Traditional floor screeds consist of sand and cement. If the ratios and properties of these screeds are not correctly controlled; cracking,
peeling or collapse of the screed will occur (due to being too strong/weak). Finishing of screeds
Screed should provide an even surface as appropriate, as defined in the 'Tolerance' section. Concrete floor slabs may be suitably
Proprietary screeds typically are pre-blended to achieve greater consistency and strength and more suitable over larger areas. As such finished to serve directly as a wearing surface without the need for an additional topping, in accordance with the recommendations of
2
where the floor area exceeds 50m only a proprietary screed installed by the screed manufacturers trained installers will be accepted. BS 8204. If required, surface sealers or hardeners should only be used in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Screeds should be fit for purpose, have a suitable finish and be of an appropriate thickness. Tiling on anhydrite (liquid) screeds
If an anhydrite screed is used, it must be sealed before the application of any cement based tile adhesive is proposed. Anhydrite
Curing screeds can be difficult to identify once laid, if the screed type cannot be identified the screed should be fully sealed as a precaution to
Screeds should be cured naturally and should not be covered for at least three weeks. prevent the possibility of the tiling adhesive debonding from the screed.
Background surfaces The floor screed should be fully dry before the sealant is applied. The screed drying time will depend on the thickness and type of
Background surfaces where screeds are being supported should meet the following requirements: screed.
· Bond A decoupling membrane is also recommended as this can reduce the stress on the tiling layer.
Background surfaces for bonded screeds should provide an adequate mechanical key. If necessary, cement grouting or a
bonding agent should be specified to provide adequate adhesion. Where bonded screeds are used, mechanical means of Insulation
preparing the concrete should be used to create an adequate bond between the substrate and the screed. Insulation below screeds should have enough compressive strength to support the screed. DPM's should be installed in the correct
positions, as indicated by the insulation manufacturer's instructions. Sound insulation should be installed in accordance with the
· Moisture protection manufacturer's instructions.
The floor design should ensure that moisture from the ground does not enter the dwelling.
Constructing screeds over all substrates:
· Adequate support
Substrate structures must be adequately constructed to provide adequate support to the screed. (Note: Timber floor constructions · Substrates must be level with no pockets or high spots to ensure the thickness of the screed remains even.
are not suitable to support screeded finishes). · Where screeds are laid over insulation; the insulation must be tightly butted together and level.
· Screeds must be correctly mixed.
· Screeds must not be walked on during the drying period.
· Screed mix · Screeds must not be constructed during cold periods (below 5 degrees).
Cement and sand screeds should have a mix ratio of between 1:3 and 1:4½. · Movement joints will be required across door thresholds.
· Movement joints are required if bay sizes exceed 40m2 with a maximum of 8m on any one side.
Proprietary additives should have been assessed and have third-party certification. · Movement joints are also required where joints exist or a change of span occurs e.g. beam and block floors.
· The screed must be ready to accept any floor tiling (see guidance below for over insulated substrates).
The minimum thicknesses of screeds are as follows:
Drying times
Screed thickness requirements
· With cementitious levelling screeds, one day should be allowed for each millimetre of thickness for the first 50 mm, followed by an
Surface Minimum thickness at any point (mm) increasing time for each millimetre above this thickness (BS 8204).
· Polymer modified screeds: strictly follow the manufacturer's specifications and recommendations.
Laid monolithically with base 12 · The developer should keep an accurate record of the screed drying times elapsed before floor tiling is laid and the Warranty
surveyor may ask for this information.
Laid and bonded to a set and hardened base 20
Note: The moisture contents of levelling screeds onto which particular floorings are to be laid and methods for measuring moisture
Laid on a separating membrane (e.g. 1000g polyethylene) 50
content are given in BS 5325, BS 8201, BS 8203 and BS 8425.
Laid on resilient slabs or quilts (screed reinforced with galvanised wire mesh) 65
Building services
Where service pipes are bedded in the screed, the screed should be deep enough to provide at least 25mm of screed cover over Where building services pass through the screed e.g. underfloor heating, allowance should be made for thermal movement between the
screed and the service (so that service pipes can resist chemical attack from the screed).
service pipes, insulation and reinforcing.
Additional steps where constructing screeds over concrete substrates
Where a concrete slab is insulated from below and a finishing screed is required to the top surface:
· The concrete substrate slab must be of the correct thickness and not less than 100mm thick.
· Concrete substrate must be adequately dried out and not wet. See drying time guidance.
· Surfaces of hardened in situ concrete bases for bonded screeds should be roughened (Scrabbled) and cleaned to remove laitance
and to expose cleanly, but not loosen, the coarse aggregate particles.
· Brushing to remove laitance from a fresh concrete base is inadequate preparation before laying a bonded screed and is not
recommended.
· Remove all loose debris, dirt and dust by appropriate means, preferably with vacuum equipment.
· Carry out the preparation of the surface with as little delay as is practicable before the screed is laid so as to reduce the risk of
contamination.
· The surface of the prepared slab must be reasonably level to avoid deviations in thickness's of the screed.
GROUND FLOORS
© MDServices
MD Insurance Insurance Services
Limited Limited 2020
2020 68 68
GROUND FLOORS
4.4.34.4.3 GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS FORCONCRETE
FOR CONCRETE FLOORS:
FLOORS: Floor
Floorscreeds,
screeds,tiling,
tiling,and
andunder floor
under heating
floor heating
Constructing screeds over insulated substrates with under floor heating (UFH) system and tiled floor finishes 2. Provision of edge strip perimeter expansion joint - tile level (floor finish)
1. Provision and construction of movement joints When incorporating under floor heating (UFH):
Movement joints should be provided in the floor screed/tiling where floor heating is provided in the following places: · Screeds should be isolated at all edges, abutments and columns to allow for movement due to thermal loadings.
· The floor screed and tiling (floor finish) manufacturers guidance to be followed particularly when incorporating under-floor heating to determine
· Between independently controlled heating zones.
the minimum thickness of edge strip required to allow for expansion. Typically, between 6-15mm may be required.
· Between heated and unheated areas of screed.
· Additional joints should be considered in areas of high thermal gain e.g. large conservatories or glass atria. · The joint can be concealed by the skirting.
· These joints must be left empty, or else filled with a compressible material.
Bay joints should be formed using rigid joint formers where possible, which can be placed during the preparation phase and will remain in place during · Movement joints must not be filled with grout.
operation. The joint former should be 5mm lower than the finished screed depth to allow a smooth transition in height between bays.
3. Screed drying time
· All joints in the screed should extend through to any subsequent bonded floor covering.
· Joint positions should be specified prior to the installation of the screed and full consultation between all parties including the main contractor, · The drying time allowed must be calculated for the proposed depth of screed, taking account of the environmental conditions present e.g.
underfloor heating installer, finished flooring installer and the screed installer should take place to determine appropriate locations.
temperature and humidity. Where polymer modified type screeds are being used the manufacturer's requirements must be strictly followed for
· Movement joints should be carried through the subfloor to the floor finish and all applied layers terminated either side of the joint.
· The joint should be filled with a suitable flexible filler and a proprietary cover strip applied to cover the joint. Grout must not be used. the actual depth of screed. Surface finishes placed on a screed too early will fail.
· Movement joints should not be bridged by any resilient, textile or other adhered floor finish. · Drying times for polymer modified screeds could potentially be different to cementitious screeds.
· Movement joint covers may be flush, surface mounted or bedded in mortar and metal, metal with a rubber insert or PVC (see typical detail below). · All subcontractors involved with the screed and floor finishes (including installation of underfloor heating systems) must follow the installation
requirements and not deviate or change materials.
Typical movement joint covers · The screed should not be walked on until fully cured.
4. UFH testing and commissioning
· Ensure there are no joints in the heating system loops.

· UFH systems should be commissioned before tiling is applied. This will add to the total time before any tiling finish can be applied.
Note: If floor finishes are installed prior to the UFH being turned on and commissioned, any residual moisture in the floor is driven to the surface
of the screed and can potentially cause delamination of the floor finish.
· Pressure testing of the system does not constitute commissioning of the system. The heat source has to be in place and operating in order to
deliver the correct temperatures.
· The UFH system must be commissioned in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations by their approved installers. A commissioning
certificate will be required.
5. Moisture testing of the screed where floor tiling is proposed
· Moisture testing should be carried out after the commissioning of the UFH system but before any tiles are laid.
· Where UFH is not installed, moisture testing of the screed should still be carried out before tiling.
· Moisture testing is carried out using a suitable approved method such as a flooring hygrometer or carbide bomb test. Due to the potential
inaccuracies of using hygrometers at high humidity levels, a direct measurement should be used such as Carbide Bomb or oven dried sample.
· The base is deemed to be sufficiently dry when the relative humidity, as measured by a surface mounted flooring hygrometer/probe is 75% RH
or less. For the use of a flooring hygrometer, reference should be made to Dampness testing in BS 5325, BS 8203, BS 8425 and BS 8201.
· If underfloor heating is present in the base, the heating must be switched off 96 hours prior to any hygrometer test being carried out.
· The hygrometer must be allowed to remain in position until full equilibrium has been established. This is generally considered to be 72 hours but
could be longer over thick sections and considerably longer on power floated concrete.
6. Screed preparation for finishes
· The top surface of screeds may require to be scored, sanded or keyed in preparation to accept the primer and floor tiling adhesive.
· Sanding, keying etc. of the screed surface allows the penetration of primers. It also provides a “key” for the adhesive to grip onto.
· The surface must then be cleared of dirt and debris prior to primers being applied.
· Any primers and adhesives must not be applied until the screed has fully hardened and dried out. Drying times vary depending on the type of
screed.
· Surfaces to be tiled should be rigid, dimensionally stable, flat with no dips and rises, sound, clean and free from laitance, paints, salts, grease,
Slit dust and any contamination which may prevent adhesion.
Pipe 7. Application of the flexible tiling adhesive using double gluing technique
Sleeve Tile fixing should be carried out in accordance with BS 5385 and BS 8000 Codes of Practice for the installation of wall and floor tiles.
· The tiling manufacturer's specifications for fixing should be followed, e.g. travertine tiles may require double gluing. Large sized tiles may also
require this fixing method.
Sleeve
· Double gluing (applying adhesive to the underside of the tile and also the substrate) may be necessary.
Cut to enable fitting · The adhesive must be used to the manufacturer's recommendations.
· The adhesive will require to be compressed by the tile to ensure full adhesion.
Expansion joint (edge insulation) · Large voids must be avoided when fixing tiles.
· Floors should not be opened to traffic until the adhesive has hardened.
© MD Insurance Services LimitedLimited

2020 2020 69 69 GROUND FLOORS
GROUND FLOORS
4.4.44.4.4 GENERAL
GENERAL REQUIREMENTSFOR
CONCRETE FLOORS:
FLOORS: Floor
Floorscreeds,
screeds,tiling, and
tiling, under
and floor
under heating
floor heating
8. Full contact of the tile and adhesive
· The adhesive will require to be compressed by the tile to ensure full adhesion and solid bedding without creating voids.
· Thin-bed method with adhesive and notched trowel: Verify that there is full contact between the adhesive and the piece base.
9. Adhering to the manufacturers' process during the installation of the flooring
All the relevant manufacturers recommendations should be followed which will identify timelines to adhere i.e:
· Removing the laitance by sanding to provide a key for the primer and/or adhesive.
· Commissioning the underfloor heating before tiling commenced.
· Allowing the UFH system to cool down for at least 48 hours before tiling commences.
· Moisture testing to confirm the dryness of the screed before tiling commenced.
· Ensuring the time from screed completion to tiling commencement is calculated and adhered to.
· Ensure the tiling adhesive is allowed to set before the tiling is walked on (typically 12 -24 hours dependent on environment conditions).
· Ensure the UFH system is not turned on for at least 48 hours after the tiling is completed.
· If an anhydrite screed is used, it must be sealed before the application of a cement based tile adhesive if proposed in conjunction with a tiled
floor surface covering.
10. Exceeding the Maximum 27°C floor temperature
The underfloor heating system must be correctly commissioned to ensure temperature fluctuations are avoided and potential damage to the floor
finishes.
BS 8203 Code of Practice for the Installation of Resilient Floor coverings states: When used with many flooring materials underfloor heating can
cause problems if the temperature at the interface between the subfloor and flooring exceeds 27°C, or is subject to rapid fluctuations in
temperature.
Where a resilient floor covering is proposed: 'the temperature should never exceed the agreed maximum of 27°C at the underside of the
floorcovering (the adhesive line).
Note: UFH designers may refer to this as the 'interface' temperature.
Please Note: BS EN 1264 - 2 refers to a max 29°C however for Warranty purposes a maximum 27°C is to be followed.
11. End user information
End users must be aware of how to use an UFH system, as these need to be operated differently than other heating systems both for in use and to
avoid damage to screeds and finishes.
GROUND FLOORS
© MD Insurance
4. 4.5
Suspended Timber
Ground
Floors

4.5.1 SUSPENDED
4.5.1 SUSPENDEDTIMBER:
TIMBER:Suspended
Suspended timber
timber floor
floorconstruction
constructionrequirements
requirements
Influence of trees and clay Sub floor ventilation requirements
In clay soils if the foundation depth is greater than 1.5m, allowance should be made in the design for heave. This must incorporate either a clear minimum void of a specified depth
To prevent decaying floor joists, sub-floor ventilation must be provided and give a free cross flow of air.
under the suspended floor. Further guidance can be found in the 'Foundations - Trees and Clay' section. External air bricks should be provided in two opposing walls and must meet the provision detailed in Table 1.
Durability of suspended timber floors
To prevent the decay of timber joists, the suspended timber floor should be constructed in such a way that: Table 1: Suspended timber floors: minimum cross ventilation provision
• All joists and wall plates are above the DPC level.
• A minimum void of 150mm is provided between the joists and oversite.
• Air bricks are provided to give adequate cross ventilation to the floor void. Floor area of building (m²) Minimum ventilation provision (mm²)
• Joists have adequate bearings and do not protrude into the cavity.
40 20,000
60 30,000
Suspended timber ground floor - perpendicular to wall
80 40,000
Rigid insulation
100 50,000
Floorboard
Cavity tray 120 60,000
locally over Non rigid insulation
airbrick 140 70,000
Suitable approved
netting support 160 80,000
Air bricks should be evenly spaced along the two opposing walls that meet the ventilation provision. Typical
Cavity insulation Depth of DPC
ventilation areas for various types of air bricks are identified in Table 2.
to extend to the insulation
bottom of the to meet Honeycomb
floor insulation required sleeper wall to be
150mm u-value built off suitable
DPC min 150mm Battens to support foundations or
Airbrick insulation board min Table 2: Typical air brick net ventilation area capabilities (ventilation rates vary between
above ground level void thickened concrete
slab, if strata is different manufacturers)
suitable
Air brick type Dimensions WxH (mm) Net area (mm²)
100mm min thick 225x75 1400
concrete slab
Clay air brick square holes 225x150 4300
NOTE: If ground conditions consist of clay Compacted clean
soils and trees are, were, or likely to be inert hardcore 225x225 6400
present, the void under must allow for heave
225x150 2000
potential in the solum Clay air brick louvred
225x225 6400
PVC air brick 225x75 4645
Floor joists The cross flow of air must not be interrupted by internal walls or low hanging insulation. All internal walls must
have air bricks to allow the free flow of air, or be built using a honeycomb technique.
All floor joists must be of a suitable durability and strength grade (minimum C16), be of the correct size and stress grade and be laid at the correct specified centres as indicated on
plans and specifications. The joists should have consistent dimensions and be securely nailed to timber wall plates.
Joists at the junction with the external and party walls should be supported on suitable joist hangers and be adequately strutted at mid-span.
Floor joists can be supported internally by sleeper walls. Sleeper walls should be built off an adequate foundation if the ground is of suitable bearing strata, or can be built of a
reinforced thickened slab where designed by a Chartered Structural Engineer.
© MD©Insurance Services Limited 2020 2020 7272 GROUND FLOORS

MD Insurance Services Limited
GROUND FLOORS
4.5.24.5.2 SUSPENDED TIMBER:
SUSPENDED Damp
TIMBER: Dampproof
proofcourses
coursesand
and underfloor solumrequirements
underfloor solum requirements
Suspended timber ground floor - bearing onto an external wall Concrete oversite
Joists at the junction with the external A suitable oversite should be provided at least 150mm below the timber suspended floor.
Cavity tray and party walls should be supported on
locally over suitable joist hangers and be adequately The oversite should be either:
airbrick strutted at mid-span
Floorboard · 100mm thick concrete over-site (GEN 3) on well-compacted hard core, or;
· 50mm thick concrete over-site on a 1200g DPM laid on 25mm sand blinding and
Non rigid insulation supported by well-compacted hard core.
suitably approved netting system
Cavity insulation DPC For sites that are susceptible to gas migrations, the oversite should incorporate gas
to extend to the protection measures designed by a suitable specialist.
bottom of the Honeycomb
floor insulation sleeper wall to be Where the joists are supported on joist type hangers
built off suitable
150mm
DPC min 150mm foundations or It is necessary to ensure that:
Airbrick min
above ground level thickened concrete
void
slab, if strata is · The hanger is bedded directly on the masonry and there is no gap between the hanger
suitable back-plate and the face of the masonry.
· At least 450mm of masonry is provided above the hanger or as per manufacturer's
100mm min thick requirements.
concrete slab · Hangers are spaced at centres of floor joists included in the design.
· The hanger is suitable for the loadings and masonry strength.
NOTE: If ground conditions consist of clay Compacted clean
soils and trees are, were, or likely to be inert hardcore Do not:
present, the void under must allow for heave
potential in the solum.
· Apply load while the mortar is still green and has not gained sufficient strength.
· Use brick courses in block walls under joist hangers as the thermal insulation of the
wall may be reduced unless similar units to the blocks are used.
Typical restraint type joist hanger

Maximum 6mm gap between
Damp Proof Courses should be of a flexible material that is suitable for its intended use and the DPC should have appropriate third-part certification. Blue brick or slates will not joist and hanger
be accepted as a DPC. Bed hanger
directly on to
DPC should be laid on a mortar bed and correctly lapped at junctions and corners. The depth of lap should be the same as the width of the DPC. blockwork
DPC should not bridge any cavities unless it is acting as a cavity tray. Where a cavity tray is required (e.g. over a telescopic floor vent) please refer to the 'External Walls' section
for cavity tray, weep holes, and stop end requirements.
Stepped floors Joist fixed to

hanger
For lower ground floors on sloping sites and semi basements timber suspended ground floors are not recommended.
No gap between
joist hanger and
wall

GROUND FLOORS
4.5.3 SUSPENDED
4.5.3 SUSPENDED TIMBER:Strutting
TIMBER: Struttingand
andfloor
floor joist
joist sizing
sizing
Strutting of joists with a span between 2.5m and 4.5m Strutting or bridging of solid timber floor joists
1 row of strutting at Where the span of a floor joist is more than 2.5m, strutting is necessary. This should be provided either by timber bridging
mid span or strutting in accordance with Figure 3 of BS 8103-3: 2009 or by a proprietary system.
1 Timber strutting can be in the form of solid bridging of at least 38mm basic thickness and with a depth equal to at least
2 span
Where the span of a floor joist is more than three-quarters of the depth of the joists; or it can consist of herringbone strutting with members of at least 38mm by 38mm
Support 2.5m, strutting is necessary. This should be basic size. Herringbone strutting should not be used where the distance between the joists is more than approximately
three times the depth of the joists.
provided either by timber bridging or strutting
in accordance with Figure 3 of BS 8103-3: Deflection of floors
Joists 2009 or by a proprietary system.
For timber floors (intermediate floors), designers and engineers must observe our tolerance requirements for levelness of
floors. Please refer to the 'Tolerances' section for further guidance.
There may be an instance where a joist might be designed to meet permissible deflections within a relevant British
Standard; however, our tolerance requirements will take precedence.
Strutting
Floor Joists Typical trimming detail (plan)
For advice on 'sizing of certain timber members in floors for dwellings',

the Designer should refer to the following sources:
Support (as calculated
· Span tables for solid timber members in floors, ceilings and roofs by Structural Engineer)
(excluding trussed rafter roofs) for dwellings. Published by
2.5m - 4.5m TRADA. Note: Reference should be made to the version of the
span TRADA document current at the time of construction of the floor /
timber or roof. Joist hanger
Strutting of joists with a span over 4.5m 2 rows of strutting at one third · BS 8103-3, Structure design of low rise buildings, Code of
span positions Practice for timber floors and roofs for dwellings.
· BS EN 1995-1: 2004+A1, Eurocode 5 design of timber structures.
1 1 1
3 span 3 span 3 span General: Common rules and rules for buildings.
Support To prevent the distortion of finishes, joists should be stopped from
twisting over supports and provision provided to accommodate up to
12mm of drying shrinkage in floor joists supported by steel beams.
Joists
It is essential that joists are not overloaded during construction. Joints
in joists should only be in place over a load-bearing support, or the
joint be designed by a qualified Structural Engineer.
Joists should be restrained at supports using tightly fitted strutting.
Strutting
Joists should have a minimum end bearing of 90mm, unless joist hangers are used, where a 35mm bearing is
acceptable (subject to the manufacturer's details).
Double joists should be bolted together at 600mm centres using minimum 10mm diameter bolts with large washers that
will prevent the bolt head and nut from penetrating the joist. It is recommended that the bolting of double joists is along
the centre line of joists. Suitably sized trimmer joists shall be provided around floor openings.
Trimmed openings may be needed around chimneys. Solid trimmed joists may be supported using either joist hangers
over 4.5m span or a structurally designed connection; timber trimmers around openings should consist of at least two members and be
designed by a Structural Engineer.
Where the span of a floor joist or flat roof joist is more than 4.5m, two rows of strutting at 1/3rd the span position will be necessary
© MD ©
Insurance Services LimitedLimited
GROUND FLOORS
4.5.44.5.4 SUSPENDED TIMBER:
SUSPENDED Notching
TIMBER: Notchingand
anddrilling
drilling
Permissible area for notching of joists
0.2 x span max
Floor joist
0.1 x span Maximum depth of notch

min should be 0.15 x joist depth.
Notching and drilling in solid timber joists basic guide

Maximum
depth
Requirements for notching and drilling of solid timber joists (further guidance can be found in BS 8103, TRADA span
250mm
tables, BS EN 1996 and PD 6693 - 1), this guidance is for joists up to 250mm deep, notching and drilling for joists
exceeding this depth should be designed by a Structural Engineer.
Notches: Notches should be made in between 0.1 and 0.2x span. Notches should be no deeper than 0.15x depth of
the joists in this area. e.g. For a 250mm deep joist, the maximum notch depth should not exceed 35mm.
Bearing No hole to be closer than Holes: Holes should be drilled on the centre line of the joist. Holes should be between 0.25 and 0.4 x the span. Holes
area 100mm to any notch (and should be a maximum diameter of 0.25x the joists depth and kept apart by at least 3x the diameter. The maximum
vice-versa) hole diameter should not exceed 65mm.
Note: Notches and holes should be a minimum of 100mm apart.
The table below gives an indication of the areas in a joist which are suitable for notching and drilling.
Typical permissible zones for notching and drilling of solid timber joists
Permissible area for drilling of joists
Holes not exceeding 0.25 x depth:
Holes should be positioned on the centre
line between 0.25 x span and 0.4 x span Notches to be taken out only within Holes only to be drilled within these
0.4 x span max Span (m)
from a support these zones (m) zones (m)
0.25 x span max 1.5 0.15 0.30 0.375 0.6

2 0.2 0.4 0.5 0.8
2.5 0.25 0.5 0.625 1
3.0 0.3 0.6 0.75 1.2
3.5 0.35 0.7 0.875 1.4
Maximum 4 0.4 0.8 1 1.6
depth
4.5 0.45 0.9 1.125 1.8
250mm
5 0.5 1 1.25 2
Bearing
area Not closer than 3 x diameter

GROUND FLOORS
4.5.5 SUSPENDED
4.5.5 SUSPENDED TIMBER:Floor
TIMBER: Floorcoverings
coverings
Floor joist arrangement Particle boarding
Acceptable particle boards consist of Oriented Strand Board (OSB) or chipboard. Chipboard should be tongue and
grooved and all joints glued. The boards should be laid so that the shortest length is laid parallel to the span. OSB boards
should be type 3 or 4 to BS EN 300, and should be laid with the major axis at right angles to the joists (the major axis is
indicated on the OSB board by a series of arrows).
Particle boards should be either screwed or nailed to the joists at 250mm centres. Nails should be annular ring shanks
that are at least three times the depth of the board.
A 10mm expansion gap
should be provided around A 10mm expansion gap should be provided around the perimeter of the floor against a wall abutment.
the perimeter of the floor
against a wall abutment
Particle floor boarding: Minimum thickness and centres of support
Thickness (mm) Thickness (mm)

Maximum span (mm) Typical nail fixing (mm)
(chipboard) (OSB)
18 and 19 15 450 60mm annular ring shank
22 18 and 19 600 65mm annular ring shank
Floor coverings should be fixed in accordance with BS8103 - 3.
Fire resistance
Flooring Where required the floor should have appropriate fire resistance in accordance with the relevant regional Building Regulations.
Floor joists Sound insulation and air tightness

Support
Due to the construction methods, it is more likely to be difficult to demonstrate satisfactory levels of air tightness and sound
Joist spacing insulation for suspended timber ground floors. In ensuring that a reasonable level of air tightness and sound resistance is achieved,
between centres the following provisions should be incorporated:
· All joists to be supported off proprietary joist hangers at the junction with party walls and external perimeter walls.
· Floor boarding to be sealed against the wall using a sealant or proprietary tape.
· Internal floors shall where necessary, have adequate resistance to the transmission of sound transmission to meet the
requirements of the regional Building Regulations.
· The resilient layers where required should be fitted as per manufacturers instructions.
Clear span of · The resilient layer and subsequent floor makeup should be suitable to support the design loads, any point loads or additional
joists loading may have special requirements.
Floor finishes
Insulation For guidance on floor finishes onto the floor boarding, please refer to 'Appendix A - Finishes'.
Suitable provision for insulation should be provided to meet the relevant local Building Regulations.
The insulation should be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, be suitable for the intended use and adequately supported
between the floor joists.
Floor boarding
Suitable floor boards and decking include tongue and grooved softwood flooring, with a maximum moisture content at the time of fixing of
between 6 -19% in accordance with BS 8103 - 3 2009. (See Table A1 in Annex A of the standard which gives a range of moisture content for
softwood flooring, dependent on the intensity of the heating to be provided in the building e.g. where under floor heating is provided the
maximum moisture content of the floor must be limited to 6 -8%, whereas in an unheated building the maximum moisture content of the floor is
15 - 19%). All boards must be double nailed or secret nailed to each joist using nails that are at least three times the depth of the board. The
boards must have a minimum thickness, as indicated in the table below.
Softwood floor boarding: Minimum thickness and centres of support
Finished board thickness (mm) Maximum centres of joist (mm) Typical nail fixings (mm)
15 Max 450 45mm lost head nail

GROUND FLOORS
© MD©Insurance
Services Limited
Limited 2020 2020 76 76 GROUND FLOORS
CONTENTS
5.
Contents
Drainage
5.1 Above Ground - Foul Drainage
5.2 Above Ground - Storm Drainage
5.3 Below Ground - General Requirements
5.4 Below Ground - Foul Drainage - to Mains Sewer
5.5 Below Ground - Foul Drainage - to Septic Tank
5.6 Below Ground - Storm Drainage - to Mains Sewer
5.7 Below Ground - Storm Drainage - to Soakaway

Additional Functional Requirements 6. In addition to point 4: Below ground foul and surface water drainage shall be designed and constructed so Ad
In addition to the general Functional Requirements, the following additional Functional Requirements are also that it: In a
applicable to this specific Building Part section as follows: a. Safely and effectively conveys the discharges to a suitable outfall; ap
b. Is accessible for inspection and cleaning;
Workmanship c. Reduces to a minimum the risk of blockages; W
1. Drainage works should be carried out by competent operatives. d. Is adequately vented. 1.
2. Drainage systems should be laid strictly in accordance with the design.
Materials 1. The Functional Requirements are limited by the recommendations applied in this specific Building Part
1. Drainage materials must meet a recognised standard such as a Eurocode or British Standard. guidance. Ma
2. Below ground drainage systems should be backfilled with suitable materials so as not to cause any 1.
damage to the drain by loading or crushing.
Design
1. The outfall drainage from any sewerage treatment plant or septic tank, should discharge to a suitable
outfall that has been given full consent to do so, in writing from the Environment Agency (England and De
Wales), NIEA (Northern Ireland) or Local Authority (Scotland). This consent should clearly allow the 1.
discharge to occur for a minimum period of 15 years.
2. Drainage layouts and systems must be supported by a full design package identifying drainage diameter
sizes, gradients and outfalls.
3. Drainage design must meet the relevant regional Building Regulations.
4. All drainage services - shall be designed, constructed and installed so that they:
a. Do not adversely affect the structural stability of the building;
b. Prevent the entry of hazardous ground substances, external moisture or vermin;
c. Are constructed using non-hazardous materials;
d. Are durable and robust;
e. Are safe and convenient in use.
5. In addition to point 4 above: Above ground foul and storm water drainage systems - shall be designed
and constructed so that:
a. Liquid and solid waste may be discharged safely and efficiently;
b. They are accessible for inspection and cleaning;
c. Foul air is prevented from entering the building;
d. The risk of blockages is reduced;
e. They are adequately vented; Lim
f. Noise transmission from pipes and appliances is reduced to a minimum. 1.
DRAINAGE
DRAINAGE
5. 5.1
Above Ground -
Drainage Foul Drainage

5.1.1
5.1.1 ABOVE GROUND
ABOVE GROUND --FOUL
FOULDRAINAGE:
DRAINAGE:Sanitary pipework
Sanitary requirements
pipework requirements
Provision of information · Any admittance valve fitted to the system should be located above the highest flood level of any Position of connections to soil stacks
appliance connected to that stack pipe.
Design drawings for above ground drainage services will need to include: · Enclosures to air admittance valves should be adequately ventilated.
· The highest point of a drainage system (head of run) should always be vented to the external A branch creates a no connection
· Location of sanitary fittings. air. zone on a stack. No other branch
· Drainage runs.
· A soil or ventilation pipe should extend at least 900mm above an opening if it is less than 3m may be fitted such that its centre line
· Position of ventilation to the foul drain. falls inside a zone but its centre line
Opposed branch connection in
· Position of rodding access points. away from an opening into the building. the horizontal plane should be
may be on the boundary of the zone
· Specification of drainage pipes and supports. · The drains are adequately protected from ground loads and movement in the building structure. avoided
· Location and size of cold water storage cisterns. · Drains and pipes passing through the external waterproof envelope of the building or through
· Location and size of hot water storage cylinder. the underground walls must be suitably sealed to prevent vermin ingress and dampness
· Hot and cold water pipe runs. · Sound insulation will be necessary where soil pipes pass through room's enroute to the
underground connection. This can be achieved by:
Above ground soil and waste drainage systems § Encasing the pipework within a boxed in framework with a minimum 15 kg/m2 board
50 in
covering or
m
m
Drainage shall be designed, constructed and installed so that: A
m
§ Wrapping the pipework with mineral wool fibre at least 25mm thick, throughout the height
50mm
· Pipework should be designed to meet the requirements of relevant Regional of the pipe - up to the highest ceiling level. parallel
Building Regulation requirements or BS EN 12056-Parts 1, 2, and 5, and be offset
junction 200mm
installed following the guidance in BS 8000 - 13.
· Connected to a suitable underground foul drainage system.
· The materials and components used for sanitary pipework, e.g. pipes, fittings and
Table 1: Maximum distance between sanitary pipe supports
fixing accessories, should conform to appropriate European Standards or Key
Pipe material Normal pipe size (mm) Vertical pipes (m) Low gradient pipes (m)
European Technical Assessments (ETAS). Where no relevant European WC
Standard or ETA exists, British Standards or British Board of Agrement A - Opposed connections B
Certificates should be used. Plastics (any type) 32 to 40 1.2 0.5 without swept entries not lowest B - Angled connection or
· Sanitary pipework should be installed in accordance with manufacturer's 50 1.2 0.6 exceeding 65mm should connection 50mm diameter parallel
recommendations. 75 to 100 1.8 0.9 be offset: junction where a branch
· Pipework used externally must be suitable for exposure to sunlight without early 150 1.8 1.2 · 110mm on a 100mm discharge pipe would enter
degradation. Proof of use for external exposure must be provided. Cast iron All sizes 3.0 3.0 diameter stack the WC no connection zone
· Do not adversely affect the structural stability of the building. · 250mm on a 150mm
· Prevent the entry of hazardous ground substances, external moisture or vermin. Copper 25 2.4 1.8 diameter stack *450mm NB A waste (branch
· Are constructed using non-hazardous materials. 32 to 40 3.0 2.4 min 20 discharge pipe) manifold may
· Are safe and convenient in use. 50 3.0 2.7 0m
Opposed connections m be a suitable alternative
65 to 100 3.7 3.0
larger than 65mm (without
All above ground plumbing systems need to be designed to allow the unobstructed Galvanised steel 25 3.0 2.4 swept entries) should be * This should be increased in
drain
flow of waste water from an appliance to the underground drainage system. To 32 3.0 2.7 offset at least 200mm buildings over 3 stories
invert
achieve this, the points below should be noted at the design and installation stages: 40 to 50 3.7 3.0 irrespective of stack
65 to 75 4.6 3.7 diameter. Unopposed
· Provide rodding access facilities at all changes of direction. 100 4.6 4.0 connections may be at any
· Avoid bends, connections and changes of direction in the wet part of the above
position
ground drainage system.
· Pipe sizes are adequate to take the expected rate of discharge and load at
suitable gradients with the minimum of direction changes. Table 2: Design for thermal movement in runs of waste pipes
· 75mm deep seal traps should always be used, except:
§ On a WC where a 50mm depth of water seal can be used, or Fitting type Movement provision
§ Where an appliance on the ground floor discharges directly into a trapped gully.
· Pipe sizes should not exceed the dimensions for diameter against pipe length. Push fit Push fit joints should be assembled with Openings for pipes in fire resisting floors and walls
· Pipes should be laid at gradient 1:80 or better and adequately supported to clearance for expansion.
prevent sagging and back falls. Check expected movement and relate to Pipes which pass through fire resisting floors and walls (unless in a protected shaft) shall:
· Sanitary pipework must be adequately supported (see Table 1). number of joints
· Provision for expansion in the pipework must be given both in vertical pipes and a) Have an approved proprietary sealing system that has a UKAS accredited test to prove it will
branch/waste pipes.(see Table 2). maintain the fire resistance of the floor/wall. Note: It should only be installed as per the Test
Solvent-welded joints Provide 'push-fit' couplings at calculated requirements, or
intervals, but not exceeding 1.8m b) Where an approved proprietary sealing system is not used; the pipes penetrating the fire
resisting floor/wall should be restricted in diameter to a maximum size shown in the relevant
Notes: regional Building Regulations and fire stopping used around the pipe, or
1. The manufacturer's recommendations should be followed in respect of provision of movement c) A sleeving system with a maximum 160mm internal diameter is used as specified in the relevant
(Polypropylene pipe work can expand more than UPVC pipework for the same length). regional Building Regulations.
2. Ensure 'push-fit' joints are lubricated before assembly with specified lubricant that is approved
for the pipe type. (Boss white is not permitted to make joints in plastics pipework).
3. Sleeve wastes through walls to permit pipe movement.
© MD Insurance Services Limited 2020 80 DRAINAGE

DRAINAGE
5.1.25.1.2ABOVE GROUND
ABOVE - FOUL
GROUND DRAINAGE:
- FOUL DRAINAGE:Sanitary
Sanitarypipework
pipework requirements continued
Single stack system: Air admittance valves Air admittance valves
Air admittance valves provide a means of ventilation to the drainage system to prevent the loss of water seals in traps. They are suitable for use in
buildings, e.g. bungalows, houses, multi-storey flats, and they only allow air to enter the drainage system. Their use does not avoid the need to ventilate the
100mm diameter soil 82mm air admittance drainage system adequately.
and vent pipe valve in roof space not
subject to freezing Where air admittance valves are used to terminate soil pipes, they should comply with Building Standards. Admittance valves must have a current third
party product approval and be used within the scope of that approval certificate.
32mm diameter waste
pipe with 75mm min Valves within the building should be:
seal trap WC with 50mm min.
water seal · Positioned in areas that are not liable to freezing.
· Positioned in areas with adequate ventilation. Note, where the pipes and valve are boxed in, adequate means of ventilation will be required by means
of grilles or gaps. The amount of ventilation provided should be at least 2500mm2 or whatever specified by the manufacturer.
· Accessible for maintenance.
If the discharge stack provides the only ventilation to septic tanks or cesspits, the connecting drain is subject to periodic surcharging or is fitted with
intercepting traps, air admittance valves are not suitable for providing ventilation in these circumstances.
Sanitary fittings
Wash basins (WHB), baths, bidets, shower trays:
· Should be securely fixed with appropriate non rusting fixings.

· Floors should be capable of carrying the weight of the appliance.
· Excessive packing must be avoided.
· Must be connected to the drainage system and where applicable an appropriate water supply.
3m max slope 18 to
90mm/m
Where WC's, WHB's, baths and shower units are installed; where tiling is installed around these appliances, flexible waterproof mould resisting flexible
sealant should be used to accommodate any movement between the appliance and tiles.
50mm diameter
40mm diameter waste parallel branch
pipe with 75mm min Baths and shower units should be correctly supported so that when in use the fittings will not deflect excessively and pull on the mastic seal.
seal trap
Floor joists should be doubled up under the bath locations. Where heavier baths (e.g. cast iron baths or similar) are proposed, the floor joists must be
SVP
designed to take the additional loadings and joist feet located over the joists.
WC branch
Additional requirements where the development is within a coastal location
50mm radius
3m max slope Where developments fall under the coastal location definition (see 'Appendix B - Coastal Locations') the following additional requirements should be met,
18 to 90mm/m No connection and where elements of the sanitary drainage may be subject to the outside atmosphere, the following conditions will apply.
should be made
within the shaded Corrosion
portion The materials should be suitably protected against corrosion, see 'Appendix C - Materials, Products, and Building Systems' for further information.
Fixings:
40mm diameter waste External fixings that are exposed to weathering, moisture and corrosive environments or applications where concentrations of corrosive agents may
pipe with 75mm min accumulate should be made from high grade austenitic stainless steel (e.g. A4) or a protective coating suitable for the corrosion category described in the
seal trap table 'the classification of environmental corrosion conditions' in 'Appendix C - Materials, Products, and Building Systems'.
Durability
External soil and waste pipes must be suitable for the environmental conditions. Please refer to the manufacturer's specifications to confirm durability.
Discolouration of dark plastic goods may be unavoidable in coastal locations.
Whilst the durability range is not a 'guarantee time', consideration has to be made to the Warranty Functional Requirements: If the component does not form
part of the structure (e.g. drainage pipes and fittings), then a minimum 15 year service life will be required (please refer to the Functional Requirement
Large radius bends wording for clarification). Otherwise, 60 years' service life is required if forming part of the structure (e.g. lintels over drainage openings in walls).
Minimum vertical distance
from the lowest connection to
drain invert 450mm Due to the environment, certain materials and particularly the finishes may require on-going maintenance in order to keep a satisfactory finish e.g. external
SVP. In these circumstances it will be the building owner's responsibility to ensure that regular maintenance of exposed components and finishes is
Drainage swept bend must be undertaken to ensure they perform correctly. Maintenance plans will need to be in place during the lifetime of the building to ensure premature failure of
adequately supported under the coatings or components is avoided.
floor area where it connects to the
underground drains

DRAINAGE
5. 5.2
Above Ground -
Drainage Storm Drainage

5.2.15.2.1 ABOVE GROUND
ABOVE - STORM
GROUND DRAINAGE:
- STORM DRAINAGE:Rainwater
Rainwater drainage requirements
drainage requirements
Provision of information Table 1: Calculation of roof area General requirements for above ground storm drainage
Design drawings for storm water gutters and downpipes will need to include: Type of surface area Effective design area The above ground storm system needs to be designed to allow the unobstructed flow of
storm water from the drained roof area to the underground drainage system. To achieve
· Areas of roof drained to each gutter. this, the points below should be noted at the design and installation stages:
· Downpipe and/or drainage hopper positions from roof. Balcony areas Plan area .
· Positions of hazards e.g. Flues, opening windows/doors. · Pipe and gutter sizes should be adequate to take the expected rate of discharge,
· Location of below ground storm drainage connections. and are laid at suitable gradients with the minimum of direction changes.
· Will drainage have to go internally of the building. Flat roof plan Area of roof · Discharge of gutters into downpipes can be substantially improved by the careful
· Rodding access provision. location of downpipes:
· Downpipe outlet positions - avoiding potential water ingress/splashing of external · Locating downpipes at end quarter positions will double the flow capacity if
walls etc. 30° roof pitch plan Area x 1.29 more than one downpipe is required.
· The downpipe should be located within 200mm of the change in direction in
Provision of gutters and downpipes order to maintain the flow capacity of the gutter where changes in the line of
45° roof pitch plan Area x 1.5
the gutter occur.
Drainage shall be designed, constructed and installed so that:
· Where the design incorporates valley gutters or parapet gutters, the design should
· Roof water gutters and downpipes designed to meet the requirements of relevant 60° roof pitch plan Area x 1.87 be carried out in accordance with BS EN 12056.
Regional Building Regulation requirements and BS EN 12056-3. · Ensure that joints in gutters, gutter outlets and downpipes are sealed in accordance
· Connected to a suitable underground drainage system. with the manufacturer's recommendations.
· Materials and components for rainwater goods, e.g. gullies, pipes, fittings and fixing Pitched roof over 70° or Elevational area x 0.5 · Gutters and downpipes must be installed to allow for thermal movement. Joint gaps
accessories, should conform to appropriate European Standards or European any wall must be to the manufacturers recommendations.
Technical Assessments (ETAS). Where no relevant European Standard or ETA · Downpipes must be installed plumb and supported at regular centres throughout
exists, British Standards or British Board of Agrement Certificates should be used. the height of the pipework.
· Rainwater goods should be installed in accordance with manufacturer's Table 2: Gutter sizes and outlet sizes · Outlets should be correctly positioned relative to gullies.
recommendations. · Sanitary pipework must not be connected/discharge into the storm drainage
· Pipework used externally must be suitable for exposure to sunlight without early system.
degradation. Proof of use for external use must be provided. Max effective roof Gutter size (mm RWP outlet size Flow capacity · Pipework shall not reduce in diameter in the direction of flow, except in the case of
· Do not adversely affect the structural stability of the building. area (m²) diameter) (mm diameter) (litres/sec) siphonic systems.
· Prevent the entry of hazardous ground substances, external moisture or vermin. · Siphonic roof drainage systems should be designed in accordance with BS EN
· Are constructed using non-hazardous materials. 6 - - - 12056-3.
· Are safe and convenient in use. · Where there is no alternative to a rainwater pipe discharging on to a lower roof, a
18 75 50 0.38 pipe shoe should be fitted to divert water away from the building. Special shoes are
When designing roof drainage systems it is normally impracticable to guard against very available where necessary to reduce splashing.
infrequent extremely heavy rainfall events. The design should achieve a balance between 37 100 63 0.78 · Where rainwater pipes discharge on to a lower roof, the covering of the roof should
the cost of the roof drainage system and the frequency and consequences of flooding. be reinforced at the point where the pipe shoe discharges.
The effective design area of a drained roof / balcony area should be determined using 53 115 63 1.11 · Where a rainwater downpipe discharges into a gully, it should terminate below the
Table 1. gully grating but above the water seal, preferably by the use of a back inlet.
65 125 75 1.37
If the roof area is greater than 6m2, a roof will need to be provided with rainwater gutters
and rainwater downpipes (RWP) that meet the minimum size requirements shown in 103 150 89 2.16
Table 2.
Where a roof area is less than 6m2, thought should also be provided to the provision of Gutters
rainwater drainage of such roof areas e.g. dormer roofs so as to ensure rainwater will be
effectively disposed and not cause potential for damage and resulting water ingress into · Gutters should be laid to a nominal gradient of between 1mm over 1 metre and 3 mm over 1
the building. Note: Roof areas e.g. flat roofs, which are less than 6m2 will still require to metre where practicable.
be laid to a fall. · The gradient of an eaves gutter shall not be so steep that the gutter drops below the level of
the roof to such an extent that water discharging from the roof will pass over the front edge
of the gutter.
· Gutters must be adequately supported and not sag: Fascia or rafter brackets should be
typically no more than 1 metre apart or as recommended by the manufacturer.
· Additional support for gutters will be required at angles, corners, and outlet positions.
· Gutters should be laid so that any overflow in excess of the design capacity - caused by
extreme conditions such as above normal rainfall, will be discharged clear of the building.
On flat roofs, balconies, valley gutters and parapet gutters, additional outlets may be
necessary.
· In areas where snow lies on roofs, the front edge of the gutter should not be higher than the
projected line of the roof, unless snow guards or other precautions are used.

DRAINAGE
5.2.2 ABOVE
5.2.2 ABOVE GROUND- -STORM
GROUND STORM DRAINAGE:
DRAINAGE: Rainwater
Rainwaterdrainage
drainagerequirements continued
Additional requirements for pitched roofs: Additional requirements for flat roofs and balconies
(Please also refer to the 'Roofs - Pitched' guidance) (Please also refer to the 'Flat Roofs' and 'Balconies and Terraces' guidance)
· Gutters should be fixed with the centre line vertically below the edge of the roof covering. Pitched roof UV resistant · To ensure effective drainage of the 'roof area', balcony decking or other finish laid over the water proof roof covering must not restrict water flow to the
underlay should dress over the gutter. rainwater outlets e.g. decking supports must not be laid across the fall of the roof.
· Gutters must be designed to deal with concentrated loads e.g. from nearby downpipes discharging water from · Flat roofs and balconies must be designed and constructed to have a finished fall (allowing for deflection in the construction) of no less than 1:80.
higher level roof areas such as dormers. · The roof area should fall away from a wall that contains any door/window opening and a minimum upstand of 150mm provided between the
waterproof decking and the underside of the opening.
Ensure gutters are: · Tapered insulation and 'crickets' must only be designed and manufactured by the insulation manufacturer (not cut to fall on site).
· Adequately supported to prevent sagging. Rainwater outlets must be:

· Laid to a fall towards the outlets.
· Have stop ends fitted. · Recessed and not stand proud above the flat roof water proof covering; to ensure water will flow freely into the outlet.
· Be accessible for maintenance (any decking above the outlet must easily be removable).
· Sized and be of sufficient numbers and position to deal with the local rainfall intensity in accordance with BS EN 12056-3.
· There must be 2 outlets (or one outlet plus one overflow) where the flat roof/balcony has an upstand to all sides.
· Drainage from roof gardens should enable inspection and access to the outlet and shall incorporate means of excluding soil and debris from entering
the roof drainage system.
Tile edge over gutter centre line · Drainage outlets formed through parapet walls must be constructed with secondary protection to prevent water ingress into the wall structure.
· Drainage outlets formed through parapet walls in timber framed construction where the outer leaf is masonry; Must allow for shrinkage in the timber
frame i.e. the frame will settle but the outer leaf will not, therefore a backfall could result in the outlet.
Additional requirements where the development is within a coastal location
Where developments fall under the coastal location definition (see 'Appendix B - Coastal Locations') the following additional requirements should be met,
and where elements of the surface water drainage may be subject to the outside atmosphere, the following conditions will apply.
Corrosion
The materials should be suitably protected against corrosion, see 'Appendix C - Materials, Products, and Building Systems' for further information.
Fixings:
External fixings that are exposed to weathering, moisture and corrosive environments or applications where concentrations of corrosive agents may
accumulate should be made from high grade austenitic stainless steel (e.g. A4) or a protective coating suitable for the corrosion category described in the
table 'the classification of environmental corrosion conditions' in 'Appendix C - Materials, Products, and Building Systems'.
Durability
External surface water drainage components must be suitable for the environmental conditions. Please refer to the manufacturer's specifications to confirm
durability. Discolouration of dark plastic goods may be unavoidable in coastal locations.
Roof covering to project
Whilst the durability range is not a 'guarantee time', consideration has to be made to the Warranty Functional Requirements: If the component does not
50mm min over the gutter
form part of the structure (e.g. drainage pipes and fittings), then a minimum 15 year service life will be required (please refer to the Functional Requirement
wording for clarification). Otherwise, 60 years' service life is required if forming part of the structure (e.g. lintels over drainage openings in walls).
Due to the environment, certain materials and particularly the finishes may require on-going maintenance in order to keep a satisfactory finish e.g. gutters
and downpipes. In these circumstances it will be the building owner's responsibility to ensure that regular maintenance of exposed components and
finishes is undertaken to ensure they perform correctly. Maintenance plans will need to be in place during the lifetime of the building to ensure premature
failure of coatings or components is avoided.
Openings for pipes in fire resisting floors and walls

Tilting fillet
Where stormwater pipes are installed within the building
Pipes which pass through fire resisting floor/walls (unless in a protected shaft) shall:
UV resistant underlay a. Have an approved proprietary sealing system that has a UKAS accredited test to prove it will maintain the fire resistance of the floor/wall. Note: It
dressed into gutter below should only be installed as per the Test requirements, or
under-eaves tiles b. Where an approved proprietary sealing system is not used; the pipes penetrating the fire resisting floor/wall should be restricted in diameter to a
maximum size shown in the relevant regional Building Regulations and fire stopping used around the pipe, or
c. A sleeving system with a maximum 160mm internal diameter is used as specified in the relevant regional Building Regulations.
DRAINAGE
© MD©Insurance
Services Limited
Limited 2020 2020 84 84 DRAINAGE
5. 5.3
Below Ground -
Drainage General Requirements

5.3.1
5.3.1 BELOW GROUND
BELOW GROUND -- GENERAL
GENERALREQUIREMENTS:
REQUIREMENTS:Access points
Access points
Swept connections into

Access points must be provided:
flow of drains - Acceptable
· On or near the head of each drain run, and
· At a bend and change of gradient, and
Swept · At a junction unless each run can be cleared from an access point (some junctions can only be rodded through from
connection one direction).
Slow Minimum dimensions for access fittings, inspection chambers and manholes can be referenced in the guidance supporting
bend in the relevant regional Building Regulations.
Main flow Main flow
Slow
bend out Construction of access points should be with one of the following materials (see table 2) and must be capable of
containing the foul water under working and test conditions.
Inspection chambers and manholes should have removable non-ventilating covers of durable material (such as cast iron,
cast or pressed steel, precast concrete or plastics) and be of a suitable strength for its location e.g. access points on
driveways will require heavier duty covers than those in a garden.
Small lightweight covers should be secured to deter unauthorised access.

Connections against flow of Access points within buildings should have mechanically fixed airtight covers.
main drain - Not Acceptable
Drainage system access point covers in hard standing areas should be level with the adjacent ground level.
Connection
90° flowing against Access covers in garden areas should not be covered over by the soil/turf.
connection main flow
Main flow Table 2: Materials for access points
Materials - access pipe British Standard

Inspection chambers and manholes:
Clay bricks and blocks BS 3921
Vitrified clay BS EN 295, BS 65
Access and connections Concrete - precast BS 5911
Suitable access must be provided to every length of drain to allow rodding access to deal with potential blockages. Concrete - insitu BS 8110
Plastics BS 7158
Depending on the depth and position of the drain, one of the following should be provided:
As pipes
Rodding eyes and access fittings
· Rodding eye - capped extensions of pipes. (excluding frames and covers)
ETA or Third party product approval certificates
· Access chamber - small chambers on (or an extension of) the pipes but not with an open channel.
· Inspection chamber - chambers with working space at ground level.
· Manhole - deep chambers with working space at drain level.
The installation of access points must not impede the flow of waste and allow connections onto main runs to be in the direction of flow and not
against it.
Additional requirements for drains near trees
Drainage near trees should incorporate additional provisions where there is a volume change potential within the ground. The provisions include:
· Increased falls to cater for any ground movement.

· Deeper and wider backfill of granular material.
· A drainage system that is capable of movement should heave and shrinkage occur.
· Drainage pipes should not be encased in concrete.
· Additional clearance is required where drains pass through the structure of a building to allow for additional movement.

DRAINAGE
5.3.25.3.2BELOW GROUND
BELOW - GENERAL
GROUND REQUIREMENTS:
- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:Drainage
Drainage close to and
close to andthrough
throughbuildings
buildings
General back fill Drains and services passing through walls
In normal circumstances, the excavated material from the trench will be appropriate for backfilling above the chosen material. Walls should accommodate movement where drains pass through substructure by:
General backfill materials must be free from:
· Providing a minimum 50mm clearance all around.
· Boulders. · A sleeve with a 50mm clearance.
· Building rubble. · (If built in) A connection on both sides of the wall to pipes with flexible joints located no more than 150mm from the face of
· Timber. the wall.
· Vegetable matter. · Any void formed between the pipe and the wall should be masked either side of the wall to prevent vermin access.
Backfill needs to be positioned in layers not deeper than 300mm, and must be well compacted. When compacted backfill is at
least 450mm above the crown of the pipe, only mechanical compacting should be used.
Drain protection adjacent to foundations
Drains are to be located so that foundation loads are not transmitted to pipes. Where drainage trenches are located near to Linteled opening over pipes Flexible jointed pipes (rockers) either
foundations, foundation depths should be increased or the drain re-routed further from the foundations.
side of built in pipe
The trench should be filled with concrete to an appropriate level where the bottom of a trench is below foundation level.
External wall External wall

Drainage positions situated within angle of Internal wall Internal wall
Where pipes are built
in, a connection on
both sides of the wall to
Lintel A minimum 50mm pipes with flexible joints
clearance all around located no more than
Ground level 150mm from the face
Pipe should be provided
of the wall
Drains in this area do not
require additional protection
Any void formed between

the pipe and the wall should
be masked either side of the
wall to prevent vermin
access
45° angle of
repose
Linteled opening for service pipes
encased drainage within 1m
from foundation, and below
≥1m angle of repose
Lintel
Service pipes
Any void formed between

the pipe and the wall should
be masked either side of the
wall to prevent vermin
access

DRAINAGE
5. 5.4
Below Ground -
Drainage Foul Drainage -
to Mains Sewer

BELOW - FOUL
GROUND DRAINAGE
- FOUL DRAINAGE- -TO
TOMAINS
MAINS SEWER: Designinstallation,
SEWER: Design installation,gradients
gradients and
and outfalls
outfalls
Provision of information All below ground foul drainage systems need to be designed to allow the unobstructed flow of waste water to a suitable approved outfall. To achieve this, the points
below should be noted at the design and installation stages:
Design drawings for below ground foul drainage will need to include:
· Foul water drainage systems only take foul waste from a property or properties and will include waste water from sinks, toilets, showers, baths, dishwashers
· Location of sanitary fittings. and washing machines. These systems discharge into Local Authority sewers, then pass through sewage treatment plants. Storm water should be discharged
· Position of soil stacks. to a separate storm water disposal system so as to avoid treatment plants treating large volumes of storm water needlessly.
· Location of foul drain connections and drainage runs. · Drainage from impervious surfaces such as drives, paths and hard standings must drain to a suitable rain water drainage system.
· Location of inspection chambers and rodding points. · The drainage system, including manholes, gullies, pipe connections, etc. should be protected from damage throughout the course of the construction works.
· Location of suitable outfall. · Drainage trench excavations should be taken down to solid ground, but when this is not possible, the drainage system should be designed to accommodate
any movement and made-up with a well-compacted backfill to the required formation levels.
Below ground foul drainage systems · Where ground movement is likely to occur, flexible drainage systems should be provided, e.g. filled sites, mining areas and sites with shrinkable clay.
· Where possible, avoid passing adjacent to tree roots. Adequate precautions should be taken where this cannot be avoided, in accordance with the
Drainage shall be designed, constructed and installed so that: recommendations of the relevant Building Control body and the pipe manufacturer.
· Foul drainage systems should be designed to meet the requirements of relevant regional Building Regulation Installation of underground drains
requirements or BS EN 752 and be installed following the guidance in BS 8000-14.
· Discharges to a suitable outfall which is: The depths of drains and the protection provided over them needs to be adapted to the traffic normal for the location, in accordance with the recommendations of
· Sewer maintained by the Local sewerage undertaker or the relevant Building Control body and the pipe manufacturer. Requirements are as follows:
· A suitable private foul drainage/sewer system (1) that leads to an adopted sewer.
· Pipes should be laid to an even gradient (see table 1), and significant changes in gradient should be combined with an access point.
Note: (1) Connections to private foul drainage systems will require agreement of the owners of such drain/sewer. · Pipes should be laid in straight lines, but may be laid to slight curves, providing the length of drain can be effectively cleaned by the use of rods.
· Connections should be to inspection chambers or manholes, but connections to junctions are acceptable if access is provided to clear blockages. In all cases,
· Materials and components used for foul water drainage systems, e.g. pipes, fittings and fixing accessories, discharge should be in the direction of flow.
inspection chambers etc. should conform to appropriate European Standards or European Technical · Bends should be positioned in, or adjacent to, terminal fittings, inspection chambers or manholes, and at the foot of discharge stacks. Bends should have as
Assessments (ETAs). Where no relevant European Standard or ETA exists, British Standards or British Board of large a radius as practicable.
Agrement Certificates should be used. · The system should be ventilated at or near the head of each main drain to allow free passage of air throughout; the maximum length of any branch serving a
· Pipework, fittings, inspection chambers etc. should be installed in accordance with manufacturer's single appliance being 6m, and for a group of appliances, 12m.
recommendations. · Where appliances are not fitted with integral traps at the point of discharge, a trap must be provided using either a trapped gully or low back trap.
· Drains and pipework etc. must be durable and suitable for use underground.
· The installation of drainage/pipework does not adversely affect the structural stability of the building.
Table 1: Recommended minimum gradient of drains
· Prevent the entry of hazardous ground substances, external moisture or vermin.
· Are constructed using non-hazardous materials.
· Are safe and convenient in use. Peak flow (litres/sec) Pipe size (mm) Minimum gradient Maximum capacity (litres/sec)
75 1:40 4.1
<1
100 1:40 9.2
75 1:80 2.8
>1 100 1:80(1) 6.3
150 1:150(2) 15
Notes:
(1) Minimum of 1 WC
(2) Minimum of 5 WC's

DRAINAGE
5. 5.5
Below Ground -
Drainage Foul Drainage -
to Septic Tank

BELOW - FOUL
GROUND DRAINAGE
- FOUL DRAINAGE- -TO
TOSEPTIC
SEPTIC TANK
TANK :: General
Generalstructure
structure
Provision of information All below ground foul drainage systems need to be designed to allow the unobstructed flow of waste water to a suitable approved outfall. To achieve this, the points
below should be noted at the design and installation stages:
Design drawings for below ground foul drainage will need to include:
· Foul water drainage systems only take foul waste from a property or properties and will include waste water from sinks, toilets, showers, baths, dishwashers
· Location of sanitary fittings. and washing machines. These systems discharge into septic tank. Storm water should be discharged to a separate storm water disposal system so as to avoid
· Position of soil stacks. septic tanks treating large volumes of storm water needlessly.
· Location of foul drain connections and drainage runs. · Drainage from impervious surfaces such as drives, paths and hard standings must drain to a suitable rain water drainage system.
· Location of inspection chambers and rodding points. · The drainage system, including manholes, gullies, pipe connections, etc. should be protected from damage throughout the course of the construction works.
· Location of suitable outfall. · Drainage trench excavations should be taken down to solid ground, but when this is not possible, the drainage system should be designed to accommodate
any movement and made-up with a well-compacted backfill to the required formation levels.
Below ground foul drainage systems · Where ground movement is likely to occur, flexible drainage systems should be provided, e.g. filled sites, mining areas and sites with shrinkable clay.
· Where possible, avoid passing adjacent to tree roots. Adequate precautions should be taken where this cannot be avoided, in accordance with the
Drainage shall be designed, constructed and installed so that: recommendations of the relevant Building Control body and the pipe manufacturer.
· Foul drainage systems should be designed to meet the requirements of relevant regional Building Regulation Installation of underground drains
requirements or BS EN 752:2017 and be installed following the guidance in BS 8000-14.
· Discharges to a suitable outfall which is: The depths of drains and the protection provided over them needs to be adapted to the traffic normal for the location, in accordance with the recommendations of
· For septic tanks: the ground conditions and water table movements must be suitable to allow the installation. the relevant Building Control body and the pipe manufacturer. Requirements are as follows:
Percolation tests will be required and the Warranty Surveyor given the opportunity to appraise.
· Has consent by the Environment Agency (England and Wales) NIEA (Northern Ireland) or Local Authority (LA) in · Pipes should be laid to an even gradient (see table 1), and significant changes in gradient should be combined with an access point.
Scotland; to allow discharge to or near a watercourse or river. · Pipes should be laid in straight lines, but may be laid to slight curves, providing the length of drain can be effectively cleaned by the use of rods.
Note: Consent from the EA, NIEA or LA means a clear confirmation in writing that they will allow discharge to the discharge should be in the direction of flow.
designated outfall for the period of Warranty cover. · Bends should be positioned in, or adjacent to, terminal fittings, inspection chambers or manholes, and at the foot of discharge stacks. Bends should have as
large a radius as practicable.
· Materials and components used for foul water drainage systems, e.g. pipes, fittings and fixing accessories, · The system should be ventilated at or near the head of each main drain to allow free passage of air throughout; the maximum length of any branch serving a
inspection chambers, septic tanks etc. should conform to appropriate European Standards or European Technical single appliance being 6m, and for a group of appliances, 12m.
· Assessments (ETAs). Where no relevant European Standard or ETA exists, British Standards or British Board of · Where appliances are not fitted with integral traps at the point of discharge, a trap must be provided using either a trapped gully or low back trap.
· Agrement Certificates should be used.
· Pipework, fittings, inspection chambers, septic tanks etc. should be installed in accordance with manufacturer's Table 1: Recommended minimum gradient of drains
recommendations.
· Drains and associated pipework etc. must be durable and suitable for use underground. Peak flow (litres/sec) Pipe size (mm) Minimum gradient Maximum capacity (litres/sec)
· The installation of drainage or pipework does not adversely affect the structural stability of the building.
· Prevent the entry of hazardous ground substances, external moisture or vermin. <1
75 1:40 4.1
· Are constructed using non-hazardous materials. 100 1:40 9.2
· Are safe and convenient in use. 75 1:80 2.8
>1 100 1:80(1) 6.3
150 1:150(2) 15
Notes:
(1) Minimum of 1 WC
(2) Minimum of 5 WC's

DRAINAGE
5.5.25.5.2BELOW
BELOW GROUND
GROUND - FOUL
- FOUL DRAINAGE- TO
DRAINAGE - TOSEPTIC
SEPTICTANK
TANK :: Septic
Septictanks
tanksand
andpackage
packagetreatment plants
treatment plants
Septic tank systems - treatment plants Typical sewage treatment plant Drainage field
If you are not on main line drainage then you will have either a septic tank
or cesspit; ordinarily, the foul waste will run to one of the above tanks while Access
the rain water is usually kept separate to help the action of bacteria and
Distribution weir
enzymes in the tank. The outfall from the septic tank should either run to a Perforated effluent
designed drainage field or possibly straight to a river or brook; you will often distribution pipes
find the rain water system tapped onto the outlet of a septic tank to help
dilute any effluent that may pass through the system. Minimum
2m separation
Filter media
Any septic tank or other sewerage treatment system that is intended to have
an outfall to a water course should have full consent to do so, in writing from
the Environment Agency (England and Wales), NIEA (Northern Ireland) or Minimum
Local Authority (Scotland). This consent should clearly allow the discharge Inlet 2m separation
to occur for a minimum period of 15 years and should be made available Outlet
upon request.
Storm water should not discharge into the septic tank or water treatment
plant and should be directed to a suitably designed soakaway or sewer. Recirculating
pump Final settlement
Percolation drainage fields for treatment and outfall drainage plants should
not be situated uphill of dwellings. Initial Concrete backfill
settlement Distribution/sampling chamber
Where the septic tank or treatment plant discharges to a soakaway,
drainage field or mound suitable percolation tests should be provided in
conjunction with the drainage design. The test should be carried out with at
Septic tank - either glass fibre
least two trail holes. The average figure from the tests should be taken. The
thermoplastics or precast concrete
test should not be carried out during abnormal weather conditions such as
heavy rain, severe frost or drought.
Typical sewage treatment plant (section)
Septic tanks Selected soil

backfill
Septic tanks should only be used in conjunction with a form of secondary treatment (e.g drainage field,
drainage mound or constructed wetland).
Pipes laid Geotextile
to fall Septic tanks should be sited at least 7m from any habitable parts of the building and perfferability downslope. membrane
Septic tanks should have a minimum capacity of at least 2,700 litres below the level of the inlet, for up to 4
Perforated effluent
users. The size should be increased by at least 180 litres for each additional user.
distribution pipe 50mm
Where they are to be emptied using a tanker, the septic tank should be sited within 30m of a vehicle access
provided that the invert access does not exceed 3m below the level of vehicle access. Where the depth of the Graded 30-50mm
Typical sewage treatment plant (plan) invert access exceed 3m this distance may need to be reduced. granular material
Sub-surface
percolation area Where possible tanks should not be located beneath vehicle access points unless adequate precautions are 300mm
undertaken.
Distribution Septic tanks should be designed and constructed in accordance with the relevant regional Building
manhole for Regulations.
percolation area
Drainage fields and drainage mounds
Package sewage Packaged treatment plants
treatment plant A drainage field or mound serving a wastewater treatment plant or septic tank should be located:
· The discharge from the waste water treatment plant should be sited at least 10m
· At least 10m from any watercourse or permeable drain. away from watercourses and any other buildings.
· At least 50m from the point of abstraction of any ground water supply and not in any zone 1 groundwater · Treatment plants should be type tested in accordance with BS 7781.
protection zone. · Where packaged treatment plants require power to operate it should be able to
· At least 15m from any building. adequately function without power for up to 6 hours or have uninterruptible power
· Sufficiently far from any other drainage fields, drainage mounds or soakaways so that the overall soakage supply.
capacity of the ground is not exceeded. · Packaged treatment plants should have suitable 3rd party accreditation.
DRAINAGE
© MD Insurance
© MD Insurance ServicesServices Limited 2020
Limited 2020 92 92
DRAINAGE
5. 5.6
Below Ground -
Drainage Storm Drainage -
to Mains Sewer

.6.1 5.6.1
BELOW GROUND - STORM DRAINAGE - TO MAINS SEWER: Design installation, gradients and outfalls
BELOW GROUND - STORM DRAINAGE - TO MAINS SEWER: Design installation, gradients and outfalls
Provision of information All below ground storm drainage systems need to be designed to allow the unobstructed flow of storm water to a suitable approved/tested outfall. To achieve this,
the points below should be noted at the design and installation stages:
Design drawings for below ground storm drainage will need to include:
· Storm water drainage systems only take storm/surface water from a property or properties and will include water from roofs, drives, paths and certain hard
· Location of rainwater down pipes. standing areas. These systems discharge into Local Authority sewers, soakaways or water courses. Foul drainage must not be connected to these systems.
· Location of slotted drainage channel systems. · Impervious surfaces can drain to a permeable area within the garden providing it is free draining.
· Location of drainage runs. · The storm drainage system must be designed for the rainfall intensities as recommended in the applicable regional Building Regulations. This should include
· Location of inspection chambers and rodding points. allowance for where hard standing areas are also being drained into the storm water drains.
· Location of suitable approved/tested outfall. · Silt traps should be incorporated where hard standings are being drained into the storm system to avoid build-up of material in the underground drains.
· Oil interceptors should be should be installed on car parks, or other areas where there is likely to be leakage or spillage of oil.
Below ground storm drainage systems · The drainage system, including manholes, gullies, pipe connections, etc. should be protected from damage throughout the course of the construction works.
· Drainage trench excavations should be taken down to solid ground, but when this is not possible, the drainage system should be designed to accommodate
Drainage shall be designed, constructed and installed so that: any movement and made-up with a well-compacted backfill to the required formation levels.
· Where ground movement is likely to occur, flexible drainage systems should be provided, e.g. filled sites, mining areas and sites with shrinkable clay.
· Storm drainage systems should be designed to meet the requirements of relevant regional Building Regulation · Where possible, avoid passing adjacent to tree roots. Adequate precautions should be taken where this cannot be avoided, in accordance with the
requirements or BS EN 752 and be installed following the guidance in BS 8000-14. recommendations of the relevant Building Control body and the pipe manufacturer.
· Discharges to a suitable outfall which is:
Installation of underground drains
· A soakaway or other infiltration system if ground conditions (1) and site location permit, or
· A watercourse that has consent by the Environment Agency (England and Wales) NIEA (Northern Ireland)
or Local Authority (LA) in Scotland; to allow or limit the rate of discharge. Consent from the EA, NIEA or LA The depths of drains and the protection provided over them needs to be adapted to the traffic normal for the location, in accordance with the recommendations of
means a clear confirmation in writing that they will allow discharge to the designated outfall for the period of the relevant Building Control body and the pipe manufacturer. Requirements are as follows:
Warranty cover, or
· Sewer maintained by the Local sewerage undertaker, or · Pipes should be laid to an even gradient (see table 1), and significant changes in gradient should be combined with an access point.
· A suitable private storm drainage/sewer system (2) that leads to an adopted sewer. · Pipes should be laid in straight lines, but may be laid to slight curves, providing the length of drain can be effectively cleaned by the use of rods.
Note: discharge should be in the direction of flow.
(1) For soakaways: the ground conditions and water table movements must be suitable to allow the · Bends should be positioned in, or adjacent to, terminal fittings, inspection chambers or manholes, and at the foot of discharge stacks. Bends should have as
installation to function correctly all year round. Percolation tests will be required and the Warranty Surveyor large a radius as practicable.
given the opportunity to appraise the results before the installation goes ahead.
(2) Connections to private storm drainage systems will require agreement of the owners of such drain/sewer. Table 1: Minimum gradient of drains
· Materials and components used for storm water drainage systems, e.g. pipes, fittings and fixing accessories,
inspection chambers etc. should conform to appropriate European Standards or European Technical
Pipe diameter (mm) Minimum gradient
Assessments (ETAs). Where no relevant European Standard or ETA exists, British Standards or British Board of
Agrement Certificates should be used.
· Pipework, fittings, inspection chambers, etc. should be installed in accordance with manufacturer's 100 1:80
recommendations.
· Drains and pipework etc. must be durable and suitable for use underground.
· The installation of drainage/pipework does not adversely affect the structural stability of the building. 150 1:150
· Are constructed using non-hazardous materials.
· Are safe and convenient in use.
MD Insurance Services Limited 2020 94 DRAINAGE

DRAINAGE
5. 5.7
Below Ground -
Drainage Storm Drainage -
to Soakaway

5.7.1 BELOW
5.7.1 BELOWGROUND
GROUND-- STORM
STORM DRAINAGE
DRAINAGE- -TO
TOSOAKAWAY:
SOAKAWAY:Design, installation,
Design, gradients
installation, and outfalls
gradients and outfalls
Provision of information Layout of land drains

Chamber-type soakaway Access point
Design drawings for below ground storm drainage will need to include: Drain runs on sloping sites need to be positioned perpendicular to the fall of the site.
Land drains should be positioned adjacent to paths, drives and outbuildings. The pipe soffit should Precast reinforced
· Location of rainwater downpipes. be positioned at least 400mm below the finished ground level, and the backfill consolidated to the concrete lid
· Location of slotted drainage channel systems. same degree of compaction as the adjacent soil.
· Location of drainage runs.
· Location of inspection chambers and rodding points. Soakaways Storm drain
· Location of soakaways.
Soakaways are a simple way of dispersing surface and storm water in circumstances where
connection to the storm water sewer system is not feasible or unnecessary. A soakaway is
Below ground storm drainage systems basically a system that loses water rather than collects water. Soakaways are part of the Geotextile
Sustainable Urban Drainage Systems (SuDS) technologies that handle storm water at the source membrane
Drainage shall be designed, constructed and installed so that: rather than leading it into the public sewer systems.
Precast concrete
· Storm drainage systems should be designed to meet the requirements of relevant Developments proposing to use other types of Sustainable Urban Drainage Systems (SuDS) inspection chamber
regional Building Regulation requirements or BS EN 752 and be installed following the should follow the guidance found in 'SuDS Manual' (a design manual published by CIRIA). The rings
developer should also confirm if the Planning consent for the project imposes any additional
guidance in BS 8000-14.
requirements which may impact on the design of the sustainable drainage systems (SuDS).
· Discharges to a suitable outfall which is: Any surface water drain, soakaway or other infiltration system (including a SuDS system) which is
Perforation holes
· A soakaway or other infiltration system if ground conditions and site location intended to discharge to a water course should have Environment Agency consent to discharge.
permit, or Loose fill hardcore
· A soakaway or other infiltration system if ground conditions and site location Soakaways can only be considered in permeable conditions. A suitable site must be: base
permit. For soakaways: the ground conditions and water table movements must be
suitable to allow the installation to function correctly all year round. Percolation · In a location lower than the area being drained.
tests will be required and the Warranty Surveyor given the opportunity to appraise · At least 5m away from any building (BS 8301).
the results before the installation goes ahead.
· Situated so that it will not saturate the foundations of any structure.
· Situated so that the base of any soakaway/infiltration system is permanently above the water
· Materials and components used for storm water drainage systems, e.g., pipes, fittings table.
and fixing accessories, inspection chambers etc. should conform to appropriate · Situated far enough away from other soakaways/infiltration systems to ensure that the
European Standards or European Technical Assessments (ETAs). Where no relevant capacity of those other systems and the ground itself is not impaired.
European Standard or ETA exists, British Standards or British Board of Agrement · Situated so that there is no risk of contamination from pollutants.
Certificates should be used. Typical soakaway design
· Pipework, fittings, inspection chambers, etc. should be installed in accordance with Installation of underground drains
manufacturer's recommendations.
· Drains and pipework etc. must be durable and suitable for use underground. The depths of drains and the protection provided over them needs to be adapted to the traffic Geotextile
· The installation of drainage/pipework does not adversely affect the structural stability of normal for the location, in accordance with the recommendations of the relevant Building Control membrane
the building. body and the pipe manufacturer. Requirements are as follows:
· Are constructed using non-hazardous materials. · Pipes should be laid to an even gradient (see table 1), and significant changes in gradient Storm drain
· Are safe and convenient in use. should be combined with an access point.
· Pipes should be laid in straight lines, but may be laid to slight curves, providing the length of
All below ground storm drainage systems need to be designed to allow the unobstructed flow drain can be effectively cleaned by the use of rods.
of storm water to a suitable approved/tested outfall. To achieve this, the points below should · Connections should be to inspection chambers or manholes, but connections to junctions are
acceptable if access is provided to clear blockages. In all cases, discharge should be in the Volume of soakaway
be noted at the design and installation stages:
direction of flow. determined by result of
· Bends should be positioned in, or adjacent to, terminal fittings, inspection chambers or porosity test
· Storm water drainage systems only take storm/surface water from a property or
manholes, and at the foot of discharge stacks. Bends should have as large a radius as
properties and will include water from roofs, drives, paths and certain hard standing practicable.
areas. These systems discharge into Local Authority sewers, soakaways or water Plastic media to
courses. Foul drainage must not be connected to these systems. form voids
· Impervious surfaces can drain to a permeable area within the garden providing it is free Table 1: Minimum gradient of drains
draining.
· The storm drainage system must be designed for the rainfall intensities as recommended
Pipe diameter (mm) Minimum gradient
in the applicable regional Building Regulations. This should include allowance for where
hard standing areas are also being drained into the storm water drains. Typical soakaway design
· Silt traps should be incorporated where hard standings are being drained into the storm 100 1:80
system to avoid build-up of material in the underground drains.
For sites where chalk is prevalent, the CIRIA C574 Engineering in Chalk 2002 publication gives the
· Oil interceptors should be should be installed on car parks, or other areas where there is 150 1:150 following recommendations:
likely to be leakage or spillage of oil.
· The drainage system, including manholes, gullies, pipe connections, etc., should be
Concentrated ingress of water into the chalk can initiate new dissolution features, particularly in
protected from damage throughout the course of the construction works.
low-density chalk, and destabilise the loose backfill of existing ones. For this reason, any
· Drainage trench excavations should be taken down to solid ground, but when this is not
soakaways should be sited well away from foundations for structures or roads, as indicated below:
possible, the drainage system should be designed to accommodate any movement and
made-up with a well-compacted backfill to the required formation levels.
· Where ground movement is likely to occur, flexible drainage systems should be provided,
· In areas where dissolution features are known to be prevalent, soakaways should be avoided if
at all possible but, if unavoidable, should be sited at least 20m away from any foundations.
e.g. filled sites, mining areas and sites with shrinkable clay.
· Where possible, avoid passing adjacent to tree roots. Adequate precautions should be
· Where the chalk is of low density, or its density is not known, soakaways should be sited at
least 10m away from any foundations.
taken where this cannot be avoided, in accordance with the recommendations of the
relevant Building Control body and the pipe manufacturer.
· For drainage systems, flexible jointed pipes should be used wherever possible; particular care
should be taken for the avoidance of leaks in both water supply and drainage pipe work.
· As the chalk is a vitally important aquifer, the Environment Agency and Local Authority must be
consulted when planning soakaway installations where chalk lies below the site, even where it
is mantled with superficial deposits.

DRAINAGE
CONTENTS
6.
Contents
External
6.1 Traditional Masonry Cavity Wall - Brick Clad
6.2 Traditional Masonry Cavity Wall - Rendered Masonry Clad
Walls 6.3
6.4
Timber Frame - Brick Clad
Timber Frame - Rendered Masonry Clad
6.5 Timber Frame - Directly Applied Claddings
6.6 Light Gauge Steel Frame
6.7 Claddings


Workmanship W
1. Certification is required for any specialist works and/or systems completed by an approved installer. 1.
2. Cavities should be clear from mortar droppings to prevent moisture ingress.
3. Masonry walls should not be constructed in extreme weather conditions.
Ma
Materials 1.
1. Timber frame elements should be appropriately protected to keep components dry.
2. Materials should be suitable for the relative exposure of the building in accordance with relevant British
Standards. De
3. Steel frames should be appropriately treated to prevent corrosion. 1.
Design
1. The materials design and construction of external walls (including claddings), must meet the relevant
regional Building Regulations.
2. Surfaces that will be subjected to water from the use of a showerhead, including over a bath should be
tiled or have an appropriate alternative water-resistant finish.
3. Steel frame structures must be supported by structural calculations completed by a suitably qualified
engineer. The design and construction must meet the relevant Building Regulations.
4. Where render external cladding is proposed as the waterproof envelope to the building, the backing
materials/substrate wall, must be confirmed as suitable for the proposed render mix and/or system for the
wind driven rain exposure zone.
5. External walls shall be designed and constructed so that they:
a. Are structurally sound;
b. Have adequate resistance to the effects of fire and will resist the spread of fire to adjacent buildings;
c. Are durable and resistant to weather and ground moisture;
e. Provide suitable surfaces to receive a range of finishes;
f. Resist flanking sound transmission where adjacent to separating walls.

guidance.
EXTERNAL WALLS
EXTERNAL WALLS
6. 6.1
Traditional Masonry
External Cavity Wall - Brick Clad
Walls

6.1.16.1.1 TRADITIONAL
TRADITIONAL MASONRY
MASONRY CAVITYWALL
CAVITY WALL -- BRICK
BRICK CLAD:
CLAD:Design
Designofofmasonry
masonrywalls
walls
Structural design of walls The suitability of full fill cavity insulation in exposure locations
A method of meeting the requirements of the Warranty is to design and construct walls to the relevant Building Regulations depending on the The following table outlines the minimum cavity widths for full fill insulation types in varying exposure locations. Full fill cavity wall insulation is
region. For example, in England and Wales, the masonry units should be built in accordance with Approved Document A (Structure). not suitable for very severe exposure zones.
Alternatively, justification of design by a Chartered Structural Engineer can be used as a solution.
Suitable cavity wall construction depending on exposure, for use with full fill cavity insulation
Dealing with areas of high exposure to frost and wind-driven rain
Minimum insulation thickness (mm)
The design and construction of masonry cavity walls should be suitable for the site specific exposure location.
Retro-fill
Built-in
Wind-driven rain Exposure category Suitable wall construction (other than UF foam
insulation
UF foam)
To ascertain the risk relating to wind-driven rain, the following should be determined:
Very Severe Any wall with impervious cladding
50 50 50
· The exposure to wind-driven rain, using the image below 'Map showing exposure to wind-driven rain categories'. (Exposure zone 4)
· The correct type of construction, including the correct application of insulation. Fair-faced masonry with impervious cladding to all
· The correct level of workmanship and design detailing, particularly around window and door openings. walls above ground storey
100 100 N/A
(2)
Any wall fully rendered 75 75 N/A
Fair-faced masonry (1) N/A N/A N/A
Dornoch Severe (2)

Any wall with impervious cladding or render 50 50 50
(Exposure zone 3)
Inverness Fair-faced masonry with impervious cladding or

Shetland Orkney 50 75 50
render (2) to all walls above ground storey
Islands Islands
Aberdeen Fair-faced masonry (1) 75 75 N/A
(2)
Moderate Any wall with impervious cladding or render
Perth Exposure zones Exposure to wind driven 50 50 50
Dundee (Exposure zone 2)
rain (litres/m2 per spell)
Stirling
Fair-faced masonry with impervious cladding or
50 50 50
Edinburgh Dunbar Very severe 100 or more render (2) to all walls above ground storey
Glasgow
Severe 56.5 to less than 100 Fair-faced masonry
Ayr 50 75 75
Londonderry Moderate 33 to less than 56.5
Sheltered Any wall with impervious cladding or render.
Sheltered less than 33 50 50 50
Newcastle (Exposure zone 1)
Dungannon Carlisle
Belfast Fair-faced masonry with impervious cladding or
Workington 50 50 50
Alston Note: render to all walls above ground storey
Middlesbrough
Darlington Variations to the exposure shown on the
Whitby map can only be made by site-specific Fair-faced masonry
50 50 50
calculations using BS 8104 "Assessing
Ripon
exposure of walls to wind driven rain" Notes:
York and the table above.
· (1) In very severe exposure locations, fair-faced masonry with full fill cavity insulation is not permitted
Hebden Bridge
Skelmersdale Hull · (2) Render on an external leaf of clay bricks (F2, S1 or F1, S1 designation bricks BS EN 771) in severe or very severe exposures
Manchester
Liverpool is not permitted where the cavity is to be fully filled with insulation.
Sheffield
Doncaster Grimsby · This table covers walls where the external leaf does not exceed 12m in height.
Bangor Chester Lincoln · The exposure category of the building is determined by its location on the map showing categories of exposure to wind-driven rain
(see also BRE Report 262).
Stafford
Shrewsbury
Nottingham
· Fair-faced masonry includes clay, calcium silicate and concrete bricks and blocks and dressed natural stone laid in an appropriate
mortar, preferably with struck, weathered or bucket handle joints. Cavity walls of random rubble or random natural stone should
Leicester
Birmingham not be fully filled.
Northampton
Norwich · Recessed mortar joints should not be used.
Brecon
Cambridge
Gloucester
Swansea Luton Colchester
Cardiff Additional requirements in a coastal location
Swindon
Bristol London
Where developments are within a coastal location additional Warranty requirements should be met.
Staines
Gatwick For the purpose of this Technical Manual we are considering sites within 5km inland from the shore line or sites located in 'tidal' estrine areas
Exeter Dover
Poole Southampton where they are within 5km of the general shoreline.
Plymouth
Brighton Further information on Warranty requirements within a coastal location can be found in 'Appendix B - Coastal Locations'.
© MD Insurance Services Limited 2020 100 EXTERNAL WALLS

EXTERNAL WALLS
6.1.26.1.2 TRADITIONAL MASONRY
TRADITIONAL CAVITY
MASONRY CAVITYWALL
WALL-- BRICK CLAD:Masonry
BRICK CLAD: Masonrywalls
wallsgeneral
general
Masonry walls Exposure

Facing bricks must have a suitable level of durability and particular attention should be paid to the brick's resistance to frost
Protection and moisture. Further information can be found in 'Appendix C - Material, Products, and Building Systems'.
All new masonry work should be protected during construction by covering it to ensure that walls are not allowed to become
saturated by rainwater, dry out too quickly in hot weather, are protected against frost attack, the risk of efflorescence and line Colour variation of bricks
staining and movement problems are reduced. There is usually a variation in the colour of bricks of the same style. To prevent patching of colour, it is recommended that at
least three packs of bricks are opened at any one time and mixed randomly to ensure that the wall is of an even colour.
Any temporary cover should not disturb the new masonry.
Frogs and perforations
Frogged bricks have a depression in the face of the brick. Normally, they should be laid with the major depression, or frog,
Protection of masonry facing up so that it is fully filled with mortar during laying. This ensures optimum strength, helps to increase the mass of the
wall (to give good sound insulation) and prevents the possibility of standing water within the structure, which could freeze.
Bricks with a directional surface texture are intended to be laid frog up.
Care should be taken with the use of perforated bricks where the exposure rating of the wall is high, as water
retention/collection has been found to exist in the perforations.
Efflorescence
Efflorescence is a white deposit on the face of masonry brought about by water moving through the wall, dissolving soluble
salts and depositing them when the water evaporates during drying out.
Efflorescence is best prevented by:
· Keeping all units dry prior to use.

· Protecting the head of newly constructed work with some form of cover to prevent saturation.
Frost attack
Frost-resistant bricks should be used in areas that are prone to prolonged periods of frost.
If there are any doubts about the suitability of facing bricks in areas of severe frost exposure, written clarification by the brick
manufacturer confirming the suitability of the brick should be provided.
Mortar
General
A mortar type above DPC should be chosen in accordance with the guidance given in the 'External Walls' and 'Appendix C -
Material, Products, and Building Systems' sections, or as recommended by the brick or block manufacturer. To ensure
adequate durability, strength and workability, lime and/or air entraining plasticisers may be added to cement in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations. Cement and sand alone should not be used unless a strong mix is specifically
Working in adverse weather required by the design.
Precautions should be taken when necessary to maintain the temperature of bricks, blocks and mortar above 3°C. The use of Batching
anti-freeze as a frost resistant additive in mortar is not permitted. Further guidance can be found in 'Appendix C - Material, Keep batching and mixing equipment clean to avoid contamination with materials used previously, mortar should be mixed by
Products, and Building Systems'. machine, or use ready mixed retarded mortars.
During prolonged periods of hot weather, when masonry units can become very dry, absorbent clay bricks may be wetted to
Mixing
reduce suction. Low absorption bricks, i.e. engineering bricks, should not be wetted. For calcium silicate and concrete units,
Mortar should be carefully and consistently proportioned and then thoroughly mixed using a mechanical mixer, except for very
the mortar specification may need to be changed in order to incorporate an admixture to assist with water retention. On no
small quantities.
account should masonry units or completed work be saturated with water.
Stability during construction
Gable walls should be appropriately propped prior to the construction of any roof. When a floor or roof slab of a building is used
for the temporary storage of building materials, the loading should not exceed the design loading for the element.

EXTERNAL WALLS
.1.3 6.1.3 TRADITIONAL
TRADITIONAL MASONRY
MASONRY CAVITY
CAVITY WALL
WALL - BRICKCLAD:
- BRICK CLAD:Substructure
Substructure external
external walls
walls
Key points: Construction below DPC Full fill cavity wall: Beam and block floor Cavity insulation must be
installed to meet the
manufacturers installation
1. Brickwork and blockwork must be selected to have suitable durability for its use in the wall
requirements.
construction in accordance with BS EN 771-1 and PD 6697.
2. Mortars below DPC are exposed to higher levels of saturation and therefore require higher
durability classification (see BS EN 998-2). The floor DPM must lap
DPC min 150mm
3. Cavities below ground should be filled with concrete ensuring there is a minimum gap of under the inner leaf DPC
above final ground level
225mm between DPC and the top of concrete.
4. Concrete for cavities should be GEN 1 grade and a consistence class S3. Final ground level
5. External ground levels should be a minimum of 150mm below DPC.
6. The compressive strength of the masonry units must meet the requirements of the relevant
regional Building Regulations. Please refer to the 'Drainage'
guidance for information DPC
regarding drainage passing
Damp proof courses (DPC) through external walls
Concrete cavity fill to be a
1. DPCs should be of a flexible material, be suitable for the intended use, the DPC should have minimum 225mm below
appropriate 3rd party certification. The installation specification of DPC's should follow good DPC
design practice in accordance with BS 8215.
2. Blue bricks or slate will not be accepted as a DPC.
3. DPC's should be laid on a mortar bed and correctly lapped at junction and corners. The depth
of the lap should be the same width as the DPC.
4. The DPC should not bridge any cavity unless it is acting as a cavity tray where a cavity is Note: For very severe exposure locations, fair faced
required (e.g over a telescopic floor vent). masonry with a full fill cavity insulation is not
5. Damp proof membranes should be lapped with the DPC a minimum overlap of 100mm. DPM's permitted. A partial fill insulation will be necessary
should be at least a minimum 1200 gauge thickness.
Typical gas barrier arrangement: Partial fill cavity wall: Traditional ground bearing slab
Traditional ground bearing slab
Gas barrier linked to suitable Cavity insulation must be

cavity tray installed to meet the
Insulation omitted manufacturers installation
for clarity requirements.
Cavity tray/gas barrier
Note: Wall ties should not DPC min 150mm The floor DPM must lap
puncture DPM/radon barrier above final ground level under the inner leaf DPC
Final ground level

Weep hole
Please refer to the 'Drainage' Gas barrier Please refer to the 'Drainage'
guidance for information guidance for information
regarding drainage passing regarding drainage passing
through external walls through external walls
Concrete cavity fill to be a Concrete cavity fill to be a
minimum 225mm below minimum 225mm below
DPC DPC
MD Insurance Services Limited 2020 102 EXTERNAL WALLS

EXTERNAL WALLS
TRADITIONAL MASONRY
MASONRY CAVITYWALL
CAVITY WALL-- BRICK
BRICK CLAD:
CLAD:Superstructure
Superstructurecavity
cavitywall
wallconstruction
construction
Cavities Wall tie provision Wall ties Thermal insulation
A traditional masonry wall should be constructed using an inner Wall ties should meet the following provisions: Thermal insulation for cavity walls should be inserted to a
and outer leaf, and a cavity should be provided between them, high standard of workmanship to avoid poor insulation
which meet the following provisions: · Wall ties should be to BS EN 845-1 or have appropriate third party performance and to prevent dampness migrating to the
certification. inside of the building:
· The cavity should have a minimum width of 50mm. Wall tie laid · The overall length of the wall ties must be long enough to ensure
· It is to be kept clear from mortar snots to ensure the cavity is to slight slope there is at least a 62.5mm overlap onto each leaf of masonry, so that · Insulation should have appropriate third party
not bridged. it will achieve a 50mm minimum length of bedding onto the mortar. certification and be installed in accordance with the
· The two leaves should be appropriately tied. · Wall ties should be laid to a slight fall towards the outer leaf and have manufacturers instructions.
· The cavity can be fully or partially insulated, depending on the ability to hold insulation against an internal leaf for partial fill · Insulation should not be cut or pierced to
exposure to wind driven rain. For partial fill insulation, a scenarios. accommodate wall ties, unless increased centres at
minimum clear residual cavity of 50mm should always be · Where a partial fill cavity insulation solution is proposed, a 50mm
reveals or expansion joints are required. The wall ties
provided. Further information can be found in BS 8104. minimum residual cavity is to be provided.
should coincide with insulation joints.
· Wall ties should be in a staggered in a diamond pattern.
· A 75mm minimum residual cavity will be required to partial · Partial fill insulation should be clipped or retained to
· Wall ties should be installed at a minimum density in accordance with
fill insulated cavities in very severe exposure locations. Inner Centre Outer the inner leaf using proprietary fixings in conjunction
BS EN 1996 -1-1: 2015 NA. This should not be less than 2.5 ties per
· For very severe exposure locations, fair faced masonry with leaf line leaf m2 and may increase with cavity width. with wall ties.
a full fill cavity insulation is not permitted. A partial fill · Wall ties should be spaced so that the minimum density is not less · For full fill cavities, mortar joints to facing brickwork
insulation will be necessary. than 2.5 ties per M2. should not be recessed.
Brick suitability
Spacing of wall ties Partial fill insulation Internal blockwork skin
· Facing bricks must have a suitable level of durability and
particular attention should be paid to the bricks resistance to
frost and moisture.
· Bricks should be capable of supporting proposed loads.
· Bricks should comply with BS EN771 and PD 6697.
· Frost resistant bricks should be used in areas of prolonged
frost.
Internal skin (blockwork)

· The blockwork should be capable of supporting the
proposed loads and achieve the required thermal
performance.
· The blockwork should have appropriate compressive
strength in accordance with the Building Regulations.
· The blockwork should comply with BS EN771 and PD 6697.
Cavity Barriers
Cavity barriers should be provided in the external cavity at all

compartment walls and floor junctions. Max vertical
spacing
Cavity barriers should have suitable third party accreditation. 450mm
Provide additional ties at movement 900mm maximum External brick wall Proprietary fixing to retain
joints and opening at 300mm maximum partial fill insulation as per
spacing's (225mm is necessary when The horizontal spacing may need manufacturers instructions
one or both leaves are blockwork) to be decreased depending on
cavity size
Bonding internal walls to external cavity walls
Bonded walls in brickwork are comparatively easy to construct,

but this can be more difficult with blockwork, so either:
· Tooth every alternative course, or butt and tie.

· Where blocks are of a different density, always use a
butted joint; party walls carry the separating wall through
and butt up the inner leaf using a proprietary bed joint,
reinforcement or suitable ties at each block course.
Block bonding internal Block bonding internal walls

masonry walls to inner leaf to inner leaf using ties
Limited Limited
2020 2020 103 103 EXTERNAL WALLS
© MD Insurance
EXTERNAL WALLS
6.1.5 TRADITIONAL
6.1.5 TRADITIONALMASONRY
MASONRY CAVITY
CAVITYWALL
WALL- BRICK CLAD:
- BRICK Expansion
CLAD: joints
Expansion and and
joints wall ties
wall ties
Wall ties Allowing for movement
Wall ties should meet the provisions detailed in this section, including the following: Vertical movement joints should be provided to the outer leaf of cavity walls as indicated in the table below. The first joint
from a return should be no more than half the dimension indicated in the table.
· Stainless steel wall ties should always be used.
· It is important to note that only BS EN 845-1 type wall ties or specifically manufactured (and tested) party wall ties Movement joints below the DPC should also be provided at major changes in foundation level and at changes in
are permitted in cavity separating walls between dwellings to reduce the transfer of sound. foundation design. Wall ties at a maximum of 300mm centres should be provided on each side of movement joints.
Suitability and spacing of wall ties Compressible filler, such as polyurethane foam, should be used to form the joint and be sealed to prevent water
penetration.
Wall tie spacing
Fibreboard or cork are not acceptable materials for forming movement joints in masonry.
Unfilled or fully filled cavities Spacing of ties When sealants are used in proximity with stone it is important to select a non-oil-based sealant to help prevent any
staining to the stone.
Width of cavity Recommended tie Horizontal Vertical
Elastic sealants (Type E) are suitable as they allow for reversible movement. Where a back-up material is used to control
50mm to 75mm wide Butterfly 900mm 450mm (increased to the sealant depth, it will also provide a compressible space into which the sealant can deform.
Double triangle 300mm at reveals and
Vertical twist movement joints) Where a backing material is used, the following must be considered:
Proprietary ties · The material is compatible with the sealant.
· It will not adhere to the sealant, preventing cracking within the sealant.
75mm to 100mm wide Double triangle 900mm 450mm (increased to · Provides sufficient density to allow the sealant to be applied.
Vertical twist 300mm at reveals and · Allows sufficient flexibility so not to impede lateral movement (compressible to about 50% of its original thickness),
movement joints) fibreboard is not acceptable.
100mm to 150mm wide Vertical twist 750mm 450mm (increased to The use of bed joint reinforcement may allow the distance between expansion joints to be increased, however this should
300mm at reveals and be designed by a Structural Engineer.
movement joints)
Greater than 150mm Wall tie specification and design to be provided by a Chartered Structural Engineer, or in Spacing of expansion joints
accordance with appropriate third-party certification. Design will be determined by location
and site-specific conditions.
Material Normal spacing Joint thickness
Clay brickwork 12m 15mm

Proprietary ties are to have appropriate third-party certification. (spacing up to 15m may be possible
if sufficient restraint is provided -
Proprietary insulation retaining clips compatible with the tie should be used where the cavity is partially filled. consult designer)
Calcium silicate 7.5-9m 10mm
Concrete brickwork (1) 6m 10mm
Note:
It is not normally necessary to provide movement joints to the internal leaf of cavity walls, but it should be considered
for rooms with unbroken lengths of wall in excess of 6m.
The first joint from a return should be not more than half the dimension indicated in the table. Movement joints are not
acceptable in solid party or separating walls; however, where cavity wall construction is adopted, offset movement
joints with a solid rubber compressible strip may be acceptable.
(1) Where openings are over 1.5m, masonry bed joint reinforcement should be considered

EXTERNAL WALLS
TRADITIONAL MASONRY
MASONRY CAVITYWALL
CAVITY WALL-- BRICK
BRICK CLAD:
CLAD:Allowing
Allowingfor
formovement
movement
Wall ties should be provided

Wall ties in proximity to movement joints and windows within 225mm horizontal
spacing of openings
Movement joints
· Vertical movement joints should be provided in accordance with

this Technical Manual and the manufacturers guidance.
Wall ties should be provided at
· Wall ties should be provided at 300mm maximum vertical spacing 300mm maximum vertical
either side of the expansion joint, and within 225mm horizontal spacing either side of the
spacing of the movement joint. expansion joint.
· Compressible filler, such as polyurethane foam, should be used
to form the joint.
· Fibre board or cork board are not suitable materials for forming
movement joints.
· The joint should be sealed to prevent water penetration.
· It is not normally necessary to provide movement joints to internal

leaf of cavity walls, but should be considered where rooms occur
with unbroken lengths of wall in excess of 6m.
Wall ties should be provided Wall ties Movement joint.

within 225mm horizontal
spacing of the movement joint
Movement joints below DPC Typical movement joint detail

Polysulphide sealant
15mm movement
joint Compressible filler
Movement joint
Minimum lap of DPC 100mm to

accommodate movement
DPC
Where the finished ground level is 600mm

or greater below the horizontal DPC, the
movement joint should be continued within
the external leaf of the sub structure
600mm
Stainless steel vertical twist ties (or similar) at

External ground level
225mm centres vertically, and within 225mm spacing
horizontally.
Limited Limited
© MD Insurance
EXTERNAL WALLS
TRADITIONAL MASONRYCAVITY
MASONRY CAVITYWALL
WALL -- BRICK
BRICKCLAD:
CLAD:Connecting
Connectingto to
existing structure
existing structure
New elements connecting to existing structures New wall junctions Damp Proof Course (DPC)
Where residential developments are attached to existing buildings, and the existing The junction of the new walls to the existing walls must ensure that dampness cannot An effective DPC should be present in the existing wall, linked to the new DPC and
elements form part of the new structure; these must meet the Functional Requirements track back into the new building or the existing building. damp proof membrane (DPM) of the new building.
of the Warranty. The details below give some guidance on the minimum information
and standards required to meet the Functional Requirements. The detailing of this junction is critical to ensure that moisture ingress does not occur Acceptable existing DPCs are considered as:
between the new and existing walls. Typical acceptable details are indicated below.
Party wall · A continuous felt or proprietary DPC material.
· A chemically injected DPC supported by an insurance-backed guarantee.
It is highly likely that improvements to an existing wall are necessary to meet the · A slate DPC is considered acceptable if the existing wall incorporates an
requirements of the Warranty. This may include underpinning, injected DPC and independent wall lining system to the inner face of the new building.
internal linings. Bonding new walls to existing solid masonry wall
The new DPC should lap the existing DPC by at least 100mm.
Where a wall is shared by two or more owners, the requirements of the Party Wall etc.
Act may apply. This is separate legislation with different requirements to the Building Existing and new structure junctions
Regulations or Warranty requirement.
At the junction of the existing and new structures, detailing should allow for differential
Further guidance on the Party Wall etc. Act can be found on the Planning Portal movement without cracking. Any settlement should be limited to 2mm-3mm, which
website www.planningportal.gov.uk Typical 215mm existing would not normally adversely affect the roof covering.
solid brick wall
Separating walls In order to prevent excessive differential movement, the new building should have the
same foundation type as the existing building. Where the foundation types are
different, e.g. new building pile and beam, existing building traditional strip foundation,
The separating wall between the new and existing building must meet the relevant
the new building should be completely independent of the existing building.
requirements of the Building Regulations.
The existing walls should prove to be structurally stable and resistant to water Method of bonding to
penetration. Structural Engineers
design
Independent
Existing foundations Internal lining
Vertical insulated DPC
The existing foundations and wall structure must be suitable to support any proposed
increased loading resulting from the construction of the new building. Plasterboard
Foundations to the existing wall should be exposed and assessed for suitability to
support additional loadings. It is important to protect existing foundations at all times,
and care must be taken not to 'undermine' existing foundations when clearing the site
or reducing levels.
Where existing foundations require underpinning, a design by a Chartered Structural

Engineer should be provided and approved by the Warranty Surveyor prior to work
commencing on-site. Bonding new walls to existing masonry cavity wall
The existing wall should also be appraised to determine whether it is structurally stable
and suitable to support additional loadings.
Existing Masonry leaf cut

vertically to make cavity
continuous and insulated
DPC inserted
Method of bonding to
Structural Engineers
Wall treatment design
to meet sound
requirements
Wall ties at
225mm vertical
C/C next to wall
junction

EXTERNAL WALLS
6.1.86.1.8TRADITIONAL
TRADITIONAL MASONRY
MASONRY CAVITYWALL
CAVITY WALL- -BRICK
BRICK CLAD:
CLAD: Forming
Formingopenings
openings
Window and door installations Typical window reveal detail (normal Lintels
exposure)
Please refer to the 'Windows and Doors' section for installation requirements of · The lintel should be the correct length and width for the opening
Insulated cavity closer. This should
frames including maximum gaps and fixings. Inner leaf and cavity width, the bearing length should be at least 150mm.
also be fire resistant when required · Do not let masonry overhang lintels by more than 25mm.
by the regional Building Regulations · Continuity of the masonry bond should be maintained at supports
for beams and lintels.
· Lintels should be insulated to prevent excessive thermal bridging.
Typical vertical section through window opening
Vertical DPC to be folded around Do not:
(and where possible fixed to) the
· Support lintels and beams on short lengths of cut blocks or
window/door frame make-up pieces.
Cavity tray
· Apply load to lintels or beams before the masonry supporting has
The frame should overlap the cavity hardened.
by a minimum of 30mm
Correct method of brick

Weep holes bond around lintels
Appropriate 'non hardening' mastic
sealant to be provided between
frame and masonry reveal
The frame should overlap the Outer leaf
cavity by a minimum of 30mm
The external face of the frame is set

back at least 38mm from the
masonry face
Typical rebated window frame detail
for areas of very severe exposure
Sill to project beyond the wall or
sub-sill by at least 25mm (ensure Inner leaf
the water drip projects at least
10mm beyond wall) Insulated cavity closer. This should
also be fire resistant when required by
the regional Building Regulations
Insulated cavity closer. This should Vertical DPC to be provided around

also be fire resistant when required masonry, and where possible fixed
by the regional Building Regulations to the window/door frame
Supporting masonry fully coursed
into the wall - accepted.

sealant to be provided between Incorrect method of brick
Bay window detail frame and masonry reveal bond around lintels
25mm rebate to allow for building Outer leaf
Cold bridging tolerance and window fixing
insulation tolerance 25mm
DPC full width of When installing window/door frames in a checked rebate, allow for the frame to be deeper:
external leaf and not · To accommodate the 25mm rebate, and
less than 150mm wide · To allow for opening lights to open clear of the masonry/render.
DPC to be lapped Windows and doors

behind window frame
In areas of very severe exposure, checked rebates should be provided. The frame
should be set back behind the outer leaf and should overlap.
Joint at external corner A suitable DPC must be provided at all window and door openings to prevent the
of masonry and window passage of damp to the internal finishes. A third party certified cavity closure may be
frame to be sealed with used.
mastic
Supporting masonry not fully

coursed into the wall - not accepted.

EXTERNAL WALLS
6.1.9 TRADITIONAL
MASONRY CAVITY
CAVITYWALL
WALL- BRICK CLAD:
- BRICK Feature
CLAD: stone
Feature surrounds
stone to openings
surrounds to openings
Stone jamb mullion fixing to walls Joining stone jambs to sills and head Stone sill with insulated cavity closer
Stone jambs, mullions,
and heads should not A soft joint is required between the top
project into the cavity and of the head and the steel support
insulated cavity closers lintel/cavity tray
should be inserted to
prevent cold bridging (see Vertical DPC
typical window opening Non-structural cast stone head
sections)
Head to be fully bedded on jamb

DPC/slip plane
Stainless steel dovetail over stool
Stainless steel dowel drilled equally into
anchor head and jamb/mullion DPC full length
and width of sill
bed
Stone jambs and mullions Cavity Trays
should be fixed at the top
and bottom with stainless When stone heads are being used, it is
steel pins. Stainless steel advisable to double up the cavity trays -
frame-type cramps can with one above the stone head to provide
also be used to give extra stop-ends and weep-holes
stability at jambs Note: The insulated cavity closer should also be fire resistant
Cast stone jambs and mullions
when required by the relevant Building Regulations
Stainless steel dowels in the sides of
Mortar:
jambs should be bedded into adjacent
The mortar for use with
mortar joints as the masonry is
stone should comply with
constructed
the relevant British
Standards for sand, lime,
and cement as set out in
BS 5390
Stone sill DPC/slip plane Stone head Cast stone heads

over stool
A cavity tray must be provided above all heads as this not only discharges water to the
outside face of the masonry, but also acts as a slip plane. A slip plane will be required
at the end of the cast stone head as well as a soft joint between the top of the head
and the steel support lintel.
Cast stone heads should be manufactured in accordance with BS 1217, confirmation

of this should be provided to the Warranty Surveyor upon request.
Mortar bed Fill open section with flexible Mortar bed
under stools material on completion of under stools
Cast stone window/door surrounds
structure
Where cast stone butts up to other materials, allowance must be made to

accommodate differential movement e.g. where cast stone abuts clay brickwork, a slip
Sills
DPC/Slip plane DPC/Slip plane surface between the two materials must be incorporated or the cast stone should be
over head under head flexibly jointed.
The DPC should be overlapped by the vertical DPC at the jambs and should
be turned up at the back and ends for the full depth of the sill.
The mortar bed below sills should be trowelled smooth, allowed to set,
cleaned off, and then a DPC laid over. The open section below the sill
should be sealed with a flexible material only on completion of the structure.
To control water penetration through joints in window surrounds, e.g. at

junctions between jambs and mullions and sills, rectangular and T-shaped
water bars should be provided.

EXTERNAL WALLS
6.1.10
6.1.10 TRADITIONAL
TRADITIONAL MASONRY
MASONRY CAVITYWALL
CAVITY WALL- -BRICK
BRICK CLAD:
CLAD: Lateral
Lateralrestraint
restraintatatfloor
floorlevels
levels
Restraint of walls Typical restraint type joist hanger
Walls should be adequately restrained at floors, ceilings and verges in accordance with the relevant Building Regulations.
Maximum 6mm gap
Restraint can be provided by: between joist and hanger
· Lateral restraint straps. Bed hanger directly

· Restraint type joist hangers. on to blockwork
· Other forms of restraint proven by a Chartered Engineer.
Lateral restraint of walls (timber floors)

Joist fixed to hanger
Tension strap to turn down 100mm Strap to be rebated into top of joists
within the cavity and to be tight to allow the floorboards to lay flat
against the face of the inner leaf wall No gap between joist
hanger and wall
30mm x 5mm galvanized

or stainless steel restraint Restraint type hangers
straps at a maximum 2m
centres It is necessary to ensure that:
Gap between the wall Solid nogging to be fixed Alternative · The hanger is bedded directly on the masonry and there is no gap between the hanger back-plate and the face of
and the first joist to be between joists under strap location the masonry.
filled with a timber straps to take the fixings. using full depth · At least 450mm of masonry is provided above the hanger.
packing at strap positions Nogging should extend at noggings
least half the depth of the
· Hangers are spaced at centres of floor joists included in the design.
joist and be at least · The hanger is suitable for the loadings and masonry strength.
38mm thick
Do not:
· Use brick courses in block walls under joist hangers as the thermal insulation of the wall may be reduced unless
similar units to the blocks are used.
Lateral restraint of walls Lateral restraint straps
(beam and block floors)
Floors, including timber, block and beam, and roofs should provide lateral Correct use of hangers
restraint to all walls running parallel to them by means of 30mm x 5mm
galvanised or stainless steel restraint straps at a maximum 2m centres (please
refer to the 'Upper Floors' section for further guidance). Straps need not be
provided to floors at, or about, the same level on each side of a supported wall
Strap to turn down a and at the following locations:
minimum of 100mm and
to be tight against the Timber floors in two storey buildings where:
inner face of cavity
· Joists are at maximum 1.2m centres and have at least 90mm bearing on
supported walls or 75mm bearing on to a timber wall plate.
· Carried by the supported wall by restraint type joist hangers as described in Support hangers Do not cut the
Strap Position blocks
BS 5268: 7.1. on full blocks
· Concrete floors with minimum 90mm bearing on supported wall.
Do not mix Do not pack up

materials under joists
© MD Insurance
Limited 2020 109 109 EXTERNAL
EXTERNALWALLS
WALLS
6.1.11 TRADITIONAL
6.1.11 TRADITIONAL MASONRY
MASONRYCAVITY
CAVITYWALL
WALL- BRICK CLAD:
- BRICK Cavity
CLAD: traystrays
Cavity
Stop end to cavity tray Cavity trays
Cavity trays, associated weep-holes and stop-ends prevent the build-up of water within a cavity wall and allow the water to escape through the outer leaf. They are
Lintel Cavity trays should rise at used in conjunction with lintels above openings, to protect the top surface of cavity insulation at horizontal cavity barriers and where the cavity is bridged.
least 150mm from the
Insulation outer to the inner leaf, be Cavity trays are to be provided:
self-supporting or fully · Cavity trays are to be provided to comply with relevant regional Building Regulations.
supported and have joints · At all interruptions likely to direct rain water across the cavity, such as rectangular ducts, lintels and recessed meter boxes.
Minimum lintel lapped and sealed · Above cavity insulation that is not taken to the top of the wall, unless that area of wall is protected by impervious cladding.
bearing 150mm · Above lintels in walls in exposure zones 4 and 3, and in zones 2 and 1 where the lintel is not corrosion-resistant and not intended to function as its own cavity
tray.
Preformed stop end · Continuously above lintels where openings are separated by short piers.
bonded to cavity tray · Above openings where the lintel supports a brick soldier course.
clipped to lintel to coincide
with perpend weephole Ring beams or floor slabs that partially bridge the cavity, e.g. when dimensional accuracy cannot be guaranteed, should be protected by a continuous cavity tray,
especially when full fill cavity insulation is employed.
Weep-holes
Continuous cavity tray over Weep-holes must be installed at no more than 900mm centres to drain water from cavity trays and from the concrete cavity infill at ground level. When the wall is
two openings and a small pier to be cavity filled, it is advisable to reduce this spacing.
Weep holes at maximum centres of
Cavity trays should be continuous 900mm
At least two weep-holes must be provided to drain cavity trays above openings.
where openings are separated by 900mm
short piers Weep-holes in exposure zones 3 and 4 should be designed to prevent ingress of wind-driven rain (including ground level).
Stop-ends
Cavity trays should have water tight stop-ends to prevent water from running into the adjacent cavity. Stop-ends need to be bonded to the cavity tray material or
clipped to the lintel, so that a stop to the structural cavity of at least 75mm high is provided. Normally, the stop-end is located to coincide with the nearest perpend
to the end of the cavity tray. Stop-ends can be formed by sufficiently turning up the end of a DPC tray into the perpend joint. Surplus mortar should be removed
from cavities and wall ties cleared of mortar droppings and debris as the work proceeds.
Other perforations of the building envelope

600mm Proprietary elements, such as ventilators, soil pipes, etc. which perforate the building envelope should be installed and sealed to prevent ingress of moisture or
vermin in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. External meter boxes should be of a type approved by the Service Supply Authority and provided with a
Cavity trays continuous
over piers less than cavity tray and a vertical DPC between the back of the box and the wall.
600mm wide
Proprietary cavity wall systems
Details of flashing can be found in
Installation of the 'Roofs' section At stepped and lower storey abutments and around corners in low rise cavity masonry walls a proprietary cavity tray system should be used.
stepped cavity tray
Preformed cavity trays should be
used for stepped cavity tray details
Flat roof abutment cavity tray construction Stop end in relation to cavity tray and lintel
Profile line
Heel of tray should be installed
against profile Cavity tray (minimum height
within cavity of 150mm) Cavity tray
Mortar should be raked out under
the cavity tray to a depth of 25mm
Weep holes must be installed at Top hat lintel
no more than 900mm centres to
Steps and staggers Minimum
drain water from the cavity trays. Angled stop end
End tray to Where cavities are to be fully 150mm
Particular care is needed in adequately upstand
have two stop filled, the spacing should be
preventing the ingress of water in a terrace of
ends and weep reduced. At least two weep holes
buildings with steps and staggers. A
hole must be provided to drain cavity
proprietary cavity tray system should be used,
trays over openings
or alternatively, a suitable tanking system.
Stepped cavity trays are required at all pitched
(stepped) roof abutments with external cavity
walls, e.g. attached garages or staggered Lead cover flashing linked under
terraces. The bottom (last) cavity tray must be the cavity tray
Profile depth calculated
by the depth of batten + supplied with two stop-ends and an
associated weep-hole, allowing all water to Roof covering to be taken up
the depth of the tile +
escape over the lower roof covering. For behind cover flashing for a
the height of the flashing
masonry, lead cover flashings should be minimum lap of 65mm
linked into the cavity tray (lapped in below).
Tilting fillet to support roof
covering at junction
Roof structure as per design
© MD
© MD Insurance
Insurance Services
Services Limited
Limited 2020
2020 110
110 EXTERNAL
EXTERNAL WALLS
WALLS
6.1.12
6.1.12 TRADITIONAL
TRADITIONAL MASONRY
MASONRY CAVITYWALL
CAVITY WALL- -BRICK
BRICK CLAD:
CLAD: Copings/parapets
Copings/parapets
Fixing of copings onto horizontal parapets Fixing of copings to sloping parapets
Stainless steel dowel in
slotted hole to prevent uplift Stainless steel dowel in a Throats or drips to copings
Throats or drips to copings slotted hole prevents uplift should project a minimum of
should project a minimum of 40mm
40mm
All copings should be
DPC made continuous by
mechanically fixed
lapping over mechanical
fixing
DPC under coping (fully
supported). DPC made Min
continuous by lapping over 50mm Stainless steel mechanical
mechanical fixings fixings giving restraint to
Stainless steel mechanical coping (fixing into masonry
fixings giving restraint to below)
coping (fixing into masonry
below)
Maximum height of parapet walls (to be read in conjunction with the table below)
w1 w1
DPC lapping over
mechanical fixing
X Parapet wall detail

Y
H H
DPC under coping (fully

supported)
Continuous cavity tray

sloped towards outer leaf
with joints lapped and sealed
Cover flashing
Level of junction of wall and Level of junction of wall and
w2 structural roof w2 structural roof
Weepholes required at a
maximum of 900mm centres
Wall type Thickness (mm) Parapet height to be no more than (mm)
Cavity wall x+y 600

equal or less than 200 Min 150mm
x+y 860
greater than 200
equal or less than 250
Solid wall w1 = 150 600 Parapets

w1 = 190 760
w1 = 215 860 · The materials used in construction of the parapets details should be suitable for the
location and exposure.
Note: w1 should be less than w2 - as shown above · Where possible, the use of raking parapets should be avoided due to need for high
standards of detailing and workmanship required to prevent the ingress of moisture.
· In very severe exposure zones, it is recommended that parapet construction is avoided
altogether.
· Throats or drips to copings of parapets and chimneys should project beyond the finished
faces by a minimum of 40mm distance to throw water clear.
© MD Insurance
EXTERNALWALLS
WALLS
6.1.13 TRADITIONAL
MASONRY CAVITY
CAVITYWALL
WALL- BRICK CLAD:
- BRICK Lateral
CLAD: restraint
Lateral of walls
restraint of walls
Tension strap location Rafter/gable wall detail

Provide additional ties at
Tension strap at highest verges at 300mm vertical
point that will provide a spacing within 225mm
secure connection horizontally (parallel to the
225mm top of the wall)
Cavity barrier
Tension straps at not more x x/2 omitted for clarity
than 2m centres
x/2 Noggings to be provided and

If h is greater than 16t, set horizontal unless the
provide restraint here at not 300mm strap has a twist to line it up
greater than 2m centres max with the roof slope
h
Packing piece between

inner leaf and first rafter
t = sum of thicknesses of
leaves + 10mm
30mm x 5mm galvanised or

stainless steel restraint strap
(at a maximum 2m centres)
fixed to solid nogging with a
minimum of four fixings
which at least one is to be in
the third rafter or in nogging
beyond the third rafter
Gable end wall
Corbelling Restraint of Walls

The extent of corbelling of masonry should not exceed that
Walls should be adequately restrained at floors, ceilings, and
indicated in the below detail, unless supported or reinforced.
verges in accordance with the relevant Building Regulations.
Reinforced corbels should be designed by a Charted Structural
Engineer. Restraints can be provided by:
· Restraint type joist hangers.

· Lateral restraint straps.
No decrease in thickness · Other forms of restraint proven by a Charted Engineer.
Vertical strapping at eaves - flat on opposite side of corbel Wall tie
roofs Insulation
Insulation should extend to the full height of the gable wall.

Each joist fixed to wall-plate
with framing anchors or
skew nails Chimneys
If the chimney is in a severe exposure zone the cavity should

extend around the outside of the stack and be continuous up to
Strap anchored to wall and roof level, as per BS 5628, Part 3. Where the chimney breast is
turned over wall-plate gathered in, the lower projecting masonry should be protected with
a suitable capping and cavity trays. A 50mm cavity at the back of
the chimney breast is maintained to prevent rainwater penetration.
T Further guidance can be found in the 'Chimneys and Flues'

T section.
Maximum Maximum
corbel T/3 corbel T/3

EXTERNAL WALLS
6. 6.2
Traditional Masonry
External Cavity Wall - Rendered
Walls Masonry Clad

TRADITIONAL MASONRY
MASONRY CAVITYWALL
CAVITY WALL -- RENDERED
RENDERED MASONRY
MASONRYCLAD:
CLAD:Design of masonry
Design walls
of masonry walls
Structural design of walls The suitability of full fill cavity insulation in exposure locations
A method of meeting the requirements of the Warranty is to design and construct walls to the relevant Building Regulations depending on the The following table outlines the minimum cavity widths for full fill insulation types in varying exposure locations. Full fill cavity wall insulation in
region. For example, in England and Wales, the masonry units should be built in accordance with Approved Document A (Structure). fully rendered walls on concrete blockwork should be a minimum of 75mm.
Alternatively, justification of design by a Chartered Structural Engineer can be used as a solution.
Suitable cavity wall construction depending on exposure, for use with full fill cavity insulation
Minimum insulation thickness (mm)
The design and construction of masonry cavity walls should be suitable for the site specific exposure location.
Retro-fill
Built-in
Wind-driven rain Exposure category Suitable wall construction (other than UF foam
insulation
UF foam)
Very Severe Any wall with impervious cladding
50 50 50
· The exposure to wind-driven rain, using the image below 'Map showing exposure to wind-driven rain categories'. (Exposure zone 4)
· The correct type of construction, including the correct application of insulation. Fair-faced masonry with impervious cladding to all
· The correct level of workmanship and design detailing, particularly around window and door openings. walls above ground storey
100 100 N/A
(2)
Any wall fully rendered 75 75 N/A
Fair-faced masonry (1) N/A N/A N/A
Dornoch Severe (2)

Any wall with impervious cladding or render 50 50 50
(Exposure zone 3)
Inverness Fair-faced masonry with impervious cladding or

Shetland Orkney 50 75 50
render (2) to all walls above ground storey
Islands Islands
Aberdeen Fair-faced masonry (1) 75 75 N/A
(2)
Moderate Any wall with impervious cladding or render
Perth Exposure zones Exposure to wind driven 50 50 50
Dundee (Exposure zone 2)
Stirling
Fair-faced masonry with impervious cladding or
50 50 50
Edinburgh Dunbar Very severe 100 or more render (2) to all walls above ground storey
Glasgow
Severe 56.5 to less than 100 Fair-faced masonry
Ayr 50 75 75
Sheltered Any wall with impervious cladding or render.
Sheltered less than 33 50 50 50
Newcastle (Exposure zone 1)
Dungannon Carlisle
Belfast Fair-faced masonry with impervious cladding or
Workington 50 50 50
Alston Note: render to all walls above ground storey
Middlesbrough
Whitby map can only be made by site-specific Fair-faced masonry
50 50 50
Ripon
exposure of walls to wind driven rain" Notes:
York and the table above.
· (1) In very severe exposure locations, fair-faced masonry with full fill cavity insulation is not permitted
Hebden Bridge
Skelmersdale Hull · (2) Render on an external leaf of clay bricks (F2, S1 or F1, S1 designation bricks BS EN 771) in severe or very severe exposures
Manchester
Liverpool is not permitted where the cavity is to be fully filled with insulation.
Sheffield
Doncaster Grimsby · This table covers walls where the external leaf does not exceed 12m in height.
Bangor Chester Lincoln · The exposure category of the building is determined by its location on the map showing categories of exposure to wind-driven rain
(see also BRE Report 262).
Stafford
Shrewsbury
Nottingham
· Fair-faced masonry includes clay, calcium silicate and concrete bricks and blocks and dressed natural stone laid in an appropriate
mortar, preferably with struck, weathered or bucket handle joints. Cavity walls of random rubble or random natural stone should
Leicester
Birmingham not be fully filled.
Northampton
Norwich · Recessed mortar joints should not be used.
Brecon
Cambridge
Gloucester
Cardiff Additional requirements in a coastal location
Swindon
Bristol London
Staines
Gatwick For the purpose of this Technical Manual we are considering sites within 5km inland from the shore line or sites located in 'tidal' estrine areas
Exeter Dover
Poole Southampton where they are within 5km of the general shoreline.
Plymouth
Brighton Further information on Warranty requirements within a coastal location can be found in 'Appendix B - Coastal Locations'.
EXTERNAL WALLS
© MD Insurance Limited Limited
2020 2020 114 114
EXTERNAL WALLS
6.2.26.2.2TRADITIONAL
TRADITIONAL MASONRY
MASONRY CAVITYWALL
CAVITY WALL- -RENDERED
RENDERED MASONRY
MASONRYCLAD:
CLAD:Masonry
Masonrywalls
wallsgeneral
general
Brick and block suitability
Exposure
Masonry walls and moisture. Further information can be found in 'Appendix C - Material, Products, and Building Systems'.
Protection Colour variation of bricks below DPC

All new masonry work should be protected during construction by covering it to ensure that walls are not allowed to become There is usually a variation in the colour of bricks of the same style. To prevent patching of colour, it is recommended that at
saturated by rainwater or dry out too quickly in hot weather, are protected against frost attack, the risk of efflorescence and line least three packs of bricks are opened at any one time and mixed randomly to ensure that the wall is of an even colour.
staining and movement problems are reduced.
Any temporary cover should not disturb the new masonry. Frogs and perforations
facing up so that it is fully filled with mortar during laying. This ensures optimum strength, helps to increase the mass of the
Protection of masonry Bricks with a directional surface texture are intended to be laid frog up.
Efflorescence

Frost attack
Mortar
General
During prolonged periods of hot weather, when masonry units can become very dry, absorbent clay bricks may be wetted to Mixing
reduce suction. Low absorption bricks, i.e. engineering bricks, should not be wetted. For calcium silicate and concrete units, Mortar should be carefully and consistently proportioned and then thoroughly mixed using a mechanical mixer, except for very
the mortar specification may need to be changed in order to incorporate an admixture to assist with water retention. On no small quantities.
Non-rendered blockwork
All external blockwork should be rendered or otherwise finished with a cladding that is appropriately durable, unless the block
manufacturer can provide third-party certification confirming that the blockwork can be left unfinished, or finished in an
alternative way.
© MD Insurance
EXTERNALWALLS
WALLS
6.2.3
CAVITYWALL
WALL- RENDERED MASONRY
- RENDERED CLAD:
MASONRY Substructure
CLAD: external
Substructure walls walls
external
Key points: Construction below DPC
construction in accordance with BS EN 771-1 and PD6697.
2. Mortars below DPC are exposed to higher levels of saturation and therefore require higher Cavity insulation must be installed to
durability classification (see BS EN 998-2). meet the manufacturers installation
3. Cavities below ground should be filled with concrete ensuring there is a minimum gap of Full fill cavity wall: Beam and block floor requirements.
225mm between DPC and the top of concrete.
Typical use of 'bell cast' Where full fill cavity insulation
4. Concrete for cavities should be GEN 1 grade and a consistence class S3. formed in render to is used in rendered walls on
5. External ground levels should be a minimum of 150mm below DPC. prevent bridging of the concrete blockwork the
6. The compressive strength of the masonry units must meet the requirements of the relevant DPC minimum acceptable cavity
regional Building Regulations. width is 75mm
DPC min 150mm
above final ground level
Damp proof courses (DPC) The floor DPM must lap
Final ground level under the inner leaf DPC
a minimum 100mm
1. DPCs should be of a flexible material, be suitable for the intended use, the DPC should
have appropriate 3rd party certification. The installation specification of DPC's should
follow good design practice in accordance with BS 8215. Please refer to the 'Drainage'
2. Blue bricks or slate will not be accepted as a DPC. guidance for information DPC
regarding drainage passing
3. DPC's should be laid on a mortar bed and correctly lapped at junction and corners. The
through external walls
depth of the lap should be the same width as the DPC.
4. The DPC should not bridge any cavity unless it is acting as a cavity tray where a cavity is Concrete cavity fill to be a
minimum 225mm below
required (e.g over a telescopic floor vent).
DPC
5. Damp proof membranes should be lapped with the DPC a minimum overlap of 100mm.
DPM's should be at least a minimum 1200 gauge thickness.
Rendering
1. Rendering below DPC should only be carried out using a specialist render manufacturer's
specification. No render system should bridge the DPC and a proprietary uPVC bead or
stainless steel bead should be used above and below where the renders meet at the DPC.
2. DPC should extend through the rendering system on between the bellcast beads or render
stop system.
3. For bellcasts, uPVC beads or stainless steel beads are acceptable.
Typical gas barrier arrangement: Partial fill cavity wall: Traditional ground bearing slab
Traditional ground bearing slab
Cavity insulation must be
Typical use of 'bell cast' installed to meet the
formed in render to manufacturers installation
Gas barrier linked to suitable Insulation omitted requirements.
prevent bridging of the
cavity tray for clarity
DPC
Cavity tray/gas barrier DPC min 150mm The floor DPM must lap
above final ground level under the inner leaf DPC a
minimum 100mm
Note: Wall ties should not Final ground level
puncture DPM/radon barrier
Weep hole
Please refer to the 'Drainage'
Please refer to the 'Drainage' Gas barrier guidance for information
guidance for information regarding drainage passing
regarding drainage passing through external walls
through external walls Concrete cavity fill to be a
Concrete cavity fill to be a minimum 225mm below
minimum 225mm below DPC
DPC
EXTERNAL WALLS
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 116
116
EXTERNAL WALLS
6.2.4 TRADITIONAL
6.2.4 TRADITIONAL MASONRYCAVITY
MASONRY CAVITY WALL
WALL--RENDERED
RENDEREDMASONRY
MASONRYCLAD: Superstructure
CLAD: cavity
Superstructure wall construction
cavity wall construction
Cavities Wall tie provision Wall ties Thermal insulation
A traditional masonry wall should be constructed using Wall ties should meet the following provisions: Thermal insulation for cavity walls should be inserted to a high standard of workmanship to
an inner and outer leaf, and a cavity should be avoid poor insulation performance and to prevent dampness migrating to the inside of the
provided between them, which meet the following · Wall ties should be to BS EN 845-1 or have appropriate third party building:
provisions: certification.
· The overall length of the wall ties must be long enough to ensure there is
Wall tie laid at least a 62.5mm overlap onto each leaf of masonry, so that it will
· Cavity wall insulation must have an independent third party product approval and only
· The cavity should have a minimum width of to slight slope achieve a 50mm minimum length of bedding onto the mortar. be used as detailed in the third party product certification.
50mm. · Wall ties should be laid to a slight fall towards the outer leaf and have the · Insulation should not be cut or pierced to accommodate wall ties, unless increased
· It is to be kept clear from mortar snots to ensure ability to hold insulation against an internal leaf for partial fill scenarios centres at reveals or expansion joints are required.
the cavity is not bridged. · Where a partial fill cavity insulation solution is proposed, a 50mm · The wall ties should coincide with insulation joints.
· The two leaves should be appropriately tied. minimum residual cavity is to be provided. · Partial fill insulation should be clipped or retained to the inner leaf using proprietary
· The cavity can be fully or partially insulated, · Wall ties should be in a staggered in a diamond pattern. fixings in conjunction with wall ties.
depending on exposure to wind driven rain. · Wall ties should be installed at a minimum density in accordance with BS · 'Render on an external leaf of clay bricks (F2, S1 or F1, S1 designation bricks BS EN
· For partial fill insulation, a minimum clear cavity of EN 1996 -1-1: 2015 NA. This should not be less than 2.5 ties per m2 and 771) in severe or very severe exposures is not permitted where the cavity is to be fully
Inner Centre Outer may increase with cavity width.
50mm should always be provided. Further filled with insulation. Partial fill cavity insulation should be adopted'.
information can be found in BS 8104. leaf line leaf
Masonry suitability
· Facing masonry must have a suitable level of Spacing of wall ties External render External block wall Cavity insulation Internal blockwork skin
durability and particular attention should be paid
to the masonry's resistance to frost and moisture.
· Masonry should be capable of supporting
proposed loads.
· Masonry should comply with BS EN 771 and
PD6697.
· Frost resistant masonry should be used in areas
of prolonged frost.
Internal skin (blockwork)

· The blockwork should be capable of supporting
the proposed loads and achieve the required
thermal performance.
· The blockwork should have appropriate
compressive strength in accordance with the
Building Regulations.
· The blockwork should comply with BS EN 771
and PD6697.
Max vertical
Cavity Barriers spacing
450mm
Cavity barriers should be provided in the external
cavity at all compartment walls and floor junctions.
Cavity barriers should have suitable third party

accreditation.
Bonding internal walls to external cavity walls

900mm maximum Proprietary fixing to retain
Bonded walls in brickwork are comparatively easy to Provide additional ties at movement joints and partial fill insulation as per
construct, but this can be more difficult with blockwork, opening at 300mm maximum spacing's (225mm is The horizontal spacing may need manufacturers instructions
so either: necessary when one or both leaves are blockwork) to be decreased depending on
cavity size
· Tooth every alternative course, or butt and tie.
· Where blocks are of a different density, always
use a butted joint; party walls carry the separating
wall through and butt up the inner leaf using a Rendering Masonry background
proprietary bed joint, reinforcement or suitable
ties at each block course. · Rendering should be in accordance with BS EN The walls which are to be rendered should be examined for excessive moisture content prior to
13914-1:2005 and workmanship in accordance with rendering and suitable to receive rendering. Rendering should only be completed if the outside
BS 8000. temperature is at least 2°C. There should be no frost within the construction and rendering
should not take place where freezing weather conditions are expected before curing.
· Traditional hand mixed rendering is not accepted.
Only a pre-blended bagged render system will be Ensure that all joints are finished flush with the surface to avoid shade variations.
accepted as a suitable render system.
The wall construction should not include dissimilar materials that may increase the potential of
· Where a specialist render system is being used, the cracking due to differential thermal movement and effects that the different suction that each
system should have a third party accreditation such type of background material may create.
as a BBA or ETA certification, and backed up with a
Block bonding internal Block bonding internal manufacturer's specification. To control suction, always apply a specialist sealer key coat or suitable render preparatory
masonry walls to inner leaf walls to inner leaf using ties coat. Allow a minimum of 48 hours for the key coat to fully dry before applying the next coat.
EXTERNAL WALLS
© MD©Insurance Services
Services 2020 2020
Limited 117
117
EXTERNAL WALLS
6.2.5
CAVITYWALL
- RENDERED CLAD:
MASONRY Expansion
CLAD: joints and
Expansion wall
joints andties
wall ties
Wall ties Allowing for movement
Wall ties should meet the provisions detailed in this section, including following: Vertical movement joints should be provided to the outer leaf of cavity walls as indicated in the table below. The first joint
from a return should be no more than half the dimension indicated in the table.
· Stainless steel wall ties should always be used.
· It is important to note that only BS EN 845-1 type wall ties or specifically manufactured (and tested) party wall ties The movement joints must be continued through the render construction and an appropriate weather resistant seal
are permitted in cavity separating walls between dwellings to reduce the transfer of sound. provided to prevent moisture ingress to behind the render finish.
Suitability and spacing of wall ties Movement joints below the DPC should also be provided at major changes in foundation level and at changes in
foundation design. Wall ties at a maximum of 300mm centres should be provided on each side of movement joints.
Wall tie spacing Compressible filler, such as polyurethane foam, should be used to form the joint and be sealed to prevent water
penetration.
Unfilled or fully filled cavities Spacing of ties
Width of cavity Recommended tie Horizontal Vertical
When sealants are used in proximity with stone it is important to select a non-oil-based sealant to help prevent any
50mm to 75mm wide Butterfly 900mm 450mm (increased to staining to the stone.
Double triangle 300mm at reveals and
Vertical twist movement joints) Elastic sealants (Type E) are suitable as they allow for reversible movement. Where a back-up material is used to control
Proprietary ties the sealant depth, it will also provide a compressible space into which the sealant can deform.
75mm to 100mm wide Double triangle 900mm 450mm (increased to Where a backing material is used, the following must be considered:
Vertical twist 300mm at reveals and · The material is compatible with the sealant.
movement joints) · It will not adhere to the sealant, preventing cracking within the sealant.
· Provides sufficient density to allow the sealant to be applied.
100mm to 150mm wide Vertical twist 750mm 450mm (increased to · Allows sufficient flexibility so not to impede lateral movement (compressible to about 50% of its original thickness),
300mm at reveals and fibreboard is not acceptable.
movement joints)
The use of bed joint reinforcement may allow the distance between expansion joints to be increased, however this should
Greater than 150mm Wall tie specification and design to be provided by a Chartered Structural Engineer, or in be designed by a Structural Engineer.
accordance with appropriate third-party certification. Design will be determined by location
and site-specific conditions.
Spacing of expansion joints

Proprietary ties are to have appropriate third-party certification.
Concrete blockwork (used in outer 6m 10mm
Proprietary insulation retaining clips compatible with the tie should be used where the cavity is partially filled.
leaf)
Note:
It is not normally necessary to provide movement joints to the internal leaf of cavity walls, but it should be considered
for rooms with unbroken lengths of wall in excess of 6m.
The first joint from a return should be not more than half the dimension indicated in the table. Movement joints are not
acceptable in solid party or separating walls; however, where cavity wall construction is adopted, offset movement
joints with a solid rubber compressible strip may be acceptable.
EXTERNAL WALLS
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 118
118
EXTERNAL WALLS
6.2.6 TRADITIONAL
6.2.6 TRADITIONAL MASONRYCAVITY
MASONRY CAVITY WALL
WALL--RENDERED
RENDEREDMASONRY
MASONRYCLAD: Allowing
CLAD: for movement
Allowing for movement

Wall ties in proximity to movement joints and windows
spacing of openings
Movement joints
· Vertical movement joints should be provided in accordance with this

Technical Manual and the manufacturers guidance.
· Wall ties should be provided at 300mm maximum spacing either side

of the expansion joint, and within 225mm horizontal spacing of the
movement joint.
· Compressible filler, such as polyurethane foam, should be used to Wall ties should be provided at
form the joint. 300mm maximum vertical
spacing either side of the
· Fibre board and cork board are not suitable materials for forming expansion joint.
movement joints.
· The joint should be sealed to prevent water penetration.

Render
· It is not normally necessary to provide movement joints to internal leaf
of cavity walls, but should be considered where rooms occur with
unbroken lengths of wall in excess of 6m.
· The movement joint should continue through the render finish.
Wall ties should be provided Wall ties Movement joint. Any joints in the wall where movement
within 225mm horizontal may occur should be continued through the rendering

Polysulphide sealant
10mm movement
joint Compressible filler
Movement joint

DPC
Render should not bridge the horizontal

DPC
600mm Where the finished ground level is 600mm

or greater below the horizontal DPC, the
movement joint should be continued within
Stainless Steel Vertical Twist Ties (or similar) at
External ground level the external leaf of the sub structure
225mm centres vertically and within 225mm
horizontally.
EXTERNAL WALLS
Services 2020 2020
Limited 119
119
EXTERNAL WALLS
6.2.7 TRADITIONAL
6.2.7
6.2.7
TRADITIONAL
TRADITIONAL MASONRY
MASONRY CAVITY
MASONRYCAVITY
CAVITY
CAVITYWALL
WALL
WALL
WALL- -RENDERED
-RENDEREDMASONRY
- RENDERED
RENDERED CLAD:
MASONRY
MASONRY
MASONRY Render
CLAD:
CLAD:
CLAD: requirements
Render
Render
Render requirements
requirements
requirements
Render
Render
Render Application
Application
Application Masonry
Masonry
Masonry
background
background
background
requirements
requirements
requirements
Rendering
Rendering
Rendering
should
should
should
be be
inbeaccordance
ininaccordance
accordance
withwith
with
BSBS EN
BSEN
13914-1:2005
EN13914-1:2005
13914-1:2005
andand
and
workmanship
workmanship
workmanship
in accordance
ininaccordance
accordance · ··15mm
15mm
15mm
is considered
isisconsidered
considered
thethe
minimum
theminimum
minimum
finished
finished
finished
thickness
thickness
thickness
of render
ofofrender
render
applied
applied
applied
to atoto
masonry
aamasonry
masonry
wall,
wall,
wall, TheThe
The
walls
walls
walls
which
which
which
areare
to
arebe
totobe
rendered
berendered
rendered
should
should
should
be be
examined
beexamined
examined
for for
excessive
forexcessive
excessive
moisture
moisture
moisture
content
content
content
prior
prior
prior
to rendering.
totorendering.
rendering.
ThisThis
This
with
with
with
BSBS8000.
BS8000.
8000.
In particular
InInparticular
particular
thethe
following
thefollowing
following
should
should
should
be be
considered:
beconsidered:
considered: either
either
either
as as aassingle
aasingle
single
spray
spray
spray
coat coat
coat
or as ororas
aas twoaatwo two
coat coat
coat
handhand
hand
application.
application.
application. WhereWhere
Where structures
structures
structures areare are is particularly
isisparticularly
particularly
important
important
important
where
where
where
thethe
masonry
themasonry
masonry
background
background
background
hashashas
no noupper
noupper
upper
limit
limit
limit
on on
its
onits
soluble
itssoluble
soluble
salts
salts
salts
content,
content,
content,
e.g.e.g.
e.g.
N NN
designation
designation
designation
clayclay
clay
bricks.
bricks.
bricks.
located
located
locatedin very
ininveryvery
severesevere
severeweatherweather
weather ratingrating
rating
locations
locations
locations or within
ororwithin
within
coastal
coastal
coastallocations,
locations,
locations, thethe depth
thedepthdepth
of ofof
With
With
With
traditional
traditional
traditional
renders
renders
renders
thethe
quality
thequality
quality
of the
ofofthe
sands
thesands
sands
used
used
used
andand
and
design
design
design
mixmix
mix
is as
isisas
critical
ascritical
critical
as as
isasthe
isisthe
reliance
thereliance
reliance render
render
render
may may
may
need need
needto be
totobeincreased
beincreased
increased to atoto minimum
aaminimum
minimum of 20mm
ofof20mm
20mm andand and
a specialist
aaspecialist
specialist manufacturer's
manufacturer's
manufacturer's A specialist
AAspecialist
specialist
render
render
render
system
system
system
andand
and
mortar
mortar
mortar
should
should
should
be be
employed
beemployed
employed
for for
parapets,
forparapets,
parapets,
chimneys,
chimneys,
chimneys,
retaining
retaining
retaining
walls
walls
walls
andand
and
walls
walls
walls
on on
good
ongood
good
mixing
mixing
mixing
techniques
techniques
techniques
by by
the
bythe
applicator.
theapplicator.
applicator. specification
specification
specification willwill
be
willbe
required
berequired
required to support
totosupport
support this. this.
this. below
below
below
DPC
DPC
DPC
level
level
level
with
with
with
thisthis
this
masonry
masonry
masonry
background
background
background
type.
type.
type.
· ··Please
Please
Pleasenote: note:
note:
5-6mm5-6mm
5-6mm is considered
isisconsidered
considered thethe minimum
theminimum
minimum finished
finished
finished thickness
thickness
thickness of render
ofofrender
render for forfor
Poor
Poor
Poor
mixing
mixing
mixing
ratios
ratios
ratios
andand
and
lowlow
low
quality
quality
quality
materials
materials
materials
is often
isisoften
often
thethe
reason
thereason
reason
traditional
traditional
traditional
renders
renders
renders
fail.fail.
fail.
ForFor
For
thethe
the applications
applications
applications of specialist
ofofspecialist
specialist insulated
insulated
insulated renderrender
render systems.
systems.
systems. TheThe The
renderrender
renderthickness
thickness
thickness willwillneed
willneed
need
to betotobebe Ensure
Ensure
Ensure
thatthat
that
all all
joints
alljoints
joints
areare
finished
arefinished
finished
flush
flush
flush
with
with
with
thethe
surface
thesurface
surface
to avoid
totoavoid
avoid
shade
shade
shade
variations.
variations.
variations.
purposes
purposes
purposes
of this
ofofthis
this
Warranty,
Warranty,
Warranty,
traditional
traditional
traditional
hand
hand
hand
mixmix
mix
using
using
using
standard
standard
standard
sandsand
sand
andand
and
cement
cement
cement
is not
isisnot
accepted.
notaccepted.
accepted. increased
increased
increased where where
wherestructures
structures
structures areare located
arelocated
located in very
ininvery
very
severe
severe
severe weather
weather
weather ratingrating
rating
locations,
locations,
locations, or within
ororwithin
within
OnlyOnly
Only
a pre-blended
aapre-blended
pre-blended bagged
bagged
bagged
render
render
render
system
system
system
willwill
be
willbe
accepted
beaccepted
accepted
as as
aassuitable
aasuitable
suitable
render
render
render
system
system
systemthatthat
that
hashas
has
a aa coastal
coastal
coastallocations
locations
locations andand and
a specialist
aaspecialist
specialist manufacturer's
manufacturer's
manufacturer's specification
specification
specification willwill
be
willbe
required
berequired
required to support
totosupport
support To To
minimise
Tominimise
minimise
thethe
potential
thepotential
potential
for for
differential
fordifferential
differential
thermal
thermal
thermal
movement
movement
movementandandand
effects
effects
effects
thatthat
that
thethe
different
thedifferent
different
suction
suction
suction
thatthat
that
each
each
each
type
type
type
third
third
third
party
party
party
accreditation
accreditation
accreditation
such
such
such
as asaas
BBA
aaBBA
BBA
or ETA
ororETA
ETA
certification,
certification,
certification,
andand
and
backed
backed
backed
up up
with
upwith
with
a manufacturer's
aamanufacturer's
manufacturer's this;
this;
this;
approved
approved
approved by bythe
bytheWarranty
theWarranty
Warranty provider.
provider.
provider. of background
ofofbackground
background
material
material
material
may may
may
create;
create;
create;
thethe
section
thesection
section
of walling
ofofwalling
walling
to receive
totoreceive
receive
thethe
render
therender
render
should
should
should
be be
constructed
beconstructed
constructed
using
using
using
thethe
the
specification.
specification.
specification. · ··WhenWhen
When ashlarashlar
ashlardetailing
detailing
detailingis required,
isisrequired,
required, it isititrecommended
isisrecommended
recommended thatthatthat
a minimum
aaminimum
minimum depth depth
depthto the
tototheback
thebackback
of ofof same
same
sametype
type
type
andand
and
density
density
density
of material
ofofmaterial
material
throughout.
throughout.
throughout.
thetheashlar
theashlar
ashlarcutcut should
cutshould
shouldbe be nobenoless
nolessless
than than
than
15mm 15mm
15mm andandand
20 20 - 20
25mm
- -25mm
25mm for forapplications
forapplications
applications in very
ininvery
very
severesevere
severe When
When
When
rendering
rendering
rendering
is required
isisrequired
required
to be
totobe
applied
beapplied
applied
to wet
totowet
wet
masonry
masonry
masonrysubstrates,
substrates,
substrates,
a specialist
aaspecialist
specialist
sealer
sealer
sealer
keykey
key
coat
coat
coat
priorprior
prior
to toto
Where
Where
Where
a specialist
aaspecialist
specialist
render
render
render
system
system
system
is being
isisbeing
being
used
used
used
thethe
following
thefollowing
following
conditions
conditions
conditions
must
must
must
be be
met:
bemet:
met: exposure
exposure
exposure zones zones
zones
or within
ororwithin
withincoastal
coastal
coastallocations.
locations.
locations. To To achieve
Toachieve
achieve thisthisthis
depth,depth,
depth,
it will
ititwill
require
willrequire
require
thethe the applying
applying
applying
thethemain
themain
main
coat coat
coat
of render
ofofrender
render
should
should
should
be be
applied,
beapplied,
applied,
to control
totocontrol
control
suction
suction
suction
andand
and
reduce
reduce
reduce
thethe
impact
theimpact
impact
of lime
ofoflime
lime
blooming
blooming
blooming
finished
finished
finishedthickness
thickness
thickness of theofofthemain
themain main
renderrender
render to be totobeincreased
beincreased
increased to accommodate
totoaccommodate
accommodate thisthis
this
feature.
feature.
feature. occurring
occurring
occurring
through
through
through
thetherender.
therender.
render.
TheThe
The
keykey
key
coat
coat
coat
should
should
should
provide
provide
provide
a sound
aasound
sound
substrate
substrate
substrate
andand
and
be be
compatible
becompatible
compatible
with with
with
thethe
the
1) 1)1)TheThe
The
product
product
product
approval
approval
approval
is based
isisbased
based
on on
the
onthe
details
thedetails
details
andand
and
limitations
limitations
limitations
of use
ofofuse
use
described
described
described in ainin
'current'
aa'current'
'current' · ··Abutments
Abutments
Abutments between
between
between cement
cement
cement render
render
render andand and
other other
other
cladding
cladding
cladding materials
materials
materials or components
ororcomponents
components should
should
shouldbe be be subsequent
subsequent
subsequent render
render
render
system.
system.
system.
approved
approved
approved
ETA,
ETA,
ETA,
BBA,
BBA,
BBA,
BRE BRE
BRE
etc.etc.
etc.
or other
ororother
other
UKASUKAS
UKAS
certified
certified
certified
system
system
system
specific
specific
specific
to the
totothe
relevant
therelevant
relevant weather
weather
weather tight tight
tight
andand and
allow
allow
allow
for fordifferential
fordifferential
differential movement.
movement.
movement.
substrate
substrate
substrate
being
being
being
applied
applied
applied
too.too.
too.
A copy
AAcopy
copy
of the
ofofthe
certificate
thecertificate
certificate
documents
documents
documents
areare
to
arebe
totobe
supplied.
besupplied.
supplied. · ··AnyAnyAny
joints
joints
joints
in theininthe
wall
thewallwall
where where
where movement
movement
movement may may
may
occuroccur
occurshouldshould
should be be continued
becontinued
continued through
through
through thethe the ForFor
For
high
high
high
absorption
absorption
absorption
e.g.e.g.
e.g.
lightweight
lightweight
lightweightblockwork,
blockwork,
blockwork,
common
common
commonbricks
bricks
bricks
etc.etc.
etc.
andand
and
smooth
smooth
smooth
dense
dense
densesubstrates
substrates
substrates
(such
(such
(such
as as
as
rendering.
rendering.
rendering. engineering
engineering
engineering
bricks);
bricks);
bricks);
direct
direct
direct
rendering
rendering
rendering
is not
isisnot
acceptable,
notacceptable,
acceptable,
as as
the
asthe
moisture
themoisture
moisturecancan
can
be be
extracted
beextracted
extractedby by
the
bythe
substrate
thesubstrate
substrate
from
from
from
2) 2)2)
ForFor
For
masonry
masonry
masonry substrates
substrates
substrates (e.g.(e.g.
(e.g.
solid
solid
solid
brickwork,
brickwork,
brickwork,
blockwork,
blockwork,
blockwork, concrete,
concrete,
concrete, terracotta,
terracotta,
terracotta,stone
stone
stone
etc.)
etc.)
etc.)
thethethe · ··Render
Render
Render should should
shouldnotnot bridge
notbridge
bridge thethe Damp
theDamp Damp Proof Proof
ProofCourse
Course
Course (DPC) (DPC)
(DPC) andand and
must must
must
be be finished
befinished
finishedonto onto
onto
a aa thethe
wet
thewet
wet
render
render
render
which
which
which
affects
affects
affects
its its
curing
itscuring
curing
andandand
bonding
bonding
bonding
capability,
capability,
capability,
or itoror
does
ititdoes
does
notnot
bond
notbond
bond
to the
totothe
substrate
thesubstrate
substrate
respectively.
respectively.
respectively.
masonry
masonry
masonry
should
should
should
be beadequately
beadequately
adequately prepared
prepared
prepared
andand
and
be be
ofbeaofof
thickness
aathickness
thickness which
which
which
would would
would
resist
resist
resist
dampdamp
damp durable
durable
durable renderrender
renderstop stop
stop
profile
profile
profile
such such
such
as as aas proprietary
aaproprietary
proprietary uPVC uPVC
uPVC bead bead
beador stainless
ororstainless
stainless steel steel
steel
bead. bead.
bead.
the · To To
control
Tocontrol
control
suction,
suction,
suction,
always
always
always
apply
apply
apply
a specialist
aaspecialist
specialist
sealer
sealer
sealer
keykey
key
coat
coat
coat
or suitable
ororsuitable
suitable
render
render
render
preparatory
preparatory
preparatory
coat.
coat.
coat.
Allow
Allow
Allow
a aa
ingress
ingress
ingress
to the
totothe
internal
theinternal
internal
finishes
finishes
finishes
based
based
based
on on
the
onthe
recommendations
therecommendations
recommendations of BSofofBS
5628
BS56285628
Part Part
Part
3 2005
332005
2005
for for
the
forthe ··Renders
Renders
Renders willwillbe
willbe
reinforced
bereinforced
reinforced as as aasminimum
aaminimum
minimum with with
with
an an appropriate
anappropriate
appropriate certified
certified
certifiedalkaline
alkaline
alkalineresistant
resistant
resistant minimum
minimum
minimum
of 48
ofof48
hours
48hours
hours
for for
the
forthe
key
thekey
key
coat
coat
coat
to fully
totofully
fully
drydry
before
drybefore
before
applying
applying
applying
thethe
next
thenext
next
coat.
coat.
coat.
given
given
given
exposure
exposure
exposurezone.zone.
zone.
Please
Please
Please
note:note:
note:
Where
Where
Where
thethe
thickness
thethickness
thicknessof the
ofofthe masonry
themasonry
masonry is less
isisless
less
thanthan
than
thatthat
that fibreglass
fibreglass
fibreglass mesh mesh
mesh
at corners
atatcorners
corners of allofofall
openings
allopenings
openings andand and
penetrations.
penetrations.
penetrations. ForFor For
substrates
substrates
substrates thatthat
that
areare prone
areprone
prone
recommended
recommended
recommended in BS
ininBS
5268,
BS5268,
5268,
is aisis
single
aasingle
single
skinskin
skin
construction
construction
construction or is
ororin
isisainin
very
aavery
very
severesevere
severeexposure
exposure
exposurezonezone
zone
or oror to movement,
totomovement,
movement, an an appropriate
anappropriate
appropriate certified
certified
certifiedalkaline
alkaline
alkalineresistant
resistant
resistant fibreglass
fibreglass
meshwillwillneed
willneed
need
to betotobe be ForFor
For
highly
highly
highly
exposed
exposed
exposed
areas
areas
areas
of construction:
ofofconstruction:
construction:
coastal
coastal
coastal
location,
location,
location,
then then
then
thetherequirements
therequirements
requirements of condition
ofofcondition
condition3 (below)
33(below)
(below)must must
must
also also
also
be be
met.
bemet.
met. incorporated
incorporated
incorporated throughout
throughout
throughout thethe substrate.
thesubstrate.
substrate.
· ··Where
Where
Where different
different
different materials
materials
materials areare being
arebeingbeingrendered
rendered
rendered over,
over,
over,
thethe incorporation
theincorporation
incorporation of an ofofanappropriate
anappropriate
appropriate · ··TheThe
The
backs
backs
backs
surfaces
surfaces
surfaces
of parapets
ofofparapets
parapets
should
should
should
notnot
be
notbe
rendered
berendered
rendered
using
using
using
a standard
aastandard
standard
render
render
render
system.
system.
system.
Either:
Either:
Either:
3) 3)3)
ForFor
For
all all
render
allrender
render
installations
installations
installations
(including
(including
(including
brick
brick
brick
slipslip
slip
system
system
system
applications)
applications)
applications)
on on
all
onall
substrates
allsubstrates
substrates types
types
types certified
certified
certified
alkaline
alkaline
alkalineresistant
resistant
resistant fibreglass
fibreglass
mesh willwill
be
willbe
necessary
benecessary
necessary to assist
totoassist
assist
with with
with
thethe possibilities
thepossibilities
possibilities a) Use
a)a)Use
Use
suitable
suitable
suitable
fairfair
faced
fairfaced
faced
masonry
masonry
masonry
to the
totothe
roof
theroof
roof
elevation
elevation
elevation
andandand
incorporate
incorporate
incorporate cavity
cavity
cavity
traystrays
trays
linked
linked
linked
to the
totothe
roof
theroof
roof
located
located
located
in an
ininan
exposure
anexposure
exposure zone
zone
zone
wherewhere
where
thethewind
thewind
wind
driven
driven
driven
rainrain
rain
is expected
isisexpected
expected
to be
totobe
more
bemore
more
than than
than
75litres
75litres
75litres of differential
ofofdifferential
movement.
movement. TheThe The
mesh mesh
mesh must must
must
extendextend
extend
sufficiently
sufficiently
sufficiently over over
over
thethe different
thedifferent
different materials
materials
materials to toto flashing,
flashing,
flashing,
or oror
perper
m²:
perm²:
A
m²:10
AA10year
10year
year
'insurance
'insurance
'insurance
backed'
backed'
backed'
manufacturer's
manufacturer's
manufacturer's system
system
systemguarantee
guarantee
guarantee
is required,
isisrequired,
required,together
together
together b) Use
b)b)Use
Use
a specialist
aaspecialist
specialist
render
render
render
system
system
system
designed
designed
designed to combat
totocombat
combatmovement
movement
movement andandand
provide
provide
provide
robustrobust
robust
weatherproofing.
weatherproofing.
weatherproofing.
resist
resist
resist
against
against
against differential
differential
movement.
movement. Note:
Note:
Note:
horizontal
horizontal
horizontal
surfaces
surfaces
surfacesof Parapets
ofofParapets
Parapets
should
should
should
notnotbe
notbe
rendered,
berendered,
rendered,
they they
they
should
should
should
be be protected
beprotected
protectedby byaby
suitable
aasuitable
suitable
with
with
with
a full
aafull
project
fullproject
project
specific
specific
specific
specification
specification
specification
thatthat
that
hashashas
also also
also
beenbeen
been
accepted
accepted
accepted
andand
and
approved
approved
approved by bythe
bythe
the · ··Renders
Renders
Renders installed
installed
installed between
between
between pedestrian
pedestrian
pedestrian level level
level
andand and
6.0m 6.0m
6.0maboveabove
above ground
ground
ground level level
level
willwillbe
willbe
designed
bedesigned
designed capping
capping
cappingsystem.
system.
system.
Warranty
Warranty
Warrantyprovider.
provider.
provider.
TheTheThe
proposal
proposal
proposal
willwill
require
willrequire
require
fullfull
system
fullsystem
system
details
details
details
to deal
totodeal
deal
withwith
with
all all
junctions,
alljunctions,
junctions, to accommodate
totoaccommodate
accommodate higher
higher
highermaintenance
maintenance
maintenance andand and
impact
impact
impact
loads loads
loads
in accordance
ininaccordance
accordance with with
with
Table Table
Table2 of22BSofofBSBS · ··Throats
Throats
Throats
or drips
orordrips
drips
to copings
totocopings
copingsof parapets
ofofparapets
parapets
andandand
chimneys
chimneys
chimneys should
should
should
project
project
project
beyond
beyond
beyond thethefinished
thefinished
finished
facesfaces
faces
to throw
totothrow
throw
openings
openings
openingsetc.etc.
etc.
together
together
togetherwith
with
with
other
other
other
project
project
project
specific
specific
specific
requirements
requirements
requirements provided
provided
provided
by bythe
bythe
render
therender
render
system
system
system 8200.
8200.
8200. water
water
water
clear.
clear.
clear.
company.
company.
company. TheTheThe
render
render
render
system
system
systemwillwill
need
willneed
need
to be
totobe
installed
beinstalled
installed
by byaby
registered
aaregistered
registered
andand
and
carded
carded
carded
installer
installer
installer
who who ·
who ··All All
surfaces
Allsurfaces
surfaces must must
must
be be clean,
beclean,
clean,suitably
suitably
suitably drydry and
dryand and
freefree
free
from from
from
anything
anything
anything thatthat that
may maymay
interfere
interfere
interferewithwith
with
thethe the · ··Rendering
Rendering
Renderingto chimneys
totochimneys
chimneysshould
should
should
onlyonly
only
be be
carried
becarried
carried
outout
where
outwhere
where
thethemasonry
themasonry
masonry contains
contains
contains
littlelittle
little
or no ororno
sulphates.
nosulphates.
sulphates. An AnAn
hashas
has
been
been
been
approved
approved
approved andandand
accredited
accredited
accredited
by by
the
bythe
render
therender
render
system
system
system
manufacturer
manufacturer
manufacturerbefore
before
before
workwork
work adhesion
adhesion
adhesion of the
ofofthematerial
thematerial
material to be totobe
applied.
beapplied.
applied. TheThe The
manufacturer's
manufacturer's
manufacturer's productproduct
product data data
data
sheetssheets
sheetsshouldshould
should be be be appropriate
appropriate
appropriatespecialist
specialist
specialist
sealer/bonding
sealer/bonding
sealer/bonding keykeykey
coatcoat
coat
should
should
should
be be
applied
beapplied
applied
priorprior
prior
to applying
totoapplying
applyingthethe main
themain
main
coatcoat
coat
of render.
ofofrender.
render.
commences.
commences.
commences. followed
followed
followed including
including
including thethe manufacturer's
themanufacturer's
manufacturer's surface
surface
surfacepreparation
preparation
preparation andand and
suitability
suitability
suitability checkschecks
checksin full.
ininfull.
full. A proprietary
AAproprietary
proprietaryalkaline
alkaline
alkaline
resistant
resistant
resistant
meshmesh
mesh
should
should
should
be beembedded
beembedded
embedded throughout
throughout
throughout thetherender,
therender,
render,thethe key
thekey
key
coatcoat
coat
should
should
should
· ··All All
blockwork
Allblockwork
blockwork mortar
mortar
mortarjointsjoints
joints
areare to
arebe totobeflush
beflushflush
pointed
pointed
pointedandand and
shouldshould
should be be fully
befully
fully
curedcured
cured
before
before
before
thethe the provide
provide
provide
a sound
aasound
soundsubstrate
substrate
substrateandand
and
be becompatible
becompatible
compatible withwith
with
thethe
subsequent
thesubsequent
subsequent render
render
render
system.
system.
system.
In all
InInall
instances
allinstances
instances
where
where
where
a render
aarender
render
system
system
systemmanufacturer's
manufacturer's
manufacturer's guarantee
guarantee
guaranteeis required,
isisrequired,
required,
fullfull
project
fullproject
project application
application
application of theofofthe
render.
therender.
render.
· ··As As
before;
Asbefore;
before;
horizontal
horizontal
horizontal
DPC DPC
DPC
andandand
Damp Damp
Damp
Proof
Proof
Proof
Membranes
Membranes
Membranes (DPM)(DPM)
(DPM)
mustmust
must
notnot be
notbe
bridged.
bebridged.
bridged.
· ··Rendering
Rendering
Renderingbelowbelow
below
DPC DPC
DPC
should
should
should
onlyonly
only
be be
carried
becarried
carried
outout
using
outusing
using
a specialist
aaspecialist
specialist
render
render
rendermanufacturer's
manufacturer's
manufacturer's specification.
specification.
specification.NoNoNo
specification
specification
specification andand
and
details
details
details
areareto
arebe
totobe
obtained
beobtained
obtained
from
from
from
thetherender
therender
render
system
system
systemmanufacturer
manufacturer
manufacturerbefore
before
before
anyany
any · ··TheTheThe
quantity
quantity
quantity of material
ofofmaterial
material required
required
required for foraforgiven
aagiven
given
area area
area
shouldshould
shouldbe be ofbethe
ofofthesame
thesame same batchbatch
batch
numbernumber
number or oror render
render
render
system
system
systemshould
should
should
bridge
bridge
bridge
thetheDPC
theDPC
DPC
andandand
a proprietary
aaproprietary
proprietary
uPVCuPVC
uPVC
bead
bead
bead
or stainless
ororstainless
stainless
steel steel
steel
bead bead
bead
should
should
should
be beused
beused
used
installation
installation
installation
commences
commences
commences to ensure
totoensure
ensurethatthat
that
conformity
conformity
conformityis met.
isismet.
met.
Once Once
Once
workwork
work
commences,
commences,
commences, thetheinstallation
theinstallation
installation if not
ififnot
the
notthe different
thedifferent
differentbatches
batches
batches must must
mustbe be thoroughly
bethoroughly
thoroughly mixedmixed
mixed together
together
together to avoid
totoavoid
avoid
shade shade
shadevariations.
variations.
variations. above
above
above
andandand
below
below
below
where
where
where
thetherenders
therenders
renders
meet
meet
meet
at the
atatthe
DPC.
theDPC.
DPC.
must
must
must
be be inspected
beinspected
inspected
andand
and
signed
signed
signed
off off
byoffby
abyrender
aarender
render
system
system
system
representative
representative
representative throughout
throughout
throughout
thetheinstallation
theinstallation
installation · ··FullFull
Full
masking
masking
masking must must
must
be beused
beused used
to give
totogive
give
protection
protection
protection to adjacent
totoadjacent
adjacent areas areas
areas
of work,
ofofwork,
work,
windows,
windows,
windows, doors
doors
doors
stage,
stage,
stage,
andand and
at completion
atatcompletion
completionof the
ofofthe
installation
theinstallation
installation
andand
and
confirm
confirm
confirmthatthat
that
thethe
specification
thespecification
specification
hashashas
been been
been
met.met.
met. etc.etc.
etc.
andand and
to give
totogive
give
clean clean
cleanstraight
straight
straightedges.edges.
edges. It should
ItItshould
shouldbe beremoved
beremoved
removed immediately
immediately
immediately after after
after
thethe finishing
thefinishing
finishing Other
Other
Other
construction
construction
construction
detailing
detailing
detailing
TheThe
The
render
render
render
system
system
system
together
together
togetherwithwith
with
thethebacking
thebacking
backing
wallwall
wall
to which
totowhich
which
theythey
they
areareapplied
areapplied
applied
should
should
should
satisfactorily
satisfactorily
satisfactorily coatcoat
coat
hashas has
dried.dried.
dried.
resist
resist
resist
thethe passage
thepassage
passage
of moisture
ofofmoisture
moistureto the
totothe
inside
theinside
inside
of the
ofofthe
building.
thebuilding.
building. · ··Carefully
Carefully
Carefully removeremove
remove splashes
splashes
splashes of material,
ofofmaterial,
material, in particular
ininparticular
particular
from from
from
glass glass
glass
or aluminium
ororaluminium
aluminium immediately
immediately
immediately Ensure
Ensure
Ensure
thatthat
that
drips
drips
drips
andand
and
throating
throating
throating
to sills,
totosills,
sills,
coping,
coping,
coping,
etc.etc.
etc.
project
project
project
beyond
beyond
beyond
thethe
face
theface
face
of the
ofofthe
finished
thefinished
finished
render
render
render
above
above
above
thethe
the
as as
they
asthey
they
may may
may
etch etch
etch
thethe surface
thesurface
surface andand and
leave leave
leavea permanent
aapermanent
permanent mark. mark.
mark. DPC.
DPC.
DPC.
General
General
General
render
render
render
conditions
conditions
conditions
(using
(using
(using
pre-blended
pre-blended
pre-blended
bagged
bagged
bagged
render)
render)
render)
Notwithstanding
Notwithstanding
Notwithstanding wind
wind
wind
loadings,
loadings,
loadings,
thethe
larger
thelarger
larger
thethe
eaves
theeaves
eaves
overhang,
overhang,
overhang,
thethe
better.
thebetter.
better.
ThisThis
This
willwill
provide
willprovide
provide
protection
protection
protection
to the
totothe
top
thetop
top
Materials
Materials
Materials joint
joint
joint
of the
ofofthe
render
therender
render
panel
panel
panel
where
where
where
it meets
ititmeets
meets
thethe
roof
theroof
roof
andand
and
prevent
prevent
prevent
rainrain
rain
water
water
water
getting
getting
getting
behind
behind
behind
thethe
render.
therender.
render.
Weather
Weather
Weather
conditions
conditions
conditions
· ··Ensure
Ensure
Ensure
thethe
render
therender
render
being
being
being
used
used
used
is suitable
isissuitable
suitable
for for
the
forthe
substrate
thesubstrate
substrate
andand
and
is not
isisnot
too
nottoo
strong.
toostrong.
strong.
DueDue
Due
to toto Angles,
Angles,
Angles,
stopstop
stop
beads
beads
beads
andand
and
jointing
jointing
jointing
sections
sections
sections
should
should
should
be besecured
besecured
secured
withwith
with
drilled
drilled
drilled
or shot-fired
ororshot-fired
shot-fired
fixings,
fixings,
fixings,
andand
and
notnot
with
notwith
with
· ··ForFor
For
exposure
exposure
exposure
zones
zones
zones
where
where
where
thethe
wind
thewind
wind
driven
driven
driven
rainrain
rain
is expected
isisexpected
expected
to be
totobe
more
bemore
more
than
than
than
75 75
litres
75litres
litres
perper
m²
perm²
m² shrinkage
shrinkage
shrinkage
differentials,
differentials,
differentials,
avoid
avoid
avoid
applying
applying
applying
a thin
aathin
thin
base
base
base
coatcoat
coat
andandand
a thicker
aathicker
thicker
toptopcoat
topcoat
coat
application,
application,
application, gypsum
gypsum
gypsum
plaster.
plaster.
plaster.
Fixing
Fixing
Fixing
of external
ofofexternal
external
render
render
render
beads
beads
beads
on onmasonry
onmasonry
masonry
backgrounds
backgrounds
backgrounds withwith
with
an an
adhesive
anadhesive
adhesiveis also
isisalso
also
acceptable,
acceptable,
acceptable,
(classed
(classed
(classed as asvery
asveryvery
severe)
severe)
severe) thenthen
then
checked
checked
checked reveals
reveals
revealswillwill
be
willbe
required.
berequired.
required.TheThe The
renderrender
render
applied
applied
applied
to the
totothethe as as
the
asthe
shrinkage
theshrinkage
shrinkagevalues
values
values
of aofof
thicker
aathicker
thicker
toptop
coat
topcoat
coat
could
could
could
cause
cause
cause
thethe
render
therender
render
to delaminate
totodelaminate
delaminatefrom
from
from providing
providing
providing
thethe
render
therender
render
manufacturer
manufacturer
manufacturer
cancan
can
provide
provide
provide
a full
aafull
specification
fullspecification
specification
on on
fixing
onfixing
fixing
thethe
beads
thebeads
beads
including:
including:
including:
reveal
reveal
reveal
must must
must
be beofbethe
ofofthe
same
thesamesame
thickness
thickness
thickness as asthe
asthe wall
thewallwall
render
render
renderwith with
with
an an appropriate
anappropriate
appropriate corner
corner
corner
beading
beading
beading thethe
base
thebase
base
coat.
coat.
coat.
TheThe
The
samesame
same
effect
effect
effect
is also
isisalso
also
caused
caused
caused
by by
applying
byapplying
applying
a very
aavery
very
hardhard
hard
render
render
render
over
over
over
a aa
softer
softer
softer
base
base
base
coat.coat.
coat. · ··TheThe
The
adhesive
adhesive
adhesive to be
totobe
used.
beused.
used.
provided.
provided.
provided. A suitable
AAsuitable
suitable
nonnon non
hardening'
hardening'
hardening' mastic
mastic
masticsealant
sealant
sealant
must must
must
also also
also
be be provided
beprovided
provided between
between
between window
window
window / //
· ··External
External
External
rendering
rendering
rendering
should
should
should
comply
comply
comply
as as
aasminimum
aaminimum
minimum
withwith
with
BSBS EN
BSEN13914-1:2005
EN13914-1:2005
13914-1:2005 butbut
should
butshould
should · ··Type
Type
Type
of fixing
ofoffixing
fixing
e.g.e.g.
e.g.
dabsdabs
dabs
or continuous
ororcontinuous
continuous
bead.
bead.
bead.
doordoor
door
frameframe
frame
andand and
masonry
masonry
masonry reveal.
reveal.
reveal. · ··Curing
Curing
Curing
times.
times.
times.
· ··Protection
Protection
Protection must must
must
be be provided
beprovided
provided when when
when
applying
applying
applying renders
renders
rendersin rain
ininrain
rain
or other
ororother
other
inclement
inclement
inclement weather.
weather.
weather. also
also
also
conform
conform
conformwithwith
with
thethe
specialist
thespecialist
specialist
render
render
render
manufacturers
manufacturers
manufacturers recommendations.
recommendations.
recommendations. · ··Specification
Specification
Specificationof the
ofofthe
beads
thebeads
beads
used.
used.
used.
Application
Application
Application should
should
shouldceasecease
ceasein temperature
inintemperature
temperature belowbelow
below
5°C5°C 5°C
or where
ororwhere
where
rapid rapid
rapid
freezing
freezing
freezingis considered
isisconsidered
considered to betotobe
be · ··Rendering
Rendering
Renderingproducts
products
products
should
should
should
be bestored
bestored
stored
separately
separately
separately
fromfrom
from
other
other
other
building
building
building
andand
and
concreting
concreting
concreting
sands.
sands.
sands.
a potential
aapotential
potentialthreat.
threat.
threat. · ··ForFor
For
bellcasts,
bellcasts,
bellcasts,
other
other
other
beads,
beads,
beads,
andandand
stops;
stops;
stops;
uPVCuPVC
uPVC
bead
bead
bead
or stainless
ororstainless
stainless
steel
steel
steel
beadbead
bead
is acceptable.
isisacceptable.
acceptable. Under
Under
Under
no no
circumstances
nocircumstances
circumstances
should
should
should
thethe
beads
thebeads
beads
or profiles
ororprofiles
profiles
be be
bonded
bebonded
bonded
using
using
using
a solvent
aasolvent
solvent
based
based
based
adhesive.
adhesive.
adhesive.
· ··WhenWhen
When applying
applying
applying in hot
ininhot
weather
hotweather
weather it isititadvisable
isisadvisable
advisable thatthatthat
workwork
work
coincides
coincides
coincides with with
with
thethe shaded
theshaded
shaded areas
areas
areas
of theofofthe
the · ··Only
Only
Only
clean
clean
clean
waterwater
water
should
should
should
be beused
beused
used
for for
mixing.
formixing.
mixing.
building.
building.
building.During
During
Duringlonger
longer
longer
periods
periods
periods of hot
ofofhotand
hotand and
drydry weather,
dryweather,
weather,it may
ititmay
may
be be appropriate
beappropriate
appropriate andandand
necessary
necessary
necessary to toto Check
Check
Check
whether
whether
whether
thethe
rendering
therendering
rendering
cancan
can
be be
applied
beapplied
applied
directly
directly
directly
onto
onto
onto
thethe
wall,
thewall,
wall,
or whether
ororwhether
whether
anyany
any
preparatory
preparatory
preparatory
treatment
treatment
treatment
is isis
required
required
required
in accordance
ininaccordance
accordance
with
with
with
thethe
manufacturer's
themanufacturer's
manufacturer's
instructions.
instructions.
instructions.
apply
apply
apply
an aneven
aneven
even
mist mist
mist
sprayspray
sprayof clean
ofofclean
clean
water water
water
to the
totothe
substrate
thesubstrate
substrate beforebefore
before
application,
application,
application, andand and
to surface
totosurface
surface
finish
finish
finish
for for
aforcouple
aacouple
couple
of days
ofofdays
days
afterwards
afterwards
afterwards subject
subject
subjectto site
totosite
site
andand and
weather
weather
weather conditions.
conditions.
conditions. TheThe
The
surface
surface
surface
should
should
should
be be
checked
bechecked
checked
for for
suction
forsuction
suction
by by
dampening
bydampening
dampening
thethe
wall
thewall
wall
with
with
with
clean
clean
clean
water.
water.
water.
· ··Cement
Cement
Cement products
products
products shouldshould
should notnot be
notbeapplied
beapplied
applied
to substrates
totosubstrates
substrates which which
which
areare frost
arefrost
frost
laden laden
laden
or which
ororwhich
which
havehave
have
recently
recently
recentlybeen been
been
subject
subject
subjectto prolonged
totoprolonged
prolonged rain.
rain.
rain. In accordance
InInaccordance
accordance
with with
with
a Structural
aaStructural
Structural
Engineers
Engineers
Engineersrequirements,
requirements,
requirements, cracking
cracking
cracking
of the
ofofthe
substrate
thesubstrate
substrate
could
could
could
be be
significantly
besignificantly
significantly
· ··DoDo not
Donot render
notrender
renderontoonto
onto
saturated
saturated
saturated substrates
substrates
substrates as as this
asthis
this
may may
may
affect
affect
affect
thethebond
thebondbond
strength
strength
strength andand and
cause
cause
causelime lime
lime reduced
reduced
reduced
by by
introducing
byintroducing
introducinga specialist
aaspecialist
specialist
proprietary
proprietary
proprietarybedbed
bed
joint
joint
joint
reinforcement
reinforcement
reinforcement within
within
within
thethe
mortar
themortar
mortar
joints.
joints.
joints.
Ideally
Ideally
Ideally
thisthis
this
bloom
bloom
bloom(discolouration),
(discolouration),
(discolouration), salts salts
salts
to occur
totooccur
occur
andand and
patchiness
patchiness
patchiness duedue due
to uneven
totouneven
uneven suction.
suction.
suction. should
should
should
be be
applied
beapplied
applied
throughout
throughout
throughout
thethebuilding
thebuilding
building
during
during
during
construction
construction
constructionandand
and
in accordance
ininaccordance
accordance withwith
with
thethesubstrate
thesubstrate
substrate
· ··Local
Local
Local
weather
weather
weather andand and
sitesite
site
conditions
conditions
conditions must must
must
be be taken
betaken
taken
intointo
into
account
account
account by by the
bythe
applicator
theapplicator
applicator before
before
before
anyany any manufacturer's
manufacturer's
manufacturer's
recommendations.
recommendations.
recommendations. Ensure
Ensure
Ensure
thatthat
that
thethe
reinforcement
thereinforcement
reinforcementis continuous
isiscontinuous
continuousandand
and
joints
joints
joints
areare
lapped
arelapped
lapped
in inin
cement
cement
cement product
product
product is applied.
isisapplied.
applied. accordance
accordance
accordance
withwith
with
thethe
manufacturer's
themanufacturer's
manufacturer's requirements
requirements
requirements (generally
(generally
(generally
450450
450
- 500mm
- -500mm
500mm
lapslaps
laps
andand
and
continued
continued
continued
around
around
around
corners).
corners).
corners).
Specialist
Specialist
Specialist
corner
corner
cornerunits
units
units
areare
likely
arelikely
likely
to be
totobe
required,
berequired,
required,
check
check
check
withwith
with
thethe
manufacturer.
themanufacturer.
manufacturer.
· ··CareCare
Care
must must
must
be be taken
betaken
taken
to protect
totoprotect
protect
cement
cement
cement andand and
synthetic
synthetic
synthetic products
products
products soon soon
soon
after after
after
thethe application
theapplication
application from from
from
rapid
rapid
rapid
freezing
freezing
freezing andandand
heavyheavy
heavyrainfall.
rainfall.
rainfall.
ForFor For
other
other
other
drying
drying
drying
conditions
conditions
conditions i.e.i.e.
where
i.e.where
where therethere
there
is direct
isisdirect
direct
exposure
exposure
exposure Introducing
Introducing
Introducing
reinforcement
reinforcement
reinforcement
at weak
atatweak
weak
points
points
points
such
such
such
as as
above
asabove
above
andand
and
below
below
below
window
window
window
andand
and
door
door
door
openings
openings
openings
is strongly
isisstrongly
strongly
to sunlight
totosunlight
sunlight
or drying
orordrying
drying
winds,
winds,
winds,
thethe render
therender
render
may may
may
require
require
require
to betotobe
protected
beprotected
protected from from
from
thethe elements.
theelements.
elements. This This
This recommended
recommended
recommended as as
aas
minimum
aaminimum
minimum
requirement
requirement
requirement
in all
ininall
applications,
allapplications,
applications,
as as
itas
will
ititwill
greatly
willgreatly
greatly
assist
assist
assist
in minimising
ininminimising
minimising
cracking
cracking
cracking
to toto
process
process
process is important
isisimportant
important to ensure
totoensure
ensure complete
complete
complete hydration
hydration
hydration of the
ofofthe
products
theproducts
products cancan can
take take
take
place.
place.
place. these
these
these
areas
areas
areas
· ··Where
Where
Where an anapplication
anapplication
application is not
isisnot
covered
notcovered
covered in these
ininthese
these
conditions
conditions
conditions further
further
further
advice
advice
advice from from
from
thetherender
therender
render
manufacturer
manufacturer
manufacturer must must
mustbe besought
besought
soughtandand and
submitsubmit
submit
a suitable
aasuitable
suitablemanufacturer's
manufacturer's
manufacturer's specification
specification
specification to the
totothe
the Vertical
Vertical
Vertical
and
and
and
horizontal
horizontal
horizontal
flatness
flatness
flatness
Warranty
Warranty
Warranty provider
provider
providerfor for
approval.
forapproval.
approval.
Rendering
Rendering
Rendering should
should
should
havehave
have
a maximum
aamaximum
maximum vertical
vertical
vertical
andand
and
horizontal
horizontal
horizontal
deviation
deviation
deviation
from
from
from
flatness
flatness
flatness
of +/-10mm
ofof+/-10mm
+/-10mm
in 5m,
inin5m,
5m,
andand
and
is isis
measured
measured
measured in ainin
similar
aasimilar
similar
wayway
way
to straightness
totostraightness
straightness
on on
plan
onplan
plan
andand
and
plumb
plumb
plumb
of masonry.
ofofmasonry.
masonry.
See See
See
thethe
'Tolerances'
the'Tolerances'
'Tolerances'
section
section
section
for for
for
further
further
further
information.
information.
information.
EXTERNAL
EXTERNAL
EXTERNALWALLS
WALLS
WALLS
©©
MD
©MD
MD
©Insurance
Insurance
MDInsurance
Services
Services
Services
Insurance Limited
Limited
Limited
Services 2020
2020
2020
Limited 2020 120
120
120
EXTERNAL WALLS
TRADITIONAL MASONRY
MASONRY CAVITYWALL
RENDERED MASONRY
MASONRYCLAD:
CLAD:Connecting
Connectingto existing structures
to existing structures
New elements connecting to existing structures New wall junctions Damp Proof Course (DPC)
Where residential developments are attached to existing buildings, and the existing The junction of the new walls to the existing walls must ensure that dampness cannot An effective DPC should be present in the existing wall, linked to the new DPC and
elements form part of the new structure; these must meet the Functional Requirements track back into the new building or the existing building. damp proof membrane (DPM) of the new building.
of the Warranty. The details below give some guidance on the minimum information
and standards required to meet the Functional Requirements. The detailing of this junction is critical to ensure that moisture ingress does not occur Acceptable existing DPCs are considered as:
between the new and existing walls. Typical acceptable details are indicated below.
Party Walls · A continuous felt or proprietary DPC material.
· A chemically injected DPC supported by an insurance-backed guarantee.
It is highly likely that improvements to an existing wall are necessary to meet the · A slate DPC is considered acceptable if the existing wall incorporates an
requirements of the Warranty. This may include underpinning, injected DPC and independent wall lining system to the inner face of the new building.
internal linings. Bonding new walls to existing solid masonry wall
The new DPC should lap the existing DPC by at least 100mm.
Where a wall is shared by two or more owners, the requirements of the Party Wall etc.
Act may apply. This is separate legislation with different requirements to the Building Existing and new structure junctions
Regulations or Warranty requirement.
At the junction of the existing and new structures, detailing should allow for differential
Further guidance on the Party Wall etc. Act can be found on the Planning Portal movement without cracking. Any settlement should be limited to 2mm-3mm, which
website www.planningportal.gov.uk would not normally adversely affect the roof covering.
Typical 215mm existing
solid brick wall
Separating walls Method of bonding to In order to prevent excessive differential movement, the new building should have the
Structural Engineers same foundation type as the existing building. Where the foundation types are
The separating wall between the new and existing building must meet the relevant design different, e.g. new building pile and beam, existing building traditional strip foundation,
requirements of the Building Regulations. the new building should be completely independent of the existing building.
Flexible weatherproof
Existing foundations joint should be formed
between existing and
The existing foundations and wall structure must be suitable to support any proposed new render
increased loading resulting from the construction of the new building. Independent
Internal lining
Foundations to the existing wall should be exposed and assessed for suitability to Vertical insulated DPC
support additional loadings. It is important to protect existing foundations at all times,
and care must be taken not to 'undermine' existing foundations when clearing the site Plasterboard
or reducing levels.
Where existing foundations require underpinning, a design by a Chartered Structural

Engineer should be provided and approved by the Warranty Surveyor prior to work
commencing on-site.
The existing wall should also be appraised to determine whether it is structurally stable
and suitable to support additional loadings.
Bonding new walls to existing masonry cavity wall
Existing Masonry leaf cut

vertically to make cavity
continuous and insulated
DPC inserted
Method of bonding to
Structural Engineers
design
Wall treatment
to meet sound Flexible weatherproof
requirements joint should be formed
between existing and
new render
Wall ties at
225mm vertical
C/C next to wall
junction

EXTERNAL WALLS
6.2.9
CAVITYWALL
- RENDERED CLAD:
MASONRY Forming
CLAD: openings
Forming openings
Window and door installations

Typical window reveal detail (normal exposure)
Please refer to the 'Windows and Doors' section for installation requirements of frames including
maximum gaps and fixings.
Insulated cavity closer. This should also be fire
resistant when required by the regional Building
Regulations
Typical vertical section through window opening Inner leaf
Vertical DPC to be folded around (and where possible

fixed) to the window/door frame
Minimum 2 weep holes per
opening and be of a type that
restricts wind driven rain
The frame should overlap the cavity by a minimum of
30mm

Appropriate 'non hardening' mastic sealant to be
provided between frame and masonry reveal
The frame should overlap
the cavity by a minimum of
30mm Outer leaf The external face of the frame is set back at least
38mm from the masonry face
Back edge of drip/throating to the 'Checked rebate' detail areas of very severe
sills must be at least 40mm away exposure Inner leaf
from the finished render
Insulated cavity closer. This should also be fire
resistant when required by the regional
Min 40mm gap required Building Regulations.
Vertical DPC to be provided around masonry, and

Insulated cavity closer. This should where possible fixed to the window/door frame
also be fire resistant when required
by the regional Building Regulations
Bay window detail

Appropriate 'non hardening' mastic sealant to be
provided between frame and masonry reveal
Cold bridging insulation 25mm rebate to allow for building tolerance and
window fixing tolerance Outer leaf
25mm
DPC full width of external leaf and not
less than 150mm wide
When installing window/door frames in a checked rebate, allow for the frame to be deeper:
· To accommodate the 25mm rebate, and
· To allow for opening lights to open clear of the masonry/render.
DPC to be lapped behind window
frame
Windows and doors
In areas of very severe exposure, checked rebates should be provided. The frame should be set back behind the outer leaf and
should overlap.
Joint at external corner of masonry,
render, and window frame to be sealed A suitable DPC must be provided at all window and door openings to prevent the passage of damp to the internal finishes. A third
with mastic party certified cavity closure may be used.
EXTERNAL WALLS
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 122
EXTERNAL WALLS
6.2.10TRADITIONAL
MASONRY CAVITYWALL
RENDERED MASONRY
MASONRYCLAD:
CLAD:Forming openings
Forming continued
openings continued
Correct method of bond around lintels Lintels
· The lintel should be the correct length and width for the opening and cavity width, the
bearing length should be at least 150mm.
· Do not let masonry overhang lintels by more than 25mm.
· Continuity of the masonry bond should be maintained at supports for beams and
lintels.
· Lintels should be insulated to prevent excessive thermal bridging.
Do not:
· Support lintels and beams on short lengths of cut blocks or make-up pieces.
· Apply load to lintels or beams before the masonry supporting has hardened.
Typical mesh reinforcement around openings
Full block for lintel bearing
Renders will be reinforced as a

minimum with an appropriate certified
alkaline resistant fibreglass mesh at
Correct bonding below
corners of all openings and
supporting block
penetrations
Incorrect method of bond around lintels
Reinforcement mesh bedded in

primary render coat. The mesh should
be installed as per the manufacturers
specification typically extending
200mm beyond reveals and 500mm
above and below windows, extending
200mm above cill and below head
Supporting masonry
not fully coursed into
the wall - not accepted
Rendering adjacent to openings
· For bellcasts and other beads uPVC beads or stainless steel beads are acceptable.
· Renders will be reinforced as a minimum with an appropriate certified alkaline resistant fibreglass mesh at corners of all
openings and penetrations. For substrates that are prone to movement, an appropriate certified alkaline resistant fibreglass
mesh will need to incorporated throughout the substrate.
· Ensure that drips and throating to sills, coping, etc. project a minimum of 40mm beyond the face of the finished render above
the DPC.

EXTERNAL WALLS
6.2.11
6.2.11 TRADITIONAL
TRADITIONAL MASONRY
MASONRYCAVITY
CAVITYWALL
- RENDERED CLAD:
MASONRY Feature
CLAD: stone stone
Feature surrounds to openings
Stone jamb mullion, fixing to walls Joining stone jambs to sills and head Stone sill with insulated
Stone jambs, mullions, cavity closer
and heads should not A soft joint is required
project into the cavity and between the top of the head
insulated cavity closers and the steel support
should be inserted to lintel/cavity tray
typical window opening Non-structural cast stone
sections) head
Head to be fully bedded on

Stainless steel dovetail
jamb DPC/slip plane
anchor
over stool
Stainless steel dowel drilled
equally into head and DPC full length
jamb/mullion and width of sill
bed
and bottom with stainless When stone heads are being
steel pins. Stainless steel used, it is advisable to double up
the cavity trays - with one below Min
frame-type cramps can
the stone head and to provide 40mm
also be used to give extra
stability at jambs stop-ends and weep-holes.
Weep holes to be of a type to Note: The insulated cavity closer should also be fire
restrict wind driven rain resistant when required by the relevant Building Regulations
Mortar:
Cast stone jambs and
stone should comply with mullions
Standards for sand, lime, Stainless steel dowels in the
and cement as set out in sides of jambs should be bedded
BS 5390 into adjacent mortar joints as the
masonry is constructed
Stone sill DPC/slip plane Stone head Render

over stool
Ensure that drips and throating to sills etc project beyond the face of the finished
render above the DPC by a minimum of 40mm. Rendering around window/door
openings to be reinforced with mesh.
Cast stone heads
structure

Sills of this should be provided to the Warranty Surveyor upon request.
DPC/Slip plane DPC/Slip plane
over head under head
The DPC should be overlapped by the vertical DPC at the jambs and should Cast stone window/door surrounds
surface between the two materials must be incorporated or the cast stone should be
flexibly jointed.

EXTERNAL WALLS
6.2.12TRADITIONAL
MASONRY CAVITYWALL
RENDERED MASONRY
MASONRYCLAD:
CLAD:Lateral restraint
Lateral at floor
restraint levels
at floor levels
Restraint of walls Typical restraint type joist hanger
Walls should be adequately restrained at floors, ceilings and verges in accordance with the relevant Building Regulations.
Maximum 6mm gap
Restraint can be provided by: between joist and hanger
· Lateral restraint straps. Bed hanger directly

· Restraint type joist hangers. on to blockwork
Lateral restraint of walls (timber floors)

Joist fixed to hanger
Tension strap to turn down 100mm Strap to be rebated into top of joists
within the cavity and to be tight to allow the floorboards to lay flat
against the face of the inner leaf wall No gap between joist
hanger and wall
30mm x 5mm galvanized

or stainless steel restraint Restraint type hangers
straps at a maximum 2m
centres It is necessary to ensure that:
Gap between the wall Solid nogging to be fixed Alternative · The hanger is bedded directly on the masonry and there is no gap between the hanger back-plate and the face of
and the first joist to be between joists under strap location the masonry.
filled with a timber straps to take the fixings. using full depth · At least 450mm of masonry is provided above the hanger.
packing at strap positions Nogging should extend at noggings
least half the depth of the
· Hangers are spaced at centres of floor joists included in the design.
joist and be at least · The hanger is suitable for the loadings and masonry strength.
38mm thick
Do not:
· Use brick courses in block walls under joist hangers as the thermal insulation of the wall may be reduced unless
similar units to the blocks are used.
Lateral restraint of walls Lateral restraint straps
(beam and block floors)
Floors, including timber, block and beam, and roofs should provide lateral Correct use of hangers
restraint to all walls running parallel to them by means of 30mm x 5mm
galvanised or stainless steel restraint straps at a maximum 2m centres (please
refer to the 'Upper Floors' section for further guidance). Straps need not be
provided to floors at, or about, the same level on each side of a supported wall
Strap to turn down a and at the following locations:
minimum of 100mm and
to be tight against the Timber floors in two storey buildings where:
inner face of cavity
· Joists are at maximum 1.2m centres and have at least 90mm bearing on
supported walls or 75mm bearing on to a timber wall plate.
· Carried by the supported wall by restraint type joist hangers as described in Support hangers Do not cut the
Strap Position blocks
BS 5268: 7.1. on full blocks
· Concrete floors with minimum 90mm bearing on supported wall.
Do not mix Do not pack up

materials under joists
© MD Insurance
2020 2020 125 125 EXTERNAL
EXTERNALWALLS
WALLS
6.2.13 TRADITIONAL
MASONRY CAVITY
CAVITYWALL
- RENDERED CLAD:
MASONRY Cavity
CLAD: traystrays
Cavity
Lintel Cavity trays should rise at Cavity trays, associated weep-holes and stop-ends prevent the build-up of water within a cavity wall and allow the water to escape through the outer leaf. They are
least 150mm from the used in conjunction with lintels above openings, to protect the top surface of cavity insulation at horizontal cavity barriers and where the cavity is bridged.
Insulation outer to the inner leaf, be
self-supporting or fully Cavity trays are to be provided:
supported and have joints · Cavity trays are to be provided to comply with relevant regional Building Regulations.
Minimum lintel lapped and sealed · At all interruptions likely to direct rain water across the cavity, such as rectangular ducts, lintels and recessed meter boxes.
bearing 150mm
· Above cavity insulation that is not taken to the top of the wall, unless that area of wall is protected by impervious cladding.
· Above lintels in walls in exposure zones 4 and 3, and in zones 2 and 1 where the lintel is not corrosion-resistant and not intended to function as its own cavity
Preformed stop end tray.
bonded to cavity tray · Continuously above lintels where openings are separated by short piers.
clipped to lintel to coincide · Above openings where the lintel supports a brick soldier course.
with perpend weephole
Ring beams or floor slabs that partially bridge the cavity, e.g. when dimensional accuracy cannot be guaranteed, should be protected by a continuous cavity tray,
especially when full cavity insulation is employed.
Weep-holes
Continuous cavity tray over Weep-holes must be installed at no more than 900mm centres to drain water from cavity trays and from the concrete cavity infill at ground level. When the wall is
two openings and a small pier to be cavity filled, it is advisable to reduce this spacing.
Cavity trays should be continuous 900mm At least two weep-holes must be provided to drain cavity trays above openings.
short piers Where the wall is externally coated with a 'High Performance' polymer modified factory manufactured render system, the weep-holes are not deemed necessary
for cavity wall construction. However, weepholes will still be required in high risk areas such as lower roof abutments or parapet walls.
Weep-holes in exposure zones 3 and 4 should be designed to prevent ingress of wind-driven rain (including ground level).
Stop-ends
Cavity trays 600mm Other perforations of the building envelope

continuous over piers
less than 600mm wide Proprietary elements, such as ventilators, soil pipes, etc. which perforate the building envelope should be installed and sealed to prevent ingress of moisture or
cavity tray and a vertical DPC between the back of the box and the wall.
Installation of
Details of flashing can be found in Proprietary cavity tray systems
the 'Roofs' section.
stepped cavity tray At stepped and lower storey abutments and around corners in low rise cavity masonry walls a proprietary cavity tray system should be used.
Preformed cavity trays should be
used for stepped cavity tray details
Flat roof abutment cavity tray construction Stop end in relation to cavity tray and lintel
Profile line
against profile Cavity tray (minimum height
within cavity of 150mm) Cavity tray
Mortar should be raked out under
the cavity tray to a depth of 25mm
Weep holes must be installed at Top hat lintel
Steps and staggers no more than 900mm centres to
drain water from the cavity trays. Minimum
Angled stop end
End tray to Where cavities are to be fully 150mm
Particular care is needed in adequately upstand
have two stop preventing the ingress of water in a terrace of filled, the spacing should be
Weephole not
ends and weep buildings with steps and staggers. A reduced. At least two weep holes
shown for clarity
hole proprietary cavity tray system should be used, must be provided to drain cavity
or alternatively, a suitable tanking system. trays over openings
(stepped) roof abutments with external cavity
walls, e.g. attached garages or staggered Lead cover flashing linked under
terraces. The bottom (last) cavity tray must be the cavity tray
Profile depth calculated
supplied with two stop-ends and an
by the depth of batten +
associated weep-hole, allowing all water to Roof covering to be taken up
escape over the lower roof covering. A lead behind cover flashing for a
cover flashings should be linked into the minimum lap of 65mm
cavity tray (lapped in below).
Tilting fillet to support roof
covering at junction
EXTERNAL WALLS
© MD
Services 20202020
Limited 126
126
EXTERNAL WALLS
6.2.14TRADITIONAL
MASONRY CAVITYWALL
RENDERED MASONRY
MASONRYCLAD:
CLAD:Copings/parapets
Copings/parapets
Fixing of copings onto horizontal parapets Fixing of copings to sloping parapets
Stainless steel dowel in Throats or drips to copings
slotted hole to prevent uplift Stainless steel dowel in a should project a minimum of
slotted hole prevents uplift 40mm
Throats or drips to copings
should project a minimum of
40mm DPC made continuous by
All copings should be lapping over mechanical
mechanically fixed fixing
Min
50mm Stainless steel mechanical
DPC under coping (fully fixings giving restraint to
supported). DPC made coping (fixing into masonry
continuous by lapping over below)
mechanical fixings
Stainless steel mechanical

fixings giving restraint to
coping (fixing into masonry
below)
Maximum height of parapet walls (to be read in conjunction with the table below)
DPC lapping over
mechanical fixing
w1 w1
Parapet wall detail
X Coping
Y DPC Drip/throat min 40mm

H H clear of rendering
Support to DPC
Weep hole Render
Flashing
Cavity tray
Roof finish
Angle fillet
recommended
Level of junction of wall and Level of junction of wall and

w2 structural roof w2 structural roof
Parapets
· The materials used in construction of the parapets details should be suitable for the location and exposure.
Wall type Thickness (mm) Parapet height to be no more than (mm) · Where possible, the use of raking parapets should be avoided due to need for high standards of detailing
and workmanship required to prevent the ingress of moisture.
Cavity wall x+y 600 · In very severe exposure zones, it is recommended that parapet construction is avoided altogether.
equal or less than 200
Render in highly exposed areas of construction
x+y 860
greater than 200
equal or less than 250 A specialist render system and mortar should be employed for parapets, chimneys, retaining walls and walls
below DPC level with this masonry background type.
Solid wall w1 = 150 600 It is recommended that;

w1 = 190 760
w1 = 215 860 · The backs and exposed horizontal surfaces of parapets are not rendered using a standard render system.
Use a specialist render system designed to combat movement and provide robust weatherproofing.
Note: w1 should be less than w2 - as shown above · Throats or drips to copings of parapets and chimneys should project beyond the finished faces by a
minimum of 40mm distance to throw water clear.
· Rendering to chimneys should only be carried out where the masonry contains little or no sulphates. An
appropriate specialist sealer / bonding key coat should be applied prior to applying the main coat of render.
A proprietary alkaline resistant mesh should be embedded throughout the render, the key coat should
provide a sound substrate and be compatible with the subsequent render system.
© MD Insurance
2020 2020 127 127 EXTERNAL
EXTERNALWALLS
WALLS
6.2.15 TRADITIONAL
MASONRY CAVITY
CAVITYWALL
- RENDERED CLAD:
MASONRY Lateral
CLAD: restraint
Lateral of walls
restraint of walls
Tension strap location Rafter/gable wall detail

Provide additional ties at
Tension strap at highest verges at 300mm vertical
point that will provide a spacing within 225mm
secure connection horizontally (parallel to the
225mm top of the wall)
Tension straps at not more
Cavity barrier
x x/2
than 2m centres omitted for clarity
x/2 Noggings to be provided and

If h is greater than 16t, set horizontal unless the
provide restraint here at not 300mm strap has a twist to line it up
greater than 2m centres max with the roof slope
h
Packing piece between

inner leaf and first rafter
t = sum of thicknesses of
leaves + 10mm
30mm x 5mm galvanised or

stainless steel restraint strap
(at a maximum 2m centres)
fixed to solid nogging with a
minimum of four fixings
which at least one is to be in
the third rafter or in nogging
beyond the third rafter
Gable end wall
Corbelling Restraint of Walls
The extent of corbelling of Walls should be adequately restrained at floors, ceilings, and verges in accordance with the relevant
masonry should not exceed that
indicated in the below detail, Restraints can be provided by:
unless supported or reinforced.
Reinforced corbels should be · Restraint type joist hangers
designed by a Charted Structural · Lateral restraint straps
Engineer. · Other forms of restraint proven by a Charted Engineer
Vertical strapping at eaves - flat Insulation

roofs No decrease in thickness on
opposite side of corbel Insulation should extend to the full height of the gable wall.
Each joist fixed to wall-plate Chimneys

with framing anchors or
skew nails If the chimney is in a severe exposure zone the cavity should extend around the outside of the stack
and be continuous up to roof level, as per BS 5628, Part 3. Where the chimney breast is gathered in,
the lower projecting masonry should be protected with a suitable capping and cavity trays. A 50mm
cavity at the back of the chimney breast is maintained to prevent rainwater penetration.
Strap anchored to wall and
turned over wall-plate A specialist render system and mortar should be employed for parapets, chimneys, retaining walls
and walls below DPC level.
Further guidance can be found in the 'Chimneys and Flues' section.
Eaves detailing for rendered walls

T
The eaves detail should extend past the masonry to provide protection to the top joint of the render
Maximum and prevent rainwater percolating behind the render.
corbel T/3

EXTERNAL WALLS
6. 6.3
Timber Frame -
External Brick Clad
Walls

6.3.1 TIMBER
6.3.1 TIMBERFRAME
FRAME-- BRICK
BRICK CLAD:
CLAD: General
Generalspecifications
specifications
Introduction Treatment of structural timber
This Guidance refers to 'conventional' timber frame open panel* systems made off-site under factory conditions. Such panel systems are required to be All load-bearing timber components shall be either naturally durable or treated in accordance with BS 8417: Preservation of wood code of practice.
manufactured and erected on-site under quality assured systems and be either Silver or Gold members of the Structural Timber Association or BM Sole plates and load-bearing timber studwork are considered to be in 'Use Class 2'. Sole plates are normally considered to be included in 'Service
TRADA registered. Factor Code C', while load-bearing timber studwork is included in 'Service Factor Code B'.
*Open panel systems are defined as systems which may include the external breather membrane and sheathing board, insulation internally All structural timber should be treated with a preservative suitable for the 'Use Class' and 'Service Factor' applicable to its use.
between the studs and a transparent Vapour Control Layer (VCL) which is left unfixed in order that the connections between panels can be viewed upon
inspection. Where treated timber is cut, the exposed end will not be protected by the original preservative treatment. When treated timbers are cut in the factory
or on site, the cut ends shall be re-treated with a preservative compatible with the original treatment used, this treatment should be coloured to allow
Timber frame panels which arrive to site with additional elements e.g. external cladding or a non-transparent VCL will need to undergo our in easy checking on site.
house Warranty Approval process.
Timber frame external walls are generally considered to consist of load-bearing solid timber studs at regular centres with insulation between them, lined Manufacture
with a structural sheathing board, breather membrane, drained cavity and cladding. A VCL and fire-resistant linings are provided to the internal finishes.
Timber
Alternatively, any timber frame kit, system or wall panel that has been approved via the Warranty product approval process will be acceptable. All structural timber components should be specified in accordance with this Technical Manual.
Structural design Panel moisture content

All structural timber components should be at a moisture content of 20% or less at the time of manufacture. Once panels are manufactured, they
Wind, roof and floor loads should be considered in the design and all timber frame structures shall be designed in accordance with Eurocode 5. Structures should either be stored in a covered storage area, or loosely covered with a water proof sheet material.
designed in accordance with BS 5268 may still be acceptable, although these standards have now been superseded by Eurocode 5.
Manufacturing tolerances
General specifications Based on the tolerances given in prEN 14732 (dated 17/12/2013) wall panels shall be manufactured to the following tolerances:
Bespoke timber frame open panel systems that do not have such QA procedures as the 'conventional' timber frame open panel systems described in this · Length: +3mm, -3mm.
document will need either third-party accreditation or independent Structural Engineer supervision and monitoring of the installation, erection and · Height: +/-2mm.
completion (sign off) of the system. All load-bearing timbers will have to be preservative treated in accordance with BS 8417 according to their position · Diagonals should be equal, acceptable deviation is +/-5mm.
within the frame, and evidence of treatment must be provided. · Opening dimensions: 0mm, +5mm.
The structural engineer must confirm, in writing prior to sign off, that the timber frame system has been installed:
· In accordance with the design. Studs
· In accordance with the structural calculations provided. Wall panels should be designed to minimise thermal bridging. Gaps between studs within the wall panel and at wall panel junctions should be large
· All structural timbers are appropriately preservative treated in accordance with BS 8417. enough to allow the installation of insulation.
· That a trained contractor, experienced in the erection of timber frame panels, has been employed.
Site preparation and erection
Green air dried or seasoned oak is not acceptable for use in external wall, window/door construction, frame or internal wall or roof constructions,
regardless of whether it forms part of the waterproof envelope or not. Projects incorporating 'green Oak' will not be acceptable for Warranty cover. Green Pre-commencement
Oak is defined for Warranty purposes as 'Oak that has been freshly cut or air dried'.
To allow the building to be constructed as designed all necessary drawings, specifications and fixing schedules shall be provided to site before work
Certified kiln dried Oak with a certified moisture content of 12% may be acceptable for parts of the structure where the oak does not form part of the commences.
waterproof envelope, or movement in the oak frame will not affect the waterproof envelope.
Foundations
Structurally Insulated Panels (SIPs) are a form of stressed skin composite panel. Only systems with independent third-party certification will meet the It is important that the tight tolerances for timber frame are understood, getting the location and level of the foundation correct is one of the most
Warranty requirements. important parts of the build process.
Quality assurance The foundations or upstands that support the timber frame should be set out to the dimensions noted on the timber frame drawings:
· Within +/-10mm in length, width and line.

All timber frame Designers, Manufacturers, and Erectors should possess current certification from at least one of the following quality assurance schemes:
· BM TRADA QMark for timber frame. · Diagonals should be within +/-5mm up to 10m, and +/-10mm more than 10m.
· Gold or Silver member of the Structural Timber Association. · Levelled to +/-5mm from datum.
· ISO 9001 to cover the manufacture of the timber frame panels.
· CE Marking when EN 14732 is published. Timber frame delivery and storage
· Other relevant third party quality assurance scheme. Timber frame components should be:
Timber specifications · Carefully unloaded to avoid damage or distortion of components.
· Stored off the ground on an adequate number of level bearers.
Grading of structural timber · Loosely covered with a waterproof membrane to allow protection from moisture while allowing ventilation if they are not to be used for a
All structural timber whether machine or visually graded shall be graded in accordance with BS EN 14081: Timber structures - Strength graded structural prolonged period.
timber with rectangular cross section. · Unwrapped if tightly bound in polythene and loosely recovered with a waterproof membrane to allow ventilation.
All load-bearing solid timber studs, rails, binders and sole plates should be of a minimum dry graded C16. · Below 20% moisture content.
· Confirmed as square by sample checking for equal diagonal measurements, lengths and heights.
Typical grading stamp
Timber frame erection
Certification body Company Species or species
or logo mark reference group Wall panel erection tolerances
Wall panels should be erected to the tolerances as per the 'Tolerances' section:
· +/-10mm from plumb per storey height.

·
1234/5678 WPPA ·
+/-10mm from plumb over the full height of the building.
+/-3mm from line of sole plate, with maximum +/-5mm deviation from drawing.
BM TRADA · +/-5mm from line at mid height of wall panel.
Producer Company
·
Logo GS ·
Inside faces of adjacent wall panels should be flush.
Adjacent wall panels should be tightly butted.
DRY C16
BS 4978
EN 14081 GRADED M
Standard Timber condition: Machine
reference DRY graded

EXTERNAL WALLS
6.3.26.3.2 TIMBER
TIMBER FRAME
FRAME - BRICK
- BRICK CLAD:Masonry
CLAD: MasonryCladding
Cladding
Masonry walls Exposure

Protection and moisture. Further information can be found in 'Appendix C - Material, Products, and Building Systems'.
saturated by rainwater, dry out too quickly in hot weather, are protected against frost attack, the risk of efflorescence and line Colour variation of bricks
staining and movement problems are reduced. There is usually a variation in the colour of bricks of the same style. To prevent patching of colour, it is recommended that at
Any temporary cover should not disturb the new masonry.
Protection of masonry facing up so that it is fully filled with mortar during laying. This ensures optimum strength, helps to increase the mass of the
Efflorescence

Frost attack
Mortar
General
Mixing
reduce suction. Low absorption bricks, i.e. engineering bricks, should not be wetted. For calcium silicate and concrete units,
Mortar should be carefully and consistently proportioned and then thoroughly mixed using a mechanical mixer, except for very
small quantities.
© MD Insurance
2020 2020 131 131 EXTERNAL
EXTERNALWALLS
WALLS
6.3.3 TIMBER
6.3.3 TIMBERFRAME
FRAME--BRICK
BRICK CLAD:
CLAD: Site
Sitelocation exposure
location exposure
Dornoch
The design and construction of external walls should be suitable for the site specific exposure location. Inverness
Shetland Orkney
Islands Islands
Wind-driven rain Aberdeen
To ascertain the risk relating to wind-driven rain, the following should be determined: Exposure zones Exposure to wind driven
Perth
· The exposure to wind-driven rain. Dundee
Stirling
· The correct type of construction, including the correct application of insulation.
· The correct level of workmanship and design detailing, particularly around window and door Edinburgh Dunbar Very severe 100 or more
openings. Glasgow
Severe 56.5 to less than 100
Ayr
Additional requirements in a coastal location Londonderry Moderate 33 to less than 56.5
Sheltered less than 33

Where developments are within a coastal location additional Warranty requirements should be met. Newcastle
Dungannon Carlisle
Belfast
Workington Note:
For the purpose of this Technical Manual we are considering sites within 5km inland from the shore line Alston
Middlesbrough
or sites located in 'tidal' estrine areas where they are within 5km of the general shoreline. Darlington Variations to the exposure shown on the
Whitby map can only be made by site-specific
Further information on Warranty requirements within a coastal location can be found in 'Appendix B - Ripon
exposure of walls to wind driven rain"
Coastal Locations'. York and the table above.
Hebden Bridge
Skelmersdale Hull
Manchester
Liverpool
Doncaster Grimsby
Sheffield
Bangor Chester Lincoln
Stafford Nottingham
Shrewsbury
Leicester
Birmingham
Norwich
Brecon Northampton
Cambridge
Gloucester
Cardiff
Swindon
Bristol London
Staines
Gatwick
Exeter Dover
Poole Southampton
Plymouth
Brighton
© MD
© Insurance Services Limited 20202020 132 EXTERNAL WALLS
MD Insurance Services Limited 132
EXTERNAL WALLS
6.3.46.3.4 TIMBER
TIMBER FRAME
FRAME - BRICK
- BRICK CLAD:Substructure
CLAD: Substructure external
external walls
walls
Ground supported floor - no sub floor ventilation
Note: Internal linings

have not been shown
for clarity. A service
void may be specified
Full height
Key points: Construction below DPC perpend VCL lapped with
DPC and DPM
1. Brickwork and blockwork must be selected to have suitable durability for its use in the wall DPC
construction in accordance with BS EN 771-1 and PD6697. DPM
durability classification (see BS EN 998-2).
Min
3. Cavities below ground should be filled with concrete ensuring there is a minimum gap of 225mm
225mm
between DPC and the top of concrete.
4. Concrete for cavities should be GEN 1 grade and a consistence class S3.

Concrete cavity fill
6. The compressive strength of the masonry units must meet the requirements of the relevant to be a minimum
regional Building Regulations. 225mm below DPC
1. DPC's should be of a flexible material, be suitable for the intended use, the DPC should have
appropriate 3rd party certification. The installation specification of DPC's should follow good

Suspended floor with ventilation provision
3. DPC's should be laid on a mortar bed and correctly lapped at junction and corners. The depth of
the lap should be the same width as the DPC.
VCL lapped with
DPC and DPM Note: Internal linings
4. The DPC should not bridge any cavity unless it is acting as a cavity tray where a cavity is required have not been shown
(e.g over a telescopic floor vent). Localised cavity tray and for clarity. A service
drainage over periscope vent void may be specified
5. Damp proof membranes should be lapped with the DPC, DPM, and VCL by a minimum overlap of omitted for clarity
100mm. DPC
DPC
Drainage and ventilation

Full height
perpend
Cavity drainage and ventilation in masonry cladding should:
Final ground level
· Be provided with the use of full height open perpends at a maximum of 1350mm centres or
equivalent open area.
· Be fitted in the brick or block course below the lowest timber sole plate above external finished
ground level and below DPC.
· Maintain a clear cavity with care taken to reduce mortar droppings at the base of the wall. Periscope vent
Weep-holes alone are unsuitable for timber frame construction, and open perpends should be used. Beam and
Min block flooring
Proprietary open perpends should be used. Proprietary open perpend inserts are available with insect
225mm
screening incorporated. Their equivalent open area must be considered and installation centres
reduced accordingly. DPM
Where floor beams bear onto

Concrete cavity fill substructure, a DPC underneath
to be a minimum should be provided
225mm below DPC

EXTERNAL WALLS
6.3.5 TIMBER
6.3.5 TIMBERFRAME
FRAME--BRICK
BRICK CLAD:
CLAD: Gas
Gasmembrane
membranedetails
details
DPC
Possible gas membrane detail
Periscope vent
Ventilation for timber frame structures

Final ground level
It is important that whilst setting out the walls below ground that suitable forethought is given to the
subsequent construction above DPC. The cavity should be constructed so that the appropriate widths Minimum
Maximum void 150mm
are achieved in line with the appropriate relevant regional Building Regulations and our Warranty
225mm
requirements. For timber frame structures early consideration of ventilation and drainage is key. Radon
barriers should be positioned in such a way to not impair or restrict ventilation to any part on the timber
frame structure.

Radon barrier
VCL Protective blinding If ground conditions require
Breather gas membranes, they should
membrane be located so they do not
inhibit drainage and ventilation
DPC Radon barrier
to all areas of the timber frame
structure
Full height perpends
to provide ventilation
to the cavity
Possible gas membrane detail with raised VCL

Final ground level
sole plate Breather
membrane
Perpend vents above DPC to Gas membrane also acts as
vent/drain cavity the cavity tray, with a clear
cavity of at least 150mm
below the sole plate
Periscope vent
Gas membrane
Minimum
void 150mm Rigid cavity insulation board
with a third party product
approval for use as a full fill
Note: Propriety ventilation cavity insulation (in between
Final ground level
products should provide adequate periscope vents). The board
ventilation in accordance with the must be suitable for positioning
'Ground Floors' section in the cavity below ground level
If ground conditions require

gas membranes, they should
be located so they do not
inhibit drainage and ventilation Minimum
Note: Insulation
to all areas of the timber frame void 150mm
below DPC should
structure have suitable third
party certification
for use

structure
© MD
EXTERNAL WALLS
6.3.6 TIMBER
6.3.6 TIMBER FRAME
FRAME - BRICKCLAD:
- BRICK CLAD:Sole
Sole plate
plate requirements
requirements
Sole plates Locating sole plates
The sole plate is the first structural timber component installed on site. Its purpose is to set out the building, transfer loads to the foundations and provide a
Sole plate 10 mm maximum
level base for erecting the wall panels. All structural timber should be located at least 150mm above finished external ground level, except for localised
ramping (incorporating satisfactory drainage and ventilation detailing) for level threshold requirements. DPC packing without
Structural Engineer's
Breather Membrane
approval
The sole plate should be accurately levelled, located, and securely fixed to the substructure as specified by the Structural Engineer. Where no sole plate is lapped 25 mm below
specified, the following guidance applies equally to wall panel bottom rails. Timber sole plates should be preservative treated in accordance with BS 8417. bottom of sole plate
Sole plate may be
Further information on timber treatment can be found in 'Appendix C - Materials, Products, and Building Systems'.
levelled locally
+/- 10 mm tolerance between
with packers then
Location outer face of sole plate and edge
grouted and fixed
Sole plates should: of supporting base. Any
to Structural Engineer's
projecting slab edges should be
· Be located so that all structural timber is at least 150mm above external ground level. The use of a masonry foundation kerb upstand may be an flashed over, or otherwise
recommendations
appropriate method to achieve this.
· Be levelled to +/-5mm from datum. protected (Structural Engineer's
· Not overhang or be set back from the foundation edge by more than 10mm. tolerances may be greater)
· Be set out within +/-10mm in length and in line within +/-5mm, as defined by the timber frame drawings.
· Diagonals should be within +/-5mm up to 10m, and +/-10, for more than 10m.
Note: Internal and party wall timber sole plates should not be installed below internal finished floor level. Sole plate/foundation junctions
Damp Proof Course (DPC)
A DPC should: Note: Internal linings
have not been shown
· Be located directly below all timber sole plates. Wall tie for clarity. A service
· Overlap at DPC junctions by at least 100mm. void may be specified
· Be located flush to the outside edge of the sole plate. Wall frame
Sole plate
Fixings
Fixings should: VCL lapped with DPM
· Be installed to the Structural Engineers specification. and DPC
· Not damage the substructure or sole plates during installation. Full height open perpends to
· Be placed to provide adequate lateral restraint at door openings. provide drainage and ventilation
· Be specified with consideration for use with gas membranes where appropriate. to cavity
· Sole plates should be fixed to foundations with shot fired nails, proprietary sole plate fixings, anchors, brackets, or straps, as specified by a Structural
Engineer. Min
Breather membrane lapped
· All sole plate fixings and holding down products should be austenitic stainless steel. If stainless steel straps are used, they should be grade 1.4301 150mm
steel to BS EN 10088 and isolated from the studs with neoprene gaskets or similar. 25mm below sole plate
Ventilation
Regardless of the cladding system used, a cavity with provision for drainage and ventilation should be provided between the cladding and the timber frame
ensuring that adequate ventilation provision is provided to all areas of the timber frame including the sole plate.
Packing
Structural shims or grout may be required under sole plates to level them and transfer vertical load. Longer fixings may be needed to allow for the size of
the gap. Kerb upstand to allow level threshold
Note: Optional
insulated service void
Wall tie shown for illustrative
purposes
Packing of sole plates Wall frame
Masonry upstand in
Structural packers installed accordance with
below full bearing area of Sole plate structural engineer's
multiple stud clusters design
Full height perpends to provide Min
Structural packers installed drainage and ventilation to 150mm
below studs cavity
Gap may be filled with structural

grout or sealant to maintain air
tightness Insulation in front of upstand to
mitigate thermal bridging
Note: The use of structural grout is
not considered suitable for gaps
less than 10mm due to installation
difficulties
EXTERNAL WALLS
© MD ©
Insurance Services
Services 2020 2020 135135
EXTERNAL WALLS
6.3.7 TIMBER
6.3.7 TIMBER FRAME
FRAME - BRICKCLAD:
- BRICK CLAD: Superstructure
Superstructure wall
wallpanel
panelconstruction
construction
Timber frame wall panels

Timber frame external wall panels shall:
· Be manufactured in accordance with the Structural Engineer's design. Beam to engineered specification
· Consist of solid timber studs and rails. Typical wall panel
· Have studs at a maximum of 600mm centres.
· Be braced with a structural sheathing board. All structural timber whether machine or visually graded shall be in Any point load imparted onto the timber frame should be
accordance with BS EN 14081: Timber structures - Strength graded transferred down through the building to the foundations
Fixings and junctions structural timber with rectangular cross section with the use of multiple studs, as required by the structural
All fixings are to be installed to the Structural Engineer's specification. engineers design. If these are not installed during the
All load-bearing solid timber studs, rails, binders and sole plates should manufacture of the panels the requirement for installation
Unless otherwise justified: be of a minimum dry graded C16 must be clearly conveyed to site
· Junctions of wall panels and sole plates/head binders should not occur together.
· Head binder laps should wherever possible occur over a stud, preferably at least 600mm from the panel
junction.
· Wall panel to wall panel connections should be a maximum of 300mm centres.
· Bottom rail to sole plate fixings should be one or two per stud bay.
· Wall panels should be adequately braced during erection to maintain tolerances.
· Disproportionate collapse components and fixings must be installed if specified.
· Multiple stud clusters must be installed to the full width of point load-bearings.
· Point loads must be transferred down through wall panels and floor zones to foundations.
· Walls manufactured off-site must be fixed together as specified.
· Special considerations should be given to protecting closed panels from exposure to moisture during
delivery, storage and erection.
· Engineered timber components should not be exposed to moisture for longer periods than those stated by
the manufacturer.
· Roof trusses/rafters should be adequately fixed to wall panels.
· Floor joists should be nailed down to wall panels. A lintel may be required where
· If no head binder is present, floor joists must bear directly over studs.
· Waistbands and alignment of floors over walls should remain within tolerances for wall panels. openings do not fall between studs
unless the vertical load is
Timber framing components and structural sheathing boards may be fixed with: adequately transferred by other
elements
· Nails
· Staples
Nail fixings should be:
· Austenitic stainless steel

· Galvanised
· Sherardized
Lintels will require support of
Staple fixings should be austenitic stainless steel or similar. cripple studs
Sheathing board
Openings
All structural timber should be
All openings including doors, windows, flues and ventilation ducts should be designed and constructed to treated with a preservative suitable
maintain structural performance. Breather membrane for the 'Use Class' and 'Service
Factor' applicable to its use
Vapour Control Layer (VCL)
A continuous VCL with a minimum vapour resistance of 250 MN.s/g or 0.25 Pa/m2 should be located on or near
the warm side of the thermal insulation.
Sheathing boards
Sheathing boards are fixed to the timber frame in order to provide racking resistance to the structure.
Wood-based board materials used The fixings securing the structural sheathing board to the timber studwork Studs should be provided around window
Structural sheathing board materials may be any of the following: for sheathing should be fixed to the wall panels provide racking resistance as calculated by the Structural and door openings and adjacent to
studwork frame leaving a 3mm Engineer. The sheathing board shall be fixed to the timber studwork in movement joints to allow the installation of
· Orientated strand board (OSB). minimum gap between boards to strict accordance with the Structural Engineer's fixing schedule. Fixing wall ties or other cladding fixings. They
· Plywood. allow for moisture-related movement centres should not exceed 150mm around the perimeter of the board and should be accurately cut to length and bear
· Impregnated soft board. 300mm centres in the field of the board. Sheathing fixings must not be tightly against the wall panel top and
· Other board material with suitable third-party certification.
· All wood-based panel products should comply with BS EN 13986: Wood-based panels for use in over-driven through the face of the sheathing board bottom rails
construction - characteristics, evaluation of conformity and marking.
· OSB should be grade 3 or 4 in accordance with BS EN 300: Oriented Strand Boards (OSB) - Definitions,
classification and specifications.
· Plywood should be at least Class 2 Structural in accordance with BS EN 636: Plywood Specifications.
· Impregnated soft boards should be Type SB.HLS in accordance with BS EN 622-4: Fibreboards,
specifications and requirements for soft boards.
© MD©Insurance Services Limited 2020 2020 136136 EXTERNAL WALLS

EXTERNAL WALLS
6.3.8 TIMBER
6.3.8 TIMBER FRAME
FRAME - BRICKCLAD:
- BRICK CLAD:Breather
Breather membrane,
membrane, drilling
drillingofofstuds,
studs,and
andservices
services
Breather membrane
A breather membrane is a water-resistant moisture vapour permeable membrane used to provide temporary Head binder lapping - Head binder nailed to frames. Fixings
weather protection during construction, and secondary protection from moisture once the building is complete. Timber frame determined by timber frame engineer's
calculations
The timber frame structure should always be protected by a breather membrane facing the external wall cavity.
Head binder butt jointed over stud or
Breather membranes should be: lintel which is fixed to the underside of
the top rail
· Minimum Class W2 or better in accordance with BS EN 13859: Flexible sheets for waterproofing -
Definitions and characteristics of underlays. Head binder laps joint in
· Securely fixed to protect the outside face of the timber frame structure with austenitic stainless steel staples. panels below to form a tie
· Placed on the outside of the timber structure and any external insulation adjacent to the external wall cavity.
· Lapped to deflect moisture away from the timber frame structure.
· Trimmed to leave 25mm lap below the lowest timber sole plate.
· Repaired if damaged.
Breather membranes should be lapped by a minimum of 100mm at horizontal joints, and a minimum of 150mm at
vertical joints. If breather membranes are trimmed flush with the edges of wall panels, additional strips of breather
membrane, at least 300mm wide, should be supplied and site fixed over panel junctions. The location of solid
timber studs should be clearly marked on the outer face of the breather membrane to ensure that cladding fixings
are installed into solid timber.
Lapping and repair of breather membrane
Panel incorporating T
150mm type connection
vertical lap
Panel incorporating L
type stud corner
Repair of damaged
breather membrane
Drilling of studs Services

100mm
In addition to general provisions for the installation of services, the following are of
150 150 mm minimum particular note for timber frame construction external walls:
mm
· The routing and termination of services should not affect the fire resistance of the
structure.
150
· Electrical services are to be rated for their location with consideration for insulation.
0.25h maximum
mm · Wet services are not to be installed on the cold side of the insulation.
100mm · Service penetrations through the VCL should be tight fitting to reduce air leakage
and the passage of moisture vapour.
· Avoid running electrical services in the external wall cavity, except for meter tails.
· Services should be protected with metal plates if they pass within 25mm from face
h stud stud.
height · Adequate allowance for differential movement to occur without causing damage
should be provided for rigid services rising vertically through a building.
0.25h maximum · Services that pass through the external wall cavity and provide an opening (such as
flues/vents) should be enclosed with a cavity barrier and protected with a cavity tray.
Vertical joints
staggered
100mm
horizontal
laps
Maximum 0.25 150 mm minimum
stud width
Drilling on centre line only. Hole diameters not greater than

0.25 stud width and hole centres not closer than 4d (d = hole
diameter)
EXTERNAL WALLS
© MD ©
Insurance Services
Services 2020 2020 137137
EXTERNAL WALLS
6.3.96.3.9 TIMBER
TIMBER FRAME - BRICK CLAD: Insulation for external walls
FRAME - BRICK CLAD: Insulation for external walls
Conventional wall with
insulation between studs Insulation materials
Internal wall lining
Insulation materials should be chosen with consideration for their breathability and interaction with the timber frame.
VCL
Thermal insulation products typically used are:
Insulation (between the load bearing studs)
· Mineral fibre (glass or rock).
Sheathing
· Wood fibre/wool.
Breather membrane · Blown cellulose.
Other insulation materials may be used subject to relevant third-party certification.
Insulation may be specified in any or all of the following locations:
· Between the load-bearing studs.

· On the outside of the timber frame.
· On the inside of the timber frame.
Note: Cladding not shown for clarity
Insulation installed to the outside of the timber frame structure should have third-party certification for this application and retain a minimum of a
clear 50mm cavity. The outer layer of insulation should also be covered with a breather membrane adjacent to the cavity.
Continuous internal
insulation External walls should be subject to U-Value and condensation risk calculations. A wall build up will be considered satisfactory if there is no
calculated risk of surface or interstitial condensation at any time of the year, and it fulfils the minimum national requirement for thermal
Internal wall lining performance.
VCL Special consideration should be given to condensation risk where non-breathable insulation products are installed on the outside of the timber
frame structure. Joints between foil faced external insulation boards, must not be taped as this forms a vapour control layer on the cold side of the
Service zone
insulation.
Insulation (inside of the timber frame)
Depending on the specification of insulation materials to be added to the structural frame, timber battens may be required to support the insulation
Insulation (between the load bearing studs) or allow fixing of plasterboard linings, or external cladding.
Sheathing Insulation
Breather membrane
If insulation is specified between external walls studs all voids shall be filled with insulation to maintain the thermal envelope of the building. When
noggins or boards are installed between studs to support services or heavy fittings the void behind them shall be fully insulated.
Insulation should not be installed until the structural timber frame is below 20% moisture content and the building is weather tight, as wet insulation
can retain moisture. If closed panel timber frame is specified, additional care must be taken to protect the panels from exposure to moisture during
construction, with moisture content checks carried out before full closure.
Note: The above also applies equally to insulated party wall cavities.
Continuous external
insulation
Insulation installed within the cavity
VCL If external wall insulation is to be used:

· Insulation should be installed in a manner to maintain its stated performance by minimising gaps that lead to thermal bridging and air
washing.
Sheathing
· Installation should be covered with a breather membrane to ensure that external wall cavity moisture does not become trapped in or between
Insulation (outside of the timber frame) the insulation and the timber frame.
· Cavity trays should be fixed and lapped over the cavity facing breather membrane to deflect cavity moisture away from the timber frame.
Breather membrane · Allowance should be made for differential movement to occur at floor zones.
· Cavity barriers should be tightly fitting; depending on the type of insulation used, cavity barriers may need to pass through the insulation,
back to solid timber within the timber frame structure behind and remain effective in a fire.
· It should not retain or transmit moisture to cause the timber structure to exceed 20% moisture content.
· Stud locator marks should be transferred onto the outer face of the breather membrane adjacent to the external wall cavity.
· Wall ties should transfer loads to the timber frame structure. To achieve this, wall ties will typically need to be installed through the external
insulation rather than bearing onto it.
Note: Cladding not shown for clarity · Joints between foil faced insulation boards must not be taped.

138
EXTERNAL WALLS
EXTERNAL WALLS
6.3.10 TIMBER
6.3.10 TIMBERFRAME
FRAME-- BRICK
BRICK CLAD:
CLAD: Wall
Walllinings
liningsand
andVCL
VCLrequirements
requirements
Vapour control layer (VCL) Air leakage
A VCL is a moisture vapour-resistant material located on, or near, the warm side of the thermal insulation. Detailing and installation instructions must be followed
Its purpose is to: to achieve adequate air tightness.
· Restrict the passage of moisture vapour through the structure of the wall.
· Mitigate the risk of interstitial condensation. Floor zone air barrier
lapped with VCL by
The VCL should have a minimum vapour resistance of 250 MN.s/g or 0.25 Pa/m2. It is also typically used as an air tightness 100 mm over rails
layer.
The VCL may take the form of:
· A vapour control plasterboard comprising a metallised polyester film bonded to the back face of the plasterboard.* Air barrier
· A minimum 125 micron thick (500 gauge) polythene sheet. Wall panel with brick
· A third-party approved proprietary vapour control membrane product. cladding
*Vapour control plasterboard should only be used subject to a condensation risk analysis demonstrating the suitability of the wall
build up.
Note: linings, cladding and
Subject to a favourable condensation risk analysis, a novel or reverse wall construction may not require the use of a high moisture insulation materials have
vapour-resistant vapour control membrane. been omitted for clarity
A VCL should not be installed until the structural timber frame is below 20% moisture content and the building is weather tight.
Installation of a VCL
A sheet membrane (polythene or proprietary) VCL should be:
· Securely fixed to and cover all areas of the timber frame external walls, including all sole plates, head binders, and Cavity tray lapped up 100mm
lapped/sealed fully into window/door reveals. behind breather membrane
· Lapped and sealed by at least 100mm at joints. Timber lintel
· Lapped and sealed over studs, rails or noggins.
· Sealed around service penetrations. Steel lintel (retaining clips when
· Lapped and sealed with DPM/DPC at the junction with the ground floor/foundation by a minimum of 100mm. required)
Head binder
Note: Small holes in the VCL should be sealed with a suitable self-adhesive tape. If a proprietary membrane is being used, the
manufacturer's proprietary sealing tape should be used. Larger holes should be re-covered to lap over adjacent studs and rails. Stud marker tape
Top rail
Vapour control plasterboard should be:
Vertical DPC lapped with VCL in
· Fixed in accordance with the plasterboard manufacturer's installation guidance.
· Tightly cut and fitted around service penetrations. window reveal
Jack stud
· Discarded if the vapour control backing is damaged.
Cavity barrier around window
Wall linings opening
Cripple stud
The internal lining of the timber frame wall may be required to perform four functions:
Bottom window rail
· Provide the finish or a substrate to accept the finish on the inner face of the wall.
· Contribute to the racking resistance of the wall. Timber studs
· Contribute to the fire resistance of the wall.
· Contribute to the acoustic performance of the wall. Flexible wall tie nailed to studs
Wall linings are typically:
· Gypsum plasterboard. Insulation

Breather membrane
· Fibre reinforced gypsum board.
· Cement bonded particle board.
Lining materials must satisfy all relevant performance criteria, e.g. fire resistance, acoustic performance and have relevant Sheathing
DPC
Plasterboard Bottom rail

Open perpends at maximum
Installation 1350mm centres
In order to provide the specified period of fire resistance, the plasterboard must:
Sole plate
· Protect all areas of the timber frame structure.
· Have all edges supported by timber studs or rails. Finished ground level 150mm
· Be fixed in accordance with the plasterboard manufacturer's guidance. below lowest timber
DPC
· Be cut and tightly fit around service penetrations.
· Have junctions of wall and ceiling linings detailed to maintain continuity.
· Be installed using the specified number of layers to achieve the required fire resistance.
· Have all joints staggered when installing multiple layers.
When fixing plasterboard linings:
· Each layer must be fully and independently fixed.

· Fixings of the correct length and centres should be installed in accordance with the plasterboard manufacturer's installation
instructions.
· Walls requiring plasterboard to provide racking resistance should be clearly identified with plasterboard installed to the
Structural Engineer's specification or the plasterboard manufacturer's specification, whichever is more onerous.

EXTERNAL WALLS
6.3.11 TIMBER
6.3.11 TIMBER FRAME- -BRICK
FRAME BRICKCLAD:
CLAD: Cavity
Cavity barriers
barriers
Cavity barrier locations
In England and Wales, cavity barriers shall be installed:
· At the edges of all cavities including around openings, e.g. windows and
doors.
· Between an external cavity wall and a compartment wall or compartment
floor.
Locations of cavity barriers and · Around meter boxes in external walls.
· Around service penetrations in external walls e.g. extract duct or boiler flue.
open perpends · To sub-divide extensive cavities; please refer to National Regulations for
specific requirements.
Note: Lightweight cladding systems

will require a cavity barrier along the
Cavity barrier installation
bottom of the cavity
Cavity barriers/firestopping Cavity barriers shall be installed:
at head of party wall
Note: Cavity barriers may also be · So they fully close the cavity.
required between walls and floors Flats · So the ends are tightly butted (or adequately lapped in accordance with the
within the building, consult National manufacturers instructions) to form a continuous barrier.
Regulations for further guidance · Backed by solid timber studs, rails or floor joist at least 38mm wide.
· In accordance with manufacturer or independent certifier's guidance.
A cavity tray should be proved directly above a horizontal cavity barrier and lapped
at least 100mm behind the breather membrane (except at eaves and verges).
Cavity barriers are required Semi-detached Cavity barriers are required to prevent the spread of smoke and flame within
at eaves and verge house concealed spaces.
Cavity barriers may be constructed from:
· Steel at least 0.5mm thick.

· Timber at least 38mm thick.
Scotland and Northern Ireland Scotland & · Proprietary 3rd party approved mineral wool product.
require through ventilation with · Calcium silicate, cement-based or gypsum-based board at least 12mm thick.
Northern Ireland · An independently assessed and certified proprietary product.
open perpends at the base and
head of the external wall cavity
Timber cavity barriers should be protected from masonry cladding by the use of a
DPC. The cavity face of the barrier should be left uncovered to allow drainage and
ventilation of the timber. The use of timber cavity barriers around openings allows
Scotland and Northern Ireland
for effective sealing to be installed between them and the opening frame.
require cavity barriers at
intermediate floors
Cavity tray above horizontal cavity barrier
Cavity barriers are required at

the junction of party floors Breather membrane
and external walls (flats)
DPC cavity tray lapped
100mm behind breather
Open perpends installed at
Open perpends installed membrane
maximum 900 mm centres Note: Insulation and
at maximum 1350 mm centres
with at least two over each opening lining materials have
to drain and ventilate external
not been shown for
wall cavity
clarity
Open perpend
Cavity barriers are required at the
Cavity barrier
Electric or gas meter box junction of the external wall and
recessed into cladding party wall Through ventilation provided
in Scotland and Northern
Ireland with additional open
Cavity barriers are required perpends
around the edges of all
openings
EXTERNAL WALLS
Services 20202020
Limited 140
140
EXTERNAL WALLS
6.3.12 TIMBER
6.3.12 TIMBER FRAME
FRAME -- BRICK
BRICKCLAD:
CLAD:Masonry
Masonrycladding
cladding
Masonry cladding Location of wall ties
Timber frame external walls should be finished externally with a cladding system, which may take the
form of masonry or a lightweight rainscreen system. Regardless of the cladding system used, all external
wall claddings should be separated from the timber frame structure by a drained and ventilated cavity. In
some locations, for example close to boundaries, national regulations require claddings to provide fire
resistance to the structure from the outside in. Where a masonry cladding is proposed the vertical
Top row of ties should be 3 courses (maximum
loadings from the masonry cladding must not be supported by the timber frame structure.
225mm) below top of brickwork
Self supporting masonry claddings
Horizontal cavity barrier above opening may be Wall tie laid to Timber
slight slope frame
Self supporting masonry claddings should be connected to the timber frame using walls ties, wall ties omitted with steel lintel as substitute. Some steel
should meet the following provisions: lintels require a timber pinch batten, and/or may
require ends closing: refer to manufacturers' details
· Comply with BS EN 845: Specification for ancillary components for masonry, ties, tension straps,
hangers, and brackets. Cavity barrier and batten fixing for window (DPC
· Be constructed from austenitic stainless steel. omitted for clarity)
· Accommodate all anticipated differential movement.
· The overall length of the wall ties must be of adequate length to provide a minimum 50mm clear
cavity and ensure there is at least a 62.5mm overlap onto the leaf of the masonry so that it will
achieve a 50mm minimum length of bedding on the mortar. External Internal
· Be installed into solid timber studs, not just through sheathing.
· Additional studs should be provided in the timber frame structure for wall ties at vertical movement
joints and around openings in the masonry cladding.
· Angled to drain moisture away from the timber frame even after differential movement has occurred.
· Installed at a maximum of 300mm centres vertically and 225mm horizontally around openings and
movement joints.
· Installed within 225mm of the head of the wall.
· Wall tie density: For buildings up to three storeys in height wall ties should be installed at a minimum
density of 4.4/m² (a maximum of 375mm vertically with studs at 600mm centres and a maximum of
525mm vertically where studs are at 400mm centres). A tie density of 4.4 ties/m2 may be suitable
for buildings on flat sites within towns and cities anywhere in the UK, except the north western
fringes of Scotland and Ireland (where the basic wind speed exceeds 25 m/sec) and any areas
where the site is at an altitude of 150 m or more above sea level. An increased wall tie density may
be required in exposed locations or for buildings higher than three storeys in height, the actual
performance required for each site location or building should be determined by a suitably qualified

The location of the solid timber studs should be
clearly marked on the outer face of the breather
· Be provided with full height open perpends at a maximum of 1350mm centres or equivalent
membrane to ensure that cladding fixings are installed
open area.
into the solid timber
· Be provided in the brick or block course below the lowest timber sole plate above external finished
· Be provided to ensure drainage and ventilation to each external wall concealed space directly above
horizontal cavity barriers/trays. Ties fixed at sides of openings spaced at no more
· Be installed over openings in the external wall cavity e.g. windows and doors at a maximum of than 300mm vertical centres and within 225mm of
900mm centres. opening. Double stud may be necessary to provide
· Maintain a minimum 50mm clear cavity with care taken to reduce mortar droppings at the base of fixing for ties and for cavity barriers
the wall.
Weep-holes alone are unsuitable for timber frame construction, and open perpends should be used. When studs are at 600mm centres, vertical dimension
Proprietary open perpend inserts are available with insect screening incorporated. Their equivalent open should be 375mm maximum (i.e. every 5 courses).
area must be considered and installation centres reduced accordingly. When studs are at 400mm centres, vertical dimension
may be 525mm maximum (i.e. every 7 courses).
Cavity drainage and ventilation should provide an open area of not less than 500mm² per metre run: Subject to site specific conditions, the density of ties
may need to be increased
· At the base of the external wall concealed space. DPC
· Above horizontal cavity barriers/trays.
· Over openings in the external wall cavity, e.g. windows and doors. Flexible ties must be fixed to studs in the panel through
sheathing and breather membrane
· Allowing differential movement to occur while retaining an adequate gap.
· With openings protected by a mesh to prevent the passage of insects. First set of ties maximum 300mm above DPC line
Masonry cladding - Brick suitability Open perpends at maximum 1350mm centres; in the
brick course below the lowest timber
· Facing bricks must have a suitable level of durability and particular attention should be paid to the
bricks resistance to frost and moisture.
· Bricks should be capable of supporting proposed loads. Max 1350mm
· Bricks should comply with BS EN771 and PD 6697. centres Bottom rail
· Frost resistant bricks should be used in areas of prolonged frost. Sole plate
Further guidance is available in 'Appendix C - Materials, Products, and Building Systems'.
©©
EXTERNAL WALLS
6.3.13
6.3.13 TIMBER FRAME
TIMBER FRAME- -BRICK
BRICKCLAD:
CLAD: Openings
Openings ininexternal
externalwalls
walls
Lintels
Window and door installations Typical window reveal detail (normal exposure) · The lintel should be the correct length and width for the opening
and cavity width, the bearing length should be at least 150mm.
Please refer to the 'Windows and Doors' guidance for installation requirements · Do not let masonry overhang lintels by more than 25mm.
of frames including maximum gaps and fixings. · Continuity of the masonry bond should be maintained at supports
VCL for beams and lintels.
Typical vertical section through window opening Inner leaf Do not:
Vertical DPC lapped with
VCL in window reveal · Support lintels and beams on short lengths of cut blocks or
make-up pieces.
Cavity tray lapped up 100mm
Window fixing strap · Apply load to lintels or beams before the masonry supporting has
hardened.
behind breather membrane
Breather membrane
Steel lintel (retaining clips
when required) Correct method of brick
Moisture and air tightness
seal between window frame
bond around lintels
and window reveal/DPC
opening
The frame should overlap the
cavity by a minimum of 30mm
DPC between timber cavity barrier

and masonry cladding returned into
window reveal and lapped with VCL
Outer leaf
Allowance for differential Wall tie

movement
Typical rebated window frame detail for areas
Cavity barrier around of very severe exposure
window opening
Breather membrane Inner leaf
Wall tie
Note: Internal linings have not

been shown for clarity. A service Moisture and air tightness
void with additional insulation seal between window frame
may be specified and window reveal/DPC
Supporting masonry fully coursed
Openings Vertical DPC into the wall - accepted.
All openings including doors, windows, flues and ventilation ducts, should be
designed and constructed to maintain: Incorrect method of brick
Fire performance: bond around lintels
· Internal reveals require equal fire resistance to the rest of the structure.
· Window fixing straps should not compromise the integrity of any
fire-resistant reveal linings. Appropriate 'non hardening'
· Cavity barriers should be installed in the external wall cavity around the mastic sealant to be provided
perimeter of openings.
between frame and masonry Outer leaf
· If profiled steel lintels are used as cavity barriers, triangular gaps behind
lintels, which occur at each end, should be closed with careful positioning of reveal 25mm Breather membrane
adjacent cavity barriers.
DPC between timber cavity
Acoustic performance: barrier and masonry
· Seal gaps between timber frame wall and the element being installed into 25mm rebate to allow for cladding returned into
the opening. building tolerance and window reveal and lapped
· The element being installed into the opening may have a minimum acoustic window fixing tolerance
requirement. with VCL
Weather tightness and thermal performance, including thermal bridging and air When installing window/door frames in a checked rebate, allow for the frame to be deeper:
tightness:
· The element being installed into the opening is likely to have a minimum · To accommodate the 25mm rebate, and;
thermal performance. · To allow for opening lights to open clear of the masonry/render.
· Seal gaps between the timber frame wall and the element being installed
into the opening to provide thermal performance, weather tightness and air
tightness. Windows and doors
· Cavity trays should be installed over the heads of all openings and lapped
behind the breather membrane by a minimum of 100mm. A flashing may be In areas of very severe exposure, checked rebates should be provided. The frame should be set
acceptable for some types of claddings. Supporting masonry not fully
back behind the outer leaf and should overlap.
· Lap cavity barrier DPC with internal VCL around openings. Where no DPC coursed into the wall - not accepted
is used, breather membrane should be lapped with internal VCL.
For further information on windows and doors please refer to the 'Windows and Doors' section.

EXTERNAL WALLS
6.3.14 TIMBER
6.3.14 TIMBER FRAME
FRAME -- BRICK
BRICKCLAD:
CLAD:Feature
Featurestone surrounds
stone to openings
and heads should not A soft joint is required between the
project into the cavity and top of the head and the steel support
sections) DPC/slip plane
over stool
Head to be fully bedded on jamb DPC full length and

width of sill bed
Stainless steel dovetail Stainless steel dowel drilled equally
anchor into head and jamb/mullion

and bottom with stainless When stone heads are being used, it
steel pins. Stainless steel is advisable to double up the cavity
frame-type cramps can trays - with one above the stone
also be used to give extra head to provide stop-ends and
stability at jambs weep-holes Note: The insulated cavity closer must also be fire
resistant unless an additional method of fire resisting
Cast stone jambs and mullions cavity closure is also provided that meets Building
Regulations.
Mortar:
jambs should be bedded into
stone should comply with the
adjacent mortar joints as the
relevant British Standards
for sand, lime, and cement
as set out in BS 5390

over stool

structure

Sills

©©
EXTERNAL WALLS
6.3.15TIMBER
6.3.15 TIMBER FRAME- BRICK
FRAME - BRICKCLAD:
CLAD: Allowing
Allowing for
formovement
movementininexternal
externalmasonry
masonry
spacing of openings

Vertical movement joints should be provided to the outer leaf of cavity walls as indicated in the table
below. The first joint from a return should be no more than half the dimension indicated in the table.
Wall ties should be provided at
Movement joints below the Damp Proof Course (DPC) should also be provided at major changes in
foundation level and at changes in foundation design. Wall ties at a maximum of 300mm vertical 300mm maximum vertical
centres, and 225mm horizontally, should be provided on each side of movement joints. spacing either side of the
expansion joint
Compressible filler, such as polyurethane foam, should be used to form the joint and be sealed to
prevent water penetration.
When sealants are used in proximity with stone it is important to select a non-oil-based sealant to
help prevent any staining to the stone.
Elastic sealants (type E) are suitable as they allow for reversible movement. Where a back-up
material is used to control the sealant depth, it will also provide a compressible space into which the
sealant can deform.
Where a backing material is used, the following must be considered:
· The material is compatible with the sealant.

· Allows sufficient flexibility so not to impede lateral movement (compressible to about 50% of its
original thickness), fibreboard is not acceptable.
The use of bed joint reinforcement may allow the distance between expansion joints to be
increased, however this should be designed by a Structural Engineer.
Material Normal spacing Joint thickness Wall ties should be provided Movement joint.
Wall ties
Clay brickwork 12m 15mm spacing of the movement joint.
(spacing up to 15m may be
possible if sufficient restraint
is provided - consult Movement joints below DPC Typical movement joint detail
designer)
15mm movement Polysulphide
Calcium silicate 7.5-9m 10mm joint sealant
Movement joint Compressible
Concrete brickwork (1) 6m 10mm filler
Note:
The first joint from a return should be not more than half the dimension indicated in the table.
DPC
Where the finished ground
level is 600mm or greater
below the horizontal DPC, the
movement joint should be
600mm continued within the external
leaf of the sub structure
External ground level Stainless steel wall ties at

225mm centres vertically, and
225mm spacing horizontally
© MD©Insurance
Services Limited
Limited 2020 2020 144144 EXTERNAL WALLS
EXTERNAL WALLS
6.3.16 TIMBER
6.3.16 TIMBERFRAME
FRAME -- BRICK
BRICK CLAD:
CLAD:Cavity
Cavitytrays
trays
used in conjunction with lintels above openings, to protect the top surface of cavity insulation at horizontal cavity barriers and where the cavity is bridged.
Cavity trays should rise at
least 150mm from the Cavity trays are to be provided:
Breather outer to the inner leaf, be
membrane self-supporting or fully · Cavity trays are to be provided to comply with relevant regional Building Regulations.
supported and have joints · At all interruptions likely to direct rain water across the cavity, such as rectangular ducts, lintels and recessed meter boxes.
Minimum lintel lapped and sealed
· Above cavity insulation that is not taken to the top of the wall, unless that area of wall is protected by impervious cladding.
bearing 150mm
tray.
· Continuously above lintels where openings are separated by short piers.
· Above openings where the lintel supports a brick soldier course.
Cavity trays to lap behind breather Ring beams or floor slabs that partially bridge the cavity, e.g. podium decks or when dimensional accuracy cannot be guaranteed, should be protected by a
membrane by at least 100mm continuous cavity tray.
Preformed stop end Weep-holes

bonded to cavity tray
Continuous cavity tray over clipped to lintel to coincide Weep-holes must be installed at no more than 900mm centres to drain water from cavity trays and from the concrete cavity infill at ground level.
two openings and a small pier with perpend weephole
At least two weep-holes must be provided to drain cavity trays above openings.
Cavity trays should be continuous Weep holes at maximum centres of Weep-holes in exposure zones 3 and 4 should be designed to prevent ingress of wind-driven rain (including ground level).
short piers 900mm Stop-ends
Proprietary elements, such as ventilators, soil pipes, etc. which perforate the building envelope should be installed and sealed to prevent ingress of moisture or
600mm Proprietary cavity tray systems
At stepped and lower storey abutments, and around corners in low rise external walls, a proprietary cavity tray system should be used.
over piers less than
600mm wide
Details of flashing can be found in the 'Roofs' Flat roof abutment cavity tray construction Cavity tray and lintel
Installation of section
stepped cavity tray
Preformed cavity trays should be used for
stepped cavity tray details. Stepped cavity trays Cavity tray (minimum height
to lap behind breather membrane by at least within cavity of 150mm)
100mm. Additional measures may be needed
to ensure the breather membrane adequately Weep holes must be installed at
laps the tray to prevent moisture ingress behind no more than 900mm centres to
the stepped cavity tray drain water from the cavity trays.
At least two weep holes must be Cavity tray lapped
Profile line provided to drain cavity trays over up 100mm behind
openings breather membrane
against profile
End tray to have Mortar should be raked out under Where the timber frame continues
two stop ends the cavity tray to a depth of 25mm above an abutment, adequate
and weep hole Lintel
drainage and ventilation should
Steps and staggers be provided
Particular care is needed in adequately Cavity barrier
preventing the ingress of water in a terrace of Lead cover flashing linked under around window
buildings with steps and staggers. A the cavity tray opening
proprietary cavity tray system should be used.
Stepped cavity trays are required at all pitched Roof covering to be taken up Weephole
Profile depth calculated (stepped) roof abutments with external cavity behind cover flashing for a
by the depth of batten + walls, e.g. attached garages or staggered minimum lap of 65mm
the depth of the tile + terraces. The bottom (last) cavity tray must be
the height of the flashing supplied with two stop-ends and an Tilting fillet to support roof
associated weep-hole, allowing all water to covering at junction
escape over the lower roof covering. For
masonry, lead cover flashings should be Roof structure as per design
linked into the cavity tray (lapped in below)

EXTERNAL WALLS
6.3.17 TIMBER
6.3.17 TIMBERFRAME
FRAME -- BRICK
BRICK CLAD:
CLAD:Allowing
Allowingforfordifferential movement
differential movement
Differential movement at floor zones Allowance for differential movement Anticipated differential movement
Differential vertical movement occurs as a result of compression, closing

of gaps and shrinkage of the timber frame structure and occurs during the Differential movement at the top of self
first 24 months following completion. Shrinkage occurs across the grain supporting elements such as masonry or
and is due to a reduction in the moisture content of timber elements. The steel lift shafts must be considered
shrinkage of plates, rails, binders, floor and roof joists should be
considered. The building should be designed to ensure that differential Engineered timber Solid timber
movement occurs evenly to external elevations and the internal structure.
39 mm at bottom 50 mm at bottom
Anticipated differential movement can be calculated using the allowance of openings at of openings at eaves
of 1mm for every 38mm of horizontal cross grain timber. As solid timber eaves and verge and verge
joists contribute significantly to anticipated differential movement,
engineered timber joists should be considered where it is desirable to
reduce differential movement.
Allowance for
Appropriate allowances must be made for differential movement to occur differential Cavity barrier 33 mm at bottom 48 mm at bottom
without causing damage to the building. movement of openings at of openings at
Wall tie fifth floor level fifth floor level
Engineered Timber Solid Timber Open perpend
required in Scotland
and Northern Ireland
38 38 to provide through
225 super-dry or
ventilation 27 mm at bottom 39 mm at bottom
engineered 225 solid of openings at of openings at
timber timber fourth floor level fourth floor level
38 38
38 38
225 mm solid timber = 6 mm
of openings at of openings at
225 mm engineered timber = 2 - 3 mm
differential movement depending on differential movement. third floor level third floor level
tightness of build.
Expect 9 mm movement per storey, or
Expect 6 mm movement per storey, or 7 10 mm per storey if a locator plate is
mm per storey if a locator plate is used used on upper stories.
on upper stories.
Note: when solid timber platform frame
Note: when super-dry timber or ground floor is used, add 7 mm to the
engineered timber platform frame differential movement allowances
ground floor is used, add 3 - 4 mm quoted. 15 mm at bottom 21 mm at bottom
(depending on tightness of build) to the of openings at of openings at
differential movement allowances
quoted. second floor level second floor level
If fillers or seals are to be installed into differential movement gaps their

fully compressed dimension, considering the area of the seal and force
required to compress it, must be added to calculate gap size. Materials
should be chosen to provide an effective weather tight seal dependent on 9 mm at bottom 12 mm at bottom
whether they are to be subjected to compression, expansion, or shear of openings at of openings at
forces. Cover strips may also be used. first floor level first floor level
Self supporting claddings (masonry)
Any material or component attached to the timber superstructure that

overhangs the brick or blockwork (e.g. cladding attached to the timber
Note: Internal linings have not been 3 mm at bottom 3 mm at bottom
frame, window sills, roof eaves, and verges) or projects through the
shown for clarity. A service void with of openings at of openings at
masonry (e.g. balcony supports, flues, extractor fan vents, or overflow Allowance for
additional insulation may be specified ground floor level ground floor level
pipes) should have a clear gap beneath and at the top of the masonry differential
cladding to allow differential movement to take place, thus avoiding movement
damage to the components or cladding.
Wall tie
Gap sizes should allow for anticipated differential movement while allowing
for drainage and ventilation requirements. Insect infestation should be Note: Services that are rigid from the
avoided by using screens to cover gaps exceeding 4mm. foundations, e.g. soil stack, dry riser, gas and
Allowance for differential
water, require differential movement gaps
movement at lift door/threshold
above the service entry. The gaps should be
equal to those recommended for the bottom of
openings at the appropriate floor level
EXTERNAL WALLS
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 146
146
EXTERNAL WALLS
6.3.18 TIMBER
6.3.18 TIMBERFRAME
FRAME -- BRICK
BRICK CLAD:
CLAD:Allowing
Allowingforfor
Differential movement at services Differential movement at cantilevered overhang
Lightweight cladding
Cavity tray lapped system fixed to
up 100mm behind timber frame
breather membrane
Noggings to
frame opening
Note: insulation and linings
Cavity barrier: not shown for clarity
Cavity barrier
Drainage and
ventilation should
Flange be maintained
Non-combustible movement
sleeve. Extend to form
cavity barrier around
Insect mesh Head binder
opening, or insert
separate cavity barriers Top rail
around the opening
Cavity barrier
Soffit cladding
Boiler flue
Breather membrane
Non-combustible lining
board behind boiler to
specification
Allowance for
Note: Internal linings and insulation Differential movement at verge
differential
has not been shown for clarity. A
movement
service void may be specified.
Sufficient support and fixings for
boiler may be provided with noggings
or board material between studs or
service void battens. The installation
Gable ladder
of extractor vents is similar
Cavity barrier
Allowance for
Services
Rigid services within the timber frame structure also require an equal allowance for differential movement, as
shown. Examples include copper gas and water pipes, dry risers, internal downpipes, SVP's, and blockwork lift Open perpend required Wall tie
shafts. While gap allowances externally are allowed below, for example, a sill, when a branch comes off a rigid in Scotland and Northern
stack internally, the gap needs to be left above a service to allow the timber frame to drop around it. Ireland to provide
through ventilation
Note: Insulation and walls linings have not

been shown for clarity

EXTERNAL WALLS
6.3.19 TIMBER
6.3.19 TIMBERFRAME
FRAME -- BRICK
BRICK CLAD:
CLAD:Parapet
Parapetconstruction
construction
Capping to be mechanically fixed into

timber frame. It is important to ensure the
Coping detail for up to 1100mm from roof coping system is installed as per Parapet coping detail for up to 300mm
Capping to be mechanically fixed into timber
manufacturers specification including all
frame. It is important to ensure system is
ancillary components e.g. gaskets.
installed as per manufacturers specification
The mechanical fixings where
Max height of parapet from roof Lightweight proprietary capping. including all ancillary components e.g. gaskets.
penetrating the DPC should either be
surface to capping is limited to Stone copings on timber frame The mechanical fixings where penetrating the
shot fired (instant seal - as timber frame
1100mm. Stud and masonry must are not recommended. DPC should either be shot fired (instant seal -
sole plates) or carefully sealed to avoid
be designed to be structurally The vertical down stand of the capping Lightweight proprietary capping. as timber frame sole plates) or carefully sealed
The vertical down stand of the moisture penetration to the structure
stable to resist horizontal forces should extend past the brickwork Stone copings on timber frame to avoid moisture penetration to the structure
capping should extend past the below. The DPC should be made
are not recommended below. The DPC should be made continuous
brickwork. continuous by lapping over fixings. The
Water boiled plywood plate Roof covering to extend over parapet by lapping over fixings. The pitch of the
pitch of the capping must be a minimum
capping must be a minimum of 5°
of 5° Water boiled plywood plate
Timber cavity closer
Allowance for movement. The
Allowance for movement. The gap size will be dependent on the DPC minimum 150mm above roof finish
gap size will be dependent on the DPC must be continuous for the length of
the parapet and joints suitably lapped anticipated differential movement
anticipated differential movement between the timber frame and Full width damp proof courses should be
between the timber frame and the Full width damp proof courses should be the masonry provided and be fully supported to avoid
Max
masonry provided and be fully supported to avoid drooping and gaps forming at joints
Min 40mm overhang required 300mm
drooping and gaps forming at joints
Min 40mm overhang required
Breather membrane Waterproof membrane. Minimum
Drained and vented cavity to be Timber cavity closer membrane upstand of 150mm
provided, cavity width is
Impervious cladding
dependent on the cladding type
(not render) Breather membrane
Vertical batten
Breather membrane
Minimum air/drainage gap of 15mm

at this location
Angle fillet recommended
Wall tie Breather membrane is to lap the Wall tie
waterproof membrane by a minimum
75mm Open perp vents
Insect mesh Cavity tray
Waterproof membrane. Cavity barrier

Minimum membrane
Angle fillet recommended Max upstand of 150mm
200mm
VCL
Open perp vents
Cavity tray
Cavity barrier
Parapets
· The parapet should be designed to accommodate differential movement, remain structurally stable,
and allow suitable structural support of the lightweight coping.
· The coping should be mechanically fixed to the timber frame and the fixings should be suitable for the
exposure and anticipated wind loadings.
· If the capping is secret fixed, each capping piece should be provided with at least 2 security fixings.
VCL
EXTERNAL WALLS
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 148
148
EXTERNAL WALLS
6.3.20 TIMBER
6.3.20 TIMBERFRAME
FRAME -- BRICK
BRICK CLAD:
CLAD:Corbelling
Corbellingand
andspandrel panel
spandrel requirements
panel requirements
Feature brick corbelling Gable spandrel panels
The extent of corbelling of masonry should not exceed that The gable spandrel panel should be suitably designed to transmit loads to the roof structure and down through the timber frame.
Reinforced corbels should be designed by a Charted
It is important that gable spandrel panels are designed to transmit these loads to the roof structure via lateral restraints and vertically down to the timber
frame. A full design with structural calculations be provided.
No decrease in thickness The timber frame designer should provide details of the lateral resistant to the gable spandrel panel, including details of the restraint used and the fixings
on opposite side of corbel
should be provided.
General references used in this section
· BS EN 1995-1-1: 2004+A1: 2008 Eurocode 5 Design of timber structures. General: Common rules and rules for buildings.
· BS 5268-2: 2002 Structural use of timber. Code of Practice for permissible stress design, materials and workmanship.
· BS 5268-3: 2006 Structural use of timber. Code of Practice for trussed rafter roofs.
· BS 5268-4 Section 4.1: 1978 Structural use of timber. Part 4 Fire resistance of timber structures. Section 4.1 Recommendations for calculating fire
resistance of timber members.
resistance of timber stud walls and joisted floor constructions.
· BS 5268-6.1: 1996 Structural use of timber. Code of Practice for timber frame walls. Dwellings not exceeding seven storeys.
· BS 5268-6.2: 2001 Structural use of timber. Code of Practice for timber frame walls. Buildings other than dwellings not exceeding four storeys.
· BS EN 14081-1: 2005 Timber structures. Strength graded structural timber with rectangular cross section. General requirements.
· BS 8417: 2003 Preservation of timber. Recommendations.
· BS EN 13986: 2006 Wood-based panels for use in construction. Characteristics, evaluation of conformity and marking.
· BS EN 300: 2006 Orientated strand boards (OSB). Definitions, classification and specifications.
· BS EN 636: 2003 Plywood. Specifications.
· BS EN 622-4: 2009 Fibreboards - Specifications. Requirements for softboards.
· BS EN 622-3: 2004 Fibreboards - Specifications. Requirements for medium boards.
· BS EN 622-2: 2004 Fibreboards - Specifications. Requirements for hardboards.
· BS 4016: 1997 Specification for flexible building membranes (breather type).
· BS EN 845-1: 2003+A1: 2008 Specification for ancillary components for masonry. Ties, tension straps, hangers and brackets.
· EN 14732: 2011 Timber structures. Prefabricated wall, floor and roof elements. Requirements Draft for comment.
T
Maximum corbel T/3

EXTERNAL WALLS
6. 6.4
Timber Frame -
External Rendered Masonry Clad
Walls

6.4.1 TIMBER
6.4.1 TIMBERFRAME
FRAME- -RENDERED
RENDERED MASONRY
MASONRYCLAD:
CLAD:General
Generalspecifications
specifications
Introduction Treatment of structural timber
This Guidance refers to 'conventional' timber frame open* panel systems made off-site under factory conditions. Such panel systems are required to be All load-bearing timber components shall be either naturally durable or treated in accordance with BS 8417: Preservation of wood code of practice.
manufactured and erected on-site under quality assured systems and be either Silver or Gold members of the Structural Timber Association or BM Sole plates and load-bearing timber studwork are considered to be in 'Use Class 2'. Sole plates are normally considered to be included in 'Service
TRADA registered. Factor Code C', while load-bearing timber studwork is included in 'Service Factor Code B'.
*Open panel systems are defined as systems which may include the external breather membrane and sheathing board, insulation internally All structural timber should be treated with a preservative suitable for the 'Use Class' and 'Service Factor' applicable to its use.
between the studs and a transparent Vapour Control Layer (VCL) which is left unfixed in order that the connections between panels can be viewed upon
inspection. Where treated timber is cut, the exposed end will not be protected by the original preservative treatment. When treated timbers are cut in the factory
or on site, the cut ends shall be re-treated with a preservative compatible with the original treatment used, this treatment should be coloured to allow
Timber frame panels which arrive to site with additional elements e.g. external cladding or a non-transparent VCL will need to undergo our in easy checking on site.
house Warranty Approval process.
Timber frame external walls are generally considered to consist of load-bearing solid timber studs at regular centres with insulation between them, lined Manufacture
with a structural sheathing board, breather membrane, drained cavity and cladding. A VCL and fire-resistant linings are provided to the internal finishes.
Timber
Alternatively, any timber frame kit, system or wall panel that has been approved via the Warranty product approval process will be acceptable. All structural timber components should be specified in accordance with this Technical Manual.
Structural design Panel moisture content

All structural timber components should be at a moisture content of 20% or less at the time of manufacture. Once panels are manufactured, they
Wind, roof and floor loads should be considered in the design and all timber frame structures shall be designed in accordance with Eurocode 5. Structures should either be stored in a covered storage area, or loosely covered with a water proof sheet material.
designed in accordance with BS 5268 may still be acceptable, although these standards have now been superseded by Eurocode 5.
Manufacturing tolerances
General specifications Based on the tolerances given in prEN 14732 (dated 17/12/2013) wall panels shall be manufactured to the following tolerances:
Bespoke timber frame open panel systems that do not have such QA procedures as the 'conventional' timber frame open panel systems described in this · Length: +3mm, -3mm.
document will need either third-party accreditation or independent Structural Engineer supervision and monitoring of the installation, erection and · Height: +/-2mm.
completion (sign off) of the system. All load-bearing timbers will have to be preservative treated in accordance with BS 8417 according to their position · Diagonals should be equal, acceptable deviation is +/-5mm.
within the frame, and evidence of treatment must be provided. · Opening dimensions: 0mm, +5mm.
The structural engineer must confirm, in writing prior to sign off, that the timber frame system has been installed:
· In accordance with the design. Studs
· In accordance with the structural calculations provided. Wall panels should be designed to minimise thermal bridging. Gaps between studs within the wall panel and at wall panel junctions should be large
· All structural timbers are appropriately preservative treated in accordance with BS 8417. enough to allow the installation of insulation.
· That a trained contractor, experienced in the erection of timber frame panels, has been employed.
Site preparation and erection
Green air dried or seasoned oak is not acceptable for use in external wall, window/door construction, frame or internal wall or roof constructions,
regardless of whether it forms part of the waterproof envelope or not. Projects incorporating 'green Oak' will not be acceptable for Warranty cover. Green Pre-commencement
Oak is defined for Warranty purposes as 'Oak that has been freshly cut or air dried'.
To allow the building to be constructed as designed all necessary drawings, specifications and fixing schedules shall be provided to site before work
Certified kiln dried Oak with a certified moisture content of 12% may be acceptable for parts of the structure where the oak does not form part of the commences.
waterproof envelope, or movement in the oak frame will not affect the waterproof envelope.
Foundations
Structurally Insulated Panels (SIPs) are a form of stressed skin composite panel. Only systems with independent third-party certification will meet the It is important that the tight tolerances for timber frame are understood, getting the location and level of the foundation correct is one of the most
Warranty requirements. important parts of the build process.
Quality assurance The foundations or upstands that support the timber frame should be set out to the dimensions noted on the timber frame drawings:
· Within +/-10mm in length, width and line.

All timber frame Designers, Manufacturers, and Erectors should possess current certification from at least one of the following quality assurance schemes:
· BM TRADA QMark for timber frame. · Diagonals should be within +/-5mm up to 10m, and +/-10mm more than 10m.
· Gold or Silver member of the Structural Timber Association. · Levelled to +/-5mm from datum.
· ISO 9001 to cover the manufacture of the timber frame panels.
· CE Marking when EN 14732 is published. Timber frame delivery and storage
· Other relevant third party quality assurance scheme. Timber frame components should be:
Timber specifications · Carefully unloaded to avoid damage or distortion of components.
· Stored off the ground on an adequate number of level bearers.
Grading of structural timber · Loosely covered with a waterproof membrane to allow protection from moisture while allowing ventilation if they are not to be used for a
All structural timber whether machine or visually graded shall be graded in accordance with BS EN 14081: Timber structures - Strength graded structural prolonged period.
timber with rectangular cross section. · Unwrapped if tightly bound in polythene and loosely recovered with a waterproof membrane to allow ventilation.
All load-bearing solid timber studs, rails, binders and sole plates should be of a minimum dry graded C16. · Below 20% moisture content.
· Confirmed as square by sample checking for equal diagonal measurements, lengths and heights.
Typical grading stamp
Timber frame erection
Certification body Company Species or species
or logo mark reference group Wall panel erection tolerances
Wall panels should be erected to the tolerances as per the 'Tolerances' section:
· +/-10mm from plumb per storey height.

·
1234/5678 WPPA ·
+/-10mm from plumb over the full height of the building.
+/-3mm from line of sole plate, with maximum +/-5mm deviation from drawing.
BM TRADA · +/-5mm from line at mid height of wall panel.
Producer Company
·
Logo GS ·
Inside faces of adjacent wall panels should be flush.
Adjacent wall panels should be tightly butted.
DRY C16
BS 4978
EN 14081 GRADED M
Standard Timber condition: Machine
reference DRY graded
© MD
EXTERNAL WALLS
6.4.2
6.4.2 TIMBERFRAME
TIMBER FRAME -- RENDERED
RENDERED MASONRY
MASONRYCLAD:
CLAD:Masonry
Masonrycladding
cladding
Exposure
and moisture. Further information can be found in 'Appendix C - Material, Products, and Building Systems'.
Colour variation of bricks below DPC

Masonry walls There is usually a variation in the colour of bricks of the same style. To prevent patching of colour, it is recommended that at
Protection
saturated by rainwater or dry out too quickly in hot weather, are protected against frost attack, the risk of efflorescence and line Frogs and perforations
staining and movement problems are reduced. Frogged bricks have a depression in the face of the brick. Normally, they should be laid with the major depression, or frog,
facing up so that it is fully filled with mortar during laying. This ensures optimum strength, helps to increase the mass of the
Any temporary cover should not disturb the new masonry. wall (to give good sound insulation) and prevents the possibility of standing water within the structure, which could freeze.
Protection of masonry Care should be taken with the use of perforated bricks where the exposure rating of the wall is high, as water
Efflorescence

Frost attack
Mortar
General
required by the design.
Working in adverse weather Batching

Keep batching and mixing equipment clean to avoid contamination with materials used previously, mortar should be mixed by
machine, or use ready mixed retarded mortars.
Precautions should be taken when necessary to maintain the temperature of bricks, blocks and mortar above 3°C. The use of
anti-freeze as a frost resistant additive in mortar is not permitted. Further guidance can be found in 'Appendix C - Material, Mixing
Products, and Building Systems'. Mortar should be carefully and consistently proportioned and then thoroughly mixed using a mechanical mixer, except for very
small quantities.
reduce suction. Low absorption bricks, i.e. engineering bricks, should not be wetted. For calcium silicate and concrete units, Stability during construction
account should masonry units or completed work be saturated with water. Gable walls should be appropriately propped prior to the construction of any roof. When a floor or roof slab of a building is used
Brick and block suitability
Non-rendered blockwork
All external blockwork should be rendered or otherwise finished with a cladding that is appropriately durable, unless the block
manufacturer can provide third-party certification confirming that the blockwork can be left unfinished, or finished in an
alternative way.
EXTERNAL WALLS
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 152
152
EXTERNAL WALLS
6.4.3
6.4.3 TIMBERFRAME
RENDERED MASONRY
MASONRYCLAD:
CLAD:Site location
Site andand
location exposure
exposure
Dornoch
The design and construction of external walls should be suitable for the site specific exposure location. Inverness
Shetland Orkney
Islands Islands
Wind-driven rain Aberdeen
To ascertain the risk relating to wind-driven rain, the following should be determined: Exposure zones Exposure to wind driven
Perth
· The exposure to wind-driven rain. Dundee
Stirling
· The correct type of construction, including the correct application of insulation.
· The correct level of workmanship and design detailing, particularly around window and door Edinburgh Dunbar Very severe 100 or more
openings. Glasgow
Severe 56.5 to less than 100
Ayr
Additional requirements in a coastal location Londonderry Moderate 33 to less than 56.5

Where developments are within a coastal location additional Warranty requirements should be met. Newcastle
Dungannon Carlisle
Belfast
Workington Note:
For the purpose of this Technical Manual we are considering sites within 5Km inland from the shore line Alston
Middlesbrough
or sites located in 'tidal' estrine areas where they are within 5km of the general shoreline. Darlington Variations to the exposure shown on the
Whitby map can only be made by site-specific
Further information on Warranty requirements within a coastal location can be found in 'Appendix B - Ripon
exposure of walls to wind driven rain"
Coastal Locations'. York and the table above.
Hebden Bridge
Skelmersdale Hull
Manchester
Liverpool
Doncaster Grimsby
Sheffield
Stafford Nottingham
Shrewsbury
Leicester
Birmingham
Norwich
Brecon Northampton
Cambridge
Gloucester
Cardiff
Swindon
Bristol London
Staines
Gatwick
Exeter Dover
Poole Southampton
Plymouth
Brighton

EXTERNAL WALLS
6.4.4
6.4.4 TIMBERFRAME
RENDERED MASONRY
MASONRYCLAD:
CLAD:Substructure
Substructureexternal walls
external walls
Ground supported floor - no sub floor ventilation

have not been shown
Key points: Construction below DPC for clarity. A service
void may be specified
construction in accordance with BS EN 771-1 and PD 6697. Typical use of 'bell cast'
formed in render to prevent
bridging of the DPC VCL lapped with
DPC and DPM
durability classification (see BS EN 998-2).
Full height perpend
DPM
3. Cavities below ground should be filled with concrete ensuring there is a minimum gap of 225mm
DPC
4. Concrete for cavities should be GEN 1 grade and a consistence class S3.
Min
5. External ground levels should be a minimum of 150mm below DPC. 225mm
6. The compressive strength of the masonry units must meet the requirements of the relevant
Damp proof courses (DPC) Concrete cavity fill

to be a minimum
1. DPC's should be of a flexible material, be suitable for the intended use, the DPC should have 225mm below DPC
3. DPC's should be laid on a mortar bed and correctly lapped at junction and corners. The depth of
4. The DPC should not bridge any cavity unless it is acting as a cavity tray where a cavity is required
(e.g over a telescopic floor vent).
Suspended floor with ventilation provision
have not been shown
5. Damp proof membranes should be lapped with the DPC, DPM, and VCL by a minimum overlap of Typical use of 'bell cast' formed for clarity. A service
100mm. in render to prevent bridging of void may be specified
the DPC
Rendering VCL lapped with
Localised cavity tray and DPC and DPM
1. Rendering below DPC should only be carried out using a specialist render manufacturer's drainage over periscope DPC
specification. No render system should bridge the DPC and a proprietary uPVC bead or stainless vent omitted for clarity
steel bead should be used above and below where the renders meet at the DPC.
2. DPC should extend through the rendering system in between the bellcast beads or render stop Full height
system. perpend
3. For bellcasts, uPVC beads or stainless steel beads are acceptable.
Final ground level
Drainage and ventilation

Periscope vent
· Be provided with the use of full height open perpends at a maximum of 1350mm centres or
equivalent open area. Beam and
Min block flooring
· Be fitted in the brick or block course below the lowest timber sole plate above external finished 225mm
DPM
· Maintain a clear cavity with care taken to reduce mortar droppings at the base of the wall.
Where floor beams bear onto
Weep-holes alone are unsuitable for timber frame construction, and open perpends should be used. Concrete cavity fill substructure, a DPC underneath
Proprietary open perpends should be used. Proprietary open perpend inserts are available with insect to be a minimum should be provided
screening incorporated. Their equivalent open area must be considered and installation centres 225mm below DPC
reduced accordingly.
EXTERNAL WALLS
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 154
154
EXTERNAL WALLS
6.4.5
6.4.5 TIMBERFRAME
RENDERED MASONRY
MASONRYCLAD:
CLAD:Gas membrane
Gas details
membrane details
DPC
Periscope vent
Ventilation for timber frame structures Final ground level
It is important that whilst setting out the walls below ground that suitable forethought is given to the Minimum
subsequent construction above DPC. The cavity should be constructed so that the appropriate widths Maximum void 150mm
are achieved in line with the appropriate relevant regional Building Regulations and our Warranty 225mm
requirements. For timber frame structures early consideration of ventilation and drainage is key. Radon
barriers should be positioned in such a way to not impair or restrict ventilation to any part on the timber
frame structure.
Possible gas membrane detail Radon barrier
VCL Protective blinding If ground conditions require

Breather
membrane
Radon barrier to all areas of the timber frame
DPC
structure
Full height perpends
to provide ventilation
to the cavity
Possible gas membrane detail with raised VCL
Final ground level sole plate - Timber frame Breather
membrane
Perpend vents above DPC to Gas membrane also acts as
vent/drain cavity the cavity tray, with a clear
cavity of at least 150mm
below the sole plate
Periscope vent
Gas membrane
Minimum
Rigid cavity insulation board
void 150mm
with a third party product
approval for use as a full fill
cavity insulation (in between
Note: Propriety ventilation Final ground level
periscope vents). The board
products should provide must be suitable for positioning
adequate ventilation in in the cavity below ground level
accordance with section the
'Ground Floors' section
be located so they do not Minimum
Note: Insulation
inhibit drainage and ventilation void 150mm
below DPC should
have suitable third
structure
party certification
for use

structure

EXTERNAL WALLS
6.4.6 TIMBER
6.4.6 TIMBER FRAME
FRAME - RENDEREDMASONRY
- RENDERED MASONRY CLAD:
CLAD:Sole
Soleplate
platerequirements
requirements
Sole plates Locating sole plates
The sole plate is the first structural timber component installed on site. Its purpose is to set out the building, transfer loads to the foundations and provide a
Sole plate 10 mm maximum
level base for erecting the wall panels. All structural timber should be located at least 150mm above finished external ground level, except for localised
ramping (incorporating satisfactory drainage and ventilation detailing) for level threshold requirements. DPC packing without
Structural Engineer's
Breather Membrane
approval
The sole plate should be accurately levelled, located, and securely fixed to the substructure as specified by the Structural Engineer. Where no sole plate is lapped 25 mm below
specified, the following guidance applies equally to wall panel bottom rails. Timber sole plates should be preservative treated in accordance with BS 8417. bottom of sole plate
Sole plate may be
Further information on timber treatment can be found in 'Appendix C - Materials, Products, and Building Systems'.
levelled locally
+/- 10 mm tolerance between
with packers then
Location outer face of sole plate and edge
grouted and fixed
Sole plates should: of supporting base. Any
to Structural
projecting slab edges should be
· Be located so that all structural timber is at least 150mm above external ground level. The use of a masonry foundation kerb upstand may be an flashed over, or otherwise
Engineer's
appropriate method to achieve this. recommendations
· Be levelled to +/-5mm from datum. protected (Structural Engineer's
· Not overhang or be set back from the foundation edge by more than 10mm. tolerances may be greater)
· Be set out within +/-10mm in length and in line within +/-5mm, as defined by the timber frame drawings.
· Diagonals should be within +/-5mm up to 10m, and +/-10, for more than 10m.
Note: Internal and party wall timber sole plates should not be installed below internal finished floor level. Sole plate/foundation junctions
Damp Proof Course (DPC)
A DPC should: Note: Internal linings
have not been shown
· Be located directly below all timber sole plates. Wall tie for clarity. A service
· Overlap at DPC junctions by at least 100mm. void may be specified
· Be located flush to the outside edge of the sole plate. Wall frame
Sole plate
Fixings
Fixings should: VCL lapped with DPM
· Be installed to the Structural Engineers specification. and DPC
· Not damage the substructure or sole plates during installation. Full height open perpends to
· Be placed to provide adequate lateral restraint at door openings. provide drainage and ventilation
· Be specified with consideration for use with gas membranes where appropriate. to cavity
· Sole plates should be fixed to foundations with shot fired nails, proprietary sole plate fixings, anchors, brackets, or straps, as specified by a Structural
Engineer. Min
Breather membrane lapped
· All sole plate fixings and holding down products should be austenitic stainless steel. If stainless steel straps are used, they should be grade 1.4301 150mm
steel to BS EN 10088 and isolated from the studs with neoprene gaskets or similar. 25mm below sole plate
Ventilation
Regardless of the cladding system used, a cavity with provision for drainage and ventilation should be provided between the cladding and the timber frame
ensuring that adequate ventilation provision is provided to all areas of the timber frame including the sole plate.
Packing
Structural shims or grout may be required under sole plates to level them and transfer vertical load. Longer fixing may be needed to allow for the size of
the gap. Kerb upstand to allow level threshold
Note: Optional
insulated service
void shown for
illustrative
Packing of sole plates Wall frame purposes
Structural packers installed Masonry upstand
below full bearing area of Sole plate in accordance
multiple stud clusters with structural
Full height perpends to provide Min engineer's design
Structural packers installed drainage and ventilation to 150mm
below studs cavity
Gap may be filled with structural

grout or sealant to maintain air
tightness Insulation in front of upstand to
mitigate thermal bridging
Note: The use of structural grout is
not considered suitable for gaps
less than 10mm due to installation
difficulties

EXTERNAL WALLS
6.4.7
6.4.7 TIMBERFRAME
RENDERED MASONRY
MASONRYCLAD:
CLAD:Superstructure wallwall
Superstructure panel construction
panel construction
Timber frame wall panels

Timber frame external wall panels shall:
· Be manufactured in accordance with the Structural Engineer's design. Beam to engineered specification
· Consist of solid timber studs and rails. Typical wall panel
· Have studs at a maximum of 600mm centres.
· Be braced with a structural sheathing board. All structural timber whether machine or visually graded shall be in Any point load imparted onto the timber frame should be
accordance with BS EN 14081: Timber structures - Strength graded transferred down through the building to the foundations
Fixings and junctions structural timber with rectangular cross section with the use of multiple studs, as required by the structural
All fixings are to be installed to the Structural Engineer's specification. engineers design. If these are not installed during the
All load-bearing solid timber studs, rails, binders and sole plates should manufacture of the panels the requirement for installation
Unless otherwise justified: be of a minimum dry graded C16 must be clearly conveyed to site
· Junctions of wall panels and sole plates/head binders should not occur together.
· Head binder laps should wherever possible occur over a stud, preferably at least 600mm from the panel
junction.
· Wall panel to wall panel connections should be a maximum of 300mm centres.
· Bottom rail to sole plate fixings should be one or two per stud bay.
· Wall panels should be adequately braced during erection to maintain tolerances.
· Disproportionate collapse components and fixings must be installed if specified.
· Multiple stud clusters must be installed to the full width of point load-bearings.
· Point loads must be transferred down through wall panels and floor zones to foundations.
· Walls manufactured off-site must be fixed together as specified.
· Special considerations should be given to protecting closed panels from exposure to moisture during
delivery, storage and erection.
· Engineered timber components should not be exposed to moisture for longer periods than those stated by
the manufacturer.
· Roof trusses/rafters should be adequately fixed to wall panels.
· Floor joists should be nailed down to wall panels. A lintel may be required where
· If no head binder is present, floor joists must bear directly over studs.
· Waistbands and alignment of floors over walls should remain within tolerances for wall panels. openings do not fall between studs
unless the vertical load is
Timber framing components and structural sheathing boards may be fixed with: adequately transferred by other
elements
· Nails
· Staples
Lintels will require support from
Nail fixings should be: cripple studs
· Austenitic stainless steel
· Galvanised
· Sherardized
Staple fixings should be austenitic stainless steel or similar.

Sheathing board
Openings
All structural timber should be
All openings including doors, windows, flues and ventilation ducts should be designed and constructed to treated with a preservative
maintain structural performance. Breather membrane suitable for the 'Use Class' and
'Service Factor' applicable to its
Vapour Control Layer (VCL) use
A continuous VCL with a minimum vapour resistance of 250 MN.s/g or 0.25 Pa/m2 should be located on or near
the warm side of the thermal insulation.
Sheathing boards
Sheathing boards are fixed to the timber frame in order to provide racking resistance to the structure.
Wood-based board materials used The fixings securing the structural sheathing board to the timber studwork Studs should be provided around window
Structural sheathing board materials may be any of the following: for sheathing should be fixed to the wall panels provide racking resistance as calculated by the Structural and door openings and adjacent to
studwork frame leaving a 3mm Engineer. The sheathing board shall be fixed to the timber studwork in movement joints to allow the installation of
· Orientated strand board (OSB). minimum gap between boards to strict accordance with the Structural Engineer's fixing schedule. Fixing wall ties or other cladding fixings. They
· Plywood. allow for moisture-related movement centres should not exceed 150mm around the perimeter of the board and should be accurately cut to length and bear
· Impregnated soft board. 300mm centres in the field of the board. Sheathing fixings must not be tightly against the wall panel top and
· Other board material with suitable third-party certification.
· All wood-based panel products should comply with BS EN 13986: Wood-based panels for use in over-driven through the face of the sheathing board bottom rails
construction - characteristics, evaluation of conformity and marking.
· OSB should be grade 3 or 4 in accordance with BS EN 300: Oriented Strand Boards (OSB) - Definitions,
classification and specifications.
· Plywood should be at least Class 2 Structural in accordance with BS EN 636: Plywood Specifications.
· Impregnated soft boards should be Type SB.HLS in accordance with BS EN 622-4: Fibreboards,
specifications and requirements for soft boards.

EXTERNAL WALLS
6.4.86.4.8TIMBER
TIMBER FRAME
FRAME - RENDERED
- RENDERED MASONRYCLAD:
MASONRY CLAD:Breather
Breather membrane,
membrane, drilling
drillingofofstuds, and
studs, services
and services
Breather membrane
A breather membrane is a water-resistant moisture vapour permeable membrane used to provide temporary Head binder lapping - Head binder nailed to frames. Fixings
weather protection during construction, and secondary protection from moisture once the building is complete. Timber frame determined by timber frame engineer's
calculations
The timber frame structure should always be protected by a breather membrane facing the external wall cavity.
Head binder butt jointed over stud or
Breather membranes should be: lintel which is fixed to the underside of
the top rail
· Minimum Class W2 or better in accordance with BS EN 13859: Flexible sheets for waterproofing -
Definitions and characteristics of underlays. Head binder laps joint in
· Securely fixed to protect the outside face of the timber frame structure with austenitic stainless steel staples. panels below to form a tie
· Placed on the outside of the timber structure and any external insulation adjacent to the external wall cavity.
· Lapped to deflect moisture away from the timber frame structure.
· Trimmed to leave 25mm lap below the lowest timber sole plate.
· Repaired if damaged.
Breather membranes should be lapped by a minimum of 100mm at horizontal joints, and a minimum of 150mm at
vertical joints. If breather membranes are trimmed flush with the edges of wall panels, additional strips of breather
membrane, at least 300mm wide, should be supplied and site fixed over panel junctions. The location of solid
timber studs should be clearly marked on the outer face of the breather membrane to ensure that cladding fixings
are installed into solid timber.
Panel incorporating T
150mm type connection
vertical lap
Panel incorporating L
type stud corner
Repair of damaged
breather membrane
Drilling of studs Services

100mm
In addition to general provisions for the installation of services, the following are of
150 150 mm minimum particular note for timber frame construction external walls:
mm
· The routing and termination of services should not affect the fire resistance of the
structure.
· Wet services are not to be installed on the cold side of the insulation.
150 0.25h maximum · Service penetrations through the VCL should be tight fitting to reduce air leakage
mm and the passage of moisture vapour.
100mm · Avoid running electrical services in the external wall cavity, except for meter tails.
· Services should be protected with metal plates if they pass within 25mm from face
stud.
· Adequate allowance for differential movement to occur without causing damage
should be provided for rigid services rising vertically through a building.
h stud
· Services that pass through the external wall cavity and provide an opening (such as
height flues/vents) should be enclosed with a cavity barrier and protected with a cavity tray.
0.25h maximum
Vertical joints
staggered
100mm
horizontal
laps
Maximum 0.25 150 mm minimum
stud width
Drilling on centre line only. Hole diameters not greater than

0.25 stud width and hole centres not closer than 4d (d = hole
diameter)
© MD Insurance
EXTERNALWALLS
WALLS
6.4.9
6.4.9 TIMBERFRAME
RENDERED MASONRY
MASONRYCLAD:
CLAD:Insulation for for
Insulation external wallswalls
external
Conventional wall with
insulation between studs Insulation materials
Insulation materials should be chosen with consideration for their breathability and interaction with the timber frame.
VCL
Thermal insulation products typically used are:
· Mineral fibre (glass or rock).
Sheathing
· Wood fibre/wool.
Breather membrane · Blown cellulose.
Other insulation materials may be used subject to relevant third-party certification.
Insulation may be specified in any or all of the following locations:
· Between the load-bearing studs.

· On the outside of the timber frame.
· On the inside of the timber frame.
Insulation installed to the outside of the timber frame structure should have third-party certification for this application and retain a minimum of a
clear 50mm cavity. The outer layer of insulation should also be covered with a breather membrane adjacent to the cavity.
Continuous internal
insulation External walls should be subject to U-Value and condensation risk calculations. A wall build up will be considered satisfactory if there is no
calculated risk of surface or interstitial condensation at any time of the year, and it fulfils the minimum National requirement for thermal
Internal wall lining performance.
VCL Special consideration should be given to condensation risk where non-breathable insulation products are installed on the outside of the timber
frame structure. Joints between foil faced external insulation boards, must not be taped as this forms a vapour control layer on the cold side of the
Service zone
insulation.
Insulation (inside of the timber frame)
Depending on the specification of insulation materials to be added to the structural frame, timber battens may be required to support the insulation
Insulation (between the load bearing studs) or allow fixing of plasterboard linings, or external cladding.
Sheathing Insulation
Breather membrane
If insulation is specified between external walls studs all voids shall be filled with insulation to maintain the thermal envelope of the building. When
noggins or boards are installed between studs to support services or heavy fittings the void behind them shall be fully insulated.
Insulation should not be installed until the structural timber frame is below 20% moisture content and the building is weather tight, as wet insulation
can retain moisture. If closed panel timber frame is specified, additional care must be taken to protect the panels from exposure to moisture during
construction, with moisture content checks carried out before full closure.
Note: The above also applies equally to insulated party wall cavities.
Continuous external
insulation
Insulation installed within the cavity
VCL If external wall insulation is to be used:

· Insulation should be installed in a manner to maintain its stated performance by minimising gaps that lead to thermal bridging and air
washing.
Sheathing
· Installation should be covered with a breather membrane to ensure that external wall cavity moisture does not become trapped in or between
Insulation (outside of the timber frame) the insulation and the timber frame.
· Cavity trays should be fixed and lapped over the cavity facing breather membrane to deflect cavity moisture away from the timber frame.
Breather membrane · Allowance should be made for differential movement to occur at floor zones.
· Cavity barriers should be tightly fitting; depending on the type of insulation used, cavity barriers may need to pass through the insulation,
back to solid timber within the timber frame structure behind and remain effective in a fire.
· It should not retain or transmit moisture to cause the timber structure to exceed 20% moisture content.
· Stud locator marks should be transferred onto the outer face of the breather membrane adjacent to the external wall cavity.
· Wall ties should transfer loads to the timber frame structure. To achieve this, wall ties will typically need to be installed through the external
insulation rather than bearing onto it.
Note: Cladding not shown for clarity · Joints between foil faced insulation boards must not be taped.

EXTERNAL WALLS
6.4.10 TIMBER
6.4.10 TIMBERFRAME
FRAME -- RENDERED
RENDERED MASONRY
MASONRYCLAD:
CLAD:Wall
Walllinings andand
linings VCLVCL
requirements
requirements
Vapour control layer (VCL) Air leakage
A VCL is a moisture vapour-resistant material located on, or near, the warm side of the thermal insulation. Detailing and installation instructions must be followed
Its purpose is to: to achieve adequate air tightness. Floor zone air barrier
· Restrict the passage of moisture vapour through the structure of the wall. lapped with VCL by
· Mitigate the risk of interstitial condensation. 100 mm over rails
The VCL should have a minimum vapour resistance of 250 MN.s/g or 0.25 Pa/m2. It is also typically used as an air tightness
layer.
The VCL may take the form of: Air barrier

Wall panel with rendered
· A vapour control plasterboard comprising a metallised polyester film bonded to the back face of the plasterboard.* masonry cladding
· A minimum 125 micron thick (500 gauge) polythene sheet.
· A third-party approved proprietary vapour control membrane product.
*Vapour control plasterboard should only be used subject to a condensation risk analysis demonstrating the suitability of the wall Note: linings, cladding and
build up. insulation materials have
been omitted for clarity
Subject to a favourable condensation risk analysis, a novel or reverse wall construction may not require the use of a high moisture
vapour-resistant vapour control membrane.
A VCL should not be installed until the structural timber frame is below 20% moisture content and the building is weather tight. Cavity tray lapped up 100mm
behind breather membrane
Installation of a VCL
A sheet membrane (polythene or proprietary) VCL should be: Steel lintel (retaining clips when
required)
· Securely fixed to and cover all areas of the timber frame external walls, including all sole plates, head binders, and Timber lintel
lapped/sealed fully into window/door reveals.
· Lapped and sealed by at least 100mm at joints. Stud marker tape
· Lapped and sealed over studs, rails or noggins.
· Sealed around service penetrations. Head binder
· Lapped and sealed with DPM/DPC at the junction with the ground floor/foundation by a minimum of 100mm.
Vertical DPC lapped with VCL in
Note: Small holes in the VCL should be sealed with a suitable self-adhesive tape. If a proprietary membrane is being used, the window reveal
manufacturer's proprietary sealing tape should be used. Larger holes should be re-covered to lap over adjacent studs and rails. Top rail
Vapour control plasterboard should be: Cavity barrier around window

opening
Jack stud
· Fixed in accordance with the plasterboard manufacturer's installation guidance.
· Tightly cut and fitted around service penetrations.
Bottom window rail
· Discarded if the vapour control backing is damaged.
Cripple stud
Wall linings
Flexible wall tie nailed to studs Timber studs
The internal lining of the timber frame wall may be required to perform four functions:
· Provide the finish or a substrate to accept the finish on the inner face of the wall. Insulation
· Contribute to the racking resistance of the wall. Breather membrane
· Contribute to the fire resistance of the wall.
· Contribute to the acoustic performance of the wall.
Sheathing
Wall linings are typically: DPC
· Gypsum plasterboard.
· Fibre reinforced gypsum board.
· Cement bonded particle board. Bottom rail
Open perpends at maximum
Lining materials must satisfy all relevant performance criteria, e.g. fire resistance, acoustic performance and have relevant 1350mm centres
Sole plate
Plasterboard
Finished ground level 150mm
below lowest timber
Installation DPC
In order to provide the specified period of fire resistance, the plasterboard must:
· Protect all areas of the timber frame structure.

· Have all edges supported by timber studs or rails.
· Be fixed in accordance with the plasterboard manufacturer's guidance.
· Be cut and tightly fit around service penetrations.
· Have junctions of wall and ceiling linings detailed to maintain continuity.
· Be installed using the specified number of layers to achieve the required fire resistance.
· Have all joints staggered when installing multiple layers.
When fixing plasterboard linings:
· Each layer must be fully and independently fixed.

· Fixings of the correct length and centres should be installed in accordance with the plasterboard manufacturer's installation
instructions.
· Walls requiring plasterboard to provide racking resistance should be clearly identified with plasterboard installed to the
Structural Engineer's specification or the plasterboard manufacturer's specification, whichever is more onerous.

EXTERNAL WALLS
6.4.11 TIMBER
6.4.11 TIMBER FRAME
FRAME -- RENDERED
RENDEREDMASONRY
MASONRYCLAD:
CLAD:Cavity barriers
Cavity barriers
Cavity barrier locations
doors.
· Between an external cavity wall and a compartment wall or compartment
floor.
Locations of cavity barriers and · Around meter boxes in external walls.
· Around service penetrations in external walls e.g. extract duct or boiler flue.
open perpends · To sub-divide extensive cavities; please refer to National Regulations for
specific requirements.
Note: Lightweight cladding systems

will require a cavity barrier along the
bottom of the cavity
Cavity barriers/firestopping Cavity barriers shall be installed:
at head of party wall
Note: Cavity barriers may also be · So they fully close the cavity.
required between walls and floors Flats · So the ends are tightly butted (or adequately lapped in accordance with the
within the building, consult National manufacturers instructions) to form a continuous barrier.
Regulations for further guidance · Backed by solid timber studs, rails or floor joist at least 38mm wide.
A cavity tray should be proved directly above a horizontal cavity barrier and lapped
at least 100mm behind the breather membrane (except at eaves and verges).
Cavity barriers are required Semi-detached Cavity barriers are required to prevent the spread of smoke and flame within
at eaves and verge house concealed spaces.
Cavity barriers may be constructed from:
· Steel at least 0.5mm thick.

Scotland and Northern Ireland Scotland & · Polythene sleeved mineral wool.
require through ventilation with · Calcium silicate, cement-based or gypsum-based board at least 12mm thick.
Northern Ireland · An independently assessed and certified proprietary product.
open perpends at the base and
head of the external wall cavity
Timber cavity barriers should be protected from masonry cladding by the use of a
DPC. The cavity face of the barrier should be left uncovered to allow drainage and
ventilation of the timber. The use of timber cavity barriers around openings allows
Scotland and Northern Ireland
for effective sealing to be installed between them and the opening frame.
intermediate floors
Cavity tray above horizontal cavity barrier
Cavity barriers are required at

the junction of party floors
Breather membrane
DPC cavity tray lapped
Open perpends installed at 100mm behind breather
Open perpends installed membrane
maximum 900 mm centres Note: Insulation and
with at least two over each opening lining materials have
wall cavity not been shown for
clarity
Open perpend
junction of the external wall and Cavity barrier
Electric or gas meter box
recessed into cladding party wall
Through ventilation provided
Ireland with additional open
Cavity barriers are required perpends
openings

EXTERNAL WALLS
6.4.12 TIMBER
6.4.12 TIMBER FRAME
FRAME -- RENDERED
RENDEREDMASONRY
MASONRYCLAD: Render
CLAD: requirements
Render requirements
Render Application Masonry background requirements
Rendering should be in accordance with BS EN 13914-1:2005 and workmanship in accordance · 15mm is considered the minimum finished thickness of render applied to a masonry wall, The walls which are to be rendered should be examined for excessive moisture content prior to rendering. This
with BS 8000. In particular the following should be considered: either as a single spray coat or as a two coat hand application. Where structures are is particularly important where the masonry background has no upper limit on its soluble salts content, e.g. N
located in very severe weather rating locations or within coastal locations, the depth of designation clay bricks.
With traditional renders the quality of the sands used and design mix is as critical as is the reliance render may need to be increased to a minimum of 20mm and a specialist manufacturer's
on good mixing techniques by the applicator. specification will be required to support this. A specialist render system and mortar should be employed for parapets, chimneys, retaining walls and walls
· Please note: 5-6mm is considered the minimum finished thickness of render for below DPC level with this masonry background type.
Poor mixing ratios and low quality materials is often the reason traditional renders fail. For the applications of specialist insulated render systems. The render thickness will need to be
purposes of this Warranty, traditional hand mix using standard sand and cement is not accepted. increased where structures are located in very severe weather rating locations, or within Ensure that all joints are finished flush with the surface to avoid shade variations.
Only a pre-blended bagged render system will be accepted as a suitable render system that has a coastal locations and a specialist manufacturer's specification will be required to support
third party accreditation such as a BBA or ETA certification, and backed up with a manufacturer's To minimise the potential for differential thermal movement and effects that the different suction that each type
this; approved by the Warranty provider. of background material may create; the section of walling to receive the render should be constructed using the
specification. · When ashlar detailing is required, it is recommended that a minimum depth to the back of same type and density of material throughout.
the ashlar cut should be no less than 15mm and 20 - 25mm for applications in very severe
Where a specialist render system is being used the following conditions must be met: exposure zones or within coastal locations. To achieve this depth, it will require the When rendering is required to be applied to wet masonry substrates, a specialist sealer key coat prior to
finished thickness of the main render to be increased to accommodate this feature. applying the main coat of render should be applied, to control suction and reduce the impact of lime blooming
1) The product approval is based on the details and limitations of use described in a 'current' · Abutments between cement render and other cladding materials or components should be occurring through the render. The key coat should provide a sound substrate and be compatible with the
approved ETA, BBA, BRE etc. or other UKAS certified system specific to the relevant weather tight and allow for differential movement. subsequent render system.
substrate being applied too. A copy of the certificate documents are to be supplied. · Any joints in the wall where movement may occur should be continued through the
rendering. For high absorption e.g. lightweight blockwork, common bricks etc. and smooth dense substrates (such as
2) For masonry substrates (e.g. solid brickwork, blockwork, concrete, terracotta, stone etc.) the · Render should not bridge the Damp Proof Course (DPC) and must be finished onto a engineering bricks); direct rendering is not acceptable, as the moisture can be extracted by the substrate from
masonry should be adequately prepared and be of a thickness which would resist damp durable render stop profile such as a proprietary uPVC bead or stainless steel bead. the wet render which affects its curing and bonding capability, or it does not bond to the substrate respectively.
ingress to the internal finishes based on the recommendations of BS 5628 Part 3 2005 for the · Renders will be reinforced as a minimum with an appropriate certified alkaline resistant
given exposure zone. Please note: Where the thickness of the masonry is less than that fibreglass mesh at corners of all openings and penetrations. For substrates that are prone To control suction, always apply a specialist sealer key coat or suitable render preparatory coat. Allow a
recommended in BS 5268, is a single skin construction or is in a very severe exposure zone or to movement, an appropriate certified alkaline resistant fibreglass mesh will need to be minimum of 48 hours for the key coat to fully dry before applying the next coat.
coastal location, then the requirements of condition 3 (below) must also be met. incorporated throughout the substrate.
· Where different materials are being rendered over, the incorporation of an appropriate For highly exposed areas of construction:
3) For all render installations (including brick slip system applications) on all substrates types certified alkaline resistant fibreglass mesh will be necessary to assist with the possibilities
located in an exposure zone where the wind driven rain is expected to be more than 75 litres · The backs surfaces of parapets should not be rendered using a standard render system. Either:
of differential movement. The mesh must extend sufficiently over the different materials to a) Use suitable fair faced masonry to the roof elevation and incorporate cavity trays linked to the roof
per m²: A 10 year 'insurance backed' manufacturer's system guarantee is required, together resist against differential movement. flashing, or
with a full project specific specification that has also been accepted and approved by the · Renders installed between pedestrian level and 6.0m above ground level will be designed b) Use a specialist render system designed to combat movement and provide robust weatherproofing.
Warranty provider. The proposal will require full system details to deal with all junctions, to accommodate higher maintenance and impact loads in accordance with Table 2 of BS Note: horizontal surfaces of Parapets should not be rendered, they should be protected by a suitable
openings etc. together with other project specific requirements provided by the render system 8200. capping system.
company. The render system will need to be installed by a registered and certified installer · All surfaces must be clean, suitably dry and free from anything that may interfere with the · Throats or drips to copings of parapets and chimneys should project beyond the finished faces to throw
who has been approved and accredited by the render system manufacturer before work adhesion of the material to be applied. The manufacturer's product data sheets should be water clear.
commences. followed including the manufacturer's surface preparation and suitability checks in full. · Rendering to chimneys should only be carried out where the masonry contains little or no sulphates. An
· All blockwork mortar joints are to be flush pointed and should be fully cured before the appropriate specialist sealer/bonding key coat should be applied prior to applying the main coat of render.
In all instances where a render system manufacturer's guarantee is required, full project application of the render. A proprietary alkaline resistant mesh should be embedded throughout the render, the key coat should
specification and details are to be obtained from the render system manufacturer before any · The quantity of material required for a given area should be of the same batch number or provide a sound substrate and be compatible with the subsequent render system.
installation commences to ensure that conformity is met. Once work commences, the installation if not the different batches must be thoroughly mixed together to avoid shade variations. · As before; horizontal DPC and Damp Proof Membranes (DPM) must not be bridged.
must be inspected and signed off by a render system representative throughout the installation · Full masking must be used to give protection to adjacent areas of work, windows, doors · Rendering below DPC should only be carried out using a specialist render manufacturer's specification. No
stage, and at completion of the installation and confirm that the specification has been met. etc. and to give clean straight edges. It should be removed immediately after the finishing render system should bridge the DPC and a proprietary uPVC bead or stainless steel bead should be used
The render system together with the backing wall to which they are applied should satisfactorily coat has dried. above and below where the renders meet at the DPC.
resist the passage of moisture to the inside of the building. · Carefully remove splashes of material, in particular from glass or aluminium immediately
as they may etch the surface and leave a permanent mark. Other construction detailing
General render conditions (using pre-blended bagged render)
Ensure that drips and throating to sills, coping, etc. project beyond the face of the finished render above the
Materials DPC.
Weather conditions
Notwithstanding wind loadings, the larger the eaves overhang, the better. This will provide protection to the top
· For exposure zones where the wind driven rain is expected to be more than 75 litres per m² · Ensure the render being used is suitable for the substrate and is not too strong. Due to joint of the render panel where it meets the roof and prevent rain water getting behind the render.
(classed as very severe) then checked reveals will be required. The render applied to the shrinkage differentials, avoid applying a thin base coat and a thicker top coat application,
reveal must be of the same thickness as the wall render with an appropriate corner beading as the shrinkage values of a thicker top coat could cause the render to delaminate from Angles, stop beads and jointing sections should be secured with drilled or shot-fired fixings, and not with
provided. A suitable non hardening' mastic sealant must also be provided between the base coat. The same effect is also caused by applying a very hard render over a gypsum plaster. Fixing of external render beads on masonry backgrounds with an adhesive is also acceptable,
window/door frame and masonry reveal. softer base coat. providing the render manufacturer can provide a full specification on fixing the beads including:
· Protection must be provided when applying renders in rain or other inclement weather. · External rendering should comply as a minimum with BS EN 13914-1:2005 but should
Application should cease in temperature below 5°C or where rapid freezing is considered to be also conform with the specialist render manufacturers recommendations. · The adhesive to be used.
a potential threat. · Rendering products should be stored separately from other building and concreting sands. · Type of fixing e.g. dabs or continuous bead.
· For bellcasts, other beads, and stops; uPVC bead or stainless steel bead is acceptable. · Curing times.
· When applying in hot weather it is advisable that work coincides with the shaded areas of the ·
building. During longer periods of hot and dry weather, it may be appropriate and necessary to · Only clean water should be used for mixing. Specification of the beads used.
apply an even mist spray of clean water to the substrate before application, and to surface Under no circumstances should the beads or profiles be bonded using a solvent based adhesive.
finish for a couple of days afterwards subject to site and weather conditions.
· Cement products should not be applied to substrates which are frost laden or which have Check whether the rendering can be applied directly onto the wall, or whether any preparatory treatment is
recently been subject to prolonged rain. required in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
· Do not render onto saturated substrates as this may affect the bond strength and cause lime
bloom (discolouration), salts to occur and patchiness due to uneven suction. The surface should be checked for suction by dampening the wall with clean water.
· Local weather and site conditions must be taken into account by the applicator before any
cement product is applied. In accordance with a Structural Engineers requirements, cracking of the substrate could be significantly
· Care must be taken to protect cement and synthetic products soon after the application from reduced by introducing a specialist proprietary bed joint reinforcement within the mortar joints. Ideally this
rapid freezing and heavy rainfall. For other drying conditions i.e. where there is direct exposure should be applied throughout the building during construction and in accordance with the substrate
to sunlight or drying winds, the render may require to be protected from the elements. This manufacturer's recommendations. Ensure that the reinforcement is continuous and joints are lapped in
process is important to ensure complete hydration of the products can take place. accordance with the manufacturer's requirements (generally 450 - 500mm laps and continued around corners).
· Where an application is not covered in these conditions further advice from the render Specialist corner units are likely to be required, check with the manufacturer.
manufacturer must be sought and submit a suitable manufacturer's specification to the
Warranty provider for approval. Introducing reinforcement at weak points such as above and below window and door openings is strongly
recommended as a minimum requirement in all applications, as it will greatly assist in minimising cracking to
these areas
Vertical and horizontal flatness
Rendering should have a maximum vertical and horizontal deviation from flatness of +/-10mm in 5m, and is
measured in a similar way to straightness on plan and plumb of masonry. See the 'Tolerances' section for
further information.

EXTERNAL WALLS
6.4.13 TIMBER FRAME - RENDERED MASONRY CLAD: Wall ties and cavity requirements
6.4.13 TIMBER FRAME - RENDERED MASONRY CLAD: Wall ties and cavity requirements
Masonry cladding Location of wall ties
Timber frame external walls should be finished externally with a cladding system, which may take the
form of masonry or a lightweight rainscreen system. Regardless of the cladding system used, all
external wall claddings should be separated from the timber frame structure by a drained and
ventilated cavity. In some locations, for example close to boundaries, National Regulations require
claddings to provide fire resistance to the structure from the outside in. Where a masonry cladding is
proposed the vertical loadings from the masonry cladding must not be supported by the timber frame Top row of ties should be maximum 225mm below
structure.
top of blockwork
Self supporting masonry claddings
Timber
Horizontal cavity barrier above opening may be omitted frame
Self supporting masonry claddings should be connected to the timber frame using walls ties, wall ties
with steel lintel as substitute. Some steel lintels require a
should meet the following provisions: Wall tie laid to
timber pinch batten, and/or may require ends closing:
refer to manufacturers' details slight slope
· Comply with BS EN 845: Specification for ancillary components for masonry, ties, tension straps,
hangers, and brackets.
· Be constructed from austenitic stainless steel.
· Accommodate all anticipated differential movement. Cavity barrier and batten fixing for window (DPC
· The overall length of the wall ties must be of adequate length to provide a minimum 50mm clear omitted for clarity)
cavity and ensure there is at least a 62.5mm overlap onto the leaf of the masonry so that it will
achieve a 50mm minimum length of bedding on the mortar. External Internal
· Be installed into solid timber studs, not just through sheathing.
· Additional studs should be provided in the timber frame structure for wall ties at vertical
movement joints and around openings in the masonry cladding.
· Angled to drain moisture away from the timber frame even after differential movement has
occurred.
· Installed at a maximum of 300mm centres vertically and 225mm horizontally around openings
and movement joints.
· Installed within 225mm of the head of the wall.
· Wall tie density: For buildings up to three storeys in height wall ties should be installed at a
minimum density of 4.4/m² (a maximum of 375mm vertically with studs at 600mm centres and a
maximum of 525mm vertically where studs are at 400mm centres). A tie density of 4.4 ties/m2
may be suitable for buildings on flat sites within towns and cities anywhere in the UK, except the
north western fringes of Scotland and Ireland (where the basic wind speed exceeds 25 m/sec)
and any areas where the site is at an altitude of 150 m or more above sea level. An increased
wall tie density may be required in exposed locations or for buildings higher than three storeys in
height, the actual performance required for each site location or building should be determined
by a suitably qualified Structural Engineer.

The location of the solid timber studs should be clearly marked
· Be provided with full height open perpends at a maximum of 1350mm centres or equivalent open
area. on the outer face of the breather membrane to ensure that
· Be provided in the brick or block course below the lowest timber sole plate above external cladding fixings are installed into the solid timber
finished ground level and below DPC.
· Be provided to ensure drainage and ventilation to each external wall concealed space directly
above horizontal cavity barriers/trays. Ties fixed at sides of openings spaced at no more than 300mm
· Be installed over openings in the external wall cavity e.g. windows and doors at a maximum of vertical centres and within 225mm of opening. Double stud may
900mm centres. be necessary to provide fixing for ties and for cavity barriers
· Maintain a minimum 50mm clear cavity with care taken to reduce mortar droppings at the base
of the wall.
Weep-holes alone are unsuitable for timber frame construction, and open perpends should be used.
Proprietary open perpend inserts are available with insect screening incorporated. Their equivalent
open area must be considered and installation centres reduced accordingly.
When studs are at 600mm centres, vertical dimension should be
Where partial fill cavity insulation is to be used the same width of clear cavity is to be maintained in 375mm maximum (ie every 5 courses). When studs are at
addition to the insulation depth. 400mm centres, vertical dimension may be 525mm maximum (ie
every 7 courses)
Cavity drainage and ventilation should provide an open area of not less than 500mm² per metre run:
· At the base of the external wall concealed space. Flexible ties must be fixed to studs in the panel through sheathing
· Above horizontal cavity barriers/trays. and breather membrane
· Over openings in the external wall cavity, e.g. windows and doors. First set of ties maximum 300mm above DPC line
· Allowing differential movement to occur while retaining an adequate gap.
· With openings protected by a mesh to prevent the passage of insects. Open perpends at maximum 1350mm centres; in the brick course
below the lowest timber
Masonry cladding - Masonry suitability Max 1350mm
centres
· Facing bricks must have a suitable level of durability and particular attention should be paid to
the bricks resistance to frost and moisture.
· Bricks should be capable of supporting proposed loads. Bottom rail
· Bricks should comply with BS EN771 and PD 6697. Sole plate
· Frost resistant bricks should be used in areas of prolonged frost.
Further guidance is available in 'Appendix C - Materials, Products, and Building Systems'.

EXTERNAL WALLS
6.4.14 TIMBER
6.4.14 TIMBERFRAME
FRAME--RENDERED
RENDERED MASONRY
MASONRYCLAD:
CLAD:Forming
Formingopenings
openings
Window and door installations Typical window reveal detail (normal exposure) VCL
Please refer to the 'Windows and Doors' guidance for installation requirements of frames Vertical DPC lapped with VCL in
including maximum gaps and fixings. window reveal
Inner leaf Window fixing strap
Typical vertical section through window opening
Breather membrane
Moisture and air tightness seal

Cavity tray lapped up 100mm behind breather between window frame and
membrane window reveal/DPC
Steel lintel (retaining clips when required)

DPC between timber cavity
barrier and masonry cladding
returned into window reveal and
lapped with VCL
Cavity barrier around window opening
The frame should overlap the cavity by a minimum of

30mm
Appropriate 'non hardening'
mastic sealant to be provided
between frame and masonry
Minimum 2 weepholes per opening. Weepholes are to

Outer leaf reveal
be of a type that restricts wind driven rain

Wall tie
Allowance for differential movement Typical rebated window frame detail for areas of very
severe exposure Inner leaf

Moisture and air tightness seal
between window frame and
External render window reveal/DPC
Breather membrane
Wall tie
Note: Internal linings have not been

shown for clarity. A service void with
additional insulation may be specified
Vertical DPC
Openings Appropriate 'non hardening' mastic

All openings including doors, windows, flues and ventilation ducts, should be designed and constructed to frame and masonry reveal
maintain: Outer leaf
25mm Breather membrane
Fire performance:
25mm rebate to allow for building DPC between timber cavity
· Internal reveals require equal fire resistance to the rest of the structure. barrier and masonry cladding
· Window fixing straps should not compromise the integrity of any fire-resistant reveal linings. tolerance and window fixing
returned into window reveal and
· Cavity barriers should be installed in the external wall cavity around the perimeter of openings. tolerance
lapped with VCL
· If profiled steel lintels are used as cavity barriers, triangular gaps behind lintels, which occur at each end,
should be closed with careful positioning of adjacent cavity barriers.
When installing window/door frames in a checked rebate, allow for the frame to be deeper:
Acoustic performance:
· To accommodate the 25mm rebate, and;
· Seal gaps between timber frame wall and the element being installed into the opening. · To allow for opening lights to open clear of the masonry/render.
· The element being installed into the opening may have a minimum acoustic requirement.
Weather tightness and thermal performance, including thermal bridging and air tightness:
Windows and doors
· The element being installed into the opening is likely to have a minimum thermal performance.
· Seal gaps between the timber frame wall and the element being installed into the opening to provide
In areas of very severe exposure, checked rebates should be provided. The frame should be set back behind the
thermal performance, weather tightness and air tightness.
· Cavity trays should be installed over the heads of all openings and lapped behind the breather membrane outer leaf and should overlap.
by a minimum of 100mm. A flashing may be acceptable for some types of claddings.
· Lap cavity barrier DPC with internal VCL around openings. Where no DPC is used, breather membrane For further information on windows and doors please refer to the 'Windows and Doors' section.
should be lapped with internal VCL.

EXTERNAL WALLS
6.4.15 TIMBER FRAME - RENDERED MASONRY CLAD: Forming openings continued
6.4.15 TIMBER FRAME - RENDERED MASONRY CLAD: Forming openings continued
Correct method of bond around lintels Lintels
· The lintel should be the correct length and width for the opening and cavity width, the
bearing length should be at least 150mm.
· Continuity of the masonry bond should be maintained at supports for beams and
lintels.
Do not:
· Support lintels and beams on short lengths of cut blocks or make-up pieces.
· Apply load to lintels or beams before the masonry supporting has hardened.
Typical mesh reinforcement around openings
Full block for lintel bearing
Renders will be reinforced as a

minimum with an appropriate certified
alkaline resistant fibreglass mesh at
Correct bonding below
corners of all openings and
supporting block
penetrations
Incorrect method of bond around lintels
Reinforcement mesh bedded in

primary render coat. The mesh should
be installed as per the manufacturers
specification typically extending
200mm beyond reveals and 500mm
above and below windows, extending
200mm above cill and below head
Supporting masonry
not fully coursed into
the wall - not accepted
Rendering adjacent to openings
· For bellcasts and other beads uPVC beads or stainless steel beads are acceptable.
· Renders will be reinforced as a minimum with an appropriate certified alkaline resistant fibreglass mesh at corners of all
openings and penetrations. For substrates that are prone to movement, an appropriate certified alkaline resistant fibreglass
mesh will need to incorporated throughout the substrate.
· Ensure that drips and throating to sills, coping, etc. project a minimum of 40mm beyond the face of the finished render above
the DPC.

EXTERNAL WALLS
6.4.16 TIMBER
6.4.16 TIMBERFRAME
FRAME--RENDERED
RENDERED MASONRY
MASONRYCLAD:
CLAD:Feature
Featurestone surrounds
stone to openings
Stone jamb mullion, fixing to walls Joining stone jambs to sills and head Stone sill with insulated cavity closer
and heads should not A soft joint is required
project into the cavity and between the top of the head
insulated cavity closers and the steel support
should be inserted to lintel/cavity tray
typical window opening Non-structural cast stone
sections) head
Head to be fully bedded on

Stainless steel dovetail
jamb DPC/slip plane
anchor
over stool
Stainless steel dowel drilled
equally into head and DPC full length
jamb/mullion and width of sill
bed
and bottom with stainless When stone heads are being
steel pins. Stainless steel used, it is advisable to double up
the cavity trays - with one below Min
frame-type cramps can
the stone head and to provide 40mm
also be used to give extra
stability at jambs stop-ends and weep-holes.
Weep holes to be of a type to Note: The insulated cavity closer must also be fire resistant
restrict wind driven rain unless an additional method of fire resisting cavity closure is
also provided that meets Building Regulations
Mortar:
Cast stone jambs and
stone should comply with mullions
Standards for sand, lime, Stainless steel dowels in the
and cement as set out in sides of jambs should be bedded
BS 5390 into adjacent mortar joints as the
Stone sill DPC/slip plane Stone head Render

over stool
Ensure that drips and throating to sills etc project beyond the face of the finished
render above the DPC by a minimum of 40mm. Rendering around window/door
openings to be reinforced with mesh.
Cast stone heads
structure

Sills of this should be provided to the Warranty Surveyor upon request.
DPC/Slip plane DPC/Slip plane
over head under head
The DPC should be overlapped by the vertical DPC at the jambs and should Cast stone window/door surrounds
surface between the two materials must be incorporated or the cast stone should be
flexibly jointed.

EXTERNAL WALLS
6.4.17 TIMBER FRAME - RENDERED MASONRY CLAD: Allowing for movement in external masonry
6.4.17 TIMBER FRAME - RENDERED MASONRY CLAD: Allowing for movement in external masonry
Wall ties in proximity to movement joints and windows
spacing of openings
Vertical movement joints should be provided to the outer leaf of cavity walls as indicated in the
table below. The first joint from a return should be no more than half the dimension indicated in
the table. Wall ties should be provided at
300mm maximum vertical
The movement joints must be continued through the render construction and an appropriate spacing either side of the
weather resistant seal provided to prevent moisture ingress to behind the render finish. expansion joint
Movement joints below the Damp Proof Course (DPC) should also be provided at major changes
in foundation level and at changes in foundation design. Wall ties at a maximum of 300mm
vertical centres, and 225mm horizontally, should be provided on each side of movement joints.
Render
Compressible filler, such as polyurethane foam, should be used to form the joint and be sealed to
material is used to control the sealant depth, it will also provide a compressible space into which
the sealant can deform.
The following must be considered:

· Allows sufficient flexibility so not to impede lateral movement (compressible to about 50% of
its original thickness), fibreboard is not acceptable.
The use of bed joint reinforcement may allow the distance between expansion joints to be Wall ties should be provided Wall ties Movement joint. Any joints in the wall where movement
increased, however this should be designed by a Structural Engineer. within 225mm horizontal may occur should be continued through the rendering

Concrete blockwork (used in 6m 10mm joint sealant
outer leaf) Expansion joint
Compressible
Note: Minimum lap of DPC 100mm to filler
The first joint from a return should be not more than half the dimension indicated in the table. accommodate movement
DPC
Where the finished ground level

is 600mm or greater below the
horizontal DPC, the movement
joint should be continued within
the external leaf of the sub
600mm structure
External ground level Stainless steel wall ties at

225mm centres vertically, and

EXTERNAL WALLS
6.4.18 TIMBER FRAME - RENDERED MASONRY CLAD: Cavity trays
6.4.18 TIMBER FRAME - RENDERED MASONRY CLAD: Cavity trays
Cavity trays should rise at used in conjunction with lintels above openings, to protect the top surface of cavity insulation at horizontal cavity barriers and where the cavity is bridged.
Breather outer to the inner leaf, be Cavity trays are to be provided:
membrane self-supporting or fully
bearing 150mm · Above cavity insulation that is not taken to the top of the wall, unless that area of wall is protected by impervious cladding.
tray.
Cavity trays to lap behind breather
membrane by at least 100mm Ring beams or floor slabs that partially bridge the cavity, e.g. podium decks or when dimensional accuracy cannot be guaranteed, should be protected by a
continuous cavity tray.
Preformed stop end
bonded to cavity tray Weep-holes
clipped to lintel to coincide
Continuous cavity tray over with perpend weephole Weep-holes must be installed at no more than 900mm centres to drain water from cavity trays and from the concrete cavity infill at ground level.
two openings and a small pier
Weep holes at maximum centres of At least two weep-holes must be provided to drain cavity trays above openings.
Cavity trays should be continuous 900mm
where openings are separated by Weep-holes in exposure zones 3 and 4 should be designed to prevent ingress of wind-driven rain (including ground level).
short piers 900mm
Stop-ends
600mm cavity tray and a vertical DPC between the back of the box and the wall.
Cavity trays continuous Proprietary cavity tray systems

over piers less than
600mm wide At stepped and lower storey abutments, and around corners in low rise external walls, a proprietary cavity tray system should be used.
Details of flashing can be found in the 'Roofs'

stepped cavity tray Flat roof abutment cavity tray construction Cavity tray and lintel
stepped cavity tray details. Stepped cavity trays
to lap behind breather membrane by at least Cavity tray (minimum height
100mm. Additional measures may be needed within cavity of 150mm)
to ensure the breather membrane adequately
laps the tray to prevent moisture ingress behind Weep holes must be installed at
the stepped cavity tray no more than 900mm centres to
drain water from the cavity trays.
Profile line At least two weep holes must be Cavity tray
Heel of tray should be installed provided to drain cavity trays over lapped up
against profile openings 100mm behind
breather
End tray to Mortar should be raked out under membrane
have two stop the cavity tray to a depth of 25mm Where the timber frame continues
ends and weep
Steps and staggers above an abutment, adequate
hole Lintel
drainage and ventilation should
Particular care is needed in adequately be provided
preventing the ingress of water in a terrace of Cavity barrier
dwellings with steps and staggers. A around window
proprietary cavity tray system should be used. Lead cover flashing linked under
the cavity tray opening
Profile depth calculated (stepped) roof abutments with external cavity
walls, e.g. attached garages or staggered Roof covering to be taken up Weephole
by the depth of batten +
the depth of the tile + terraces. The bottom (last) cavity tray must be behind cover flashing for a
supplied with two stop-ends and an minimum lap of 65mm
associated weep-hole, allowing all water to
escape over the lower roof covering. For Tilting fillet to support roof
masonry, lead cover flashings should be covering at junction

168
168 EXTERNAL WALLS
EXTERNAL WALLS
6.4.19 TIMBER
6.4.19 TIMBERFRAME
FRAME--RENDERED
RENDERED MASONRY
MASONRYCLAD:
CLAD:Allowing forfor
Allowing differential movement
Differential movement at floor zones Allowance for Anticipated differential movement

Differential vertical movement occurs as a result of compression, closing
of gaps and shrinkage of the timber frame structure and occurs during the Differential movement at the top of self
first 24 months following completion. Shrinkage occurs across the grain supporting elements such as masonry or
and is due to a reduction in the moisture content of timber elements. The steel lift shafts must be considered
shrinkage of plates, rails, binders, floor and roof joists should be
considered. The building should be designed to ensure that differential Engineered timber Solid timber
movement occurs evenly to external elevations and the internal structure.
Anticipated differential movement can be calculated using the allowance of openings at of openings at eaves
of 1mm for every 38mm of horizontal cross grain timber. As solid timber eaves and verge and verge
joists contribute significantly to anticipated differential movement, Allowance for
engineered timber joists should be considered where it is desirable to differential Cavity barrier
reduce differential movement. movement
Wall tie
Appropriate allowances must be made for differential movement to occur Open perpend 33 mm at bottom 48 mm at bottom
without causing damage to the building. required in Scotland of openings at of openings at
and Northern Ireland fifth floor level fifth floor level
to provide through
Engineered Timber Solid Timber
ventilation
38 38
225 super-dry or 27 mm at bottom 39 mm at bottom
engineered 225 solid of openings at of openings at
timber timber fourth floor level fourth floor level
38 38
38 38
225 mm solid timber = 6 mm
225 mm engineered timber = 2 - 3 mm
differential movement depending on differential movement. third floor level third floor level
tightness of build.
Expect 9 mm movement per storey, or
Expect 6 mm movement per storey, or 7 10 mm per storey if a locator plate is
mm per storey if a locator plate is used used on upper stories.
on upper stories.
Note: when solid timber platform frame
Note: when super-dry timber or ground floor is used, add 7 mm to the
engineered timber platform frame differential movement allowances
ground floor is used, add 3 - 4 mm quoted. 15 mm at bottom 21 mm at bottom
(depending on tightness of build) to the of openings at of openings at
differential movement allowances
quoted. second floor level second floor level
If fillers or seals are to be installed into differential movement gaps their

fully compressed dimension, considering the area of the seal and force
required to compress it, must be added to calculate gap size. Materials
should be chosen to provide an effective weather tight seal dependent on 9 mm at bottom 12 mm at bottom
whether they are to be subjected to compression, expansion, or shear of openings at of openings at
forces. Cover strips may also be used. first floor level first floor level
Self supporting claddings (masonry)

Any material or component attached to the timber superstructure that shown for clarity. A service void with
Allowance for
additional insulation may be specified
overhangs the brick or blockwork (e.g. cladding attached to the timber differential
frame, window sills, roof eaves, and verges) or projects through the movement
masonry (e.g. balcony supports, flues, extractor fan vents, or overflow
ground floor level ground floor level
pipes) should have a clear gap beneath and at the top of the masonry Wall tie
cladding to allow differential movement to take place, thus avoiding
damage to the components or cladding.
Masonry cladding should not be supported on the timber frame structure.

Note: Services that are rigid from the
Gap sizes should allow for anticipated differential movement while allowing foundations, e.g. soil stack, dry riser, gas and
for drainage and ventilation requirements. Insect infestation should be water, require differential movement gaps
movement at lift door/threshold
avoided by using screens to cover gaps exceeding 4mm. above the service entry. The gaps should be
equal to those recommended for the bottom of
openings at the appropriate floor level

EXTERNAL WALLS
6.4.20 TIMBER FRAME - RENDERED MASONRY CLAD: Allowing for differential movement
6.4.20 TIMBER FRAME - RENDERED MASONRY CLAD: Allowing for differential movement
Differential movement at services Differential movement at cantilevered overhang
Lightweight cladding
Cavity tray lapped system fixed to
up 100mm behind timber frame
breather membrane
Noggings to
frame opening
Note: insulation and linings
Cavity barrier: not shown for clarity
Cavity barrier
Drainage and
ventilation should
Flange be maintained
Non-combustible movement
sleeve. Extend to form
cavity barrier around
Insect mesh Head binder
opening, or insert
separate cavity barriers Top rail
around the opening
Cavity barrier
Soffit cladding
Boiler flue
Breather membrane
specification
Allowance for
differential Note: Internal linings and Differential movement at verge
movement insulation has not been shown
for clarity. A service void may be
specified. Sufficient support and
fixings for boiler may be provided
with noggings or board material
between studs or service void Gable ladder
battens. The installation of
extractor vents is similar
Cavity barrier
Allowance for
differential
Services movement
Rigid services within the timber frame structure also require an equal allowance for differential movement, as
shown. Examples include copper gas and water pipes, dry risers, internal downpipes, SVP's, and blockwork lift Wall tie
shafts. While gap allowances externally are allowed below, for example, a sill, when a branch comes off a rigid
stack internally, the gap needs to be left above a service to allow the timber frame to drop around it
Open perpend required
Ireland to provide
through ventilation
Note: Insulation and walls linings have not

been shown for clarity
Eaves detailing for rendered walls
The eaves detail should extend past the masonry to provide protection to the top joint of the render and prevent
rainwater percolating behind the render.

170
170 EXTERNAL WALLS
EXTERNAL WALLS
6.4.21 TIMBER
6.4.21 TIMBERFRAME
FRAME--RENDERED
RENDERED MASONRY
MASONRYCLAD:
CLAD:Parapet
Parapetconstruction
construction
Capping to be mechanically fixed into

timber frame. It is important to ensure the
Coping detail for up to 1100mm from roof Parapet coping detail for up to 300mm
coping system is installed as per
manufacturers specification including all
Capping to be mechanically fixed into timber
ancillary components e.g. gaskets
frame. It is important to ensure system is
installed as per manufacturers specification
Max height of parapet from roof Lightweight proprietary capping. The mechanical fixings where
including all ancillary components e.g. gaskets.
surface to capping is limited to Stone copings on timber frame penetrating the DPC should either be
The mechanical fixings where penetrating the
1100mm. Stud and masonry must are not recommended shot fired (instant seal - as timber frame
DPC should either be shot fired (instant seal -
be designed to be structurally sole plates) or carefully sealed to avoid The vertical down stand of the capping Lightweight proprietary capping. as timber frame sole plates) or carefully sealed
stable to resist horizontal forces The vertical down stand of the moisture penetration to the structure should extend past the brickwork Stone copings on timber frame to avoid moisture penetration to the structure
capping should extend past the below. The DPC should be made
are not recommended below. The DPC should be made continuous
brickwork continuous by lapping over fixings. The Roof covering to extend over parapet
Water boiled plywood plate by lapping over fixings. The pitch of the
pitch of the capping must be a minimum
Water boiled plywood plate capping must be a minimum of 5°
of 5°
Timber cavity closer
Allowance for movement. The DPC minimum 150mm above roof finish
Allowance for movement. The DPC must be continuous for the length of
the parapet and joints suitably lapped gap size will be dependent on the
gap size will be dependent on the anticipated differential movement Full width damp proof courses should be
anticipated differential movement Full width damp proof courses should be between the timber frame and provided and be fully supported to avoid
Max
between the timber frame and provided and be fully supported to avoid the masonry drooping and gaps forming at joints
300mm
the masonry drooping and gaps forming at joints
Min 40mm overhang required
Min 40mm overhang required Breather membrane Waterproof membrane. Minimum
Timber cavity closer membrane upstand of 150mm
Drained and vented cavity to be
Impervious cladding
provided, cavity width is
(not render) Breather membrane
dependent on the cladding type
Vertical batten
Wall tie
Minimum air/drainage gap of 15mm
at this location
Angle fillet recommended
Breather membrane Breather membrane is to lap the Wall tie
waterproof membrane by a minimum
75mm Open perp vents
Insect mesh Cavity tray
Waterproof membrane. Cavity barrier

Minimum membrane
Max upstand of 150mm
200mm
VCL
Open perp vents
Cavity tray
Cavity barrier
Parapets
· The parapet should be designed to accommodate differential movement, remain structurally stable,
and allow suitable structural support of the lightweight coping.
· The coping should be mechanically fixed to the timber frame and the fixings should be suitable for the
exposure and anticipated wind loadings.
· If the capping is secret fixed, each capping piece should be provided with at least 2 security fixings.
VCL

EXTERNAL WALLS
6.4.22 TIMBER
6.4.22 TIMBERFRAME
FRAME-- RENDERED
RENDERED MASONRY
MASONRYCLAD:
CLAD:Corbelling
Corbellingandand
spandrel panel
spandrel requirements
panel requirements
Feature brick corbelling
The extent of corbelling of masonry should not exceed that Gable spandrel panels
Reinforced corbels should be designed by a Charted
Structural Engineer The gable spandrel panel should be suitably designed to transmit loads to the roof structure and down through the timber frame.
It is important that gable spandrel panels are designed to transmit these loads to the roof structure via lateral restraints and vertically down to the timber
No decrease in thickness
frame. A full design with structural calculations be provided.
on opposite side of corbel
The timber frame designer should provide details of the lateral resistant to the gable spandrel panel, including details of the restraint used and the fixings
should be provided.
General references used in this section
· BS EN 1995-1-1: 2004+A1: 2008 Eurocode 5 Design of timber structures. General: Common rules and rules for buildings.
· BS 5268-2: 2002 Structural use of timber. Code of Practice for permissible stress design, materials and workmanship.
· BS 5268-3: 2006 Structural use of timber. Code of Practice for trussed rafter roofs.
resistance of timber members.
resistance of timber stud walls and joisted floor constructions.
· BS 5268-6.1: 1996 Structural use of timber. Code of Practice for timber frame walls. Dwellings not exceeding seven storeys.
· BS 5268-6.2: 2001 Structural use of timber. Code of Practice for timber frame walls. Buildings other than dwellings not exceeding four storeys.
· BS EN 14081-1: 2005 Timber structures. Strength graded structural timber with rectangular cross section. General requirements.
· BS 8417: 2003 Preservation of timber. Recommendations.
· BS EN 13986: 2006 Wood-based panels for use in construction. Characteristics, evaluation of conformity and marking.
· BS EN 300: 2006 Orientated strand boards (OSB). Definitions, classification and specifications.
· BS EN 636: 2003 Plywood. Specifications.
· BS EN 622-4: 2009 Fibreboards - Specifications. Requirements for softboards.
· BS EN 622-3: 2004 Fibreboards - Specifications. Requirements for medium boards.
· BS EN 622-2: 2004 Fibreboards - Specifications. Requirements for hardboards.
· BS 4016: 1997 Specification for flexible building membranes (breather type).
T · BS EN 845-1: 2003+A1: 2008 Specification for ancillary components for masonry. Ties, tension straps, hangers and brackets.
· EN 14732: 2011 Timber structures. Prefabricated wall, floor and roof elements. Requirements Draft for comment.
Maximum corbel T/3

EXTERNAL WALLS
6. 6.5
Timber Frame -
External Directly Applied Claddings
Walls

6.5.16.5.1TIMBER
TIMBER FRAME - DIRECTLY APPLIED CLADDINGS: Cladding supported on timber frame
FRAME - DIRECTLY APPLIED CLADDINGS: Cladding supported on timber frame
Claddings supported on the timber frame Anticipated differential movement can be calculated using the allowance of 1mm for every 38mm of horizontal cross grain timber. As solid
timber joists contribute significantly to anticipated differential movement, engineered timber joists should be considered where it is desirable
Claddings supported on the timber frame should be connected to it on vertical treated timber battens, or a carrier system, to form a drained to reduce differential movement.
and ventilated cavity to all areas of the external timber frame wall. These should be fixed into structural timber not just through the
sheathing and to the Structural Engineer's specification. If fillers or seals are to be installed into differential movement gaps their fully compressed dimension, considering the area of the seal and
force required to compress it, must be added to calculate gap size. Materials should be chosen to provide an effective weather tight seal
Cavity drainage and ventilation should provide an open area of not less than 500mm2 per metre run: dependent on whether they are to be subjected to compression, expansion, or shear forces. Cover strips may also be used.
· At the base of the external wall concealed space. Horizontal cross grain timber and construction gaps are concentrated at floor zones and this is where the majority of movement occurs.
· Above horizontal cavity barriers/trays. Vertical timber battens or other rigid cladding support systems should not span over the floor zones of timber frame buildings. Gaps should
· Over openings in the external wall cavity, e.g. windows and doors. be provided to accommodate anticipated differential movement and the compressed size of any filler. Unlike self-supporting claddings,
· Allowing differential movement to occur while retaining an adequate gap. movement is not cumulative but should be calculated individually for each floor zone using the formula above of 1mm for every 38mm of
· With openings protected by a mesh to prevent the passage of insects. horizontal cross grain timber.
Minimum cavity widths
Timber frame external wall minimum cavity widths
Masonry 50mm Differential movement at floor zone with cladding supported on timber frame
Render on unbacked lath 50mm
Render on backed lath or board 25mm
Timber 19mm Treated timber cladding battens

Tile hanging 25mm
Note: For clarity, insulation and wall linings
have not been shown. Requirements for Lightweight cladding system,
cavity barriers will be subject to Building e.g. timber, render, etc
Differential movement at floor zones - timber frame Regulations requirement
Appropriate allowances must be made for differential movement to occur without causing damage to the building.
Differential vertical movement occurs as a result of compression, closing of gaps and shrinkage of the timber frame structure and occurs
during the first 24 months following completion. Shrinkage occurs across the grain and is due to a reduction in the moisture content of
timber elements. The shrinkage of plates, rails, binders, floor and roof joists should be considered. The building should be designed to
ensure that differential movement occurs evenly to external elevations and the internal structure.
Engineered Timber Solid Timber
38 38
225 super-dry or
engineered timber 225 solid Allowance for differential
timber movement to maintain
residual gap after
38 38 movement has occurred
38 38
DPC/flashing lapped
behind breather
membrane
225 mm engineered timber = potentially 2-3 mm differential 225 mm solid timber = potentially 6 mm differential
movement depending on tightness of build. movement.
Expect 6 mm movement per storey, or 7 mm per storey if a locator Expect 9 mm movement per storey, or 10 mm per storey if
plate is used on upper stories. a locator plate is used on upper stories.
Gap sizes should allow for anticipated differential movement while allowing for drainage and ventilation requirements. Insect infestation
Note: when super-dry timber or engineered timber platform frame Note: when solid timber platform frame ground floor is used, should be avoided by using screens to cover gaps exceeding 4mm.
ground floor is used, add 3 - 4 mm (depending on tightness of build) add 7 mm to the differential movement allowances quoted.
to the differential movement allowances quoted.

174
EXTERNALWALLS
EXTERNAL WALLS
6.5.2 TIMBER FRAME - DIRECTLY APPLIED CLADDINGS: Render board on timber frame
6.5.2 TIMBER FRAME - DIRECTLY APPLIED CLADDINGS: Render board on timber frame
Render · Do not render onto saturated substrates as this may affect the bond strength. When using external render board you should:
· Local weather and site conditions must be taken into account by the applicator before any cement
Rendering should be in accordance with BS EN 13914-1:2005 and workmanship in accordance with product is applied. · Fix with the manufacturer's recommended non-corrosive fixings and all in accordance with the
BS 8000. In particular the following should be considered: · Care must be taken to protect cement and synthetic products soon after the application from rapid manufacturer's installation details, ensuring the vertical board joints are staggered and do not
freezing and heavy rainfall. For other drying conditions i.e. where there is direct exposure to follow directly in line with window, door reveals and other openings.
With traditional renders the quality of the sands used and design mix is as critical as is the reliance on sunlight or drying winds the render may require to be protected from the elements. This process is · Take care to ensure there are no gaps between the boards and appropriate weather seals are
good mixing techniques by the applicator. important to ensure complete hydration of the products can take place. incorporated against walls and frames.
· Where an application is not covered in these conditions further advice from the render · Ensure the boards are cut neat and square; follow the building lines and the screw heads are
Poor mixing ratios and low quality materials is often the reason traditional renders fail. For the manufacturer must be sought and submit a suitable manufacturer's specification to the Warranty recessed just below the surface.
purposes of this Warranty, traditional hand mix using standard sand and cement is not accepted. Only provider for approval. · Take particular note of movement joint and fire break requirements and specific application details.
a pre-blended bagged render system will be accepted as a suitable render system that has a third party · Ensure all door, window and other openings are fully sealed using an appropriate manufacturer's
accreditation such as a BBA or ETA certification and backed up with a manufacturer's specification. weatherproof system to provide a primary weather barrier and to resist to movement.
Application
Where a specialist render system is being used the following conditions must be met: Battens should be either 25mm x 38mm or 50mm x 50mm, preservative treated (BS 8417 or
· Please note: 5-6mm is considered the minimum finished thickness of render for applications of equivalent, hazard class 2) and fixed at spacing's recommended in BS EN 13914-1: 2005. Fixings and
1) The product approval is based on the details and limitations of use described in a 'current' specialist insulated render systems. The render thickness will need to be increased where preservatives should be compatible.
approved ETA, BBA, BRE etc. or other UKAS certified system specific to the relevant substrate structures are located in very severe weather rating locations or within coastal locations and a
being applied too. A copy of the certificate documents are to be supplied. specialist manufacturer's specification will be required to support this; approved by the Warranty Battens should be fixed to each stud with annular ring nails of length at least twice the batten thickness
provider. plus the sheathing thickness. Nails should be hot dipped galvanised stainless steel or equally durable.
2) For timber supporting structures, a drained cavity is required. A manufacturer's fully detailed · Abutments between cement render and other cladding materials or components should be
project specific render system specification must be provided, which should include: weather tight and allow for differential movement. Cavity barriers
· Any joints in the wall where movement may occur should be continued through the rendering.
· Details of a suitable third party product approved external grade render board. · Render should not bridge the damp proof course (DPC) and must be finished onto a durable
render stop profile such as a proprietary uPVC bead or stainless steel bead. Where cavity barriers are required, they should be correctly fitted without gaps, the cavity filled and
· Details of preventing water penetration to the frame and internal finishes at all junctions, fixed with stainless steel staples or equally durable fixings, the settlement joints below the external
openings etc. · Renders will be reinforced as a minimum with an appropriate certified alkaline resistant fibreglass
mesh at corners of all openings and penetrations. For substrates that are prone to movement, an frames and soffits must be maintained.
· Other project specific requirements including specification of fixings suitable for the
environment, breather membranes, allowance for movement due to shrinkage, appropriate appropriate certified alkaline resistant fibreglass mesh will need to be incorporated throughout the
substrate. Render systems which include a cavity as a secondary defence system should also incorporate cavity
weather seals at movement joints, adequate protection to rendering at cills, parapets etc. barriers within the cavity to prevent the spread of fire. The cavity barriers should not obstruct more than
· The installation should be completed by a competent, registered and certified installer that · Renders installed between pedestrian level and 6.0m above ground level will be designed to
accommodate higher maintenance and impact loads in accordance with Table 2 of BS 8200. 50% of the cavity and should be installed to the internal leaf to retain its ability to drain. The cavity
has been approved and accredited by the render system manufacturer before work barrier must activate and fully close the cavity when exposed to fire.
commences. · All surfaces must be clean, suitably dry and free from anything that may interfere with the
· Where the specification is in a high exposure zone or coastal location, then the requirements adhesion of the material to be applied. The manufacturer's product data sheets should be followed
including the manufacturer's surface preparation and suitability checks in full. Movement joints
of condition 3 (below) must also be met.
· The quantity of material required for a given area should be of the same batch number or if not the
Note: Non drained cavity cladding constructions for timber frame external walls would not meet the different batches must be thoroughly mixed together to avoid shade variations. Where cement render spans across an intermediate floor zone in timber frame construction, allow for
Warranty requirements of this Technical Manual. · Full masking must be used to give protection to adjacent areas of work, windows, doors etc. and differential movement due to timber shrinkage by incorporating a movement joint. Vertical movement
to give clean straight edges. It should be removed immediately after finishing coat has dried. joints should also be provided at maximum 5m centres.
3) For all render installations (including brick slip system applications) on all substrate types located · Carefully remove splashes of material, in particular from glass or aluminium immediately as they
in an exposure zone where the wind driven rain is expected to be more than 75 litres per m²: A 10 may etch the surface and leave a permanent mark. Other construction detailing
year 'insurance backed' manufacturer's system guarantee is required, together with a full project
specific specification that has also been accepted and approved by the Warranty provider. The Materials Ensure that drips and throating to sills, coping, etc. project beyond the face of the finished render
proposal will require full system details to deal with all junctions, openings etc. together with other above the DPC.
project specific requirements provided by the render system company. The render system will · Ensure the render being used is suitable for the substrate and is not too strong. Due to shrinkage
need to be installed by a registered and certified installer who has been approved and accredited differentials, avoid applying a thin base coat and a thicker top coat application as the shrinkage Notwithstanding wind loadings, the larger the eaves overhang the better. This will provide protection to
by the render system manufacturer before work commences. values of a thicker top coat could cause the render to delaminate from the base coat. The same the top joint of the render panel where it meets the roof and prevent rain water getting behind the
effect is also caused by applying a very hard render over a softer base coat. render.
In all instances where a render system manufacturer's guarantee is required, full project specification · External rendering should comply as a minimum with BS EN 13914-1:2005 but should also
and details are to be obtained from the render system manufacturer before any installation commences conform with the specialist render manufacturers recommendations. Angles, stop beads and jointing sections should be secured with drilled or shot-fired fixings, and not
to ensure that conformity is met. Once work commences, the installation must be inspected and signed · Rendering products should be stored separately from other building and concreting sands. with gypsum plaster.
off by a render system representative throughout the installation stage and at completion of the · For bellcasts, other beads, and stops; uPVC bead or stainless steel bead is acceptable.
installation and confirm that the specification has been met. · Only clean water should be used for mixing. Vertical and horizontal flatness
The render system together with the backing wall to which they are applied should satisfactorily resist Timber frame background Rendering should have a maximum vertical and horizontal deviation from flatness of +/-10mm in 5m,
the passage of moisture to the inside of the building. and is measured in a similar way to straightness on plan and plumb.
A drained and vented cavity should be provided behind the render system on timber frame
General render conditions (using pre-blended bagged render) construction. The render board should have the capability to be directly rendered. It should not be a
wood based board or cement particle board unless confirmed by a UKAS or European equivalent third
party product approval body that confirms it is acceptable for use in the conditions proposed. It should
Weather conditions also not be a board that is not approved by the render system manufacturer.
· For exposure zones where the wind driven rain is expected to be more than 75 litres per m² For metal lathing, these should be a proprietary BBA, BRE etc. or ETA certified non-corrosive mesh
(classed as very severe) then checked reveals will be required. The render applied to the system and must be fully installed in accordance with the mesh system manufacturers details to
reveal must be of the same thickness as the wall render with an appropriate corner beading vertical battens at the stud centres.
provided. A suitable non hardening' mastic sealant must also be provided between window /
door frame and masonry reveal. The minimum size of the cavity should be 19mm for both the render board or metal lathing applications.
· Protection must be provided when applying renders in rain or other inclement weather. Unless proven otherwise, all applications should be used with a water-resistant membrane. When the
Application should cease in temperature below 5°C or where rapid freezing is considered to be render board or metal lathing system is unbacked, the minimum cavity should be 50mm. A DPC should
a potential threat. be provided between unbacked render and timber battens.
· When applying in hot weather it is advisable that work coincides with the shaded areas of the
building.
· Cement products should not be applied to substrates which are frost laden or which have
recently been subject to prolonged rain.
© MD
© MD Insurance
Insurance Services
Services Limited
Limited 2020
2020 175
175 EXTERNAL
EXTERNALWALLS
WALLS
6. 6.6
Light Gauge Steel Frame
External
Walls

6.6.16.6.1LIGHT GAUGE
LIGHT STEEL
GAUGE FRAME:
STEEL General
FRAME: Generaldesign
designrequirements
requirements
Building regulations Metal stud framework
All steel frame construction should meet the relevant regional Building Regulations. The wall panel usually consists of a head rail, base rail (sole plate) and possibly horizontal noggins at mid-height,
together with vertical wall studs:
Light steel frame systems
· Recommended site connections include self-drilling, self-tapping screws or 10mm-12mm diameter grade 4.6
Offsite manufactured systems for low rise buildings, must be provided with either independent UKAS or equivalent third party system bolts. Welding is not recommended on-site.
approval or the system has been evaluated by the Steel Construction Institute (SCI) and also endorsed by our Warranty. Any external · Workmanship should comply with BS 8000: 5.
wall make up incorporating external cladding, must meet our Warranty requirements in respect of weather resistance. · Framed walls should be accurately aligned, plumb, level without twist and securely fixed to adjacent
elements.
Steel frame - General design requirements
Vertical tolerances are:
The structural design should be in accordance with BS EN 1993-1-3:2006, and imposed loads should be calculated in accordance
with BS EN 1991, including:
· +/-15mm in overall height of wall 3 storey, or
· +/-10mm in overall height of wall 2 storey, or
· Dead loads. · +/-5mm in storey height (approx. 2.5m).
· Imposed loads.
· Wind loads. A lintel should be provided where one or more studs is cut or displaced to form an opening. A lintel is not required
where an opening falls between studs. Non-load bearing walls should have adequate strength and support.
Steel and fixings should be suitable for the design and adequately protected against corrosion.
Non-load bearing walls should not bridge movement joints in the main structure. A movement joint should be
Galvanised strip steel should be designated either grade S280GD or 350GD to BS EN 10346. constructed between the frame and any chimney flue or lift shaft to prevent load transfer. Cavity barriers and fire
stops should be provided in accordance with relevant Building Regulations, and steel joists should be spaced at
Where light steel frame ring beams or floor joists are used in ground floors these should be a minimum of 150mm above ground level centres no greater than 600mm.
and be galvanised to a minimum 450g/m2. Alternately where 150mm between ground level (or waterproofing layer of a flat roof,
balcony or terrace) and the lowest steel or base rail cannot be guaranteed, e.g at localised areas for level access the steel should be Cutting holes for services on-site is not recommended, but where essential should be carried out with specialist
galvanised to a minimum 600g/m2. tools. The maximum size of rectangular holes should not exceed 40% of the overall section, and length should
not exceed 60% of the overall section or be the depth of the section apart. No holes should be closer than 1.5
Load-bearing walls should be designed to support and transfer loads to foundations safely and without undue movement. times the depth of the section to the end of the member, notches are not acceptable.
Wall panels may provide resistance to racking forces using one or more of the following techniques:
· Internal bracing.
· Cross flat bracing.
· External sheathing board.
· Internal sheathing board.
· Rigid frame action.
The design should detail how joints between the wall panels and other elements are to be securely fixed:
· To the structure.
· To adjacent panels.
· To the floors and roof.
The design should ensure that the structure is adequately protected from the effects of moisture.
Exterior claddings should be compatible with the steel frame. Suspended floors should be designed to support and transmit loads
safely to the supporting structure without undue deflection.
Services should be adequately protected from damage, walls and floors should resist the spread of fire. Internal walls and floors
should be designed to resist the passage of sound adequately.

EXTERNAL WALLS
6.6.2
6.6.2 LIGHTGAUGE
LIGHT GAUGE STEEL
STEEL FRAME:
FRAME:Substructure
Substructureexternal walls
external walls
Suspended floor with ventilation
provision
Key points: Construction below DPC
Racking board Note: Cavity tray omitted
1. Brickwork and blockwork below DPC level must be selected to have suitable durability for its use for clarity
in the wall construction in accordance with BS EN 771-1 and PD 6697. Rigid insulation
Wall tie support Note: Internal linings have
channel not been shown for clarity.
durability classification (see BS EN 998-2). A service void may be
VCL lapped with
specified.
3. Cavities below ground should be filled with concrete ensuring there is a minimum gap of 225mm DPC and DPM
DPC to be minimum
4. Concrete for cavities should be GEN 1 grade and a consistence class S3. 150mm above DPC
ground level
Weep holes should be
6. The compressive strength of the masonry units must meet the requirements of the relevant provided at no more than
regional Building Regulations. 900mm centres to drain the Final ground level
water from the concrete
Damp proof courses (DPC) cavity infill at ground level
1. DPC's should be of a flexible material, be suitable for the intended use, and should have
design practice in accordance with BS 8215. Beam and
Min
block flooring
225mm
2. Blue bricks or slate will not be accepted as a DPC. DPM
3. DPC's should be laid on a mortar bed and correctly lapped at junction and corners. The depth of DPC
Where floor beams
4. The DPC should not bridge any cavity unless it is acting as a cavity tray (e.g over a telescopic bear onto substructure,
floor vent). Please refer to the cavity tray details for further information. Concrete fill to
a DPC underneath
cavity 225mm
should be provided
5. Damp proof membranes (DPM) should be lapped with the DPC, and VCL by a minimum overlap below DPC
of 100mm.
Possible gas
membrane detail
Final ground level Ground supported floor - no sub Weep holes should be provided at no
more than 900mm centres to drain the
floor ventilation
Max water from the concrete cavity infill at
225mm ground level
Periscope vent
shown for clarity. A service void may be
150mm min specified
Protective blinding overlap DPC VCL lapped with
Weep holes should be DPC and DPM
Radon barrier provided at no more than DPM
900mm centres to drain
the water from the
concrete cavity infill at
ground level Min
225mm
If ground conditions require gas membranes,

they should be located so they do not inhibit
drainage to all areas of the steel frame Concrete cavity fill
structure. Where the design incorporates to be a minimum
gas membranes (methane or radon), fixings 225mm below DPC
should not puncture them
EXTERNAL WALLS
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 178
EXTERNAL WALLS
6.6.3 LIGHT
6.6.3 LIGHT GAUGESTEEL
GAUGE STEELFRAME:
FRAME: General
Generaldesign
designrequirements
requirements
Site tolerances Example of frame anchors Sole plate/foundation junctions
It is essential that the accuracy of setting out foundations and ground beams are checked well in
advance of materials being delivered to site.
Cavity insulation should
Wall frame
For accurate erection of the frame the following tolerances are required at the level of the base of lap the perimeter
the wall frame: Chemical Rigid insulation insulation by min 150mm
anchor 20°
· Length of wall frame: +/-10mm in 10m. from vertical Wall tie
VCL lapped with DPM
· Line of wall frame: +/-5mm from outer face of plate. and DPC
· Level of base of wall frame: +/-5mm over complete wall line. Resin or expanding anchors Sole plate
should be used in an in-situ
Some packing may be needed to achieve the required tolerances. concrete raft of a minimum Breather membrane
C20/GEN3 grade concrete lapped 25mm
Fixing of frames to substructures below sole plate
Min
The oversite DPM should be attached to the side of the slab and returned under the DPC on DPC 225mm
which the frame is placed. The DPC/DPM detail requires careful attention to prevent the cavity
being bridged and providing a ledge for mortar droppings.
Full height open
Holding down anchors may be galvanised, or preferably stainless steel straps that are fixed to the perpends to provide
stud wall and attached to masonry supports or concrete foundation, or holding down bolts fixed to drainage to cavity
the concrete slab.
Locating sole plates Anchor fixed to studs Note: Internal linings have not been shown for
(to structural engineers clarity. A service void may be specified
Example of holding down strap 10 mm maximum packing without
design)
Structural Engineer's approval
Sole plate may be levelled locally

with packers then grouted and fixed Packing under the steel frame
to Structural Engineer's
recommendations Structural shims or grout may be required under the steel frames to level them and transfer
vertical load. Longer frame to foundation fixing may be needed to allow for the size of the gap.
Sole plate
· Less than 10mm; pack under each steel with pre-galvanised steel shims.
· 10mm-20mm; pack under each steel with steel shims and grout over length of sole plate.
Breather Membrane lapped 25mm · Over 20mm; refer to Frame Designer.
below bottom of sole plate
Packing of sole plates

If stainless steel straps are Structural packers
used, they should be grade installed below full
1.4301 steel to BS EN 10088 bearing area of
+/- 10 mm tolerance between outer face
and isolated from the studs with multiple stud
of sole plate and edge of supporting
neoprene gaskets or similar. base. Any projecting slab edges should clusters
Non-stainless connections be flashed over, or otherwise protected
should be isolated from the (Structural Engineer's tolerances may Structural packers
straps with suitable grommets be greater) installed below
and washers studs
The metal frame should be located entirely above DPC level. Where this is not
possible at level entrance ramps to the principal entrance door to dwellings only; a
Gap may be filled
thickness of corrosion protection equivalent to Z460 galvanising or a suitable
with structural grout
DPC bituminous coating could be applied to all components below DPC level. However,
or sealant to maintain
the access ramp should only be limited to the entrance door area only (not the entire
air tightness
perimeter) and provision for a slotted drainage and the ramp should be provided with
a gradient away from the door (see the 'Windows and Doors' section for level
threshold guidance). It is recommended that the inner leaf DPC is turned up
approximately 30mm above the screed to protect the bottom of the studs from
construction moisture and spillage, and weep-holes are provided at 900mm centres
to drain cavities at ground level.
© Insurance
Services Limited
Limited 20202020 179
179 EXTERNALWALLS
EXTERNAL WALLS
6.6.4
6.6.4 LIGHTGAUGE
LIGHT GAUGE STEEL
STEEL FRAME:
FRAME:Thermal
Thermalinsulation, breather
insulation, membranes,
breather VCL’s
membranes, and internal
VCL's liningslinings
and internal
Thermal insulation
Rigid thermal insulation material should be fixed to the outside face of the steel studs to create a 'warm frame' construction.
Insulation installed to the outside of the steel frame structure should have third-party certification for this application and retain a minimum of a clear 50mm
cavity.
The outer layer of insulation should also be covered with a breather membrane adjacent to the cavity.
External walls should be subject to U-Value and condensation risk calculations. A wall build up will be considered satisfactory if there is no calculated risk of
surface or interstitial condensation at any time of the year, and it fulfils the minimum National Requirement for thermal performance. Special consideration
should be given to condensation risk where non breathable insulation products are installed on the outside of the steel frame structure. Joints between foil
faced external insulation boards, must not be taped as this forms a vapour control layer on the cold side of the insulation.
Where the condensation risk has been assessed and shown to be negligible additional insulation may be placed between the studs. The additional insulation
should be placed in contact with the studs to minimise air gaps and prevent local condensation.
The following are acceptable:
· Mineral wool to BS EN 13162*

· FR (flame retardant) grade expanded polystyrene to BS EN 13163
150mm vertical lap
· FR (flame retardant) grade extruded polystyrene to BS EN 13164
· Rigid polyurethane foam and polyisocyanurate to BS EN 13166
· Cellular glass to BS EN 13167*
*Compressible insulation for use between the metal studwork
Breather membranes
A breather membrane should be provided to the 'cold side' of the steel frame. Breather membranes should be capable of allowing water vapour from within
the frame to pass out into the cavity and protect the sheathing and frame from external moisture. These should be: Repair of damaged
breather membrane
· Vapour-resistant to less than 0.6MNs/g when calculated from the results of tests carried out in accordance with BS 3177 at 25ºC, and with a relative
humidity of 75%. 100mm
· Capable of resisting water penetration. 150 mm
· Self-extinguishing.
· Durable.
· Adequately strong when wet to resist site damage.
· Type 1 to BS 4016 in areas of very severe exposure to wind-driven rain.
If foil faced insulation is not used, then an independent breather membrane should be provided to the 'cold side' of the insulation.
Breather membranes should be lapped by a minimum of 100mm at horizontal joints, and a minimum of 150mm at vertical joints. If breather membranes are 150 mm
trimmed flush with the edges of wall panels, additional strips of breather membrane, at least 300mm wide, should be supplied and site fixed over panel
junctions. The location of steel studs should be clearly marked on the outer face of the breather membrane to ensure that cladding fixings are installed into 100mm
steel studs.
Vapour control layers (VCL)
A vapour control layer should be provided to the warm side of the steel frame. VCL's resist the passage of water vapour from within the dwelling and should
be a minimum of 500-gauge polyethylene sheet or vapour control plasterboard*. The vapour resistance (not resistivity) of the vapour control material should
2
not be less than 250 MNs/g or 0.25 Pa/m .
*Vapour control plasterboard should only be used subject to a condensation risk analysis demonstrating the suitability of the wall build up.
Installation
Vertical joints
A sheet membrane vapour control layer (VCL) should be: staggered
100mm
horizontal laps
· Lapped and sealed by at least 100mm at joints.
· Lapped over studs, rails or noggins.
· Sealed around service penetrations.
· Lapped and sealed fully into window and door reveals.
· Lapped and sealed with DPM/DPC at the junction with the ground floor/foundation.
· Able to accommodate differential movements.
Small holes in the VCL should be sealed with a suitable self-adhesive tape. Larger holes should be re-covered with new laps located over adjacent studs and
rails.
Plasterboard
Plasterboard should be to BS 1230 and not less than:
· 9.5mm for stud spacing up to 450mm, or

· 12.5mm for stud spacing up to 600mm.
To provide fire resistance fire rated boards should be used and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

EXTERNAL WALLS
6.6.5
6.6.5 LIGHTGAUGE
LIGHT GAUGE STEEL
STEEL FRAME:
FRAME:Cavity
Cavitybarriers
barriers
Locations of cavity barriers and Cavity barrier locations

open perpends
Note: Lightweight cladding systems doors.
will require a cavity barrier along the · Between an external cavity wall and a compartment wall or
bottom of the cavity compartment floor.
Cavity barriers/firestopping · Around meter boxes in external walls.
Note: Cavity barriers may also be at head of party wall · Around service penetrations in external walls e.g. extract duct or boiler
flue.
required between walls and floors
Flats · To sub-divide extensive cavities; please refer to National Regulations
within the building, consult National
for specific requirements.
Regulations for further guidance
Cavity barriers shall be installed:

· So they fully close the cavity.
Semi-detached · So the ends are tightly butted (or adequately lapped in accordance with
Cavity barriers are required the manufacturers instructions) to form a continuous barrier.
at eaves and verge house · Backed by studs, rails or floor joist.
A cavity tray should be proved directly above a horizontal cavity barrier and
lapped at least 100mm behind the breather membrane (except at eaves and
verges).
Cavity barriers are required to prevent the spread of smoke and flame within
concealed spaces.
It is important that cavity barriers should extend through PIR insulation.
Scotland and Northern Ireland Cavity barriers may be constructed from:

intermediate floors · Steel at least 0.5mm thick.
· Proprietary 3rd party approval mineral wool product.
· Calcium silicate, cement-based or gypsum-based at least 12mm thick.
Cavity barriers are required at · An independently assessed and certified proprietary product.
the junction of party floors
Cavity tray above horizontal cavity barrier -
Open perpends installed at Steel frame
Open perpends installed
maximum 900 mm centres
with at least two over each opening
wall cavity
Breather membrane
Electric or gas meter box junction of the external wall and DPC cavity tray lapped
recessed into cladding party wall 100mm behind breather
membrane
Cavity barriers are required

Note: Scotland and Northern Ireland may require additional drainage and
ventilation to the cavity, please see the regional Building regulations for further
openings Cavity barrier
guidance.
Sheathing board
© MD
© MD Insurance
Insurance Services
Services Limited
Limited 2020
2020 181
181 EXTERNALWALLS
EXTERNAL WALLS
6.6.6
6.6.6 LIGHT GAUGE
LIGHT GAUGESTEEL
STEEL FRAME: Openingsininexternal
FRAME: Openings externalwalls
walls
Window and door installations Typical window reveal detail (normal exposure)
Lintels
Please refer to the 'Windows and Doors' guidance for installation requirements · The lintel should be the correct length and width for the opening
of frames including maximum gaps and fixings. and cavity width, the bearing length should be at least 150mm.
VCL lapped with DPC and DPM · Continuity of the masonry bond should be maintained at supports
Typical vertical section through window opening for beams and lintels.
Vertical DPC lapped with · Lintels should be insulated to prevent excessive thermal bridging.
Inner leaf VCL in window reveal
Do not:
Preformed rigid cavity tray lapped up
100mm behind breather membrane Window fixing strap · Support lintels and beams on short lengths of cut blocks or
make-up pieces.
Steel lintel (retaining clips when required) · Apply load to lintels or beams before the masonry supporting has
Breather membrane hardened.

Moisture and air tightness Correct method of brick bond around lintels
Note: This must also be fire resistant seal between window frame
unless an alternative method of fire and window reveal/DPC
resistant cavity closure is also provided
that meets the Building Regulations
VCL lapped with DPC and DPM
DPC between timber cavity barrier and

The frame should overlap the cavity by a Outer leaf masonry cladding returned into
minimum of 30mm window reveal and lapped with VCL
In this instance the steel frame has
been shown with an external Wall tie
sheathing board
Allowance for differential movement
Typical rebated window frame detail for areas
of very severe exposure
Breather membrane
Wall tie Inner leaf

Sheathing board
Note: Internal linings have not been shown
for clarity. A service void with additional Breather membrane
insulation may be specified Insulated cavity closer
Note: This must also be fire Supporting masonry fully coursed
In this instance the steel frame has been shown with an external into the wall - accepted
resistant unless an alternative
sheathing board
method of fire resistant cavity
closure is also provided that
Openings meets the Building Regulations Incorrect method of brick bond around lintels
All openings including doors, windows, flues and ventilation ducts, should be
designed and constructed to maintain:
Fire performance: Vertical DPC

· Internal reveals require equal fire resistance to the rest of the structure.
· Window fixing straps should not compromise the integrity of any Appropriate 'non hardening' mastic
fire-resistant reveal linings. sealant to be provided between
· Cavity barriers should be installed in the external wall cavity around the frame and masonry reveal Outer leaf
perimeter of openings.
· If profiled steel lintels are used as cavity barriers, triangular gaps behind 25mm
lintels, which occur at each end, should be closed with careful positioning of In this instance the steel frame has
adjacent cavity barriers. been shown with an external
25mm rebate to allow for building sheathing board
Acoustic performance: and window fixing tolerance
· Seal gaps between steel frame wall and the element being installed into the
opening.
· The element being installed into the opening may have a minimum acoustic When installing window/door frames in a checked rebate, allow for the frame to be deeper:
requirement.
· To accommodate the 25mm rebate, and;
Weather tightness and thermal performance, including thermal bridging and air · To allow for opening lights to open clear of the masonry/render.
tightness:
· The element being installed into the opening is likely to have a minimum
thermal performance. Windows and doors
· Seal gaps between the steel frame wall and the element being installed into Supporting masonry not fully
the opening to provide thermal performance, weather tightness and air coursed into the wall - not accepted
In areas of very severe exposure, checked rebates should be provided. The frame should be set
tightness. back behind the outer leaf and should overlap.
· Cavity trays should be installed over the heads of all openings, lapped
behind the breather membrane by a minimum of 100mm. A flashing may be
acceptable for some types of claddings. For further information on windows and doors please refer to the 'Windows and Doors' section.
· Lap cavity barrier DPC with internal VCL around openings. Where no DPC
is used, breather membrane should be lapped with internal VCL.

EXTERNAL WALLS
6.6.7
6.6.7 LIGHT GAUGE
LIGHT GAUGE STEEL
STEELFRAME:
FRAME:Cavity
Cavitytrays
trays

Cavity trays should rise at used in conjunction with lintels above openings, to protect the top surface of cavity insulation at horizontal cavity barriers and where the cavity is bridged.
Breather outer to the inner leaf, be Cavity trays are to be provided:
membrane self-supporting or fully
bearing 150mm · Above cavity insulation that is not taken to the top of the wall, unless that area of wall is protected by impervious cladding.
tray.
Cavity trays to lap behind breather
membrane by at least 100mm Ring beams or floor slabs that partially bridge the cavity, e.g. podium decks or when dimensional accuracy cannot be guaranteed, should be protected by a
continuous cavity tray.
Preformed stop end bonded to
cavity tray clipped to lintel to
Weep-holes
coincide with perpend weephole
Continuous cavity tray over
Weep-holes must be installed at no more than 900mm centres to drain water from cavity trays and from the concrete cavity infill at ground level. At least two
two openings and a small pier weep-holes must be provided to drain cavity trays above openings.
Cavity trays should be continuous 900mm Weep-holes in exposure zones 3 and 4 should be designed to prevent ingress of wind-driven rain (including ground level).
short piers Stop-ends
600mm
Proprietary cavity tray systems
over piers less than At stepped and lower storey abutments, and around corners in low rise external walls, a proprietary cavity tray system should be used.
600mm wide
Details of flashing can be found in the 'Roofs' Cavity tray and lintel
Flat roof abutment cavity tray construction
stepped cavity tray
stepped cavity tray details. Stepped cavity trays Cavity tray (minimum height Rigid insulation
to lap behind breather membrane by at least within cavity of 150mm)
100mm. Additional measures may be needed Racking/sheathing
to ensure the breather membrane adequately Weep holes must be installed at board
laps the tray to prevent moisture ingress behind no more than 900mm centres to Breather membrane
the stepped cavity tray drain water from the cavity trays.
At least two weep holes must be
Profile line Cavity tray lapped
provided to drain cavity trays over
Heel of tray should be installed against profile openings up 100mm behind
breather membrane
Mortar should be raked out under the cavity
End tray to have
tray to a depth of 25mm Lead cover flashing linked under
two stop ends
and weep hole the cavity tray Lintel
Steps and staggers
Roof covering to be taken up Cavity barrier around
Particular care is needed in adequately window opening
preventing the ingress of water in a terrace of behind cover flashing for a
buildings with steps and staggers. A minimum lap of 65mm
proprietary cavity tray system should be used. Note: This must also be
Stepped cavity trays are required at all pitched fire resistant unless an
Profile depth calculated Tilting fillet to support roof
(stepped) roof abutments with external cavity alternative method of fire
by the depth of batten + covering at junction
walls, e.g. attached garages or staggered resistant cavity closure is Weephole
terraces. The bottom (last) cavity tray must be also provided that meets
the height of the flashing supplied with two stop-ends and an Roof structure as per design
the Building Regulations
associated weep-hole, allowing all water to
escape over the lower roof covering. For
masonry, lead cover flashings should be
©©MD EXTERNAL WALLS

MDInsurance Services Limited 2020 183
Insurance Services Limited 2020 183
EXTERNAL WALLS
6.6.8
6.6.8 LIGHTGAUGE
LIGHT GAUGE STEEL
STEEL FRAME:
FRAME:Exposure
Exposurecategory
categoryof of
sites andand
sites suitability of masonry
suitability of masonry
Dealing with areas of high exposure to frost and wind-driven rain Brick and block suitability
The design and construction of masonry cavity walls should be suitable for the site specific exposure location. Exposure
Facing bricks must have a suitable level of durability and particular attention should be paid to the brick's resistance
Frost attack to frost and moisture. Further information can be found in 'Appendix C - Material, Products, and Building Systems'.
If there are any doubts about the suitability of facing bricks in areas of severe frost exposure, written clarification by the brick manufacturer confirming the suitability of the brick
Colour variation of bricks
should be provided. There is usually a variation in the colour of bricks of the same style. To prevent patching of colour, it is recommended
that at least three packs of bricks are opened at any one time and mixed randomly to ensure that the wall is of an
even colour.
Wind-driven rain
· The exposure to wind-driven rain. Frogged bricks have a depression in the face of the brick. Normally, they should be laid with the major depression, or
· The correct type of construction, including the correct application of insulation. frog, facing up so that it is fully filled with mortar during laying. This ensures optimum strength, helps to increase the
· The correct level of workmanship and design detailing, particularly around window and door openings. mass of the wall (to give good sound insulation) and prevents the possibility of standing water within the structure,
which could freeze. Bricks with a directional surface texture are intended to be laid frog up.
Efflorescence
Additional requirements in a coastal location Efflorescence is a white deposit on the face of masonry brought about by water moving through the wall, dissolving
soluble salts and depositing them when the water evaporates during drying out.
Where developments are within a coastal location Dornoch Efflorescence is best prevented by:
additional Warranty requirements should be met.
For the purpose of this Technical Manual we are Inverness
Shetland Orkney
considering sites within 5km inland from the shore line Islands Islands Mortar suitability
or sites located in 'tidal' estrine areas where they are Aberdeen
General
within 5km of the general shoreline. A mortar type should be chosen in accordance with the guidance given in the 'External Walls' and 'Materials,
Products, and Building Systems' sections, or as recommended by the brick or block manufacturer. To ensure
Further information on Warranty requirements within a Perth Exposure zones Exposure to wind driven adequate durability, strength and workability, lime and/or air entraining plasticisers may be added to cement in
Dundee
rain (litres/m2 per spell) accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Cement and sand alone should not be used unless a strong
coastal location can be found in 'Appendix B - Coastal Stirling
mix is specifically required by the design.
Locations'.
Edinburgh Dunbar Very severe 100 or more
Glasgow Batching
Severe 56.5 to less than 100 Keep batching and mixing equipment clean to avoid contamination with materials used previously, mortar should be
Ayr mixed by machine, or use ready mixed retarded mortars.

Mixing
Newcastle Mortar should be carefully and consistently proportioned and then thoroughly mixed using a mechanical mixer, except
Dungannon Carlisle for very small quantities.
Belfast
Workington
Alston
Middlesbrough
Note: Masonry cladding to steel frames
Whitby map can only be made by site-specific Protection
calculations using BS 8104 "Assessing All new masonry work should be protected during construction by covering it to ensure that walls are not allowed to
Ripon
exposure of walls to wind driven rain" become saturated by rain water or dry out too quickly in hot weather, are protected against frost attack, the risk of
York and the table above. efflorescence and line staining and movement problems are reduced.
Hebden Bridge
Skelmersdale Hull
Manchester Any temporary cover should not disturb the new masonry.
Liverpool
Doncaster Grimsby
Sheffield Working in adverse weather
Stafford
Precautions should be taken when necessary to maintain the temperature of bricks, blocks and mortar above 3°C.
Nottingham
Shrewsbury The use of anti-freeze as a frost resistant additive in mortar is not permitted. Further guidance can be found in
'Appendix C - Material, Products, and Building Systems'.
Leicester
Birmingham
Norwich During prolonged periods of hot weather, when masonry units can become very dry, absorbent clay bricks may be
Brecon Northampton wetted to reduce suction. Low absorption bricks, i.e. engineering bricks, should not be wetted. For calcium silicate
Cambridge and concrete units, the mortar specification may need to be changed in order to incorporate an admixture to assist
Gloucester
with water retention. On no account should masonry units or completed work be saturated with water.
Cardiff
Swindon Stability during construction
Bristol London
Staines Gable walls should be appropriately propped prior to the construction of any roof. When a floor or roof slab of a
Gatwick
building is used for the temporary storage of building materials, the loading should not exceed the design loading for
Exeter Dover the element.
Poole Southampton
Plymouth
Brighton
Restraint of walls
Walls should be adequately restrained at floors, ceilings and verges in accordance with the relevant Building
Regulations.
EXTERNAL WALLS
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 184
184
EXTERNAL WALLS
6.6.9 LIGHT
6.6.9 LIGHTGAUGE
GAUGESTEEL
STEEL FRAME:
FRAME: Masonry
Masonrycladding
cladding
Wall ties
Wall ties should meet the following provisions: Horizontal section

· The wall ties should be tested to BS EN 845-1 and carry a CE Wall panel with brick cladding
marking. The wall tie manufacturer should provide a site specific fixing
schedule, which details the centres of the fixings, the type of fixings
and the spacing of the wall ties. The wall tie systems should be tested Sheathing
to BS EN 845-1 and carry a CE marking. External
board
· External skin of brick should be attached to the metal frame with brickwork
either epoxy coated galvanized ties or austenitic stainless steel ties Cavity tray lapped up 100mm Wall tie rails must
(to DD140, BS 12, BS 5268, BS 8200). behind breather membrane be secured
· Ties are normally fixed in vertical channels, these channels are then Cavity mechanically
fixed through the sheathing board or insulation board to the light insulation through to the steel
gauge steel frame with stand-off screws (screws should be isolated Steel lintel (retaining clips when frame stud
from the channels with neoprene or similar washers). required). Horizontal cavity barrier
Wall tie
· The wall tie rails, ties, and fixings, should come as a 'kit' supplied by above opening may be omitted with
the manufacturer. Wall tie systems made up from off the shelf steel lintel as substitute. Some steel
Steel
products will not be acceptable for Warranty. lintels require a timber pinch batten,
frame
· The wall tie system 'channels' should be fixed to ensure the fixings go and/or may require ends closing.
into the centre line of the steel frame studs. Refer to manufacturers details
· If insulation is to be placed on the cavity face of the steel frame it Breather
should be rigid insulation and be compatible with the manufactures membrane
requirements of the wall tie rail system. Rigid insulation should not be
taped.
· The wall tie length should be long enough to achieve the minimum Vertical DPC lapped with VCL in
overlap of the external masonry skin as specified by the manufacturer. Min 50mm
window reveal residual
This should not be less than 50mm.
cavity
· For steel frame external masonry walls, a 50mm minimum residual
cavity is to be provided.
opening
· Ties should be spaced at jambs of openings, a maximum of 300mm
vertically within 225mm of the masonry reveal. Additional studs may
Note: Note: This must also be fire
be needed to achieve this.
resistant unless an alternative
· Ties should be inclined away from the frame.
method of fire resistant cavity
· Ties should be fixed to the studs, not the sheathing. Rigid cavity insulation
closure is also provided that
· Ties should accommodate differential movement between the frame
meets the Building Regulations
and the cladding. If insulation is to be placed on the cavity face of the
steel frame it should be rigid insulation and be
Cavities compatible with the manufactures requirements of the
Flexible ties must be fixed to studs in wall tie rail system. Rigid insulation should not be
A masonry cladding to a steel frame must have a separating cavity that the panel through sheathing and taped
meets the following provisions: breather membrane
· The cavity should have a minimum width of 50mm. When studs are at 600mm centres, vertical dimension
· It is to be kept clear from mortar 'snots' to ensure cavity is not bridged. The wall tie rails, ties, and fixings, of wall ties should be 375mm maximum (i.e. every 5
· An approved wall tie system to tie the masonry leaf to the steel frame should come as a 'kit' supplied by the courses). When studs are at 400mm centres, vertical
must be provided. manufacturer. Wall tie systems made dimension may be 525mm maximum (ie every 7
up from off the shelf products will not courses)
Brick suitability be acceptable for Warranty
Breather membrane
· Facing bricks must have a suitable level of durability and particular Note: Top row of ties should be
attention should be paid to the bricks resistance to frost and moisture. 225mm below top of brickwork (at
· Bricks should be capable of supporting proposed loads. eaves and verge levels) Sheathing
· Bricks should comply with BS EN 771 and PD6697.
· Frost resistant bricks should be used in areas of prolonged frost.
First set of ties maximum 300mm DPC
above DPC line
Masonry cladding
· Cavity trays must be provided above all cavity barriers, windows and
door openings, etc. DPC
· Cavity trays should extend 150mm either side of the door or window
openings and have stopped-ends.
· A continuous cavity tray should be provided where intermediate floors Open perpends at ground level at
meet the external wall. max 900mm centres
· Soft joints should be provided to allow for differential movement. A
gap of 1mm per metre of masonry should be provided at openings
and soffits.
· All brick support angles should be installed by the manufacturer or
specialist contractor.
© MD
© MD Insurance
Insurance Services
Services Limited
Limited 20202020 185
185 EXTERNALWALLS
EXTERNAL WALLS
6.6.10LIGHT
6.6.10 LIGHT GAUGE
GAUGE STEELFRAME:
STEEL FRAME:Allowing
Allowing for
for movement
movementininexternal
externalmasonry
masonry
spacing of openings

Vertical movement joints should be provided to the outer leaf of cavity walls as indicated in the table
below. The first joint from a return should be no more than half the dimension indicated in the table.
Movement joints below the DPC should also be provided at major changes in foundation level and
at changes in foundation design. Wall ties at a maximum of 300mm vertical centres, and 225mm Wall ties should be provided at
horizontally, should be provided on each side of movement joints. 300mm maximum vertical
spacing either side of the
Compressible filler, such as polyurethane foam, should be used to form the joint and be sealed to expansion joint
material is used to control the sealant depth, it will also provide a compressible space into which the
sealant can deform.
Where a backing material is used, the following must be considered:

· Allows sufficient flexibility so not to impede lateral movement (compressible to about 50% of its
original thickness), fibreboard is not acceptable.
The use of bed joint reinforcement may allow the distance between expansion joints to be
increased, however this should be designed by a Structural Engineer.
Clay brickwork 12m 15mm Wall ties should be provided Wall ties Movement joint.
(spacing up to 15m may be within 225mm horizontal
possible if sufficient restraint spacing of the movement joint
is provided - consult Movement joint
designer)
Calcium silicate 7.5-9m 10mm

Concrete brickwork (1) 6m 10mm
joint sealant
Concrete blockwork (used in 6m 10mm
Movement joint Compressible
outer leaf)
filler
Note: accommodate movement
The first joint from a return should be not more than half the dimension indicated in the table.
DPC
Where the finished
ground level is 600mm
or greater below the
horizontal DPC, the
movement joint should
600mm
be continued within
the external leaf of the
sub structure
External ground level Stainless Steel wall ties at 225mm
centres vertically, and within
EXTERNAL WALLS
© MD ©
Insurance Services
Services 2020 2020
Limited 186186
EXTERNAL WALLS
6.6.11 LIGHT
6.6.11 LIGHTGAUGE
GAUGESTEEL
STEEL FRAME:
FRAME: Feature
Featurestone
stonesurrounds
surrounds
and heads should not A soft joint is required between the
project into the cavity and top of the head and the steel support
sections) DPC/slip plane
over stool
Head to be fully bedded on jamb DPC full length and

width of sill bed
Stainless steel dovetail Stainless steel dowel drilled equally
anchor into head and jamb/mullion

and bottom with stainless When stone heads are being used, it
steel pins. Stainless steel is advisable to double up the cavity
frame-type cramps can trays - with one above the stone
also be used to give extra head to provide stop-ends and
stability at jambs weep-holes Note: The insulated cavity closer must also be fire
resistant unless an additional method of fire resisting
Cast stone jambs and mullions cavity closure is also provided that meets Building
Regulations.
Mortar:
jambs should be bedded into
stone should comply with
adjacent mortar joints as the
Standards for sand, lime,
and cement as set out in
BS 5390

over stool

structure

Sills

© MD
© MD Insurance
Insurance Services
Services Limited
Limited 20202020 187
187 EXTERNALWALLS
EXTERNAL WALLS
6.6.12 LIGHT
6.6.12 LIGHTGAUGE
GAUGESTEEL
STEEL FRAME:
FRAME: Claddings
Claddingssupported
supportedonon
steel frame
steel frame
Claddings General render conditions (using pre-blended bagged render)
More traditional claddings can include, amongst others, timber boarding, plywood and tile hanging. These types of cladding should be Weather conditions
fixed to battens and suitably attached at stud positions. For further details, refer to the 'External Walls - Claddings' section and the · For exposure zones where the wind driven rain is expected to be more than 75 litres per m² (classed as very severe) then checked reveals will be required. The
manufacturer's recommendations. render applied to the reveal must be of the same thickness as the wall render with an appropriate corner beading provided. A suitable non hardening' mastic
sealant must also be provided between window / door frame and masonry reveal.
Minimum cavity widths · Protection must be provided when applying renders in rain or other inclement weather. Application should cease in temperature below 5°C or where rapid
freezing is considered to be a potential threat.
· When applying in hot weather it is advisable that work coincides with the shaded areas of the building. During longer periods of hot and dry weather it may be
Steel frame external wall minimum cavity widths appropriate and necessary to apply an even mist spray of clean water to the substrate before application and to surface finish for a couple of days afterwards
Masonry 50mm subject to site and weather conditions.
· Cement products should not be applied to substrates which are frost laden or which have recently been subject to prolonged rain.
Render on unbacked lath 50mm · Do not render onto saturated substrates as this may affect the bond strength and cause lime bloom (discolouration), salts to occur and patchiness due to uneven
Render on backed lath or board 25mm suction.
· Local weather and site conditions must be taken into account by the applicator before any cement product is applied.
Timber 19mm · Care must be taken to protect cement and synthetic products soon after the application from rapid freezing and heavy rainfall. For other drying conditions i.e.
Tile hanging 25mm where there is direct exposure to sunlight or drying winds the render may require to be protected from the elements. This process is important to ensure complete
hydration of the products can take place.
· Where an application is not covered in these conditions further advice from the render manufacturer must be sought and submit a suitable manufacturer's
Render specification to the Warranty provider for approval.
Render on metal lath combined with a breather membrane should also be fixed to battens attached to studs. Application
Rendering should be in accordance with BS EN 13914-1:2005 and workmanship in accordance with BS 8000. In particular the following · 15mm is considered the minimum finished thickness of render applied to a masonry wall, either as a single spray coat or as a two coat hand application. Where
should be considered: structures are located in very severe weather rating location or within coastal locations, the depth of render may need to be increased to a minimum of 20mm and
a specialist manufacturer's specification will be required to support this.
· With traditional renders the quality of the sands used and design mix is as critical as is the reliance on good mixing techniques by · Please note: 5-6mm is considered the minimum finished thickness of render for applications of specialist insulated render systems. The render thickness will need
the applicator. to be increased where structures are located in very severe weather rating locations or within coastal locations and a specialist manufacturer's specification will
· Poor mixing ratios and low quality materials is often the reason traditional renders fail. For the purposes of this guidance, traditional be required to support this and approved by the Warranty provider.
hand mix using standard sand and cement is not accepted. Only a pre-blended bagged render system will be accepted as a · When ashlar detailing is required, it is recommended that a minimum depth to the back of the ashlar cut should be no less than 15mm and 20 - 25mm for
suitable render system that has a third party accreditation such as a BBA or ETA certification and backed up with a manufacturer's applications in very severe exposure zones or within coastal locations. To achieve this depth, it will require the finished thickness of the main render to be
specification. increased to accommodate this feature.
· Abutments between cement render and other cladding materials or components should be weather tight and allow for differential movement.
Where a specialist render system is being used the following conditions must be met: · Any joints in the wall where movement may occur should be continued through the rendering.
· Render should not bridge the damp proof course (DPC) and must be finished onto a durable render stop profile such as a proprietary uPVC bead or stainless
1) The product approval is based on the details and limitations of use described in a 'current' approved ETA, BBA, BRE etc. or other steel bead.
UKAS certified system specific to the relevant substrate being applied too. A copy of the certificate documents are to be supplied. · Renders will be reinforced as a minimum with an appropriate certified alkaline resistant fibreglass mesh at corners of all openings and penetrations. For
substrates that are prone to movement, an appropriate certified alkaline resistant fibreglass mesh will need to incorporated throughout the substrate.
2) For steel framed supporting structures, a drained cavity is required. A manufacturer's fully detailed project specific render system
· Where different materials are being rendered over, the incorporation of an appropriate certified alkaline resistant fibreglass mesh will be necessary to assist with
the possibilities of differential movement. The mesh must extend sufficiently over the different materials to resist against differential movement.
specification must be provided, which should include:
· Renders installed between pedestrian level and 6.0m above ground level will be designed to accommodate higher maintenance and impact loads in accordance
· Details of a suitable third party product approved external grade render board. with Table 2 of BS 8200.
· Details of preventing water penetration to the frame and internal finishes at all junctions, openings etc. · All surfaces must be clean, suitably dry and free from anything that may interfere with the adhesion of the material to be applied. The manufacturer's product data
· Other project specific requirements including specification of fixings suitable for the environment, breather membranes, sheets should be followed including the manufacturer's surface preparation and suitability checks in full.
allowance for movement due to shrinkage, appropriate weather seals at movement joints, adequate protection to rendering at · All blockwork mortar joints are to be flush pointed and should be fully cured before the application of the render.
cills, parapets etc. · The quantity of material required for a given area should be of the same batch number or if not the different batches must be thoroughly mixed together to avoid
shade variations.
· The installation should be completed by a competent, registered and certified installer that has been approved and accredited
· Full masking must be used to give protection to adjacent areas of work, windows, doors etc. and to give clean straight edges. It should be removed immediately
by the render system manufacturer before work commences.
after finishing coat has dried.
· Where the specification is in a high exposure zone or coastal location, then the requirements of condition 3 (below) must also
· Carefully remove splashes of material, in particular from glass or aluminium immediately as they may etch the surface and leave a permanent mark.
be met.
Note: Non drained cavity cladding constructions for steel frame external walls would not meet the Warranty requirements of this Materials
Technical Manual.
· Ensure the render being used is suitable for the substrate and is not too strong. Due to shrinkage differentials, avoid applying a thin base coat and a thicker top
3) For all render installations (including brick slip system applications) on all substrates types located in an exposure zone where the coat application as the shrinkage values of a thicker top coat could cause the render to delaminate from the base coat. The same effect is also caused by
wind driven rain is expected to be more than 75 litres per m²: A 10 year 'insurance backed' manufacturer's system guarantee is applying a very hard render over a softer base coat.
required, together with a full project specific specification that has also been accepted and approved by the Warranty provider. The · External rendering should comply as a minimum with BS.EN 13914-1:2005 but should also conform with the specialist render manufacturers recommendations.
proposal will require full system details to deal with all junctions, openings etc. together with other project specific requirements · Rendering products should be stored separately from other building and concreting sands.
provided by the render system company. The render system will need to be installed by a registered and certified installer who has · For bellcasts, other beads, and stops: uPVC bead or stainless steel bead is acceptable.
been approved and accredited by the render system manufacturer before work commences. · Only clean water should be used for mixing.
In all instances where a render system manufacturer's guarantee is required, full project specification and details are to be obtained from Cavity barriers
the render system manufacturer before any installation commences to ensure that conformity is met. Once work commences, the
installation must be inspected and signed off by a render system representative throughout the installation stage and at completion of the Where cavity barriers are required, they should be correctly fitted without gaps, the cavity filled and fixed with stainless steel staples or equally durable fixings, the
installation and confirm that the specification has been met. settlement joints below the external frames and soffits must be maintained.
The render system together with the backing wall to which they are applied should satisfactorily resist the passage of moisture to the Render systems which include a cavity as a secondary defence system should also incorporate cavity barriers within the cavity to prevent the spread of fire. The cavity
inside of the building. barriers should not obstruct more than 50% of the cavity and should be installed to the internal leaf to retain its ability to drain. The cavity barrier must activate and fully
close the cavity when exposed to fire.
Other claddings should only be used if they are provided with an acceptable third-party accreditation certificate.
Movement joints
Where cement render spans across an intermediate floor zone in timber frame construction, allow for differential movement by incorporating a movement joint. Vertical
movement joints should also be provided at maximum 5m centres.
© MD
EXTERNAL WALLS
6.6.13 LIGHT
6.6.13 LIGHTGAUGE
GAUGESTEEL
STEEL FRAME:
FRAME: Claddings
Claddingssupported
supportedonon
steel frame
steel continued
frame continued
Render boards on light gauge steel frame
A drained and vented cavity should be provided behind the render system on light gauge steel frame construction. The render board
should have the capability to be directly rendered to. It should not be a wood based board or cement particle board unless confirmed by
a UKAS or European equivalent third party product approval body that confirms it is acceptable for use in the conditions proposed. It
should also not be a board that is not approved by the render system manufacturer.
For metal lathing, these should be a proprietary BBA, BRE etc. or ETA certified non-corrosive mesh system and must be fully installed in
accordance with the mesh system manufacturer to vertical battens at the stud centres.
The minimum size of the cavity should be 19mm for both the render board or metal lathing applications. Unless proven otherwise, all
applications should be used with a water-resistant membrane. When the render board or metal lathing system is unbacked, the minimum
cavity should be 50mm. A DPC should be provided between unbacked render and timber battens.
When using external render board you should:
· Fix with the manufacturer's recommended non-corrosive fixings and all in accordance with the manufacturer's installation details,
ensuring the vertical board joints are staggered and do not follow directly in line with window, door reveals and other openings.
· Take care to ensure there are no gaps between the boards and appropriate weather seals are incorporated against walls and
frames.
· Ensure the boards are cut neat and square; follow the building lines and the screw heads are recessed just below the surface.
· Take particular note of movement joint and fire break requirements and specific application details.
· Ensure all door, window and other openings are fully sealed using an appropriate manufacturer's weatherproof system to provide a
primary weather barrier and to resist to movement.
Battens should be either 25mm x 38mm or 50mm x 50mm, preservative treated (BS 8417 or equivalent, hazard class 2) and fixed at
spacing's recommended in BS EN 13914-1: 2005. Fixings and preservatives should be compatible.
Battens should be fixed to each stud with annular ring nails of length at least twice the batten thickness plus the sheathing thickness.
Nails should be hot dipped galvanised stainless steel or equally durable.
© MD
© MD Insurance
Insurance Services
Services Limited
Limited 20202020 189
189 EXTERNALWALLS
EXTERNAL WALLS
6. 6.7
Claddings
External
Walls

6.7.1 CLADDINGS:
6.7.1 CLADDINGS: Generalcladding
General claddingrequirements
requirements
Curtain walling
Testing
General
Curtain walling systems should have third-party certification confirming satisfactory assessment, and comply with the requirements of the CWCT The curtain wall system will have either been tested and provided with a classification given in BS EN 13830, or if the curtain walling is of a custom
Standard for Systemised Building Envelopes, including the following sections: design, it would be tested to an appropriate standard of CWCT sequence A or B testing by an independent UKAS accredited test facility to ensure that
the system meets or exceeds the weather performance classification for the building taking into account the design parameters and project location.
· Part 1: Scope, terminology, testing and classification.
· Part 2: Loadings, fixings and movement. Pull-out or destructive testing of anchors should be carried out in accordance with BS 5080 and the Construction Fixings Association Guidance Note,
· Part 3: Air, water and wind resistance. Procedure for Site Testing Construction Fixings.
· Part 4: Operable components, additional elements and means of access.
· Part 5: Thermal, moisture and acoustic performance. The number of fixings to be assessed must be agreed on a project by project basis, as an understanding of the scope and size of the project would
· Part 6: Fire performance. determine the number of fixings tested. In addition, if there are varying types of fixings then each type should be tested. If the fixing is the same but the
· Part 7: Robustness, durability, tolerances and workmanship. structure varies, then each type of structure should be tested.
· Part 8: Testing.
BS 5080 requires 5 tests per type, however if a very large project is proposed, this could be increased to give more assurance on installation, e.g.
The CWCT Standard provides detailed guidance on performance and testing. every floor, one per side (e.g. North / East/ South/West). The scope and number of tests must be agreed with the Warranty Surveyor at the
commencement of the project, to allow sufficient time for testing to be planned in advance and made available to the Warranty Surveyor when
Dead and live loads should be transferred safely to the building structure without undue permanent deformation or deflection of any component. completed.
Imposed loads should be calculated in accordance with BS EN 1991. Movement should be accommodated without any reduction in performance. Site testing for water penetration of the joints to windows and doors in accordance with the CWCT test methods is recommended to check the site
workmanship of the building envelope as constructed. See CWCT Technical Note No. 41 for guidance on site hose testing.
Fixings and supports should be designed to accommodate specified loads and take account of the product manufacturer's recommendations.
Tolerances
CE marking is to be provided for all curtain walling covered by EN 13830 in buildings constructed after July 2013, and will therefore include the
following curtain wall types: Design should allow for the line, level, plumb and plane of the completed curtain wall to be within the acceptable tolerances of:
· Stick construction. · Line: +/-2mm in any one storey height or structural bay width, and +/-5mm overall.
· Unitised construction. · Level: +/-2mm of horizontal in any one structural bay width, and +/-5mm overall.
· Double skin walls. · Plumb: +/-2mm of vertical in any one structural bay width, and +/-5mm overall.
· Structural sealant glazing. · Plane: +/-2mm of the principle plane in any one storey height or structural bay width, and +/-5mm overall.
· Bolted glazing.
Insulated render systems
The completed system should incorporate cavity barriers and firestops and resist the spread of fire in accordance with the relevant Building
Regulations.
These are systems applied to the exterior walls of existing or new buildings, comprising of an insulant and a weather protective finish, of which there
are three main types:
The completed curtain wall system should resist the passage of water to the inside of the building allowing free drainage, not trapping water and
should have:
· Traditional renders and finishes.
· External and internal air and water seals.
· Thin coat renders and synthetic finishes.
· Drained and ventilated glazing rebates. · Pre-formed cladding materials.
Sealants should be specified in accordance with BS 6213 or BS EN 15651 and the performance determined by BS EN 11600 and the manufacturer's All insulated render systems must have appropriate third-party certification and a full manufacturer's specification suitable for the substrate must be
recommendations. provided. Ensure all building criteria's are maintained, e.g. drained cavities should not be blocked, the use of timber supports and blocks within the
insulated render system should not be used unless absolutely necessary. Ensure all fixtures and fittings which penetrate the insulation system e.g.
The system should be designed to minimise the risk of surface and interstitial condensation by the use of thermal breaks and a continuous vapour flues, ventilation pipes, water pipes etc. are appropriately sleeved and fully sealed in accordance with the system manufacturer's recommendations.
control layer. It should be designed to resist the passage of airborne and impact sound within the building with particular attention given to flanking
transmission at: All the render and cladding guidance/information stated in this section must be adhered to when applying an insulated render system.
· The edges of separating floors. The insulation type for the structure and application should be suitable for the intended purpose and, when required should be keyed to receive the
· The outer edges of separating walls. desired base coat and reinforcement. The insulated render system should be designed to minimise the risk of interstitial condensation and the effects
· The outer edges of partition walls. of thermal bridging. A condensation risk analysis should be carried out in accordance with BS 5250 to ensure the building fabric meets the required
· The junctions with roof constructions and parapets. performance standard. If a vapour control layer is required then this must be installed to the warm side of the insulation and the type must be approved
and suitable for the application.
Where curtain wall members run uninterrupted past floor slabs and partition walls, consideration must be given to structure-borne sound (impact
sound). In accordance with the render system manufacturer's recommendations appropriate trims should be provided at openings, corners, angles and
interfaces etc. Reinforcement mesh should be accommodated throughout the base coat application with additional reinforcement to vulnerable areas
The system should comply with BS 7671 requirements for electrical installations for electrical continuity and earth bonding, where it is required to form and corners of openings etc. If there are any concerns regarding straight line joints or other areas where there are unusual constructions requirements
part of a lightning protection system it must be designed to comply with the requirements of BS 6651. an additional layer of mesh should be installed to these locations.
The risk of bimetallic corrosion should be avoided through the isolation of dissimilar metals. Fixings and finishes to curtain walling must take into The dead and live loads should be transferred safely to the buildings structure without deformation or deflection of any component. Ensure the
account the location and corrosion category to ensure corrosion is avoided. Aluminium components must be robustly isolated from cementitious insulation continues around openings and other penetrations to maintain the thermal benefits.
products to mitigate corrosion.
Movement within the insulated render system should be accommodated without any reduction in performance.
The curtain wall system should not include materials liable to infestation attack by micro-organisms, fungi, insects or vermin.
Movement joints in the backing substrate should be accommodated through and by the insulated render system and formed in accordance with the
Packing of brackets to achieve surface tolerance is only permitted in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and shall not exceed the manufacturer's recommendations.
maximum depth stated in the designer's calculations.
When required an approved proprietary fixing should be used in accordance with the design requirements calculated. This generally consists of a
All packers for brackets supporting or restraining the curtain wall must be metal. minimum of 5 fixings per full insulation board / 8/m² elsewhere with additional fixings to corners and reveals. A pull out test report confirming fixing type
and length will be required in accordance with the Construction Fixings Association and made available to the Warranty Provider.

EXTERNAL WALLS
6.7.2 CLADDINGS:
6.7.2 CLADDINGS:General
Generalcladding
cladding requirements
continued
Proprietary preparation works

Cavity barriers within a ventilated rainscreen system must be appropriately selected, suitable for use and be aligned with the compartment wall and
· Ensure all fixings, cables, fence posts, light fitting, satellite dishes and other ancillary fittings and fixtures are temporarily removed to enable the floor. The cavity behind a rainscreen is deemed to be a moist zone and materials selected must not corrode, deteriorate or affect the performance of
easy application of the insulated render system. the cavity barrier during its design life. The minimum design width of the cavity wall will be determined by the panel joint type, i.e. whether it is sealed,
· Remove existing and provide temporary downpipes, avoid allowing the temporary downpipes to spill water over the render system. closed, labyrinth, baffled or open. Horizontal cavity barriers must allow for drainage and ventilation in the rainscreen cavity and a gap of 50% of the
· If required reset all drainage gulley's to accommodate the insulation system thickness. cavity width must be retained in front of the open state cavity barrier.
· If required ensure that any gap around the window and door frames is correctly sealed against rain penetration before application of the insulated
render system. Rainscreen systems and their materials must comply with the Building Regulations Approved Document B.
Where an insulated render system is used as a cladding to a timber or light gauged steel framed structure a drainage cavity will be required. A suitable Vertical tiling and slating
breather membrane must also be provided to protect the sheathing board and framing system from water penetration reaching the internal finishes.
Timber cladding Vertical slating with fibre cement slates

Fibre cement slates can be fixed to vertical surfaces and provides an attractive and weatherproof cladding on both timber frame and masonry
constructions.
Timber and boards for exterior use should be of a durable species, with sapwood excluded, or preservative treated by pressure impregnation using
preservatives suitable for use in hazard Class 3 in compliance with BS 8417:2003, or equivalent. Further guidance on the durability of timber is
The following guidance notes apply to this detail:
provided in 'Appendix C - Materials, Products, and Building Systems'.
· Use counter battens over masonry construction (38mm x 25mm minimum) to reduce direct fixing. Special masonry fixings may be required.
Where timber boarding or plywood spans across an intermediate floor zone in a timber frame construction, allow for differential movement caused
· Slate-and-a-half should be used in alternate courses at internal and external corners and adjacent to openings.
through timber shrinkage by incorporating a movement joint.
· Use Code 3 lead soakers to weather internal and external corners.
· Fix slates by two nails and one rivet, and slate-and-a-half by three nails and two rivets.
Where cavity barriers are required, they should be correctly fitted without gaps, fill the cavity and be fixed with stainless steel staples or equally
· Code 4 lead cover flashings should be used above and below openings, in accordance with Lead Sheet Association recommendations.
durable fixings.
Abutments between cladding and other weather-resisting elements should be neatly made, weather tight and allow for differential movement.
Vertical tiling with plain tiles
Workmanship should comply with BS 8000:5. Plain tiling is an excellent, weather proof and attractive cladding to the vertical walls of any building.
Feature and ornamental tiles may also be used with normal plain tiles to create decorative patterns. Fibre cement slates can also be used for vertical
Timber boarding
cladding.
Timber boarding should be at least 16mm thick, and allowance for moisture movement in boarding should be achieved by making tongues, joints or · Use counter battens over masonry construction (38mm x 25mm minimum) to reduce direct fixing. Special masonry fixings may be required.
overlaps at least 10% of the board width. · Ensure tiling details do not interfere with the opening of windows and doors.
· Lead flashings and soakers should be used around openings, in accordance with Lead Sheet Association details.
Timber boarding should be battened off the supporting background to provide a minimum 19mm cavity for draining and venting board. · Use double course of tiles at eaves, by laying first course of eaves/tops tiles with course of full tiles laid over.
· At the top of a wall or under a sill, use a course of eaves/tops tile laid over a course of full tiles. Dress a Code 4 lead cover flashing over by
Battens should be a minimum of 38mm wide, preservative treated and at maximum 600mm centres. A breather membrane should always be installed. 100mm.
Battens on timber frame should be fixed to each stud (and not to the sheathing) with annular ring nails of length at least twice the batten thickness plus · Use internal and external angle tiles at all 90° corners. Purpose-made 135° angle tiles are also available. For other angles, close mitre tiles and
the sheathing thickness (or plain shank nails of length 2.5 times the batten thickness plus the sheathing thickness). use Code 3 lead soakers.
· All tiles should be twice nailed.
Boards should be fixed to battens by face or secret nailing with annular ring nails at least twice the board thickness or plain shank nails at least 2.5
times the board thickness. Further guidance on tiles and slates can be found in the 'Roofs' section.
Butt joints at board ends should occur at battens. Nails should be either hot dipped galvanised, stainless steel or equally durable. Aluminium nails
should not be used with timber treated with a preservative containing copper. Galvanised nails should not be used with Western Red Cedar.
Rainscreen cladding systems
A rainscreen cladding system consists of a multi-layer construction of materials which is designed to provide a barrier to the weather on new or
existing buildings. The typical build-up would consist of a supporting airtight and water tight backing wall and rainscreen system.
The rainscreen should comprise of supporting brackets fixed to the backing wall, insulation between the brackets, a breather membrane, carrier
support rails fixed to the brackets, a ventilated and drained cavity and the rainscreen panels.
Rainscreen systems should have third-party certification confirming satisfactory assessment and comply with the requirements of the CWCT Standard
for Systemised Building Envelopes. The collation of individual testing of components does not provide an overall performance of the rainscreen
system or backing wall.
Dead and live loads should be transferred safely to the building structure without undue permanent deformation or deflection of any component.
Imposed loads should be calculated in accordance with BS EN 1991 and movement should be accommodated without any reduction in performance.
Fixings and supports should be designed to accommodate specified loads and take account of the product manufacturer's recommendations.
Rainscreen panels are generally lightweight and vulnerable to impact damage. The rainscreen must be able to resist impacts without causing safety
hazards. Testing and classification to CWCT Technical Note 75 and 76 may be required to demonstrate the rainscreen's material impact performance.
Design should allow for the line, level, plumb and plane of the completed rainscreen cladding to be within the acceptable tolerances of:
· Line: +/-2mm in any one storey height or structural bay width, and +/-5mm overall.
· Level: +/-2mm of horizontal in any one structural bay width, and +/-5mm overall.
· Plumb: +/-2mm of vertical in any one structural bay width, and +/-5mm overall.
· Plane: +/-2mm of the principle plane in any one storey height or structural bay width, and +/-5mm overall.

EXTERNAL WALLS
CONTENTS
7.
Contents
Internal
7.1 Masonry
7.2 Timber Stud
Walls 7.3
7.4
Metal Stud
General Requirements - Cavity Barriers and Fire Stopping


applicable to this specific Building Part sections as follows: app
Workmanship W
1. Fire stopping and cavity barriers are to be completed by a third-party approved contractor for all flats and 1.
apartments with a floor 4.5m above ground level.
Materials Ma
1. Fire stopping and cavity barrier materials are to have relevant third-party certification confirming suitability No
in its application.
De
Design 1.
1. Internal walls (including separating walls) shall be designed and constructed so that they:
b. Have adequate resistance to the effects of fire and surface spread of flame, in accordance with
relevant regional Building Regulations.
c. Are durable and resistant to moisture;
d.Provide suitable surfaces to receive a range of finishes.
2. Separating walls shall be designed and constructed so that they:
a. Have adequate resistance to the spread of fire between buildings;
b. Have adequate resistance to the passage of sound between buildings to meet the relevant
3. Separating walls between the dwelling area and garage within a Housing Unit shall be designed and
constructed so that they:
a. Have adequate resistance to the spread of fire between garage, and dwelling area;
b. Have an adequate thermal performance.
4. Internal surfaces that will be subjected to water from the use of a showerhead over a bath should be tiled
or have an appropriate alternative water-resistant finish.
5. Layouts indicating the positions of compartment walls/floors and other lines of fire resistance must be Lim
provided for all flats and apartments with a floor 4.5m above ground level and must demonstrate 1.
compliance with regional Building Regulations.

guidance.
INTERNAL WALLS
194
INTERNAL WALLS
7. 7.1
Masonry
Internal
Walls

7.1.1 MASONRY:
7.1.1 MASONRY:Internal
Internal masonry
masonry walls
walls
Internal non-loadbearing walls

The structural design of 'load bearing' walls
should to BS EN 1996
Roof ceiling
construction
Omit final course

until roof tiling is
completed
Partition
It is advisable to erect non-load bearing walls after the

Walls should not be roof tiling has been completed thus allowing deflection
supported off of timber to take place under dead load, thereby reducing the
joists and should be risk of cracking appearing in the ceiling finishes. If
restrained at floor level partitions are of brick or block, then alternatively the
final course can be omitted until roof tiling has been
completed.
Damp proof course (DPC) and damp proof

membrane (DPM)
Where an internal wall is built off a foundations

continuity of the DPM must be achieved.
Internal masonry walls should The internal wall should have a DPC, which is at least
Lintels over openings in masonry walls
be fully bonded or tied to the width of the internal wall and linked with the DPM
must be suitable for span and loading, and
adjacent external walls by a minimum of 100mm.
to manufacturers recommendations. Timber
lintels must not be used
Masonry internal walls must be

of the correct minimum
compressive strength for the
Note:
intended use (see relevant
regional Building Regulations)
1. Internal partitions should not be supported by
compressible layers forming part of a floating
floor unless suitable for that purpose.
2. Internal partitions between bedrooms or rooms
Masonry load bearing
containing WC's and other rooms, must achieve
partitions to be supported off
adequate sound resistance.
DPC to be provided and suitable foundations. Please
3. Internal masonry partitions should have a
linked to floor DPM see the 'Foundations' section
minimum density of 600kg/m³ and finished both
for further guidance
sides with 13mm of plaster.
Additional requirements may apply for Building

Regulations compliance. Please refer to the relevant
© MD
© Insurance Services Limited 20202020 196 INTERNAL WALLS
INTERNAL WALLS
7.1.2 MASONRY:
7.1.2 MASONRY:Internal
Internal masonry
masonry walls
walls
Internal masonry walls Beams and lintels
Foundations Beams and lintels shall be satisfactory for their purpose.

Below ground, load-bearing walls must be supported using a suitable foundation. Where the upper floors are supported
by a suitable beam or lintel, the load should be adequately transferable to the foundations. All structural masonry walls Items to be taken into account include:
should be provided with foundations.
· Loads and spans are in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Compressive strength · Wall and cavity thicknesses.
· Bearing capacity of the masonry supporting the lintel or beam.
The varying strengths of bricks and blocks mean that they have to be chosen in accordance with the proposed use of the
building. The recommended strengths of bricks and blocks to be used in buildings up to three storeys high are found in
Steel beams should be designed by a suitably qualified Structural Engineer and should have appropriate fire resistance to
'Appendix C - Materials, Products, and Building Systems' and the relevant regional Building Regulations.
meet the requirements of the regional Building Regulations.
Lateral restraint Where steel beams and columns are used on a project in a coastal location, please follow the requirements for additional
Lateral restraint is to be provided for load-bearing walls and separating walls at each floor level and the ceiling level below corrosion protection 'Appendix B - Coastal Locations'.
a roof.
Materials
Bonding and tying
Where a separating wall abuts an external wall, they may be tied or bonded together. Tied joints should be formed using
expanded metal strip, wall ties or equivalent fixings, at maximum 300mm vertical centres. Concrete or steel lintels are appropriate for use in masonry walls; support for masonry should not be provided by timber
lintels.
Concrete lintels should extend beyond each end of openings in masonry as follows:
Block bonding internal Block bonding internal walls
masonry walls to inner leaf to inner leaf using ties Minimum bearing lengths of lintels
Span (m) Minimum length of bearing (mm)
Up to 1.2 100
Over 1.2 150
Steel lintels should comply with the manufacturers installation guidance.
Where structurally necessary, provide padstones under the bearings of lintels and beams.
Non-load bearing partitions shall have acceptable strength and be adequately supported.
Method of supporting partitions
Masonry partitions should be supported on one of the following:
· A suitable foundation.
· Other masonry partitions or walls (wherever conceivable, the design of buildings should be such that the first floor
masonry partitions are an extension of those on the ground floor).
The external wall cavity needs to be closed at the junction with the separating wall with a flexible cavity stop, but not if the · Structural concrete floors.
cavity is fully filled with built-in insulation (where permitted). · Steel or concrete beams.
It may be necessary to use padstones at bearings where steel or concrete beams are to be used.
Masonry partitions should not be supported by timber joists or beams.
Allowance for the probable deflection of floors at the head of partitions is required to prevent the partition becoming
load-bearing. Allowance should be given in the design for the relatively flexible nature of the timber and the rigid nature of
masonry.
Walls and partitions that are supported off structural floors, should not be built directly off a compressible layer forming
part of a floating floor system.
© MD
© MD Insurance
Insurance Services
Services Limited
Limited 20202020 197
197 INTERNALWALLS
INTERNAL WALLS
7.1.3 MASONRY:
7.1.3 MASONRY:Party
Partywalls
walls
Sound insulation Fire stopping at roof level between party walls
Internal walls shall, where necessary, have adequate resistance to the transmission of sound. Fire stopping should be provided in accordance
Fire-stop between
Cavity barrier of batten and above with the relevant regional Building Regulations.
All separating walls in England and Wales may be built in accordance with Robust Details and meet the
mineral wool or underlay
requirements for Resistance to the passage of sound in the relevant Regional Building Regulations.
fire-resisting board · Party/separating walls should be finished
Compliance with the relevant Building Regulations can be demonstrated by either:
in boxed eaves 25mm below the top of the rafter line and a
Pre-completion testing soft fire-resistant packing, such as mineral
Pre-completion testing (PCT) is required in the following situations: wool, should be used to allow for movement
Vertical cavity in roof timbers and prevent distortion of the
· To all new build properties (including rooms for residential purposes), other than when the Developer has barrier omitted for roof tiles.
registered and built in accordance with Robust Details. clarity Fire-stop below
· Where the sound insulation construction is in accordance with the guidance given in the relevant regional underlay · The fire stopping should be continuous to
Building Regulations for resistance to the passage of sound. eaves level and a cavity barrier of
· Where the building is not built in accordance with the relevant regional Building Regulations. fire-resisting board or a wire reinforced
· The requirements of the Robust Details system have not been met. mineral wool blanket nailed to the rafter and
carefully cut to fully seal the boxed eaves
or should be installed.
Cavity closed at
Robust details eaves
The use of robust details as a means of providing adequate sound insulation applies only to party walls and
floors between different dwellings or flats. It is approved by Robust Details Ltd.
The robust design details are available in a handbook, which can be purchased from:
Robust Details Ltd, Unit 14, Shenley Pavilions, Chalkdell Drive, Shenley Wood, Milton Keynes, MK5 6LB
Tel 0870 240 8210 Fire resistance Fire stopping within the cavity on the party wall line
www.robustdetails.com Typically, in buildings, a half-hour or one-hour

fire-resistance from both sides is required to satisfy
Robust Details Ltd may undertake monitoring to check on the performance achieved in practice. the relevant regional Building Regulations with regard Party wall
to fire separation between buildings and/or
Wall ties for cavity separating walls compartments within buildings.
Third-party
To provide structural stability, the two leaves of a masonry cavity separating wall should normally be tied Compartment walls that are common to two or more approved insulated
together. buildings should run the full height of the building in a firestop
continuous vertical plane and should be continued
Sound transmission across the cavity should be limited by the type of tie and spacing. through the roof space.
Ties should be specified in accordance with the System Designer's recommendations for separating walls. The Where a compartment wall meets another external
type of tie and spacing should limit sound transmission across the cavity. wall or floor junction fire resistance should be
maintained. External wall
To limit sound transmission, metal tie straps should be:
· No more than 3mm thick.

· Fixed below ceiling level.
· Spaced at least 1.2m apart horizontally.
Thicker ties, fixed at ceiling level or more closely spaced, will increase sound transmission through the cavity.
Minimum masonry thickness to achieve fire resistance
Chases in party walls
1
Material 2 hour FR 1 hour FR
Chases in masonry walls for service pipes and cables should be avoided. Where unavoidable, chases should:
Brick 90mm thickness 90mm thickness
· only be made in solid masonry (not hollow blocks).
· a horizontal chase must not exceed 1/6 the thickness of the single leaf. Block 90mm thickness 90mm thickness
· a vertical chase must not exceed 1/3 the thickness of the wall.
· Electric sockets should be staggered either side of a party wall. All internal, separating and compartment walls should have the fire resistance required by the relevant regional Building Regulations.
Penetrations in fire resisting masonry construction must be designed to meet the requirements of the Building Regulations.
Fire stopping in apartments and flats with a floor over 4.5m will have additional requirements. Please see 'Internal Walls - General Requirements - Cavity Barrier and
Fire Stopping' for further guidance.
© MD
INTERNAL WALLS
7.1.4 MASONRY: Single skin party wall spandrel panels in cold roofs
7.1.4 MASONRY: Single skin party wall spandrel panels in cold roofs
Single party wall spandrel panels on masonry walls in a cold roof space
Spandrel panel construction

Spandrel panels are generally a softwood structural frame with head and soleplates with vertical studs at
600 centres. The typical section sizes are 47mm x 72mm where joints are plated and 38mm x 89mm where Figure 1 - Typical head arrangement
joints are nailed. The designer should provide supporting calculations for the design of the spandrel panel
upon request.
Fire resistance Roof trusses Head restraint may be achieved through timber
Fire resistance should be provided on a site-by-site basis; however generally for party walls a minimum of bracing. Requirements for the spandrel panel
60 minutes' fire resistance from both sides is required. Plasterboard should be fixed at a minimum of 300 head restraint are as follows:
centres with plasterboard screws, the screws should penetrate a minimum of 25mm into the timber studs,
Timber ledger -
and joints of the plasterboard should be over timber studs or noggins and staggered.
Fixed to a minimum · Lateral bracing at a maximum 2m centres.
2 vertical studs · Minimum bracing section 25mm x 100mm,
In the case of a fire the party wall the spandrel panels should be designed to remain in place should one fixed using 2 x 3.35 x 65mm galvanised
side of the roof structure be burnt away, as a result party wall spandrel panels should be restrained from wire nails to top edge of the timber ledger.
both sides. · Timber ledger minimum section 45mm x
Bracing section 72mm and minimum length 900mm.
Party wall spandrel panels for ease of handling may consist of a number of panels, it is important that these extending a minimum · Timber ledger screw-fixed with minimum
panels are suitably jointed as not to impair the required fire resistance of the panel. Fire stopping should of 3 trusses and fixed 100mm-long screws to at least two vertical
also be provided above the panel between the roofing membrane and in between the battens, the fire to the top of the studs within the panel.
stopping should continue into the boxed soffits. timber ledger · Lateral bracing should be fixed to a
minimum of three trusses. (Note: 3.1mm
General considerations machine nails may be used in lieu of
Below are some general considerations for party wall spandrel panels: 3.35mm standard wire nails).
Spandrel panel
· Fire resistance should be provided on a site-by-site basis; however generally for party walls a minimum
of 60 minutes, should be achieved. Note: Fire stopping omitted
· Plasterboard should be fixed at a minimum of 300 centres with plasterboard screws, the screws should for clarity
penetrate a minimum of 25mm into the timber studs, joints of the plasterboard should be over timber
studs or noggins and staggered.
· Spandrel panels should provide suitable sound resistance. In a cold roof where masonry party walls are
used in conjunction with a single piece panel, the masonry walls should extend a minimum of 300mm
above the ceiling line and incorporate suitable fire stopping to close the cavity. Party walls should be
constructed in accordance with robust details or sound tested.
· Party wall spandrel panels should be fixed to the head of the wall this can be achieved with the use of
Figure 2 - Alternate head arrangement
vertical restraint straps at centres specified by the designer. These are typically placed at a minimum of
1200mm centres and face fixed to coincide with stud positions. The strap length should ensure a
minimum of two fixings into the panel framework and three fixings into the blockwork, into a minimum
Head restraint may be achieved through
of 2 blocks (See figure 5). Noggings
metal restraint straps. Requirements for the
· The panel should also be restrained at roof level this should be on both sides of the panel and should
spandrel panel head restraint are as follows:
be in accordance with the design typically at 2m centres. Common methods of achieving this are; fixing
a timber ledger to the face of the spandrel panel to at least 2 vertical studs and fixing a timber to the top
· Lateral bracing to be fitted at apex and Restraint
of the timber ledger, which extends back over a minimum of three trusses at 2m centres. Or using
along rafters and ceiling joists maximum strap -
restraint straps at 2m centres (this may commonly need to be increased to 1.8m centres to coincide
two-metre centres (no more than 1.25m Fixed over
with the vertical studs) fixed to vertical studs within the panel and extending back over three trusses, centres for dwellings over three storeys three trusses
these straps should be supported by noggins in between the truss (see figure 1 and 2). The restraint or over two storeys in Scotland).
should not impair the fire resistance of the panel. · Minimum 38mm x 63mm noggings fixed
· As with a masonry cavity, fire stopping should be provided at the head of the spandrel panel and be between at least three trusses.
continuous into the soffit area (see figure 3). · Metal restraint strap fixed to noggings
with eight 3.75mm x 30mm square
Acoustic requirements twisted nails evenly spaced.
· End of metal restraint strap to be
Spandrel
Spandrel panels should meet the regional Building Regulations. If robust details are being used it is screw-fixed to studwork within spandrel
panel
important that the construction of the party wall is in conjunction with the robust details. with minimum 50mm-long screws.
Weather protection
Any impervious weather protection should be removed sufficiently to allow the panels to breathe.
Fire stopping
Fire stopping is required between the top of the spandrel panel and the roof covering and in the batten
space. It is important that the fire stopping is extended into any boxed eaves. Where the spandrel panel is
sat on a masonry wall fire stopping is required between the panel and the wall.

199
199 INTERNAL
INTERNALWALLS
WALLS
7.1.5 MASONRY:
7.1.5 MASONRY:Single
Singleskin
skin party
party wall
wall spandrel
spandrelpanels
panelsinin
cold roofs
cold roofs
Figure 3 - Fire stopping at the head of the panel Figure 5 - Foot detail of a single panel party wall spandrel panel on a masonry wall
· Spandrel head at a minimum of Compressible mineral wool

50mm below the truss head. fire stopping
· Mineral wool quilt placed below
the underlay felt as a fire stop.
Fire stopping should continue
into boxed eaves.
Resilient fire · Mineral wool quilt placed above
Fire stopping underlay felt and laid between
should be stopping up to
continued in underside of battens from eaves to ridge.
batten space
roof covering
Lateral restraint straps to
Fire stopping masonry wall at 1200mm
Wall centres, on both sides of
the wall, fixed to noggings
Minimum between at least three
300mm trusses using four 3.75mm
x 30mm square twist nails
Figure 4 - Panel connections · Joints should be backed by timber

· Where panels are butt jointed cover
strip should be fitted. The correct
lapping must be to the manufactures
requirements to achieve adequate
Holding down straps Masonry party wall
fire resistance, generally the cover
strip should be a minimum of 150mm extending a minimum of
wide. 300mm above ceiling line
· The cover strips should provide the
same fire resistance as the rest of
the wall.
· Each cover strip should be
independently fixed and the joints of
the cover strip should be staggered. · The masonry should extend a minimum of 300mm above the ceiling line.
· Fixings should penetrate the timber · The blockwork should provide continuous support for the panel.
by a minimum of 25mm. · The masonry cavity should be fire stopped.
· The bottom edge of the panel should be sealed with a compressible rock fibre quilt.
· Holding down straps should be provided to the spandrel panel at a minimum of 1200mm centres and face fixed to coincide with stud positions.
· The holding down strap length should ensure a minimum of two fixings into the panel framework and three fixings into the blockwork into a minimum of 2 blocks.
· Restraint should be provided to the top of the masonry party wall using lateral restraint straps at 1200mm centres, on both sides of the wall, fixed to noggins
between at least three trusses using a minimum of four 3.75mm x 30mm square twist nails. The straps should be fixed to wall with a minimum of three fixings.
© MD
INTERNAL WALLS
7. 7.2
Timber Stud
Internal
Walls

7.2.1
7.2.1 TIMBERSTUD:
TIMBER STUD: Internal
Internal timber
timberpartitions
partitions
The structural design or 'load bearing'

timber walls should to BS EN 1995-1-1
Damp proof course (DPC) and damp

proof membrane (DPM)
Where partitions are placed onto concrete

Lintel or cripple studs to be ground floors a DPC should be provided directly
provided to door openings below regardless of if there is a DPM beneath
the slab.
Timber studs to be at
maximum 600m centres
Note:
1. Internal partitions should not be supported

by compressible layers forming part of a
floating floor unless suitable for that
purpose.
2. Internal framed partitions between
bedrooms or rooms containing WC's and
Timber floor joist midspan other rooms, must achieve adequate
noggins (when required) sound resistance.
Noggins under partition

(in addition to any Doubled joists under
required for span) partition position (where
parallel to joists)
Load bearing timber stud walls should

be designed by a Structural Engineer
and safely transfer the load to the
foundation
Note: Studs, headers, and mid supports

should be at least 38x63mm in size
(38x75mm for load bearing studs)
Non load bearing timber
partitions sat on the
ground floor should be
sat on a DPC DPC to be provided and
linked to floor DPM
Masonry load bearing sub-structure.
INTERNAL WALLS
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 202
INTERNAL WALLS
7.2.2 TIMBER
7.2.2 TIMBERSTUD:
STUD:Partition
Partition construction
construction
Load-bearing timber walls and partitions Partition construction

Load-bearing timber internal walls are to be designed to provide support and transfer loads to foundations safely and without The following partition constructions are satisfactory:
undue movement.
The structural design of load-bearing timber walls should be in accordance with BS EN 1995-1-1. · Timber stud partitions using studs, sills and head plates nominally 63mm x 38mm. Studs
should be spaced to suit the thickness of plasterboard used, as follows:
Structural timber should be specified according to the strength classes, e.g. C16 or C24. · Maximum 450mm spacing for 9.5mm boards.
· Maximum 600mm spacing for 12.5mm-20mm boards.
Load-bearing partitions should be designed by a Structural Engineer.
Structural elements Non load-bearing timber partitions
Typically, individual studs, sills and head plates are to be 38mm x 75mm. Larger timber section sizes are required to achieve Partitions should be robust and form a smooth, stable, plane surface to receive decoration:
satisfactory levels of fire resistance. Studs should be spaced at maximum 600mm centres.
· Supporting members should be accurately spaced, aligned and levelled.
Lintels and studs · The tolerance of horizontal straightness of a partition should be +/-10mm over a 5m length.
A lintel and cripple studs are to be provided to any opening other than where the stud spacing is not affected. Traditionally, · The deviation in vertical alignment of a partition in any storey height should be +/-10mm.
multiple studs will be used to support multiple joists. · Timbers supporting plasterboard should be regularised and have a moisture content not
greater than 20% at the time of erection (lower moisture contents can reduce incidents of
Where internal walls are made-up of panels, structural continuity is to be maintained, for example through the use of a nail popping and other effects of shrinkage).
continuous top binder.
Stud partitions should be no less than 38mm wide and no less than 63mm thick (up to a
Framing joints need to be secured with a minimum of two nails per joint.
maximum partition height of 2.4m), and 89mm thick up to a maximum partition height of 3m.
Beams and lintels However, in order to accommodate tolerances for plasterboard fixing, a minimum width of 44mm
is recommended.
Beams and lintels shall be satisfactory for their purpose.
Items to be taken into account include:
· Loads and spans are in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

· Wall thicknesses.
· Bearing capacity of the wall construction supporting the lintel or beam.
Timber stud partitions
Head plate fixed to joists Roof timber truss
External Wall Internal finish

Max
600mm c/c
Noggins Head Internal partition wall
Sound insulation
When using full height

Jamb boards, provide noggins
at mid height to stiffen
timber studs
Folding wedges or
packing as required Door Skirting board
opening
Studs at max 600mm Double joists under

centres partition wall
Bottom plate
© Insurance
Services Limited
Limited 20202020 203
203 INTERNALWALLS
INTERNAL WALLS
7.2.3
7.2.3 TIMBERSTUD:
TIMBER STUD: Partition
construction
Support of heavy timber fixtures Typical timber stud plan
Additional noggins or
plywood sheathing provided
to support heavy fixtures Sound insulation (where required)
Heavy fixture (radiator etc.)
Walls and partitions are to be supported by the structural floor, only if the material is specifically manufactured for
that purpose; it is not to be supported by a floating floor that incorporates a compressible layer.
Where partitions are to support heavy items such as radiators or kitchen cupboards, additional
noggins should be provided within the stud partition to accommodate fixings.
Extra noggins or joists should be specified where stud partitions or proprietary plasterboard partitions are
supported by a timber floor, unless it can be shown that the deck can transfer the load without undue movement.
Allowance for the probable deflection of floors at the head of partitions is required to prevent the partition
becoming load-bearing.
Head and sole plates should consist of single length members fixed to the building structure at no less than
600mm centres.
Partitions should be located on double joists when parallel to floor joist span and nailed to 50mm x 50mm noggins
fixed between ceiling joists at 600mm centres when parallel to ceiling joist span. For short lengths of partitions
(1.2m maximum), blocking between joists at 600mm centres may be used. Intersecting head and sole plates
should be skew nailed together.
Timber members should be fixed together with a minimum of 2 No. 75mm long x 2.65mm diameter nails.
Proprietary partitions of plasterboard, strawboard or other material must be detailed and constructed in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Walls and partitions that are supported off structural floors, should not be built directly off a compressible layer
forming part of a floating floor system.
INTERNAL WALLS
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 204
INTERNAL WALLS
7.2.4 TIMBER
7.2.4 TIMBERSTUD:
STUD:Plasterboard
Plasterboard specification
specification
Internal plastering Fixing of plasterboard to studs at joint positions Support of plasterboard

6mm minimum
Internal plastering should comply with BS EN 3914-2. Supports for plasterboard should be designed so that the following span limits are not exceeded.
edge distance
Plasterboard should be to BS EN 520: Gypsum Plasterboard joints and fixings
plasterboards - Definitions, requirements and test
methods. 10mm bound edges
Board thickness Timber support centres (mm) Intermediate noggins required
13mm unbound
Plasterboard thickness should be: edges
· 12.5mm for stud spacing up to 600mm. 9.5mm 400mm No
Up to a 3mm gap 450mm Yes

to cut edges of
plasterboard,
12.5mm 400mm No
bound edges
lightly butted
Plasterwork 450mm No
This guidance covers all plastered finishes to walls and ceilings. The workmanship of plastered finishes should be applied to a certain 600mm Yes
standard to receive a suitable decorative finish. It should be durable enough to prevent surface cracking and, if applicable as part of the
whole element, meet the required levels of fire and sound insulation in accordance with current Building Regulations.
15mm 600mm No
Substrate and background

When fixing plaster boarding:
Plasterwork should be applied to suitable substrates. The substrate may also require additional sealing or bonding agents, in
accordance with the requirements set out in BS 8481: 2006.
· Fix with decorative side out to receive joint treatment or a skim plaster finish.
· Lightly butt boards together and never force boards into position.
Where the background has a mix of varying materials, e.g. blockwork and brickwork, expanded metal should be provided to prevent
· Install fixings no closer than 13mm from cut edges and 10mm from bound edges.
differential movement in the plaster finish.
· Position cut edges to internal angles whenever possible, removing paper burrs with fine sandpaper.
· Stagger horizontal and vertical board joints between layers by a minimum of 600mm.
Plaster mixes · Locate boards to the centre line of framing where this supports board edges or ends. Fix to timber studs using
dry-wall screws.
Plaster mix ratios should be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and be appropriate for the intended use. · When dry lining, plasterboard can be fixed to walls using adhesive dabs or by screwing to timber battens.
Minimum plaster thickness Note: Where adhesive dabs are used, the plasterboard manufacturers recommendations must be followed.
The thickness of plaster will vary depending on the evenness of the substrate. The finished element must meet the tolerances identified, Alternatively, a proprietary wall system can be used, providing it has full third-party accreditation. Gaps between boards
and be of a suitable quality so that a decorative finish can be applied. Please refer to the 'Tolerances' section. should not exceed 3mm and consideration should be given to sealing all gaps to improve building air tightness.
Plastering of plasterboard walls Minimum periods of fire resistance
Plasterboard walls should be skimmed to provide a suitable and durable finish. A minimum of one coat is required.
Material 1
2 hour FR 1 hour FR
Plasterboard on timber 12.5mm board on both sides of Two layers of 12.5mm board on both sides of
framing framing or proprietary fire boards (typically
12.5mm-15mm) on both sides of framing
Plasterboard on laminated 12.5mm laminated on both sides of Refer to manufacturers recommendations

wall 19mm board
All internal, separating and compartment walls should have the fire resistance required by the relevant regional
© Insurance
Services Limited
Limited 20202020 205
205 INTERNALWALLS
INTERNAL WALLS
7.2.5
7.2.5 TIMBERSTUD:
TIMBER STUD: Party
Party walls
wallsand
andcompartment
compartmentwalls
walls
Sound insulation Fire stopping at roof level between party walls Fire stopping
Internal walls shall, where necessary, have adequate resistance to the transmission of sound. Where separating walls and compartment walls meet a roof,
further guidance can be found in the 'Roofs' section.
All separating walls in England and Wales may be built in accordance with Robust Details and meet the requirements for resistance to Fire-stop between batten
the passage of sound in the relevant regional Building Regulations. and above underlay. Penetrations in walls that are required to have fire
resistance must be designed to meet the requirements of
Compliance with the relevant Building Regulations can be demonstrated by either: the Building Regulations. Fire stopping in apartments and
Fire stopping between flats with a floor over 4.5m will have additional requirements.
Pre-completion testing internal wall and roof Please see 'Internal Walls - General Requirements - Cavity
Pre-completion testing (PCT) is required in the following situations: membrane. Barriers and Fire Stopping' for further guidance.
· To all new build properties (including rooms for residential purposes), other than when the Developer has registered and built in Fire stopping should be provided in accordance with the
accordance with Robust Details. Cavity barrier of mineral relevant regional Building Regulations.
· Where the sound insulation construction is in accordance with the guidance given in the relevant regional Building Regulations for wool or fire-resisting
resistance to the passage of sound. board in boxed eaves. · Party/separating walls should be finished 25mm below
· Where the building is not built in accordance with the relevant regional Building Regulations. the top of the rafter line and a soft fire-resistant
· The requirements of the Robust Details system have not been met. packing, such as mineral wool, should be used to allow
for movement in roof timbers and prevent distortion of
or Vertical cavity barrier the roof tiles.
omitted for clarity. · The fire stopping should be continuous to eaves level
Robust details and a cavity barrier of fire-resisting board or a wire
The use of robust details as a means of providing adequate sound insulation applies only to party walls and floors between different Head binder and reinforced mineral wool blanket nailed to the rafter and
dwellings or flats. It is approved by Robust Details Ltd. top rail of wall carefully cut to fully seal the boxed eaves should be
frame. installed.
The robust design details are available in a handbook, which can be purchased from:
Robust Details Ltd, Unit 14 Shenley Pavilions, Chalkdell Drive, Shenley Wood, Milton Keynes, MK5 6LB
Tel 0870 240 8210
www.robustdetails.com
Fire stopping within the Fire resistance
Robust Details Ltd may undertake monitoring to check on the performance achieved in practice. cavity on the party wall line
Fibre insulation as Typically, in dwellings, a half-hour or one-hour
Party wall specified in the party fire-resistance is required to satisfy the relevant regional
wall voids filled with Building Regulations with regard to fire separation between
mineral wool insulation dwellings and/or compartments within dwellings.
Walls and partitions are to be supported by the structural floor only if the material is specifically manufactured for that purpose; it is not to Junction of element
generally not less than
be supported by a floating floor that incorporates a compressible layer. firestopped with
10kg/m3 Compartment walls that are common to two or more
plasterboard linings
buildings should run the full height of the building in a
Extra noggins or joists should be specified where stud partitions or proprietary plasterboard partitions are supported by a timber floor,
Flexible cavity barrier of continuous vertical plane and should be continued through
unless it can be shown that the deck can transfer the load without undue movement.
wire reinforced mineral the roof space.
Allowance for the probable deflection of floors at the head of partitions is required to prevent the partition becoming load-bearing. wool or approved cavity
barrier Where a compartment wall meets another external wall or
floor junction fire resistance should be maintained.
Sound resistance
Note: cavity barriers All internal, separating and compartment walls should have
Sound insulation should be third party Sheathing with breather the fire resistance required by the relevant regional Building
Internal walls shall, where necessary, have adequate resistance to the transmission of sound. approved membrane over Regulations.
All separating walls in England and Wales may be built in accordance with Robust Details and meet the requirements for resistance to Penetrations in walls that are required to have fire
the passage of sound in the relevant regional Building Regulations. resistance must be designed to meet the requirements of
the Building Regulations.
Electrical sockets in party walls
Electrical sockets within the party walls should be avoided where possible, where this is not possible
the fire and sound resistance of the walls should be maintained.
Sockets should not be installed back to back in party walls. Please see the 'Electrical Services'
section for further guidance.
INTERNAL WALLS
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 206
INTERNAL WALLS
7. 7.3
Metal Stud
Internal
Walls

7.3.1
7.3.1 METALSTUD:
METAL STUD: Non
Non load
loadbearing
bearinginternal metal
internal partitions
metal partitions
Metal stud system

The structural design of 'load bearing' walls
should to BS EN 1995-1-1 There are a number of proprietary systems on the market.
This traditionally consists of U-shaped channels that act as ceiling
(head), base plates (tracks) and the vertical studs. The advantage of
this system is that it is lightweight, versatile and quick to erect.
Installation should always be carried out in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions. Plasterboard coverings are screw-fixed to
the metal studs, with the perimeter studs/tracks generally being
mechanically fixed to the surrounding walls, ceilings and floors.
It may be necessary to provide earth-bonding to the metal stud system.
Lintels over openings to be

to the stud manufacturers Metal Stud Partitions:
structural design · Studs to be at 600mm max centres.
specification · Stud, head, and base rails to be minimum
section size of 43x32x0.45mm.
· Plasterboard 9.5mm thick (studs at 450mm
Studs to be at maximum
centres) or 12.5mm plasterboard (studs at
600mm centres as per
600mm centres).
manufacturers instructions
Note:
Partition base to be supported and 1. Internal partitions should not be supported by compressible layers
Please refer to the fixed to floor supports in accordance forming part of a floating floor unless suitable for that purpose.
appropriate upper floor with the stud manufacturers structural
construction details for design specification. If installed onto 2. Internal framed partitions between bedrooms or rooms containing
further guidance on mid a party floor. Installation must be to WC's and other rooms, must achieve adequate sound resistance.
span and additional the sound insulation specification for
strutting requirements the project
Please refer to the appropriate 'Upper floor' guidance

for further information on bearings, strutting, etc
Adequate support must

be provided under the Where joists run parallel to the partition:
stud partitions within the
floor construction. This Partitions must be positioned directly
may be in addition to any over floor construction members (not
Masonry internal load bearing wall solely on floor boards). Additional joists
internal strutting required
shown off a suitable foundation if a may be necessary in order to support
structural metal stud load bearing the partition
wall is not provided
DPC to be provided and

linked to floor DPM
Masonry load bearing partitions to be

supported off suitable foundations
INTERNAL WALLS
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 208
INTERNAL WALLS
7.3.2 METAL
7.3.2 METALSTUD:
STUD:Partition
construction
Support of heavy timber fixtures Proprietary systems Method of supporting partitions
Proprietary systems are to be specified in accordance with the Walls and partitions are to be supported by the structural floor only if the material is specifically
manufacturer's recommendations. manufactured for that purpose; it is not to be supported by a floating floor that incorporates a
compressible layer.
Metal stud system
Extra noggins or joists should be specified where stud partitions or proprietary plasterboard partitions
There are a number of proprietary systems on the market. are supported by a timber floor, unless it can be shown that the deck can transfer the load without
undue movement.
This traditionally consists of U-shaped channels that act as ceiling
(head), base plates (tracks) and the vertical studs. The advantage Allowance for the probable deflection of floors at the head of partitions is required to prevent the
of this system is that it is lightweight, versatile and quick to erect. partition becoming load-bearing.
Installation should always be carried out in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions. Plasterboard coverings are Head and sole plates should consist of single length members fixed to the building structure at no
screw-fixed to the metal studs, with the perimeter studs/tracks less than 600mm centres.
generally being mechanically fixed to the surrounding walls,
Additional noggins or Partitions should be located on double joists when parallel to floor joist span and nailed to 50mm x
ceilings and floors.
plywood sheathing 50mm noggins fixed between ceiling joists at 600mm centres when parallel to ceiling joist span. For
provided to support It may be necessary to provide earth-bonding to the metal stud short lengths of partitions (1.2m maximum), blocking between joists at 600mm centres may be used.
heavy fixtures system. Intersecting head and sole plates should be fixed in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations.
Proprietary partitions of plasterboard, strawboard or other material must be detailed and constructed
in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Heavy fixture (radiator etc.)
Metal stud partition

Floor or ceiling joist
Ceiling
Allowance for the probable deflection of

floors at the head of partitions is required
to prevent the partition becoming
Where additional loads will be applied to the walls e.g. radiators or kitchen cabinets, load-bearing
these may require additional strengthening support as per the manufacturers guidance.
Note: Fixings should not impair the
deflection head (including the fixing of
finishes e.g. plasterboard)
Head channel fixed to ceiling at 600 c/c
Metal stud partition (plan)
Metal channel studs cut Stud
to fit web to web and
twisted into position at
600mm centres Plasterboard facing screwed to metal
stud at 300mm centres
Architrave Cutouts in studs for housing services in

void or cavity
Door frame or lining Sole channel
38mm thick fixing batten Skirting boards
Floor finish
Metal stud 38mm fixing batten
Wall Plasterboard facing

screwed to metal studs
at 300mm centres
© Insurance
Services Limited
Limited 20202020 209
209 INTERNALWALLS
INTERNAL WALLS
.3.3 7.3.3 METAL
METAL STUD:
STUD: Plasterboard
Plasterboard specifications
specifications
Internal plastering Fixing of plasterboard to studs at joint positions Support of plasterboard

6mm minimum
Internal plastering should comply with BS EN 3914-2. Supports for plasterboard should be designed so that the following span limits are not exceeded.
edge distance
Plasterboard should be to BS EN 520: Gypsum
plasterboards - Definitions, requirements and test
Plasterboard joints and fixings
methods. 10mm bound edges
13mm unbound Board thickness Timber support centres (mm) Intermediate noggins required
Plasterboard thickness should be: edges
9.5mm 400mm No
Up to a 3mm gap
to cut edges of 450mm Yes
plasterboard,
bound edges 12.5mm 400mm No
lightly butted
Plasterwork
450mm No
This guidance covers all plastered finishes to walls and ceilings. The workmanship of plastered finishes should be applied to a certain
standard to receive a suitable decorative finish. It should be durable enough to prevent surface cracking and, if applicable as part of the 600mm Yes
whole element, meet the required levels of fire and sound insulation in accordance with current Building Regulations.
15mm 600mm No
Plasterwork should be applied to suitable substrates. The substrate may also require additional sealing or bonding agents, in When fixing plaster boarding:
accordance with the requirements set out in BS 8481:2006.
Fix with decorative side out to receive joint treatment or a skim plaster finish.
Where the background has a mix of varying materials, e.g. blockwork and brickwork, expanded metal should be provided to prevent · Lightly butt boards together and never force boards into position.
differential movement in the plaster finish. · Install fixings no closer than 13mm from cut edges and 10mm from bound edges.
Plaster mixes · Stagger horizontal and vertical board joints between layers by a minimum of 600mm.
· Locate boards to the centre line of framing where this supports board edges or ends.
Plaster mix ratios should be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and be appropriate for the intended use. · Fix metal studs using dry-wall screws.
· When dry lining, plasterboard can be fixed to walls using adhesive dabs or by screwing to metal battens.
Minimum plaster thickness
Note: Where adhesive dabs are used, the plasterboard manufacturers recommendations must be followed.
The thickness of plaster will vary depending on the evenness of the substrate. The finished element must meet the tolerances identified,
Alternatively, a proprietary wall system can be used, providing it has full third-party accreditation. Gaps between boards
and be of a suitable quality so that a decorative finish can be applied. Please refer to the 'Tolerances' section.
should not exceed 3mm and consideration should be given to sealing all gaps to improve building air tightness.
Plastering of plasterboard walls Minimum periods of fire resistance
Plasterboard walls should be skimmed to provide a suitable and durable finish. A minimum of one coat is required. All internal, separating and compartment walls should have the fire resistance required by the relevant Regional Building Regulations.
INTERNAL WALLS
MD Insurance
© MD Services
InsuranceLimited 2020
Services Limited 2020 210 210
INTERNAL WALLS
7.3.4 METAL
7.3.4 METALSTUD:
STUD:Party
Partywalls
walls and
and compartment
compartmentwalls
walls
Sound insulation Fire stopping at roof level between party walls Fire stopping
Internal walls shall, where necessary, have adequate resistance to the transmission of sound. Where separating walls and compartment walls meet a roof, further
guidance can be found in the 'Roofs' section.
All separating walls in England and Wales may be built in accordance with Robust Details and meet the Fire-stop between batten
requirements for resistance to the passage of sound in the relevant regional Building Regulations. and above underlay Penetrations in walls that are required to have fire resistance must
Compliance with the relevant Building Regulations can be demonstrated by either: be designed to meet the requirements of the Building Regulations.
Fire stopping in apartments and flats with a floor over 4.5m will
Pre-completion testing Fire stopping between have additional requirements. Please see 'Internal Walls - Cavity
Pre-completion testing (PCT) is required in the following situations: internal wall and roof Barriers and Fire Stopping' for further guidance.
membrane
· To all new build properties (including rooms for residential purposes), other than when the Developer Fire stopping should be provided in accordance with the relevant
has registered and built in accordance with Robust Details. regional building regulations.
· Where the sound insulation construction is in accordance with the guidance given in the relevant Cavity barrier of mineral
regional Building Regulations for resistance to the passage of sound. wool or fire-resisting · Party/separating walls should be finished 25mm below the top
· Where the building is not built in accordance with the relevant regional Building Regulations. board in boxed eaves of the rafter line and a soft fire-resistant packing, such as
· The requirements of the Robust Details system have not been met. mineral wool, should be used to allow for movement in roof
timbers and prevent distortion of the roof tiles.
or · The fire stopping should be continuous to eaves level and a
Vertical cavity barrier cavity barrier of fire-resisting board or a wire reinforced mineral
Robust details omitted for clarity wool blanket nailed to the rafter and carefully cut to fully seal
The use of robust details as a means of providing adequate sound insulation applies only to party walls the boxed eaves should be installed.
and floors between different dwellings or flats. It is approved by Robust Details Ltd. Head binder and
top rail of wall
The robust design details are available in a handbook, which can be purchased from: frame
Robust Details Ltd, 14 Shenley Pavilions, Chalkdell Drive, Shenley Wood, Milton Keynes, MK5 6LB
Tel 0870 240 8210
www.robustdetails.com
Robust Details Ltd may undertake monitoring to check on the performance achieved in practice.
Fire stopping within the cavity Fire resistance
on the party wall line (plan)
Fibre insulation as Typically, in dwellings, a half-hour or one-hour fire-resistance is
Party wall specified in the party required to satisfy the relevant regional Building Regulations with
wall voids filled with regard to fire separation between dwellings and/or compartments
mineral wool insulation within dwellings.
Junction of element
generally not less than
firestopped with
10kg/m3 Compartment walls that are common to two or more buildings should
plasterboard linings
run the full height of the building in a continuous vertical plane and
Fire stopping should be continued through the roof space.
Where a compartment wall meets another external wall or floor

junction fire resistance should be maintained.
All internal, separating and compartment walls should have the fire
Note: cavity barriers resistance required by the relevant regional Building Regulations.
should be third party Sheathing with breather
approved. membrane over Penetrations in walls that are required to have fire resistance must be
designed to meet the requirements of the Building Regulations.
Electrical sockets in party walls
Electrical sockets within the party walls should be avoided where possible, where this is not possible
the fire and sound resistance of the walls should be maintained.
Sockets should not be installed back to back in party walls. Please see the 'Electrical Services'
section for further guidance.
© Insurance
Services Limited
Limited 20202020 211
211 INTERNALWALLS
INTERNAL WALLS
7. 7.4
General Requirements -
Internal Cavity Barriers and
Walls Fire Stopping

7.4.1 GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS -- CAVITY
CAVITYBARRIERS
BARRIERSAND
ANDFIRE STOPPING
FIRE STOPPING:
Openings for pipes in separating elements Fire resistance general
Pipes which pass through fire separating elements (unless in a protected shaft) shall: All walls should have the fire resistance required by the relevant Building Regulations.
a. Have an approved proprietary sealing system that has a UKAS accredited test to For more information on
prove it will maintain the fire resistance of the wall. Note: It should only be installed the subdivision of cavities, Fire stopping
as per the test requirements, or please see the relevant
b. Where an approved proprietary sealing system is not used; the pipes penetrating Building Regulations Penetrations in walls between buildings shall be fire stopped, there are to be no holes or gaps for smoke to pass
the fire separating element should be restricted in diameter to a maximum size through once the fire stopping has been fitted.
shown in the relevant regional Building Regulations and fire stopping used around
the pipe, or
c. A sleeving system with a maximum 160mm internal diameter is used as specified in
the relevant regional Building Regulations. Further additional requirements for internal fire stopping and fire protection for compartment floors,
walls, and roof junctions to flats and apartments with a floor 4.5m or more above the ground
Sub-divide The following additional guidance applies to internal fire stopping and fire protection only to buildings with a floor 4.5m
Provisions for cavity barriers and extensive cavities Roof cavity
or more above the ground that contain flats or apartments.
fire stopping
Although building legislation is robust in applying provisions for fire protection and fire stopping, it can often be difficult
to implement high standards of fire stopping in complex buildings. This can lead to significant safety risks if the building
does not have the correct levels of fire protection and if holes in compartment walls are not sealed correctly. This
guidance assists Developers in providing good standards of fire stopping and fire protection.
It is not the intention to enhance the requirements of the Building Regulations, but more to ensure that the statutory
requirements are applied correctly to the construction. It is therefore deemed that the requirements of Part B of the
Building Regulations in England and Wales, or Section 2 of the Scottish Building Standards (whichever is appropriate
depending on region), that apply to fire stopping, separating walls, service penetrations, minimum periods of fire
resistance and concealed spaces will also meet the requirements of this guidance.
Compartment wall
Cavity barrier at 1. Fire stopping
Wall forming protected
top of cavity Accommodation
escape route
Design information
Sub-divide Drawings showing the lines of compartmentation and the lines of fire-resisting construction should be provided to the
extensive cavities Surveyor and the Builder. The drawings should also give the required level of fire resistance for each element.
Drawings to show the position of cavity barriers should be provided, and the specification of cavity barriers included.
Floor cavity Materials for fire stopping and cavity barriers

Cavity barrier at Compartment floor All materials used to form a fire barrier must have relevant third-party certification or be CE marked in accordance with
compartment floor the Construction Products Regulations. The materials must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
Ceiling cavity instructions and recommendations.
Installation
The fire stopping material or cavity barriers should be installed by a person who is deemed competent to install such
products. A competent person is deemed to be a third-party approved contractor specialising in fire stopping and
passive fire protection.
Cavity barrier Wall forming protected
Cavity barrier 2. Fire protection in buildings
around openings escape route Accommodation
around edges
Design information
Compartment wall The design details must show the correct level of fire resistance for the building, in accordance with Part B of the
Building Regulations or Section 2 of the Scottish Building Standards, depending on region.
Cavity barrier at
bottom of cavity
Floor cavity Materials for fire protection
Compartment floor All materials used to form a fire barrier must have relevant third-party certification, or be CE marked in accordance with
the Construction Products Regulations. The materials must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
Sub-divide instructions and recommendations.
extensive cavities Ceiling cavity
Installation
products.
Fire-Stopping (Same fire Where intumescent paints are used to provide the required level of fire protection, certification confirming that the paint
resistance as compartment) Accommodation applied will achieve the correct level of fire protection is required.
Compartment wall
Cavity barrier to meet the

required resistance of the
relevant regional Building
Regulations
Note: Diagrams courtesy of the approved documents for England
© Insurance
Services Limited
Limited 20202020 213
213 INTERNALWALLS
INTERNAL WALLS
CONTENTS
8.
Contents
Windows
8.1 uPVC
8.2 Timber
and Doors 8.3 General Requirements


Workmanship W
1. Certification is required for any curtain wall and rain screen construction completed by an approved No
installer.
Ma
Materials No
De
Design 1.
1. Windows, external doors and frames, and roof lights shall be designed and constructed so that they:
a. Meet the requirements of BS 6375-1 are durable and resistant to weather;
b. Provide adequate resistance to transmission of sound where necessary;
c. Have adequate thermal performance and air tightness;
d. Have sufficient strength to withstand operational and wind loads;
e. Offer reasonable resistance to unauthorized entry;
f. Are suitable, where necessary, for means of escape in case of fire;
g. Can be operated readily and safely by the user.
2. Windows and roof lights shall be designed and constructed so that they offer, where necessary,adequate
natural ventilation.
3. External doors and frames shall be designed and constructed so that they:
a. Resist to the spread of fire when situated between a dwelling and an attached or integral garage;
b. Permit convenient access for disabled people. Lim
4. Glazing in windows, doors and roof lights shall be designed and constructed so that it: 1.
a. Has sufficient strength;
b. Can be readily cleaned.

guidance.
WINDOWS AND DOORS

216
WINDOWS AND DOORS
8. 8.1
uPVC
Windows
and Doors

8.1.1
8.1.1 UPVC:General
UPVC: General requirements
requirements
Fixing distances for uPVC windows and doorsets Windows and doors
Windows and doors should be installed in accordance with manufacturers uPVC windows and doors should be subject to independent third-party certification.
instructions.
Max
Workmanship should follow the recommendations of BS 8213-4.
600mm
Min 150mm The design and construction of factory assembled windows must meet BS 7412.
Max 250mm
Non factory assembled units and 'bespoke' units are also expected to meet the same standard.
Min 150mm Factory made and bespoke doors and windows should be selected to withstand the design weather conditions and be classified and tested in accordance with the following weather
performance standards:
· BS 6375-1 Weather tightness.

· Air permeability - BS EN 12207 - Classification & BS EN 1026 - Test method.
· Water resistance - BS EN 12208 - Classification & BS EN 1027 - Test method.
Min 150mm · Wind resistance - BS EN 12210 - Classification & BS EN 12211 - Test method.
Max 250mm
Bay, oriel and dormer windows require particular care in detailing and fitting so that they are stable, weather tight and reasonably air tight.
Min 150mm
Max 250mm Roof lights should be proprietary components, fixed within prepared openings in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and have effective weather sealing.
Frames should be fixed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations or, Non-timber components should comply with the following British Standards (as appropriate), and be installed and fixed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations:
if no instructions are given, with the following guidance:
Wherever practicable, the sides of the frame should be secured as follows: · BS EN 514:2018 Plastics. Poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC) based profiles. Determination of the strength of welded corners and T-joints.
· BS 7412:2007 Specification for windows and doorsets made from unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U) extruded hollow profiles.
· Corner fixings should be between 150mm and 250mm from the external
corner. External UPVC windows and doorsets should be designed and constructed in accordance with the requirements of the following British Standards:
· No fixings should be less than 150mm from the centre line of a mullion or
transom. · BS 6262 Code of Practice for glazing for building.
· There should be a minimum of two fixings on each jamb and sill, with
intermediate fixings at centres no greater than 600mm. · BS 6375: 1 Performance of windows.
· If the head is fixed with polyurethane foam, then the fixings at the head · BS 7412 Specification for windows and doorsets made from unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U) extruded hollow profiles.
may be as follows: · BS 8213 Windows, doors and roof lights.
a) frame width up to 1200mm - no fixings;
b) frame width 1201mm to 2400mm - one central fixing; Windows and doors should comply with the current Building Regulations taking into consideration:
c) frame width 2401mm to 3600mm - two equally spaced fixings.
· Frames should be fixed either by galvanised steel cramps or by · Means of escape in the event of a fire.
non-corrodible screw fixings to the surrounding wall. · Thermal insulation.
Note: These fixings do not apply to french doors, patio doors, or bi-fold doors. · Ventilation.
Manufacturers recommended fixing details should be followed. · Safety.
· Security.
Windows and doors installation
Draught Seals
Windows and door frames should be installed so that:
External doors and opening lights to windows should be reasonably air tight by ensuring that effective draught seals are fitted.
· They do not carry loads unless designed to do so.
· External doors and opening lights to windows should be reasonably air
tight by ensuring that effective draught seals are fitted. Fire doors
· The masonry on the external side of vertical DPC should not be in contact
with internal finishes. Any door between a dwelling and an attached or integral garage should be a half-hour fire-resisting door and frame.
· The window head is set back behind the edge of the cavity tray.
· The frame to wall junction is weather tight and reasonably air tight.
· In areas of very severe exposure, checked rebates should be provided. Sealant around windows and doors
The frame should be set back behind the outer leaf and should overlap it.
In other areas of exposure, the frame should be set back at least 38mm For gaps less than 5mm, the sealant must cover both the frame and masonry by 6mm.
and overlap the DPC.
· Distortions of doors should be minimized by not locating radiators or other For gaps greater than 5mm, a backing strip should be provided behind the sealant and the sealant should have a minimum depth of 6mm.
heaters close to doors.
· The reveal should be protected throughout its width by a continuous DPC. Glazing
The width of the DPC should be sufficient to overlap/be fixed to the frame
and fully protect the reveal. Alternatively, an insulated finned cavity closer
with third-party certification may be used. · Any glazing on-site must have a drained and ventilated bottom bead with a minimum gap of 5mm between the edge seal of the insulated glass unit and the bottom channel
frames glazing rebate.
Workmanship · The workmanship should be in accordance with BS 8000: 7.
· The window beads should suitably lap the windows and doors to prevent premature degradation of the glazing unit.
Window and door frames should be installed either by building in tightly as
work proceeds or by fitting into pre-formed openings, suitably dimensioned to Additional requirements in a coastal location
provide an accurate fit for the frame plus the perimeter weather tight joint.
UPVC frame windows and doors should be installed with a gap of between Where developments are within a coastal location additional Warranty requirements should be met.
5mm and 10mm to allow for thermal expansion. For large framed units such as
patio doors the gap can be up to 15mm. For the purpose of this Technical Manual we are considering sites within 5km inland from the shore line or sites located in 'tidal' estrine areas where they are within 5km of the
general shoreline.
Window and door frames should be installed in accordance with the
manufacturers instructions.
Further information on Warranty requirements within a coastal location can be found in 'Appendix B - Coastal Locations'.
WINDOWS AND DOORS

© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 218
WINDOWS AND DOORS
8.1.2 UPVC: General requirements
8.1.2 UPVC: General requirements
Typical vertical section through window Typical window reveal detail (normal exposure)
Cavity tray Cavity closer. This should also be fire resistant when
Inner leaf required by the regional Building Regulations
Vertical DPC to be folded around (and where possible fixed)

Insulated lintel to the window/door frame
Maximum 10mm gap between window frame and masonry
Weep holes The frame should extend forward of the internal face of the
outer leaf by at least 30mm
Minimum frame overlap 30mm
The external face of the frame is set back at least 38mm from
the masonry face. The masonry on the external side of the
vertical DPC should not be in contact with the internal finishes
Outer leaf
Where a sill 'horn' is proposed the

gap must not exceed 10mm and be
Appropriate 'non hardening' mastic sealant to be provided
filled with mastic
between frame and masonry reveal
Sill to project beyond the wall or Sill to project beyond the wall or
sub-sill by at least 25mm (ensure sub-sill by at least 25mm (ensure drip
the water drip projects at least projects at least 10mm beyond wall)
10mm beyond wall)
Checked rebate window frame detail for areas of severe exposure
Cavity closer. This should also be fire

Building Regulations
Inner leaf
Vertical DPC to be provided around
masonry, and where possible fixed to the
Cavity closer. This should also be
window/door frame
fire resistant when required by the
regional Building Regulations
25mm extension profile
25mm minimum frame overlap behind

Cold bridging insulation outer leaf
Bay window detail
DPC full width of external leaf

and not less than 150mm wide

sealant to be provided between frame
and masonry reveal
DPC to be lapped behind Outer leaf
window frame 25mm rebate to allow for building tolerance
25mm and window fixing tolerance
Sill projection beyond wall by at least 25mm
Maximum gap of 10mm between
window frame and external
masonry. The joint between the When installing window/door frames in a checked rebate, allow for the frame to
masonry and window frame to be deeper:
be sealed with mastic
© MD Insurance Services Limited 2020 219 WINDOWS AND DOORS

WINDOWS AND DOORS
8.1.3
8.1.3 UPVC:Level
UPVC: Level access
access
Ramped/level threshold to principle entrance door Typical level threshold where a porch/canopy is provided
Porch/canopy with side walls Proprietary level threshold

weather stop
It is recommended to provide
a proprietary mat well
Provide flat (max 1:80) protection beyond the swing
The construction of the access landings and 1200mm area to front of of the door
ramps must not compromise the DPC in the entrance door
walls Floor finish
Stone/precast concrete
weathered sill Concrete slab
Underfloor
Landing to a 1:60 Non deformable suitable cavity
Ventilators
fall away from closer (insulated)
door
*
DPC
Typical level threshold suspended concrete slab - without canopy protection
DPC
* Sill to project beyond the wall or sub-sill
Perimeter insulation
Non deformable suitable
by at least 25mm (ensure the water drip cavity closer (insulated)
RAMP projects at least 10mm beyond wall)
Floor finish
1:12 Max
150mm
Landing area
150mm
63mm half round

uPVC channel laid 150mm concrete slab
to 1:60 fall bedded
in lean mix concrete
100mm consolidated hardcore
Cavity insulation
* See Building Regulations for disabled ramp design and landing dimensions.
Ramps should not exceed 1:12 gradient. Where the outside ground levels slope towards the property, an effective gully system should be
provided to prevent flooding, e.g. in front of garage doors.
Typical level threshold suspended beam and block floor
Level threshold Perimeter insulation

Sill to project beyond the wall or sub-sill Non deformable suitable cavity
Thresholds and sills should be at least 150mm above finished ground level. However, where a level (threshold) access is required, the general
guidance in this section should be followed - ensuring a high level of supervision and workmanship together with the correct specification of by at least 25mm (ensure the water drip closer (insulated)
materials and consideration to design, location, and exposure. projects at least 10mm beyond wall)
Floor finish
Wherever possible, locate the entrance door away from the prevailing weather and provide a storm porch. Where a drainage channel is provided,
this must be connected to the storm drainage system to prevent flooding occurring and water ingress into the building.
Landing area
It is recommended that a mat well be constructed within the entrance hall to accommodate the swing of the door without fouling the carpet and/or
the proprietary door seal. 63mm half round uPVC
channel laid to 1:60 fall
Level thresholds timber frame structure bedded in lean mix Beam and block flooring
concrete
At the level threshold open perpends should be provided in close proximity to the timbers on each side of the door opening one brick course
below the lowest timber. The open perpends must provide adequate ventilation of the external wall cavity, and drainage to disperse water that Cavity insulation
may penetrate the cladding.
WINDOWS AND DOORS

© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 220
WINDOWS AND DOORS
8. 8.2
Timber
Windows
and Doors

8.2.1
8.2.1 TIMBER: General
TIMBER: General requirements
requirements
Fixing distances for timber windows and doorsets Windows and doors
Windows and doors should be installed in accordance with manufacturers Workmanship should follow the recommendations of BS 1186: 2. The design and construction of factory assembled windows must meet BS 644:2009. Non factory assembled units
instructions. and 'bespoke' units are also expected to meet the same standards.
Additional fixing for windows Non factory assembled units and 'bespoke' units are also expected to meet the same standard.
over 1800mm wide
Min 150mm Factory made and bespoke doors and windows should be selected to withstand the design weather conditions and be classified and tested in accordance with the following weather
Max 250mm performance standards:
· BS 6375-1 Weather tightness.

Min 150mm · Air permeability - BS EN 12207 - Classification & BS EN 1026 - Test method.
Max · Water resistance - BS EN 12208 - Classification & BS EN 1027 - Test method.
600mm · Wind resistance - BS EN 12210 - Classification & BS EN 12211 - Test method.
Bespoke/handmade window and door units must be designed and constructed to meet the same level of weather tightness as factory made tested units. Where these are proposed,
there must be a detailed specification of the design, construction, and durability of the proposed units submitted to the Warranty provider before installation on site.
Min 150mm
Max 250mm For bespoke/handmade windows; site testing for water penetration of the joints to windows and doors in accordance with the CWCT test methods is recommended to check the site
Min 150mm workmanship of the building envelope as constructed. See CWCT Technical Note No. 41 for guidance on site hose testing.
Max 250mm
Roof lights should be proprietary components, fixed within prepared openings in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and have effective weather sealing.
Wherever practicable, the sides of the frame should be secured as follows:
Timber used for external joinery should be a species classified as suitable in BS EN 942 and preservative treated; if not, use a moderately durable species or better (sapwood
· Corner jamb fixings should be between 150mm and 250mm from the excluded). Guidance on selection is provided in TRADA Wood Information Sheets 3.10 and 4.16.
external corner.
· Intermediate fixings should be at centres no greater than 600mm. Windows and doors should comply with the current Building Regulations taking into consideration:
· There should be a minimum of two fixings on each jamb.
· On windows and doorsets over 1800mm wide, central head and sub-sill · Means of escape in the event of a fire.
fixings should be provided. · Thermal insulation.
· Frames should be fixed either by galvanized steel cramps or by · Ventilation.
non-corrodible screw fixings into the surrounding wall. · Safety.
· Security.
Windows and doors installation
Windows and door frames should be installed so that: External joinery should be designed and constructed in accordance with the requirements of the following British Standards:
· They do not carry loads unless designed to do so. · BS 4787: 1 Internal and external wood door sets, door leaves and frames.
· The masonry on the external side of vertical DPC should not be in · BS 6262 Code of Practice for glazing for buildings.
contact with internal finishes. · BS 6375: 1 Performance of windows.
· The window head is set back behind the edge of the cavity tray. · BS 644: 1 Wood windows.
· The frame to wall junction is weather tight and reasonably air tight. · BS 8213: 1 Windows, doors and roof lights.
· In areas of very severe exposure, checked rebates should be provided.
The frame should be set back behind the outer leaf and should overlap
Non-timber components should comply with the following British Standards (as appropriate), and be installed and fixed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations:
it. In other areas of exposure, the frame should be set back at least
38mm and overlap the DPC.
· Distortions of doors should be minimized by not locating radiators or · BS 4873 Aluminium alloy windows and door sets.
other heaters close to doors. · BS 6510 Steel windows and doors.
· The reveal should be protected throughout its width by a continuous
DPC. The width of the DPC should be sufficient to overlap/be fixed to Draught Seals
the frame and fully protect the reveal. Alternatively, an insulated finned
cavity closer with third-party certification may be used. External doors and opening lights to windows should be reasonably air tight by ensuring that effective draught seals are fitted.
Workmanship
Decoration
· Timber frame windows and doors should be installed so that any gap
provided between the masonry and the frame should not exceed Preservative-treated joinery cut or adjusted on-site should be brushed liberally with an appropriate and coloured preservative.
10mm.
· For gaps less than 5mm, the sealant must cover both the frame and The primer coat should be applied to all final exposed parts, including rebates prior to glazing installed or bottoms of doors.
masonry by 6mm.
· For gaps greater than 5mm, a backing strip should be provided behind Preservative-treated joinery cut or adjusted on-site should be brushed liberally with an appropriate and coloured preservative. Where the colour of the preservative will adversely
the sealant and the sealant should have a minimum depth of 6mm. affect the final appearance of the joinery, an appropriate clear preservative should be used. Where a painted finish is proposed to the window/door frame and opening units; the
primer coat should be applied to all final exposed parts, including rebates prior to glazing installed or bottoms of doors, or windows.
Additional requirements in a coastal location
For the purpose of this Technical Manual we are considering sites within 5Km inland from the shore line or sites located in 'tidal' estrine areas where they are within 5km of the
general shoreline.
Further information on Warranty requirements within a coastal location can be found in 'Appendix B - Coastal Locations'.
WINDOWS AND DOORS

© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 222
WINDOWS AND DOORS
8.2.2 TIMBER: General requirements
8.2.2 TIMBER: General requirements
Typical vertical section through window Typical window reveal detail (normal exposure)
Cavity closer. This should also be fire resistant when

required by the regional Building Regulations
Cavity tray Inner leaf
Vertical DPC to be folded around (and where possible fixed)

to the window/door frame
Insulated lintel
Maximum 10mm gap between window frame and masonry
The frame should extend forward of the internal face of the

Weep holes outer leaf by at least 30mm
Minimum frame overlap 30mm

The external face of the frame is set back at least 38mm from
the masonry face. The masonry on the external side of the
vertical DPC should not be in contact with the internal finishes
Outer leaf
Where a sill 'horn' is proposed the

gap must not exceed 10mm and be
Appropriate 'non hardening' mastic sealant to be provided
filled with mastic
between frame and masonry reveal
Sill to project beyond the wall or
sub-sill by at least 25mm (ensure drip
projects at least 10mm beyond wall)
Sill to project beyond the wall or sub-sill Checked rebate window frame detail for areas of severe exposure
by at least 25mm (ensure the water drip
projects at least 10mm beyond wall) Cavity closer. This should also be fire
Inner leaf
Cavity closer. This should also be fire Vertical DPC to be provided around
resistant when required by the regional masonry, and where possible fixed to the
Building Regulations window/door frame
Bay window detail Cold bridging insulation 25mm minimum frame overlap behind
outer leaf
DPC full width of external leaf and not

less than 150mm wide
DPC to be lapped behind window frame

sealant to be provided between frame
and masonry reveal
Maximum gap of 10mm between Outer leaf
window frame and external masonry. 25mm rebate to allow for building tolerance
The joint between the masonry and 25mm and window fixing tolerance
window frame to be sealed with mastic Sill projection beyond wall by at least 25mm
When installing window/door frames in a checked rebate, allow for the frame to
be deeper:

© MD Insurance Services Limited 2020 223 WINDOWS AND DOORS

WINDOWS AND DOORS
8.2.3
8.2.3 TIMBER: Level
TIMBER: Level access
access
Ramped/level threshold to principle entrance door
Ground bearing slab construction, timber door sill
The construction of the access landings and Perimeter DPC

ramps must not compromise the DPC in the insulation
walls Sill to project beyond the wall
Movement or sub-sill by at least 25mm
joint (ensure the water drip projects
Underfloor Screed at least 10mm beyond wall)
Ventilators Landing to a 1:60 Vented and drained space
fall away from
door Concrete slab
Vented and drained space
*
DPC Insulation
Proprietary drainage channel

DPM
Hardcore fill
Non deformable cavity closer
*
(insulated)
Cavity insulation
DPC
RAMP
Timber sill
1:12 Max
150mm
Where timber sills are installed, to prevent deterioration of the timber due to the risk of moisture ingress, a drained
150mm and vented void must be provided immediately in front of the sill (at least 125mm invert).
Max height
15mm Max height Drainage slots
Internal transition unit no greater than
(if required) 10mm
18mm wide
Max slope 15°
Floor finish
* See Building Regulations for disabled ramp design and landing dimensions. Sill to project beyond the wall
or sub-sill by at least 25mm Invert depth
Ramps should not exceed 1:12 gradient. Where the outside ground levels slope towards the property, an effective gully system should be (ensure the water drip projects 125mm min
provided to prevent flooding, e.g. in front of garage doors. at least 10mm beyond wall)
Vented and drained space

Level threshold
125mm min
Thresholds and sills should be at least 150mm above finished ground level. However, where a level (threshold) access is required, the general
guidance in this section should be followed - ensuring a high level of supervision and workmanship together with the correct specification of
materials and consideration to design, location, and exposure. Proprietary drainage channel
Wherever possible, locate the entrance door away from the prevailing weather and provide a storm porch. Where a drainage channel is provided,
this must be connected to the storm drainage system to prevent flooding occurring and water ingress into the building.
It is recommended that a mat well be constructed within the entrance hall to accommodate the swing of the door without fouling the carpet and/or
the proprietary door seal.
Level thresholds timber frame structure

At the level threshold open perpends should be provided in close proximity to the timbers on each side of the door opening one brick course
below the lowest timber. The open perpends must provide adequate ventilation of the external wall cavity, and drainage to disperse water that
may penetrate the cladding.
WINDOWS AND DOORS

© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 224
WINDOWS AND DOORS
8. 8.3
Windows
and Doors

8.3.1
8.3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: Means
Meansofofescape, security,
escape, protection
security, fromfrom
protection falling, and control
falling, of condensation
and control of condensation
Means of escape Security
In terms of emergency egress windows in two storey dwellings, with the exception of kitchens, all habitable rooms in the The design and specification of doors and windows which provide access into a dwelling or into a building containing a dwelling
upper storey served by one stairway shall be provided with a window: should take into account the requirements of current regional Building Regulations to ensure the system is classified and tested to
the appropriate burglar resistance class.
· With an unobstructed opening area of at least 0.33m2.
· At least 450mm high x 450mm wide. In addition:
· With the bottom of the opening area not more than 1100mm above the floor.
· The frames of secure doorsets and windows should be mechanically fixed to the building structure in accordance with the
manufacturer's tested specifications.
· Where a doorset is installed in a lightweight framed wall, a resilient layer should be incorporated to reduce the risk of anyone
breaking through the wall to access the locking systems. The resilient layer should be for the full height of the door and 600mm
either side of the doorset, 9mm timber sheathing or expanded metal may be used.
Emergency egress window provision · Any glazing which if broken in an attempt to gain access to the locking device on a door must be a minimum class of P1A in
accordance with BS EN 356:2000.
· A means of caller identification should be provided at the main door to the dwelling to allow means of seeing callers. The same
doorsets should also have a securely fixed door chain or door limiter fitted.
· The doors and windows should be manufactured to a design that has been shown by tests to meet the security requirements of
PAS 24.
Protection from falling

450mm
minimum For houses and flats the guidance in Approved Document K2 (Building Regulations England and Wales) specifies a minimum guard
height of 800mm to window openings in the external wall. This would normally be achieved by forming window openings of at least
450mm 800mm above the finished floor level. The wall beneath the opening is therefore considered to be the barrier to falling.
minimum
Where window openings are formed less than 800mm from the finished floor level, permanent guarding should be provided to the
opening in accordance with the design requirements specified in the relevant Building Regulations.
opening area not less
than 0.33m² If window openings are formed less than 800mm from the finished floor level, and there is no permanent guarding provided, and the
glass is required to act as the barrier and provide containment to persons falling against it; the glass needs to be designed in
accordance with the requirements of BS 6180. The designer shall determine the potential impact energy by establishing the
perpendicular unhindered distance that could be travelled prior to impact.
In the absence of an assessment by a suitably qualified person, any glass which is required to provide containment must meet with
BS EN 12600 Class 1(C)1.
Control of condensation
Minimise the effects of condensation on glazing and frames by:

Side hung window Top hung window
1100mm maximum · Using details that prevent condensation running onto walls or floors
800mm minimum · Housing window boards into frames to prevent condensation entering the joint
Note: Opening lights · Providing thermal insulation to walls at lintels, sills and jambs. Guidance on this subject is provided in BRE's report Thermal
not key lockable insulation: Avoiding risks.
Cavity barriers
The installation of cavity barriers should be provided at all structural openings formed in external walls as per the
relevant regional Building Regulations please see the 'External Walls' section for further information.
Fire doors
Any door between a dwelling and an attached or integral garage should be a half-hour fire-resisting door and frame.
WINDOWS AND DOORS

© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 226
WINDOWS AND DOORS
8.3.2 GENERAL
8.3.2 GENERALREQUIREMENTS:
REQUIREMENTS: Critical
Critical locations
locationsand
andthe
theappearance
appearanceof glazing
of glazing
Critical locations Glazing to critical locations
Doors and side panels
Glazing in doors and windows in areas known as 'critical locations' needs to be given special consideration in order to prevent potential Windows
injury to people within or around the building.
These 'critical locations', as shown below, are:
· In a door or in a side panel adjacent to a door where the glazing is within 300mm of the door and the glazing is situated between floor
level and a height of 1500mm.
· In an internal or external wall or partition between floor level and a height of 800mm.
It is important that any glazing within these 'critical locations' should be either:
· Provided with permanent protection.

1500mm
· Small panes.
· Robust.
· Break safely. 800mm 800mm
If permanent protection is provided, there is no requirement for the glazing itself to be of a special type. Permanent protection may take the
form of railing or barriers and should:
· Be designed to be robust. 300mm 300mm

· Have a maximum opening or gap in any railing of 75mm or less.
· Be a minimum of 800mm high.
· Be non-climbable (especially where floor is acting as a balcony). Glazing should be in accordance with BS 6262. Insulated glass units (IGU) should meet requirements of BS EN 1279 - Glass in building - insulating glass
units, be CE marked and carry third-party accreditation. This includes windows in possession of a BBA certificate and timber windows.
Small panes, either an isolated pane within glazing bars or copper or lead lights should be restricted in size so that any breakage would be
strictly limited. · They should have continuous dual seals; single seal units are not acceptable.
· Desiccant should be provided to spacer bars.
Small panes should be: · Any glazing on-site must have a drained and ventilated bottom bead with a minimum gap of 5mm between the edge seal of the insulated glass unit
and the bottom channel of the frames glazing rebate.
· No more than 0.5m2 in area. · Any glazing with an area greater than 1m2 must have a drained and ventilated bottom bead with a minimum gap of 5mm between the edge seal of
· No wider than 250mm. the insulated glass unit and the bottom channel of the frames glazing rebate.
· Glazing with an area less than 1m2 may be solid bedded.
Where annealed glass is used a minimum of 6mm thickness is recommended (4mm for copper or lead lights). Some materials are
· UPVC frames and spacer bars should be stamped with BS 7412, 7413 and 7414.
inherently strong such as glass blocks or polycarbonates, whereas annealed glass will need to be of an increased thickness as the area of
the panel increases to be considered 'safe'. As an alternative to any of the above solutions it is possible for the material to break 'safely'
Linseed oil glazing putty should not be used when the joinery is finished with vapour permeable paint or stain. Glazing putty should also not be used with
when tested to BS EN 12600 which would mean that:
organic solvent-based stains, the putty should be neatly finished to receive a protective paint coat.
· Only a small opening was created with a limited size of detached particles.
· The balance would create only small pieces that are not sharp or pointed. Putty is not suitable for laminated glass and double-glazed units, the workmanship should be in accordance with BS 8000: 7. To ensure the
· The pane disintegrates with only small detached particles. compatibility of the whole glazing system is to a high level of workmanship and control, it is recommended that factory pre-glazed systems be installed in
all external openings.
A glazing material would be suitable for a critical location if it meets the requirements of BS 6262 - 4 Table 1 when tested in accordance
with BS EN 12600. Glass installed in a door or in a side panel to a door that exceeds 900mm wide must meet the relevant requirements of The window beads should suitably lap the windows and doors to prevent premature degradation of the glazing unit.
BS EN 12600 and BS 6262 - 4.
External glazing beads should be pinned at a maximum of 150mm centres (a maximum of 50mm from corners) or screwed at 200mm centres (maximum
Appearance of glazing 50mm from corners).
Glass must meet the visual assessment criteria of the Glass and Glazing Federation and CWCT Technical Note 35 (TN 35). The total The preferred method of installation for double-glazed units is either:
number of faults permitted in a glass unit shall be the sum total of those permitted by the relevant BS EN Standard for each pane of glass
incorporated into the unit concerned. · Drained and ventilated frames, as recommended by the Glass and Glazing Federation (GGF), where possible this method should be adopted for
external glazing.
Acceptable Faults include: · Solid bedding of units in 16mm-18mm deep frame rebates; 18mm rebates are recommended by the GGF to allow for tolerances. In all cases,
sealants should not be sensitive to ultraviolet light. External glazing beads should be fixed at a maximum of 150mm centres, and the glazing bedded
· Inclusions, bubbles, spots and stains. in non-setting putty. Louvre windows should not be used and double-glazing should be fixed and bedded as recommended by the GGF.
· Residues within the insulated glass unit cavity.
· Fine scratches not more than 25mm long. Nickel sulphide inclusions in glazing
· Minute particles.
In buildings which exceed three storeys in height, 100% of toughened glazing should be formed and then heat soak tested in accordance with BS EN
When assessing the appearance of glass: 14179-1. The glass must be permanently marked in accordance with BS EN 14179-1 and substantiated evidence of heat soak testing must be disclosed
for all effected panes.
· The viewing distance used shall be the furthest stated in any of the BS EN Standards for the glass types incorporated in the glazed
unit. In the event of doubt the viewing distance shall be three metres. Alternatively where toughened glazing does not exceed 50kg in weight and where there is safe and easy access to remove and replace the glazing
· The viewing shall commence at the viewing distance and shall not be preceded by viewing at a closer distance. without the need for access scaffolding or fall arrest equipment, a methodology statement of how this will be undertaken should be provided.
· The viewing shall be undertaken in normal daylight conditions without use of magnification.
The above does not apply within 50mm of the edge of the pane, where minor scratching is acceptable. Scratches on doors, windows and
frames and factory finished door and window components should not have conspicuous abrasions, or scratches when viewed from a
distance of 0.5m.
· Surface abrasions caused during the building-in process should be removed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions,
which may include polishing out, re-spraying or painting.
· In rooms where there is no daylight, scratches should be viewed in artificial diffused light from fixed wall or ceiling outlets and not from
portable equipment.
© MD
© Insurance Services Limited 20202020 227 WINDOWS AND DOORS
WINDOWS AND DOORS
CONTENTS
9.
Contents
Stairs
9.1 Timber


Workmanship W
No additional requirements. 1.
Materials
1.
Design
1. Stairs and landings must have appropriate guarding to meet the relevant regional Building Regulations.
2. Staircases, ramps and guards shall be designed and constructed so that they: De
a. Offer safe passage between levels in the building; 1.
b. Provide a safe means of escape in case of fire;
c. Where necessary, provide a safe means of access for ambulant disabled people;
d. Are structurally sound;
e. Adequately protect the user from the risk of falling;
f. Are adequately lit.
3. Access staircases in flats which form part of the separation between flats and between other parts of the
same building shall:
a. Have adequate resistance to the spread of fire;
b. Have adequate resistance to the passage of sound.

guidance.
Lim
1.
STAIRS
230
STAIRS
9. 9.1
Timber
Stairs

9.1.1
9.1.1 TIMBER: Riser
TIMBER: Riser and
and going
goingrequirements
requirements
Headroom and landing dimensions Stairways
Staircases, newels, balustrades and handrails are to be adequately fixed to avoid excessive deflection.
Strings are required on staircases to provide a secure fix to an adjacent wall, that should be constructed of masonry or
timber. The top tread should not be solely relied upon for fixing. It is recommended that stair strings should have fixings at
900mm centres. The fixings should be at least 6mm diameter screws that penetrate into the masonry wall or timber stud by
at least 60mm.
The width and length of Unless it is for a means of entrance/exit within a communal type building, there is no longer guidance given for a minimum
the landing to the top of width of a staircase. In these circumstances, the width and pitch, etc. will be determined by the use of the building.
the flight must be at least
as great as the width of Where a staircase serves an individual property, the need is for it to provide a safe means of access between different
the flight levels.
All staircases are to have:

Headroom:
· A maximum rise of 220mm, with a minimum going of 220mm, although the stair pitch, which is a line connecting all
H = 2 metres
nosing's, should not exceed 42°.
minimum Intermediate floor · The dimensions for maximum rise and minimum going should be as detailed in the table below.
· At its narrowest point, the minimum width of a winder tread should be no less than 50mm.
· The minimum headroom over the flight and landing should be 2m.
Pitch line of Rise and going requirements for stairs

nosings Staircase construction to be securely fixed:
· Strings to be securely fixed to an Type of stairs Maximum rise (mm) Minimum going (mm)
adjacent wall at 900mm centres
Door opening 400mm · Top tread to be securely fixed to
inwards in front of minimum Private stairs 220 220 (225 Scotland)
adjacent floor trimmers
landing at the String
bottom of the stairs Common stairs 190 (170 Scotland) 250
Handrails and Guarding:
Access stairs 170 250
42° max · To comply with regional Building
Ground floor Regulations
For buildings other than dwellings, make the step 'nosings' apparent with a permanent secure strip that contrasts visually,
a minimum of 55mm wide on both the tread and the riser.
Flight constructed of equal risers Flight must not consist of unequal risers
Pitch line of Pitch line of

nosings. nosings
= =
= =
Equal Note: Unequal
risers risers
= · Treads must be level =
· The risers must be equal
throughout the flight
= · Rise and going to be
consistent and meet
regional Building
Regulations
STAIRS
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 232
STAIRS
9.1.2 TIMBER:
9.1.2 TIMBER:Handrails
Handrailsand
and guarding
guarding
Handrails and guarding Lighting
Handrails and guarding over the flight and landing should be established at a height of Artificial light sources should be provided to all staircases and landings. Within a building, lighting
between 900mm and 1000mm. It should be non-climbable, and any gap within a riser or to stairs should be controlled by two-way switching.
guarding should not exceed 99mm.
Automatic light-sensitive controls may be used in common areas, provided lights can also be
Handrail design should ensure: two-way switched manually.
· A firm handhold. Where staircases are lit by glazing, any glass immediately adjacent to the stair should be:
· Trapping or injuring the hand is prevented.
· A minimum 25mm clearance at the back of the handrail. · Protected by a balustrade or railing, or
· Secure fixing. · Toughened or laminated glass, and non openable, or
· Constructed of glass blocks.
Where the staircase is greater than or equal to 1000mm in width, a handrail should be
provided to both sides of the staircase. Decoration
Landings Further guidance on painting and decorating can be found in the 'Internal Walls' section.
Landings must be provided at the top and bottom of every flight and should be: Fire resistance
Upper newel post
· The width and length at least as great as the smallest width of the flight (also, in Stairs should have the appropriate fire resistance to meet the regional Building Regulations. notched over joist and
buildings other than dwellings; have an unobstructed length of at least 1200mm). mechanically fixed
· Be kept clear of permanent obstructions including opening doors, except in a building
Sound resistance
where a door may swing across the landing at the bottom of a flight providing there is a
clear unobstructed landing of at least 400mm deep maintained between the flight and
the opening swing of the door. Stairs should have the appropriate sound resistance to meet the regional Building Regulations.
· Inside the building, landings must be level.
· Landings are to be properly framed to provide full support to, and secure fixings, for
flights, nosing's, newels, apron linings etc.
Landing
Headroom 2m minimum
headroom
The overall floor opening is to be checked for the size required to accept the stairs and allow
for sufficient headroom.
· The minimum headroom above the stairs is to be measured vertically from the pitch
line. Stair trimmers bolted
· The clear headroom should be 2m over the entire length and width of a stairway, at 900mm centres
including landings.
Overall vertical rise Handrail - spans

between newel posts
Staircases are traditionally manufactured off-site, so the floor-to-floor dimensions should be and adequately fixed
extremely accurate, although an allowance should be made for floor finishes to structural
floors or staircase treads.
Wall string - fixed to wall
Pitch at 900mm centres using
appropriate fixings
Staircases should be accurately located and fixed with the string at the correct angle, so that
all treads are horizontal. The pitch should be suitable or the intended use in accordance with
the relevant regional Building Regulations.
Tread - spans between
The maximum angle of pitch of a stairway should not exceed 42° for private stairs. string.
Balusters forming infill
Floor finishes between string and
handrail
Allowance should be made for stair and floor finishes, ensuring that all risers are equal.
Bottom step
Outer string - spans

between newel posts
Staircase: Straight flight
© MD
© MD Insurance
Insurance Services
Services Limited
Limited 20202020 233
233 STAIRS
STAIRS
CONTENTS
10.
Contents
Upper
10.1 Suspended Timber
10.2 I-joists
Floors 10.3
10.4
Metal Web
Floor Boarding for Timber Upper Floors
10.5 Plaster Boarding for Timber Upper Floors
10.6 Suspended Beam and Block
10.7 Concrete Plank
10.8 General Requirements for Concrete Upper Floors
10.9 General Requirements - Cavity Barriers and Fire Stopping


Workmanship W
1. Fire stopping and cavity barriers are to be completed by a third-party approved contractor for all flats and 1.
apartments with a floor 4.5m above ground level.
Materials
1. Fire stopping and cavity barrier materials are to have relevant third-party certification confirming suitability
in its application.
Design
1. Party floors between buildings must achieve satisfactory levels of sound insulation to meet the relevant
2. Layouts indicating the positions of compartment walls/floors and other lines of fire resistance must be
provided for all flats and apartments with a floor 4.5m above ground level and must demonstrate
compliance with regional Building Regulations. Ma
3. Upper floors - (including separating floors) shall be designed and constructed so that they: No
a. Provide suitable surfaces for normal use activities;
b. Are structurally sound; De
c. Are durable and resistant to moisture; 1.
d. Have adequate resistance to the effects of fire and surface spread of flame;
4. Separating floors - floors which separate a building from other parts of the same building (such as in flats)
shall be designed and constructed so that they:
a. Have adequate resistance to the spread of fire between buildings, and between buildings and other
buildings;
b. Have adequate resistance to the passage of sound between buildings, and between buildings and
other buildings.
5. Separating floor between the dwelling area and garage or outside - within a Housing Unit shall be
designed and constructed so that they:
a. Have adequate resistance to the spread of fire between garage, and dwelling area;
b. Prevent undue heat losses from the dwelling area to unheated garage or outside.

guidance.
UPPER FLOORS
236
UPPER FLOORS
10. 10.1
Suspended Timber
Upper
Floors

10.1.1 SUSPENDED
10.1.1 SUSPENDED TIMBER:
TIMBER: Layout
Layoutofofjoists
joistsand
andbearing requirements
bearing on to
requirements onmasonry wallswalls
to masonry
Floor Joists
For advice on sizing of certain timber members of floors, the Designer should
refer to the following sources:
· Span tables for solid timber members in floors, ceilings and roofs
Joist hanger bearing
(excluding trussed rafter roofs) for dwellings. Published by BM TRADA.
Note: Reference should be made to the version of the BM TRADA Maximum 6mm
document current at the time of construction of the floor/ceiling or roof. gap between joist
· BS 8103-3, Structure design of low rise buildings, Code of Practice for and hanger
timber floors and roofs for dwellings.
· BS EN 1995, Eurocode 5 design of timber structures. General. Common
rules and rules for buildings.
Provide at least 450mm
It is essential that joists are not overloaded during construction. Joints in joists
depth of bonded masonry
should only be in place over a load-bearing support, or the joint be designed by
above the joist hanger or to
a qualified Structural Engineer.
Minimum manufacturers requirements
Joists should be restrained at supports using tightly fitted strutting. 35mm
bearing
Joists should have a minimum end bearing of 90mm, unless joist hangers are
used, where a 35mm bearing is acceptable (subject to the manufacturer's
details).
Minimum 10mm expansion gap
required between finished wall
Steel beams Maximum 600mm surface and floor board edge
spacing between
Steel beams should be designed by a suitably qualified Structural Engineer and joist centres
should have appropriate fire resistance to meet the requirements of the regional Floor boarding
Timber noggins to support
perimeter edges of floor boarding
Where steel beams and columns are used to support the upper floor
construction on a project in a coastal location, and maybe exposed to an
aggressive external environment (e.g. under croft) please follow the Midspan strutting needed if span
requirements for additional corrosion protection in 'Appendix B - Coastal exceeds 2.5m
Locations' and ' Appendix C - Materials, Products, and Building Systems'.
To prevent the distortion of finishes, joists should be stopped from twisting over Strutting/noggin infill between
supports and provision provided to accommodate up to 12mm of drying joists. If masonry infill, the top of
shrinkage in floor joists supported by steel beams. the masonry should finish at
least 12mm below the top of the
joist to allow for shrinkage
Steel beam bearing
Intermediate load support
Where floor boarding continues
over the floor joist and steel
beam, the timber joist should
l
al
W
finish not less than 12mm above

al
rn
te
the top of the steel beam to allow

Ex
for shrinkage of the timber
Where ceiling finishes continue Joists to overlap no
al
more than 100mm
across the joist and steel beam, W
te
ia
the floor joist must extend at beyond the wall Built-in bearing
ed
rm
least 2mm below the steel beam

te
In
to allow for shrinkage
Solid timber infill in web of beam.

Any gaps above
l
al
Joists should not be notched into
W
Load bearing
al
the web of the steel beam joist to consist of
rn
te
wall
Ex
hard packing
of
af
le
Minimum 35mm bearing Solid timber
l
na
er
Minimum
t
joist
Restraint of walls In end bearing
of 90mm
Walls should be adequately restrained at floors, ceilings and verges in accordance with
the relevant Building Regulations.
Restraint can be provided by:

Further guidance can be found in the 'External Walls' section.
UPPER FLOORS
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 238
UPPER FLOORS
10.1.2 SUSPENDED
TIMBER: Layout
Layout of
of joists
joistsand
andbearing
bearingrequirements on on
requirements to atotimber frame
a timber frame
Floor Joists
For advice on sizing of certain timber members of floors, the Designer should
refer to the following sources:
· Span tables for solid timber members in floors, ceilings and roofs
(excluding trussed rafter roofs) for dwellings. Published by BM TRADA.
Note: Reference should be made to the version of the BM TRADA Blocking between joists
document current at the time of construction of the floor/ceiling or roof.
· BS 8103-3, Structure design of low rise buildings, Code of Practice for Trimmed joists
timber floors and roofs for dwellings.
· BS EN 1995, Eurocode 5 design of timber structures. General. Common Blocking between joists
Trimmer joists
It is essential that joists are not overloaded during construction. Joints in joists Stairwell Noggings for securing
should only be in place over a load-bearing support, or the joint be designed by head of non-loadbearing
a qualified Structural Engineer. Timbers to give flush wall below - off specified
surface to stairwell wall centres
Trimming joists Double joist positioned
Joists should have a minimum end bearing of 90mm, unless joist hangers are below non loadbearing
used, where a 35mm bearing is acceptable (subject to the manufacturer's wall - off specified centres
details).
Header joist
Steel beams
Steel beams should be designed by a suitably qualified Structural Engineer and Additional joist positioned
should have appropriate fire resistance to meet the requirements of the regional below non-loadbearing
Where steel beams and columns are used to support the upper floor Blocking Loadbearing wall
construction on a project in a coastal location, and maybe exposed to an
aggressive external environment (e.g. under croft) please follow the
requirements for additional corrosion protection in in 'Appendix B - Coastal
Locations' and ' Appendix C - Materials, Products, and Building Systems'. Blocking to support
short non loadbearing
To prevent the distortion of finishes, joists should be stopped from twisting over wall above
supports and provision provided to accommodate up to 12mm of drying
shrinkage in floor joists supported by steel beams.
Blocking Joist parallel to wall
Steel beam bearing

Double joists
Where floor boarding continues Floor deck
over the floor joist and steel
beam, the timber joist should Strutting between joists (can Header joists
finish not less than 12mm above be herringbone or solid)
the top of the steel beam to Joists at max
allow for shrinkage of the timber 600mm centres Insulation when
specified for acoustics
Where ceiling finishes continue Joist at right angle to wall performance
across the joist and steel beam,
the floor joist must extend at
least 2mm below the steel beam
to allow for shrinkage Floor deck Nogging to support
ceiling lining
Header joist
Solid timber infill in web of beam.
Joists should not be notched into Joist bearing
the web of the steel beam
Insulation when
Minimum 35mm bearing specified for acoustics
performance
Restraint of walls
Nogging to support
Walls should be adequately restrained at floors, ceilings and verges in ceiling lining
accordance with the relevant Building Regulations.
Further guidance can be found in the 'External Walls' section.
© MD
© MD Insurance
Insurance Services
Services Limited
Limited 20202020 239
239 UPPERFLOORS
UPPER FLOORS
10.1.3 SUSPENDED
10.1.3 SUSPENDED TIMBER:
TIMBER: Notching
Notchingand
anddrilling of of
drilling joists
joists
Permissible area for notching of joists Notching and drilling in solid timber joists basic guide
Requirements for notching and drilling of solid timber joists (further guidance can be found in BS 8103, TRADA span
0.2 x span max tables, BS EN 1996 and PD 6693 - 1), this guidance is for joists up to 250mm deep, notching and drilling for joists
exceeding this depth should be designed by a Structural Engineer.
Floor joist
Notches: Notches should be made in between 0.1 and 0.2 x span. Notches should be no deeper than 0.15 x depth of
0.1 x span Maximum depth of notch the joists in this area. e.g. For a 250mm deep joist, the maximum notch depth should not exceed 35mm.
min should be 0.15 x joist depth.
Holes: Holes should be drilled on the centre line of the joist. Holes should be between 0.25 and 0.4 x the span. Holes
should be a maximum diameter of 0.25 x the joists depth and kept apart by at least 3x the diameter. The maximum
Maximum hole diameter should not exceed 65mm.
depth
250mm Note: Notches and holes should be a minimum of 100mm apart.
The table below gives an indication of the areas in a joist which are suitable for notching and drilling.
Typical permissible zones for notching and drilling of solid timber joists
Bearing No hole to be closer than

area 100mm to any notch (and Notches to be taken out only within Holes only to be drilled within these
vice-versa) Span (m)
these zones (m) zones (m)
1.5 0.15 0.30 0.375 0.6

2 0.2 0.4 0.5 0.8
2.5 0.25 0.5 0.625 1
3.0 0.3 0.6 0.75 1.2
Permissible area for drilling of joists 3.5 0.35 0.7 0.875 1.4
Holes not exceeding 0.25 x depth:
4 0.4 0.8 1 1.6
Holes should be positioned on the centre 4.5 0.45 0.9 1.125 1.8
0.4 x span line between 0.25 x span and 0.4 x span 5 0.5 1 1.25 2
from a support
0.25 x span
Maximum
depth
250mm
Bearing
area Not closer than 3 x diameter
UPPER FLOORS
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 240
UPPER FLOORS
10.1.4 SUSPENDED
TIMBER: Strutting
Strutting and
andtrimming
trimmingrequirements
requirements
Strutting of joists with a span between 2.5m and 4.5m Strutting or bridging of solid timber floor joists
1 row of strutting at Where the span of a floor joist is more than 2.5m, strutting is necessary. This should be provided either by timber bridging
mid span or strutting in accordance with Figure 3 of BS 8103-3: 2009 or by a proprietary system.
1 Timber strutting can be in the form of solid bridging of at least 38mm basic thickness and with a depth equal to at least
2 span
Where the span of a floor joist is more than three-quarters of the depth of the joists; or it can consist of herringbone strutting with members of at least 38mm by 38mm
Support 2.5m, strutting is necessary. This should be basic size. Herringbone strutting should not be used where the distance between the joists is more than approximately
three times the depth of the joists.
provided either by timber bridging or strutting
in accordance with Figure 3 of BS 8103-3: Deflection of floors
Joists 2009 or by a proprietary system
For upper floors (intermediate floors), designers and engineers must observe our tolerance requirements for levelness of
floors. Please refer to the 'Tolerances' section for further guidance.
There may be an instance where a joist might be designed to meet permissible deflections with a relevant British
Standard; however, our tolerance requirements will take precedence.
Strutting
Typical trimming detail (plan)
Support (as calculated by Double joists should be bolted together at 600mm centres
Structural Engineer) using minimum 10mm diameter bolts with large washers
2.5m - 4.5m that will prevent the bolt head and nut from penetrating the
span joist. It is recommended that the bolting of double joists is
Joist hanger along the centre line of joists. Suitably sized trimmer joists
shall be provided around floor openings
Strutting of joists with a span over 4.5m 2 rows of strutting at one third Trimmed openings may be needed around staircase
span positions openings and chimneys. Solid trimmed joists may be
1 1 1
supported using either joist hangers or a structurally
3 span 3 span 3 span
designed connection; timber trimmers around openings
Support should consist of at least two members and be designed by
a Structural Engineer
Joists
Strutting
over 4.5m span
Where the span of a floor joist or flat roof joist is more than 4.5m, two rows of strutting at 1/3rd the span position will be necessary
© MD
© MD Insurance
Insurance Services
Services Limited
Limited 20202020 241
241 UPPERFLOORS
UPPER FLOORS
10. 10.2
I-joists
Upper
Floors

10.2.1 I-JOISTS:
10.2.1 I-JOISTS:Layout
Layoutofofjoists
joists and
and bearing
bearing requirements
requirementsonontoto
masonry walls
masonry walls
I-joists The top and bottom flanges must not be notched. Where ceiling and floor boards
are nailed to the flanges, care must be taken to avoid splitting of the flange
Engineered timber I-joists include a timber flange (usually solid timber or laminated member.
veneer lumber (LVL)) and a panel product web (usually OSB). They are manufactured
in an assortment of depths and flange widths under controlled factory conditions to Storage of I-joists
low and uniform moisture contents.
I-joists should be protected from the elements and supported on suitable bearers over
I-joists should be designed in accordance with BS EN 1995, Eurocode 5 design of
a free draining surface. Levels of exposure, which are more severe than those
Timber Structures. General: Common rules and rules for buildings. I-joists should be encountered during a normal uninterrupted build programme should be addressed by
appropriately CE marked and comply with ETAG 011 or hold independent third party Restraint type hanger the provision of suitable protection.
certification.
Maximum 6mm
It is essential that joists are not overloaded during construction. Joints in joists should
Bracing
gap between joist
only be in place over a load-bearing support, or the joint be designed by a qualified and hanger Top flange restraint:
Structural Engineer. Large areas of floor joists can be assembled with these products due to their
Noggins securely fixed with lightweight and availability in long lengths. It is of great importance that adequate
Joists should be restrained at supports using tightly fitted strutting. manufacturers specified clip. safety bracing is provided to ensure that the joists remain stable through the
construction phase. Joist manufacturers provide simple guide recommendations that
Joists should have a minimum end bearing of 90mm, unless joist hangers are used, allow an installer to facilitate this process with ease and speed.
where the minimum bearing should be to the manufacturers specifications.
· Unbraced joist layouts are not to be walked on by workers.
Joist hangers should be detailed in the design, including confirmation that the joist
Minimum bearing of I-joist · Floors should not become overloaded during construction.
hangers have the equivalent to restraint straps at 2m centres where required to
to be to manufacturer's · Under no circumstances should the flanges of the I-joist be cut, notched or drilled.
provide restraint.
specification and not less
Steel beams than 45mm
Provide at least 450mm
depth of bonded masonry
Steel beams should be designed by a suitably qualified Structural Engineer and above the joist hanger or to
should have appropriate fire resistance to meet the requirements of the regional manufacturers requirements
Where steel beams and columns are used to support the upper floor construction on a
project in a coastal location, and maybe exposed to an aggressive external
environment (e.g. under croft) please follow the requirements for additional corrosion
Minimum 10mm expansion
protection in 'Appendix B - Coastal Locations' and ' Appendix C - Materials, Products,
Centres of I-joist to be to gap required between finished
and Building Systems'.
manufacturers specification. wall surface and floor board
Maximum 600mm spacing edge
To prevent the distortion of finishes, joists should be stopped from twisting over
supports and provision provided to accommodate up to 12mm of drying shrinkage in
floor joists supported by steel beams.
Steel Bearing
Joist hangers to Floor boarding
When constructing support both top
floor finishes; Allow and bottom
for a 12mm reduction Intermediate wall support -
flanges of I-joist Short sections of I-joist used
in level due to
shrinkage of the joist between main I-joists with web
stiffeners inserted
Solid infill in web of
beam
Minimum bearing to
I-joist manufacturers
specifications
l
al
W
al
rn
te
Restraint of walls
Ex
Walls should be adequately restrained at floors, ceilings and verges in accordance with the Proprietary stiffeners to be
Joist hangers to support
relevant Building Regulations.
al
W
both top and bottom used in web void where I-joist

te
ia
flanges of I-joist is built into internal wall (or

ed

rm
where built into inner leaf of

te
·
In
Restraint type joist hangers

Web stiffener cavity wall)
· Lateral restraint straps
· Other forms of restraint proven by a Chartered Engineer
I-joists are not suitable for
Deflection building into a solid external
l
al
W
wall
aln
er
xt
For upper floors (intermediate floors), designers and engineers must observe our tolerance
fE
requirements for levelness of floors. Please refer to the 'Tolerances' section. fo
ea
lla
rn
te
There may be an instance where a joist might be designed to meet permissible deflections
In
within a relevant British Standard; however, our tolerance requirements will take precedence.
© MD
© MD Insurance
Insurance Services
Services Limited
Limited 20202020 243
243 UPPERFLOORS
UPPER FLOORS
10.2.2 I-JOISTS:
10.2.2 I-JOISTS:Layout
Layout of
of joists
joists and
and bearing
bearingrequirements
requirementsonon
to to
a timber frame
a timber frame
I-joists The top and bottom flanges must not be notched. Where ceiling and floor boards
are nailed to the flanges, care must be taken to avoid splitting of the flange
Engineered timber I-joists include a timber flange (usually solid timber or laminated member.
veneer lumber (LVL)) and a panel product web (usually OSB). They are manufactured
in an assortment of depths and flange widths under controlled factory conditions to Storage of I-joists
low and uniform moisture contents.
I-joists should be protected from the elements and supported on suitable bearers over
I-joists should be designed in accordance with BS EN 1995, Eurocode 5 design of
Timber Structures. General: Common rules and rules for buildings. I-joists should be Minimum 38x38mm perimeter a free draining surface. Levels of exposure, which are more severe than those
appropriately CE marked comply with ETAG 011 or hold independent third party noggins for floor deck support - encountered during a normal uninterrupted build programme should be addressed by
certification. similar may be required for the provision of suitable protection.
ceiling edge support.
It is essential that joists are not overloaded during construction. Joints in joists, rafters Bracing
and purlins should only be in place over a load-bearing support, or the joint be Alternatively provide blocking
designed by a qualified Structural Engineer. pieces in web to support Large areas of floor joists can be assembled with these products due to their
perimeter noggins lightweight and availability in long lengths. It is of great importance that adequate
Joists should be restrained at supports using tightly fitted strutting. safety bracing is provided to ensure that the joists remain stable through the
construction phase. Joist manufacturers provide simple guide recommendations that
Joists should have a minimum end bearing of 90mm, unless joist hangers are used,
allow an installer to facilitate this process with ease and speed.
where the minimum bearing should be to the manufacturers specifications.
Joist hangers should be detailed in the design, including confirmation that the joist · Unbraced joist layouts are not to be walked on by workers.
hangers have the equivalent to restraint straps at 2m centres where required to · Floors should not become overloaded during construction.
provide restraint. · Under no circumstances should the flanges of the I-joist be cut, notched or drilled.
Minimum bearing of I-joist
to be to manufacturer's Floor boarding
Steel Beams specification.
Steel beams should be designed by a suitably qualified Structural Engineer and

should have appropriate fire resistance to meet the requirements of the regional
Building Regulations. Minimum 10mm expansion
gap required between finished
Where steel beams and columns are used to support the upper floor construction on a wall surface and floor board
project in a coastal location, and maybe exposed to an aggressive external edge
environment (e.g. under croft) please follow the requirements for additional corrosion
protection in 'Appendix B - Coastal Locations' and ' Appendix C - Materials, Products,
and Building Systems'.
To prevent the distortion of finishes, joists should be stopped from twisting over
supports and provision provided to accommodate up to 12mm of drying shrinkage in
floor joists supported by steel beams. I-joists are not suitable for
building into a solid external
Centres of I-joist to be to wall
Steel beam bearing manufacturers specification.
Joist hangers to Maximum 600mm spacing
When constructing support both top
floor finishes; Allow and bottom
for a 12mm reduction flanges of I-joist
in level due to
shrinkage of the joist
Solid infill in web of

beam
Backing blocks
Minimum bearing to
I-joist manufacturers
al
W
specifications
al
rn
te
Ex
Restraint of walls
al
W
Walls should be adequately restrained at floors, ceilings and verges in accordance with the
te
ia
relevant Building Regulations. Load

ed
m r
te
In
Restraint can be provided by: Web stiffner

· Restraint type joist hangers
· Lateral restraint straps
· Other forms of restraint proven by a Chartered Engineer
Intermediate wall support - Gap at
Short sections of I-joist used bottom
Deflection
between main I-joists with web
For timber floors (intermediate floors), designers and engineers must observe our tolerance stiffners inserted.
requirements for levelness of floors. Please refer to the 'Tolerances' section.
There may be an instance where a joist might be designed to meet permissible deflections within
a relevant British Standard; however, our tolerance requirements will take precedence.
UPPER FLOORS
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 244
244
UPPER FLOORS
10.2.3 I-JOISTS:
10.2.3 I-JOISTS:Lateral
Lateral restraint,
restraint, support
supportofofnon
nonload
loadbearing
bearingpartitions, andand
partitions, fixing of multiple
fixing i-joists
of multiple i-joists
I-joist installation Backer blocks Trimmed openings may be needed around staircase openings and chimneys. Solid
The installation of I-joists must follow the manufacturer's guidance and specification for the project. trimmed joists may be supported using joist hangers. Timber trimmers around openings
should consist of at least two members and be designed and installed in accordance with
Lateral restraint straps the manufacturers instructions. Where an I-joist is faced fixed to another I-joists backer
blocks should be provided on both sides of the web of the trimmer.
Floors should provide lateral restraint to all walls running parallel to them by means of 30mm x 5mm galvanized or stainless steel restraint
Fixing of I-joists should be in accordance with the engineers design and specification. A
straps at 2m centres.
timber filler block should be installed between I-joists.
Straps need not be provided to floors at, or about, the same level on each side of a supported wall and at the following locations:
Timber floors in two storey dwellings where:

· Joists are at maximum 1.2m centres and have at least 90mm bearing on supported walls or 75mm bearing on to a timber wall plate.
· Carried by the supported wall by restraint type joist hangers as described in BS 5268: 7.1.
Lateral restraint
Nogging should extend at least

half the depth of the web Backer blocks should be fixed in accordance
with the manufacturer's design.
Strap to be located beneath
the top flange
Tension strap to turn down at

least 100mm within the cavity Fixing of multiple I-joists Fixing of multiple I-joists
and be tight against the face of
walling inner leaf
Double I-joists should be

Gap between the wall fixed in accordance with the
and the first joist to manufacturers design. The
be filled with a timber web of the joists should be
packing at least half packed in accordance with
the depth of the web the manufactures design
at the strap position
Support of non load bearing upper walls

Notching and drilling of I-joists
Holes should not be directly over The manufacturer's restrictions should be followed as
supports to the proximity of the hole to the top and bottom rails
Wall panel skew nailed through Support of non load bearing
onto nogging with a min of 2no walls should be in accordance The manufacturer's guidance Square holes should not exceed the
2.25Ø galvanised wire nails, with the manufacturers details should be followed for the size recommended size as per the
length to suit and proximity of holes to manufacturer's guidance
supports
Square holes should not be
over cut
Drilling and square holes

should be in accordance with
the manufacturers design.
Under no circumstances
should the top and bottom rails
of the I-joists be notched
The manufacturer's Hole diameters Hole spacing should

38x89 C16 (min) guidance should be should be in be in accordance with
noggings at max followed in regards accordance with manufacturer's
600mm centres to holes in proximity the manufacturer's recommendations
to trimmed joists recommendations
'Z' clips
© MD Insurance Services Limited 2020 245 UPPER FLOORS

UPPER FLOORS
10.2.4 I-JOISTS: Bearing over intermediate walls and strutting
10.2.4 I-JOISTS: Bearing over intermediate walls and strutting
Strutting or bridging
Building in of I-joists over internal walls Strutting or bridging of I-joists should be installed in accordance with the manufacturers requirements at centres no greater than those
recommended in the Eurocode 5 span tables.
To reduce shrinkage, all mortar should be adequately dry and solidly packed in, but it should not be packed up tight to the
underside of the top flange. Before the floor decking is fixed, all continuous joists must be packed down to the intermediate
bearing wall.
Joist span (m) Rows of strutting
Additional blocking should be installed in accordance with the
manufacturers instructions. up to 2.5 None
Generally a gap is required at the top or bottom of the packing, 2.5 - 4.5 1 at mid-span
dependent on the direction of the load. Generally if the load comes from
over 4.5 2 at 1/3 points
the bottom e.g. bearing on an internal wall the gap should be at the top.
If the load is from the top the gap should be provided at the bottom.
Load Strutting of joists with a span between 2.5m and 4.5m

Gap at top
1 row of strutting at mid span
1
2 span Where the span of a floor joist or flat roof joist is
Support
more than 2.5m, strutting is necessary. This
Gap at should be provided either by timber bridging or
bottom
Load Joists strutting in accordance with the manufacturers
design.
The backing blocks should be fixed in accordance with the
manufacturers design. Generally, backing blocks on deeper joists
require a higher number of fixings.
Strutting
Proprietary strutting devices
Solid strutting is difficult to install between I-joists and propriety strutting maybe used as an alternative.
2.5m - 4.5m span
The most widely used types of proprietary strutting device are steel herringbone systems. These are generally pressed
lengths of galvanized mild steel, usually 1mm thickness and are produced in a variety of lengths to suit differing joist
depths and spacing's.
Strutting of joists with a span over 4.5m

2 rows of strutting at one third span positions
1 1 1
Support
Joists
Strutting
over 4.5m span
Where the span of a floor joist or flat roof joist is more than 4.5m, two rows of strutting at 1/3rd the span position will be necessary.
© MD Insurance Services Limited 2020 246 UPPER FLOORS

UPPER FLOORS
10. 10.3
Metal Web
Upper
Floors

10.3.1 METAL
10.3.1 METALWEB:
WEB: Layout
Layout of
of joists
joistsand
andbearing
bearingrequirements on on
requirements to masonry walls
to masonry walls
Metal web joists
Consists of parallel stress graded timber flanges joined together with V-shaped galvanised Restraint of walls
steel webs. The webs are fixed to the flanges via nail plates. The open web design gives Joist hanger bearing
great flexibility in running through services. Walls should be adequately restrained at floors, ceilings and
Maximum 6mm verges in accordance with the relevant Building Regulations.
Metal web joists should be designed in accordance with BS EN 1995, Eurocode 5 design gap between joist
of Timber Structures. General: Common rules and rules for buildings. and hanger Restraint can be provided by:
Metal web joists should be appropriately CE marked comply with ETAG 011 or hold · Restraint type joist hangers.
independent third party certification. · Lateral restraint straps.
It is essential that joists are not overloaded during construction. Joints in joists should only Provide at least 450mm
be in place over a load-bearing support, or the joint be designed by a qualified Structural depth of bonded masonry
Engineer. above the joist hanger or to
Min 50mm bearing. manufacturers requirements
The bearing should
The minimum end bearing of the joists should be in accordance with the manufacturers be in accordance with
instruction and the site specific design. Generally the minimum end bearing should be no the manufacturers Minimum 10mm expansion
less than 90mm, unless joist hangers are used, where the minimum bearing should be to requirements gap required between finished
the manufacturers specifications. wall surface and floor board
edge
Steel beams
Maximum 600mm
Floor boarding
Steel beams should be designed by a suitably qualified Structural Engineer and should spacing between
have appropriate fire resistance to meet the requirements of the regional Building joist centres
Regulations. Timber noggins to support
perimeter edges of floor
Where steel beams and columns are used to support the upper floor construction on a boarding
project in a coastal location, and maybe exposed to an aggressive external environment
Midspan strutting needed if
(e.g. under croft) please follow the requirements for additional corrosion protection in
span exceeds 4m
'Appendix B - Coastal Locations' and ' Appendix C - Materials, Products, and Building
Systems'. Strutting/noggin infill between
joists. If masonry infill, the top
To prevent the distortion of finishes, joists should be stopped from twisting over supports of the masonry should finish
and provision provided to accommodate up to 12mm of drying shrinkage in floor joists at least 12mm below the top
supported by steel beams. of the joist to allow for
shrinkage
Steel beam bearing Intermediate load-bearing
support
Metal web joists may be top hung subject to the
manufacturers site specific design
Joists should not be built into
Wallplate solid walls
l
al
lW
na
r
te
Ex
Packers
Built-in bearing
al
W
te
ia
ed
rm
te
In
Storage of Metal web
l
al
W
al
Metal web joists should be protected from the elements and
rn
te
Ex
supported on suitable bearers over a free draining surface. Levels of
of
af
exposure which are more severe than those encountered during a
le
l
na
normal uninterrupted build programme should be addressed by the
er
Minimum
t
In
provision of suitable protection.
Timber packer end bearing
fixed to steel of 90mm
Bracing
Large areas of floor joists can be assembled with these products due
Deflection to their light weight and availability in long lengths. It is of great
importance that adequate safety bracing is provided to ensure that
For upper floors (intermediate floors), designers and engineers must observe our tolerance the joists remain stable through the construction phase. Joist
requirements for levelness of floors. Please refer to the 'Tolerances' section. manufacturers provide simple guide recommendations that allow an
installer to facilitate this process with ease and speed.
There may be an instance where a joist might be designed to meet permissible deflections with
a relevant British Standard; however, our tolerance requirements will take precedence. Unbraced joist layouts are not to be walked on by workers.
Floors should not become overloaded during construction.
UPPER FLOORS
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 248
248
UPPER FLOORS
10.3.2 METAL
10.3.2 METAL WEB:Layout
WEB: Layoutofofjoists
joists and
and bearing
bearing requirements
requirementsonontoto
a timber frame
a timber frame
Metal web joists Floor definitions Standard height panel, top chord
supported joist. Solid noggins on
Consists of parallel stress graded timber flanges joined together with V-shaped galvanised nogging top of rim board in between joists
steel webs. The webs are fixed to the flanges via nail plates. The open web design gives to provide support for panel
great flexibility in running through services. above
Metal web joists should be designed in accordance with BS EN 1995, Eurocode 5 design Floor decking will typically extend
of Timber Structures. General: Common rules and rules for buildings. to back of the noggins/end of
joist to tie panels in with the floor
Metal web joists should be appropriately CE marked comply with ETAG 011 or hold
independent third party certification.
It is essential that joists are not overloaded during construction. Joints in joists should only
be in place over a load-bearing support, or the joint be designed by a qualified Structural Perimeter nogging
Engineer.
Binder
The minimum end bearing of the joists should be in accordance with the manufacturers
instruction and the site specific design. Generally the minimum end bearing should be no
less than 90mm, unless joist hangers are used, where the minimum bearing should be to
the manufacturers specifications.
Strongback
Steel beams
Girder
Steel beams should be designed by a suitably qualified Structural Engineer and should
have appropriate fire resistance to meet the requirements of the regional Building Ringbeam
Regulations.
Where steel beams and columns are used to support the upper floor construction on a Stair trimmer
project in a coastal location, and maybe exposed to an aggressive external environment
Trimmer
(e.g. under croft) please follow the requirements for additional corrosion protection in
'Appendix B - Coastal Locations' and ' Appendix C - Materials, Products, and Building
Rim board
Systems'.
Bearing/wallplate
To prevent the distortion of finishes, joists should be stopped from twisting over supports
and provision provided to accommodate up to 12mm of drying shrinkage in floor joists Girder
supported by steel beams.
Steel beam bearing

Metal web joists may be top hung subject to the
manufacturers site specific design
Wallplate Partition
nogging
Packers Binder
Storage of Metal web

Metal web joists should be protected from the elements and supported on suitable bearers over a free draining
surface. Levels of exposure which are more severe than those encountered during a normal uninterrupted build
programme should be addressed by the provision of suitable protection.
Bracing
Large areas of floor joists can be assembled with these products due to their light weight and availability in long
Timber packer lengths. It is of great importance that adequate safety bracing is provided to ensure that the joists remain stable
fixed to steel through the construction phase. Joist manufacturers provide simple guide recommendations that allow an installer
to facilitate this process with ease and speed.
Unbraced joist layouts are not to be walked on by workers.

Deflection Floors should not become overloaded during construction.
Traditional arrangement - bottom chord
For upper floors (intermediate floors), designers and engineers must observe our tolerance supported joists on normal height panels. Rim Restraint of walls
requirements for levelness of floors. Please refer to the 'Tolerances' section. board around outside closes off floor zone. Solid
blocking in between joists provides support for Walls should be adequately restrained at floors, ceilings and verges in accordance with the relevant Building
panel above Regulations.
There may be an instance where a joist might be designed to meet permissible deflections with
a relevant British Standard; however, our tolerance requirements will take precedence.
UPPER FLOORS
Services 2020 2020
Limited 249
249
UPPER FLOORS
10.3.3 METAL
10.3.3 METALWEB:
WEB: Typical
Typical details
details
Support of light-weight non load bearing partitions Metal web joists supported on load
bearing masonry internal wall
Masonry build up to underside of
floor to provide restraint. If masonry
infill, the top of the masonry should
finish at least 12mm below the top
of the joist to allow for shrinkage
The sole plate of the non load

bearing partition should be fixed
to the noggins Note: This is not allowed on
compartment walls
Minimum end bearing of 90mm
Metal web joists supported on load

bearing timber internal wall Solid or EWP
38x89 C16 (min)
Rim Board
noggings at max
600mm centres
Proprietary 'Z' clips

provided by the joist
manufacturer
Where light weight non load bearing partition are parallel to the joists, they should be suitably supported in
accordance with the manufacturers design.
Where metal web joists are used they should be:
· Positioned centrally below a non load bearing partition. Double or triple joists should be provided in
accordance with the manufacturers details and fixed with propitiatory fixings in accordance with the
manufactures design.
· Or the weight of the partition should be supported by noggins or bearers fixed to joists with the floor systems
propitiatory fixings on either side. The noggins should be at a maximum of 600mm centres and should be
38mm x 90mm unless designed otherwise. Locate column
directly over support
Sole plates should be fixed to the noggins or joists.
Headbinder
Example of metal web joists bearing on intermediate load bearing wall. Column within the metal web joist
should be located directly over the support. In accordance with the manufacturers design
UPPER FLOORS
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 250
250
UPPER FLOORS
10.3.4 METAL
10.3.4 METAL WEB:Lateral
WEB: Lateralrestraint
restraint for
for masonry
masonry walls
walls
Horizontal restraint strap fixed to strongback
Tension strap fixed along top

edge of strongback. Refer to
strap manufacturers details
for fixing method
Restraint of walls
Tension strap tight
against inner face of wall Restraint can be provided by:

Strongback tight against · Other forms of restraint proven by a Chartered Engineer.
inner wall · Lateral restraint floor straps, provided at no more than 2m centres.
Lateral restraint straps
Floors should provide lateral restraint to all walls running parallel to them by means of 30mm x
Horizontal restraint strap fixed to continuous noggin 5mm galvanised or stainless steel restraint straps at 2m centres. Straps need not be provided to
floors at, or about, the same level on each side of a supported wall and at the following locations:
Timber floors in two storey dwellings where:

Min 35mm x 97mm C16 noggin nailed
to underside of top chord of joist using
· Joists are at maximum 1.2m centres and have at least 90mm bearing on supported walls or
nails specified by manufacturer
75mm bearing on to a timber wall plate.
· Carried by the supported wall by restraint type joist hangers as described in BS 5268: 7.1.
Tension strap fixed along top edge of

noggin. Refer to strap manufacturers
details for fixing method
Tension strap tight

against inner face of wall
Noggin tight against inner

wall
UPPER FLOORS
Services 2020 2020
Limited 251
251
UPPER FLOORS
10.3.5METAL
10.3.5 METAL WEB:
WEB: Struttingand
Strutting andtrimming
trimming requirements
requirements
Strutting of joists with a span between 4m and 8m Metal web joists
Strutting to metal web joists should be provided in accordance with the manufacturers guidance and the table
below.
1 row of strutting at
mid span Strutting of joists
1
2 span Where the span of a floor joist or flat Joist span (m) Rows of strutting
Support roof joist is more than 4m, strutting is
necessary. This should be provided by 4-8 1 (at centre of span)
timber strong backs in accordance with over 8 2 (at equal spacing)
Joists the manufacturers design
Strongback splice
1200mm long splice should be
fixed in accordance with the
manufacturers guidance, generally
Strongback with 10no nails each side of splice,
nailed through and clenched on the
other side, using nails specified by
the manufacturer
Note: Strongback size as

specified by design
4m - 8m span
Strutting of joists with a span over 8m

2 rows of strutting at one third Strongbacks should be
span positions nailed twice to the web of the
joist using nails specified by
1 1 1
3 span 3 span 3 span the manufacturer
Support Typical trimming detail
Double joists should be fixed as per the manufactures design, this can be with a propriety clip or fixed at specified
Joists centres with fixings provided by the manufacturer. It is important to ensure that the work on site is in accordance
with the manufacturers design.
Joist hanger
Trimmed openings may be needed around
staircase openings and chimneys. Solid
Do not notch the
trimmed joists may be supported using
bottom member
either joist hangers or a structurally of the joist over
Strongback designed connection bottom flange of
hanger
over 8m span
A minimum of two rows of strutting are required for spans over 8m. This should be provided by strongbacks in accordance with the manufacturers design
© MD ©
Insurance Services Limited 2020 2020 252252 UPPER FLOORS
UPPER FLOORS
10. 10.4
Floor Boarding for Timber
Upper Upper Floors
Floors

10.4.1FLOOR
10.4.1 FLOOR BOARDING
BOARDING FORTIMBER
FOR TIMBERUPPER
UPPER FLOORS:
FLOORS:Floor
Floorboarding
boardingand sound
and resistance
sound resistance
Floor joists arrangement
Particle boarding
Acceptable particle boards consist of Oriented Strand Board (OSB) or chipboard. Chipboard should be tongue and
A 10mm expansion gap grooved and all joints glued. The boards should be laid so that the shortest length is laid parallel to the span. OSB boards
should be provided around should be type 3 or 4 to BS EN 300, and should be laid with the major axis at right angles to the joists (the major axis is
the perimeter of the floor indicated on the OSB board by a series of arrows). Boards must have a minimum thickness, as indicated in the table
against a wall abutment below.
Particle boards should be either screwed or nailed to the joists at 250mm centres. Nails should be annular ring shanks that
are at least three times the depth of the board.
A 10mm expansion gap should be provided around the perimeter of the floor against a wall abutment.
Particle floor boarding: Minimum thickness and centres of support
Thickness (mm) Thickness (mm)

Maximum span (mm) Typical nail fixing (mm)
(chipboard) (OSB)
18 and 19 15 450 60mm annular ring shank
Flooring 22 18 and 19 600 65mm annular ring shank
Floor joists
Sound resistance
Support
Internal floors shall, where necessary, be designed and constructed to have adequate resistance to the transmission of sound to
Joist spacing meet the requirements of the regional Building Regulations.
between centres
The resilient insulation layers where required should be fitted as per manufacturers instructions.
The resilient layer and subsequent floor makeup should be suitable to support the design loads. Any point loads or additional
loading may have special requirements.
Floor boarding laid above a resilient layer must be isolated from the walls and skirtings by the insertion of a resilient layer.
Clear span of
joists
Floor finishes
If ceramic tiled floor finishes are proposed, the guidance in 'Appendix A- Finishes' is applicable. Heavier tiles are not suitable for
timber floors.
Floor boarding
If flexible sheet or wood based floor coverings are proposed, they must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions and:
Suitable floor boards include tongue and grooved softwood flooring with a minimum moisture content at the time of fixing of between 16%-20% and in
accordance with BS 1297. All boards must be double nailed or secret nailed to each joist using nails that are at least three times the depth of the board. · The supporting surface must be level, free of high spots and clear of debris.
Floor coverings should be fixed in accordance with BS 8103-3. Boards must have a minimum thickness, as indicated in the table below. · Where battens are required, they must be preservative treated, spaced correctly and fixed to prevent excessive movement.
· The correct type of underlay where required must be installed.
Softwood floor boarding: Minimum thickness and centres of support · Movement joints at door openings provided.
· Allowance for thermal expansion provided at perimeters.
· The manufacturers recommendations should be followed where continued under heavy/point loads.
Finished board thickness (mm) Maximum centres of joist (mm) Typical nail fixings (mm)

© MD ©
UPPER FLOORS
10. 10.5
Plaster Boarding for Timber
Upper Upper Floors
Floors

10.5.1PLASTER
10.5.1 PLASTER BOARDINGFOR
BOARDING FORTIMBER
TIMBER UPPER
UPPER FLOORS:
FLOORS:Plaster
Plasterboarding
boardingof of
ceilings
ceilings
Plastered finishes Minimum plaster thicknesses
Workmanship of plastered finishes to ceilings should be applied to a certain standard to receive a suitable decorative finish. It The thickness of plaster will vary depending on the evenness of the substrate. The finished element must meet
should be durable enough to prevent surface cracking and, if applicable as part of the whole element, meet the required levels of the tolerances identified in this Technical Manual, and be of a suitable quality so that a decorative finish can be
fire and sound insulation in accordance with current Building Regulations. applied. Minimum thickness should be in accordance with the table below.

Element Minimum number of coats Typical thickness
Plasterwork should be applied to suitable substrates. The substrate may also require additional sealing or bonding agents, in
accordance with the requirements set out in BS 8481. Skim to provide suitable and
Ceiling - plasterboard 1
durable finish
Plaster mixes
Plaster mix ratios should be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and be appropriate for the intended use.
Support of plasterboard
Ceiling plan - plasterboard fixed to timber joists Supports for plasterboard should be designed so that the following span limits are not exceeded:
Timber support centres Intermediate noggings Perimeter noggings

Board thickness (mm)
(mm) required required
Timber perimeter noggings

400 No Yes
Plasterboard 9.5
450 Yes Yes
Timber joist
Intermediate timber noggings 400 No Yes
12.5 450 No Yes
600 Yes Yes
15 600 No No
When fixing plaster boarding:
· Fix boards with decorative side out to receive joint treatment or a skim plaster finish.
· Lightly butt boards together and never force boards into position.
· Stagger horizontal and vertical board joints between layers by a minimum of 600mm.
· Fix to timber joists using dry-wall screws.
Gaps between boards should not exceed 3mm and consideration should be given to sealing all gaps to
improve building air tightness.
© MD ©
UPPER FLOORS
10. 10.6
Suspended Beam and Block
Upper
Floors

10.6.1 SUSPENDED
10.6.1 SUSPENDEDBEAM
BEAM AND
AND BLOCK:
BLOCK:General
Generalrequirements
requirements
Pre cast concrete floor units
Precast beams are proprietary products, which the design and

construction are specific to the manufacturer of the product.
Projects incorporating precast beams must be provided with full Void remaining where precast Infill blocks
manufacturers design, structural calculations and specifications concrete beam is built in is to be fully
including fixings specific for the project. grouted (avoid spillage into cavity)
Screed
Precast concrete units and infill blocks are to be carefully stored
and handled on-site, preventing damage occurring before, during
and after incorporation into the structure. Units should be lifted as Beam and blocks
Precast concrete beam to be grouted
near as possible to their ends.
The installation of pre cast concrete floor beams and blocks must
follow the manufacturer's guidance and specification for the
project.
The bearing surface of walls, beams and other supports to receive

precast units are to be smooth and level.
Infill blocks and slabs should fully bear onto supporting beams and
walls.
Precast suspended beam and block floors
Ensure that precast concrete beam and block floors are fully
supported by load-bearing walls.
Similar beams of the same size may have differing strength

properties because of their varying reinforcement size, so it is
important to check beam reference numbers and their layout. It is
also essential sometimes to provide two or more beams adjacent
to each other where spans are excessive or in heavily loaded Void to be fully grouted
areas. Suitable infill bricks or blocks are to be properly bedded on
mortar and provided between pre cast (PC) beams where bearing
onto supporting walls.
Precast beam to have a
Beams and blocks are to be grouted together with a 1:6 cement to 90mm min bearing onto
sand mix in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. supporting masonry
Load-bearing walls are to continue through the beam and block Void between parallel beam and Beams should not be
floor. wall to be fully grouted notched or drilled
Minimum
Holes for service pipes are properly filled by laying non-timber
100mm
formwork between PC joists and filling with good quality concrete Straps at a maximum 2m centres
(ST2 mix) prior to screeding.
Beams should bear onto masonry with a minimum 90mm bearing,

and steelwork with a minimum 70mm bearing. 30 x 5mm lateral restraint strap
to be turned down a minimum of
Provide restraint straps to walls where the beams run parallel. 100mm and be tight against the
cavity face of the inner leaf
Ensure that the blockwork carrying the beam and block flooring
has sufficient compressive strength.
UPPER FLOORS
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 258
258
UPPER FLOORS
10.6.2 SUSPENDED
10.6.2 SUSPENDEDBEAM
BEAMAND
ANDBLOCK:
BLOCK: Lateral
Lateral restraint,
restraint,deflection,
deflection,and sound
and resistance
sound resistance
Lateral restraint of walls Restraint of walls
Walls should be adequately restrained at floors, ceilings and verges in accordance with the relevant

Beam and block floors should provide lateral restraint to all walls running parallel to them by means of
30mm x 5mm galvanised or stainless steel restraint straps at 2m maximum centres.
Strap to turn down a minimum
of 100mm and to be tight Straps need not be provided to floors at, or about, the same level on each side of a supported wall
against the inner face of cavity and in two storey dwellings where concrete floors have a minimum 90mm bearing on supported wall.
Deflection of floors
Strap Position For upper floors (intermediate floors), designers and engineers must observe our Tolerance
requirements, for levelness of floors. Please refer to the Tolerances.
There may be an instance where a joist might be designed to meet permissible deflections with a
relevant British Standard; however, our tolerance requirements will take precedence.
Sound resistance
Lateral restraint strap Precast beam
Internal floors shall, where necessary, have adequate resistance to the transmission of sound to meet
the requirements of the regional Building Regulations.
Resilient layers where required should be fitted as per manufactures instructions.

Void fully grouted
The resilient layer and subsequent floor makeup should be suitable to support the design loads, any
point loads or additional loading may have special requirements.
UPPER FLOORS
Services 2020 2020
Limited 259
259
UPPER FLOORS
10.6.3SUSPENDED
10.6.3 SUSPENDED BEAMAND
BEAM ANDBLOCK:
BLOCK: Ceiling
Ceiling constructions
constructions
Workmanship of plastered finishes to ceilings should be applied to a certain standard to receive a suitable decorative finish. It should be durable The thickness of plaster will vary depending on the evenness of the substrate. The finished element must meet
enough to prevent surface cracking and, if applicable as part of the whole element, meet the required levels of fire and sound insulation in the tolerances identified in this Technical Manual, and be of a suitable quality so that a decorative finish can be
accordance with current Building Regulations. applied. Minimum thickness should be in accordance with the table below.

Plasterwork should be applied to suitable substrates. The substrate may also require additional sealing or bonding agents, in accordance with the
requirements set out in BS 8481. Skim to provide suitable and
durable finish
Plaster mixes
Suspended ceilings Supports for plasterboard should be designed so that the following span limits are not exceeded:
Suspended ceilings should be designed and constructed in accordance with BS EN 13964.

Screed
Infill blocks 400 No Yes

9.5
Beam and block to be
fully grouted 450 Yes Yes
400 No Yes
12.5 450 No Yes

Suspended ceiling
600 Yes Yes
Fixing requirements
15 600 No No
Fixings should be appropriate for the site conditions and the loads to be supported. They must also be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's specifications. Fixings to suspended beam and blocks should be at the correct designated centres using the correct wires/brackets
that are compatible with the suspended ceiling (and the intended environmental conditions - see below). Pull tests should be carried out on ceilings When fixing plaster boarding:
with an area exceeding 100m2 and a factor of safety of 2 is applicable.
Ceiling grid layouts and fixing schedule and method of fixing to soffit, should be provided. · Lightly butt boards together and never force boards into position.
Confirmation that the weight of the ceiling construction and any additional fire/sound insulation loads has been taken account of in the supporting · Position cut edges to internal angles whenever possible, removing paper burrs with fine sandpaper.
structure design calculations. · Stagger horizontal and vertical board joints between layers by a minimum of 600mm.
Where there is any doubt regarding the adequacy or installation or variation from the initial design a manufacturer's inspection and certification will · Plasterbpard should be fixed using dry-wall screws.
be required.
High humidity or external environment or specialised conditions improve building air tightness.
Where the ceiling is above a high humidity area or is an external suspended ceiling; third party certification should be provided to demonstrate the
product is suitable for the specified environment.
Where suspended ceilings are designed to give a minimum period of fire resistance, fire test certification will be required to confirm the periods of
fire resistance given. This should also take into account any recessed light fittings which may bypass the fire resistant layer.
The additional weight of materials used to achieve fire resistant specifications or where sound insulation requirements occur; must also be taken
account of in the structural design of the supporting structure and the fixings of the ceiling construction.
Fire resistance
fire resistance given. This should also take into account any recessed light fittings which may bypass the fire resistant layer. Consideration should
also be given to the quality of workmanship in these installations, and a manufacturer approved installer be used.
The additional weight of materials used to achieve fire resistant specifications or where sound insulation requirements occur must also be taken
© MD ©
UPPER FLOORS
10. 10.7
Concrete Plank
Upper
Floors

10.7.1 CONCRETE
10.7.1 CONCRETEPLANK:
PLANK: General
General requirements
requirements
Precast concrete floor units
Precast concrete floor units are proprietary products, which the

design and construction are specific to the manufacturer of the
product. Projects incorporating precast concrete planks must be
provided with full manufacturers design, structural calculations and
specifications including fixings specific for the project. Screed
Precast concrete units are to be carefully stored and handled

on-site, preventing damage occurring before, during and after
incorporation into the structure. Units should be lifted as near as
possible to their ends.
The installation of precast concrete floor units must follow the

manufacturer's guidance and specification for the project.
The bearing surface of walls, beams and other supports to receive

precast units should be smooth and level.
Ensure that the
Infill blocks and slabs should fully bear onto supporting beams and blockwork carrying the
walls. suspended concrete
planks has sufficient
Ensure that precast suspended concrete plank floors are fully compressive strength
supported by load-bearing walls.
It is important to check the plank reference numbers and their

layout. Similar units of the same size may have differing strength
properties because of their varying reinforcement size, so it is Concrete plank units
important to check unit reference numbers and their layout. have a minimum
Suspended concrete planks should be grouted in accordance with 90mm bearing into
the manufacturer's instructions ensuring the correct strength and supporting masonry
aggregate size is used.
Holes for service pipes are to be properly filled by laying

non-timber formwork between PC joists and filling with good Minimum
quality concrete (ST2 mix) prior to screeding. Concrete plank units (to
100mm
manufacturers specification)
Straps at maximum 2m centres
30x5mm lateral restraint strap to

be turned down a minimum of
100mm and be tight against the
cavity face of the inner leaf
UPPER FLOORS
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 262
262
UPPER FLOORS
10.7.2 CONCRETE
10.7.2 CONCRETE PLANK:Lateral
PLANK: Lateralrestraint
restraint and
and sound
soundresistance
resistance
Lateral restraint of walls Restraint of walls

Concrete plank floors should provide lateral restraint to all walls running parallel to them by means
Concrete of 30mm x 5mm galvanised or stainless steel restraint straps at maximum 2m centres.
Minimum 450mm
suspended floor
Straps need not be provided to floors at, or about, the same level on each side of a supported wall
and in two storey dwellings where concrete floors have a minimum 90mm bearing on supported
wall.
Deflection of floors
For upper floors (intermediate floors), designers and engineers must observe our tolerance
requirements, for levelness of floors.
There may be an instance where a floor might be designed to meet permissible deflections with a
relevant British Standard; however, our tolerance requirements will take precedence.
Strap position
Mortar bed Sound resistance
Strap to turn down a
min of 100mm and be
tight against the face of Internal floors shall, where necessary, have adequate resistance to the transmission of sound to
the walling inner leaf meet the requirements of the regional Building Regulations.
Resilient layers where required should be fitted as per manufactures instructions.
The resilient layer and subsequent floor makeup should be suitable to support the design loads,
any point loads or additional loading may have special requirements.
The floor units should bear onto masonry with a Provide restraint straps to walls where the suspended
minimum 90mm bearing, and steelwork at a minimum concrete planks run parallel
70mm
UPPER FLOORS
Services 2020 2020
Limited 263
263
UPPER FLOORS
10.7.3 CONCRETE
10.7.3 CONCRETEPLANK:
PLANK: Intermediate
Intermediate support
supportbearings
bearings
Narrow wall bearing Continuity over steelwork
Generally for walls narrower than When continuing over steel

190mm the slabs should be tied work the slabs may also require
together in accordance with the tying together in accordance
manufactures instructions. with the manufacturers
recommendations.
Typically this is achieved by two
cores per 1200mm wide slab are
formed open so that a reinforcement
bar can be inserted across to form
The cores on opposing the tie detail, however this should
slabs need to line up to be constructed in accordance with
facilitate this detail the manufacturers site specific
design.
Holes and notches

Bearing on top of steelwork
Openings to accommodate service
A minimum of 75mm bearing should be voids and column notches should
provided on steel beams. Planks may be preformed. Large openings may
require mechanical restraint to the steel require steel trimming supports.
beam in accordance with the Holes of less than 100mm can be
manufactures specification. formed on site in accordance with
the manufactures design.
Steel beams should be designed by a
suitably qualified structural engineer and All holes/openings should be in
should have appropriate fire resistance to accordance with the manufacturers
meet the requirements of the regional design.
Where steel beams and columns are used

to support the upper floor construction on
a project in a coastal location, and maybe
Minimum 75mm exposed to an aggressive external
end bearing environment (e.g. under croft), please
follow the requirements for additional
corrosion protection in 'Appendix B -
Coastal Locations' and 'Appendix C -
Materials, Products, and Building
Systems'.
UPPER FLOORS
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 264
264
UPPER FLOORS
10.7.4 CONCRETE
10.7.4 CONCRETE PLANK:Ceiling
PLANK: Ceilingconstructions
constructions
Workmanship of plastered finishes to ceilings should be applied to a certain standard to receive a suitable decorative finish. It should be durable The thickness of plaster will vary depending on the evenness of the substrate. The finished element must meet
enough to prevent surface cracking and, if applicable as part of the whole element, meet the required levels of fire and sound insulation in the tolerances identified in this Technical Manual, and be of a suitable quality so that a decorative finish can be
accordance with current Building Regulations. applied. Minimum thickness should be in accordance with the table below.

Plasterwork should be applied to suitable substrates. The substrate may also require additional sealing or bonding agents, in accordance with the
requirements set out in BS 8481. Skim to provide suitable and
durable finish
Plaster mixes
Suspended ceilings Supports for plasterboard should be designed so that the following span limits are not exceeded:
Suspended ceilings should be designed and constructed in accordance with BS EN 13964.
Screed
Concrete plank unit 400 No Yes

9.5
450 Yes Yes
400 No Yes
12.5 450 No Yes

Suspended ceiling
600 Yes Yes
Fixing requirements
15 600 No No
Fixings should be appropriate for the site conditions and the loads to be supported. They must also be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's specifications. Fixings to the concrete plank should be at the correct designated centres using the correct wires/brackets that are
compatible with the suspended ceiling (and the intended environmental conditions - see below). Pull tests should be carried out on ceilings with an When fixing plaster boarding:
area exceeding 100m2 and a factor of safety of 2 is applicable.
Ceiling grid layouts and fixing schedule and method of fixing to soffit, should be provided. · Lightly butt boards together and never force boards into position.
Confirmation that the weight of the ceiling construction and any additional fire/sound insulation loads has been taken account of in the supporting · Position cut edges to internal angles whenever possible, removing paper burrs with fine sandpaper.
structure design calculations. · Stagger horizontal and vertical board joints between layers by a minimum of 600mm.
Where there is any doubt regarding the adequacy or installation or variation from the initial design a manufacturer's inspection and certification will · Fix using dry-wall screws.
be required.
High humidity or external environment or specialised conditions improve building air tightness.
Where the ceiling is above a high humidity area or is an external suspended ceiling; third party certification should be provided to demonstrate the
product is suitable for the specified environment.
fire resistance given. This should also take into account any recessed light fittings which may bypass the fire resistant layer.
The additional weight of materials used to achieve fire resistant specifications or where sound insulation requirements occur; must also be taken
Fire resistance
fire resistance given. This should also take into account any recessed light fittings which may bypass the fire resistant layer. Consideration should
also be given to the quality of workmanship in these installations and a manufacturer approved installer be used.
The additional weight of materials used to achieve fire resistant specifications or where sound insulation requirements occur must also be taken
UPPER FLOORS
Services 2020 2020
Limited 265
265
UPPER FLOORS
10. 10.8
General Requirements for
Upper Concrete Upper Floors
Floors

10.8.1 GENERAL
10.8.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
REQUIREMENTS FOR CONCRETE
CONCRETE UPPER
UPPERFLOORS:
FLOORS:Floor screeds
Floor andand
screeds tilingtiling
Floor finishes Maximum areas of screed
Screeds should be laid room by room. Unreinforced screeds should have a maximum area of 40m2. Expansion joints should be
Screeding provided and consistent with joints in the floor slab below.
Traditional floor screeds consist of sand and cement. If the ratios and properties of these screeds are not correctly controlled; cracking,
peeling or collapse of the screed will occur (due to being too strong/weak). Finishing of screeds
Screed should provide an even surface as appropriate, as defined in the Tolerance section. Concrete floor slabs may be suitably
Proprietary screeds typically are pre-blended to achieve greater consistency and strength and more suitable over larger areas. As such finished to serve directly as a wearing surface without the need for an additional topping, in accordance with the recommendations of
2
where the floor area exceeds 50m only a proprietary screed installed by the screed manufacturers trained installers will be accepted. BS 8204. If required, surface sealers or hardeners should only be used in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Screeds should be fit for purpose, have a suitable finish and be of an appropriate thickness. Tiling on anhydrite screeds
If an anhydrite screed is used, it must be sealed before the application of any cement based tile adhesive is proposed. Anhydrite
Curing screeds can be difficult to identify once laid, if the screed type cannot be identified the screed should be fully sealed as a precaution to
Screeds should be cured naturally and should not be covered for at least three weeks. prevent the possibility of the tiling adhesive debonding from the screed.
Background surfaces The floor screed should be fully dry before the sealant is applied. The screed drying time will depend on the thickness and type of
Background surfaces where screeds are being supported should meet the following requirements: screed.
· Bond A decoupling membrane is also recommended as this can reduce the stress on the tiling layer.
Background surfaces for bonded screeds should provide an adequate mechanical key. If necessary, cement grouting or a
bonding agent should be specified to provide adequate adhesion. Where bonded screeds are used, mechanical means of Insulation
preparing the concrete should be used to create an adequate bond between the substrate and the screed. Insulation below screeds should have enough compressive strength to support the screed. DPM's should be installed in the correct
positions, as indicated by the insulation manufacturer's instructions. Sound insulation should be installed in accordance with the
· Moisture protection manufacturer's instructions.
The floor design should ensure that moisture from the ground does not enter the dwelling.
Constructing screeds over all substrates:
· Adequate support
Substrate structures must be adequately constructed to provide adequate support to the screed. (Note: Timber floor constructions · Substrates must be level with no pockets or high spots to ensure the thickness of the screed remains even.
are not suitable to support screeded finishes.) · Where screeds are laid over insulation; the insulation must be tightly butted together and level.
· Screeds must be correctly mixed.
· Screed mix · Screeds must not be walked on during the drying period.
Cement and sand screeds should have a mix ratio of between 1:3 and 1:4½. · Screeds must not be constructed during cold periods (below 5 degrees).
· Movement joints will be required across door thresholds.
Proprietary additives should have been assessed and have third-party certification. · Movement joints are required if bay sizes exceed 40m2 with a maximum of 8m on any one side.
· Movement joints are also required where joints exist or a change of span occurs e.g. beam and block floors.
The minimum thicknesses of screeds are as follows: · The screed must be ready to accept any floor tiling (see guidance below for over insulated substrates).
Screed thickness requirements Drying times
· With cementitious levelling screeds, one day should be allowed for each millimetre of thickness for the first 50 mm, followed by an
Surface Minimum thickness at any point (mm) increasing time for each millimetre above this thickness (BS 8204).
· Polymer modified screeds: strictly follow the manufacturer's specifications and recommendations.
Laid monolithically with base 12 · The developer should keep an accurate record of the screed drying times elapsed before floor tiling is laid and the Warranty
surveyor may ask for this information.
Laid and bonded to a set and hardened base 20
Note: The moisture contents of levelling screeds onto which particular floorings are to be laid and methods for measuring moisture
Laid on a separating membrane (e.g. 1000g polyethylene) 50
content are given in BS 5325, BS 8201, BS 8203 and BS 8425.
Laid on resilient slabs or quilts (screed reinforced with galvanised wire mesh) 65
Building services
Where service pipes are bedded in the screed, the screed should be deep enough to provide at least 25mm of screed cover over Where building services pass through the screed e.g. underfloor heating, allowance should be made for thermal movement between the
screed and the service (so that service pipes can resist chemical attack from the screed).
service pipes, insulation and reinforcing.
Additional steps where constructing screeds over concrete substrates
Where a concrete slab is insulated from below and a finishing screed is required to the top surface:
· The concrete substrate slab must be of the correct thickness and not less than 100mm thick.
· Concrete substrate must be adequately dried out and not wet. See drying time guidance.
· Surfaces of hardened in situ concrete bases for bonded screeds should be roughened (Scrabbled) and cleaned to remove laitance
and to expose cleanly, but not loosen, the coarse aggregate particles.
· Brushing to remove laitance from a fresh concrete base is inadequate preparation before laying a bonded screed and is not
recommended.
· Remove all loose debris, dirt and dust by appropriate means, preferably with vacuum equipment.
· Carry out the preparation of the surface with as little delay as is practicable before the screed is laid so as to reduce the risk of
contamination.
· The surface of the prepared slab must be reasonably level to avoid deviations in thickness's of the screed.
UPPER FLOORS
Services 2020 2020
Limited 267
267
UPPER FLOORS
10.8.2 GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS FOR
FORCONCRETE
CONCRETEUPPER
UPPERFLOORS: Floor
FLOORS: screeds,
Floor tiling,tiling,
screeds, and under floor heating
and under floor heating
Constructing screeds over insulated substrates with under floor heating (UFH) system and tiled floor finishes 2. Provision of edge strip perimeter expansion joint - tile level (floor finish)
1. Provision and construction of movement joints When incorporating under floor heating (UFH):
Movement joints should be provided in the floor screed/tiling where floor heating is provided in the following places: · Screeds should be isolated at all edges, abutments and columns to allow for movement due to thermal loadings.
· The floor screed and tiling (floor finish) manufacturers guidance to be followed particularly when incorporating under-floor heating to determine
· Between independently controlled heating zones.
the minimum thickness of edge strip required to allow for expansion. Typically, between 6-15mm may be required.
· Between heated and unheated areas of screed.
· Additional joints should be considered in areas of high thermal gain e.g. large conservatories or glass atria. · The joint can be concealed by the skirting.
· These joints must be left empty, or else filled with a compressible material.
Bay joints should be formed using rigid joint formers where possible, which can be placed during the preparation phase and will remain in place during · Movement joints must not be filled with grout.
operation. The joint former should be 5mm lower than the finished screed depth to allow a smooth transition in height between bays.
3. Screed drying time
· All joints in the screed should extend through to any subsequent bonded floor covering.
· Joint positions should be specified prior to the installation of the screed and full consultation between all parties including the main contractor, · The drying time allowed must be calculated for the proposed depth of screed, taking account of the environmental conditions present e.g.
underfloor heating installer, finished flooring installer and the screed installer should take place to determine appropriate locations.
temperature and humidity. Where polymer modified type screeds are being used the manufacturer's requirements must be strictly followed for
· Movement joints should be carried through the subfloor to the floor finish and all applied layers terminated either side of the joint.
· The joint should be filled with a suitable flexible filler and a proprietary cover strip applied to cover the joint. Grout must not be used. the actual depth of screed. Surface finishes placed on a screed too early will fail.
· Movement joints should not be bridged by any resilient, textile or other adhered floor finish. · Drying times for polymer modified screeds could potentially be different to cementitious screeds.
· Movement joint covers may be flush, surface mounted or bedded in mortar and metal, metal with a rubber insert or PVC (see typical detail below). · All subcontractors involved with the screed and floor finishes (including installation of underfloor heating systems) must follow the installation
requirements and not deviate or change materials.
Typical movement joint covers · The screed should not be walked on until fully cured.
4. UFH testing and commissioning
· Ensure there are no joints in the heating system loops.

· UFH systems should be commissioned before tiling is applied. This will add to the total time before any tiling finish can be applied.
Note: If floor finishes are installed prior to the UFH being turned on and commissioned, any residual moisture in the floor is driven to the surface
of the screed and can potentially cause delamination of the floor finish.
· Pressure testing of the system does not constitute commissioning of the system. The heat source has to be in place and operating in order to
deliver the correct temperatures.
· The UFH system must be commissioned in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations by their approved installers. A commissioning
certificate will be required.
5. Moisture testing of the screed where floor tiling is proposed
· Moisture testing should be carried out after the commissioning of the UFH system but before any tiles are laid.
· Where UFH is not installed, moisture testing of the screed should still be carried out before tiling.
· Moisture testing is carried out using a suitable approved method such as a flooring hygrometer or carbide bomb test. Due to the potential
inaccuracies of using hygrometers at high humidity levels, a direct measurement should be used such as Carbide Bomb or oven dried sample.
· The base is deemed to be sufficiently dry when the relative humidity, as measured by a surface mounted flooring hygrometer/probe is 75% RH
or less. For the use of a flooring hygrometer, reference should be made to Dampness testing in BS 5325, BS 8203, BS 8425 and BS 8201.
· If underfloor heating is present in the base, the heating must be switched off 96 hours prior to any hygrometer test being carried out.
· The hygrometer must be allowed to remain in position until full equilibrium has been established. This is generally considered to be 72 hours but
could be longer over thick sections and considerably longer on power floated concrete.
6. Screed preparation for finishes
· The top surface of screeds may require to be scored, sanded or keyed in preparation to accept the primer and floor tiling adhesive.
· Sanding, keying etc. of the screed surface allows the penetration of primers. It also provides a “key” for the adhesive to grip onto.
· The surface must then be cleared of dirt and debris prior to primers being applied.
· Any primers and adhesives must not be applied until the screed has fully hardened and dried out. Drying times vary depending on the type of
screed.
· Surfaces to be tiled should be rigid, dimensionally stable, flat with no dips and rises, sound, clean and free from laitance, paints, salts, grease,
Slit dust and any contamination which may prevent adhesion.
Pipe 7. Application of the flexible tiling adhesive using double gluing technique
Sleeve Tile fixing should be carried out in accordance with BS 5385 and BS 8000 Codes of Practice for the installation of wall and floor tiles.
· The tiling manufacturer's specifications for fixing should be followed, e.g. travertine tiles may require double gluing. Large sized tiles may also
require this fixing method.
Sleeve
· Double gluing (applying adhesive to the underside of the tile and also the substrate) may be necessary.
Cut to enable fitting · The adhesive must be used to the manufacturer's recommendations.
· The adhesive will require to be compressed by the tile to ensure full adhesion.
Expansion joint (edge insulation) · Large voids must be avoided when fixing tiles.
· Floors should not be opened to traffic until the adhesive has hardened.
UPPER FLOORS
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 268
268
UPPER FLOORS
10.8.3GENERAL
10.8.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTSFOR
CONCRETE UPPER
UPPERFLOORS:
FLOORS:Floor
Floorscreeds, tiling,
screeds, andand
tiling, under floorfloor
under heating
heating
8. Full contact of the tile and adhesive
· The adhesive will require to be compressed by the tile to ensure full adhesion and solid bedding without creating voids.
· Thin-bed method with adhesive and notched trowel: Verify that there is full contact between the adhesive and the piece base.
9. Adhering to the manufacturers' process during the installation of the flooring
All the relevant manufacturers recommendations should be followed which will identify timelines to adhere i.e:
· Removing the laitance by sanding to provide a key for the primer and/or adhesive.
· Commissioning the underfloor heating before tiling commenced.
· Allowing the UFH system to cool down for at least 48 hours before tiling commences.
· Moisture testing to confirm the dryness of the screed before tiling commenced.
· Ensuring the time from screed completion to tiling commencement is calculated and adhered to.
· Ensure the tiling adhesive is allowed to set before the tiling is walked on (typically 12 -24 hours dependent on environment conditions).
· Ensure the UFH system is not turned on for at least 48 hours after the tiling is completed.
· If an anhydrite screed is used, it must be sealed before the application of a cement based tile adhesive if proposed in conjunction with a tiled
floor surface covering.
10. Exceeding the Maximum 27°C floor temperature
The underfloor heating system must be correctly commissioned to ensure temperature fluctuations are avoided and potential damage to the floor
finishes.
BS 8203 Code of Practice for the Installation of Resilient Floorcoverings states: When used with many flooring materials underfloor heating can
cause problems if the temperature at the interface between the subfloor and flooring exceeds 27°C, or is subject to rapid fluctuations in
temperature.
Where a resilient floor covering is proposed: 'the temperature should never exceed the agreed maximum of 27°C at the underside of the
floorcovering (the adhesive line).
Note: UFH designers may refer to this as the 'interface' temperature.
Please Note: BS EN 1264 - 2 refers to a max 29°C however for Warranty purposes a maximum 27°C is to be followed.
11. End user information
End users must be aware of how to use an UFH system, as these need to be operated differently than other heating systems both for in use and to
avoid damage to screeds and finishes.
UPPER FLOORS
© MD ©
Insurance Services
Services 2020 2020 269269
UPPER FLOORS
10. 10.9
General Requirements -
Upper Cavity Barriers and
Floors Fire Stopping

10.9.1 GENERAL
10.9.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS -- CAVITY
REQUIREMENTS CAVITY BARRIERS
BARRIERSAND
ANDFIRE STOPPING
FIRE STOPPING:
Openings for pipes in separating elements Fire resistance general
Pipes which pass through fire separating elements (unless in a protected shaft) shall: All floors should have the fire resistance required by the relevant Building Regulations. To achieve the same fire
a. Have an approved proprietary sealing system that has a UKAS accredited test to prove it will maintain the For more information on resistance, I-joists and metal web joists may require a different specification for the ceiling than that for solid timber
fire resistance of the floor. Note: It should only be installed as per the test requirements, or the subdivision of cavities, joists. Holes should not be made in the ceilings, e.g. for down lighters, unless it can be proven that the floor
b. Where an approved proprietary sealing system is not used; the pipes penetrating the separating floor please see the relevant construction achieves the required fire resistance.
should be restricted in diameter to a maximum size shown in the relevant regional Building Regulations Building Regulations
and fire stopping used around the pipe, or Fire stopping
c. A sleeving system with a maximum 160mm internal diameter is used as specified in the relevant regional
Penetrations in floors between buildings shall be fire stopped, there are to be no holes or gaps for smoke to pass
through once the fire stopping has been fitted. Where down lighters are incorporated in a ceiling they should be fitted in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Sub-divide
Provisions for cavity barriers and extensive cavities Roof cavity
fire stopping Further additional requirements for internal fire stopping and fire protection for compartment floors,
walls, and roof junctions to flats and apartments with a floor 4.5m or more above the ground
The following additional guidance applies to internal fire stopping and fire protection only to buildings with a floor 4.5m
or more above the ground that contain flats or apartments.
Although building legislation is robust in applying provisions for fire protection and fire stopping, it can often be difficult
to implement high standards of fire stopping in complex buildings. This can lead to significant safety risks if the building
does not have the correct levels of fire protection and if holes in compartment walls are not sealed correctly. This
guidance assists Developers in providing good standards of fire stopping and fire protection.
Compartment wall It is not the intention to enhance the requirements of the Building Regulations, but more to ensure that the statutory
Cavity barrier at requirements are applied correctly to the construction. It is therefore deemed that the requirements of Part B of the
Wall forming protected
top of cavity Accommodation Building Regulations in England and Wales, or Section 2 of the Scottish Building Standards (whichever is appropriate
escape route
depending on region), that apply to fire stopping, separating walls, service penetrations, minimum periods of fire
resistance and concealed spaces will also meet the requirements of this guidance.
Sub-divide
extensive cavities
1. Fire stopping
Floor cavity Design information
Cavity barrier at Compartment floor Drawings showing the lines of compartmentation and the lines of fire-resisting construction should be provided to the
compartment floor Surveyor and the Builder. The drawings should also give the required level of fire resistance for each element.
Ceiling cavity Drawings to show the position of cavity barriers should be provided, and the specification of cavity barriers included.
Materials for fire stopping and cavity barriers

All materials used to form a fire barrier must have relevant third-party certification or be CE marked in accordance with
instructions and recommendations.
Cavity barrier Wall forming protected
Cavity barrier Installation
around openings escape route Accommodation
around edges
products. A competent person is deemed to be a third-party approved contractor specialising in fire stopping and
Compartment wall passive fire protection.
Cavity barrier at
2. Fire protection in buildings
bottom of cavity
Floor cavity
Compartment floor Design information
The design details must show the correct level of fire resistance for the building, in accordance with Part B of the
Sub-divide
Ceiling cavity Building Regulations or Section 2 of the Scottish Building Standards, depending on region.
extensive cavities
Materials for fire protection
All materials used to form a fire barrier must have relevant third-party certification, or be CE marked in accordance with
instructions and recommendations.
Fire-Stopping (Same fire
resistance as compartment)
Compartment wall
Accommodation Installation
Cavity barrier to meet the products.
required resistance of the
relevant regional Building Where intumescent paints are used to provide the required level of fire protection, certification confirming that the paint
Regulations applied will achieve the correct level of fire protection is required.
Note: Diagrams courtesy of the approved documents for England
UPPER FLOORS
Services 2020 2020
Limited 271
271
UPPER FLOORS
CONTENTS
11.
Contents
Roofs
11.1 Pitched - Pre-formed Truss
11.2 Pitched - Traditional Cut
11.3 Concrete Interlocking Tiles
11.4 Plain Tiles
11.5 Slate
11.6 Flat Roofs
11.7 Green Roofs
11.8 Metal Deck Roofing

Additional Functional Requirements 3. In addition to point 2: Flat roof design shall, unless specifically agreed otherwise with the Warranty Ad
In addition to the general Functional Requirements, the following additional Functional Requirements are also provider, comply with the requirements of BS 6229 and be designed to have a minimum finished fall of 1 In a
applicable to this specific Building Part section as follows: in 80. ap
Workmanship Limitations of Functional Requirements W

1. A flat roof membrane manufacturer's approved installer must be used for all flat roof coverings, where: 1. The Functional Requirements are limited by the recommendations applied in this specific Building Part 1.
a. On large developments over 3 stories in height (including ground storey) where the total combined guidance.
roof area exceeds 50m2;
b. Low rise developments less than 3 stories in height where the roof area exceeds 50m2;
c. Where the roof includes features beyond a typical wall abutment e.g. (but not limited to) variations
of upstand constructions / penetrations / fixings / external permanent machinery / balustrade fittings;
d. Where the waterproof membrane is to be covered over by pedestrian finishes or solar panels;
e. Where EDPM roof coverings are proposed.
2. Flat roof membranes will be required to be weather and waterproof. In certain circumstances the flat roof
covering will also require to be tested at completion (please refer to the guidance within this Technical
Manual for further information).
Materials
Design Ma
1. Roof coverings must prevent any external moisture from passing into the internal environment of the No
building.
2. Roof structures and coverings shall be designed and constructed so that they: De
a. Are structurally sound; 1.
b. Satisfactorily resist the passage of moisture due to rain and snow to the inside of the building, and
to materials which might be adversely affected by such moisture;
c. Encourage the rapid discharge of moisture due to rain and snow from their external surfaces to a
suitable discharge system;
e. Are durable and resistant to moisture due to the weather, condensation or some other cause;
f. Have adequate resistance to fire penetration and the spread of flame across their external surfaces;
g. Do not allow fire spread across the tops of separating walls;
h. Resist flanking sound transmission where adjacent to separating walls.
i. Adequately discharge rainwater from the roof area to a suitable drainage system.
ROOFS
ROOFS
11. 11.1
Pitched - Pre-formed Truss
Roofs

11.1.1 PITCHED
11.1.1 PITCHED - PRE-FORMEDTRUSS:
- PRE-FORMED TRUSS: Trussed
Trussed roof
roofdesign
design
Statutory requirements
Roof structure and loading

Roof framing and rafter design must be in accordance with current regional
The head and side lap of the tile should Dry fix ridge and hip systems are
The roof of the building shall be constructed so that the combined dead, imposed
be in accordance with the manufacturers available to provide full mechanical
and wind loads are sustained and transmitted by it to the ground safely, and
instructions and pitch of the roof fixing of all ridge and hip tiles to meet BS
without causing such deflection or deformation of any part of the building, or such
5534 and BS 8612 recommendations
movement of the ground, as to impair the stability of any part of another building.
The roof structure should be of such construction that it has adequate

interconnection with the walls, allowing it to act as a horizontal diaphragm capable
of transferring the wind forces to buttressing elements of the building.
The need for diagonal rafter bracing equivalent to that recommended in BS EN Additional mechanical fixings may need
1995- 1: 2004+A1, or Annex H of BS 8103-3 for trussed rafter roofs, should be to be provided to meet the requirements
provided, especially for single-hipped and non-hipped roofs of more than 40° for of BS 5534
detached houses.
The roof coverings should be designed in
For advice on 'sizing of certain timber members in floors and roofs for dwellings',
accordance with:
· BS 5534 Code of practice for slating
· BS 8103-3, Structure design of low rise buildings, Code of Practice for timber
and tiling (including shingles).
floors and roofs for dwellings.
· BS 8000-6 Workmanship on building
· BS EN 1995-1, Eurocode 5 design of timber structures. General. Common
sites. Code of practice for slating
and tiling of roofs and claddings.
· BS 5250 Control of condensation in
Design Criteria buildings
The design criteria set out is intended to be adequate for imposed roof loads of
1.00kN/m2 for spans not exceeding 12m, and 1.50kN/m2 for spans not exceeding
6m.
All structural timber should be stress graded. All such timber must be stamped as
either 'DRY' or 'KD' (Kiln Dry). The use of ungraded, or 'green', timber is not
acceptable.
Allowances for wind loading
The need for a roof to withstand wind pressure and suction will be met if the
proposed roof is braced effectively, as discussed elsewhere in this section, and Cavity and roof insulation not
secured to the structure, as detailed below, with walls adequately restrained. shown for clarity
The securing of roofs to the supporting structure normally involves a timber wall
plate or similar, which should be levelled using a spirit level so that loadings from
the roof are directed perpendicularly down the supporting wall.
The wall plate should be fixed to ensure correct positioning when roof timbers or
trusses are being installed by means of galvanised mild steel holding down straps
(30mm x 5mm x 1000mm long at maximum 2m centres) nailed to the wall plate
and securely fixed to the inner surface of the wall with compatible fixings.
There is a need to ensure that holding down straps are provided in areas of
severe wind exposure where required by the roof design.
Additional requirements in a coastal locations

Approved Document A of the Building The roof structure should be designed in accordance with: Preservative treatment will be required
Regulations for England requires that in where timber members and trussed
Where developments are within a coastal location additional Warranty
certain geographical areas, all softwood · BS 8103-3, structure design of low rise buildings, code rater construction is cut back at eaves
requirements should be met.
roof timbers should be treated against of practice for timber floors and roofs for dwellings or where the rafter 'feet' are trimmed to
attack by the House Longhorn Beetle. · BS EN 1995-1: 2004-A1, Eurocode 5 design of timber sit into the external walls
For the purpose of this Technical Manual we are considering sites within 5km
inland from the shore line or sites located in 'tidal' estrine areas where they are See 'Appendix C - Materials, Products, structures. General. Common rules for buildings
within 5km of the general shoreline. and Building Systems' for further
information
Further information on Warranty requirements within a coastal location can be
found in 'Appendix B - Coastal Locations'.
© MD©Insurance Services Limited 2020 2020 276 ROOFS

ROOFS
11.1.2PITCHED
- PRE-FORMED TRUSS:Trussed
Trussed roof
roof design
design
Roof Structure Bracing, support and typical roof openings (BS EN 1995-1-1 and PD 6693-1)
Trussed rafter design As stated above, the Designer is responsible for framing the roof. The correct bracing configuration locks all timber supporting roof elements into
a single structural, load-bearing unit. Standard bracing details are given in BS 5268-3.
Design responsibility
Where recovering of existing roofs occurs: Approved Document A Section 4, deals with the requirements for checking the structural integrity of
The Building Designer is responsible for the 'framing' of any given roof as a whole. This means that he or she must take responsibility for the
the roof and supporting structure when considering the re-roofing of buildings.
bracing together (framing) of the trussed rafter configuration, which then supports the roof covering and the tying together of the supporting
walls. For information and design criteria necessary for ordering: BS 5268-3 provides a comprehensive list of criteria that should be supplied by the
Building Designer or Site Supervisor to the Trussed Rafter Designer/Fabricator to enable a design to be prepared.
Whilst it is the supplier of the rafters who generally has the knowledge and expertise required to achieve the best engineering solutions, the
designer must be certain that the loading calculations and resultant configuration is fit for purpose. This includes:
The following checklists, derived from BS EN 1995-1: 2004+A1 and PD 6693-1, set out: · Span of the trussed rafter, wall plate to wall plate plus the width of wall plate at each end.
· Pitch of the roof.
· Information required by the manufacturer from the Designer. · Method of support.
· Information that should be supplied by the manufacturer to the Designer. · Position of support.
· Anticipated loading of the roof structure i.e. the weight of the roof tiles and the exposure of the site should it attract excessive wind loads.
Designer to truss manufacturer · Position and size of water tanks.
· The height and location of the building, with reference to any unusual wind conditions. · Position and size of openings i.e. Loft hatches, roof windows, chimneys.
· The profile of the trussed rafter, including camber if required. · Due to the site locality, any particular preservative treatment necessary for the timber, e.g. to protect against House Longhorn Beetle.
· The span of the trussed rafter. · Eaves details i.e. overhang required, etc.
· The pitch or pitches of the roof.
· The method of support and position of supports. In return, the Trussed Rafter Designer should supply the following details for site use:
· The type or weights of roof tiles or covering, including sarking, insulation and ceiling materials.
· The size and approximate position of any water tanks or other equipment to be supported on the trussed rafters. · Position, bearing and spacing of trussed rafters.
· The overhang of the rafters at eaves, and other eaves details. · Position, fixings and sizes of lateral supports to prevent buckling of compression members such as rafters and struts.
· The positions and dimensions of hatches, chimneys and other openings.
· Deviations from standard spacing's, etc. to accommodate openings.
· Support details for water tanks.
· The service use of the building, with reference to any unusual environmental conditions and the type of preservative treatment where
· Any special handling equipment.
required.
· The spacing of trussed rafters and special timber sizes where these are required to match existing construction.
Modifications to trussed rafters
Truss manufacturer to Designer Trussed rafters should never be cut, altered or repaired for use without the full agreement of the Trussed Rafter Designer. Remedies for defects
· Finished sizes, species, stress grades or strength classes of timber members. to erected trusses can be found in BS 5268: 3, but the Roof Designer's advice should be sought prior to repairs being carried out.
· The type, sizes and positions of all jointing devices with tolerances, or the number of effective teeth or nails required in each member at
each joint. Combined trussed rafter and traditionally framed roofs
· The positions and sizes of all bearings.
· Loadings and other conditions for which the trussed rafters are designed. Extra care is necessary where the two principal timber pitched roof types are used in conjunction. The trussed rafters should be specifically
· The spacing of trussed rafters. designed to accept any additional loadings imposed by an adjacent traditional roof. Similarly, account should be taken of any loadings imposed
· The positions, fixings and sizes of any lateral supports necessary to prevent buckling of compression members, such as rafters and struts. by trusses on traditional roofs where only nominal loadings have been allowed for. If in doubt, consult the Roof Designer.
Details of the permanent bracing necessary to ensure the overall stability of the complete roof structure and supporting walls should be
provided by the Building Designer. Statutory requirements
· The method of support for tanks and ancillary equipment, together with the capacity or magnitude of additional load assumed.
· The range of reactions to be accommodated at the support positions, including those required to resist wind uplift forces.
· The basis of the design. Treatment of timber
· Details of any changes in spacing to accommodate chimneys or openings. Preservative treatment of roof timbers is normally unnecessary, except where specifically required under relevant standards and Codes of
· Any special precautions for handling and erection, in addition to those covered by BS EN 1995-1. Practice, and in the following circumstances:
· Roof timbers should be preservative treated where the insulation and ceiling line follow the roof pitch.
Spans
· Trussed rafter construction which is cut back at eaves or where the rafter 'feet' is trimmed to sit into the external walls. Preservative
Maximum permissible spans for the most common building types and rafter configurations are given in BS EN 1995-1: Section 9. treatment will be required to the cut ends.
For designs that fall outside BS EN 1995-1 conditions, the trussed rafter must demonstrate adequate jointing and structural integrity by · The Approved Document of Regulation 7 of the Building Regulations for England requires that in certain geographical areas, all softwood
calculation. roof timbers should be treated against attack by the House Longhorn Beetle.
Loads The treatment should be impregnated with a preservative suitable for use in 'Use Class 1' in pitched roofs and 'Use Class 2 flat roofs', in
Trussed rafters and the framed roof must have dead and imposed loads calculated in accordance with BS EN 1991-1-1, BS EN 1991-1-3 and accordance with BS 8417, for a 60 year anticipated service life. Cut ends must be liberally brushed or dipped with an end-grain preservative.
BS EN 1991-1-4 and be in accordance with PD 6693-1.
It is strongly recommended that, where punched, metal fasteners are proposed to roof trusses. Only micro-emulsion or organic solvent
Loads acting on rafters are dead loads (tiles/slates, battens, underlay and rafter self-weight), imposed loads (snow load and maintenance) and preservatives should be used for timber treatment, to limit the possibility of corrosion of the fasteners and so as not to adversely affect glued
the wind uplift load. Other dead loads that act on the ceiling ties (ceiling, insulation, water tanks and the tie self-weight) and imposed loads (loft joints.
access and weight of storage) will also have to be taken into account by the Designer.
Further information can be found in 'Appendix C- Materials, Products, and Building Systems'.
The following limits for imposed loads on the rafters uniformly distributed over the whole roof, measured on plan:
Gable spandrel panels
· Roofs pitched 10° to 30°: 0.75kN/m2.
· Roofs pitched 31° to 75°: 0.75kN/m2 - 0 kN/m2 (reduced linearly), or The gable spandrel panel should be suitably designed to transmit loads to the roof structure and down through the supporting walls.
· A concentrated load of 0.9kN, whichever produces the greater stress or deflection.
It is important that gable spandrel panels should be designed to transmit these loads to the roof structure via lateral restraints and vertically down
Experience shows that for most common tiled and slated roofs, the uniformly distributed load is more severe. to the supporting walls. Full design with structural calculations should be provided.
The truss designer the project Structural Engineer should provide details of the lateral resistant to the gable spandrel panel, including details of
the restraint used and the fixings to be provided.
ROOFS
© MD ©
Insurance Services
Services 2020 2020 277277
ROOFS
11.1.3PITCHED
- PRE-FORMED TRUSS:Manual
Manual handling
handling and
andtransportation
transportation
Handling and transportation Mechanical lifting
When transporting and handling trussed rafters, sagging and flexing should be avoided at all times. Whether handling is manual or by using mechanical Ideally, when using mechanical lifting, the trusses should be lifted in banded sets and lowered onto suitable supports. Lifting
equipment, trusses should be moved in a vertical positions unless support can be provided to every joint. points should be rafter or ceiling intersections or node points. Lifting trusses singularly should be avoided a suitable spreader
bar should be used to withstand the sling force.
Manual lifting
On long-span trusses, it may be necessary to employ additional labour at intermediate positions. If required, the truss may be inverted so that the apex
hangs down. See-sawing the truss across walls and scaffolding must be avoided. Individual designs and site conditions may dictate different
requirements in order to install trusses in their final position. Mechanical lifting of roof trusses
Spreader bar
Suggested method of manual lifting
Hoists connected to
connection points of truss
to avoid flexing
Guide ropes may be

necessary at ends
Avoid bending or see-sawing of trusses
Incorrect horizontal
handling of truss
Overstrain
at joists
© MD Insurance Services Limited 2020 278 ROOFS

ROOFS
11.1.4 PITCHED
11.1.4 PITCHED- PRE-FORMED
- PRE-FORMED TRUSS:
TRUSS: Erection
Erectionand
andbracing
bracing
Erection Procedure for erection Bracing to duo-pitched roofs
It is essential when erecting a trussed rafter roof to ensure that the first trussed rafter is · Before placing first truss, mark required position of trussed rafters on opposing Fixing
erected and braced rigidly in the correct vertical position so that it provides a base model wall plates. To achieve a stable and wind-resistant roof and gable wall structure, the roof must be secured to the gable wall, if
against which all the other trusses can be set out. · Erect and brace first trussed rafter (A) (only one shown but fix others as applicable, and fully braced by 100mm x 25mm timber, twice nailed to roof timbers using 65mm long x 3.35mm
necessary). diameter galvanised wire nails. Where nail guns are used, 75mm long x 3.1mm diameter annular ring-shank nails
Any temporary bracing should not be removed until permanent bracing has been installed. · Erect next adjacent trussed rafter (B) and brace back to (A) using brace (C). are allowed. They do not need to be galvanised.
Immediately prior to the fixing of permanent bracing, the trussed rafters should be checked · Erect other trussed rafters as with (B).
again for alignment and verticality. · When the final accurate positioning of the trussed rafters has been confirmed, Types of bracing
the rafter feet can be fixed into position. There are three main types of wind bracing, which should be fixed:
Trussed roof installation · Fix permanent diagonal bracing (D) (only one brace shown for clarity).
· Fix longitudinal bracing (E) (only three shown for clarity). · Diagonal rafter bracing.
· Fix all remaining bracing. · Longitudinal bracing.
The roof structure should be fully braced by 100mm x 25mm timber, twice nailed to roof
· Remove all temporary bracing. · Chevron bracing (only necessary on trussed rafter spans over 8m).
timbers using 65mm long x 3.35mm diameter galvanised wire nails. Where nail guns are used,
75mm long x 3.1mm diameter annular ring-shank nails are allowed.
The International Truss Plate Association Technical Handbook, available from Diagonal and longitudinal bracing are required in all trussed rafter roofs. Bracing for wind loads can also be
trussed rafter suppliers, provides additional advice on trussed rafter erection. enhanced by adequately fixed tiling battens and/or sarking boards. The ceiling plasterboard (12.5mm thickness) or
a similar rigid material will also contribute to the bracing process. Sarking boards, such as moisture-resistant
plywood (minimum thickness 9mm) and moisture-resistant chipboard (minimum thickness 12mm), may provide
adequate bracing without the need for additional wind bracing to the roof. Sarking boards should be laid with
staggered joints and nailed at 200mm centres on every truss with 50mm long x 3mm diameter galvanised round
wire nails.
Longitudinal bracing
Longitudinal bracing should be positioned tightly to abut separating and gable walls. In timber frame construction,
you should ensure that longitudinal braces are fixed to timber frame gables/separating walls to provide additional
lateral restraint.
x x x
x x x
x
x
x
x
x
x Chevron bracing
Chevron bracing is only required for roof spans exceeding 8m, and it can be identified as diagonal bracing to the
web members of the roof truss.
B
For spans of between 8m and 11m, such bracing may only be required to a single web member on either side of
A the roof. For spans exceeding 11m, more extensive chevron bracing may be necessary. 100mm x 25mm chevron
bracing should be installed continuously along the lines of webs so that there are no more than two consecutive
Where binders and bracing is not continuous they trusses between braces. Each brace must be at 45 degrees and fixed to at least 3 trusses.
should be lap jointed and nailed over a minimum
of two trusses Mono-pitched roof bracing
In mono-pitched trussed rafter roofs, the diagonal bracing pattern for narrow-fronted houses should be adopted.
The requirement for longitudinal bracing is the same as for duo-pitched trussed rafter roofs.
Trussed rafters, including attic trusses, should Chevron bracing is required to the webs in roofs exceeding a 5m span and also to upright members where
never be cut, altered, notched, or repaired for use inadequate lateral restraint is provided at the apex of the roof.
without the full agreement of the Trussed Rafter
Designer Coastal Locations and sites of severe or very severe exposure ratings (BS 8104)
Roof bracing for sites in these locations should be designed by a Structural Engineer.
Diagonal bracing
Diminishing trusses
Longitudinal bracing (E) D
Multiple trussed rafters should be fixed in The Truss Roof Designer should provide details of fixings for the diminishing truss to the main roof truss:
C accordance with the manufacturer's instructions
Wall plate, should be · Where the diminishing truss has a splayed bottom chord that matches the pitch of the main truss (usually
bedded level and half where the roof pitch is less than 30º), the truss can be skew-nailed to the main truss with two no 3.35mm
lapped at joints including The wall plate may, as good practice, be fixed to diameter x 75mm galvanised wire nails.
corners (butt joints are ensure correct positioning when roof timbers or · Where the diminishing truss has a square bottom chord, the truss can be skew-nailed to the main truss and
acceptable in Scotland) trusses are being installed by means of galvanised supported on a continuous binder also fixed to the main truss. The top of the binder should be splayed to suit
mild steel holding down straps (30mm x 5mm x the bottom chord and; 2 no. 3.35mm diameter x 75mm galvanised wire nails should be used for the fixing.
1,000mm long at maximum 2m centres) nailed to
the wall plate and securely fixed to the inner Mono-pitch and girder trusses on trussed rafter hipped-end roofs
surface of the wall with compatible fixings
Mono-pitch trussed rafters can be used in conjunction with girder trusses on trussed rafter hipped roofs.
Mono-pitched trusses are fixed to girder trusses using metal shoes. The bearing of mono-pitched trusses onto the
mild steel proprietary girder shoe should be confirmed with the Roof Designer before site installation is attempted.
Girder trusses are strengthened trusses designed to support loads in another plane (such as mono-pitched
trusses).
ROOFS
© MD
Services 20202020
Limited 279
279
ROOFS
11.1.5 PITCHED
11.1.5 PITCHED- -PRE-FORMED
PRE-FORMED TRUSS:
TRUSS:Erection
Erectionofofroof trusses
roof continued
trusses continued
Roof trusses trimming around a chimney Tank stand configuration
Trimmer minimum 100mm Offset bracing to clear tank
x 50mm bearers
Tank placed centrally and

All timber must be at least insulated as required
50mm clear of the chimney
Purlin minimum 100mm x
50mm
Binder minimum 47mm x

125mm
Node point Bearer placed centrally
and insulated as required
Trussed rafter span
Tank stands
Confirmation should be obtained from the Roof Designer that a trussed rafter roof design is capable of
supporting water storage tanks. Tanks should be supported by bearer beams, on the ceiling ties
portion of the truss. Bearers should be skew-nailed to supports as appropriate. Alternatively,
proprietary joist hangers can be used. Tank bearers should be situated as close as possible to the
node or intersection points of the trussed rafter. The dimensions of the bearers depend upon the size
of the supported tank and the span of the trussed rafters. Tanks with a capacity up to 230 litres should
be supported by a minimum of 3 rafters. Tanks up to 330 litres should be supported by a minimum of
4 rafters. The tank platform should not be constructed from chipboard as it may become wetted by
condensation, plumbing leaks, or rainwater ingress and lose its strength.
A "A" should not be greater than

twice the normal truss spacing Correct positioning of roof trusses
Purlin strut 50mm x 50mm minus dimension "B" Trussed roofs should be supported on timber
nailed to webs 'B' wall plates. Wall plates should be bedded to
A line and level, joined using a half lapped joints
Projection 'P'=50mm max at all joints including corners
This spacing should not exceed or 0.33x'B'
B
twice normal truss spacing The truss roof structure and the wall plate
should be bedded and fixed to transmit and
distribute loads and prevent uplift
'P'
Provision for openings, i.e. loft hatches, chimneys, etc.
Wherever possible, a trussed rafter roof should be designed to accommodate necessary openings within the trussed
rafter spacing, e.g. a loft hatch. Trusses must never be cut or trimmed except according to details supplied by the truss
manufacturer. The Roof Designer should provide all necessary details. This is applicable particularly for where roof
lights and dormers are formed. Detailed specifications of the trimming joists at the side, head and base of the opening
must be provided to ensure the roof is safely supported.
It is advisable to erect non-load bearing walls
Multiple-trussed rafters after the tiling has been completed thus
allowing deflection to take place under dead
load, thereby reducing the risk of cracking
Multiple-trussed rafters may be specified for a particular purpose, and may be delivered to site already fastened appearing in the ceiling finishes. If partitions
together. Alternatively, fixing together on-site of multiple trusses may be necessary, in which case it will be necessary to are of brick or block, then alternatively the
get full details of the fixing specification from the Roof Designer. final course can be omitted until tiling has
been completed
Truss
Omit final course

until tiling is
completed
Partition
ROOFS
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 280
280
ROOFS
11.1.6 PITCHED
- PRE-FORMED TRUSS:
TRUSS: Typical
Typicalbracing
bracingdefinitions
definitionsforfor
attic trusses
attic trusses
Attic truss
Where attic trusses are used, bracing should also be provided in accordance with the design,
the diagonal bracing for attic trusses can be placed internally and the inside of the rafters
battened out to take the plasterboard. Alternatively, plywood diaphragms can be placed
between the rafters within the sloping ceiling area.
Chevron bracing A
Attic truss bracing
Batten under rafter may be Longitudinal binders

notched if required to allow
the gable lateral restraint
straps to be fixed
Rafter diagonal brace
Batten under rafter in this

section to thickness of rafter
diagonal brace to allow the A
plasterboard ceiling to have
a level fixing (see section
detail opposite)
Longitudinal binders
Chevron brace
Section detail of Internal diagonal
bracing battened out for plasterboard
Trussed rafters, including attic trusses, should never
be cut, altered, notched, or repaired for use without
the full agreement of the trussed rafter Designer Timber pack Rafter Diagonal
bracing
Drawings and guidance provided in conjunction with
the Truss Rafter Association
Plasterboard
ROOFS
© MD
Services 20202020
Limited 281
281
ROOFS
11.1.7 PITCHED
PRE-FORMED TRUSS:
TRUSS:Ventilation
Ventilationprovisions
provisions
Condensation and ventilation Cold roof
Statutory requirements The following suggest the correct positioning of vents and the precise amount of free airspace required for 'cold roof'
construction, in accordance with current Building Regulations and BS 5250.
The roof should be designed and constructed in accordance with clause 8.4 of BS 5250 and BS EN ISO 13788. Detailed
information on methods to control harmful condensation is provided in BS 5250 Code of Practice for control of condensation in These recommendations apply if a high water vapour resistance (type HR) underlay is used.
buildings Annex H.
Prevention of condensation in roof voids is best achieved through the provision of natural air ventilation. BS 5250 states that the
Designer should take account of the following moisture sources in buildings:
· Water incorporated during the construction process (including precipitation). 5mm

· Precipitation after construction. Mono pitched/lean to roof
· Water vapour arising from the occupants and their activities.
· Atmospheric moisture drawn into the roof during warm humid weather conditions.
A free airspace of 5,000mm2/m should also be
provided at high level (equivalent to a continuous
Well sealed ceilings/air tightness of ceilings 5mm opening)
BS 5250 emphasises the importance of well sealed ceilings as a means of curbing the transfer of moisture into a roof space by
means of moisture-laden air. This means:
If the roof space is 15° or less, a free airspace of
· The avoidance of gaps and holes in a ceiling. 25,000mm2/m is required at the eaves or at low level
· The siting of access doors or hatches into the roof space away from moisture-producing areas, such as bathrooms or (equivalent to a continuous 25mm opening). If the
kitchens. roof pitch is more than 15°, a free airspace of
· That hatch covers must be effectively sealed. 10,000mm2/m is required at the eaves or at low level
· High levels of workmanship. (equivalent to a continuous 10mm opening)
Air leakage through gaps in a ceiling transfer more heat and moisture into the roof by convection than passes through the ceiling
materials by diffusion. Sealing the ceiling is therefore an essential requirement when considering the design of the roof envelope.
Key design issues to consider are as follows: 10mm
· Avoid construction gaps.

· Avoid roof access doors or hatches in rooms that produce excessive moisture.
· Use a proprietary sealed loft hatch and frame, and seal correctly in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
There is advice found in BS EN 13141-1 Ventilation for buildings. Performance testing of components/products for residential
ventilation. Duo pitched roof
5mm total Where pitches are 35° or greater or spans
· Seal all services and roof lights. are 10m or wider, a free airspace of
· Use recessed light fittings rated IP60 to IP65 to BS EN 60529. On each side of the roof, a free airspace of 5,000mm2/m should also be provided at the
· Seal the head of cavity walls to prevent the transfer of warm moist air into the loft. 10,000mm2/m is required at the eaves or at low ridge or at high level (equivalent to a
level (equivalent to a continuous 10mm continuous 5mm opening) to provide
Air and vapour control layer (AVCL) opening). If the roof space is 15° or less, effective through-ventilation
a free airspace of 25,000mm2/m is
If an AVCL is installed it should be placed on the warm side of the insulation. Installation of an AVCL at ceiling level will increase required at the eaves or at low
the need for sufficient ventilation below it during the drying out of wet trade construction phases. The performance of an AVCL level (equivalent to a
depends not only on the material selected, but also on the workmanship and the ability of the construction to be assembled on-site continuous 25mm
(see BS 5250). It is essential that an AVCL be adequately lapped and all joints sealed, and that its integrity is maintained. opening)
Particular attention should be paid to detail design and installation around penetrations through the AVCL e.g. services,
compartment walls and to the sealing of punctures caused by fixings.
10mm 10mm
ROOFS
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 282
282
ROOFS
11.1.8 PITCHED
- PRE-FORMED TRUSS:
TRUSS: Ventilation
provisions
A free airspace of 5,000mm2/m should

Duo pitched roof with sloping insulated ceilings also be provided at the ridge or at high
level on each slope (equivalent to a
Roofs should be designed and constructed in accordance with continuous 5mm opening)
clause 8.4 of BS 5250 and BS EN ISO 13788. Detailed information
on methods to control harmful condensation is provided in BS 5250
Code of Practice for control of condensation in buildings Annex H.
A minimum 50mm clear air path

must always be maintained between
the insulation and the underlay to
ensure effective through-
ventilation
On each side of the roof, a free

airspace of 25,000mm2/m is
required at the eaves or at
50mm clear air path low level (equivalent
to a continuous
25mm opening)
Trussed rafters, including attic trusses, should

never be cut, altered, notched, or repaired for
use without the full agreement of the trussed
25mm rafter Designer 25mm
Duo-pitch roof with fire break walls
Where a roof is divided by fire break walls and therefore cross

ventilation cannot be achieved, each roof void is treated separately.
Each void should be provided with 5,000mm2/m of free air space at
the highest level possible and 10,000mm2/m of free air space
provided at the lowest level. The ventilation should not impair the
fire performance of the wall.
ROOFS
© MD
Services 20202020
Limited 283
283
ROOFS
11.1.9 PITCHED
PRE-FORMED TRUSS:
TRUSS:Ventilation
provisions
Vapour permeable (type LR) underlays Cold pitched roof - LR underlay -

Impermeable external covering
If an LR underlay is used, interstitial condensation is unlikely to occur, provided the ceiling is well sealed and the eaves have a
minimum continuous ventilation opening of 3mm. If the ceiling is not well sealed, openings equivalent to 7mm should be used;
10mm eaves vent systems will satisfy both requirements. Roof covering
BS 5250 does not consider the situation where it is proposed to provide no ventilation to the roof void, or ventilation more limited
than described above. Should Designers wish to adopt this principle, they should refer to the conditions attached to Technical Tiling batten
Approvals given by UKAS (or European equivalent) accredited technical approval bodies.
Counter batten
Close Fitting Roof Coverings ity
cav
la ted Breather membrane
When specifying a close fitting roof covering which is relatively airtight, such as fibre cement slates, there is a risk of interstitial nti
Ve
condensation forming on the underside of the underlay and external covering. To avoid this risk, the batten space should be Rafter
ventilated in accordance with BS 5250 using counter battens for both warm and cold roof constructions. This is due to problems
that may arise where an underlay which offers low resistance to the passage of water vapour will tend to lower the risk of
condensation in the loft, but might increase the risk of condensation in the batten space.
Where underlays are used which allow the transfer of moisture vapour into the batten space by diffusion or convection,
potentially damaging condensation can occur if the batten space is not adequately ventilated either by purpose introduced
ventilation or by natural ventilation through a suitably permeable roof covering.
Cold pitched roof with an LR underlay with a close fitting roof covering
If an LR underlay is used, the designer may provide less ventilation to the loft than is recommended for a roof with a HR
underlay in BS 5250 providing that it is installed in accordance with the manufacturers 3rd party accreditation.
Ventilated loft
Note: BS 5250 does not cover situations where limited or no ventilation is proposed to the loft space.
With some LR (breathable) underlays, moisture can move by both diffusion and convection from the loft into the batten space.
To reduce the risk of potentially damaging condensation, the batten space should be ventilated. This should be achieved by
means of counter battens and vents at both low and high level:
· Low-level vents should be equivalent in free area to a slot 25mm deep running the whole length of the eaves.
· High-level vents should be equivalent in area to a slot 5mm deep running the whole length of the ridge in accordance with
BS 5250.
Note: Alternative methods of ventilating the batten void should provide an equivalent level of ventilation. Insulation
If ventilation is not provided to the batten space there needs to be an increased level of ventilation to the roof space and that AVCL
should be in accordance with BS 5250. The underlay manufacturer's 3rd party accreditation also needs to be followed.
Plaster board
It is very difficult to determine a HR or LR underlay by sight alone and the manufacturers third party accreditation should be
referred too if ventilation requirements are in doubt.
Cold pitched roof with HR underlay with a close fitting roof covering
An HR underlay provides high vapour resistance on the cold side of the thermal insulation, preventing the diffusion of water
vapour from the loft in to the batten space; it is therefore essential that the loft space be ventilated in accordance with BS 5250
and this Technical manual.
ROOFS
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 284
284
ROOFS
11.1.10PITCHED
- PRE-FORMED TRUSS:
TRUSS: Warm
Warmroof
roofrequirements
requirements
Warm roof construction

Warm roof construction (vented battens) Warm roof construction (vapour breathable underlay)
Insulation may be provided above the rafter and between rafters to form a warm roof
construction. The position of insulation and vapour control layers (AVCL) must strictly adhere
to the insulation manufacturer's recommendations. All warm roof construction products must
have appropriate third party certification. 50mm deep Type LR underlay supported
counter on the insulation material
Ventilation to counter batten void will be required where vapour permeable (type LR) battens
underlays are not used.
counter battens
Warm pitched roof with an LR underlay and tight fitting roof covering 50mm deep
ventilated void
In warm pitched roofs with an LR underlay, an AVCL (air and vapour control layer) should be
provided at ceiling line. Where an external covering (such as fibre cement slates) is relatively
Tiles
airtight there is also a risk of interstitial condensation forming on the underside of the underlay Roofing underlay non
and the external covering; to avoid that risk the batten space should be ventilated as vapour permeable
described.
Warm roof construction (vented battens) Insulation

Insulation
In roofs with an HR underlay, whatever form of external covering or ceiling is provided, there is
a risk of interstitial condensation forming on the underside of the HR underlay; to avoid that
risk, an AVCL should be provided on the warm side of the insulation, and ventilated voids Well sealed
should be formed between the underside of the underlay and the insulation. ceiling Well sealed
ceiling
Thermal insulation provisions for the compliance with the Building Regulations
Thermal insulation must be installed to meet current Building Regulations, to an acceptable

level of workmanship, to avoid cold bridges and to meet the following provisions: Vapour control
layer Vapour control
· The use of over joist and under rafter insulation is considered best practice, as it layer
eliminates the cold bridge caused by the joist/rafter.
· If required by BS 5250, use a vapour control plasterboard or a separate VCL behind the
plasterboard.
· Use a proprietary eaves ventilator to ensure ventilation is in accordance with BS 5250.
· The installation of the eaves ventilator must not prevent free water drainage below the Insulation may be provided above the rafter and between rafters to form a warm roof construction. The position of insulation and Vapour control layers (AVCL) must
tiling battens. strictly adhere to the insulation manufacturer's recommendations. All warm roof construction products must have appropriate third-party certification.
The requirements of the regulations are designed to reduce carbon emissions from new Ventilation to counter batten void will be required where vapour permeable (type LR) underlays are not used.
buildings and improve the performance of existing buildings where new work is carried out.
ROOFS
© MD
Services 20202020
Limited 285
285
ROOFS
11.1.11 PITCHED
PRE-FORMED TRUSS:
TRUSS:Roof
Roofcoverings
coverings
Roof coverings Control of internal pressure

The total wind force on a roof is dependent on the pressure differential between the inner and outer faces of the roof
Legislation and planning covering. Such pressures are significantly reduced by the use of underlay or boarding beneath tiling or slating. Its
Tiled and pitched roof coverings should be in accordance with the relevant Building Regulations. contribution towards shielding the underside of the tiles or slates from the full transmission of internal pressures
means the underlay is required to have an adequate tensile strength for the specific application. The tensile strength
The principal British Standards relevant to this section are: of the underlay, its air permeability factor and the withdrawal resistance of batten nail fixings are therefore important
when determining the overall resistance to wind uplift of the roof system.
· BS 5534 Code of Practice for slating and tiling (including shingles). This gives recommendations for the design,
materials, application, installation and performance of slates and tiles (BS 5534 should be read in conjunction with BS Aircraft vortices
8000-6). Roofs near airports can experience high local wind load forces due to air vortices created by certain aircraft when
· BS 8000-6 Workmanship on building sites. Code of Practice for slating and tiling of roofs and claddings. This applies taking off and landing, which may be greater than the wind loads calculated to BS 5534. Designers should seek
to the laying and fixing of clay and concrete tiles, natural and fibre cement slates and their associated fixings and advice from the Airport Authority Planning Department when designing roof fixings in these locations, and refer to the
accessories. guidance contained in BRE Digest 467 Slate and tile roofs: avoiding damage from aircraft wake vortices.
· BS 5250 Control of condensation in buildings. This describes the causes and effects of surface and interstitial
condensation in buildings, and gives recommendations for control of condensation in roofs. Calculating the fixing specification
The procedures for calculating the wind loads and determining the fixing specification for tiles and slates in
To ensure safe working practices during construction, the Designer should consider relevant safety regulations. These accordance with BS EN 1991-1-4 and BS 5534 are complex to undertake. Designers are advised to obtain a full
include the Construction (Design and Management) Regulations and the Health and Safety Executive's Approved Code of
roofing fixing specification from the slate or tile manufacturer.
Practice for Management of Health and Safety at Work.
Certain advisory bodies, such as the Loss Prevention Council, Building Research Establishment Ltd (BRE) and Timber Alternative proprietary mortar mixes may be accepted if they are shown to have similar durability and workability.
Research and Development Association (TRADA), also produce recommendations and guidance on roof construction.
Workmanship
Weather exposure
Tile fixing
Rain and snow Tile fixing should be in accordance with BS 8000-6 and the manufacturer's recommendations.
The roof of the building shall adequately protect the building and people who use the building from harmful effects caused
by precipitation and wind-driven spray. Roofs are required to resist the penetration of precipitation (rainfall) to the inside of Relevant British Standards
the building, thereby preventing damage to any part of the building where it might be carried.
· BS EN 490
Most pitched roofs keep the rain and snow out of the building and give a satisfactory performance. However, it is · BS 5250
acknowledged that similar roofs built to the same design and using identical roof materials, but in different locations, may · BS EN 1990
not necessarily provide the same level of assurance since they will be subject to different weather conditions and · BS 5534
exposure. · BS EN 1991-1-4
· BS 8000-6
Exposure to driving rain · EN 13859-1
The UK has a high risk of severe driving rain, and even in some sheltered locations may be subject to high levels of deluge · BS 6399
rainfall. BS 5534 defines four categories of exposure, based on the driving rain data given in BS 8104 and BR 262, and
should be used for buildings up to 12m in height. For buildings over 12m in height, the influence of increased wind speeds Further guidance
should be taken into account using BS EN 1991-1-4.
Practical guidance on the application of single-lap and double-lap tiling can also be obtained from CITB/CS Trainer
Resource Package for Operatives in the Construction Industry Manuals, Construction Industry Training Board.
ROOFS
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 286
286
ROOFS
11.1.12PITCHED
- PRE-FORMED TRUSS:
TRUSS: Underlays
Underlays
Underlays
Roof underlay provision Lay the specified roofing underlay parallel to eaves or ridge with horizontal overlaps, as specified in the table below.
Vertical side laps should be a minimum of 100mm. Minimise the gap at laps resulting from different tautness between
underlay courses. Drape in underlay between supports is to be sufficient for free drainage (a nominal 10mm) but should
Batten length no less not exceed 15mm in accordance with BS 5534. Fix underlay with the fixings specified, keeping the number of
than 1200mm, with not perforations to a minimum. Handle and fix underlay with care to ensure there are no tears or punctures, and repair any
less than 3 support tears or punctures prior to tiling. Ensure that the underlay does not obstruct the flow of air through ventilators located at
points eaves, ridge or in the main roof, and appropriately weather all holes formed in underlays for soil vent pipes, etc. Avoid
contact between the underlay and the underside of tiles. To prevent wind uplift, fix additional battens or timber strips
where laps occur between tiling battens (refer to BS 5534 6.2 Underlays).
Butt joints fully
supported and
staggered Not fully supported Fully supported
Rafter pitch
(mm) (mm)
12.5° to 15° 225 150
15° to 35° 150 100
35° and above 100 75
Minimum horizontal laps for underlays
Underlay head laps Specification for underlays

Side laps no
Pitch >35°, not less than 100mm
less than Fully supported and non supported underlays:
Pitch 15-34°, not less than 150mm
Pitch 12.5-15°, not less than 225mm 100mm
· BS 8747 Class 1F reinforced bitumen or Class 5U polyester reinforced bitumen.
Lap of underlay should be secured in · 2HR* underlay to BS EN 13859-1 Class W1 water penetration classification with third party certification for the
accordance with the manufacturers 3 use intended.
party certification · 3LR† underlay to BS EN 13859-1 Class W1 water penetration classification with third party certification for the
use intended.
* HR (high water vapour resistance) underlay - >0.25MNs/g.

† LR (low water vapour resistance) underlay - <0.25MNs/g.
(LR underlays are sometimes referred to as 'vapour permeable' or 'vapour open').
Materials
Underlay nails
Nails for use with roofing underlays should be clout head nails of no less than 3mm shank diameter and 20mm length
Drape in underlay between made of copper, aluminium alloy or steel coated by any of the zinc or zinc alloy coating methods specified in BS EN
supports to be sufficient for 10230-1.
free drainage (a nominal
Roof coverings 10mm) but should not exceed
15mm
Underlay
(underlay) These types of underlay should comply with BS EN 13859-1 or have third-party accreditation i.e. a BBA certificate.
These types of underlay should
comply with BS EN 13859-1 or have There are two categories of underlay: HR, non-vapour permeable and LR, vapour permeable. These types of underlay
third-party accreditation i.e. a BBA should comply with BS EN 13859-1 or have third-party accreditation, i.e. a BBA certificate. They should also have
certificate
sufficient tensile and nail-tear strength, and low extensibility, to produce the required resistance to wind uplift.
The lap should be secured in
accordance with the manufacturers Underlays for use beneath tiles and slates are either fully supported over boarding, sheathing or sarking, or
instructions with an a batten or unsupported and draped over rafters/counter battens, and should meet the conditions detailed.
suitable tape
Underlay to be Classification of underlays
supported on tilting
fillet Underlays should be classified in accordance with their geographic location and wind zone. Underlays should only be
used in those wind zones for which the design wind pressure is not greater than the declared wind uplift resistance.
Tilting fillet
Refer to BS 5534 A8. Figure A.4 for design wind pressures for geographical wind zones location map. It is important to
Dress into ensure the underlay is suitable for the geographical wind zone and that laps in the underlay are secured in accordance
gutter with the manufacturers 3 party accreditation for the geographical wind zone and batten spacing. This lap can be
secured either with a batten or a manufacturers 3rd party approved product.
Exposed materials should

be UV resistant e.g underlay
support tray
ROOFS
© MD
Services 20202020
Limited 287
287
ROOFS
11.1.13 PITCHED
PRE-FORMED TRUSS:
TRUSS:Battens
Battens
Fixing battens to rafters
Underlay
Timber battens
Timber species x
Tiling battens and counter battens should be selected from the timber species set out in BS 5534, and their characteristics
and defects should not exceed the permissible limits given in Annex D to G of BS 5534. Nail fixings to be positioned
y along the centre line of the
Grading batten and rafter below
Battens should be suitable graded to meet the requirements in BS 5534. Only battens that have been graded and bear the
BS 5534 marking will be acceptable for use.
For trussed rafter roofs where the batten
Sizing gauge is greater than 200mm, batten joints
Timber batten sizes should be not less than the minimum values recommended in BS 5534 for the common applications should be staggered at a ratio of no more
listed therein. Distance from than one in four courses on the same
edge required to support (in accordance with BS 8000-6)
Battens for large spans or special loading conditions should be designed by structural calculation for strength and stiffness, prevent splitting
in accordance with Annex F of BS 5534.
Preservatives
BS 8417: 2011 provides recommendations for preservatives for timber. Indicative preservative treatment schedules are
given in Annex E of BS 5534. Battens treated with preservatives can contain toxic substances that could introduce an Recommended batten sizes for pitched roofs and vertical work (BS 5534 in
environmental hazard, and should be disposed of safely. accordance with clause 4.11.4.1 Table 3)
Fixing timber battens

Battens should be at least 1200mm in length and supported at each end and intermediately by at least three rafters or Tile type Basic minimum sizes*
walls. Stagger butt joints over intermediate supports, splay nail each batten end and nail battens to each rafter.
Rafter/supports 450mm span 600mm span
For trussed rafter roofs where the batten gauge is greater than 200mm, do not have more than one joint in any four
consecutive battens on the same support. width depth width depth
Plain pitched/vertical 38 25 38 25
For trussed rafter roofs where the batten gauge is less than 200mm do not have more than three joints together in any 12
consecutive battens on the same support. Single lap interlocking 38 25 50 25
tiles/slate
The batten sizes given in the table should be taken as minimum dimensional requirements. Take care that nails used to Fibre cement slates 38 25 50 25
secure tiles do not penetrate the underside of battens or the underlay.
Natural slates 50 25 50 25
*All dimensions subject to re-sawing allowance: width +3mm, depth 0 or +3mm based on
measurement reference moisture content of 20%
Fixing roof battens
Fix the specified battens up the roof slope on top of the rafters, ensuring a minimum 40mm nail
penetration into rafters (smooth shank). Nail counter battens at maximum 300mm centres vertically
up the roof slope. Where boarding is used the fixing should coincide with the line of rafters.
ROOFS
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 288
288
ROOFS
11. 11.2
Pitched - Traditional Cut
Roofs

11.2.1 PITCHED
11.2.1 PITCHED- -TRADITIONAL
TRADITIONAL CUT:
CUT:Cut
Cutroof
roofdesign
design
Statutory requirements
Roof structure and loading

Roof framing and rafter design must be in accordance with current regional
Building Regulations and British Standards.
The roof of the building shall be constructed so that the combined dead, imposed The head and side lap of the tile should Dry fix ridge and hip systems are
and wind loads are sustained and transmitted by it to the ground safely, and
be in accordance with the manufacturers available to provide full mechanical
without causing such deflection or deformation of any part of the building, or such
movement of the ground, as to impair the stability of any part of another building. instructions and pitch of the roof fixing of all ridge and hip tiles to meet BS
5534 and BS 8612 recommendations
The roof structure should be of such construction that it has adequate
interconnection with the walls, allowing it to act as a horizontal diaphragm capable
of transferring the wind forces to buttressing elements of the building. The The roof coverings should be designed in
potential for roof spread should be considered by the Structural Engineer and accordance with:
incorporated within the design calculations for the roof.
· BS 5534 Code of practice for slating
In this respect, it is acknowledged that a traditional cut roof i.e. using rafters, and tiling (including shingles) Additional mechanical fixings may need
purlins and ceiling joists, generally has sufficient built-in resistance to instability
and wind forces, e.g. from either hipped ends, tiling battens, rigid sarking or the · BS 8000-6 Workmanship on building to be provided to meet the requirements
like. However, the need for diagonal rafter bracing equivalent to that sites. Code of practice for slating of BS 5534
recommended in BS EN 1995-1: 2004+A1, or Annex H of BS 8103-3 for trussed and tiling of roofs and claddings
rafter roofs, should be considered, for all cut roofs especially for single-hipped · BS 5250 Control of condensation in
and non-hipped roofs of more than 40° for detached houses. buildings
For advice on 'sizing of certain timber members in floors and roofs for dwellings',
· Span tables for solid timber members in floors, ceilings and roofs (excluding Generally purlins should be placed
trussed rafter roofs) for dwellings. Published by TRADA. Note: Reference vertically however the purlin maybe fitted
should be made to the version of the TRADA document current at the time of to the angle of the roof slope subject to a
construction of the roof.
· BS 8103-3, Structure design of low rise buildings, Code of Practice for timber Structural Engineers design
floors and roofs for dwellings.
· BS EN 1995-1: 2004+A1, Eurocode 5 design of timber structures. General.
Common rules and rules for buildings.
Design Criteria
The design of pitched roofs should:
· Have a dead and imposed loads calculated in accordance with BS EN 1991-
1-1, BS EN 1991-1-3 and BS EN 1991-1-4.
· Be in accordance with PD 6693-1.
All structural timber used in a conventional cut roof, i.e. rafters, purlins, ceiling
joists, binders and other timber elements, should be stress graded. All such
timber must be stamped as either 'DRY' or 'KD' (Kiln Dry). The use of ungraded,
or 'green', timber is not acceptable.
Allowances for wind loading Cavity and roof insulation not

shown for clarity.
The need for a roof to withstand wind pressure and suction will be met if the
proposed roof is braced effectively, as discussed elsewhere in this section, and
secured to the structure, as detailed below with walls adequately restrained.
The securing of roofs to the supporting structure normally involves a timber wall
plate or similar, which should be levelled using a spirit level so that loadings from
the roof are directed perpendicularly down the supporting wall.
The wall plate should be fixed to ensure correct positioning when roof timbers are
being installed by means of galvanised mild steel holding down straps (30mm x
5mm x 1000mm long at maximum 2m centres) nailed to the wall plate and
securely fixed to the inner surface of the wall with compatible fixings.
There is a need to ensure that holding down straps are provided in areas of
severe wind exposure where required by the roof design.
Additional holding down fixings may be required dependent on the roof structure
and wind loading, this should be considered by the Structural Engineer and be
incorporated within the structural calculations. Rafter construction which is cut back at
Approved Document A of the Building
Regulations for England requires that in eaves or where the rafter 'feet' is
Additional requirements in a coastal locations trimmed to sit into the external walls.
certain geographical areas, all softwood
roof timbers should be treated against Preservative treatment will be required
Where developments are within a coastal location additional Warranty
requirements should be met. attack by the House Longhorn Beetle to the cut ends
For the purpose of this Technical Manual we are considering sites within 5km
inland from the shore line or sites located in 'tidal' estrine areas where they are
within 5km of the general shoreline.
Further information on Warranty requirements within a coastal location can be

found in 'Appendix B - Coastal Locations'.
© MD
© MD Insurance
Insurance Services
Services Limited
Limited 20202020 290
290 ROOFS
ROOFS
11.2.2 PITCHED
11.2.2 PITCHED- TRADITIONAL
- TRADITIONAL CUT:
CUT: Cut
Cut roof
roofdesign
design
Cut roof design Combined trussed rafter and traditionally framed roofs
Design responsibility Extra care is necessary where the two principal timber pitched roof types are used in conjunction. The trussed rafters
The Building Designer is responsible for the 'framing' of any given roof as a whole. This means that he or she must take should be specifically designed to accept any additional loadings imposed by an adjacent traditional roof. Similarly,
responsibility for the bracing together (framing) of the roof configuration, which then supports the roof covering and the account should be taken of any loadings imposed by trusses on traditional roofs where only nominal loadings have been
tying together of the supporting walls. allowed for. If in doubt, consult the Roof Designer.
The Designer must be certain that the loading calculations and resultant configuration is fit for purpose. Treatment of timber
All cut roofs that are beyond the limitations of the 'Eurocode 5 Span tables for solid timber members in floors, ceilings and Statutory requirements
roofs (excluding trussed rafter roofs) for dwellings' published by TRADA should be designed by a suitably qualified and
experienced Structural Engineer and calculations and structural drawings should be submitted for assessment when
requested. Preservative treatment of roof timbers is normally unnecessary, except where specifically required under relevant
standards and Codes of Practice, and in the following circumstances:
The design of the cut roof should demonstrate:
· Roof timbers should be preservative treated where the insulation and ceiling line follow the roof pitch.
· Finished sizes, species, stress grades or strength classes of timber members. · Rafter construction which is cut back at eaves or where the rafter 'feet' is trimmed to sit into the external walls.
· The type, sizes and positions of all jointing devices with tolerances, or the number of effective teeth or nails required Preservative treatment will be required to the cut ends.
in each member at each joint. · The Approved Document of Regulation 7 of the Building Regulations for England requires that in certain geographical
· The positions and sizes of all bearings. areas, all softwood roof timbers should be treated against attack by the House Longhorn Beetle.
· Loadings and other conditions for which the cut roof is designed.
· The spacing of rafters, joists, binders and purlins. The treatment should be impregnated with a preservative suitable for use in 'Use Class 1' in pitched roofs. Cut ends must
· The positions, fixings and sizes of any lateral supports necessary to prevent buckling of compression members, such be liberally brushed or dipped with an end-grain preservative.
as rafters and struts. Details of the permanent bracing necessary to ensure the overall stability of the complete roof
structure and supporting walls should be provided by the Building Designer. It is strongly recommended that, where punched, metal fasteners are proposed to roof trusses. Only micro-emulsion or
· The method of support for water tanks and ancillary equipment, together with the capacity or magnitude of additional organic solvent preservatives should be used for timber treatment, to limit the possibility of corrosion of the fasteners and
load assumed. so as not to adversely affect glued joints.
· The range of reactions to be accommodated at the support positions, including those required to resist wind uplift
forces. Further information can be found in 'Appendix C- Materials, Products, and Building Systems'.
· The basis of the design.
· Details of any changes in spacing to accommodate chimneys or openings. Gable spandrel panels
· Any special precautions for handling and erection, in addition to those covered by BS EN 1995-1: 2004+A1.
· The span of the rafters, joists, binders, purlins etc. The gable spandrel panel should be suitably designed to transmit loads to the roof structure and down through the
· The pitch or pitches of the roof. supporting walls.
· The method of support and position of supports.
· The type or weights of roof tiles or covering, including sarking, insulation and ceiling materials. It is important that gable spandrel panels should be designed to transmit these loads to the roof structure via lateral
· The size and approximate position of any water tanks or other equipment to be supported on the trussed rafters. restraints and vertically down to the supporting walls. Full design with structural calculations should be provided.
· The overhang of the rafters at eaves, and other eaves details.
· The positions and dimensions of hatches, chimneys and other openings. The truss designer the project Structural Engineer should provide details of the lateral resistant to the gable spandrel
· The size of any structural members and supporting calculations. panel, including details of the restraint used and the fixings to be provided.
· Due to the site locality, any particular preservative treatment necessary for the timber, e.g. to protect against House
Longhorn Beetle.
Loads
Traditional cut roofs must have dead and imposed loads calculated in accordance with BS EN 1991-1-1, BS EN 1991-1-3
and BS EN 1991-1-4 and be in accordance with PD 6693-1.
Loads acting on rafters include dead loads (for example tiles/slates, battens, underlay and rafter self-weight), imposed
loads (snow load and maintenance) and the wind load. Other dead loads that act on the ceiling ties (ceiling, insulation,
water tanks and the tie self-weight) and imposed loads (loft access and weight of storage) will also have to be taken into
account by the Designer.
Experience shows that for most common tiled and slated roofs, the uniformly distributed load is more severe.
ROOFS
© MD
Services 20202020
Limited 291
291
ROOFS
11.2.3 PITCHED
- TRADITIONAL CUT:
CUT: Roof
Roofdefinitions
definitions
Traditional pitched roofs Close couple
Traditionally framed roof Pairs of rafter feet are joined together with ties, often
The moisture content of structural timber should not exceed 20% at the time of stress grading and at the time of erection. All doubling up as ceiling joists, to form triangulation. The tie
structural timber for use within the building fabric should be stress graded and marked 'KD' (Kiln Dry) or 'DRY'. resists the outward thrust, and load is transferred vertically
to supporting walls. The connection of ceiling joists or ties
All openings formed in the roof structure for dormers, rooflights etc. must be carefully designed to ensure the roof remains with a binder, supported from the ridge by hangers, allows a
safely supported and weather tight. smaller timber section to be used. Rafter and ceiling joist
dimensions for typical spans are given in the TRADA
The purlins/binders should be adequately supported to contribute fully to the roof structure. For example, they could be built document, Span Tables for Solid Timber Members in Triangle formed by
into the inner leaf of a gable end wall and supported by struts onto the load-bearing structure at centres specified in the Floors, Ceilings and Roofs for Dwellings. ceiling tie resisting
design. outward spread
Always ensure that the correct strength class of timber is both ordered and used. Structural timbers are allocated a strength
class by BS 5268-2. The most common strength classes used are C16 and C24.
The timber supplier will require the following information before supplying timber:
· Type and strength class of timber required.

· Required sizes of timber.
· Any treatment required.
Outward thrust Outward thrust
Wall plates omitted

Couple roof for clarity
This is the simplest method of producing a

pitched roof, consisting of pairs, or couples, of
rafters pitched against each other at their
heads, with feet bearing on opposite walls. It is
Supporting wall
economical, but structurally limited, as heavy
to resist spread
supporting walls are required to resist outward Raised collar roof
spread. When a steep pitch is combined with
low eaves, the resulting clear roof space can When ties are introduced at a higher level than the rafter
be used to advantage. Where such roofs are feet, they are termed 'collars'. The higher the collar, the
designed, full structural calculations prepared less influence on rafter spread and the larger the rafter
by a Chartered Structural Engineer should be section required to resist the bending moment. The
provided to demonstrate how eaves spread height of supporting walls may be reduced, as the roof is
will be prevented. effectively lowered so that the rafters and collars support
the ceiling. To resist eaves spread, the height of the
collar should be no higher than a third of the vertical
height between the wall plate and ridge. Rafters
supporting collar ties should be designed by a Chartered
Structural Engineer, taking into account the additional
point load imposed by the collar. The collar should be
fixed to the rafters using 10mm bolts and incorporating
Wall plates omitted large washers to prevent the bolt from being pulled
through the timber.
for clarity
Outward thrust Outward thrust High level collar offering
minimal spread resistance
Outward thrust Outward thrust
Wall plates omitted

for clarity
© Insurance
Services Limited
Limited 20202020 292
292 ROOFS
ROOFS
11.2.4 PITCHED - TRADITIONAL CUT: Erection of roof structure
11.2.4 PITCHED - TRADITIONAL CUT: Erection of roof structure
Roof trimming around a chimney Tank stands
Trimmer The design of tank stands should be provided as part of the Structural Engineers roof design.
Additional rafters Tank stand configuration

needed adjacent
to opening Water tank support on
All timber must be at least decking and bearers
50mm clear of the chimney Purlin spanning onto binders and
load bearing walls
Infill rafter
Binder
Water tank
Span
The tank platform should not be constructed from chipboard as it may become wetted by
condensation, plumbing leaks, or rainwater ingress and lose its strength
Maximum depth of birds mouth
Max 1/3rd
of depth Depth of
rafter
Generally purlins should be

placed vertically however the
purlin maybe fitted to the angle
of the roof slope subject to a
Structural Engineers design Birdsmouth depth maximum 1/3rd of the
depth of the rafter

It is advisable to erect non-load bearing walls
Provision for openings after the tiling has been completed thus
allowing deflection to take place under dead
All openings formed in the roof structure for dormers, rooflights etc. must be carefully designed to ensure the roof Binder
load, thereby reducing the risk of cracking
remains safely supported and weather tight. Ceiling joist appearing in the ceiling finishes. If partitions
are of brick or block, then alternatively the
Roof lights formed in traditional cut roofs final course can be omitted until tiling has
been completed
The roof should have doubled up rafters either side of the opening to support the trimming joists at the head and base
of the unit. The head and base trimming joists should be fixed to the doubled rafters according to the structural design
requirements.
Omit final course
until tiling is
completed
Partition

293
293
ROOFS
ROOFS
11.2.5 PITCHED
TRADITIONAL CUT:
CUT:Ventilation
provisions
Condensation and ventilation Cold roof
Statutory requirements The following suggest the correct positioning of vents and the precise amount of free airspace required for 'cold roof'
The roof should be designed and constructed in accordance with clause 8.4 of BS 5250 and BS EN ISO 13788. Detailed construction, in accordance with current Building Regulations and BS 5250.
information on methods to control harmful condensation is provided in BS 5250 Code of Practice for control of condensation in
buildings Annex H. These recommendations apply if a high water vapour resistance (type HR) underlay is used.
Prevention of condensation in roof voids is best achieved through the provision of natural air ventilation. BS 5250 states that the
Designer should take account of the following moisture sources in buildings:
· Water incorporated during the construction process (including precipitation).

· Precipitation after construction. 5mm
· Water vapour arising from the occupants and their activities. Mono pitched/lean to roof
· Atmospheric moisture drawn into the roof during warm humid weather conditions.
A free airspace of 5,000mm2/m should also be
provided at high level (equivalent to a continuous
Well sealed ceilings/air tightness of ceilings 5mm opening)
BS 5250 emphasises the importance of well sealed ceilings as a means of curbing the transfer of moisture into a roof space by
means of moisture-laden air. This means:
· The avoidance of gaps and holes in a ceiling.

· The siting of access doors or hatches into the roof space away from moisture-producing areas, such as bathrooms or If the roof space is 15° or less, a free airspace of
kitchens. 25,000mm2/m is required at the eaves or at low level
· That hatch covers must be effectively sealed. (equivalent to a continuous 25mm opening). If the
· High levels of workmanship. roof pitch is more than 15°, a free airspace of
10,000mm2/m is required at the eaves or at low level
Air leakage through gaps in a ceiling transfer more heat and moisture into the roof by convection than passes through the ceiling (equivalent to a continuous 10mm opening)
materials by diffusion. Sealing the ceiling is therefore an essential requirement when considering the design of the roof envelope.
Key design issues to consider are as follows:
· Avoid construction gaps. 10mm

· Avoid roof access doors or hatches in rooms that produce excessive moisture.
· Use a proprietary sealed loft hatch and frame, and seal correctly in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
There is advice found in BS EN 13141-1 Ventilation for buildings. Performance testing of components/products for residential
ventilation.
· Seal all services and roof lights. Duo pitched roof

· Use recessed light fittings rated IP60 to IP65 to BS EN 60529. 5mm total Where pitches are 35° or greater or spans
· Seal the head of cavity walls to prevent the transfer of warm moist air into the loft. are 10m or wider, a free airspace of
On each side of the roof, a free airspace of 5,000mm2/m should also be provided at the
Air and vapour control layer (AVCL) 10,000mm2/m is required at the eaves or at low ridge or at high level (equivalent to a
level (equivalent to a continuous 10mm continuous 5mm opening) to provide
If an AVCL is installed it should be placed on the warm side of the insulation. Installation of an AVCL at ceiling level will increase opening). If the roof space is 15° or less, effective through-ventilation
the need for sufficient ventilation below it during the drying out of wet trade construction phases. The performance of an AVCL a free airspace of 25,000mm2/m is
depends not only on the material selected, but also on the workmanship and the ability of the construction to be assembled on-site required at the eaves or at low
(see BS 5250). It is essential that an AVCL be adequately lapped and all joints sealed, and that its integrity is maintained. level (equivalent to a
Particular attention should be paid to detail design and installation around penetrations through the AVCL e.g. services, continuous 25mm
compartment walls and to the sealing of punctures caused by fixings. opening)
10mm 10mm
© MD
© MD Insurance
Insurance Services
Services Limited
Limited 20202020 294
294 ROOFS
ROOFS
11.2.6 PITCHED
- TRADITIONAL CUT:
CUT: Ventilation
provisions
A free airspace of 5,000mm2/m should

Duo pitched roof with sloping insulated ceilings also be provided at the ridge or at high
level on each slope (equivalent to a
Roofs should be designed and constructed in accordance with continuous 5mm opening)
clause 8.4 of BS 5250 and BS EN ISO 13788. Detailed
information on methods to control harmful condensation is
provided in BS 5250 Code of Practice for control of
condensation in buildings Annex H.
A minimum 50mm clear air path

must always be maintained between
the insulation and the underlay to
ensure effective through-
ventilation
50mm clear air path
On each side of the roof, a free

airspace of 25,000mm2/m is
required at the eaves or at
low level (equivalent
to a continuous
25mm opening)
Notching and drilling of joists
25mm Where room in a roof is formed floor joists 25mm

should only be notched as follows. See
'Upper Floors - Suspended Timber' for
further information
Maximum diameter of hole

should be 0.25 x joist depth
Maximum depth of notch
should be 0.15 x joist depth
Duo-pitch roof with fire break walls
Notches on top in a
zone between 0.1
Note: Where a roof is divided by fire breaks e.g in flats where and 0.2 x span
the protected corridor walls continue up to the underside of the
roof and fire stopped; each roof void is treated separately.
Holes in the centre line
Each void should be provided with 5,000mm2/m of free air in a zone between 0.25
space at the highest level possible and 10,000mm2/m of free and 0.4 x span
air space provided at the lowest level. The ventilation should
not impair the fire performance of the wall. Holes kept apart by
at least three times
hole diameter
© Insurance
Services Limited
Limited 20202020 295
295 ROOFS
ROOFS
11.2.7 PITCHED
TRADITIONAL CUT:
CUT:Roof
Roofunderlay
underlayprovisions
provisions
Vapour permeable (type LR) underlays Cold pitched roof - LR underlay -

Impermeable external covering
If an LR underlay is used, interstitial condensation is unlikely to occur, provided the ceiling is well sealed and the eaves have a
minimum continuous ventilation opening of 3mm. If the ceiling is not well sealed, openings equivalent to 7mm should be used;
10mm eaves vent systems will satisfy both requirements. Roof covering
BS 5250 does not consider the situation where it is proposed to provide no ventilation to the roof void, or ventilation more limited
than described above. Should Designers wish to adopt this principle, they should refer to the conditions attached to Technical Tiling batten
Approvals given by UKAS (or European equivalent) accredited technical approval bodies.
Counter batten
Close Fitting Roof Coverings vity
ca
ed Breather membrane
lat
When specifying a close fitting roof covering which is relatively airtight, such as fibre cement slates, there is a risk of interstitial nti
Ve
condensation forming on the underside of the underlay and external covering. To avoid this risk, the batten space should be Rafter
ventilated in accordance with BS 5250 using counter battens for both warm and cold roof constructions. This is due to problems
that may arise where an underlay which offers low resistance to the passage of water vapour will tend to lower the risk of
condensation in the loft, but might increase the risk of condensation in the batten space.
Where underlays are used which allow the transfer of moisture vapour into the batten space by diffusion or convection,
potentially damaging condensation can occur if the batten space is not adequately ventilated either by purpose introduced
ventilation or by natural ventilation through a suitably permeable roof covering.
Cold pitched roof with an LR underlay with a close fitting roof covering
If an LR underlay is used, the designer may provide less ventilation to the loft than is recommended for a roof with a HR
underlay in BS 5250 providing that it is installed in accordance with the manufacturers 3rd party accreditation.
Ventilated loft
Note: BS 5250 does not cover situations where limited or no ventilation is proposed to the loft space.
With some LR (breathable) underlays, moisture can move by both diffusion and convection from the loft into the batten space.
To reduce the risk of potentially damaging condensation, the batten space should be ventilated. This should be achieved by
means of counter battens and vents at both low and high level:
· Low-level vents should be equivalent in free area to a slot 25 mm deep running the whole length of the eaves.
· High-level vents should be equivalent in area to a slot 5 mm deep running the whole length of the ridge in accordance with
BS 5250.
Note: Alternative methods of ventilating the batten void should provide an equivalent level of ventilation. Insulation
If ventilation is not provided to the batten space there needs to be an increased level of ventilation to the roof space and that AVCL
should be in accordance with BS 5250. The underlay manufacturer's 3rd party accreditation also needs to be followed.
Plaster board
It is very difficult to determine a HR or LR underlay by sight alone and the manufacturers third party accreditation should be
referred too if ventilation requirements are in doubt.
Cold pitched roof with HR underlay with a close fitting roof covering
An HR underlay provides high vapour resistance on the cold side of the thermal insulation, preventing the diffusion of water
vapour from the loft in to the batten space; it is therefore essential that the loft space be ventilated in accordance with BS 5250
and this Technical manual.
© MD
© MD Insurance
Insurance Services
Services Limited
Limited 20202020 296
296 ROOFS
ROOFS
11.2.8 PITCHED
- TRADITIONAL CUT:
CUT: Warm
Warmroof
roofrequirements
requirements
Warm roof construction

Warm roof construction (vented battens) Warm roof construction (vapour breathable underlay)
Insulation may be provided above the rafter and between rafters to form a warm roof
construction. The position of insulation and vapour control layers (AVCL) must strictly adhere
to the insulation manufacturer's recommendations. All warm roof construction products must
have appropriate third party certification. 50mm deep Type LR underlay supported
counter on the insulation material
Ventilation to counter batten void will be required where vapour permeable (type LR) battens
underlays are not used.
counter battens
Warm pitched roof with an LR underlay and tight fitting roof covering 50mm deep
ventilated void
In warm pitched roofs with an LR underlay, an AVCL (air and vapour control layer) should be
provided at ceiling line. Where an external covering (such as fibre cement slates) is relatively
Tiles
airtight there is also a risk of interstitial condensation forming on the underside of the underlay Roofing underlay non
and the external covering; to avoid that risk the batten space should be ventilated as vapour permeable
described.
Warm roof construction (vented battens) Insulation

Insulation
In roofs with an HR underlay, whatever form of external covering or ceiling is provided, there is
a risk of interstitial condensation forming on the underside of the HR underlay; to avoid that
risk, an AVCL should be provided on the warm side of the insulation, and ventilated voids Well sealed
should be formed between the underside of the underlay and the insulation. ceiling Well sealed
ceiling
Thermal insulation provisions for the compliance with the Building Regulations
Thermal insulation must be installed to meet current Building Regulations, to an acceptable

level of workmanship, to avoid cold bridges and to meet the following provisions: Air vapour
control layer Air vapour
· The use of over joist and under rafter insulation is considered best practice, as it control layer
eliminates the cold bridge caused by the joist/rafter.
· If required by BS 5250, use a vapour control plasterboard or a separate VCL behind the
plasterboard.
· Use a proprietary eaves ventilator to ensure ventilation is in accordance with BS 5250.
· The installation of the eaves ventilator must not prevent free water drainage below the Insulation may be provided above the rafter and between rafters to form a warm roof construction. The position of insulation and air vapour control layers (AVCL) must
tiling battens. strictly adhere to the insulation manufacturer's recommendations. All warm roof construction products must have appropriate third-party certification.
The requirements of the regulations are designed to reduce carbon emissions from new Ventilation to counter batten void will be required where vapour permeable (type LR) underlays are not used.
buildings and improve the performance of existing buildings where new work is carried out.
© Insurance
Services Limited
Limited 20202020 297
297 ROOFS
ROOFS
11.2.9 PITCHED
TRADITIONAL CUT:
CUT:Roof
Roofcoverings
coverings
Roof coverings Control of internal pressure

The total wind force on a roof is dependent on the pressure differential between the inner and outer faces of the roof
Legislation and planning covering. Such pressures are significantly reduced by the use of underlay or boarding beneath tiling or slating. Its
Tiled and pitched roof coverings should be in accordance with the relevant Building Regulations. contribution towards shielding the underside of the tiles or slates from the full transmission of internal pressures
means the underlay is required to have an adequate tensile strength for the specific application. The tensile strength
The principal British Standards relevant to this section are: of the underlay, its air permeability factor and the withdrawal resistance of batten nail fixings are therefore important
when determining the overall resistance to wind uplift of the roof system.
· BS 5534 Code of Practice for slating and tiling (including shingles). This gives recommendations for the design,
materials, application, installation and performance of slates and tiles (BS 5534 should be read in conjunction with BS Aircraft vortices
8000-6). Roofs near airports can experience high local wind load forces due to air vortices created by certain aircraft when
· BS 8000-6 Workmanship on building sites. Code of Practice for slating and tiling of roofs and claddings. This applies taking off and landing, which may be greater than the wind loads calculated to BS 5534. Designers should seek
to the laying and fixing of clay and concrete tiles, natural and fibre cement slates and their associated fixings and advice from the Airport Authority Planning Department when designing roof fixings in these locations, and refer to the
accessories. guidance contained in BRE Digest 467 Slate and tile roofs: avoiding damage from aircraft wake vortices.
· BS 5250 Control of condensation in buildings. This describes the causes and effects of surface and interstitial
condensation in buildings, and gives recommendations for control of condensation in roofs. Calculating the fixing specification
The procedures for calculating the wind loads and determining the fixing specification for tiles and slates in
To ensure safe working practices during construction, the Designer should consider relevant safety regulations. These accordance with BS EN 1991-1-4 and BS 5534 are complex to undertake. Designers are advised to obtain a full
include the Construction (Design and Management) Regulations and the Health and Safety Executive's Approved Code of
roofing fixing specification from the slate or tile manufacturer.
Practice for Management of Health and Safety at Work.
Certain advisory bodies, such as the Loss Prevention Council, Building Research Establishment Ltd (BRE) and Timber Alternative proprietary mortar mixes may be accepted if they are shown to have similar durability and workability.
Research and Development Association (TRADA), also produce recommendations and guidance on roof construction.
Workmanship
Weather exposure
Tile fixing
Rain and snow Tile fixing should be in accordance with BS 8000-6 and the manufacturer's recommendations.
The roof of the building shall adequately protect the building and people who use the building from harmful effects caused
by precipitation and wind-driven spray. Roofs are required to resist the penetration of precipitation (rainfall) to the inside of Relevant British Standards
the building, thereby preventing damage to any part of the building where it might be carried.
· BS EN 490
Most pitched roofs keep the rain and snow out of the building and give a satisfactory performance. However, it is · BS 5250
acknowledged that similar roofs built to the same design and using identical roof materials, but in different locations, may · BS EN 1990
not necessarily provide the same level of assurance since they will be subject to different weather conditions and · BS 5534
exposure. · BS EN 1991-1-4
· BS 8000-6
Exposure to driving rain · EN 13859-1
The UK has a high risk of severe driving rain, and even in some sheltered locations may be subject to high levels of deluge · BS 6399
rainfall. BS 5534 defines four categories of exposure, based on the driving rain data given in BS 8104 and BR 262, and
should be used for buildings up to 12m in height. For buildings over 12m in height, the influence of increased wind speeds Further guidance
should be taken into account using BS EN 1991-1-4.
Practical guidance on the application of single-lap and double-lap tiling can also be obtained from CITB/CS Trainer
Resource Package for Operatives in the Construction Industry Manuals, Construction Industry Training Board.
© MD
© MD Insurance
Insurance Services
Services Limited
Limited 20202020 298
298 ROOFS
ROOFS
11.2.10PITCHED
- TRADITIONAL CUT:
CUT: Underlays
Underlays
Underlays
Roof underlay provision Lay the specified roofing underlay parallel to eaves or ridge with horizontal overlaps, as specified in the table below.
Vertical side laps should be a minimum of 100mm. Minimise the gap at laps resulting from different tautness between
underlay courses. Drape in underlay between supports is to be sufficient for free drainage (a nominal 10mm) but should
Batten length no less not exceed 15mm in accordance with BS 5534. Fix underlay with the fixings specified, keeping the number of
than 1200mm, with not perforations to a minimum. Handle and fix underlay with care to ensure there are no tears or punctures, and repair any
less than 3 support tears or punctures prior to tiling. Ensure that the underlay does not obstruct the flow of air through ventilators located at
points eaves, ridge or in the main roof, and appropriately weather all holes formed in underlays for soil vent pipes, etc. Avoid
contact between the underlay and the underside of tiles. To prevent wind uplift, fix additional battens or timber strips
where laps occur between tiling battens (refer to BS 5534 6.2 Underlays).
Butt joints fully
supported and
staggered Not fully supported Fully supported
Rafter pitch
(mm) (mm)
12.5° to 15° 225 150
15° to 35° 150 100
35° and above 100 75
Minimum horizontal laps for underlays
Underlay head laps Specification for underlays

Side laps no
Pitch >35°, not less than 100mm
less than Fully supported and non supported underlays:
Pitch 15-34°, not less than 150mm
Pitch 12.5-15°, not less than 225mm 100mm
· BS 8747 Class 1F reinforced bitumen or Class 5U polyester reinforced bitumen.
Lap of underlay should be secured in · 2HR* underlay to BS EN 13859-1 Class W1 water penetration classification with third party certification for the
accordance with the manufacturers 3 use intended.
party certification. · 3LR† underlay to BS EN 13859-1 Class W1 water penetration classification with third party certification for the
use intended.
* HR (high water vapour resistance) underlay - >0.25MNs/g.

† LR (low water vapour resistance) underlay - <0.25MNs/g.
(LR underlays are sometimes referred to as 'vapour permeable' or 'vapour open').
Materials
Underlay nails
Nails for use with roofing underlays should be clout head nails of no less than 3mm shank diameter and 20mm length
Drape in underlay between made of copper, aluminium alloy or steel coated by any of the zinc or zinc alloy coating methods specified in BS EN
supports to be sufficient for
10230-1.
free drainage (a nominal
10mm) but should not exceed
Roof coverings 15mm Underlay
(underlay) These types of underlay should comply with BS EN 13859-1 or have third-party accreditation i.e. a BBA certificate.
These types of underlay should
comply with BS EN 13859-1 or have
third-party accreditation i.e. a BBA There are two categories of underlay: HR, non-vapour permeable and LR, vapour permeable. These types of underlay
certificate should comply with BS EN 13859-1 or have third-party accreditation, i.e. a BBA certificate. They should also have
sufficient tensile and nail-tear strength, and low extensibility, to produce the required resistance to wind uplift.
The lap should be secured in
accordance with the manufacturers Underlays for use beneath tiles and slates are either fully supported over boarding, sheathing or sarking, or
instructions with an a batten or unsupported and draped over rafters/counter battens, and should meet the conditions detailed.
suitable tape
Underlay to be Classification of underlays
supported on tilting
fillet Underlays should be classified in accordance with their geographic location and wind zone. Underlays should only be
Tilting fillet used in those wind zones for which the design wind pressure is not greater than the declared wind uplift resistance.
Refer to BS 5534 A8. Figure A.4 for design wind pressures for geographical wind zones location map. It is important to
Dress into ensure the underlay is suitable for the geographical wind zone and that laps in the underlay are secured in accordance
gutter with the manufacturers 3 party accreditation for the geographical wind zone and batten spacing. This lap can be
secured either with a batten or a manufacturers 3rd party approved product.
Where exposed at eaves level,
a UV resistant underlay, a type
SU felt, or a proprietary eaves
guard should be used
© Insurance
Services Limited
Limited 20202020 299
299 ROOFS
ROOFS
11.2.11 PITCHED
TRADITIONAL CUT:
CUT:Battens
Battens
Fixing battens to rafters
Underlay
Timber battens x
Timber species Nail fixings to be positioned

Tiling battens and counter battens should be selected from the timber species set out in BS 5534, and their characteristics y along the centre line of the
and defects should not exceed the permissible limits given in Annex D to G of BS 5534. batten and rafter below
Grading
Battens should be suitable graded to meet the requirements in BS 5534. Only battens that have been graded and bear the For trussed rafter roofs where the batten
BS 5534 marking will be acceptable for use. gauge is greater than 200 mm, batten joints
should be staggered at a ratio of no more
Sizing Distance from than one in four courses on the same
Timber batten sizes should be not less than the minimum values recommended in BS 5534 for the common applications edge required to support (in accordance with BS 8000-6)
listed therein. prevent splitting
Battens for large spans or special loading conditions should be designed by structural calculation for strength and stiffness,
in accordance with Annex F of BS 5534.
Preservatives Recommended batten sizes for pitched roofs and vertical work (BS 5534 in
BS 8417: 2011 provides recommendations for preservatives for timber. Indicative preservative treatment schedules are accordance with clause 4.11.4.1 Table 3)
given in Annex E of BS 5534. Battens treated with preservatives can contain toxic substances that could introduce an
environmental hazard, and should be disposed of safely.
Tile type Basic minimum sizes*
Fixing timber battens
Battens should be at least 1200mm in length and supported at each end and intermediately by at least three rafters or
walls. Stagger butt joints over intermediate supports, splay nail each batten end and nail battens to each rafter. Rafter/supports 450mm span 600mm span
width depth width depth
For trussed rafter roofs where the batten gauge is greater than 200 mm, do not have more than one joint in any four
consecutive battens on the same support. Plain pitched/vertical 38 25 38 25
Single lap interlocking 38 25 50 25
For trussed rafter roofs where the batten gauge is less than 200 mm do not have more than three joints together in any 12 tiles/slate
consecutive battens on the same support. Fibre cement slates 38 25 50 25
The batten sizes given in the table should be taken as minimum dimensional requirements. Take care that nails used to
Natural slates 50 25 50 25
secure tiles do not penetrate the underside of battens or the underlay.
*All dimensions subject to re-sawing allowance: width +3mm, depth 0 or +3mm based on
measurement reference moisture content of 20%
Fixing roof battens
Fix the specified battens up the roof slope on top of the rafters, ensuring a minimum 40mm nail
penetration into rafters (smooth shank). Nail counter battens at maximum 300mm centres vertically
up the roof slope. Where boarding is used the fixing should coincide with the line of rafters.
© MD
© MD Insurance
Insurance Services
Services Limited
Limited 20202020 300
300 ROOFS
ROOFS
11. 11.3
Concrete Interlocking Tiles
Roofs

11.3.1 CONCRETE
11.3.1 CONCRETEINTERLOCKING
INTERLOCKING TILES:
TILES:Tile
Tilefixings
fixings
Performance of tiles Tile fixings
Rain penetration of the roof covering is dependent on a combination of the rainfall rate, wind speed and the ability of the roof tile to
BS 5534 recommends the use of aluminium or stainless steel nails under normal conditions of exposure. Plain or galvanised nails
resist the ingress of snow and rain water. The Designer should therefore be aware of the various means by which rain and snow can,
may be used for fixing battens to rafters, but care must be exercised when there is high humidity as certain timber preservative
under certain conditions, penetrate the roof covering.
treatments may corrode steel, zinc or aluminium. For all roof areas and rafter pitches, every tile should be mechanically fixed.
These include:
Workmanship
· Capillary action and rain water creep.
· Raindrop bounce and negative pressure rain suction. Tile fixing should be in accordance with BS 8000-6 and the manufacturer's recommendations.
· Driving rain, deluge rain and flooding.
· Surcharging of rain water over laps on long-rafter roofs. Calculating the fixing specification
· Wind-driven snow.
The procedures for calculating the wind loads and determining the fixing specification for tiles in accordance with BS EN 1991-1-4 and
Roof pitch BS 5534 are complex to undertake. Designers are advised to obtain a full site specific fixing specification from the tile manufacturer.
When determining the pitch, head-lap and/or side-lap of a tile, the roof pitch is taken to be equal to the rafter pitch. Hence, all
references to pitch refer to the rafter pitch, with the laid angle of the roof tile or slate always being less than roof pitch.
Tile details - key check points Eaves and bottom edge detail
The actual pitch of a tile should be determined in accordance with the following guidelines: Eaves and bottom edge (in accordance with BS 5534 and BS Headlap
8000-6).
· Tile to rafter pitch angles.
Margin
· Interlocking single-lap tiles: 5° less than rafter pitch. At the eaves (bottom edge), the batten should be set to
provide the required overhang of the tiles into the gutters.
If the design rafter pitch is less than the minimum recommended rafter pitch for the particular tile, then they can be considered as The recommended overhang is 45mm-55mm horizontally or
Overhang
having an aesthetic function only. In such cases, the true weatherproofing of the roof system must rely on a fully supported to the centre of the gutter, whichever is less.
waterproof membrane with an uninterrupted drainage path between counter battens to the eaves gutter.
· Ensure fascia board is to correct height so as to prevent Gauge
Wind tiles kicking up or drooping.
· Fit duct trays to retain insulation.
· Fix underlay protector trays, fascia vents and comb
Design for wind loading fillers (profiled tiles).
When considering the wind loading on the roof covering, designers should consult BS 5534. This provides calculation methods to · Clip eaves course where required. Exposed materials should
assess the wind load on each tile as a uniformly distributed load, and also takes into account the porosity of the tiles and the · Ensure vent path to roof space is achieved. be UV resistant e.g.
effectiveness of the substrate (boarding or sarking), and/or underlay shielding, when calculating wind uplift loads. The standard · Ensure exposed materials are UV resistant. underlay support tray
method in BS EN 1991-1-4 Eurocode 1. Actions on structures. General actions. Wind actions should be used to determine the basic
wind speed of the site, which is then used to calculate the effective wind speed and dynamic wind pressure on the roof by applying a
series of factors to account for terrain, topography, building height and length etc.
Nailing tiles to battens Tile nails
Nails for use with tiles should be of copper, aluminium,

stainless steel, phosphor or silicon bronze. Aluminium
Roof coverings (battens and tiling) nails intended for use with tiles should conform to BS
Lap of tiles should be in
accordance with the manufactures 1202-3 and should be clout head nails of 3.35mm or
specification and in conjunction with 2.65mm diameter. The length of nail will be determined
the roof pitch by the required wind uplift and the design of the tile.
Battens should be at least Stainless steel nails for use with tiles should conform
1200mm in length Tiles should be fixed in to BS EN 10088-3:2005 and BS 5534 grade 304, 316,
Battens should be fixed on accordance with a site specific 321 or 347, and should be specified for coastal areas,
every rafter, and be graded roofing schedule, in accordance areas of high exposure or where there is a risk from
and marked in accordance with BS 5534 chemical reaction.
with BS 5534
On trussed rafter roofs for Roof covering to
interlocking tiles, there project 45mm-55mm
should be no more than one horizontally, or to the Tile clips Tile clips
joint in any four consecutive centre of the gutter,
battens on the same support whichever is less Tile clips should be located over the side interlock of
the tile immediately behind the overlapped tile, and
nailed to the tiling batten. Tile clips provide resistance
Proprietary cross to the applied overturning moment more successfully
flow ventilator than a nail fixing. The latter is closer to the pivot line,
where the nib touches the batten and cannot resist the
Apply compressible uplift force at the tail. The phenomenon is also related
insulation over wall to meet Exposed materials should to roof pitch and the step height of the roof covering,
roof insulation be UV resistant e.g. and BS 5534 acknowledges that, at roof pitches of
Eaves 45°-55°, all tiles should be at least nailed to battens to
underlay support tray
ventilation prevent displacement. At pitches exceeding 55° all
tiles must be both head nailed and tile clipped to
reduce 'chatter' in high winds.

ROOFS
11.3.2 CONCRETE
INTERLOCKING TILES:
TILES: Verge
Vergeand
andridge
ridgerequirements
requirements
Ridges, hips, verges and valleys Typical dry ridge detail
The use of mortar for the bedding of ridge tiles, hip tiles, or lay tiles does not provide sufficient tensile bond strength to resist wind uplift,
as it can be affected by a number of factors, such as wind loadings, mix of mortar, design and movement of the roof structure. The
tensile strength of mortar should not be taken into account as the mechanical fixings should provide the resistance. Tiles only bedded
on mortar are not acceptable.
Clamping plate
Note: Dry fix ridge and hip systems are available to provide full mechanical fixing of all ridge and hip tiles to meet BS 5534 Ridge should be
recommendations. to BS 8612 Ridge batten
Verge (in accordance with BS 5534, BS 8612 and BS 8000-6) Ridge batten
strap
Battens should overlap onto the outer skin of the brickwork or the undercloak material; for interlocking tiles can project 30mm-60mm. Underlay
Where the distance of the nearest batten fixing to the rafter is greater than 300mm, an additional mechanical fixing is recommended.
Batten
Note: Where proprietary verge tiles or systems are specified, the detailing should be in accordance with manufacturers'
recommendations that are relevant to UK conditions of use.
· Use recommended undercloak for mortar.

· Level off irregularities in brickwork.
· Carry underlay over gable wall or bargeboard, and fit undercloak.
· Use the correct mortar mix.
· Bed and point tiles in one operation.
· Keep mortar clear from the ends of tiling battens.
· Fix all perimeter tiles (clip and/or nail).
Ridge (in accordance with BS 5534, BS 8612: Dry-fixed ridge, hip and verge systems for
Undercloak Verge detail slating and tiling and BS 8000-6)
Where an undercloak is used it should Dry fix systems
comprise plain tiles, slates or fibre cement Proprietary dry roofing products and systems should be used as an alternative to just mortar bedding at verges, ridges, hips and valleys
sheet strip. It is usually fixed at verges beneath to provide weathering and mechanical resistance properties. Dry roofing products as fitted should not adversely affect the performance of
the battens and on top of the underlay to the roof as laid.
support the mortar onto which the verge tiles
are bedded. If batten ends are cut, treat with a Dry ridge systems should be manufactured and tested to meet BS 8612. The dry ridge system should be specified in accordance with
suitable preservative. A 100mm wide bed of BS8612 and be suitable for the location and the wind loading (see 'Note 1' below).
mortar should be neatly laid on the undercloak,
this should be bedded solidly and finished Specifiers should seek evidence that this will not be the case, and should use dry roofing products only if such evidence is available.
neatly.
Note 1: Users should pay particular attention to the resistance to wind load and durability performance of dry roofing products.
100mm
The ridge or top course batten should be set to allow the ridge tiles, ridge units or metal ridge to overlap the top course of tiles by the
Verge detail (section)
overlap necessary for the main tiles. For interlocking tiles, this should be not less than 75mm. For double-lap products, the top batten
should be set to allow the ridge to overlap the penultimate course by the required head-lap.
Additional mechanical fixings maybe For ridge tiles:

required in accordance with BS 5534
· Check ridge tile is suitable for pitch of roof.
Mortar bed (min 100mm) on undercloak · Edge bed components onto tiles.
Overhang to tile manufacturers specification · Ensure top course tiles or slates are mechanically fixed.
· Mitre tiles neatly at hip ridge junctions, and use a lead saddle underneath for protection.
Underlay to be taken over cavity and · Use the correct mortar mix.
lapped under undercloak · Use dentil slips in deep profiled tiles in all joints more than 25mm thick to reduce mortar and risk of shrinkage.
· All mortar bedded ridge tiles must also be mechanically fixed by proprietary fixings in accordance with the roof covering
Where the distance of the nearest batten fixing to manufacturer's recommendations.
the rafter is greater than 300mm additional
mechanical fixings are recommended Note: Dry fix ridge systems are available to provide full mechanical fixing of all ridge and hip tiles to meet BS 5534 recommendations.
Where proprietary verge tiles or systems are specified the detailing should be in accordance with the manufacturers
Mortar must not be the sole means of fixing and should only be used for decorative purposes. Suitable mechanical fixings
are required. Mortar should be to the recommendations in BS 5534 and typically consist of a cement and sand mix based
on sharp sand, with soft sand added to achieve workability. The proportion of sharp sand should not be less than a third of
the total sand content to ensure the durability of the feature.
© Insurance
Services Limited
Limited 20202020 303
303 ROOFS
ROOFS
11.3.3 CONCRETE
INTERLOCKING TILES:
TILES:Valleys
Valleysand
andhips
hips
Valley (in accordance with BS 5534 and BS 8000-6)
The design of pitched valley gutters is just one roof detail where the latest guidance is much improved over previous Codes of Practice. The
valley is the most vulnerable area of a pitched roof in respect to potential water ingress, as it drains all of the water from adjacent roof slopes.
Consequently, the design data is related to the pitch of the roof, the rainfall rate, the length of the valley and the catchment area or area of the
roof to be drained. Designers are able to determine the width of the valley trough so that it is appropriate for discharging the rain water from the
adjacent roof covering to the eaves gutter.
GRP dry valley detail All adjacent tiles should be mechanically For valley gutters:
fixed
· Check roof pitch, area to be drained and rainfall rate to determine width of valley gutter.
· Consider length of valley when choosing proprietary valley troughs (over 8m).
The width of the valley gutter should be · Ensure roof structure provides adequate support for valley lining; make flush with top of rafter.
determined on the roof pitch, area to be drained · Do not place bitumen underlay beneath a lead sheet valley.
and rainfall rate · Keep open gutter width 100mm-250mm (correct width to be determined by reference to Table 11 and 12 in BS 5534).
· Keep roof design as simple as possible.
· Avoid discharge of valleys onto roofing wherever possible, but where inevitable use a lead saddle.
· Avoid direct contact with lead when using mortar; provide a fibre cement undercloak or tile slips.
· Do not block tile laps with mortar to avoid water damming.
· Where fibre glass valleys are used only products supported by a third party product approval will be acceptable and the installation and
support of the fibre glass valley unit must follow the manufacturers guidance.
· Mechanically fix all tiles adjacent to valleys.
Hip (in accordance with BS 5534, BS 8512 and BS 8000-6)
For hip roof construction:
· Check hip tile is suitable for pitch of roof.

· Mitre tiles neatly at hip ridge junctions and use a lead saddle underneath for protection.
· Use the correct hip iron at base of hip.
· Use dentil slips in deep profiled tiles in all joints more than 25mm thick to reduce mortar and risk of shrinkage.
· All mortar bedded hip tiles must also be mechanically fixed (screws, nails, clips, etc.).
Note: Dry fix ridge systems are available to provide full mechanical fixing of all ridge and hip tiles to meet BS 5534 and BS 8512
recommendations.
Main underlay
Fibre glass valley should have appropriate third

party approval and fixed in accordance with the
manufacturers guidance
Underlay
Valley board - Support of the fibre glass valley

must follow the manufacturers guidance

ROOFS
11.3.4
11.3.4 CONCRETE INTERLOCKING
CONCRETE INTERLOCKINGTILES: Compartmentation
TILES: andand
Compartmentation fire stopping
fire stopping
Fire-stop between
Fire stopping Fire stopping at roof level batten and above Further additional requirements for internal fire stopping and fire
between party walls underlay protection for compartment floors, walls, and roof junctions to flats
Compartmentation and apartments with a floor 4.5m or more above the ground
The spread of fire within a building can be restricted by sub-dividing it into compartments
separated from one another by walls and/or floors of fire-resisting construction. The roof void, like
Fire-stop below The following additional guidance applies to internal fire stopping and fire protection
most spaces within a building, can provide a route for the spread of fire and smoke. As an
underlay only to buildings with a floor 4.5m or more above the ground that contain flats or
often-concealed space, it is particularly vital that fire-resistant cavity barriers are provided at the
apartments.
following points:
Although building legislation is robust in applying provisions for fire protection and
· At junctions of separating wall and external cavity wall.
fire stopping, it can often be difficult to implement high standards of fire stopping in
· At junctions of compartment wall and compartment floor (not illustrated).
Vertical cavity complex buildings. This can lead to significant safety risks if the building does not
· At junctions of separating wall with roof, under roof tiles.
barrier omitted have the correct levels of fire protection and if holes in compartment walls are not
· Within boxed eaves at separating wall position.
for clarity sealed correctly. This guidance assists Developers in providing good standards of
fire stopping and fire protection.
Junctions of compartment walls with roof
A compartment wall should be taken up to meet the underside of the roof covering or deck, with It is not the intention to enhance the requirements of the Building Regulations in this
fire stopping, where necessary, at the wall/roof junction to maintain the continuity of fire Cavity barrier of
section, but more to ensure that the statutory requirements are applied correctly to
resistance. The compartment wall should also be continued across any eaves cavity. If a fire mineral wool or
the construction. It is therefore deemed that the requirements of Part B of the
penetrates a roof near a compartment wall, there is a risk that it will spread over the roof to the fire-resisting board
Building Regulations in England and Wales, or Section 2 of the Scottish Building
adjoining compartment. To reduce this risk, a roof zone 1500mm wide on either side of the wall in boxed eaves
Standards (whichever is appropriate depending on region), that apply to fire
should have a covering of designation AA, AB or AC on a substrate or deck of a material of limited stopping, separating walls, service penetrations, minimum periods of fire resistance
combustibility. and concealed spaces will also meet the requirements of this guidance.
Fire stopping
Cavity closed
at eaves Design information
Drawings showing the lines of compartmentation and the lines of fire-resisting
Roof coverings for this distance to be designated AA,
construction should be provided to the Surveyor and the Builder. The drawings
AB, or AC on deck of material of limited combustibility should also give the required level of fire resistance for each element. Drawings to
Fire stopping should be provided in accordance with the relevant regional Building Regulations show the position of cavity barriers should be provided, and the specification of
cavity barriers included.
· Party/separating walls 25mm below the top of the rafter line and a soft fire-resistant packing, such as mineral
wool, should be used to allow for movement in roof timbers and prevent distortion of the roof tiles.
· The fire stopping should be continuous to eaves level and a cavity barrier of fire-resisting board or a wire Materials for fire stopping and cavity barriers
1500mm 1500mm All materials used to form a fire barrier must have relevant third-party certification or
reinforced mineral wool blanket nailed to the rafter and carefully cut to fully seal the boxed eaves should be
installed. be CE marked in accordance with the Construction Products Regulations. The
materials must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations.
Installation
The fire stopping material or cavity barriers should be installed by a person who is
Note: Fire stopping should be deemed competent to install such products. A competent person is deemed to be a
third-party approved contractor specialising in fire stopping and passive fire
continued in batten space
protection.
Fire protection in buildings

Resilient fire stopping
up to underside of roof
Design information
At least
covering The design details must show the correct level of fire resistance for the building, in
375mm accordance with the Part B of the Building Regulations or Section 2 of the Scottish
Building Standards, depending on region.

All materials used to form a fire barrier must have relevant third-party certification,
Roof or be CE marked in accordance with the Construction Products Regulations. The
Wall At least
covering materials must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and
375mm
recommendations.
Installation
deemed competent to install such products.
Roof covering
Where intumescent paints are used to provide the required level of fire protection,
certification confirming that the paint applied will achieve the correct level of fire
protection is required.
Wall
©©MD
MDInsurance
InsuranceServices
ServicesLimited
Limited2020
2020 305
305 ROOFS
ROOFS
11.3.5 CONCRETE
11.3.5 CONCRETE INTERLOCKINGTILES:
INTERLOCKING TILES: Lead
Lead flashing
flashing
Materials for flashings and weatherings Single step and cover flashing for areas of severe and very severe exposure
Lead is generally ideal for roofing purposes; it is easily dressed over complicated shapes using simple hand tools, and can be joined by soldering or
Single lap flashings
lead burning. For most roofing purposes, Codes 3, 4 and 5 will be adequate, but for extreme conditions of exposure, thicker codes may be necessary.
Lead sheet used for roofs, flashings and weathering's should, in terms of suitability to meet the Warranty requirements, be in accordance with BS EN Fixings for
12588 or hold a valid UKAS (or European equivalent) third-party accreditation (e.g. British Board of Agrément, BRE, etc.) that demonstrates pitches over 30°
adequacy and durability for use.
Flashings and weathering's Underlap turned over tile
The following is a brief summary of metal flashing details.
A coat of patination oil should be applied to lead flashings after fixing. Lead can be used in contact with other metals, such as copper and stainless
steel, without risk of bimetallic corrosion, but should not be used with aluminium in a marine or coastal environment.
Side abutments
There are three common ways of weathering a side abutment with interlocking tiles; stepped cover flashings, secret gutters and a combination of
stepped cover flashing above secret gutter.
Side abutment (stepped cover flashing)
· Turn roofing underlay a minimum of 50mm up at the abutment.

· Finish the tiling battens as close to the abutment as possible.
· Lay the tiles to butt as close as possible to the wall.
· Cut a piece of Code 4 lead to form a combined step and cover flashing.
· Flashing should not exceed 1.5m in length, and should be 150mm-200mm in width or wide enough to cover the first roll, whichever gives the
greater cover.
· Chase out brickwork mortar joints and push folds of flashing into chases; wedge in with small pieces of lead.
· Dress cover flashing as tightly as possible to tile profile.
· Repoint brickwork.
· In areas of high exposure, or when dressing lead over flat tiles, use clips to hold cover flashing in place; 75mm
when using this type of flashing with flat tiles below 25°, increase cover of flashing over tile to 200mm. Top edge abutment min
· All free edges of flashings should be clipped to suit the exposure. Lead clips are only
for use in very sheltered locations whereas all other clips should be of copper or · Turn roofing underlay a minimum of 50mm up at the abutment.
stainless steel. · Fix the top tiling batten as close as possible to the abutment.
· Complete tiling in the usual way.
· Chase abutment and insert lengths of code 4 lead, no more than 1.5m
long; wedge in with small pieces of lead or stainless steel lead flashing
clips, no less than 450mm apart.
· Lead should be wide enough to give at least 150mm cover to top
course of tiles, below 30°. Increase cover to. 290mm at 15 degrees
rafter pitch.
· Vertical upstand should be 75mm-100mm.
Clip
Lap length joint of flashing · Lap each length of lead by no less than 100mm.
should be calculated to suit the · Dress lead to the profile of the tiles.
·
roof pitch Secure lead flashings with copper or stainless steel clips, with
frequency dependent on exposure.
*
Cavity brick wall construction
shown as an example * The lap should be measured from the lowest fixing
of underlying material and be no less than 150mm or
Patination oil is recommended the table below, whichever is the greater
to reduce staining
Ensure flashings are fitted correctly

in relation to cavity trays Minimum lap of the flashing with the roof covering
Single stepped flashings

Pitch of roof Cover of lead flashing on roof (mm)
should be used in areas of
severe exposure
30° 150mm
Cavity tray
20° 220mm
15° 290mm
Note:
1. For pitches over 30°, a minimum lap of 150mm should be provided Drawings and guidance provided in
2. In areas of severe/very severe exposure the vertical upstand should increase to 100mm conjunction with Calder Lead (Calder
Industrial Materials Limited)
© MD©Insurance
Services Limited
Limited 2020 2020 306306 ROOFS
ROOFS
11.3.6
11.3.6 CONCRETE INTERLOCKING
CONCRETE INTERLOCKINGTILES: Lead
TILES: flashing
Lead continued
flashing continued
Side abutment secret gutter arrangement Secret gutter construction
A secret gutter may be formed as an alternative to a step and cover flashing when using single-lap flat interlocking tiles, profiled tiles are not
suitable for use in conjunction with a secret gutter.
· Form secret gutters before starting tiling.

· Fix a support between the last rafter and the abutment; this should be a minimum of 75mm wide and run the full length of the abutment.
· Fix a splayed timber fillet at the discharge point to raise lead lining to the right height; avoid backward falls.
· Fix a counter batten along the outer edge of rafter.
· Line gutter with Code 4 or 5 lead, in lengths of no more than 1.5m.
· Lap each strip offered over the lower one by a minimum of 150mm, and fix with copper nails at head.
· Turn up lead welts to provide a weather check and exclude birds and vermin from entering tile batten space.
· Gutter should be a minimum of 25mm deep and have a vertical upstand of no less than 65mm above the top surface of the tiles.
· Fit a stepped flashing, chased into brickwork and dressed over vertical upstand.
· Turn roofing the underlay up the side of the counter battens and butt the tiling battens up to the counter batten.
· Lay tiles to leave a gap of 15mm by the side of the abutment.
· All free edges of flashings should be clipped to suit the exposure. Lead clips are only for use in very sheltered locations whereas all other
clips should be of copper or stainless steel.
Typical detail for normal exposure (section)
65mm
15mm
max
A secret gutter is not recommended Increase splay for

for shallow pitches, areas of severe shallow pitches.
or very severe exposure, or areas
where surrounding vegetation may
cause risk of blockage e.g.
deciduous trees.
75mm
Drawings and guidance provided in

conjunction with Calder Lead (Calder
©©MD
MDInsurance
InsuranceServices
ServicesLimited
Limited2020
2020 307
307 ROOFS
ROOFS
11.3.7 CONCRETE
INTERLOCKING TILES:
TILES:Lead
Leadflashing
flashingcontinued
continued
Section through roof light (shown with Marley/Eternit roof light) Roof lights
Most roof lights are of the 'factory manufactured' variety which should have appropriate third party
approval. Most of these come with 'flashing kits' which should be installed in accordance with the
manufacturers instructions. If a flashing kit is not provided, the flashing should be installed following the
Lead Sheet Association good practice guide.
Box/Back gutters
Back gutters may be lead welded off-site and positioned when tiling is undertaken. A gutter should be
formed where the bottom edge of tiling meets an abutment. Form the gutter before tiling, but after felting
and battening is complete.
· Fix a lay board to support lead lining, with a tilting fillet, close to the abutment to flatten the pitch of
the lead.
· Dress a sheet of Code 5 lead (width of abutment plus 450mm) into position with a vertical upstand
of at least 100mm up the abutment.
· Dress the extra width of lead around the corner of the abutment after any side abutment
weathering has been fitted.
· Dress the upper edge of lead over the tilting fillet and turn it back to form a welt.
· Chase abutment, insert a cover flashing of Code 4 lead and dress it over the vertical upstand of the
gutter.
Roof protrusions
The flashings against chimney stacks, skylights and other similar projections through the roof surface
should be similar to that described for abutments where appropriate.
· Make perforations for pipes, chimney stays, supports for ladders etc. weather tight by dressing
over and under tiling with a lead or copper slate to which a sleeve is burned or soldered.
· Boss sleeve around pipe or stay, and seal at top with a collar.
Saddles
The following details can apply to any type of valley or hip /ridge intersection:
· Use Code 4 lead no less than 450mm square and large enough to give a lap of at least 150mm
over the gutter lining on each side.
· Saddles should be capable of being readily dressed down when in position.
Clips
Clips for flashings are important in all roofing applications and where used should be fixed at
300mm-500mm centres, depending on the exposure of the building.
Clips may be formed from the following materials:
· Lead: Only suitable for sheltered locations with a thickness the same as that of the flashing it is
fixing.
· Copper: Should be a minimum of 0.6mm thick, and may be thicker for very exposed locations.
· Stainless steel: Should be 22swg or 28swg thick, and is used for very exposed locations or where
the fixing point is more than 75mm from the free edge of the flashing.
· Nails and screws: Copper wire nails (with jagged shanks) should be a minimum 25mm long x 10
gauge. Stainless steel annular ring shank wire nails should be a minimum 25mm long x 12 gauge.
Screws should be brass or stainless steel, minimum 25mm long x 10 gauge.
© Insurance
Services Limited
Limited 20202020 308
308 ROOFS
ROOFS
11. 11.4
Plain Tiles
Roofs

11.4.1
11.4.1 PLAIN
PLAIN TILES:Tile
TILES: Tilefixings
fixings
Performance of tiles Tile fixings
Rain penetration of the roof covering is dependent on a combination of the rainfall rate, wind speed and the ability of the roof tile to
BS 5534 recommends the use of aluminium or stainless steel nails under normal conditions of exposure. Plain or galvanised nails
resist the ingress of snow and rain water. The Designer should therefore be aware of the various means by which rain and snow can,
may be used for fixing battens to rafters, but care must be exercised when there is high humidity as certain timber preservative
under certain conditions, penetrate the roof covering.
treatments may corrode steel, zinc or aluminium. For all roof areas and rafter pitches, every tile should be mechanically fixed.
These include:
Workmanship
· Raindrop bounce and negative pressure rain suction. Tile fixing should be in accordance with BS 8000-6 and the manufacturer's recommendations.
· Surcharging of rain water over laps on long-rafter roofs. Calculating the fixing specification
· Wind-driven snow.
The procedures for calculating the wind loads and determining the fixing specification for tiles in accordance with BS EN 1991-1-4 and
Roof pitch BS 5534 are complex to undertake. Designers are advised to obtain a full site specific fixing specification from the tile manufacturer.
When determining the pitch, head-lap and/or side-lap of a tile or slate, the roof pitch is taken to be equal to the rafter pitch. Hence, all
references to pitch refer to the rafter pitch, with the laid angle of the roof tile or slate always being less than roof pitch.
Tile details - key check points Eaves and bottom edge detail
The actual pitch of a tile should be determined in accordance with the following guidelines: Eaves and bottom edge (in accordance with BS 5534 and BS Headlap
8000-6). Margin
· Tile/slate to rafter pitch angles.
· Plain tiles: 7° less than rafter pitch. At the eaves (bottom edge), the batten should be set to
provide the required overhang of the tiles into the gutters.
If the design rafter pitch is less than the minimum recommended rafter pitch for the particular tile, then they can be considered as The recommended overhang is 45mm-55mm horizontally or
Overhang
having an aesthetic function only. In such cases, the true weatherproofing of the roof system must rely on a fully supported to the centre of the gutter, whichever is less.
waterproof membrane with an uninterrupted drainage path between counter battens to the eaves gutter.
· Ensure fascia board is to correct height so as to prevent
Wind tiles/slates kicking up or drooping. Gauge
· Fit duct trays to retain insulation.
· Fix underlay protector trays, fascia vents and comb
Design for wind loading
fillers (profiled tiles).
When considering the wind loading on the roof covering, designers should consult BS 5534. This provides calculation methods to Exposed materials should
· Clip eaves course where required.
assess the wind load on each tile as a uniformly distributed load, and also takes into account the porosity of the tiles and the be UV resistant e.g.
· Ensure vent path to roof space is achieved.
effectiveness of the substrate (boarding or sarking), and/or underlay shielding, when calculating wind uplift loads. The standard · Ensure exposed materials are UV resistant. underlay support tray
method in BS EN 1991-1-4 Eurocode 1. Actions on structures. General actions. Wind actions should be used to determine the basic
wind speed of the site, which is then used to calculate the effective wind speed and dynamic wind pressure on the roof by applying a
series of factors to account for terrain, topography, building height and length etc.
Nailing tiles to battens Tile nails
Nails for use with tiles should be of copper, aluminium,

stainless steel, phosphor or silicon bronze. Aluminium
Roof coverings (battens and tiling) Head lap of tiles should be in nails intended for use with tiles should conform to BS
accordance with the manufactures 1202-3 and should be clout head nails of 3.35mm or
specification and in conjunction 2.65mm diameter and of lengths that provide not less
with the roof pitch (and not less than 15mm penetrations into battens. The length of nail
Battens should be at least than 65mm) will be determined by the required wind uplift and the
1200mm in length design of the tile. Stainless steel nails for use with tiles
Tiles should be fixed in
Battens should be fixed on should conform to BS EN 10088-3:2005 and BS 5534
accordance with a site specific
every rafter, and be graded grade 304, 316, 321 or 347, and should be specified
roofing schedule, in accordance
and marked in accordance for coastal areas, areas of high exposure or where
with BS 5534
with BS 5534 there is a risk from chemical reaction.
On trussed rafter roofs for Roof covering to project

plain tiles, allow on more 45mm-55mm horizontally, or
than 3 joints on the same to the centre of the gutter, Tile clips Tile clips
support over twelve whichever is less
consecutive courses Tile clips may need to be utilized to achieve a subtitle
A double course (under number of fixings to comply with BS 5534 especially on
eaves and first course) of hips or valleys. Tile clips provide resistance to the
Proprietary cross tiles should be used at applied overturning moment more successfully than a
flow ventilator eaves nail fixing. The latter is closer to the pivot line, where
the nib touches the batten and cannot resist the uplift
Apply compressible Exposed materials should force at the tail.
insulation over wall to meet be UV resistant e.g.
roof insulation underlay support tray BS 5534 acknowledges that for nibbed tiles, where the
Eaves rafter pitch is below 60°, two nails should be used in
ventilation each tile in at least every fifth course. For rafter pitches
of 60° and above, including vertical, two nails should be
used in every tile.

ROOFS
11.4.2
11.4.2 PLAIN TILES:
PLAIN TILES: Verge
Vergeand
andridge requirements
ridge requirements
The ridge should overlap the top course of
tensile strength of mortar should not be taken into account as the mechanical fixings should provide the resistance. Tiles only bedded full length tiles by a minimum lap of 65 mm
on mortar are not acceptable.
Clamping plate
Note: Dry fix ridge and hip systems are available to provide full mechanical fixing of all ridge and hip tiles to meet BS 5534 Ridge should be
recommendations. to BS 8612 Ridge batten
strap
Battens should overlap onto the outer skin of the brickwork or the undercloak material; for plain tiles, the verge should project Underlay
38mm-50mm. Where the distance of the nearest batten fixing to the rafter is greater than 300mm, an additional mechanical fixing is
recommended. Batten
· Use recommended undercloak for mortar. Overlap ridge underlay by

· Level off irregularities in brickwork. a minimum 150mm
· Fix all perimeter tiles (clip and/or nail).
Ridge (in accordance with BS 5534, BS 8612: Dry-fixed ridge, hip and verge systems
Undercloak Verge detail for slating and tiling and BS 8000-6)
For plain tiles:
Where an undercloak is used it should · the verge overhang, Dry fix systems
comprise plain tiles, slates or fibre when unsupported, Proprietary dry roofing products and systems should be used as an alternative to just mortar bedding at verges, ridges, hips and valleys
cement sheet strip. It is usually fixed at should be not less than to provide weathering and mechanical resistance properties. Dry roofing products as fitted should not adversely affect the performance of
verges beneath the battens and on top 38mm and not greater the roof as laid.
of the underlay to support the mortar than 50mm
onto which the verge tiles or slates are · the verge should be Dry ridge systems should be manufactured and tested to meet BS 8612. The dry ridge system should be specified in accordance with BS
bedded, If batten ends are cut, treat with detailed with a 8612 and be suitable for the location and the wind loading (see 'Note 1' below).
a suitable preservative. A 100mm wide tile-and-a-half and a full
bed of mortar should be neatly laid on tile in alternate course Specifiers should seek evidence that this will not be the case, and should use dry roofing products only if such evidence is available.
the undercloak, this should be bedded
solidly and finished neatly. Note 1: Users should pay particular attention to the resistance to wind load and durability performance of dry roofing products.
100mm
The ridge or top course batten should be set to allow the ridge tiles, ridge units or metal ridge to overlap the top course of tiles by the
Verge detail (section) overlap necessary for the main tiles. For plain tiles, this should be not less than 65mm. For double-lap products, the top batten should be
set to allow the ridge to overlap the penultimate course by the required head-lap.

Mortar bed (min 100mm) on undercloak · Edge bed components onto tiles.
lapped under undercloak · All mortar bedded ridge tiles must also be mechanically fixed by proprietary fixings in accordance with the roof covering
manufacturer's recommendations.
Where the distance of the nearest batten fixing to
the rafter is greater than 300mm additional Note: Dry fix ridge systems are available to provide full mechanical fixing of all ridge and hip tiles to meet BS 5534 recommendations.
mechanical fixings are recommended
are required. Mortar should be to the recommendations in BS5 534 and typically consist of a cement and sand mix based
©©MD
MDInsurance
InsuranceServices
ServicesLimited
Limited2020
2020 311
311 ROOFS
ROOFS
11.4.3
11.4.3 PLAIN
PLAIN TILES:Verge
TILES: Valleyand
and hips
hips
fixed
· Mechanically fix all tiles adjacent to valleys.

recommendations.
Main underlay

Underlay


ROOFS
11.4.4 PLAIN TILES: Compartmentation and fire stopping
11.4.4 PLAIN TILES: Compartmentation and fire stopping
Fire-stop between
apartments.
following points:
Fire stopping
Cavity closed
Fire stopping should be provided in accordance with the relevant regional Building Regulations show the position of cavity barriers should be provided, and the specification of
recommendations.
Installation
protection.

At least Design information
covering 375mm The design details must show the correct level of fire resistance for the building, in
accordance with the Part B of the Building Regulations or Section 2 of the Scottish

Wall At least
375mm
recommendations.
Installation
Roof covering
Wall

313
313 ROOFS
ROOFS
11.4.5 PLAIN
11.4.5 PLAIN TILES:
TILES: Leadflashings
Lead flashings
Lead is generally ideal for roofing purposes; it is easily dressed over complicated shapes using simple hand tools, and can be joined by soldering or Single lap flashings
Fixings for
Lead sheet used for roofs, flashings and weathering's should, in terms of suitability to meet the Warranty requirements, be in accordance with BS EN pitches over 30°
12588 or hold a valid UKAS (or European equivalent) third-party accreditation (e.g. British Board of Agrément, BRE, etc.) that demonstrates
Flashings and weathering's

Underlap turned over tile
Side abutment (soakers and step flashings)
Soakers are used where double-lap plain tiles abut a wall.
· Turn underlay 50mm up the abutment and cut tiling battens 10mm-25mm short of the wall and fix securely.
· Lay tiles close to the abutment with a soaker fitted between each tile.
· Form Code 3 lead soakers with an upstand of 75mm to place against the abutment. They should be 175mm wide and 190mm long, allowing a
25mm downturn over the back of the tile. After all tiles and soakers have been fixed, insert a stepped flashing into the abutment wall and dress
down over the upturned edges of the soakers.
75mm
Vertical upstand should be Top edge abutment min
75mm to 100mm
· Fix the top tiling batten as close as possible to the abutment.
Lap length joint of flashing · Complete tiling in the usual way.
should be calculated to suit the · Chase abutment and insert lengths of code 4 lead, no more than 1.5m
roof pitch long; wedge in with small pieces of lead or stainless steel lead flashing
Cavity brick wall construction clips, no less than 450mm apart.
shown as an example · Lead should be wide enough to give at least 150mm cover to top
Patination oil is recommended rafter pitch.
to reduce staining · Vertical upstand should be 75mm-100mm.
Clip
· Lap each length of lead by no less than 100mm.
Ensure flashings are fitted correctly · Dress lead to the profile of the tiles.
·
in relation to cavity trays Secure lead flashings with copper or stainless steel clips, with
*
Single stepped flashings * The lap should be measured from the lowest fixing
should be used in areas of of underlying material and be no less than 150mm or
severe exposure the table below, whichever is the greater
Cavity tray
Minimum lap of the flashing with the roof covering
30° 150mm
20° 220mm
15° 290mm
Note:
1. For pitches over 30°, a minimum lap of 150mm should be provided
2. In areas of severe/very severe exposure the vertical upstand should increase to 100mm Drawings and guidance provided in
© MD©Insurance
Services Limited
ROOFS
11.4.6 PLAIN TILES: Lead flashing continued
11.4.6 PLAIN TILES: Lead flashing continued
Box/Back gutters
formed where the bottom edge of tiling meets an abutment. Form the gutter before tiling, but after
felting and battening is complete.
· Fix a lay board to support lead lining, with a tilting fillet, close to the abutment to flatten the pitch
of the lead.
· Dress a sheet of Code 5 lead (width of abutment plus 450mm) into position with a vertical
upstand of at least 100mm up the abutment.
· Chase abutment, insert a cover flashing of Code 4 lead and dress it over the vertical upstand of
the gutter.
Roof protrusions
Saddles
Clips
fixing.
· Stainless steel: Should be 22swg or 28swg thick, and is used for very exposed locations or
where the fixing point is more than 75mm from the free edge of the flashing.
gauge. Stainless steel annular ring shank wire nails should be a minimum 25mm long x 12
gauge. Screws should be brass or stainless steel, minimum 25mm long x 10 gauge.

315
315 ROOFS
ROOFS
11. 11.5
Slate
Roofs

11.5.1 SLATE:
11.5.1 SLATE:Tile
Tilefixings
fixings
Performance of slates Fibre-cement slates and fittings
Rain penetration of the roof covering is dependent on a combination of the rainfall rate, wind speed and the ability of the roof slates to resist the When tested in accordance with BS EN 492, fibre-cement slates and fittings should conform to the requirements for frost resistance specified in that standard.
ingress of snow and rain water. The Designer should therefore be aware of the various means by which rain and snow can, under certain conditions,
penetrate the roof covering. Workmanship
These include:
Tile fixing should be in accordance with BS 8000-6 and the manufacturer's recommendations.
· Raindrop bounce and negative pressure rain suction. Slate fixings
· Surcharging of rain water over laps on long-rafter roofs. BS 5534 recommends the use of aluminium or stainless steel nails under normal conditions of exposure. Plain or galvanised nails may be used for fixing
· Wind-driven snow. battens to rafters, but care must be exercised when there is high humidity as certain timber preservative treatments may corrode steel, zinc or aluminium. For
all roof areas and rafter pitches, every tile should be mechanically fixed.
Natural slates
Calculating the fixing specification
Natural slates must meet the following level of performance and durability as detailed in BS EN 12326:
The procedures for calculating the wind loads and determining the fixing specification for slates in accordance with BS EN 1991-1-4 and BS 5534 are complex
· Achieve a T1 code rating for 'Thermal cycle' test. to undertake. Designers are advised to obtain a full site specific fixing specification from the slate manufacturer.
· Achieve a S1 code rating for 'Carbonate content' test.
· A copy of the consignment documentation or "accompanying commercial document" (ACD) from the supplier/producer should be provided to
confirm these test performances.
Key check points Eaves and bottom edge detail
It is important that slates are graded on site to ensure an even finish. Headlap
Eaves and bottom edge (in accordance with BS 5534 and BS
8000-6).
Roof pitch Exposure
At the eaves (bottom edge), the batten should be set to provide the
When determining the pitch, head-lap and/or side-lap of slate, the roof pitch is taken to be equal to the rafter pitch. Hence, all references to pitch required overhang of the slates into the gutters.
refer to the rafter pitch, with the laid angle of the roof tile or slate always being less than roof pitch.
The recommended overhang is 45mm-55mm horizontally or to the
centre of the gutter, whichever is less. Overhang
The actual pitch of a slate or tile should be determined in accordance with the following guidelines:
· Slate to rafter pitch angles. · Ensure fascia board is to correct height so as to prevent
· Double-lap fibre cement slates: 1.25° less than rafter pitch. tiles/slates kicking up or drooping.
· Fit duct trays to retain insulation. Gauge
If the design rafter pitch is less than the minimum recommended rafter pitch for the particular slate, then they can be considered as having an · Fix underlay protector trays, fascia vents and comb fillers
aesthetic function only. In such cases, the true weatherproofing of the roof system must rely on a fully supported waterproof membrane with an (profiled tiles). The top edge of the slate should be
uninterrupted drainage path between counter battens to the eaves gutter. · Clip eaves course where required. Exposed materials should
supported on battens. Side and
· Ensure vent path to roof space is achieved. be UV resistant e.g.
headlaps should be calculated in
Wind · Ensure exposed materials are UV resistant. underlay support tray
accordance with BS 5534
Design for wind loading

When considering the wind loading on the roof covering, designers should consult BS 5534. This provides calculation methods to assess the wind Nailing slates to battens
load on each slate as a uniformly distributed load, and also takes into account the porosity of the slates and the effectiveness of the substrate
(boarding or sarking), and/or underlay shielding, when calculating wind uplift loads. The standard method in BS EN 1991-1-4 Eurocode 1. Actions on
Slate nails and rivets
structures. General actions. Wind actions should be used to determine the basic wind speed of the site, which is then used to calculate the effective
wind speed and dynamic wind pressure on the roof by applying a series of factors to account for terrain, topography, building height and length etc. Nails intended for use with fibre cement slates should be of copper, conforming to the
requirements for clout nails specified in BS 1202-2. The shank diameter and length should
Roof coverings (battens and tiling) be determined by the exposure of the site and the nail's withdrawal resistance. Normally,
30mm x 2.65mm copper nails are adequate for most applications. For exposed sites, or
Lap of tiles should be in accordance with the where aggressive environments are encountered, contact the slate manufacturer. Copper
manufactures specification and in conjunction disc 'tail' rivets are used to further secure the tail of fibre cement slates against wind
with the roof pitch chatter.
Battens should be at least
1200mm in length Tiles should be fixed in accordance with a
site specific roofing schedule, in accordance
Battens should be fixed on with BS 5534
every rafter, and be graded
and marked in accordance
with BS 5534 Slate hooks Slate hooks
Roof covering to
For trussed rafter roofs where the project 45mm-55mm Hooks are formed from stainless steel wire conforming to BS 1554 grade 316 S11 or 316
batten gauge is greater than horizontally, or to the S19. For further advice on the use of slate hooks, refer to BS 5534 section 4.12.3 and
200mm, batten joints should be centre of the gutter, 5.3.6.4 Hooks and rivets for slates. Slates should not be nailed to accommodate hooks.
staggered at a ratio of no more whichever is less
than one in four courses on the Hooks with crimped shanks reduce the capillary rise of water at the perpendicular joints
same support (In accordance between slates and are suitable for all roof pitches between 25° and 90°. Straight shank
with BS 8000-6) hooks should not be used at roof pitches below 30°. Hooks should not be used at roof
Proprietary cross flow pitches below 25°.
ventilator
Apply compressible Exposed materials should

insulation over wall to meet be UV resistant e.g.
roof insulation Eaves underlay support tray
ventilation
ROOFS
© MD
Services 20202020
Limited 317
317
ROOFS
11.5.2 SLATE:
11.5.2 SLATE: Verge
Verge andridge
and ridgerequirements
requirements
tensile strength of mortar should not be taken into account as the mechanical fixings should provide the resistance. Ridge tiles only
bedded on mortar are not acceptable.
Ridge should be Clamping plate
Note: Dry fix ridge and hip systems are available to provide full mechanical fixing of all ridge and hip tiles to meet BS 5534
recommendations. to BS 8612.
Ridge batten
strap
Battens should overlap onto the outer skin of the brickwork or the undercloak material; the verge should project to manufacturer's Underlay
specification. Where the distance of the nearest batten fixing to the rafter is greater than 300mm, an additional mechanical fixing is
recommended. Batten
· Use recommended undercloak for mortar.

· Level off irregularities in brickwork.
· Fix all perimeter slates (clip and/or nail).
· Natural slate verges should be formed with full slates and either slate-and-a-half or half slates that are a minimum of 150mm wide.
Ridge (in accordance with BS 5534, BS 8612: Dry-fixed ridge, hip and verge systems
Undercloak Verge detail for slating and tiling and BS 8000-6)
Note: the verge overhang,
Where an undercloak is used it should when unsupported, should be Dry fix systems
comprise plain tiles, slates or fibre
not less than 38mm and not Proprietary dry roofing products and systems should be used as an alternative to just mortar bedding at verges, ridges, hips and valleys
cement sheet strip. It is usually fixed at
verges beneath the battens and on top greater than 50mm to provide weathering and mechanical resistance properties. Dry roofing products as fitted should not adversely affect the performance of
of the underlay to support the mortar the roof as laid.
onto which the slates are bedded, If
batten ends are cut, treat with a suitable Dry ridge systems should be manufactured and tested to meet BS 8612. The dry ridge system should be specified in accordance with
preservative. A 100mm wide bed of fully BS 8612 and be suitable for the location and the wind loading (see 'Note 1' below).
compressed width should be neatly laid
on the undercloak, this should be Specifiers should seek evidence that this will not be the case, and should use dry roofing products only if such evidence is available.
bedded solidly and finished neatly.
Note 1: Users should pay particular attention to the resistance to wind load and durability performance of dry roofing products.
100mm
The ridge or top course batten should be set to allow the ridge tiles, ridge units or metal ridge to overlap the top course of slates by the
Verge detail (section)
overlap necessary for the main slates. For double-lap products, the top batten should be set to allow the ridge to overlap the penultimate
course by the required head-lap.
Mortar bed (min 100mm) on undercloak · Edge bed components onto slates.
lapped under undercloak · Use dentil slips in deep profiled tiles in all joints more than 25mm thick to reduce mortar and risk of shrinkage.
· All mortar bedded ridge tiles must also be mechanically fixed by proprietary fixings in accordance with the roof covering
Where the distance of the nearest batten fixing to manufacturer's recommendations.
the rafter is greater than 300mm additional
mechanical fixings are recommended Note: Dry fix ridge systems are available to provide full mechanical fixing of all ridge and hip tiles to meet BS 5534 recommendations.
are required. Mortar should be to the recommendations in BS 5534 and typically consist of a cement and sand mix based
© MD © MD Insurance
Insurance Services
Services Limited
ROOFS
11.5.3 SLATE: Valleys and hips
11.5.3 SLATE: Valleys and hips
fixed
· Mechanically fix all slates adjacent to valleys.

· Use dentil slips in deep profiled tiles in all joints more than 25mm thick to reduce mortar and risk of shrinkage.
recommendations.
Main underlay

Underlay


319
319 ROOFS
ROOFS
11.5.4
11.5.4 SLATE: Compartmentation
SLATE: Compartmentation and
andfire stopping
fire stopping
Fire-stop between
apartments.
following points:
Fire stopping
Cavity closed
Fire stopping should be provided in accordance with the relevant regional Building Regulations. show the position of cavity barriers should be provided, and the specification of
recommendations.
Installation
protection.

Design information
At least
covering The design details must show the correct level of fire resistance for the building, in
375mm accordance with the Part B of the Building Regulations or Section 2 of the Scottish

Wall At least
375mm
recommendations.
Installation
Roof covering
Wall
©©
MDMD Insurance
Insurance Services
Services Limited
Limited 2020
2020 320
320 ROOFS
ROOFS
11.5.5 SLATE: Lead flashings
11.5.5 SLATE: Lead flashings
Lead is generally ideal for roofing purposes; it is easily dressed over complicated shapes using simple hand tools, and can be joined by soldering or
Single lap flashings
Lead sheet used for roofs, flashings and weathering's should, in terms of suitability to meet the Warranty requirements, be in accordance with BS EN Fixings for
12588 or hold a valid UKAS (or European equivalent) third-party accreditation (e.g. British Board of Agrément, BRE, etc.) that demonstrates pitches over 30°
Flashings and weathering's

Underlap turned over slate
Side abutments
There are three common ways of weathering a side abutment with slate; stepped cover flashings, secret gutters and a combination of stepped cover
flashing above secret gutter.
Fibre cement and natural slates
Side abutment (step and cover flashing with soakers)
· Continue the underlay across the roof and turn up the wall by a minimum of 50mm. Cut the battens 10mm-25mm short of the wall, and fix
securely.
· Finish the slating with alternate courses of slates and slate-and-a-half slates, cut as necessary to maintain the bond.
· Code 3 lead soakers, with a minimum width of 175mm and length equal to gauge + lap +20mm, are to be interleaved with the slates and turned
75mm up the wall.
· The Code 4 stepped lead flashing should be secured in the brickwork bed joints with lead wedges and dressed neatly over the soakers.
75mm
Top edge abutment min

· Fix the top tiling batten as close as possible to the abutment.
· Complete tiling in the usual way.
· Chase abutment and insert lengths of code 4 lead, no more than 1.5m
long; wedge in with small pieces of lead or stainless steel lead flashing
Vertical upstand should be clips, no less than 450mm apart.
75mm to 100mm · Lead should be wide enough to give at least 150mm cover to top
rafter pitch.
Lap length joint of flashing · Vertical upstand should be 75mm to 100mm.
Clip
should be calculated to suit the · Lap each length of lead by no less than 100mm.
roof pitch · Dress lead to the profile of the tiles.
·
Cavity brick wall construction Secure lead flashings with copper or stainless steel clips, with
*
shown as an example
* The lap should be measured from the lowest fixing
Patination oil is recommended of underlying material and be no less than 150mm or
to reduce staining the table below, whichever is the greater
Ensure flashings are fitted correctly

in relation to cavity trays Minimum lap of the flashing with the roof covering
Single stepped flashings

should be used in areas of
severe exposure
30° 150mm
Cavity tray
20° 220mm
15° 290mm
Note:
1. For pitches over 30°, a minimum lap of 150mm should be provided
2. In areas of severe/very severe exposure the vertical upstand should increase to 100mm Drawings and guidance provided in

321
321 ROOFS
ROOFS
11.5.6
11.5.6 SLATE: Lead
SLATE: Lead flashing
flashingcontinued
continued
Side abutment secret gutter arrangement Secret gutter construction
A secret gutter may be formed as an alternative to a step and cover flashing when using slates, profiled tiles are not suitable for
use in conjunction with a secret gutter.
· Form secret gutters before starting tiling.

· Fix a support between the last rafter and the abutment; this should be a minimum of 75mm wide and run the full length of
the abutment.
· Fix a splayed timber fillet at the discharge point to raise lead lining to the right height; avoid backward falls.
· Fix a counter batten along the outer edge of rafter.
· Line gutter with Code 4 or 5 lead, in lengths of no more than 1.5m.
· Lap each strip offered over the lower one by a minimum of 150mm, and fix with copper nails at head.
· Turn up lead welts to provide a weather check and exclude birds and vermin from entering tile batten space.
· Gutter should be a minimum of 25mm deep and have a vertical upstand of no less than 65mm above the top surface of the
slates.
· Fit a stepped flashing, chased into brickwork as before and dressed over vertical upstand.
· Turn roofing the underlay up the side of the counter battens and butt the tiling battens up to the counter batten.
· Lay tiles to leave a gap of 15mm by the side of the abutment.
· All free edges of flashings should be clipped to suit the exposure. Lead clips are only for use in very sheltered locations
whereas all other clips should be of copper or stainless steel.
Typical detail for normal exposure (section)
65mm
15mm
max
A secret gutter is not recommended Increase splay for

for shallow pitches, areas of severe shallow pitches
or very severe exposure, or areas
where surrounding vegetation may
cause risk of blockage e.g.
deciduous trees
75mm
Drawings and guidance provided in

© MD
© MD Insurance
Insurance Services
Services Limited
Limited 2020
2020 322 ROOFS
ROOFS
11.5.7 SLATE: Lead flashing continued
11.5.7 SLATE: Lead flashing continued
Box/Back gutters
formed where the bottom edge of tiling meets an abutment. Form the gutter before tiling, but after
felting and battening is complete.
· Fix a lay board to support lead lining, with a tilting fillet, close to the abutment to flatten the pitch
of the lead.
· Dress a sheet of Code 5 lead (width of abutment plus 450mm) into position with a vertical
upstand of at least 100mm up the abutment.
· Chase abutment, insert a cover flashing of Code 4 lead and dress it over the vertical upstand of
the gutter.
Roof protrusions
Saddles
Clips
fixing.
· Stainless steel: Should be 22swg or 28swg thick, and is used for very exposed locations or
where the fixing point is more than 75mm from the free edge of the flashing.
gauge. Stainless steel annular ring shank wire nails should be a minimum 25mm long x 12
gauge. Screws should be brass or stainless steel, minimum 25mm long x 10 gauge.

323
323 ROOFS
ROOFS
11. 11.6
Flat Roofs
Roofs

11.6.1FLAT
11.6.1 FLAT ROOFS:
ROOFS: Generaldefinitions
General definitions and
and system
system types
typesfor
forflat
flatroofs
roofs
Definitions Warm deck roof Hybrid roof
For the purposes of this Technical Guidance, the following definitions shall The principal thermal insulation is placed immediately below the roof covering, Many roofs combine the features of two or more of the roof types previously
apply: resulting in the structural deck and support being at a temperature close to that of described. Examples include structural decks of high thermal resistance combined
the interior of the building. with additional insulation, and existing roofs to which thermal insulation is added.
Condensation: process whereby water is deposited from air containing water Once assessed in terms of their thermal and water vapour transmission
vapour when its temperature drops to or below dew point. The design should ensure that: characteristics, such roofs will generally fall into one of the categories described.
Filter layer: construction material (usually a geotextile) that substantially · The waterproof membrane has sufficient resistance to temperature to suit the In some constructions the waterproof membrane is placed between two layers of
reduces the transfer of mineral and organic material to the insulation in an conditions created by a substrate of insulation. insulation, combining the properties of warm roof and inverted warm roof
inverted warm deck roof. · The insulation has sufficient mechanical characteristics to resist loading. construction. This form of construction is generally known as a 'duo roof '.
· The AVCL is provided by the deck or by a membrane placed above the deck.
Flat roof: a roof having a pitch no greater than 10º to the horizontal. · The structural deck is maintained at a temperature above that which could There is an increased risk of interstitial condensation with a hybrid roofs and
cause condensation to occur at this level during service. therefore where these types of roof systems are used a full condensation risk
Insulation cricket: wedge of shallow-fall insulation material, designed to divert analysis should be carried out.
the flow of rainwater on a roof.
Waterproof Membrane
Cold deck roof
Interstitial condensation: condensation occurring within or between the
layers of the building envelope. Cold deck roofs are not recommended and an alternative form of flat roof should
Thermal Insulation be adopted.
Protection layer: construction material (usually a geotextile all rigid board) that
isolates another construction material from mechanical damage. The principal thermal insulation is placed at or immediately above the ceiling i.e.
below the structural deck, resulting in the waterproof membrane and structural
Separation layer: construction material (usually a geotextile) that separates Air Vapour Control Layer deck being substantially colder in winter than the interior of the building. The
two construction materials that are not chemically compatible. (if feasible) structural support will typically form a thermal bridge between the high and low
temperature zones of the construction. It is very difficult to insulate a cold roof
Structural deck: continuous layer of the construction (comprising concrete, system to current mandatory levels without introducing thermal bridges and/or
profiled metal or timber panel) supported by the building structure and which Structural deck
increasing the risk of interstitial condensation in the system. In addition, the
supports the roof system. mandatory requirement for uninterrupted external air circulation limits the
application of the system where abutting elevations or changes in building
Thermal bridge: part of a roof of lower thermal resistance than its surrounding geometry occur. Mushroom intermittent vents have proved not to be effective.
elements, which may result in localised cold surfaces on which condensation, Inverted warm deck roof Therefore, it is not recommended.
mould growth or staining may occur.
A variant of the warm deck roof in which the principal thermal insulation is placed
Air vapour control layer (AVCL): construction material (usually a membrane) above the waterproof membrane, resulting in the waterproof membrane,
that substantially reduces the movement of water vapour through the roof Waterproof membrane
structural deck and structural support being at a temperature close to that of the
system. interior of the building. Generally, the principal insulation is secured by separate
ballast (paving or stone). Supporting structure/deck
Water control membrane (WCM): construction material (usually a sheet
membrane) that substantially reduces the transfer of rain water to the insulation A filter membrane or WCM should be provided to control mineral and organic
in an inverted warm deck roof. Ventilation
material passing into and below the insulation joints. A WCM is recommended
because it will provide improved rain water run off, which may allow for a reduced
thickness of insulation and reduced loading of ballast. If a WCM is included, it is Breather membrane
essential that the drainage design facilitates the rapid transfer of rain water
across the product and to rain water outlets.
Thermal insulation
Ballast
Air Vapour Control Layer
(if feasible)
Filter layer or water control
membrane
Cold roof section 'under ventilation' (to/from external air. Minimum height of
void 50mm)
Thermal insulation
Refurbishments involving cold deck constructions
Waterproof membrane If an existing cold deck roof is refurbished, it is important to ensure that the
ventilation requirement is achieved, whether or not the level of insulation is to be
increased. It is also not feasible to introduce vapour control and insulation below
an existing structural deck of concrete, e.g. if during refurbishment, a cold deck
Structural deck roof is converted to a warm deck roof by placing insulation above the deck and
closing off the ventilation. It is necessary to provide at least as much thermal
resistance above the deck as was previously provided below the deck. A
condensation risk calculation should always be carried out in such circumstances
to ensure that the deck is above dew point during service.

ROOFS
11.6.211.6.2
FLATFLAT ROOFS:
ROOFS: Timber
Timber structures
structures
Limitations of this guidance Typical warm deck construction
The guidance on timber structures is limited to buildings of not more than three storeys above ground.
Falls can be created by firrings or tapered insulation.
Loading Surface treatment
Waterproof membrane
Roof structure and loading Insulation
The design of the roof structure must be in accordance with current regional Building Regulations. Air vapour control layer
Deck
The roof of the building shall be constructed so that the combined dead, imposed and wind loads are sustained and transmitted by it to the ground
safely, and without causing such deflection or deformation of any part of the building, or such movement of the ground, as to impair the stability of
any part of another building.
Joist and firring
The roof structure should be of such construction that it has adequate interconnection with the walls, allowing it to act as a horizontal diaphragm
capable of transferring the wind forces to buttressing elements of the building.
Plasterboard
If joists are spanning intermediate beams it is important that the joists are fixed to these beams and it is important that this is carried out in
accordance with the Structural Engineers specification.
Fixings for balustrades must be carefully designed to ensure appropriate fixings are robust and any penetration through waterproof roof coverings
Holding down straps
are sealed correctly in accordance with the waterproof covering manufacturer's recommendations. Such fixings should not be made through to a
wood substrate but to the masonry structure e.g. timber plates or packing pieces must not be used under the waterproof membrane to secure the Joists fixed to wall plate
balustrade too.
For advice on 'sizing of certain timber members in floors and roofs for dwellings', the Designer should refer to the following sources:
Straps should be a
minimum 30mm x 2.5mm
· Span tables for solid timber members in floors, ceilings and roofs (excluding trussed rafter roofs) for dwellings. Published by BM TRADA.
and 1m long
Note: Reference should be made to the version of the BM TRADA document current at the time of construction of the roof.
· BS 8103-3, Structure design of low rise buildings, Code of Practice for timber floors and roofs for dwellings.
· BS EN 1995-1: Eurocode 5 design of timber structures. General. Common rules and rules for buildings. Straps should be fixed
with a minimum of four
It is important that the deck have adequate provision to resist wind uplift, and that the deck is adequately anchored to the main structure. screws
Resistance to wind load The lowest fixing should

In all situations, including ballasted, green and inverted roofs, a calculation of wind load at each zone of the roof to BS EN 1991-1-4 should be be within 150mm of the
undertaken by a suitably competent person. bottom vertical strap

The need for a roof to withstand wind pressure and suction will be met if the proposed roof is braced effectively and secured to the structure, as
detailed below, with walls adequately restrained.
The securing of roofs to the supporting structure normally involves a timber wall plate or similar, which should be levelled using a spirit level so
that loadings from the roof are directed perpendicularly down the supporting wall.
The roof structure should be fixed in accordance with the design to resist the site specific wind loads.
Holding down straps should be
As a minimum, when roof timbers are being installed, the wall plate should be fixed to ensure correct positioning by means of galvanised mild steel spaced at a max of 2m centres
holding down straps (30mm x 5mm x 1000mm long at maximum 2m centres) nailed to the wall plate and securely fixed to the inner surface of the
wall with compatible fixings.
Alternative strap detail
Resistance to imposed loads
At the earliest possible stage, the employer should define the range of potential functions of the roof with regards loading with equipment, e.g. air
handling, renewable energy capture and the intensity and frequency of foot traffic. This should inform the selection of the deck, insulation, safety
guarding and protection. Strap with 30mm x 2.5mm cross
section and minimum 1000mm long
Structural timber
All structural timber used should be stress graded. All such timber must be stamped as either 'DRY' or 'KD' (Kiln Dry). The use of ungraded or
'green' timber is not acceptable.
Minimum 4 screw fixings per strap
Treatment of timber
Preservative treatment of roof timbers is normally unnecessary, except where specifically required under relevant standards and Codes of Practice
further information can be found in 'Appendix C - Materials, Products, and Building Systems'. The lowest fixing should be
maximum 150mm from the bottom of
Insulation of warm decks the strap
The insulation should be suitably specified taking into account the roof type, having regard to its load-bearing capacity and, where relevant, its
water absorption characteristics. Compressible materials cannot support imposed loads and their use in flat roofs is limited to cold flat roofs -
which are not recommended for Warranty projects. Warm roofs require the use of rigid insulation, and should be suitably specified to support the
any anticipated loads from trafficking across the roof. Insulation in an inverted roof should also have high resistance to water absorption,
freeze/thaw cycling and be shielded from UV light.
© MD Insurance Services Services

Limited 2020 326 ROOFS
© MD Insurance Limited 2020 326
ROOFS
11.6.3FLAT
11.6.3 ROOFS:
FLAT Timber
ROOFS: Timberstructures
structures
Structural deck Joist hanger bearing Joist hangers should be:
· In accordance with BS EN 845

General · The correct size for the timber joist or trimmer
At the earliest practical stage, the likely deflection of the deck should be confirmed, to ensure a minimum 1:80 as built fall is maintained. If the deck is intended to · Fixed in accordance with the design
receive mechanical fasteners for the attachment of roof system components such as insulation, or equipment such as fall-arrest line posts, its resistance to pull-out
should also be confirmed to enable design for resistance to wind load.
The firrings should be fixed prevent wind uplift. Firrings should be fixed in accordance with the following: Maximum 6mm gap between
joist and hanger
· Where the firrings run at 90 degrees to the flat roof joists, the firrings (min. 50mm deep) are deeper in section as they must span between the joists, therefore
due to their size they may be too deep to ensure a nail has adequate purchase. Therefore all firring pieces should be held in place by proprietary frame anchors,
secured to the joists/firring pieces, positioned at each intersection of a firring with a joist with each frame anchor being fully nailed up.
· Where firrings sit directly on top of the joists, these should be secured at 300mm centres, by 3.1mm x 90mm ring shank nails, with a minimum purchase of
40mm. Where firrings become too deep and the minimum purchase cannot be achieved, skew nailing should be adopted using two 3.1mm x 90mm ring shank
nails at 300mm centres.
Timber deck
Roofing grade OSB should be manufactured to BS EN 300 grade OSB/3 and be certificated by the British Board of Agrément. The minimum recommended thickness
is 18mm.
Plywood should be minimum 18mm thickness and certificated to conform to BS EN 1995-1-1 Eurocode 5. Design of timber structures, and to BS EN 636 Plywood,
specifications minimum service class 2 - humid conditions, or, where required, service class 3 - exterior conditions.
Pretreated timber planking, tongue and groove (close boarded timber) should have a minimum thickness of 19mm. Suitable floor boards and decking include:
· Pretreated tongue and grooved softwood boarding should have a minimum moisture content at the time of fixing of between 16%-20% and in accordance with
BS 8103. Minimum
· For boards of no more than 175 mm basic width, two nails should be used at each intersection. 35mm bearing
· For wider boards, a minimum of three nails should be used at each intersection.
Fixing of timber decks
Fixing nails should be at centres not exceeding 150 mm along any end or edge, and not exceeding 300 mm along any intermediate support.
Plywood
Fixing Plywood should be laid with the face grain perpendicular to the supports.
All end joints should occur over joists of at least 38 mm basic thickness or be supported by noggings. Fixing nails should be either:
· Plain wire nails at least 3.35 mm in diameter and at least 65 mm long, which penetrate at least 40 mm into the support; or Allowance for expansion at ridged abutments
· Annular-ringed shank nails at least 3.35 mm in diameter and at least 50 mm long, which penetrate at least 32 mm into the support.
OSB
All boards should be fastened firmly to the supporting timber. Flat headed annular-ringed shank nails and screws have superior holding power and should be used in OSB should be installed at the direction
preference to plain shank nails. indicated on the boards with the 10mm where OSB or For square edge
strongest direction perpendicular to the plywood abut a rigid boards, 3mm for OSB
All fixings should be a minimum of 50 mm or 2 times the thickness of the board, whichever is greater; and the diameter of the fixing should be a minimum of 0.16 joists upstand and plywood
times the thickness of the board.
Fastenings should be at least 8 mm from the edge of the board. Nail heads should be punched 2 mm to 3 mm below the surface of the board and screws should be A maximum movement gap of 3mm
pre-drilled and countersunk. In service class 2 fixings should be corrosion resistant. Corrosion resistant materials include galvanized or sheradized steel, austenitic should be provided for square edge
stainless steel, phosphor bronze and silicon bronze. boards
Composite panels (deck/vapour control/insulation) A minimum of 10mm movement gap

should be provided at the perimeter
The suitability of composite panels in providing a combined deck, AVCL and thermal insulation in a single component should be assessed with reference to the where the walls abut a ridged upstand
loading and hygrothermal conditions in the application. There is no relevant hEN or British Standard. Products suitable for roofing should have current certification by
one of the following: Boards should be supported by noggins
at the perimeter where they run at right OSB and Plywood tongue and grooved boards
· British Board of Agrément. angles to roof joists should be installed with the longest edge at right
· Another member of the UEAtc. angles to the joists and short edges supported on
· Another notified body. a joist or nogging
Note: MgO boards and cement particle boards are not suitable as a supporting deck. It may be used to clad an abutment or parapet but is not suitable for use with
mechanically fastened single ply membranes.

ROOFS
11.6.4FLAT
11.6.4 FLAT ROOFS:
ROOFS: Timber
Timber structures
structures
Strutting of joists with a span between 2.5m and 4.5m Strutting or bridging of solid timber roofs
1 row of strutting at Note: Strutting should not prevent Where the span of a flat roof joist is more than 2.5m, strutting is necessary. This should be provided either by timber
mid span cross ventilation in cold deck roofs bridging or strutting in accordance with Figure 3 of BS 8103-3: 2009 or by a proprietary system.
1
2 span Timber strutting can be in the form of solid bridging of at least 38mm basic thickness and with a depth equal to at least
Where the span of a roof joist is more
three-quarters of the depth of the joists; or it can consist of herringbone strutting with members of at least 38mm by 38mm
Support than 2.5m, strutting is necessary. This
basic size. Herringbone strutting should not be used where the distance between the joists is more than approximately
should be provided either by timber three times the depth of the joists.
bridging or strutting in accordance with
Joists Figure 3 of BS 8103-3: 2009 or by a Strutting should not prevent cross ventilation in cold deck roofs.
proprietary system
Typical trimming detail (plan)
Support (as calculated by Double joists should be bolted together at 600mm centres using
Strutting Structural Engineer) minimum 10mm diameter bolts with large washers that will prevent
the bolt head and nut from penetrating the joist. It is recommended
that the bolting of double joists is along the centre line of joists.
Suitably sized trimmer joists shall be provided around floor
Joist hanger
openings
Trimmed openings may be needed around staircase openings and

chimneys. Solid trimmed joists may be supported using either joist
hangers or a structurally designed connection; timber trimmers
around openings should consist of at least two members and be
2.5m - 4.5m designed by a Structural Engineer
span
Strutting of joists with a span over 4.5m 2 rows of strutting at one third
span positions
1 1 1
Support
Joists
Strutting
over 4.5m span
Where the span of a flat roof joist is more than 4.5m, two rows of strutting at 1/3rd the span position will be necessary.

2020 2020 328 328 ROOFS
ROOFS
11.6.5FLAT
11.6.5 FLAT ROOFS:
ROOFS: Concretestructures
Concrete structures
Typical deck construction (warm roof) Loading
Note: Permanent waterproofing should not be installed until the deck has fully dried. Statutory requirement
The design for loading should comply with the current Building Regulations.
Waterproof membrane Resistance to wind load

In all situations, including ballasted and inverted roofs, a calculation of wind load at each zone of the roof to BS EN
1991-1-4 should be undertaken by a suitably competent person.
Insulation
It is important that the deck have adequate provisions to resist wind uplift by either being of sufficient self weight or
adequately anchored to the main structure.
Air vapour control layer
Screed At the earliest possible stage, the designer should define the range of potential functions of the roof with regards
loading with equipment e.g. air handling, renewable energy capture and the intensity and frequency of foot traffic. This
should inform the selection of the deck, insulation, safety guarding and protection.
Structural deck
Concrete deck General

At the earliest practical stage, the likely deflection in the deck, and the tolerance in the level of its finish, should be
confirmed, because this informs the design for drainage. If the deck is intended to receive mechanical fasteners for the
attachment of roof system components such as insulation, or equipment such as fall-arrest line posts, its resistance to
Plasterboard pull-out should also be confirmed to enable design for resistance to wind load.
Concrete
Precast concrete construction should be designed in accordance with BS 8110. Information on span capability and the
installation requirements of precast panels can be obtained from manufacturers. Information on the location of required
movement joints should be obtained early in the design process as they have implications for drainage layout and
For in situ concrete decks it is important that: detailing. Precast panels installed to a fall can provide a simple layout but without cross falls.
· The form work is adequately and accurately constructed. In-situ concrete construction should be designed in accordance with BS 8110.Concrete decks should be laid to falls
· The mix should be one that has relatively low shrinkage characteristics. wherever possible, concrete maybe more difficult to lay to a fall, and it is common to create falls in the insulation (warm
· The slab should be adequately protected until cured. roofs only) or by using an additional screed. Information on compressive strength, resistance to point load and drying
periods of wet screeds can be obtained from suppliers and relevant trade associations.
Pre cast concrete decks should:
Where structural movement joints are required in large concrete decks, a clearly defined movement joint detail should
· Have a minimum of 90mm bearing unless justified by the design. be constructed to a design and with the materials that afford durability equivalent to that of the roof system.
· Be grouted in accordance with the design, and
· Allowance for movement should be provided at abutments. In precast panel decks the locations of any anticipated differential movement (e.g. at perimeter or abutment interfaces
or between adjacent panels that are subject to differential loading) must be identified in order that stress is not
transferred to the waterproof membrane.
Screeds
Screeds should be suitably specified for the anticipated loadings, further information can be found in 'Appendix C -
Materials, Products, and Building Systems'. Moisture from the construction can become trapped in a roof if the
waterproof layer is applied before a concrete slab or screed has had sufficient time to dry out. In situ concrete slabs
and cementitious screeds contain large volumes of water which, if not allowed to dry out, can prevent adhesion of the
waterproof layer. If bonding to the slab, it is advised that an adhesion test be carried out.
Insulation of warm decks
The insulation should be suitably specified taking into account the roof type, having regard to its load-bearing capacity
and, where relevant, its water absorption characteristics. Warm roofs require the use of rigid insulation, and should be
suitably specified to support the any anticipated loads from trafficking across the roof. Insulation in an inverted roof
should also have high resistance to water absorption, freeze/thaw cycling and be shielded from UV light.

ROOFS
11.6.6 FLAT
11.6.6 FLAT ROOFS:Profiled
ROOFS: Profiledmetal
metal structures
structures
Typical deck construction (warm roof) Structural deck
Falls can be created by firrings or tapered insulation General

At the earliest practical stage, the likely deflection in the deck, and the tolerance in the level of its finish, should be
Waterproof membrane confirmed, because this informs the design for drainage. If the deck is intended to receive mechanical fasteners for the
attachment of roof system components such as insulation, or equipment such as fall-arrest line posts, its resistance to
pull-out should also be confirmed to enable design for resistance to wind load.
Insulation
Profiled metal (steel or aluminium)
Profiled metal decks should have a crown width at least 50% of the profile width. To provide a sound base for the
Air vapour control layer
insulation and waterproofing system, and to avoid reduced drainage performance, the mid-span deflection of the metal
deck should not exceed 1/200 of the span under uniformly distributed design loads. When considering the deck profile
Metal deck and the necessity for side lap stitching and metal deck closures, reference should be made to the manufacturers of the
deck, insulation and waterproof membrane.
Plasterboard
Profiled metal decks: critical dimensions

Loading
Statutory requirement Deck sheet cover width

Profile width
Resistance to wind load Side lap stitching
In all situations, including ballasted and inverted roofs, a calculation of wind load at each zone of the roof
to BS EN 1991-1-4 should be undertaken by a suitably competent person. Crown width

At the earliest possible stage, the designer should define the range of potential functions of the roof with
regards loading with equipment e.g. air handling, renewable energy capture and the intensity and
frequency of foot traffic. This should inform the selection of the deck, insulation, safety guarding and
protection.
Insulation of warm decks The metal roof structure should be side stitched to ensure it performs as a Purlin
continuous plane layer (unless the manufacturer state otherwise).
The insulation should be suitably specified taking into account the roof type, having regard to its
load-bearing capacity and, where relevant, its water absorption characteristics. Warm roofs require the
use of rigid insulation, and should be suitably specified to support the any anticipated loads from trafficking Profiled metal decks should conform to the following standards:
across the roof. Insulation in an inverted roof should also have high resistance to water absorption,
freeze/thaw cycling and be shielded from UV light. · Galvanised steel: minimum recommended thickness 0.7mm to BS EN 10346 Fe E280G Z275. Typical gauge range 0.7mm-1.2mm.
· Plain aluminium: minimum recommended thickness 0.9mm to BS EN 485-2 AA3004 H34. Reference should also be made to BS EN 1396 as
appropriate.
It is important that the deck have adequate provisions to resist wind uplift by being adequately anchored to the main structure.
© MD©Insurance Services Limited 20202020 330 ROOFS

ROOFS
11.6.7FLAT
11.6.7 FLAT ROOFS:
ROOFS: Thermalperformance
Thermal performance and
and condensation
condensationcontrol
control
Thermal performance Installation of thermal insulation
Design for thermal performance must comply with current regional Building Regulations, as appropriate. The attachment of the thermal insulation should be designed to resist calculated wind load by a declared margin of safety. This includes
consideration of dead loads required in all roof zones in ballasted warm roofs and inverted warm roofs.
Thermal insulation
Except in tapered insulation schemes, thermal insulation should always be laid in a broken bond pattern. Where two or more layers are
The thermal insulation should be selected with regard to the following minimum criteria: laid, the joints in each layer should be offset. On substrates of profiled metal, the short dimension should be parallel to the deck crowns
and supported across half the crown width.
· Thermal resistance (and therefore thickness) to suit minimum clearances at details.
· Resistance to compression. Insulation should be lightly butted so as to avoid thermal bridging caused by gaps. If large gaps are created by damaged or undersized
· Compatibility with the AVCL and waterproof membrane. boards, any infill sections should be attached in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
· Compatibility with adhesives (if insulation is adhered).
· Contribution to the external fire performance of the system. Air vapour control layer (AVCL)
· Acoustic properties: resistance to external sound is not currently regulated. However, there may be a need to consider attenuation from
balconies (See the 'Balconies and Terraces' section for further information). The AVCL should be selected with regard to the following minimum criteria:
Note: The alternative of a separate acoustic attenuation layer should be considered where appropriate. · Ease with which it can be sealed at laps and at abutments to other elements.
· The method of attachment.
Thermal transmittance · Condensation risk, expressed as calculated vapour pressure based on notional conditions pertaining to the project building.
· Compatibility with the waterproof membrane and thermal insulation.
Design for thermal transmittance should take account of the effect of thermal bridging within the roof field and at interfaces between the roof system
and adjoining elements, such as parapet walls or abutments. The following is a minimum recommended specification. The actual specification will depend on the level of vapour resistance required,
based on calculation, and the type of deck.
In particular, allowance should be made for the effect of:
The attachment of the AVCL should be designed to resist calculated wind load by a declared margin of safety. All laps should be sealed
· Thermal bridging by metal fasteners used to secure insulation and/or membrane. Thermal break telescopic tube fasteners are recommended to and the AVCL should be sealed to the adjoining element, which forms the continuation of the resistance to air permeability. The AVCL
avoid this. should be extended behind all thermal insulation, including insulation placed on vertical surfaces such as parapet walls. Where the roof
· Thermal bridging due to drainage of rain water or snow-melt through insulation in inverted roofs. The use of WCMs beneath ballast to reduce system is penetrated by a detail such as a pipe or duct, a suitable method for providing continuous vapour control should be provided,
thermal bridging is recommended. and this method should be followed in practice.
· The locations of above average thermal transmittance at sumps, gutters or areas of minimum thickness of tapered insulation.
Where a reinforced bitumen membrane AVCL is used, its installation should be in accordance with BS 8217.
Manufacturers of thermal insulation and WCMs provide certification and calculations of the effects of thermal bridging by fasteners and drainage
respectively. Further advice is available in Building Research Establishment BR 262 Thermal insulation: avoiding risks. Minimum recommended specification for AVCL for warm deck roofs
Air permeability
Roof system type Deck type AVCL Attachment
Relevant contract drawings should define the position of the component - the air barrier - that determines resistance to air permeability. This may be (1) (2)
Reinforced bitumen Profiled S2P3 Partial bond by 3G or
achieved by an additional, purpose designed membrane or by an additional function of another component, such as the deck or waterproof membrane metal approved
membrane. proprietary alternative
Control of condensation Concrete S2P3 Fully bonded
Timber panel S2P3 Partial bond by 3G or

Any provision required to control interstitial condensation within the roof should be determined to the calculation method defined by BS 5250, but approved
with ambient conditions set in BS 6229. The calculated maximum accumulation of moisture within thermal insulation should not exceed 350g/m2 and proprietary alternative
there shall be no net accumulation in any annual cycle.
High density All 200μ Loose laid beneath
Minimum recommended resistance to compression of thermal insulation polyethylene mechanically fixed insulation
High density As per Proprietary Fully bonded to prepared

Roof system type Insulation type
(1, 2) Insulation code Minimum compression resistance
(3)
(KPa) polyethylene and certification substrate all
metal foil laminate as per manufacturer's
Warm deck roof Polyisocyanurate foam PIR 150 instructions
Expanded polystyrene EPS 150 Coated metal foil As per Proprietary Fully bonded to prepared
laminate - certification substrate all
Extruded polystyrene XPS 200 self-adhesive as per manufacturer's
instructions
Mineral wool MW 75
Notes:
Cellular glass CG N/A (1) Reinforced bitumen membranes: minimum recommended specification based on classification in BS 8747.
(2) S and P are classifications 1-5 of Strength (tensile strength and elongation) and resistance to puncture (static and dynamic); the
Inverted warm deck roof As per certification XPS 200 higher the rating, the higher the performance.
Notes:
(1) As defined in the appropriate European Product Specification
(2) Results for composite products should meet or exceed the minimum for each component when tested separately
(3) Results should be expressed at CS (10), i.e. at 10% compression when tested to BS EN 826

ROOFS
11.6.8 FLAT
11.6.8 FLATROOFS:
ROOFS:Flat
Flat roof
roof falls
falls and
anddrainage
drainagerequirements
requirements
Falls and drainage Creation of falls Box gutters
Statutory requirement Roof falls may either be created during the construction of the deck or alternatively by using
It is not generally necessary to provide separate box gutters where two planes of roofing intersect,
Design for drainage of the flat roof covering should comply with the current Regional Building tapered insulation systems.
or where a single plane falls to an abutment. In the latter case, there will be no fall between
Regulations. outlets, so consideration should be given to creating these in the structure or insulation. Box
The creation of falls in the deck should always be attempted because it has the following gutters are slow, difficult to construct and introduce unnecessary complexity. The need to
advantages: maintain a fall in gutters and comply with the energy requirements of the Building Regulations
British and industry standards
BS 6229 states that a minimum finished fall at any point of 1:80 (1.25%) should be achieved. may be difficult to achieve.
· There will be a consistent thermal environment across the roof.
Since adjoining roof planes at 1:80 will meet at a mitre of less than 1:80, the intended finished fall · The AVCL will also be to a fall.
at such intersections should be considered at an early stage. Drainage layout options
· If mechanical fasteners are to be used for the waterproof membrane, their length will be
constant, which facilitates planning and installation.
Design falls should take account of any potential deflection and construction tolerances. In the
absence of detailed calculations, this may necessitate design falls of twice the minimum finished
Cementitious screeds provide a stable substrate to mitred falls with minimal tolerances, and are
falls (1:40 or 2.5%). 1:80 finished 1:80 finished
recommended. Screeds should be in accordance with BS 8204. Lightweight screeds should be
Cut-to-falls systems are often produced to a 1:60 (1.7%) fall or 1:40 (2.5%) fall. However the use
overlaid with a 1:6 (cement to sand) screed topping of a minimum 10mm thickness. fall fall
of these systems does not remove the need to check that deck deflection and tolerance is Mitres should be
Tapered insulation schemes, suitable for warm deck roofs only, have the following advantages: a minimum 1:80
overcome and that a resulting fall in the waterproof membrane of a minimum of 1:80 is achieved.
Allowance for deflection is particularly important in designing inverted roofs where calculation of finished fall
· It is possible to create effective drainage layouts to complex plan areas.
dead loading should be based upon the ballast type and depth to be used.
· Mitred falls can be created easily to direct rain water to single points where outlets are to be
located.
The manufacturers of certain waterproofing products have certification for their use in 'completely
flat' or 'zero falls' applications. However, for the purposes of this standard, the design conditions of Where falls are created by tapered insulation, the design should ensure that the average U-value
BS 6229 shall be assumed to prevail in all warm, inverted, and cold deck roof systems, and a and maximum U-value at any point, required by SBEM or SAP calculation, is achieved. RWO RWO RWO
designed fall will be required including allowance for deflection of the deck from all anticipated
loads. Where the roof finish is to include paving on access routes, consideration should be given to the
height difference created by the falls and spacing of rain water outlets in order that the maximum
Consideration should also be given to:
height of paving supports is not exceeded or trip hazards created.
· The available upstand height at the high end of the falls. This may be a limiting factor on the 1:80 finished
length/size of the roof area to be drained. If necessary additional rainwater outlets should be Mitres should be fall
Drainage a minimum 1:80
provided.
· Avoidance of ponding behind wide obstructions to the drained slope such as plant plinths or finished fall
roof lights. Additional rainwater outlets and/or insulation crickets should be provided. Drainage design should be based upon calculations in accordance with BS EN 12056 Part 3 RWO
· Avoidance of gutters by designing with intersecting roof planes. given a design head of water (typically 30mm). Rainwater outlet capacity should be taken from
· Falls between rain water outlets along a perimeter. properly certificated information provided by manufacturers, and the resulting number and layout
of outlets should allow for obstruction and drag due to any additional surface finishes, such as
Since the primary function of the roof is to exclude water, it is important to consider how best to walkways.
separate gutter
direct this into the drainage system. RWO
· For flat roofs with parapets where internal drainage is provided, at least two outlets (or one to fall
Ponding on membrane roofs must be avoided because: outlet plus an emergency overflow) shall be provided for each roof area.
· Overflows or emergency outlets should be provided on flat roofs with parapets and in
· It encourages the deposit of dirt and leaves, which can be unsightly, may obstruct outlets non-eaves gutters in order to reduce the risk of over spilling of rainwater into a building or
structural overloading. Gutters must be a
and/or become a slip hazard.
· In the event of damage, the interior will suffer increased water ingress. · Outlets should be positioned so that the direction of flow is not changed sharply (e.g. through 1:80 finished minimum of 1:80
90° just before reaching it). as-built fall towards
· The load may cause progressive deflection of the deck. fall the drainage outlet
· Ice or algae may create a slip or wind hazard, particularly on walkways.
Rainwater outlets
Independent research has shown that roofs with extensive ponding require increased
maintenance input. The following should be confirmed by reference to the manufacturer's information or independent
certification, as appropriate:
Waterproof coverings of all types are tested for water absorption and water tightness as part of
RWO Box gutter RWO
third-party certification. However, the construction process, including the installation of · Capacity in litres per second at a range of typical water heads.
components and the forming of seams, is clearly facilitated in dry, well-drained conditions. · Compatibility with the waterproof membrane.
· Integral insulation to avoid condensation.
Note: Rainwater outlets and downpipes can constitute thermal bridges which may increase the · Method of attachment.
risk of localized condensation; an assessment might be required to determine whether insulated · Rainwater outlets for inverted roofs should be of the dual height type, designed to maximise Siphonic drainage
outlets are to be used. removal of rainwater at WCM level.
All waterproof membranes are compatible with siphonic roof drainage systems, which for larger
Overflows roofs offer many advantages:
Roofs which drain to a single internal outlet or combined outlets connected into a single · Very high capacity, enabling fewer outlets and therefore less detailing work on-site.
downpipe, should be provided with an overflow to drain and warn of outlet/downpipe blockage · Smaller bore horizontal collector pipe work, enabling reduced roof void depth.
and so avoid the risk of flooding. The capacity of the overflow should be not less than that of the · Self-cleaning in many situations.
outlet or combined outlets and its discharge should be visible but directed away from the building.
Over flows should be positioned as close to the outlets as possible to avoid rainwater build up on Note: Siphonic drainage is generally not appropriate for inverted roofs.
roofs.
For further information see www.siphonic-roof-drainage.co.uk
These roof proposal are to be considered on a case by case basis and full design and
calculations should be submitted for Warranty approval before construction begins on site.
© MD
© MD Insurance
Insurance Services
Services Limited
Limited 20202020 332
332 ROOFS
ROOFS
11.6.9 FLAT
11.6.9 FLATROOFS:
ROOFS: Waterproof
Waterproof membrane
membranerequirements
requirements
Materials - Requirement If restraint relies upon adhesive alone, the membrane manufacturer shall provide evidence of Liquid applied membranes
satisfactory testing for resistance to wind load using a method defined by the Single Ply Roofing
Compatibility of components Association. There is no harmonised European Product Specification for liquid applied membranes for roofing.
The selection of components within the roofing system should be discussed in detail with the The European Technical Approval Guideline ETAG 005 Part 1 - General gives overall guidance
membrane manufacturer or appropriate trade association to ensure chemical and mechanical If the remainder of the roof system is to be bonded, it is essential that the design resistance to on assessment of fitness for use, including methods of verification and attestation of conformity.
compatibility between components, since the incorrect specification may lead to reduced wind load is also achieved for the attachment of these components. The remaining seven parts, known as the Complementary Parts or the ETA Parts, deal with
performance or premature failure of the roofing system. The correct choice of insulation is also specific requirements for particular families of products, and are therefore generic types covered
important when it is to be adhered to the substrate. In case of doubt, the insulation manufacturer Irrespective of the wind uplift considerations or distribution requirements for securing the
primarily by this Guidance Note, shown as follows:
or relevant trade association should be consulted. membrane, the fixing of the insulation boards should always be considered separately, unless
specifically sanctioned by the membrane manufacturer. The number and distribution of · Part 2: Polymer modified bitumen emulsions and solutions.
mechanical fasteners required to fix the insulation boards may vary with the insulation type, · Part 3: Glass reinforced resilient unsaturated polyester resins.
General geographical location of the building, topographical data and the height of the roof concerned.
Materials for use in flat roofing systems are suitable only if the manufacturer has declared · Part 4: Flexible unsaturated polyesters.
compliance with the relevant harmonised European Assessment Document (ETA, previously a · Part 5: Hot applied polymer modified bitumen.
The upper termination of the single ply membrane at linear details such as plinths, parapets, · Part 6: Polyurethanes.
European Assessment Guideline, ETAG) and has affixed the CE Mark to the product. All abutments and door openings should be secured by one of the following mechanical means:
waterproof membrane products shall also have a certificate of fitness for purpose issued by a · Part 7: Bitumen emulsions and solutions.
member of the European Union of Agrément (UEAtc). This may comprise a British Board of · Part 8: Water dispersible polymers.
· Clamping beneath a metal rail, e.g. a parapet capping or roof light frame.
Agrément certificate or an equivalent certificate of another UEAtc member. · Welding to a membrane-metal laminate trim (itself mechanically fixed). The manufacturer of a product for use in flat roofing should declare compliance with the relevant
· Mechanical fixing using individual fasteners or a mechanically fixed termination bar. parts of ETAG 005. In the absence of this declaration, the product should have a current
Requirement
certificate of fitness for purpose issued by one of the following:
The waterproof membrane should be selected with regard to the following minimum criteria: The welding of single ply membranes is a critical process. The following should be considered:
· · British Board of Agrément.

Anticipated service life based on independent certification. · Supply of certification for each installer indicating successful completion of the · Another member of the UEAtc.
· Minimum maintenance. manufacturer's product specific training.
· · Another notified body.
Ease of adaptation and repair. · Provision of consistent electrical power supply.
· Production and retention of test weld samples at the start of each day. Such certification should be accompanied by full instructions for installation.
External fire performance · Declared procedures for repair of weak welds or damage.
Installation of Liquid Applied Membranes
All roof coverings within close proximity of buildings must achieve the fire designation required by Warm roof systems with polymeric single ply membranes
the relevant Building Regulations.
There is no British Standard for the installation of liquid-applied membranes. Installation should
Where the insulation is mechanically fixed, the number and arrangement of fasteners required to be in accordance with the Liquid Roofing and Waterproofing Association guidance, as follows:
Statutory requirement resist wind load will be prescribed by the manufacturer, applying a safety factor of two to the
Design for external fire performance must comply with current Building Regulations. design load on each fastener. This arrangement may vary across the roof according to wind load, · Guidance Note No. 2 - Substrates for liquid applied waterproofing.
but should be followed in all areas. Thermal break fasteners shall be used wherever feasible. · Guidance Note No. 4 - Roof, Balcony and Walkway Refurbishment Using Liquid applied
Certification of system Waterproofing Systems.
The manufacturer of the waterproof membrane must demonstrate by reference to independent Where the insulation is adhered, the adhesive should be approved by the insulation · Guidance Note No. 5 - Health and Safety Provision for LAWS on Roofs, Balconies and
test certification that the system of waterproofing and insulation (type and thickness) for a manufacturer and should be laid at the coverage rate and pattern designed to achieve calculated Walkways.
particular project meets or exceeds the minimum level of fire performance defined by the Building wind load with a safety of factor of two times (200%). The contractor should allow for temporary · Guidance Note No. 6 - Safe Use of Liquid applied Waterproofing Systems.
Regulations. loading as required to achieve a suitable adhesion and to achieve the best possible level in the · A consistent film thickness is essential for reliable and durable liquid-applied membranes.
upper surface of the insulation.
Polymeric single ply membranes The following should be considered:
Methods of restraint of a single-ply membrane at perimeters
The manufacturer should declare compliance with the harmonised European Product · Supply of a card for each installer indicating successful completion of the manufacturer's
Specification for single ply membranes, BS EN 13956, which defines requirements for testing product-specific training.
and declaration of characteristic values.
· The coverage rate in kg/m2 must be declared before work starts.
There is no relevant British Standard. Products suitable for roofing should have current · During installation assessment of wet film thickness by one of the following methods as
Perimeter
certification by one of the following: appropriate:
restraint · gauge pin.
· British Board of Agrément. · 'comb' type measurer.
Single-ply
· Another member of the UEAtc. · visual inspection.
membrane
· Another notified body.
Thermal
Such certification should be accompanied by full instructions for installation. insulation
There is no British Standard for the installation of single ply membranes. Installation should be in
accordance with the Single Ply Roofing Association's Design Guide to Single Ply Roofing and Air vapour
with the specific instructions of the membrane manufacturer. control layer
The attachment of the single ply membrane should be designed to resist calculated wind load by
a declared safety factor of two times (200%). This design will normally be provided by the
membrane manufacturer.
Whatever the means of attachment, specific restraint is always required at the roof perimeter, at
changes of slope and around details. This ensures that any tension in the membrane in the roof
field or upstand is not transferred to the other as a peeling action.
Perimeter restraint is achieved by several methods, depending upon the manufacturer:
· Individual fasteners, protected by a flashing.

· A linear bar, protected by a flashing.
· Welding the field sheet to a membrane-coated metal trim secured to the deck (with thermal
break fasteners where appropriate).

ROOFS
11.6.10 FLAT
11.6.10 FLATROOFS:
ROOFS: Waterproof
Waterproof membrane
membranerequirements continued
Mastic asphalt Minimum recommended specification for reinforced bitumen membranes Site-applied hot-melt coverings
There is no harmonised European Product Specification for mastic asphalt for roofing. Products There is no harmonised European Product Specification for site-applied hot-melt waterproofing
Roof system Deck type Insulation Venting Underlayer Cap
used for flat roofing should comply with BS 6925: 1988 Specification for mastic asphalt for systems.
type(1) layer(2) (3)
buildings and civil engineering (limestone aggregate).
type sheet(4)
Products suitable for roofing should have current certification by one of the following:
Proprietary grades of polymer modified mastic asphalt are produced for roofing and paving
Warm deck Profiled Thermoplastic 3G S2P3(5) S4P4(5)
metal foam
applications. There is no British Standard or European Standard for these products. · British Board of Agrément.
Mineral fibre - S2P3 S4P5 · Another member of the UEAtc.
Products suitable for roofing should have current certification by one of the following: · Another notified body.
Concrete Thermoplastic - S2P3 S4P4
· British Board of Agrément. foam As these systems comprise a multi-layer application (usually a base coat, reinforcement and top
· Another member of the UEAtc. coat), a detailed specification for the system should be available prior to commencement of the
Mineral fibre - S2P3 S4P4
· Another notified body. works to enable its suitability for the project to be confirmed.
Timber panel Thermoplastic 3G S2P3 S4P5
The separating membrane should be one of the following, and should be laid directly under the foam Site-applied hot melt coverings
mastic asphalt:
Mineral fibre - S2P3 S4P4 There is no British Standard for the application of proprietary hot melt waterproof membrane
· Sheathing felt, comprising a base of flax or jute, or other suitable fibres, impregnated with systems. Reference should be made to independent certification and the manufacturer's detailed
bitumen. Inverted warm Profiled Extruded 3G S2P3 S4P5
instructions.
· Glass fibre tissue. deck metal Polystyrene
(XPS)
Concrete - S2P3 S4P5 Fixing of guarding/balustrades
Bitumen-coated plain expanded metal lathing should be in accordance with BS EN 13658-2.
Timber panel Deck type not suitable for inverted roofs Fixings for balustrades must be carefully designed to ensure appropriate fixings are robust and
Stone chippings (bedded) for use as a protective topping should be washed, crushed rock, any penetration through waterproof roof coverings is sealed correctly in accordance with the
normally 10mm-14mm nominal size aggregate, bedded in a proprietary gritting solution over the Notes:
waterproof covering manufacturer's recommendations.
mastic asphalt membrane. (1) Insulation type: Thermoplastic foam: PIR, EPS, PF. Mineral fibre: MW
(2) Venting layer: BS 8747 3G or proprietary equivalent with suitable certification
Warm roof systems with mastic asphalt waterproofing (3) Under layer: as defined in BS 8747. SBS-modified products are recommended
(4) Cap sheet: as defined in BS 8747. SBS-modified products are recommended
Generally, mastic asphalt on sheathing felt provides sufficient dead load to resist wind load, but (5) S and P are classifications 1-5 of Strength (tensile strength and elongation) and resistance
this should be demonstrated by calculations in all situations. to puncture (static and dynamic); the higher the rating, the higher the performance
Installation of mastic asphalt Bitumen membranes should be protected from solar radiation. This should be by integral
protection provided in the product in the form of:
The number of coats should be appropriate to the waterproofing requirements and traffic
conditions of the roof. When laid to falls of 1:80 or more, mastic asphalt roofing is laid in two · Mineral granules.
coats to a thickness of 20mm, on a separating membrane of sheathing felt, all in accordance with · Metal foil.
BS 8218.
The use of solar reflective paint is not permitted. The use of stone chippings is not recommended
On sloping and vertical surfaces over 10° pitch, the mastic asphalt should be laid in three coats unless required to achieve enhanced external fire performance. If used, chippings should be
to a thickness of 20mm without a separating membrane. washed, crushed rock, normally 10mm-14mm nominal size aggregate, bedded in a proprietary
gritting solution.
On sloping and vertical surfaces of timber or lightweight concrete, the mastic asphalt should be
laid in three coats to a thickness of 20mm on expanded metal lathing over a separating
Warm roof systems with reinforced bitumen membrane waterproofing
membrane of sheathing felt.
Reinforced bitumen membranes The limiting wind load for the different methods of attachment of insulation is prescribed by BS
8217 as follows:
The manufacturer should declare compliance with the harmonised European Product
Specification for reinforced bitumen membranes, BS EN 13707, which defines requirements for · Partial bitumen bond: up to 2.4kN/m2.
testing and declaration of characteristic values. There is no relevant British Standard. · Full bitumen bond: up to 3.6kN/m2.
Products suitable for roofing should have current certification by one of the following: Where the method of attachment is outside the scope of BS 8217, the manufacturer should
demonstrate that the method provides sufficient resistance to wind load.
· British Board of Agrément.
· Another member of the UEAtc.
· Another notified body. Reinforced bitumen membranes installation
In addition, specifications for systems of multi-layer reinforced bitumen membranes for flat Installation should be in accordance with BS 8217. In case of doubt, or where the waterproof
roofing should comply with BS 8747. membrane is beyond the scope of the Standard, the advice of the Flat Roofing Alliance (National
Federation of Roofing Contractors) should prevail.
The safe use of gas torches, and the positioning, monitoring and transferring hot bitumen to the
work face, should be adopted, all in accordance with the Health and Safety Executive/Flat
Roofing Alliance Code of Practice for Safe Handling of Bitumen.
The practice of applying reinforced bitumen membranes by torching onto thermoplastic foam
insulation is not permitted, unless the boards are manufactured with a covering of reinforced
bitumen membrane.
© MD
© MD Insurance
Insurance Services
Services Limited
Limited 2020
2020 334
334 ROOFS
ROOFS
11.6.11FLAT
11.6.11 FLAT ROOFS:Abutment
ROOFS: Abutment details
details
Detailing
Upstand to decking and paving finishes - e.g where access is required
General principles
At an early stage in the design process, an audit of roof geometry should be carried out to establish what types of details will
be required and whether they are to be weather proof (incorporating an upstand/cover flashing arrangement) or waterproof
(providing continuous waterproofing across the detail). Protect upstand of waterproof
membrane
The following key principles should be followed in design of all details:
· Upstands to extend 150mm above the finished roof level.

· Downstands (of separate metal or other flashings) should lap the upstand by a minimum 75mm. AVCL should extend fully up
· Construction should achieve independence between different elements and trades. behind insulation
· Thermal and fire performance should be maintained across the detail.
· A continuous barrier to air leakage should be maintained.
· Reliance on sealant as the sole means of protection should be avoided. Minimum 10mm gap between
decking boards or paving
The total roof zone depth should be assessed at critical points, such as the top of drainage slopes, to ensure that there is
enough free upstand available to create the minimum required 150mm of waterproofing protection above finished roof level.
It is important that this minimum 150mm upstand is maintained at all points around the waterproofed area, except at
min Waterproof membrane
continuous water checks and verges.
150mm
Designers should carefully consider the risks of any departure from this criterion. In the event of this being unavoidable, a
written justification should be provided.
Special design features are essential, depending upon the generic type of waterproof membrane, including:
· Minimum clearances to enable the waterproof membrane to be installed.

· Termination of the waterproof membrane at interfaces to other elements.
· Penetrations.
· Supports.
Example of warm deck roof at an abutment
Cavity tray drains externally

over flashing
Air vapour control layer Timber frame construction where a lower level construction meets a
brick outer leaf wall to roof abutment timber frame
Waterproof membrane
Where a timber frame structure abuts a
min 75mm masonry structure allowance should be made to
Insulation accommodate movement in the timber frame
and ensure the appropriate cover is maintained.
min
150mm Structural deck For detailing with parapet wall construction, see
the 'External Wall' section.
Allow for movement

and maintain a
minimum 75mm
cover
Insulation fully wrapped around by air vapour control layer waterproof membrane
Notes:
· A fillet is required at the base of the upstand for certain types of waterproof membrane.
· Vertical insulation may not be required.
· AVCL, waterproof membrane, or both may form the air seal to the abutting wall.
· The principles for a parapet wall are similar but the cavity tray may be detailed differently.
· Discharging the cavity tray in the course above the corner flashing (a) avoids it being damaged during the roofing works
and (b) allows for increase in insulation depth at refurbishment.
© Insurance
Services Limited
Limited 20202020 335
335 ROOFS
ROOFS
11.6.12FLAT
11.6.12 FLAT ROOFS:Penetrations
ROOFS: Penetrations in
in flat
flat roofs
roofs and
andabutments
abutmentswith
withpitched roofs
pitched roofs
Penetration through roof system Principles: Flat roof interface to pitched roof
Air seal
Support for renewable energy capture equipment Waterproof membrane.
Insulation.
Additional insulation min Renewable energy capture equipment includes photovoltaic
collar 75mm panels and multi-panel arrays, solar thermal panels and Drip detail varies with type
multi-panel arrays and wind turbines. All such equipment of waterproof membrane.
should be secured to a frame and/or posts that transfer their
Waterproof Lead flashing.
load directly to the structure. The roof system and waterproof
membrane min
Insulation membrane should be designed to enable equipment to be
150mm de-mounted without loss of the roof's waterproofing integrity
and without the involvement of the roofing specialist. Support
systems based on 'top-fixed' plate and post components
should be accompanied by documentation to demonstrate
their compatibility with the waterproof membrane.
Notes:
· An effective seal is required between the air vapour control layer and pipe. Clearly it is difficult to dress a
sheet material around a pipe. The method for doing so should be stated in the contract drawings and/or
specification. Edge protection
If guarding to the perimeter of flat roofs should be

Special design features designed to provide the simplest means of achieving
waterproofing integrity, given that installation of
Special design features are essential, depending upon the generic type of waterproof membrane, including: balustrade or stanchions may occur after the
installation of the roof system.
· Termination of the waterproof membrane at interfaces to other elements. If the design requires a collar of waterproof membrane
· Penetrations. at the stanchion, the stanchion should be of circular
· Supports. section at this point and should incorporate a
weathering apron.
Mechanical and electrical services
min
Fall-arrest and edge protection equipment
Detailed design should take account of the installation of such equipment by other (usually following) trades, 150mm
as follows:
The following should be confirmed by reference to the
manufacturer's information or independent certification,
· Service entry/exit points should be suitably weathered to enable connection without loss of integrity of the
as appropriate:
waterproof membrane and without the involvement of the roofing specialist.
· The upstand of the waterproof membrane at risers should be arranged to enable a separate downstand or
· Compliance with BS EN 795
weathering flashing to be formed in ductwork.
· Method of attachment
· Cladding to insulation placed around ductwork should not be sealed to the waterproof membrane.
· Compatibility with the waterproof membrane
· Sufficient clearance should be provided to horizontal ductwork to ensure it does not rest upon the
· Means of forming a water tight seal to the
waterproof membrane or roof finish.
waterproof membrane
© MD©Insurance
Services Limited
Limited 20202020 336
336 ROOFS
ROOFS
11.6.13FLAT
11.6.13 FLAT ROOFS:Approved
ROOFS: Approved installers
installers and
andtesting
testingrequirements
requirements
Testing Methods of test
Final inspection Low voltage earth leakage

At practical completion of the flat roof, all areas should be clear of stored material, other site operations and all protection. A thorough, Low voltage earth leakage is a safe and effective method for the testing of waterproofing integrity in roofs where the waterproof
recorded, visual inspection of all areas, including details, should be carried out with representation from the General Contractor and membrane is an electrical insulator and the deck provides an electrical earth. It is not suitable for testing flat roofs where the waterproof
Roofing Contractor in attendance. membrane has been overlaid with insulation and ballast (inverted roofs) or ballast only (ballasted warm roofs); therefore, testing should
be carried out prior to completion of the roofing system.
Parameters for testing
Upon completion testing of the flat roof covering will be required to be carried out as per the following criteria. High voltage electrical discharge
The high voltage electrical discharge method is best suited to the testing of continuous thin films, such as liquid-applied coatings. Its use
Testing of flat roofs and balconies (All types of materials) is not recommended with polymeric single ply, reinforced bitumen membranes and mastic asphalt.
Testing is required in the following situations:
Vacuum
1. On large developments: Apartments etc. over 3 stories in height (including the ground storey), where the total combined Vacuum testing of seams of membranes manufactured off-site is an effective means of quality assessment, but is not recommended as
roof/balcony areas exceeds 50m2. In this case, a minimum of 20% of the roof areas must be tested. a method of demonstrating the integrity of flat roofs.
2. On Low rise housing: Detached/semi-detached/terraced housing 3 stories or less in height (including the ground storey) when:
· The roof roof/balcony areas exceed 50m2. Flood testing
· Where the project consists of 10 or more properties: one test per ten houses (with a minimum of two tests per site) are Flood testing is not recommended as a method of demonstrating the integrity of flat roofs. It may be used to test balconies.
required.
Approved Installers
In addition to above, in all cases: Testing may be required in the following situations where the complexity of a roof and its ancillary
components presents a higher risk. It will be necessary to identify this at the initial site assessment carried out between the Developer Where a roof falls into the criteria below, an approved contractor who is recognised by the manufacture as competent to install the
and the Warranty Surveyor. manufacturer's roof membrane system will need to be used. Evidence of the manufacturer's approval of the contractor to install their
products should be provided to the Warranty Surveyor.
Design:
A flat roof membrane manufacturer's approved installer must be used for all flat roof coverings in the following situation:
1. If the roof includes features beyond a typical wall abutment e.g. (but not limited to); variations of upstand
constructions/penetrations/fixings/external permanent machinery/balustrading fittings etc. · On large developments over 3 stories in height (including ground storey) where the total combined roof/balcony area exceeds 50m2.
2. If the waterproof membrane is to be covered over (by pedestrian finishes or solar panels). Note: Inverted roofs of straightforward · Low-rise housing less than 3 stories in height where the roof/balcony area exceeds 50m2.
design and with continuous hot-applied waterproof membrane could be exempted. · Where the roof includes features beyond a typical wall abutment e.g. (but not limited to) variations of upstand
constructions/penetrations/fixings /external permanent machinery/balustrade fittings etc.
Construction: · Where the waterproof membrane is to be covered over by pedestrian finishes, balustrades/fall protection devices or solar panels.
· Where EDPM roof coverings are proposed.
3. If there are to be/have been, follow on trades on the roof after completion of the roof covering.
4. If secondary items such as fall protection devices, PV supports, balustrades etc. are to be attached. Provision of information
Where EPDM roof coverings are proposed, no testing is required if : Operation and maintenance manual
The following information is required.
1. The EPDM product must has a valid third party product approval certificate.
2. The EPDM covering is installed by one of the manufacturer's approved contractors. Specification, as-built:
3. And the maximum size of roof is limited to 100m2.
4. Where the roof area exceeds 100m2, the proposal must be referred to SPRA for consultation. · Waterproof membrane: generic type, product(s) and (as appropriate) thickness.
· Thermal insulation: generic type, product(s) and thickness.
Procurement of testing services · Acoustic insulation: generic type, product and (as appropriate) thickness.
· Vapour control layer: generic type, product (as appropriate) and thickness (as appropriate).
If testing to demonstrate waterproofing integrity is required it should be undertaken by a suitably qualified and experienced third-party · Rain water outlets: type, product and capacity.
who is independent of the roofing contractor. · Procedure for maintenance of waterproof membrane, including (where appropriate) recommended frequency and method of
application of solar reflective finish.
The testing service provider should provide evidence of the following: · Procedure for repair of waterproof membrane.
· Efficacy of the method proposed in the circumstances of the project.

· Experience and training of operator.
· Membership of an appropriate trade association that sets a Code of Conduct for the service.
© Insurance
Services Limited
Limited 20202020 337
337 ROOFS
ROOFS
11.6.14 FLAT
11.6.14 FLATROOFS:
ROOFS: Ancillary
Ancillary components
components
Where provision for access is required to flat roofs Ancillary components
Statutory requirement Non-access areas: stone ballast

Design for access should comply with current Building Regulations. Stone ballast for inverted warm deck roofs and ballasted warm deck roofs should be clean, rounded aggregate graded 20mm-40mm and
as free from fines as practicable. Ballast should be applied over a protection layer on warm ballasted systems and over a filter layer or
Edge protection WCM on inverted warm roofs.
In the absence of suitable parapet walls, permanent edge protection should be provided along roof level pedestrian routes to equipment
that requires regular access for servicing. Access areas: concrete paving slabs
Concrete paving slabs for use as walkways or as paving on terrace decks should conform to BS EN 1340, and be laid in accordance
Protection of roof system with the manufacturer's instructions.
At the earliest possible stage, the anticipated loading of the roof by plant and access during service use should be assessed in terms of:
Access areas: flexible walkway tiles
· Load e.g. foot traffic, equipment. Evidence of the compatibility of the tile with the waterproof membrane is required.
· Frequency.
· Risk of impact. Lightning protection
The following should be confirmed by reference to the manufacturer's information or independent certification, as appropriate:
The design should include protection to suit the anticipated conditions as appropriate:
· Design in compliance with BS EN 62305.
· Slip-resistant walkway material. · Method of attachment to the waterproof membrane, including arrangements for self-ballasting of conductors and finials (centres,
· Polymeric single ply membranes; compatible sheets or tiles welded to the membrane. compressive loads).
· Load-spreading materials. · Recommended detailing at penetration of roof system.
· All waterproof membrane types; paving on paving supports or protection layer.
· Polymeric single ply and reinforced bitumen membranes: galvanised steel sheet with additional covering with slip-resistant finish.
Installation
Protection of the roof

Temporary protection (during construction)
Responsibility for temporary protection and a method statement for its use should be agreed prior to commencement of works. Suitable
materials should be selected in consultation with membrane manufacturers as appropriate, for example:
· Linked recycled thermoplastic sheets.

· Rolled recycled thermoplastic or elastomeric sheets.
Particular consideration should be given to locations of concentrated access, such as step-out areas onto the roof or where wheeled
equipment may be used.
A clear plan of type, location, sequencing and removal of temporary protection should be available before the roof system installation
starts.
Permanent protection (during service)

Permanent protection should not be laid on routes where access is most likely, and should not be laid on routes where temporary
ponding is likely e.g. near parapet walls in the absence of cross falls between rain water outlets.
It is recommended that concrete paving is laid on support pads, as this allows adjustment, thus reducing the risk of a trip hazard:
· The height of support pads should not exceed the maximum recommended by the manufacturer.
· Paving should not be cut. If cutting (part-slabs) is unavoidable to match plan geometry then an alternative means of support may be
required.
· Paving should be firmly butted up against support pad separating pegs.
Further guidance on the suitably of finishes for temporary access can be found in the 'Balconies and Terraces' section.
© MD
© MD Insurance
Insurance Services
Services Limited
Limited 2020
2020 338
338 ROOFS
ROOFS
11. 11.7
Green Roofs
Roofs

11.7.1 GREEN ROOFS: General definitions and system types
11.7.1
11.7.1
11.7.1 GREEN
GREEN
GREENROOFS:
ROOFS:
ROOFS:General
General
Generaldefinitions
definitions
definitionsand
and
andsystem
system
systemtypes
types
types
Scope
Scope
Scope Drainage
Drainage
Drainage layer/reservoir
layer/reservoir
layer/reservoir board:
board:
board: available
available
available ininain
avariety
variety
a variety
ofofmaterials,
of
materials,
materials, including
including
including hard
hard hardplastic,
plastic,
plastic, polystyrene,
polystyrene,
polystyrene, Design
Design
Design
and
and
and
system
system
system
types
types
types
foam,
foam,
foam, coarse
coarse
coarse gravel
gravel
gravel and
and andcrushed
crushed
crushed recycled
recycled
recycled brick,
brick,
brick, depending
depending
depending ononthe
onthe
the
design
design
design Functional
Functional
Functional Requirements.
Requirements.
Requirements.
This
This
This
guidance
guidance
guidance
should
should
should
beberead
beread
read
ininconjunction
in
conjunction
conjunction
with
with
with
the
the
the
'Roofs
'Roofs
'Roofs
- Flat
- Flat
- Flat
Roofs'
Roofs'
Roofs'
section
section
section
ofofthis
of
this
this
Technical
Technical
Technical This
ThisThisallows
allows
allows excess
excess
excess water
water
water totodrain
to
drain
drain
away,
away,
away, thereby
thereby
thereby preventing
preventing
preventing the
the thewaterlogging
waterlogging
waterlogging ofofthe
of
the
the
substrate.
substrate.
substrate. Some
SomeSome AAgreen
A
green
greenroof
roofroof
essentially
essentially
essentially
comprises
comprises
comprises
ananorganic
an
organic
organic
vegetation
vegetation
vegetation
layer
layer
layer
and
and
and
those
those
those
components
components
components
necessary
necessary
necessarytoto to
Manual.
Manual.
Manual. drainage
drainage
drainage layers
layers
layers also
alsoalso
incorporate
incorporate
incorporate water
water
water storage
storage
storage cells
cellscells
totoretain
to
retain
retainadditional
additional
additional water
water
water that
that that
can
can can
bebediffused
be
diffused
diffused
toto to support
support
support
itsitsgrowth,
its
growth,
growth,
which
which
which
isisplaced
is
placed
placed
over
over
over
a amembrane
membrane
a membrane
roof
roof
roof
system.
system.
system.
For
For
For
convenience,
convenience,
convenience,
green
green
green
roofs
roofs
roofs
areare
are
the
the the
plant
plant
plant support
support
support layer
layer
layer during
during
during prolonged
prolonged
prolonged dry
dry dryperiods.
periods.
periods. divided
divided
divided
into
intointo
the
the
the
following
following
following
types:
types:
types:
This
This
This
guidance
guidance
guidanceprovides
provides
providesspecific
specific
specific
advice
advice
advice
and
and
and
requirements
requirements
requirements ininrespect
in
respect
respect
ofofmembrane
of
membrane
membrane roof
roof
roof
systems
systems
systems
over
over
over
which
which
which
a afinish
finish
a finish
ofofliving
of
living
living
vegetation
vegetation
vegetation
orormaterials
or
materials
materials
that
that
that
will
will
will
support
support
supportvegetation
vegetation
vegetation
isistois
tobe
to
beapplied.
be
applied.
applied. Extensive
Extensive
Extensive green
green
green roof:
roof:roof:
a alightweight,
lightweight,
a lightweight,low
low lowmaintenance
maintenance
maintenance roof
roofroofsystem,
system,
system, typically
typically
typically with
with with
succulents
succulents
succulents ororother
or
other
other ·· · Biodiverse
Biodiverse
Biodiverse
roof.
roof.
roof.
hardy
hardy
hardy plant
plant
plant species
species
species (often
(often
(often sedum)
sedum)
sedum) planted
planted
planted into
into into
a ashallow
shallow
a shallowsubstrate
substrate
substrate (typically
(typically
(typically less
less lessthan
thanthan
100
100100
mm)
mm)mm) that
thatthat
isis is ·· · Brown
Brown
Brown
roof.
roof.
roof.
The
The
The
membrane
membrane
membrane
roof
roof
roof
systems
systems
systems
may
may
may
comprise
comprise
comprise
one
one
one
ofofthe
of
the
the
following;
following;
following; low
low low
ininnutrients.
in
nutrients.
nutrients.
Irrigation
Irrigation
Irrigation isisnot
is
not
not
normally
normally
normally required.
required.
required. ·· · Extensive
Extensive
Extensive
green
green
green
roof.
roof.
roof.
·· · Semi-intensive
Semi-intensive
Semi-intensive green
green
green
roof.
roof.
roof.
Warm
Warm
Warm
deck
deck
deck
comprising
comprising
comprising
of:of:of: Filter
Filter
Filter fleece/fines
fleece/fines
fleece/fines layer:
layer:
layer: geotextile
geotextile
geotextile ofoflow
of
lowlowresistance
resistance
resistance totowater
to
water
waterpenetration,
penetration,
penetration, which
which
which prevents
prevents
prevents fines
finesfines
and
andand ·· · Intensive
Intensive
Intensive
green
green
green
roof.
roof.
roof.
sediments
sediments
sediments from
fromfrom
being
being
being washed
washed
washed out
out out
ofofthe
of
thethegreen
green
green roof
roofroof
into
into into
the
the the
drainage
drainage
drainage system.
system.
system.
·· · Waterproof
Waterproof
Waterproof
membrane.
membrane.
membrane. The
TheThe
roof
roof
roof
system
system
system may
may
may
bebeof
be
ofwarm
of
warm
warm
deck,
deck,
deck,
inverted
inverted
inverted
warm
warm
warm
configuration.
configuration.
configuration.
Cold
Cold
Cold
deck
deck
deck
roofs
roofs
roofs
are
are
are
not
not
not
suitable
suitable
suitable
·· · Principal
Principal
Principal
thermal
thermal
thermal
insulation.
insulation.
insulation. FFL:
FFL:
FFL: Forschungsgesellschaft
Forschungsgesellschaft
Forschungsgesellschaft Landschaftsentwicklung
Landschaftsentwicklung
Landschaftsentwicklung Landschaftbau
Landschaftbau
Landschaftbau (German
(German
(German Landscape
Landscape
Landscape Research,
Research,
Research, for
forWarranty.
for
Warranty.
Warranty.
Generally,
Generally,
Generally,
thethe
the
warm
warm
warm
deck
deck
deck
configuration
configuration
configuration
isisrecommended
is
recommended
recommended unless
unless
unless
there
there
there
are
areare
specific
specific
specific
design
design
design
·· · Vapour
Vapour
Vapour
control
control
control
layer.
layer.
layer. Development
Development
Development and
andand
Construction
Construction
Construction Society).
Society).
Society). circumstances
circumstances
circumstances for
forwhich
for
which
which
inverted
inverted
inverted
roofs
roofs
roofs
are
areare
better
better
better
suited.
suited.
suited.
AAtechnical
A
technical
technical
justification
justification
justification
for
forany
for
any
any
departure
departure
departure
from
from
from
·· · Continuously
Continuously
Continuously
supporting
supporting
supporting
deck
deck
deck
(structural
(structural
(structural
deck).
deck).
deck). warm
warm
warmdeck
deck
deck
will
willwill
beberequired.
be
required.
required.
Green
Green
Green roof:
roof:roof:
a aroof
roof
a roof
orordeck
or
deck
deckonto
ontoontowhich
whichwhich
vegetation
vegetation
vegetation isisintentionally
is
intentionally
intentionallygrown
growngrown
ororhabitats
or
habitats
habitats
forwildlife
for for
wildlife
wildlife
are
are are
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
warm
warm
warm
deck
deck
deck
roof
roof
roof
systems:
systems:
systems: established,
established,
established, including
including
including extensive,
extensive,
extensive, intensive
intensive
intensive and
and and
semi-intensive
semi-intensive
semi-intensive roofs,
roofs,
roofs, roof
roofroofgardens,
gardens,
gardens, biodiverse
biodiverse
biodiverse roofs,
roofs,
roofs,
brown
brown
brown roofs
roofsroofs
and
and andpublic
public
public andand
and
private
private
private amenity
amenity
amenity spaces.
spaces.
spaces.
·· · Ballast.
Ballast.
Ballast. Extensive
Extensive
Extensive
green
green
green
roof
roof
roof
- -warm
warm
- warm
roof
roof
roof
system
system
system
(section)
(section)
(section)
·· · Water
Water
Water
control
control
control
membrane.
membrane.
membrane. Green
Green
Green roof
roof
roof system:
system:
system: the
the the
component
component
component layers
layers
layers ofofaof
agreen
green
a greenroof
roofroof
build-up.
build-up.
build-up.
·· · Principal
Principal
Principal
thermal
thermal
thermal
insulation.
insulation.
insulation.
·· · Waterproof
Waterproof
Waterproof
membrane.
membrane.
membrane. Growing
Growing
Growing medium/substrate:
medium/substrate:
medium/substrate: ananengineered
an
engineered
engineered soil
soil soil
replacement
replacement
replacement that
that that
contains
contains
contains a aspecified
specified
a specified ratio
ratio
ratio ofoforganic
of
organic
organic
Continuously
Continuously
supporting
supporting
supporting
deck.
deck.
deck. and
andand inorganic
inorganic
inorganic material,
material,
material, specifically
specifically
specifically designed
designed
designed totoprovide
to
provide
providegreen
greengreenroof
roofroofplants
plants
plants with
withwiththe
the the
air,
air, air,
water
waterwaterand
and and Growing
Growing
Growing
medium
medium
medium
nutrient
nutrient
nutrient levels
levels
levels they
theythey
need
need
need totosurvive,
to
survive,
survive,
whilst
whilst
whilst facilitating
facilitating
facilitating the
the therelease
release
release ofofexcess
of
excess
excesswater.
water.
water.
Cold
Cold
Cold
deck
deck
deck
roof
roof
roof
systems
systems
systems
(not
(not
(not
acceptable
acceptable
acceptable
for
forWarranty):
for
Warranty):
Warranty):
GRO:
GRO:
GRO: Green
Green
Green Roof
Roof
Roof Organisation,
Organisation,
Organisation, the
the theindustry
industry
industry forum
forum
forum forgreen
for for
green
greenroof
roofroof
development
development
development and
and and
promotion
promotion
promotion ininthe
in
the
the
Filter
Filter
Filter
layer
layer
layer
·· · Waterproof
Waterproof
Waterproofmembrane.
membrane.
membrane. UK.
UK.
UK.
Continuously
Continuously
supporting
supporting
supporting
deck.
deck.
deck.
·· · Ventilation
Ventilation
Ventilation
externally.
externally.
externally. Hydro
Hydro
Hydro seeding:
seeding:
seeding: spraying
spraying
spraying a aspecially
specially
a specially
designed
designed
designed blend
blend
blend ofofseeds
of
seeds
seeds
and
andand
growing
growing
growing medium.
medium.
medium. Drainage/reservoir
Drainage/reservoir
Drainage/reservoir
layer
layer
layer
·· · Principal
Principal
Principal
thermal
thermal
thermal
insulation.
insulation.
insulation.
·· · Air
Airvapour
Air
vapour
vapour
control
control
control
layer.
layer.
layer. Inspection
Inspection
Inspection chamber:
chamber:
chamber: a achamber
chamber
a chamber situated
situated
situated over
overover
ananinternal
an
internal
internalrain
rainrain
water
water
water outlet
outlet
outlet designed
designed
designed totoconstrain
to
constrain
constrainthe
the the
Waterproof
Waterproof
Waterproof
membrane
membrane
membrane
surrounding
surrounding
surrounding landscaping
landscaping
landscaping but
but but
allowing
allowing
allowing easy
easyeasy access
access
access forformaintenance.
for
maintenance.
maintenance. Allows
Allows
Allows water
water
water entry
entry
entry but
but but
helps
helps
helps
prevent
prevent
prevent unwanted
unwanted
unwanted silt,
silt, silt,
debris
debris
debris ororvegetation
or
vegetation
vegetation from
fromfrom entering
entering
entering and
and andobstructing
obstructing
obstructing free
free free
drainage.
drainage.
drainage.
Definitions
Definitions
Definitions
Intensive
Intensive
Intensive green
green
green roof:
roof:roof:
a aversion
version
a version
ofofaof
agreen
green
a greenroof
roofroof
often
often
often referred
referred
referred totoas
to
asaas
aroof
roof
a roofgarden
garden
garden that
that that
provides
provides
provides Thermal
Thermal
Thermal
insulation
insulation
insulation
For
ForFor
the
the
the
purposes
purposes
purposes
ofofthis
of
this
this
Technical
Technical
Technical
Guidance,
Guidance,
Guidance,
the
the
the
following
following
following
definitions
definitions
definitions
shall
shall
shall
apply:
apply:
apply:
benefits
benefits
benefits akin
akinakin
totoato
asmall
small
a small urban
urban
urban park
parkpark
orordomestic
or
domestic
domesticgarden.
garden.
garden. Designed
Designed
Designed primarily
primarily
primarily forrecreational
for for
recreational
recreationaluse,
use,
use,
intensive
intensive
intensive roofs
roofs
roofs are
are aretypically
typically
typically configured
configured
configured with
withwith
200mm+
200mm+
200mm+ ofofsubstrate,
of
substrate,
substrate, and
and andoften
often
often require
require
require regular
regular
regular
Condensation:
Condensation:
Condensation:
process
process
process whereby
whereby
whereby
water
water
water
isisdeposited
is
deposited
deposited
from
from
from
airaircontaining
air
containing
containing
water
water
water
vapour
vapour
vapour
when
when
when
itsitsits
maintenance
maintenance
maintenance and
and and irrigation.
irrigation.
irrigation.
temperature
temperature
temperature
drops
drops
drops
totoorto
orbelow
or
below
below
dew
dew
dew
point.
point.
point. Air
Airvapour
Air
vapour
vapour
control
control
control
layer
layer
layer
Moisture/protection
Moisture/protection
Moisture/protection layer:
layer:
layer: geotextile
geotextile
geotextile blanket,
blanket,
blanket, available
available
available ininvarying
in
varying
varying thicknesses
thicknesses
thicknesses (typically
(typically
(typically between
between
between
Filter
Filter
Filter
layer:
layer:
layer:
construction
construction
construction
material
material
material
(usually
(usually
(usually
a ageotextile)
geotextile)
a geotextile)
that
that
that
substantially
substantially
substantially
reduces
reduces
reduces
the
the
the
transfer
transfer
transfer
ofof of
2mm-12mm),
2mm-12mm),
2mm-12mm), which
which
which performs
performs
performs a adual
dual
a dualfunction.
function.
function. Firstly,
Firstly,
Firstly, protecting
protecting
protecting the
the thewaterproof
waterproof
waterproof membrane
membrane
membrane during
during
during the
the the
mineral
mineral
mineral
and
and
and
organic
organic
organic
material
material
material
totothe
to
the
the
insulation
insulation
insulation
ininan
in
aninverted
an
inverted
inverted
warm
warm
warm
deck
deck
deck
roof.
roof.
roof.
installation
installation
installation ofofthe
of
the
the
green
green
green roof
roofroof
system,
system,
system, and
and andsecondly,
secondly,
secondly, increasing
increasing
increasing the
the thewater
water
water holding
holding
holding capacity
capacity
capacity ofofthe
of
the
the
green
green
green Structural
Structural
Structural
deck
deck
deck
roof
roofroof
system.
system.
system.
Flat
Flat
Flat
roof:
roof:
roof:
a aroof
roof
a roof
having
having
having
a apitch
pitch
a pitch
nonogreater
no
greater
greater
than
than
than
10º
10ºtotothe
10º to
the
the
horizontal.
horizontal.
horizontal.
Root
RootRootbarrier:
barrier:
barrier: a awaterproof
waterproof
a waterproofmembrane
membrane
membrane designed
designed
designed totoprevent
to
prevent
preventroots
roots rootsfrom
fromfrompenetrating
penetrating
penetrating the
the the
waterproofing
waterproofing
waterproofing
Insulation
Insulation
Insulation
cricket:
cricket:
cricket:
wedge
wedge
wedge
ofofshallow-fall
of
shallow-fall
shallow-fall
insulation
insulation
insulation
material,
material,
material,
designed
designed
designed
totodivert
to
divert
divert
the
the
the
flow
flow
flow
ofofrainwater
of
rainwater
rainwater
ononon
layer
layer
layer and
and and
building
building
building fabric.
fabric.
fabric. This
ThisThis
function
function
function may
may may
bebeincorporated
be
incorporated
incorporated
ininain
asingle
single
a single
membrane
membrane
membrane waterproofing
waterproofing
waterproofing
a aroof.
roof.
a roof.
product.
product.
product. Intensive
Intensive
Intensive
green
green
green
roof
roof
roof
- -inverted
inverted
- inverted
warm
warm
warm
roof
roof
roof
system
system
system
(section)
(section)
(section)
Interstitial
Interstitial
Interstitial
condensation:
condensation:
condensation:
condensation
condensation
condensation
occurring
occurring
occurring
within
within
within
ororbetween
or
between
between
the
the
the
layers
layers
layers
ofofthe
of
the
the
building
building
building
Sedum:
Sedum:
Sedum: genus
genus
genus ofofabout
of
about
about400
400 400
species
species
species ofoflow-growing,
of
low-growing,
low-growing,
leafy
leafy
leafy succulents
succulents
succulents that
that that
are
are are
wind,
wind,
wind, frost
frostfrost
and
andanddrought
drought
drought
envelope.
envelope.
envelope.
tolerant
tolerant
tolerant and
and andfound
found
found throughout
throughout
throughout the
the the
northern
northern
northern hemisphere.
hemisphere.
hemisphere. Not
Not Not
allallspecies
all
species
speciesare
are are
suitable
suitable
suitable forroofs.
for for
roofs.
roofs.
Protection
Protection
Protection
layer:
layer:
layer:
construction
construction
construction
material
material
material
(usually
(usually
(usually
a ageotextile
geotextile
a geotextile
allallrigid
all
rigid
rigid
board)
board)
board)
that
that
that
isolates
isolates
isolates
another
another
another Growing
Growing
Growing
medium
medium
medium
Semi-intensive
Semi-intensive
Semi-intensive green
green
green roof:
roof:
roof: intermediate
intermediate
intermediate green
green
green roof
roof roof
type
type typewith
with with
characteristics
characteristics
characteristics ofofboth
of
both
both extensive
extensive
extensive and
andand
construction
construction
construction
material
material
material
from
from
from
mechanical
mechanical
mechanical
damage.
damage.
damage.
intensive
intensive
intensive green
green
green roofs.
roofs.
roofs. Typically
Typically
Typically with
withwith
a a100mm-200mm
100mm-200mm
a 100mm-200mm substrate
substrate
substrate depth,
depth,
depth, sometimes
sometimes
sometimes irrigated,
irrigated,
irrigated,
occasionally
occasionally
occasionally managed
managed
managed and
andandusually
usually
usually planted
planted
planted with
withwith
a arange
range
a range
ofofspecies.
of
species.
species.
Separation
Separation
Separation
layer:
layer:
layer:
construction
construction
construction
material
material
material
(usually
(usually
(usually
a ageotextile)
geotextile)
a geotextile)
that
that
that
separates
separates
separates
two
two
two
construction
construction
construction
materials
materials
materials Filter
Filter
Filter
layer
layer
layer
that
that
that
are
are
are
not
not
not
chemically
chemically
chemically
compatible
compatible
compatible
SuDS:
SuDS:
SuDS: Sustainable
Sustainable
Sustainable (Urban)
(Urban)
(Urban) Drainage
Drainage
Drainage Systems.
Systems.
Systems.
Structural
Structural
Structural
deck:
deck:
deck:
continuous
continuous
continuouslayer
layer
layer
ofofthe
of
the
the
construction
construction
construction
(comprising
(comprising
(comprising
concrete,
concrete,
concrete,
profiled
profiled
profiled
metal
metal
metal
orortimber
or
timber
timber Drainage/reservoir
Drainage/reservoir
Drainage/reservoir
layer
layer
layer
Air
Air Air
Vapour
Vapour
Vapour control
control
control layer
layer
layer (AVCL):
(AVCL):
(AVCL): construction
construction
construction material
material
material (usually
(usually
(usually a amembrane)
membrane)
a membrane)that
thatthat
substantially
substantially
substantially
panel)
panel)
panel)
supported
supported
supported
bybythe
by
the
the
building
building
building
structure
structure
structureand
and
and
which
which
which
supports
supports
supports
the
the
the
roof
roof
roof
system.
system.
system.
reduces
reduces
reduces the
the thetransfer
transfer
transfer ofofwater
of
water
water
vapour
vapour
vapour through
through
through the
the theroof.
roof.
roof.
Water
Water
Water
control
control
control
layer
layer
layer
Thermal
Thermal
Thermal bridge:
bridge:
bridge:
part
part
part
ofofaof
aroof
roof
a roof
ofoflower
of
lower
lower
thermal
thermal
thermal
resistance
resistance
resistance
than
than
than
itsitssurrounding
its
surrounding
surroundingelements,
elements,
elements,
which
which
which
may
may
may
Wildlife
Wildlife
Wildlife roof:
roof:
roof: a aversion
version
a version
ofofaof
abiodiverse
biodiverse
a biodiverse
roof
roofroof
designed
designed
designed totoprovide
to
provide
provide
a aspecific
specific
a specific
habitat
habitat
habitat totoattract
to
attract
attract
a awildlife
wildlife
a wildlife
result
result
result
ininlocalised
in
localised
localised
cold
cold
cold
surfaces
surfaces
surfaces
ononwhich
onwhich
which
condensation,
condensation,
condensation,
mould
mould
mould
growth
growth
growth
ororstaining
or
staining
staining
may
may
may
occur.
occur.
occur.
species.
species.
species.
Water
Water
Water
control
control
control
membrane
membrane
membrane (WCM):
(WCM):
(WCM):
construction
construction
construction
material
material
material
(usually
(usually
(usually
a asheet
sheet
a sheet
membrane)
membrane)
membrane)that
that
that
substantially
substantially
substantially Thermal
Thermal
Thermal
insulation
insulation
insulation
reduces
reduces
reduces
the
the
the
transfer
transfer
transfer
ofofrain
of
rain
rain
water
water
water
totothe
to
the
the
insulation
insulation
insulation
ininan
in
aninverted
an
inverted
inverted
warm
warm
warm
deck
deck
deck
roof.
roof.
roof.
Biodiverse
Biodiverse
Biodiverse
roof:
roof:
roof:
a aroof
roof
a roof
that
that
that
isisdesigned
is
designed
designedtotocreate
to
create
create
a adesired
desired
a desired
habitat
habitat
habitat
that
that
that
will
willwill
attract
attract
attract
a aparticular
particular
a particular
flora
flora
flora
and
and
and
fauna,
fauna,
fauna,
whether
whether
whether
replicating
replicating
replicating
the
the
the
original
original
original
footprint
footprint
footprint
ofofthe
of
the
the
building
building
building
ororenhancing
or
enhancing
enhancing the
thethe
previous
previous
previous
habitat.
habitat.
habitat. Waterproof
Waterproof
Waterproof
membrane
membrane
membrane
Brown
Brown
Brown
roof:
roof:
roof:
a abiodiverse
biodiverse
a biodiverse
roof
roof
roof
where
where
where
the
the
the
growing
growing
growing
medium
medium
medium
isispurposely
is
purposely
purposely
selected
selected
selected
totoallow
to
allow
allow
local
local
local
plant
plant
plant
species
species
species
totoinhabit
to
inhabit
inhabit
the
the
the
roof
roof
roof
over
over
over
time.
time.
time. Structural
Structural
Structural
deck
deck
deck

©©MD
©MD
MD
Insurance
Insurance
Insurance
Services
Services
Services
Limited
Limited
Limited
2020
2020
2020
340
340
340
340 ROOFS
ROOFS
ROOFS
ROOFS
11.7.2 GREEN
11.7.2 GREEN ROOFS:General
ROOFS: General requirements
requirements
Loading Protection of the roof
Statutory requirement Temporary protection (during construction and in service)

Design for loading should comply with current Building Regulations. Further information can be found in the 'Roofs - Flat Roof' section of Responsibility for temporary protection and a method statement for its use should be agreed prior to commencement of works. Suitable
this Technical Manual. materials should be selected in consultation with membrane manufacturers as appropriate, for example:
Resistance to wind load · Linked recycled thermoplastic sheets.

In all situations, including ballasted and inverted roofs, a calculation of wind load to BS EN 1991-1-4 should be undertaken by a suitably · Rolled recycled thermoplastic or elastomeric sheets.
competent person. Wind load acting on a green roof will be affected significantly by the design of the perimeter and by the geometry and
finishes on the elevations of the building. Any changes to these elements will necessitate a review of the calculation output. Particular consideration should be given to locations of concentrated access, such as step-out areas onto the roof or where wheeled
equipment may be used.
In biodiverse, brown and extensive green roof systems, the dead load contribution from the growing medium should be calculated on an
assumption of dry substrate conditions. Such loadings may be insufficient to restrain the green roof and certain types of waterproof Thermal performance
membrane and insulation, necessitating the provision of supplementary ballast or netting restraint. Information on loading is available
from horticultural suppliers. Statutory requirement
Design for thermal performance must comply with current Building Regulations, as appropriate.
At the earliest possible stage, the employer should define the range of potential imposed loads for which the green roof is to be Provision for access
designed, such as seats, stand-alone planters, storage and public access. In the absence of such a performance requirement, the
loading limits of the roof should be defined.
Statutory requirement
Design should comply with the current regional Building Regulations.
Design for sustainability
Temporary provision during construction
Please refer to the 'Roofs - Flat Roofs' section of this Technical Manual.
At the earliest possible stage, the anticipated loading of the roof system (prior to application of the green roof components) should be
Materials
assessed in terms of:
· Load e.g. foot traffic, equipment.
· Frequency.
Note: If the waterproof membrane is also intended to provide root resistance, suitable certification of testing in accordance with BS EN
· Risk of impact.
13948 should be available.
If such usage is intense or long-lasting during the construction phase, consideration should be given to temporary works only, with
Air vapour control layer (AVCL) completion occurring after all non-roofing usage has ceased as follows:
Please refer to the 'Roofs - Flat Roofs' section of this Technical Manual. · Warm deck roof system: following the installation of vapour control layer, temporary protection is required to be overlaid to the
remainder of the system is installed.
Thermal insulation · Inverted warm deck roof system: overlay completed waterproof membrane with a geotextile and continuous temporary decking,
such as plywood, Oriented Strand Board or compatible recycled thermoplastic board.
Permanent pedestrian access finishes
Pedestrian finishes should be designed to suit the purpose and frequency of access in the context of the intended planned maintenance
regime. For example, paving on paving supports may be desirable to allow drainage and to level up the finish, but may be unsuitable if
plants could spread beneath the paving. Generally, for amenity access, a finish of porous or hard concrete paving laid directly on a
suitable protection fleece may be most suitable.
For service and maintenance access only, a flexible walkway tile may be sufficient (depending on the waterproof membrane and roof
system type).
For further information regarding permanent protection during service, see the 'Roofs - Flat Roofs' section of this Technical Manual.
© Insurance
Services Limited
Limited 20202020 341
341 ROOFS
ROOFS
11.7.3 GREEN
11.7.3 GREENROOFS:
ROOFS: Pedestrian
Pedestrian access
accessfinishes
finishes
External fire performance Green roofs: Vegetation-free zones: Warm roof (section)
Statutory requirement
Design for external fire performance must comply with current Building Regulations.
Upstand to extend min 150mm
Design for resistance to external fire above the finished roof level,
The design of green roof systems can influence the fire performance of the overall roof system. The rate of growth and moisture content of natural vegetation i.e. top of growing medium
is unpredictable and determined by irregular weather conditions. The substitution of planted species with others is also unpredictable. Design to minimise fire Vegetation restraint
risk cannot be based on an assumption of regular maintenance or of irrigation during drought. The latter is not relevant with sedum species, which die back, profile
but is important for intensive roof gardens or extensive systems planted with grasses.
Paving/stone margin
The design should not allow the vegetation to grow or propagate towards adjoining elements, such as abutments, eaves or pitched roofs. It should also be
kept away from openings, such as roof lights and smoke vents. Growing medium
This is achieved in two ways: Paving or stone margin, 0.5m width
· A vegetation-free zone of minimum 0.5m width at all perimeters, abutments and openings. This zone should be extended to 1m to separate large roof
zones in excess of 40m in length.
· Design of flexible walkways, hard paving and ballasted areas so as to minimise root and plant spread.
Green roofs: Vegetation-free zones

(plan, zone width: not to scale of building)
Roof lights or services
Growing medium
1.0m zone may be
Paving or stone required to separate Notes:
margin, 0.5m green roof areas on roof
width in excess of 40m length 1. Vegetation restraint profile should be secured with ballast as necessary. Additional restraint will be required on sloping roofs to
stop creep of the vegetation zone.
2. Protection of waterproof membrane should be extended under ballast zone.
3. Paving or stone should not simply be added to the growing medium at the perimeter as this (a) may reduce the available height of
upstands, and (b) will not stop plants growing in the zone.
Detailing
General principles
At an early stage in the design process, an audit of roof geometry should be carried out to establish what types of details will be
required and whether they are to be weatherproof (incorporating an upstand/cover flashing arrangement) or waterproof (providing
>40m continuous waterproofing across the detail).
The following key principles should be followed in design of all details:
· Upstands to extend 150mm above the finished roof level i.e. top of growing medium.
· Downstands (of separate metal or other flashings) should lap the upstand by a minimum of 75mm.
· Reliance on sealant as the sole means of protection should be avoided.
· Consideration of the effect of vegetation growth on the integrity of the weatherproofing.
The total roof zone depth should be measured from the surface of the growing medium and assessed at critical points, such as the top
of drainage slopes, to ensure that there is enough free upstand available to create the minimum required 150mm of waterproofing
protection above finished roof level. It is important that this minimum 150mm upstand is maintained at all points around the area of the
green roof, except at continuous water checks and at verges.
Notes:
Waterproof membranes
1. 0.5m zone around openings, along abutments, and at perimeters.
2. 1.0m zone may be required to separate green roof areas on roof in excess of 40m length. For further information on waterproof membranes please refer to the 'Roofs - Flat Roof' section of this Technical Manual.
3. Vegetation-free zone to comprise non-combustible stone or paving on suitable protection.
Please note: Warm roof systems - restraint against wind load. It is unusual for the installation of ballast and green roof components to
follow immediately after installation of the roof system. This may be because the roof system and green roof overlay are to be installed
by different contractors, or because of site factors, such as limited storage. Unless it is sequenced to do so, the roof system should be
installed with restraint against wind load based on an assumption of an exposed waterproof membrane.
If the waterproof membrane is also intended to provide root resistance, suitable certification of testing in accordance with BS EN13948
should be available.
ROOFS
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 342
342
ROOFS
11.7.4 GREEN
11.7.4 GREEN ROOFS:
ROOFS: Falls
Fallsand
anddrainage
requirements
Falls and drainage Creation of falls Rainwater outlets
Statutory requirement Roof falls may either be created during the construction of the deck or alternatively by using tapered The following should be confirmed by reference to the manufacturer's information or independent
Design for drainage of the flat roof covering should comply with the current Regional Building insulation systems. certification, as appropriate:
Regulations.
Where the roof finish is to include paving with or without paving supports, consideration should be · Capacity in litres per second at a range of typical water heads.
British and industry standards given to the height difference created by the falls and spacing of rain water outlets in order that the · Compatibility with the waterproof membrane.
BS 6229 states that a minimum finished fall at any point of 1:80 (1.25%) should be achieved. Since
maximum height of paving supports is not exceeded, the minimum height of upstands is not affected · Integral insulation to avoid condensation.
adjoining roof planes at 1:80 will meet at a mitre of less than 1:80, the intended finished fall at such
or trip hazards created. · Method of attachment.
intersections should be considered at an early stage. · Rainwater outlets for inverted roofs should be of the dual height type, designed to maximise
The creation of falls in the deck should always be attempted because it has the following advantages: removal of rainwater at WCM level.
The relevant requirements of BS 6229 should prevail in respect of green roofs, irrespective of the
· There will be a consistent thermal environment across the roof. Design for irrigation
type of vegetative covering.
· The AVCL will also be to a fall.
· If mechanical fasteners are to be used for the waterproof membrane, their length will be constant,
Falls are required for green roofs because: Rainfall is the typical source of water. However, complementary irrigation options may be required for
which facilitates planning and installation.
semi-intensive and intensive systems or those where, for example, the appearance of a grass finish may
· Standing water will inevitably result from design without falls, due to tolerances and deflection.
Cementitious screeds provide a stable substrate to mitred falls with minimal tolerances, and are
be important.
Standing water, which may become stagnant, is not conducive to plant growth and should not
recommended. Screeds should be in accordance with BS 8204. Lightweight screeds should be
be confused with the temporary retention of water in drainage/reservoir layers. Provision may include hoses, sprinklers, overhead irrigation and automated systems that pump from
overlaid with a 1:6 (cement to sand) screed topping of a minimum 10mm thickness.
· Absence of falls will result in ponding, a potential slip hazard and the retention of mineral fines some reservoir storage. The establishment of a need for an irrigation system, and the design of an
in vegetation-free zones, which in turn may encourage the growth of weeds. irrigation scheme, should be in accordance with the principles of BS 7562-3. Where irrigation is required,
Tapered insulation schemes, suitable for warm deck roofs only, have the following advantages:
a frost-protected water supply, rain water or grey water storage facility should be provided at roof level.
Design falls should take account of any potential deflection and construction tolerances. In the
· It is possible to create effective drainage layouts to complex plan areas
· Mitred falls can be created easily to direct rain water to single points where outlets are to be Drainage layout options
falls (1:40 or 2.5%).
located
Cut-to-falls systems are often produced to a 1:60 (1.7%) fall or 1:40 (2.5%) fall. However the use of
Where falls are created by tapered insulation, the design should ensure that the average U-value and
these systems does not remove the need to check that deck deflection and tolerance is overcome 1:80 finished 1:80 finished
maximum U-value at any point, required by SBEM or SAP calculation, is achieved.
and that a resulting fall in the waterproof membrane of a minimum of 1:80 is achieved. Allowance
for deflection is particularly important in designing inverted roofs where calculation of dead loading
fall fall
Where the roof finish is to include paving on access routes, consideration should be given to the height Mitres should be
should be based upon the ballast type and depth to be used.
difference created by the falls and spacing of rain water outlets in order that the maximum height of a minimum 1:80
paving supports is not exceeded or trip hazards created. finished fall
flat' or 'zero falls' applications. However, for the purposes of this standard, the design conditions of
BS 6229 shall be assumed to prevail in all warm, inverted, and cold deck roof systems, and a Drainage
designed fall will be required including allowance for deflection of the deck from all anticipated loads.
Drainage design should be based upon calculations in accordance with BS EN 12056 Part 3 given a
Consideration should also be given to: design head of water. Rain water outlet capacity should be taken from properly certificated information RWO RWO RWO
provided by manufacturers, and the resulting number and layout of outlets should allow for obstruction
· The available upstand height at the high end of the falls. This may be a limiting factor on the and drag due to any additional surface finishes, such as walkways.
length/size of the roof area to be drained. If necessary additional rainwater outlets should be
provided. Green roofs are proven to reduce the volume and rate of transfer of rain water-to-rain water goods.
· Avoidance of ponding behind wide obstructions to the drained slope such as plant plinths or This effect is clearly dependent upon many factors, including depth and type of growing medium, type
of drainage/reservoir layer, weather conditions prevailing prior to the rainfall event and fall in the Mitres should be
roof lights. Additional rainwater outlets and/or insulation crickets should be provided.
a minimum 1:80
· Avoidance of gutters by designing with intersecting roof planes. waterproof membrane. Due to these variables, it is recommended that the design for rain water
finished fall
· Falls between rain water outlets along a perimeter. drainage in accordance with BS EN 12056 is as follows:
RWO
Since the primary function of the roof is to exclude water, it is important to consider how best to · Brown, biodiverse and extensive green roof systems: no allowance for rain water attenuation.
direct this into the drainage system. · Intensive green roof systems: attenuation as advised by the horticultural supplier. If no data is
supplied, no allowance should be made.
Ponding on membrane roofs must be avoided because:
The UK's National Annex to BS EN 12056 does permit the use of a coefficient to factor down the
· It encourages the deposition of dirt and leaves, which can be unsightly, may obstruct outlets drainage infrastructure to account for factors such as the additional retention performance of green
and/or become a slip hazard. roofs. However the coefficient that is used to reflect this reduction should be based on average annual Gutters must be a minimum of 1:80
· In the event of damage, the interior will suffer increased water ingress. retention and not on responses to dynamic storm events. as-built fall towards the drainage outlet
· The load may cause progressive deflection of the deck.
· Ice or algae may create a slip or wind hazard, particularly on walkways. Any drainage infrastructure designed to accommodate this reduced flow rate may not accurately Siphonic drainage
account for seasonal differences or individual storm events. Any reductions in drainage capacity
Independent research has shown that roofs with extensive ponding require increased maintenance should be countered by alternative measures, e.g. appropriate detailing to ensure that any attenuation Green roofs are compatible with siphonic roof drainage systems. In the right circumstances, these can
input. of water at the roof level will not be detrimental to the building structure or fabric. offer the advantages of:
Waterproof coverings of all types are tested for water absorption and water tightness as part of Rain water outlets should be readily accessible without disruption to the green roof or pedestrian · Very high capacity, enabling fewer outlets and therefore less detailing work on site.
third-party certification. However, the construction process, including the installation of components finish. On finishes raised above the waterproof membrane (warm deck roofs) or Water Control · Smaller bore horizontal collector pipework, enabling reduced roof void depth.
and the forming of seams, is clearly facilitated in dry, well-drained conditions. Membrane (inverted roofs), this may be achieved by a suitably marked paving slab or demountable · Self-cleaning in many situations.
section of decking. Within the area of the green roof, a specific vegetation-free inspection chamber
Please note: Rainwater outlets and downpipes can constitute thermal bridges which may increase and cover should be provided in order to avoid plant growth obstructing the outlet. Purpose made However, siphonic drainage should be designed specifically for the green roof system because it must
the risk of localized condensation; an assessment might be required to determine whether insulated products are available from suppliers of green roof components and waterproof membranes, and it is operate siphonically with sufficient regularity to avoid silting-up small-bore pipework.
outlets are to be used. recommended that they be used wherever possible.
For further information, see www.siphonic-roof-drainage.co.uk
Rain water goods from higher roof areas or adjacent roof areas should not be designed to discharge
onto the green roof. The downpipe should be connected directly to the downpipe serving the green These roof proposal are to be considered on a case by case basis and full design and calculations
roof. should be submitted for Warranty approval before construction begins on site.
©©
MD Insurance Services Limited 2020 343 ROOFS
ROOFS
11.7.5
11.7.5 GREENROOFS:
GREEN ROOFS: Testing
Testingrequirements
requirementsand approved
and installers
approved installers
Testing Approved Installers
Testing of the green roof system An approved contractor who is recognised by the manufacture as competent to install the manufacturer's roof membrane system will
No reliable method is available for testing the integrity of a green roof following application of the green roof components. need to be used. Evidence of the manufacturer's approval of the contractor to install their products should be provided to the Warranty
Therefore the roof covering should be tested before application of the green roof components, and care should be taken to Surveyor.
ensure that damage to the waterproof membrane does not occur during installation. With extensive greening on certain warm
roof systems, it may be feasible to use low voltage earth leakage, but any defects recorded will in any case involve removal of Provision of information
the green roof components. Therefore, it is strongly recommended to ensure the very highest possible standards of protection of
the water proof membrane during the application of the green roof components. Operation and maintenance manual
The following information is required:
Procurement of testing services
Specification, as-built:
The water proof membrane should be tested for integrity before the application of any other components above it. Testing should
be undertaken by a third-party that is independent of the roofing contract. · Waterproof membrane: generic type, product(s) and (as appropriate) thickness.
The testing service provider should provide evidence of the following: · Acoustic insulation: generic type, product and (as appropriate) thickness.
· Efficacy of the method proposed in the circumstances of the project. · Rain water outlets: type, product and capacity.
· Experience and training of operator. · Procedure for maintenance of waterproof membrane, including (where appropriate) recommended frequency and method of
· Membership of an appropriate trade association that sets a Code of Conduct for the service. application of solar reflective finish.
· Instructions for irrigation (method/frequency), weed control and application of fertiliser (type/season/frequency).
Final inspection
At practical completion of the flat roof, all areas should be clear of stored material, other site operations and all protection. A
thorough, recorded, visual inspection of all areas, including details, should be carried out with representation from the General
Contractor and Roofing Contractor in attendance.
Methods of test
Low voltage earth leakage

Low voltage earth leakage is a safe and effective method for the testing of waterproofing integrity in roofs where the waterproof
membrane is an electrical insulator and the deck provides an electrical earth. It is not suitable for testing flat roofs where the
waterproof membrane has been overlaid with insulation and ballast (inverted roofs) or ballast only (ballasted warm roofs);
therefore, testing should be carried out prior to completion of the roofing system.
High voltage electrical discharge

The high voltage electrical discharge method is best suited to the testing of continuous thin films, such as liquid-applied coatings.
Its use is not recommended with polymeric single ply, reinforced bitumen membranes and mastic asphalt.
Vacuum
Vacuum testing of seams of membranes manufactured off-site is an effective means of quality assessment, but is not
recommended as a method of demonstrating the integrity of flat roofs.
Flood testing
Flood testing is a suitable method of demonstrating the integrity of small areas of roof to which a green roof system is to be
applied. However, consideration should be given to the effect of ingress on programme and the risk of entrapped water in
insulation (warm deck roofs) and decks (all types). The area under any one test should not exceed 50m2.
ROOFS
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 344
344
ROOFS
11. 11.8
Metal Deck Roofing
Roofs

11.8.1 METAL
11.8.1 METAL DECKROOFING:
DECK ROOFING: General
requirements
Introduction Double skin system Roof penetrations
These must be sealed to maintain the VCL. Where the liner is used as a VCL, the metal-to-metal junction must be sealed with fire-retardant foam. With a
Metal roofing is usually built to a decent standard, but occasionally there are problems, separate VCL, this must be sealed to the upstand or pipes with the appropriate tape. Externally with aluminium roof sheets, the junctions with
especially where site workmanship has not been up to standard. Any roof cladding penetrations should be site welded or weathered using glass reinforced plastic (GRP) in-situ weathering.
details proposed outside of the following guidance will require a specialist consultants
design using third party accredited solutions where appropriate. Roof lights
Standing seam roof sheets are usually on separate insulated upstands. With pierce fixed trapezoidal roof sheets, roof lights are in line, either factory or
Double skin insulated roof site assembled. Ensure that the correct size of tape is used, check the number of rows of tape that are required and that side lap tapes are not twisted by
fasteners.
A double skin insulated roof is made-up on-site from separate
components generally comprising: liner sheet, vapour control General
layer (VCL), spacer system, insulation, breather membrane and Check surface finishes for abrasions, dents and cuts, and that the roof has not been used as a cutting surface for flashings or other metal. Hot swarf
finished externally with top weathering sheets. from angle grinders burns into the plastisol coating of steel sheets, marks aluminium and rapidly turns to rust. Flashings should have sufficient overlap or
butt straps, 150mm wide, and be sealed and supported. Check the frequency of fixings and that they are of the correct type.
Top weathering sheets are generally secret fixed onto clips or
standing seam sheets onto halters, these being machine seamed once Composite panel metal roofing
fixed. Pierce fixed sheets are still widely used, which are fixed directly to
the spacer system with external visible fixings. A simple sheet roof system with ensured insulation thickness that is delivered with the top weathering sheet, insulation and white liner all in one sheet.
With the increase in insulation, thickness panels are being made shorter in length so they can be handled into position. This means that there are more
Liner sheets can be solid or perforated to give an acoustic, sound-deadening roof. end laps to be checked.
They are fixed directly to purlins, and can act as a VCL if a separate vapour barrier
is not specified. If the liner is not used as a VCL, a reinforced vapour control sheet The standard manufacturer's details are to be adhered to, but the following need to be checked.
should be incorporated within the roof.
Workmanship and installation
Insulation must be installed between the VCL and the top weathering sheet; some systems may require ventilation above the insulation and others may
not; it varies from manufacturer to manufacturer. Where there is no requirement to ventilate, the insulation should be compressed slightly to ensure that Fixings
there are no air voids where condensation may occur. There may be a requirement for stainless steel fixings to be used. Check by inspecting boxes and use a magnet; drill points will be magnetic only.
Check fixings are suitable for the purlin type - steel, light gauge cold rolled, heavy gauge or timber - as all fixings are different.
Workmanship
Check the bearing area of the purlin; if the building is not square, the sheets will run out and the end lap detail will not be supported. This can be
Top weathering sheets overcome by using a galvanised support that is fixed to the purlin and which supports the end lap.
Ensure that the top weathering sheets are installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Check that the right number of fixings has been used for the panel and the frequency of side lap stitchers; ensure that they are side lap stitchers and not
main fixings.
These must be long enough to discharge into the gutter correctly and allow for an eaves angle if required by the system.
Check that end and side lap tape sizes conform to the manufacturer's requirements.
Sealant tapes
Check the number of rows required by the manufacturer of the panel for end laps. Tell tales should be visible at side laps of each sheet. Tell tales are
For pierce fixed trapezoidal sheets, check for tell tales to end laps and side laps for the correct number of rows of tape.
the ends of the mastic tape run that can be seen or must be felt for at the side of each sheet. The same applies to side laps; there should be a tell-tale at
the end of the sheet. Use the end of a hacksaw blade to locate the rows of mastic tape.
Liner sheets
Where the liner sheet is solid and used as a vapour check, note the following: On roof lights, mastic tape is visible; check its location, that its size complies with the manufacturer's requirements and that there are the correct number
· Frequency of main fixings to purlins and frequency of side lap stitchers. of rows. Tape should not be twisted by the fixings.
· End laps to be sealed with mastic tape; check the size and that this is continuous. Side laps have a wider 50mm Polyband tape placed from the
inside so this is visible from above. Air tightness
· Check for cuts or splits in this metal liner. There must be a supply of gun foam, fire rated, at roof level for filling in voids before flashings are fixed. If there is not one on site, air tightness and
· Ensure that to eaves and ridge the correct filler blocks have been used, bedded in mastic; if necessary, a closure flashing must be used from the maintaining the insulation cannot be fully achieved.
crown of the sheet to the wall junction to maintain a vapour check. Check the use of sealant tapes and fire-retardant foam.
The use of foam needs to be inspected during the course of construction, and internal tapes to eaves and ridge purlins need to be inspected for size and
Separate vapour control layer (VCL) position. At the ridge, the gap between panels needs to be filled with foam to maintain the insulation and prevent condensation forming. There also
This should be a reinforced sheet, and is used to ensure a more positive air seal around the perimeter of the building. The vapour check should be needs to be a suitably sealed inner ridge.
sealed in the field area with the correct tape, with the number of rows dependent on the application. Check the integrity of these tapes and that they are
continuous and correctly joined. Where the vapour check abuts the walls to the verge or eaves, it must be properly sealed in accordance with the Verge details are difficult and it may be necessary for an internal verge to be cut and sealed around purlins. Check sealant tapes and the use of gun
Architect's detail. Around penetrations, the vapour check must be cut and sealed to any pipes or upstands. foam to maintain insulation. The manufacturer's details may not be achievable, but an alternative must be devised to maintain air tightness. A degree of
confidence in this requirement should be shown on-site as an indication of the importance of air tightness and how this can be achieved.
The spacer system is fixed through the vapour check and liner into the purlins. The spacer system will have a soft sealing pad to ensure the vapour
check is maintained around the fixing. Check for punctures of the vapour check by foot traffic or damage, and patch as required. Gutter junctions
If parapet or valley gutters are being used, check the air seal at the junction of the two. Gutter joints are not always level, and any gaps have to be filled.
This will not only prevent wind-driven rain from entering the building, but will also maintain an air seal.
Insulation
Check the packaging to ensure that the correct thickness is being used if one layer is used, or a combination of thicknesses to give the correct specified Check that roof sheets are oversailing into the gutter correctly.
thickness. For two thicknesses or more, check that all joints are staggered and check the Lambda value against the specification.
Roof penetrations
Ensure that no packaging or debris is left in the roof void prior to or during the installation of the insulation. The insulation should fill the void or be Penetrations such as flues, vents, upstand-type roof lights and sun tubes need to be sealed internally, the insulation being maintained with site-applied
compressed into the void; there should be no slumping or gaps and it should be packed into voids at the junctions of the ridge and verge. foam. Externally, upstands must be weathered correctly and, with steel composite sheets, this is best achieved using GRP in-situ weathering.
With standing seam roofs, a rigid mineral slab insulation should be placed at eaves, ridge and around all penetrations and walkways to support the General
vulnerable areas of the roof, which will give a solid support to the roof sheet pans. This is easy to see during construction and easily felt on completion.
Check surface finish for cuts and abrasions.
The supported pan of the sheet feels solid to walk on.
Check that the roof has not been used as a cutting surface for flashings or other metal. Hot swarf from angle grinders burns into the plastisol coating and
Support system rapidly turns to rust.
Check the frequency of brackets against the specification and the number of fixings per bracket, and that they are the correct type of fixing. With
standing seam roofs, the halter may be fixed with a stainless steel fixing; check the type and frequency of fixing. Check the orientation of the halter in Flashings should have a sufficient overlap and be sealed and supported. Check the frequency of fixings and that they are of the right type.
relation to the lay of the sheet, i.e. will they pick up the seam, as there is a right and wrong way round for halters. Check for closure from gutters and sheet oversails. There should be suitable shrouds to prevent birds or vermin from getting into the building, which can
be often overlooked.
Manufacturers provide halter templates to set out halters, and there must be one on-site to obtain the correct gauging of the halters.
ROOFS
Services 20202020
Limited 346
346
ROOFS
11.8.2 METAL
11.8.2 METAL DECK
DECK ROOFING:
ROOFING:Inspection
Inspectionchecklists forfor
checklists metal roofroof
metal coverings
coverings
Checklist for double skin insulated roof systems in steel or aluminium
Component/Inspection Rectification needed Comments

Yes No
Check bearing width of purlin
Check minimum overlap of linear decking sheets:

1. Light gauge steel
2. Hot rolled steel
3. Timber - check for minimum penetration
Check that side laps are stitched at the correct centres
Vapour control checks using the liner:

1. Check tape to side laps, minimum width 50mm air and moisture barrier tape
2. Check tape to end laps
3. Check inner fillers to ridge, eaves and verge
4. Check for sealing around the perimeter with fire-resisting foam
Vapour control checks using a separate VCL:

1. Check the minimum overlap is correct
2. Check for the correct sealant tape
3. Check for the correct number of rows of sealant tape
4. Check junctions between VCL and building elements, e.g. upstands, eaves, verge, etc.
5. Check for puncture and repair where necessary
Spacer systems:
1. Check for correct height of bracket or halter
2. Correct number of fixings per bracket or halter
3. Check for stainless steel if specified Use a magnet
4. Check for gauging of halters for standing seam and secret fix roof sheets
Insulation:
1. Check that the correct thickness is being used
2. Check that insulation is the correct type and has the same properties as specified
3. Check for compression
4. Check that insulation joints are staggered
5. Ensure that insulation designed to support load has been correctly installed to eaves, ridge, penetrations and walkways
6. Ensure all packaging and debris is removed prior to fitting of the roof sheets
Breather membranes:
1. Ensure the membrane is laid in the correct direction and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions
Roof sheets - standing seam and secret fixed:
1. Check that sheets are long enough so that water effectively drains into the gutter
2. Check the direction of lay of sheets in relation to the direction of the prevailing wind
3. Check eaves detail, including eaves drips and fixing, in accordance with the manufacturer's details
4. Check ridge detail, including turn up fillers and ridge dams, in accordance with the manufacturers details
5. Check verge detail and adequacy of support for cut sheets
6. Check flashing supports, sheet/verge flashing seals and frequency of fixings
Roof sheets - pierced fixed:

1. Check overlap dimension
2. Check end lap tape and correct number of rows of tape
3. Check for side lap tape
4. Check quantity of fixings per sheet per purlin
5. Check washer size of main fixings and side lap stitchers
6. Check frequency of side lap stitchers
7. Inspect for correct tightening of main fixings and side lap stitchers
Penetrations for vents, sun pipes etc.
A - Aluminium sheets:
1. Check sheets are site welded and area post coated where colour sheets are used
2. Check that the VCL and breather membrane are maintained around the welded area
3. Check upstands are at least 150mm
B - Steel sheets:
Ideally use GRP in-situ weathering flashings; however, if folded flashings are used, check:
1. Overlap
2. Sealing and fixing of overlaps
3. If a flat sheet back to the ridge is used, check for insulation under the sheet
4. Check frequency of fixings
5. Check sealing of overlapping sheets
©©
MD Insurance Services Limited 2020 347 ROOFS
ROOFS
11.8.3 METAL
11.8.3 METALDECK
DECKROOFING:
ROOFING: Inspection
Inspection checklists
checklistsfor
formetal
metalroof coverings
roof coverings
Component/Inspection Rectification needed Comments

Yes No
Flashings:
1. Check end overlap
3. Check correct type of fixing is used
General:
1. Check roof surface for cuts and abrasions
2. Check for hot swarf damage
Panel laps to be tight when viewed from inside the building
Constant straight line on side laps to be achieved
Fasteners correct for the purlin:

1. Light gauge steel
2. Heavy gauge steel
3. Timber
Fastener material: Check with a magnet
1. Coated carbon steel
2. Stainless steel
Fastener frequency main roof:
1. Main fixings
2. Side lap stitchers
Fastener frequency roof lights:

1. Main fixings
2. Side lap stitchers
Bearing area of purlin at end lap; is a supporting bearing plate required? Is the building square?
End laps:
1. Correct number of rows of joining tape
2. Correct size of end lap tape
3. Correct position of end lap tape in relation to fixing
Roof light tape positions:

1. Correct number of rows of joining tape
2. Correct size of end lap tape
3. Correct position of end lap tape in relation to fixing
Is the roof adequately air tight (visual inspection and air tightness test where necessary)?
Provision of fire-retardant gun foam:

1. Eaves level
2. Verges
3. Gutters
4. Internal verge positions
5. Foam insulation at ridge
Gutter junctions:
1. Adequacy of seals at gutter junctions
2. Correct provision of weir overflows to gutter runs
3. Correct junction detail between gutters and verge flashings
4. Gaps sealed to prevent vermin infestation
5. Correct discharge of water from roof sheets into gutter
Roof penetrations:
1. Check seals around cut foam insulation internally
2. Check internal flashing closures
3. Check weather penetrations externally
Flashings:
1. Check end overlaps
General:
1. Check roof covering for cuts and abrasions
2. Check for hot swarf damage
ROOFS
© MD
Services 20202020
Limited 348
348
ROOFS
CONTENTS
12.
Contents
Balconies
12.1 Forming a Roof
and Terraces

Additional Functional Requirements 3. In addition to point 2: shall, unless specifically agreed otherwise with the Warranty provider, comply with Ad
In addition to the general Functional Requirements, the following additional Functional Requirements are also the requirements of BS 6229 and be designed to have a minimum finished fall of 1 in 80. In a
applicable to this specific Building Part section as follows: 4. Balconies and Terraces must have appropriate guarding meeting the relevant Building Regulations. app
Workmanship Limitations of Functional Requirements W

1. A roof membrane manufacturer's approved installer must be used for all balcony/terrace coverings, 1. The Functional Requirements are limited by the recommendations applied in this specific Building Part 1.
where: guidance.
a. The balcony/terrace forms a roof over a building and, Ma
b. On large developments over 3 stories in height (including ground storey) where the total combined No
balcony area exceeds 50m2.
c. Low rise developments less than 3 stories in height where the balcony area exceeds 50m2. De
d. Where the roof/balcony/terrace includes features beyond a typical wall abutment e.g. (but not limited 1.
to) variations of upstand constructions / penetrations / fixings / external permanent machinery /
balustrade fittings etc.
e. Where the waterproof membrane is to be covered over by pedestrian finishes or solar panels.
f. Where EDPM roof coverings are proposed.
2. Balcony/terrace roof membranes will be required to be weather and waterproof and, in certain
circumstances the flat roof covering will also require to be tested at completion (please refer to the
guidance within this Technical Manual for further information).
Materials
Lim
Design 1.
1. Roof coverings must prevent any external moisture passing into the internal environment of the building.
2. Balcony/terrace roof structures and coverings, shall be designed and constructed so that they:
b. Satisfactorily resist the passage of moisture due to rain and snow to the inside of the building, and
to materials which might be adversely affected by such moisture;
c. Encourage the rapid discharge of moisture due to rain and snow from their external surfaces to a
suitable discharge system;
e. Are durable and resistant to moisture due to the weather, condensation or some other cause;
f. Have adequate resistance to fire penetration and the spread of flame across their external surfaces;
g. Do not allow fire spread across the tops of separating walls;
h. Resist flanking sound transmission where adjacent to separating walls.
i. Adequately discharge rainwater from the roof area to a suitable drainage system.
BALCONIES AND TERRACES

350
12. 12.1
Forming a Roof
Balconies
and Terraces

12.1.1 FORMING
12.1.1 FORMINGAAROOF:
ROOF:General
General principles
principlesfor
forwarm
warmdecks
decks
Introduction
This section provides specific advice and requirements in respect of balconies and terraces, where the balcony or terrace forms part of the roof or forms the entire roof to other occupied parts of a building and is warm deck construction.
Design
Selection of system type

The cold deck roof system is not permitted on balconies or terraces that form part of the roof to other occupied parts of the building. In these circumstances the selection of system type (warm deck or inverted warm deck) should be based upon the
following criteria;
· Roof zone depth (height from ceiling to termination of waterproofing).

· Likely point loading.
· Construction process (a complete inverted warm deck roof, with suitable protection and which may be suitable for storage or access by other trades, a warm deck roof may not be suitable for storing heavy loads).
Copings to be mechanically fixed to wall structure (fixings

through DPC to be suitably sealed to prevent water
ingress).
Door access to
DPC under coping to be across full width of wall and taped balcony
at laps. DPC to be supported over cavity to prevent sag
Height of balcony Projecting sill and drip

parapet/guarding to meet Paving slab surface treatment off suitable (min 45mm overhang)
building regulations and supports (ballast fill not suitable as a
not be climbable. Cover flashing trim. See
finished balcony/trafficked final surface) Upstand not less
the 'General detailing and
than 75mm
pedestrian access finishes'
page for further guidance
Weather bar
Waterproof layer taken up
behind cover flashing
Roof covering/
flashing 150mm
Finished floor level
In addition to the main rainwater

outlet, an additional overflow/warning Fall
pipe outlet (min 25mm below the
underside of the door sill) must be
provided to serve the balcony area
Where drainage outlets pass through

timber frame structures, allowances
should be made for differential Waterproof layer
movement if a rigid external leaf (e.g. Screed set to fall to the rain designed to meet
masonry) is adopted Insulation water outlet BS 6229
Waterproof layer continuous with Structural deck
wall outlet opening
Support for surface finishes
Wall outlet to discharge into should not obstruct drainage
hopper
Notes:
· Insulation above structural deck and waterproof layer to be XPS insulation suitable for weight of surface treatment.
· Waterproof membrane must be laid to a fall - to a suitable outlet. All joints formed must be sealed in accordance with the manufacturers requirements and not result in water being trapped/ponding.
· Membrane not to be laid in air temperatures less than 5°C.
· Where structural deck is constructed over accommodation below the design, construction should meet sound insulation requirements.
· Structural deck to be an engineered design for the loading/intended use.

© MD
Services 20202020
Limited 352
352
12.1.2 FORMING
12.1.2 FORMING A
A ROOF:
ROOF:General
Generalprinciples
principlesforfor
inverted warm
inverted decks
warm decks
Introduction
This section provides specific advice and requirements in respect of balconies and terraces where the balcony or terrace forms part of the roof or forms the entire roof to other occupied parts of a building and is inverted warm deck construction.
Design
Selection of system type

The cold deck roof system is not permitted on balconies or terraces that form part of the roof to other occupied parts of the building. In these circumstances the selection of system type (warm deck or inverted warm deck) should be based upon the
following criteria;
· Roof zone depth (height from ceiling to termination of waterproofing).

· Likely point loading.
· Construction process (a complete inverted warm deck roof, with suitable protection and which may be suitable for storage or access by other trades, a warm deck roof may not be suitable for storing heavy loads).
Copings to be mechanically fixed to wall structure.

(Fixings through DPC to be suitably sealed to prevent
water ingress)
Door access to
DPC under coping to be across full width of wall and taped balcony
at laps. DPC to be supported over cavity to prevent sag
Height of balcony Projecting sill & drip

parapet/guarding to meet Paving slab surface treatment off suitable (min 45mm overhang)
building regulations and supports (ballast fill not suitable as a
not be climbable Cover flashing trim. See
finished balcony/trafficked final surface) Upstand not less
the 'General detailing and
than 75mm
pedestrian access finishes'
page for further guidance
Weather bar
Waterproof layer taken up
behind cover flashing
Roof covering/
flashing 150mm
Finished floor level
In addition to the main rainwater Fall

outlet, an additional overflow/warning
pipe outlet (min 25mm below the
underside of the door sill) must be
provided to serve the balcony area
Where drainage outlets pass through

timber frame structures, allowances
Water control layer Waterproof layer
should be made for differential
Screed set to fall to the rain designed to meet
movement if a rigid external leaf (e.g. Insulation water outlet BS 6229
masonry) is adopted
Waterproof layer continuous with Structural deck
wall outlet opening
Support for surface finishes
Wall outlet to discharge into should not obstruct drainage
hopper
Notes:
· Insulation above structural deck and waterproof layer to be XPS insulation suitable for weight of surface treatment.
· Waterproof membrane must be laid to a fall - to a suitable outlet. All joints formed must be sealed in accordance with the manufacturers requirements and not result in water being trapped/ponding.
· Membrane not to be laid in air temperatures less than 5°C.
· Where structural deck is constructed over accommodation below the design, construction should meet sound insulation requirements.
· Structural deck to be an engineered design for the loading/intended use.
©©
MD Insurance Services Limited 2020 353 BALCONIES AND TERRACES
12.1.3 FORMING
ROOF:Definitions,
Definitions, general
generalprinciples,
principles,and
andstructure
structure
Definitions Warm deck roof Hybrid roof
For the purposes of this Technical Guidance, the following definitions shall apply: The principal thermal insulation is placed immediately below the roof covering, resulting in Many roofs combine the features of two or more of the roof types previously
the structural deck and support being at a temperature close to that of the interior of the described. Examples include structural decks of high thermal resistance combined
Condensation: process whereby water is deposited from air containing water building. with additional insulation, and existing roofs to which thermal insulation is added.
vapour when its temperature drops to or below dew point. Once assessed in terms of their thermal and water vapour transmission
The design should ensure that: characteristics, such roofs will generally fall into one of the categories described.
Filter layer: construction material (usually a geotextile) that substantially reduces
the transfer of mineral and organic material to the insulation in an inverted warm · The waterproof membrane has sufficient resistance to temperature to suit the In some constructions, the waterproof membrane is placed between two layers of
deck roof. conditions created by a substrate of insulation. insulation, combining the properties of warm roof and inverted warm roof
· The insulation has sufficient mechanical characteristics to resist loading. construction. This form of construction is generally known as a 'duo roof '.
Flat roof: a roof having a pitch no greater than 10º to the horizontal. · The AVCL is provided by the deck or by a membrane placed above the deck.
· The structural deck is maintained at a temperature above that which could cause There is an increased risk of interstitial condensation with a hybrid roof and
Insulation cricket: wedge of shallow-fall insulation material, designed to divert condensation to occur at this level during service. therefore where these types of roof systems are used a full condensation risk
the flow of rainwater on a roof. analysis should be carried out.
Interstitial condensation: condensation occurring within or between the layers of Waterproof Membrane
Cold deck roof
the building envelope.
The cold deck roof system is not permitted on balconies or terraces that form part
Protection layer: construction material (usually a geotextile all rigid board) that of the roof to other occupied parts of the building.
isolates another construction material from mechanical damage. Thermal Insulation
In these circumstances an alternative roof system should be adopted.

Separation layer: construction material (usually a geotextile) that separates two
construction materials that are not chemically compatible. Air Vapour Control Layer Structure General
(if feasible)
Structural deck: continuous layer of the construction (comprising concrete,
profiled metal or timber panel) supported by the building structure and which The design and construction of flat roofs should be in accordance with BS 6229 -
supports the roof system. Structural deck Flat roofs with continuously supported flexible waterproof coverings - Code of
practice states and the relevant euro codes. The following is adapted from BS
Thermal bridge: part of a roof of lower thermal resistance than its surrounding 6229 - Flat roofs with continuously supported flexible waterproof coverings - Code
elements, which may result in localised cold surfaces on which condensation, of practice states:
mould growth or staining may occur. Inverted warm deck roof
Structure
Air vapour control layer (AVCL): construction material (usually a membrane) A variant of the warm deck roof in which the principal thermal insulation is placed above the The roof structure should be designed for strength and stiffness in accordance
that substantially reduces the movement of water vapour through the roof system. waterproof membrane, resulting in the waterproof membrane, structural deck and structural with the Code of Practice for the relevant structural material.
support being at a temperature close to that of the interior of the building. Generally, the
Water control membrane (WCM): construction material (usually a sheet principal insulation is secured by separate ballast (paving or stone). Dead and imposed loads upon a roof should be assessed in accordance with BS
membrane) that substantially reduces the transfer of rain water to the insulation in EN 1991-1-1 + UK National Annex, taking due consideration of any added
an inverted warm deck roof. A filter membrane or WCM should be provided to control mineral and organic material surfacing; paving slabs, gravel etc. Snow loads should be assessed in accordance
passing into and below the insulation joints. A WCM is recommended because it will provide with BS EN 1991-1-3 + UK National Annex. Wind loads should be assessed in
improved rain water run off, which may allow for a reduced thickness of insulation and accordance with BS EN 1991-1-4:2005 + A1:2010 + UK National Annex.
reduced loading of ballast. If a WCM is included, it is essential that the drainage design
facilitates the rapid transfer of rain water across the product and to rain water outlets. Relevant structural material on roof structure strength and stiffness should be
assessed in accordance with BS EN 1992-1-1, BS EN 1993-1-1, BS EN 1994-1-1,
BS EN 1995-1-1, BS EN 1999-1-1 and their UK National Annexes.
Ballast The resistance to wind uplift of the waterproof covering and finishes on a flat roof
should be assessed having regard to the dead weight of those materials and to
the nature, type and disposition of their attachment to the slab or deck, in
accordance with BS 8217 and BS EN 16002.
Filter lay or water control
membrane
Whilst a roof slab should be regarded as airtight and where the critical layer is the
exposed roof surface, be it the waterproofing, or inverted insulation system, a roof
Thermal insulation deck might be regarded as air permeable and likely to allow internal air pressures
to impinge on the roof system from below.
Wind uplift pressure, in an air-permeable deck, is exerted on the underside of any

Waterproof Membrane layer of the construction which is substantially air-impermeable, such as the
vapour control layer or the waterproof layer; this pressure, less the appropriate
dead weight, should be resisted by adequate mechanical or bonded connections
between the air impermeable layer and the deck.
Structural deck
The roof design should take account of possible differential movements within the
slab/deck and at junctions with supporting structure, parapets, kerbs and
upstands.
Note: Such movements might be caused by movement of the structural frame or

by changes of temperature and moisture content.

© MD
Services 20202020
Limited 354
354
12.1.4 FORMING
12.1.4 FORMING A
A ROOF:
ROOF:Timber
Timberstructures
structures
Limitations of this guidance Structural deck
The guidance on timber structures is limited of not more than three storey's above ground. General
At the earliest practical stage, the likely deflection of the deck should be confirmed, to ensure a minimum 1:80 as built fall is maintained.
Loading If the deck is intended to receive mechanical fasteners for the attachment of roof system components such as insulation, or equipment
such as fall-arrest line posts, its resistance to pull-out should also be confirmed to enable design for resistance to wind load.
Balcony/Terrace structure and loading
The design of the roof structure must be in accordance with current regional Building Regulations. Structural decks should be suitable of supporting the intended loads.
The balcony/terrace of the building shall be constructed so that the combined dead, imposed and wind loads are sustained and The structural deck should be designed by a suitable qualified Structural Engineer. It is important to ensure that the structural deck is
transmitted by it to the ground safely, and without causing such deflection or deformation of any part of the building, or such movement installed and fixed in accordance with the Structural Engineer's design.
of the ground, as to impair the stability of any part of another building.
The roof structure should be of such construction that it has adequate interconnection with the walls, allowing it to act as a horizontal
diaphragm capable of transferring the wind forces to buttressing elements of the building. The insulation should be suitably specified taking into account the roof type, having regard to its load-bearing capacity and, where
relevant, its water absorption characteristics. Compressible materials cannot support imposed loads and are not suitable in warm deck
If joists are spanning intermediate beams it is important that the joists are fixed to these beams it is important that this is carried out in roofs. Warm roofs require the use of rigid insulation, and should be suitably specified to support the any anticipated loads from
accordance with the Structural Engineers specification. trafficking across the roof. Insulation in an inverted roof should also have high resistance to water absorption, freeze/thaw cycling and
be shielded from UV light.
The Designer must establish the intended loadings expected on the balcony/terrace including loads from finishing surfaces such as
paving slabs and/ or ballast as well as any potential planting. Composite panels (deck/vapour control/insulation)
Fixings for balustrades must be carefully designed to ensure appropriate fixings are robust and any penetration through waterproof roof The suitability of composite panels in providing a combined deck, AVCL and thermal insulation in a single component should be
coverings are sealed correctly in accordance with the waterproof covering manufacturer's recommendations. Such fixings should not be assessed with reference to the loading and hygrothermal conditions in the application. There is no relevant hEN or British Standard.
made through to a wood substrate but to the masonry structure e.g. wooden plates or packing pieces must not be used under the Products suitable for roofing should have current certification by one of the following:
waterproof membrane to secure the balustrade too.
· British Board of Agrément.
The design of the terrace/balcony should be designed by a suitably quantified Structural Engineer in accordance with BS EN 1995-1: · Another member of the UEAtc.
Eurocode 5 design of timber structures. General. Common rules and rules for buildings. · Another notified body.
It is important that the deck have adequate prevision to resist wind uplift by being adequately anchored to the main structure. Note: MgO boards and cement particle board is not suitable as a supporting deck. It may be used to clad an abutment or parapet but is
not suitable for use with mechanically fastened single ply membrane.
In all situations, including ballasted and inverted roofs, a calculation of wind load at each zone of the roof to BS EN 1991-1-4
Typical warm deck construction
should be undertaken by a suitably competent person.Wind load acting on a balcony will be affected significantly by the design of the
perimeter and by the geometry and finishes on the elevations of the building. Any changes to these elements will necessitate a review
Falls can be created by firrings or tapered insulation
of the calculation output. it is important to ensure that the balcony/terrace is securely fixed to the main structure in-accordance with the Surface treatment
Structural Engineers design. Waterproof membrane
Insulation
Resistance to imposed loads Air vapour control layer
At the earliest possible stage the employer should define the range of potential imposed loads for which the balcony is to be designed Deck
such as planters, storage and public access. In the absence of such a performance requirement the loading limits of the balcony should
be defined.
Joist and firring
Structural timber
Plasterboard
All structural timber used should be stress graded. All such timber must be stamped as either 'DRY' or 'KD' (Kiln Dry). The use of
ungraded, or 'green', timber is not acceptable.
Typical inverted warm deck construction
Treatment of timber
Surface treatment
Preservative treatment of roof timbers is normally unnecessary, except where specifically required under relevant standards and Codes
of Practice. Further information can be found in 'Appendix C - Materials, Products, and Building Systems'. Filter layer
Insulation
Waterproof membrane
Deck
Joist and firring
Plasterboard
©©
12.1.5 FORMING
ROOF:Concrete
Concrete structures
structures
Typical warm deck construction Balcony/terrace loading
Note: Permanent waterproofing should not be installed until the deck has fully dried Statutory requirement
Surface treatment
Resistance to wind load
Waterproof membrane In all situations, including ballasted and inverted roofs, a calculation of wind load at each zone of the roof to BS EN 1991-1-4
should be undertaken by a suitably competent person.
Insulation Wind load acting on a balcony will be affected significantly by the design of the perimeter and by the geometry and finishes on the
elevations of the building. Any changes to these elements will necessitate a review of the calculation output.
Air vapour control layer It is important that the deck have adequate provisions to resist wind uplift by either being of sufficient self weight or adequately
anchored to the main structure.
Screed
At the earliest possible stage the designer should define the range of potential imposed loads for which the balcony is to be
designed such as planters, storage and public access. In the absence of such a performance requirement the loading limits of the
balcony should be defined.
Concrete deck
Structural deck
General
Plasterboard
At the earliest practical stage, the likely deflection in the deck, and the tolerance in the level of its finish, should be confirmed,
because this informs the design for drainage. If the deck is intended to receive mechanical fasteners for the attachment of roof
system components such as insulation, or equipment such as fall-arrest line posts, its resistance to pull-out should also be
Typical inverted warm deck construction confirmed to enable design for resistance to wind load.
Note: Permanent waterproofing should not be installed until the deck has fully dried Concrete
Precast concrete construction should be designed in accordance with BS 8110. Information on span capability and the installation
requirements of precast panels can be obtained from manufacturers. Information on the location of required movement joints
Surface treatment should be obtained early in the design process as they have implications for drainage layout and detailing. Precast panels
installed to a fall can provide a simple layout but without cross falls.
Filter layer
In-situ concrete construction should be designed in accordance with BS 8110. Concrete decks should be laid to falls wherever
possible, concrete maybe more difficult to lay to a fall, and it is common to create falls in the insulation (warm roofs only) or by
Insulation
using an additional screed. Information on compressive strength, resistance to point load and drying periods of wet screeds can
be obtained from suppliers and relevant trade associations.
Waterproof membrane
Where structural movement joints are required in large concrete decks, a clearly defined movement joint detail should be
constructed to a design and with the materials that afford durability equivalent to that of the roof system.
Screed
In precast panel decks the locations of any anticipated differential movement e.g. at perimeter or abutment interfaces or between
adjacent panels that are subject to differential loading, must be identified in order that stress is not transferred to the waterproof
membrane.
Concrete deck Screeds
Screeds should be suitably specified for the anticipated loadings, further information can be found in 'Appendix C - Materials,
Products, and Building Systems'. Moisture from the construction can become trapped in a roof if the waterproof layer is applied
Plasterboard
before a concrete slab or screed has had sufficient time to dry out. In situ concrete slabs and cementitious screeds contain large
volumes of water which, if not allowed to dry out, can prevent adhesion of the waterproof layer. If bonding to the slab, it is advised
For in situ concrete decks it is important that: that an adhesion test be carried out.
· The form work is adequately and accurately constructed. Insulation of warm decks
· The mix should be one that has relatively low shrinkage characteristics.
· The slab should be adequately protected until cured. The insulation should be suitably specified taking into account the roof type, having regard to its load-bearing capacity
and, where relevant, its water absorption characteristics. Compressible materials cannot support imposed loads and are not
Pre cast concrete decks should: suitable in warm decks. Warm roofs require the use of rigid insulation, and should be suitably specified to support the any
anticipated loads from trafficking across the roof. Insulation in an inverted roof should also have high resistance to water
· Have a minimum of 90mm bearing unless justified by the design. absorption, freeze/thaw cycling and be shielded from UV light.
· Be grouted in accordance with the design, and
· Allowance for movement should be provided at abutments.

© MD
Services 20202020
Limited 356
356
12.1.6 FORMING
12.1.6 FORMING A
A ROOF:
ROOF:Profiled
Profiledmetal
metalstructures
structures

Typical deck construction (warm roof)
The insulation should be suitably specified taking into account the roof type, having regard to its load-bearing capacity and, where relevant, its
water absorption characteristics. Compressible materials cannot support imposed loads and are not suitable in warm decks. Warm roofs require
the use of rigid insulation, and should be suitably specified to support the any anticipated loads from trafficking across the roof. Insulation in an
Surface treatment inverted roof should also have high resistance to water absorption, freeze/thaw cycling and be shielded from UV light.
Waterproof membrane Structural deck
General
Insulation At the earliest practical stage, the likely deflection in the deck, and the tolerance in the level of its finish, should be confirmed, because this informs
the design for drainage. If the deck is intended to receive mechanical fasteners for the attachment of roof system components such as insulation,
Air vapour control layer or equipment such as fall-arrest line posts, its resistance to pull-out should also be confirmed to enable design for resistance to wind load.
Profiled metal (steel or aluminium)

Metal deck Profiled metal decks should have a crown width at least 50% of the profile width. To provide a sound base for the insulation and waterproofing
system, and to avoid reduced drainage performance, the mid-span deflection of the metal deck should not exceed 1/200 of the span under
Plasterboard uniformly distributed design loads. When considering the deck profile and the necessity for side lap stitching and metal deck closures, reference
should be made to the manufacturers of the deck, insulation and waterproof membrane.
Typical inverted warm deck construction

Profiled metal decks: critical dimensions
Deck sheet cover width

Surface treatment
Filter layer Profile width

Side lap stitching
Crown width
Insulation
Waterproof membrane
Supporting deck
Metal deck The metal roof structure should be side stitched to ensure it performs as a Purlin
continuous plane layer (unless the manufacturer state otherwise)
Plasterboard
Profiled metal decks should conform to the following standards:

Loading
· Galvanised steel: minimum recommended thickness 0.7mm to BS EN 10346 Fe E280G Z275. Typical gauge range 0.7mm-1.2mm.
Statutory requirement · Plain aluminium: minimum recommended thickness 0.9mm to BS EN 485-2 AA3004 H34. Reference should also be made to BS EN 1396 as
The design for loading should comply with the current Building Regulations. appropriate.
Resistance to wind load

It is important that the deck have adequate provisions to resist wind uplift by being adequately anchored to the main structure.
In all situations, including ballasted and inverted roofs, a calculation of wind load at each zone of the roof to BS EN
1991-1-4 should be undertaken by a suitably competent person.
Wind load acting on a balcony will be affected significantly by the design of the perimeter and by the geometry and finishes
on the elevations of the building. Any changes to these elements will necessitate a review of the calculation output.

At the earliest possible stage the employer should define the range of potential imposed loads for which the balcony is to
be designed such as planters, storage and public access. In the absence of such a performance requirement the loading
limits of the balcony should be defined.
©©
12.1.7 FORMING
ROOF:Thermal
Thermal performance
performanceand
andcondensation
condensationcontrol
control
Thermal performance Air vapour control layer (AVCL)
Design for thermal performance must comply with current regional Building Regulations, as appropriate. The AVCL should be selected with regard to the following minimum criteria:
Thermal insulation · Ease with which it can be sealed at laps and at abutments to other elements.
· The method of attachment.
The thermal insulation should be selected with regard to the following minimum criteria: · Condensation risk, expressed as calculated vapour pressure based on notional conditions pertaining to the project building.
· Compatibility with the waterproof membrane and thermal insulation.
· Thermal resistance (and therefore thickness) to suit minimum clearances at details.
· Resistance to compression. The following is a minimum recommended specification. The actual specification will depend on the level of vapour resistance required,
· Compatibility with the AVCL and waterproof membrane. based on calculation, and the type of deck.
· Compatibility with adhesives (if insulation is adhered).
· Contribution to the external fire performance of the system. The attachment of the AVCL should be designed to resist calculated wind load by a declared margin of safety. All laps should be sealed
· Acoustic properties: resistance to external sound is not currently regulated. However, there may be a need to consider attenuation from and the AVCL should be sealed to the adjoining element, which forms the continuation of the resistance to air permeability. The AVCL
balconies. should be extended behind all thermal insulation, including insulation placed on vertical surfaces such as parapet walls. Where the roof
system is penetrated by a detail such as a pipe or duct, a suitable method for providing continuous vapour control should be provided,
Note: The alternative of a separate acoustic attenuation layer should be considered where appropriate. and this method should be followed in practice.
Thermal transmittance Where a reinforced bitumen membrane AVCL is used, its installation should be in accordance with BS 8217.
Design for thermal transmittance should take account of the effect of thermal bridging within the roof field and at interfaces between the roof system Minimum recommended specification for AVCL for warm deck roofs
and adjoining elements, such as parapet walls or abutments.
In particular, allowance should be made for the effect of: Roof system type Deck type AVCL Attachment
(1) Profiled (2) Partial bond by 3G or
Reinforced bitumen S2P3
· Thermal bridging by metal fasteners used to secure insulation and/or membrane. Thermal break telescopic tube fasteners are recommended to
membrane metal approved
avoid this.
proprietary alternative
· Thermal bridging due to drainage of rain water or snow-melt through insulation in inverted roofs. The use of a WCM beneath ballast to reduce
thermal bridging is recommended. Concrete S2P3 Fully bonded
· The locations of above average thermal transmittance at sumps, gutters or areas of minimum thickness of tapered insulation.
Timber panel S2P3 Partial bond by 3G or
Manufacturers of thermal insulation and WCMs provide certification and calculations of the effects of thermal bridging by fasteners and drainage approved
respectively. Further advice is available in Building Research Establishment BR 262 Thermal insulation: avoiding risks. proprietary alternative
Installation of thermal insulation High density All 200μ Loose laid beneath
polyethylene mechanically fixed insulation
The attachment of the thermal insulation should be designed to resist calculated wind load by a declared margin of safety. This includes High density As per Proprietary Fully bonded to prepared
consideration of dead loads required in all roof zones in ballasted warm roofs and inverted warm roofs. polyethylene and certification substrate all
metal foil laminate as per manufacturer's
Air permeability instructions
Coated metal foil As per Proprietary Fully bonded to prepared
Relevant contract drawings should define the position of the component - the air barrier - that determines resistance to air permeability. This may be laminate - certification substrate all
achieved by an additional, purpose designed membrane or by an additional function of another component, such as the deck or waterproof self-adhesive as per manufacturer's
membrane. instructions
Control of condensation Notes:

(1) Reinforced bitumen membranes: minimum recommended specification based on classification in BS 8747.
(2) S and P are classifications 1-5 of Strength (tensile strength and elongation) and resistance to puncture (static and dynamic); the
Any provision required to control interstitial condensation within the roof should be determined to the calculation method defined by BS 5250, but higher the rating, the higher the performance.
with ambient conditions set in BS 6229. The calculated maximum accumulation of moisture within thermal insulation should not exceed 350g/m2 and
there shall be no net accumulation in any annual cycle.

© MD
Services 20202020
Limited 358
358
12.1.8 FORMING
ROOF: Balcony
Balcony falls
fallsand
anddrainage
requirements
Falls and drainage Creation of falls Overflows
Statutory requirement Roof falls may either be created during the construction of the deck or alternatively by using Roofs which drain to a single internal outlet or combined outlets connected into a single downpipe,
tapered insulation systems (warm deck systems only). should be provided with an overflow to drain and warn of outlet/downpipe blockage and so avoid the
Design for drainage of the flat roof covering should comply with the current Regional Building
risk of flooding. The capacity of the overflow should be not less than that of the outlet or combined
Regulations. The creation of falls in the deck should always be attempted because it has the following outlets and its discharge should be visible but directed away from the building. Over flows should be
advantages: positioned as close to the outlets as possible to avoid rainwater build up on roofs.
British and industry standards
The requirements of BS 6229 should prevail in respect of balconies and terraces, whether or not · There will be a consistent thermal environment across the roof. If a balcony is served by a single rainwater outlet, an overflow facility of equivalent capacity and clearly
they form part or the entire roof to occupied parts of a building, and irrespective of the type of · The AVCL will also be to a fall. visible externally should be provided at or near the same location, no more than 50mm above the level
waterproof membrane. · If mechanical fasteners are to be used for the waterproof membrane, their length will be of the waterproof membrane and a minimum of 25mm below any thresholds.
constant, which facilitates planning and installation.
Wherever practical, balconies and terraces should be designed to fall away from the building Box gutters
elevation. If this is not practical for reasons of continuity of rainwater services, the falls should be Cementitious screeds provide a stable substrate to mitred falls with minimal tolerances, and are
arranged across the balcony, parallel to the elevation. recommended. Screeds should be in accordance with BS 8204. Lightweight screeds should be
It is not generally necessary to provide separate box gutters where two planes of roofing intersect, or
overlaid with a 1:6 (cement to sand) screed topping of a minimum 10mm thickness.
where a single plane falls to an abutment. In the latter case, there will be no fall between outlets, so
BS 6229 states that a minimum finished fall at any point of 1:80 (1.25%) should be achieved. consideration should be given to creating these in the structure or insulation. Box gutters are slow,
Tapered insulation schemes, suitable for warm deck roofs only, have the following advantages; difficult to construct and introduce unnecessary complexity. The need to maintain a fall in gutters and
Since adjoining roof planes at 1:80 will meet at a mitre of less than 1:80, the intended finished fall comply with the energy requirements of the Building Regulations may be difficult to achieve.
at such intersections should be considered at an early stage. · It is possible to create effective drainage layouts to complex plan areas.
· Mitred falls can be created easily to direct rain water to single points where outlets are to
Drainage layout options
Design falls should take account of any potential deflection and construction tolerances. In the be located.
Where falls are created by tapered insulation, the design should ensure that the average
falls (1:40 or 2.5%).
U-value and maximum U-value at any point, required by SBEM or SAP calculation, is achieved. 1:80 finished 1:80 finished
Cut-to-falls systems are often produced to a 1:60 (1.7%) fall or 1:40 (2.5%) fall. However the use fall fall
Where the roof finish is to include paving on supports, consideration should be given to the
of these systems does not remove the need to check that deck deflection and tolerance is Mitres should be
height difference created by the falls and spacing of rainwater outlets so that the maximum
overcome and that a resulting fall in the waterproof membrane of a minimum of 1:80 is achieved. a minimum 1:80
height of paving supports is not exceeded, the minimum height of upstands is not affected or
Allowance for deflection is particularly important in designing inverted roofs where calculation of finished fall.
trip hazards created. On large balconies and terraces it may be necessary to increase the
dead loading should be based upon the ballast type and depth to be used.
number of outlets in order to reduce maximum roof zone depth.
flat' or 'zero falls' applications. For the purposes of this standard the design conditions of BS 6229
Drainage
shall be assumed to prevail in all balcony/terrace situations.
Drainage design should be based upon calculations in accordance with BS EN 12056 Part 3 RWO RWO RWO
Consideration should also be given to; given a design head of water (typically 30mm). Rain water outlet capacity should be taken from
properly certificated information provided by manufacturers, and the resulting number and
· The available upstand height at the high end of the falls. This may be a limiting factor on the layout of outlets should allow for obstruction and drag due to any additional surface finishes,
1:80 finished
length/size of the balcony/terrace area to be drained. If necessary additional rainwater outlets such as walkways. The drainage above the waterproof covering and below any raised decking Mitres should be
finishes must not be restricted or blocked by the decking supports. The decking supports must fall
should be provided. a minimum 1:80
· Avoidance of ponding behind wide obstructions to the drained slope such as plant plinths or allow free drainage of all areas of the roof to the designated outlets. finished fall.
roof lights. Additional rainwater outlets and/or insulation crickets should be provided. RWO
· Avoidance of gutters by designing with intersecting roof planes. The drainage above the waterproof covering and below any raised decking finishes must not be
· Falls between rain water outlets along a perimeter. restricted or blocked by the decking supports. The decking supports must allow free drainage
of all areas of the roof to the designated outlets
Since the primary function of the roof is to exclude water, it is important to consider how best to
direct this into the drainage system. · Rainwater outlets should be readily accessible without disruption to the pedestrian finish. separate gutter
On finishes raised above the waterproof membrane (warm deck roofs) or Water Control RWO to fall
Ponding on membrane roofs should be avoided because; Membrane (inverted roofs), this may be achieved by a suitably marked paving slab or
demountable section of decking. Gutters must be a
· It encourages the deposit of dirt and leaves, which can be unsightly, may obstruct outlets
· Where rainwater downpipes from other higher roof areas or balconies discharge via a
minimum of 1:80
lower balcony or terrace, an open downpipe shoe is not permitted. The downpipe should 1:80 finished
and/or become a slip hazard. as-built fall towards
· In the event of damage, the interior will suffer increased water ingress.
be connected directly to the downpipe serving the lower balcony or terrace. fall the drainage outlet.
· The load may cause progressive deflection of the deck.
· Ice or algae may create a slip or wind hazard, particularly on walkways.
Rainwater outlets
Independent research has shown that roofs with extensive ponding require increased The following should be confirmed by reference to the manufacturer's information or
maintenance input. independent certification, as appropriate:
RWO Box gutter RWO
Waterproof coverings of all types are tested for water absorption and water tightness as part of
· Capacity in litres per second at a range of typical water heads.
· Compatibility with the waterproof membrane.
third-party certification. However, the construction process, including the installation of
· Integral insulation to avoid condensation.
components and the forming of seams, is clearly facilitated in dry, well-drained conditions.
· Method of attachment.
· Rainwater outlets for inverted roofs should be of the dual height type, designed to Siphonic drainage
Note: Rainwater outlets and downpipes can constitute thermal bridges which may increase the maximise removal of rainwater at WCM level.
risk of localized condensation; an assessment might be required to determine whether insulated
outlets are to be used. All waterproof membranes are compatible with siphonic roof drainage systems, which for larger roofs
Roofs which drain to a single internal outlet or combined outlets connected into a single offer many advantages:
downpipe should be provided with an overflow to drain and warn of outlet/downpipe blockage · Very high capacity, enabling fewer outlets and therefore less detailing work on-site.
and so avoid the risk of flooding. The capacity of the overflow should be not less than that of · Smaller bore horizontal collector pipework, enabling reduced roof void depth.
the outlet or combined outlets and its discharge should be visible but directed away from the · Self-cleaning in many situations.
building. Over flows should be positioned as close to the outlets as possible to avoid rainwater
build up on roofs. Note: Siphonic drainage is generally not appropriate for inverted roofs.
For further information see www.siphonic-roof-drainage.co.uk
These roof proposal are to be considered on a case by case basis and full design and calculations
should be submitted for Warranty approval before construction begins on site.
© MD Insurance Services Limited 2020 359 BALCONIES AND TERRACES

12.1.9 FORMING
ROOF: Waterproof
Waterproof membranes
membranes
Materials - Requirement If restraint relies upon adhesive alone, the membrane manufacturer shall provide evidence of Liquid applied membranes
satisfactory testing for resistance to wind load using a method defined by the Single Ply Roofing
Compatibility of components Association. There is no harmonised European Product Specification for liquid applied membranes for roofing.
The selection of components within the roofing system should be discussed in detail with the The European Technical Approval Guideline ETAG 005 Part 1 - General gives overall guidance
membrane manufacturer or appropriate trade association to ensure chemical and mechanical If the remainder of the roof system is to be bonded, it is essential that the design resistance to on assessment of fitness for use, including methods of verification and attestation of conformity.
compatibility between components, since the incorrect specification may lead to reduced wind load is also achieved for the attachment of these components. The remaining seven parts, known as the Complementary Parts or the ETA Parts, deal with
performance or premature failure of the roofing system. The correct choice of insulation is also specific requirements for particular families of products, and are therefore generic types covered
important when it is to be adhered to the substrate. In case of doubt, the insulation manufacturer Irrespective of the wind uplift considerations or distribution requirements for securing the
primarily by this Guidance Note, shown as follows:
or relevant trade association should be consulted. membrane, the fixing of the insulation boards should always be considered separately, unless
specifically sanctioned by the membrane manufacturer. The number and distribution of · Part 2: Polymer modified bitumen emulsions and solutions.
mechanical fasteners required to fix the insulation boards may vary with the insulation type, · Part 3: Glass reinforced resilient unsaturated polyester resins.
General geographical location of the building, topographical data and the height of the roof concerned.
Materials for use in flat roofing systems are suitable only if the manufacturer has declared · Part 4: Flexible unsaturated polyesters.
compliance with the relevant harmonised European Assessment Document (ETA, previously a · Part 5: Hot applied polymer modified bitumen.
The upper termination of the single ply membrane at linear details such as plinths, parapets, · Part 6: Polyurethanes.
European Assessment Guideline, ETAG) and has affixed the CE Mark to the product. All abutments and door openings should be secured by one of the following mechanical means:
waterproof membrane products shall also have a certificate of fitness for purpose issued by a · Part 7: Bitumen emulsions and solutions.
member of the European Union of Agrément (UEAtc). This may comprise a British Board of · Part 8: Water dispersible polymers.
· Clamping beneath a metal rail, e.g. a parapet capping or roof light frame.
Agrément certificate or an equivalent certificate of another UEAtc member. · Welding to a membrane-metal laminate trim (itself mechanically fixed). The manufacturer of a product for use in flat roofing should declare compliance with the relevant
· Mechanical fixing using individual fasteners or a mechanically fixed termination bar. parts of ETAG 005. In the absence of this declaration, the product should have a current
Requirement
certificate of fitness for purpose issued by one of the following:
The waterproof membrane should be selected with regard to the following minimum criteria: The welding of single ply membranes is a critical process. The following should be considered:
· · British Board of Agrément.

Anticipated service life based on independent certification. · Supply of certification for each installer indicating successful completion of the · Another member of the UEAtc.
· Minimum maintenance. manufacturer's product specific training.
· · Another notified body.
Ease of adaptation and repair. · Provision of consistent electrical power supply.
· Production and retention of test weld samples at the start of each day. Such certification should be accompanied by full instructions for installation.
External fire performance · Declared procedures for repair of weak welds or damage.
Installation of Liquid Applied Membranes
All roof coverings within close proximity of buildings must achieve the fire designation required by
the relevant Building Regulations. Warm roof systems with polymeric single ply membranes There is no British Standard for the installation of liquid-applied membranes. Installation should
be in accordance with the Liquid Roofing and Waterproofing Association guidance, as follows:
Statutory requirement Where the insulation is mechanically fixed, the number and arrangement of fasteners required to
Design for external fire performance must comply with current Building Regulations. resist wind load will be prescribed by the manufacturer, applying a safety factor of two to the · Guidance Note No. 2 - Substrates for liquid applied waterproofing.
design load on each fastener. This arrangement may vary across the roof according to wind load, · Guidance Note No. 4 - Roof, Balcony and Walkway Refurbishment Using Liquid applied
Certification of system but should be followed in all areas. Thermal break fasteners shall be used wherever feasible. Waterproofing Systems.
The manufacturer of the waterproof membrane must demonstrate by reference to independent · Guidance Note No. 5 - Health and Safety Provision for LAWS on Roofs, Balconies and
test certification that the system of waterproofing and insulation (type and thickness) for a Where the insulation is adhered, the adhesive should be approved by the insulation Walkways.
particular project meets or exceeds the minimum level of fire performance defined by the Building manufacturer and should be laid at the coverage rate and pattern designed to achieve calculated · Guidance Note No. 6 - Safe Use of Liquid applied Waterproofing Systems.
Regulations. wind load with a safety of factor of two times (200%). The contractor should allow for temporary · A consistent film thickness is essential for reliable and durable liquid-applied membranes.
loading as required to achieve a suitable adhesion and to achieve the best possible level in the
Polymeric single ply membranes upper surface of the insulation. The following should be considered:
The manufacturer should declare compliance with the harmonised European Product Methods of restraint of a single-ply membrane at perimeters · Supply of a card for each installer indicating successful completion of the manufacturer's
Specification for single ply membranes, BS EN 13956, which defines requirements for testing product-specific training.
and declaration of characteristic values.
· The coverage rate in kg/m2 must be declared before work starts.
There is no relevant British Standard. Products suitable for roofing should have current
Perimeter · During installation assessment of wet film thickness by one of the following methods as
certification by one of the following: restraint appropriate:
· Gauge pin.
· British Board of Agrément. Single-ply · 'Comb' type measurer.
· Another member of the UEAtc. membrane · Visual inspection.
· Another notified body.
Thermal
Such certification should be accompanied by full instructions for installation. insulation
There is no British Standard for the installation of single ply membranes. Installation should be in Air vapour
accordance with the Single Ply Roofing Association's Design Guide to Single Ply Roofing and control layer
with the specific instructions of the membrane manufacturer.
The attachment of the single ply membrane should be designed to resist calculated wind load by
a declared safety factor of two times (200%). This design will normally be provided by the
membrane manufacturer.
Whatever the means of attachment, specific restraint is always required at the roof perimeter, at
changes of slope and around details. This ensures that any tension in the membrane in the roof
field or upstand is not transferred to the other as a peeling action.
Perimeter restraint is achieved by several methods, depending upon the manufacturer:
· Individual fasteners, protected by a flashing.

· A linear bar, protected by a flashing.
· Welding the field sheet to a membrane-coated metal trim secured to the deck (with thermal
break fasteners where appropriate).

© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 360
360
12.1.10 FORMING
ROOF: Waterproof
Waterproof coverings
coverings
Mastic asphalt Minimum recommended specification for reinforced bitumen membranes Site-applied hot-melt coverings
There is no harmonised European Product Specification for mastic asphalt for roofing. Products There is no harmonised European Product Specification for site-applied hot-melt waterproofing
Roof system Deck type Insulation Venting Underlayer Cap
used for flat roofing should comply with BS 6925: 1988 Specification for mastic asphalt for systems.
type(1) layer(2) (3)
buildings and civil engineering (limestone aggregate).
type sheet(4)
Proprietary grades of polymer modified mastic asphalt are produced for roofing and paving
Warm deck Profiled Thermoplastic 3G S2P3(5) S4P4(5)
metal foam
applications. There is no British Standard or European Standard for these products. · British Board of Agrément
Mineral fibre - S2P3 S4P5 · Another member of the UEAtc
Products suitable for roofing should have current certification by one of the following: · Another notified body
Concrete Thermoplastic - S2P3 S4P4
· British Board of Agrément. foam As these systems comprise a multi-layer application (usually a base coat, reinforcement and top
· Another member of the UEAtc. coat), a detailed specification for the system should be available prior to commencement of the
Mineral fibre - S2P3 S4P4
· Another notified body. works to enable its suitability for the project to be confirmed.
Timber panel Thermoplastic 3G S2P3 S4P5
The separating membrane should be one of the following, and should be laid directly under the foam Site-applied hot melt coverings
mastic asphalt:
Mineral fibre - S2P3 S4P4 There is no British Standard for the application of proprietary hot melt waterproof membrane
· Sheathing felt, comprising a base of flax or jute, or other suitable fibres, impregnated with systems. Reference should be made to independent certification and the manufacturer's detailed
bitumen. Inverted warm Profiled Extruded 3G S2P3 S4P5
deck Polystyrene instructions.
· Glass fibre tissue. metal
(XPS)
Concrete - S2P3 S4P5 Fixing of guarding/balustrades
Bitumen-coated plain expanded metal lathing should be in accordance with BS EN 13658-2.
Timber panel Deck type not suitable for inverted roofs Fixings for balustrades must be carefully designed to ensure appropriate fixings are robust and
Stone chippings (bedded) for use as a protective topping should be washed, crushed rock,
Notes: any penetration through waterproof roof coverings is sealed correctly in accordance with the
normally 10mm-14mm nominal size aggregate, bedded in a proprietary gritting solution over the
(1) Insulation type: Thermoplastic foam: PIR, EPS, PF. Mineral fibre: MW waterproof covering manufacturer's recommendations.
mastic asphalt membrane.
(2) Venting layer: BS 8747 3G or proprietary equivalent with suitable certification
(3) Under layer: as defined in BS 8747. SBS-modified products are recommended Protection of waterproof system during construction
Warm roof systems with mastic asphalt waterproofing
(4) Cap sheet: as defined in BS 8747. SBS-modified products are recommended
(5) S and P are classifications 1-5 of Strength (tensile strength and elongation) and resistance At the earliest possible stage, the anticipated loading of the balcony, terrace or podium area by
Generally, mastic asphalt on sheathing felt provides sufficient dead load to resist wind load, but plant and access during service should be assessed in terms of:
this should be demonstrated by calculations in all situations. to puncture (static and dynamic); the higher the rating, the higher the performance
· Load, e.g. foot traffic, equipment.

Installation of mastic asphalt · Frequency.
Bitumen membranes should be protected from solar radiation. This should be by integral
· Risk of impact.
The number of coats should be appropriate to the waterproofing requirements and traffic protection provided in the product in the form of:
conditions of the roof. When laid to falls of 1:80 or more, mastic asphalt roofing is laid in two If such usage is intense or long-lasting during the construction phase, consideration should be
coats to a thickness of 20mm, on a separating membrane of sheathing felt, all in accordance with · Mineral granules.
given to temporary works only, with completion occurring after all non-roofing usage has ceased
BS 8218. · Metal foil.
as follows:
The use of solar reflective paint is not permitted. The use of stone chippings is not recommended
On sloping and vertical surfaces over 10° pitch, the mastic asphalt should be laid in three coats · Warm deck roof system: installation of temporary vapour control layer (VCL) to be overlaid
to a thickness of 20mm without a separating membrane. unless required to achieve enhanced external fire performance. If used, chipping's should be when remainder of system is installed.
washed, crushed rock, normally 10mm-14mm nominal size aggregate, bedded in a proprietary · Inverted warm deck roof system: overlay of completed waterproof membrane with geotextile
On sloping and vertical surfaces of timber or lightweight concrete, the mastic asphalt should be gritting solution. and continuous temporary decking, such as plywood, oriented strand board or compatible
laid in three coats to a thickness of 20mm on expanded metal lathing over a separating recycled thermoplastic board.
membrane of sheathing felt.
Warm roof systems with reinforced bitumen membrane waterproofing
Responsibility for temporary protection and a method statement for its use should be agreed
Reinforced bitumen membranes prior to the commencement of works. Suitable materials should be selected in consultation with
The limiting wind load for the different methods of attachment of insulation is prescribed by BS membrane manufacturers as appropriate, for example:
The manufacturer should declare compliance with the harmonised European Product 8217 as follows:
Specification for reinforced bitumen membranes, BS EN 13707, which defines requirements for · Linked recycled thermoplastic sheets.
2
testing and declaration of characteristic values. There is no relevant British Standard. · Partial bitumen bond: up to 2.4kN/m . · Rolled recycled thermoplastic or elastomeric sheets.
· Full bitumen bond: up to 3.6kN/m2.
Particular consideration should be given to locations of concentrated access, such as step-out
· British Board of Agrément. Where the method of attachment is outside the scope of BS 8217, the manufacturer should areas onto the roof or where wheeled equipment may be used.
· Another member of the UEAtc. demonstrate that the method provides sufficient resistance to wind load.
· Another notified body. Provision for access
Reinforced bitumen membranes installation
In addition, specifications for systems of multi-layer reinforced bitumen membranes for flat
roofing should comply with BS 8747. Statutory requirement
Installation should be in accordance with BS 8217. In case of doubt, or where the waterproof
Balconies should have suitable access and drainage meeting the requirements of the current
membrane is beyond the scope of the Standard, the advice of the Flat Roofing Alliance (National
Federation of Roofing Contractors) should prevail.
The safe use of gas torches, and the positioning, monitoring and transferring hot bitumen to the Ancillary components
work face, should be adopted, all in accordance with the Health and Safety Executive/Flat
Roofing Alliance Code of Practice for Safe Handling of Bitumen. Lightning protection
The following should be confirmed by reference to the manufacturer's information or independent
The practice of applying reinforced bitumen membranes by torching onto thermoplastic foam certification, as appropriate:
insulation is not permitted, unless the boards are manufactured with a covering of reinforced
bitumen membrane. · Design in compliance with BS EN 62305.
· Method of attachment to the waterproof membrane, including arrangements for
self-ballasting of conductors and finials (centres, compressive loads).
· Recommended detailing at penetration of roof system.

12.1.11 FORMING
12.1.11 FORMINGAA ROOF:
ROOF: Level
Levelthreshold
thresholddetailing
detailing
Detailing Upstand at door access - Warm deck roof - Level threshold
General principles
At an early stage in the design process, an audit of balcony/terrace geometry should be carried out
to establish what types of details will be required and whether they are to be weather proof Drainage gully to be
provided in front of door Min 45mm
(incorporating an upstand/cover flashing arrangement) or waterproof (providing continuous
openings overhang
waterproofing across the detail).
Surface treatment
The following key principles should be followed in the design of all details:
Supports for surface Min 10mm
· Upstands to extend 150mm above finished roof level, except at door access to balconies and
treatments should not
terraces.
impede drainage
· Downstands (of separate metal or other flashings) should lap the upstand by a minimum of
75mm.
· Where the balcony or terrace forms part of the entire roof of an occupied building, a continuous Min 75mm
barrier to air leakage should be maintained.
· Reliance on sealant as the sole means of protection is not acceptable.
Waterproof membrane
The total roof zone depth should be assessed at critical points, such as the top of drainage slopes, to adequately lapped on
ensure there is enough free upstand available to create the minimum required 150mm of the wall structure
waterproofing protection above finished roof level. It is important that this minimum 150mm upstand Waterproof membrane underneath the door
is maintained at all points around the waterproofed area, except at door access to balconies. frame
Balconies are a frequent and acceptable exception due to the need for level or unobstructed access, Waterproof membrane
provided the recommendations in this section are followed. should be laid to falls
Insulated upstand
away from the door
Designers should carefully consider the risks of any departure from this criterion. In the event that
variation of this guidance is unavoidable a written justification for assessment by the Warranty
Surveyor should be provided by the balcony designer. Insulation Structural deck
Special design features are essential, depending upon the generic type of waterproof membrane, AVCL
including:

· Penetrations.
· Supports.
Upstand at door access - Inverted warm deck roof - Level threshold
Drainage gully to be
provided in front of door Min 45mm
openings overhang
Surface treatment
Supports for surface Min 10mm

treatments should not
impede drainage
Min 75mm
Waterproof membrane
adequately lapped on
the wall structure
Filter layer underneath the door
frame
Insulated upstand
Insulation Structural deck
Waterproof membrane

© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 362
362
12.1.12 FORMING
ROOF: Penetrations
Penetrations ininbalconies/terraces
balconies/terracesand abutments
and withwith
abutments pitched roofsroofs
pitched
Penetration through roof system Principles: Flat roof interface to pitched roof
Air seal
Renewable energy capture equipment Waterproof membrane
Insulation
Additional insulation min Renewable energy capture equipment includes photovoltaic
collar 75mm panels and multi-panel arrays, solar thermal panels and Drip detail varies with type
multi-panel arrays and wind turbines. All such equipment of waterproof membrane
Waterproof membrane
should be secured to a frame and/or posts that transfer their
min 150mm from top of surface Lead flashing
load directly to the structure. The roof system and waterproof
Surface treatment treatment due to issues such as membrane should be designed to enable equipment to be
snow de-mounted without loss of the roof's waterproofing integrity
Insulation
and without the involvement of the roofing specialist. Support
systems based on 'top-fixed' plate and post components
should be accompanied by documentation to demonstrate
their compatibility with the waterproof membrane.
Notes:
· An effective seal is required between the air vapour control layer and pipe. Clearly it is difficult to dress a
Edge protection
sheet material around a pipe. The method for doing so should be stated in the contract drawings and/or
specification.
If guarding to the perimeter of flat roofs should be
designed to provide the simplest means of achieving
Special design features
waterproofing integrity, given that installation of
balustrade or stanchions may occur after the
Special design features are essential, depending upon the generic type of waterproof membrane, including:
installation of the roof system.
If the design requires a collar of waterproof membrane
at the stanchion, the stanchion should be of circular
· Penetrations.
section at this point and should incorporate a
· Supports.
min 150mm from top of weathering apron.
Mechanical and electrical services surface treatment due to
issues such as snow Fall-arrest and edge protection equipment
Detailed design should take account of the installation of such equipment by other (usually following) trades,
as follows: The following should be confirmed by reference to the
manufacturer's information or independent certification,
· Service entry/exit points should be suitably weathered to enable connection without loss of integrity of the as appropriate:
waterproof membrane and without the involvement of the roofing specialist.
· The upstand of the waterproof membrane at risers should be arranged to enable a separate downstand or · Compliance with BS EN 795.
weathering flashing to be formed in ductwork.
· Method of attachment.
· Cladding to insulation placed around ductwork should not be sealed to the waterproof membrane. · Compatibility with the waterproof membrane.
· Sufficient clearance should be provided to horizontal ductwork to ensure it does not rest upon the · Means of forming a water tight seal to the
waterproof membrane or roof finish. waterproof membrane.

12.1.13 FORMING
12.1.13 FORMINGAA ROOF:
ROOF: General
Generaldetailing
detailingand
andpedestrian
pedestrianaccess finishes
access finishes
Upstand to decking and paving finishes e.g where access is required Edge protection/guarding
The guarding to the perimeter of balconies/terraces should be designed to provide the simplest means of achieving waterproofing integrity, given that
installation of balustrade or glazing stanchions may occur after the installation of the roof system.
Protect upstand of waterproof
membrane Acceptable examples include the following, in order of preference:
Full-height parapet walls:

AVCL should extend fully up
· Stanchions or rails secured to low parapet walls above the level of the waterproof membrane (incorporated in copings or secured to elevation).
behind insulation
· Stanchions secured, clamped and sealed to stainless steel bolts set in raised plinths, which were constructed prior to application of the waterproof
membrane (suitable for warm deck and inverted warm deck roof systems).
· Stanchions secured, clamped and sealed to stainless steel bolts set at deck level, which were installed prior to application of the waterproof membrane
Minimum 10mm gap between (suitable for warm deck roof systems only).
pavers
If the design requires a collar of waterproof membrane at the stanchion, the stanchion should be of circular section at this point and should incorporate a
weathering apron.
min Pedestrian access finishes

Waterproof membrane
150mm
· The design should include protection to suit the anticipated conditions as appropriate.
· Pedestrian access finish and there supports should not impeded the ability for the balcony to drain to all outlets.
· Supports or pedestals to pedestrian finishes should not be mechanically fixed through the waterproof membrane.
· All pedestrian access finished should comply with the relevant Regional Building regulations in regards to combustibility requirements in regards to a
relevant boundary.
Pedestrian finishes for balconies/terraces
Roof system type Waterproof membrane type
Finish Warm Inverted Single Ply Bitumen Mastic Liquid

membrane membrane asphalt applied
Porous concrete tiles adhered to Y N N Y Y(2) Y

waterproof membrane (1)
Fired tiles bedded in screed and Y N Y Y Y(2) Y

Timber frame construction where a lower level construction meets a brick outer leaf wall to grouted (1)
roof abutment timber frame Precast concrete paving slabs on Y Y Y Y Y Y
adjustable supports (3,4)
Notes:
(1) Product should be certified for use with waterproof membrane.
Where a timber frame structure abuts a (2) Consideration should be given to the effects of solar gain on the stability of mastic asphalt under point loading in this situation.
masonry structure allowance should be made to (3) Paving support pad bearing area should be suitable for the compressive strength of the insulation under design loadings.
(4) Bearers should not impede drainage, and should be sized to suit the compressive strength of the insulation under design loadings.
accommodate movement in the timber frame
and ensure the appropriate cover is maintained
For detailing with parapet wall construction, see Non-access areas: stone ballast
the 'External Wall' section Stone ballast for inverted warm deck roofs and ballasted warm deck roofs should be clean, rounded aggregate graded 20mm-40mm and as free from fines
as practicable. Ballast should be applied over a protection layer on warm ballasted systems and over a filter layer or WCM on inverted warm roofs.
Allow for movement
and maintain a Access areas: concrete paving slabs
minimum 75mm Concrete paving slabs for use as walkways or as paving on terrace decks should conform to BS EN 1340, and be laid in accordance with the
cover manufacturer's instructions.
It is recommended that concrete paving is laid on support pads as this allows adjustment, reducing risk of trip hazard. Recommendations are as follows:
· The height of support pads should not exceed the maximum recommended by the manufacturer.
· Paving should not be cut.
· Paving should be firmly butted up against support pad separating pegs.
· Support pad separating pegs should provide clear space for rapid disposal of rain water between paving slabs.
· Provision for movement at perimeters should comprise either a 75mm margin of washed stone or a compressible rubberised fill. In either case
drainage should not be obstructed and a suitable restraint trim should be used to ensure stone does not fall beneath the paving adjacent.
Access areas: flexible walkway tiles

Evidence of the compatibility of the tile with the waterproof membrane is required.

© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 364
364
12.1.14 FORMING
ROOF: Approved
Approved installers
installersand
andtesting requirements
testing requirements
Testing Methods of test
Final inspection Low voltage earth leakage

At practical completion of the balcony/terrace, all areas should be clear of stored material, other site operations and all protection. A Low voltage earth leakage is a safe and effective method for the testing of waterproofing integrity in roofs where the waterproof
thorough, recorded, visual inspection of all areas, including details, should be carried out with representation from the General membrane is an electrical insulator and the deck provides an electrical earth. It is not suitable for testing flat roofs where the waterproof
Contractor and Roofing Contractor in attendance. membrane has been overlaid with insulation and ballast (inverted roofs) or ballast only (ballasted warm roofs); therefore, testing should
be carried out prior to completion of the roofing system.
Parameters for testing
Upon completion testing of the flat roof covering will be required to be carried out as per the following criteria. High voltage electrical discharge
The high voltage electrical discharge method is best suited to the testing of continuous thin films, such as liquid-applied coatings. Its use
Testing of flat roofs and balconies (All types of materials) is not recommended with polymeric single ply, reinforced bitumen membranes and mastic asphalt.
Testing is required in the following situations:
Vacuum
1. On large developments: Apartments etc. over 3 stories in height (including the ground storey), where the total combined Vacuum testing of seams of membranes manufactured off-site is an effective means of quality assessment, but is not recommended as
roof/balcony areas exceeds 50m2. In this case, a minimum of 20% of the roof areas must be tested. a method of demonstrating the integrity of flat roofs.
2. On Low rise housing: Detached/semi-detached/terraced housing 3 stories or less in height (including the ground storey) when:
· The roof roof/balcony areas exceed 50m2. Flood testing
· Where the project consists of 10 or more properties: one test per ten houses (with a minimum of two tests per site) are Flood testing is not recommended as a method of demonstrating the integrity of flat roofs. It may be used to test balconies.
required.
Approved Installers
In addition to above, in all cases: Testing may be required in the following situations where the complexity of a roof and its ancillary
components presents a higher risk. It will be necessary to identify this at the initial site assessment carried out between the Developer Where a roof falls into the criteria below, an approved contractor who is recognised by the manufacture as competent to install the
and the Warranty Surveyor: manufacturer's roof membrane system will need to be used. Evidence of the manufacturer's approval of the contractor to install their
products should be provided to the Warranty Surveyor.
Design:
A flat roof membrane manufacturer's approved installer must be used for all flat roof coverings in the following situation:
1. If the roof includes features beyond a typical wall abutment e.g. (but not limited to); variations of upstand
constructions/penetrations/fixings/external permanent machinery/balustrading fittings etc. · On large developments over 3 stories in height (including ground storey) where the total combined roof/balcony area exceeds 50m2.
2. If the waterproof membrane is to be covered over (by pedestrian finishes or solar panels). Note: Inverted roofs of straightforward · Low-rise housing less than 3 stories in height where the roof/balcony area exceeds 50m2.
design and with continuous hot-applied waterproof membrane could be exempted. · Where the roof includes features beyond a typical wall abutment e.g. (but not limited to) variations of upstand
constructions/penetrations/fixings /external permanent machinery/balustrade fittings etc.
Construction: · Where the waterproof membrane is to be covered over by pedestrian finishes, balustrades/fall protection devices or solar panels.
· Where EDPM roof coverings are proposed.
3. If there are to be/have been, follow on trades on the roof after completion of the roof covering.
4. If secondary items such as fall protection devices, PV supports, balustrades etc. are to be attached. Provision of information
Where EPDM roof coverings are proposed, no testing is required if : Operation and maintenance manual
The following information is required.
1. The EPDM product must has a valid third party product approval certificate.
2. The EPDM covering is installed by one of the manufacturer's approved contractors. Specification, as-built:
3. And the maximum size of roof is limited to 100m2.
4. Where the roof area exceeds 100m2, the proposal must be referred to SPRA for consultation. · Waterproof membrane: generic type, product(s) and (as appropriate) thickness.
Procurement of testing services · Acoustic insulation: generic type, product and (as appropriate) thickness.
If testing to demonstrate waterproofing integrity is required it should be undertaken by a suitably qualified and experienced third-party · Rain water outlets: type, product and capacity.
who is independent of the roofing contractor. · Procedure for maintenance of waterproof membrane, including (where appropriate) recommended frequency and method of
application of solar reflective finish.
The testing service provider should provide evidence of the following: · Procedure for repair of waterproof membrane.
· Efficacy of the method proposed in the circumstances of the project.

· Experience and training of operator.
· Membership of an appropriate trade association that sets a Code of Conduct for the service.

CONTENTS
13.
Contents
Chimneys
13.1 Masonry
13.2 Flues - Gas
and Flues


Workmanship W
1. A commissioning certification is required for any work completed by an approved installer. No
Materials Ma
Design
1. Chimneys, flues, flue-pipes, fireplace recesses and hearths shall be designed and constructed so that
they: De
a. Ensure efficient operation of the fuel-burning appliance for which they have been designed;
b. Are provided with sufficient air for proper combustion of the fuel;
c. Are structurally sound and do not adversely affect the structural stability of the building where they
pass through floors, walls or roofs;
d. Protect the structure and fabric of the building from the effects of fire;
e. Do not adversely affect the ability of the building to resist the effects of weather and ground
moisture;
f. Discharge the products of combustion safely to the outside air.
Lim
Limitations of Functional Requirements 1.
guidance.
CHIMNEYS AND FLUES

368
CHIMNEYS AND FLUES
13. 13.1
Masonry
Chimneys
and Flues

13.1.1 MASONRY:
13.1.1 MASONRY: Chimneyflashings
Chimney flashingsand
and weathering
weathering details
details
Weathering requirements Typical chimney details - Masonry
If the chimney is in a severe exposure zone the cavity should extend around the outside
of the stack and be continuous up to roof level, as per BS 5628, Part 3. Where the
chimney breast is gathered in, the lower projecting masonry should be protected with a
Brick corbel
suitable capping and cavity trays. A 50mm cavity at the back of the chimney breast is
detail or precast DPC below
maintained to prevent rainwater penetration. Further information can be found in the
concrete finish precast coping
'External Wall's section.
or similar
Corrosion of lead work
Maximum height of
Where free lime from mortar comes into contact with lead trays or flashings (due mainly DPC stack is 4.5 x
to the continual saturation of the brickwork) in areas such as chimneys, the lead should smallest width
be protected from corrosion by the use of a thick coat of bitumen paint covering the faces
likely to be in contact with the mortar. The protection against corrosion of lead work
buried in mortar is suggested in guidance issued by the Lead Sheet Association. This
treatment can also reduce the staining of lead and brickwork. It is unnecessary to treat
flashings buried only 40mm-50mm into mortar joints (cover flashings), as this close to the
drying surface the carbonation of free lime is rapid and there is no risk of corrosion in
such circumstances. Lead tray
No less than DPC below brick
Chimney tray - low level 150mm corbel
A chimney tray is required at low level where a cavity-walled chimney with brick
shoulders is built onto an external wall. The tray prevents water that may enter the
shoulders from penetrating to the inner leaf of the wall.
The material used is 1mm aluminium alloy sheet to BS EN 485-2; Aluminium and
No less
aluminium alloys. Sheet strip and plate, mechanical properties. This has a higher melting
than 150mm
point than lead, so is suitable for installation close to a heat source.
Lead tray If coping is jointless no
DPC is required
Chimney tray - high level If coping is jointed a
DPC is required
A high level tray may be required to prevent the entry of water at high level where a DPC should extend over
chimney rises through a pitched roof; suitable for new build or remedial work, this lead flashing and through
Use sheet DPC, code 4 lead to inner surface of liner and
minimises disturbance to surrounding construction in remedial work. (coated both sides with bitumen dressed up
paint for DPC)
The material used is lead sheet to BS EN 12588:2006 Lead and lead alloys. Rolled lead
sheet for building purposes. Code 4 as standard. Standard sizes are 800mm x 800mm,
900mm x 900mm, 950mm x 950mm, to suit either a 195mm square or 195mm diameter
circular flue.
Lead
Lined valley gutter
Lead work flashing
and upstand
Lead sheet used for roofs, flashings and weathering's should, in terms of suitability, be in
accordance with BS EN 12588 or a UKAS (or European equivalent) valid third-party
accreditation (e.g. British Board of Agrément, BRE, etc.) which demonstrates adequacy
and durability for use (see 'Appendix C - Materials, Products, and Building Systems).
Chimney tray - low level Typical flashings to chimneys Flashings to chimneys at ridge
Flue liners
Chimney stack
Back gutter tray
DPC Saddle flashing
Stepped cover
flashing overlapping Ridge tile
back gutter flashing
Low level Damp proof tray

aluminium tray
Chimney stack
Damp proof tray
CHIMNEYS AND FLUES

© MD ©
Insurance Services
Services 2020 2020
Limited 370370
CHIMNEYS AND FLUES
13.1.2 MASONRY:
13.1.2 MASONRY:General
requirements
Support Render directly applied to masonry chimney
If a chimney is not provided with adequate support using ties or not securely restrained, its height (measured to the top of the chimney) should not Rendering to chimneys should only be carried out where the masonry contains little or no sulphates. An appropriate specialist
exceed 4.5 times its least horizontal dimension when measured from the highest point of intersection with the roof surface (density of masonry sealer/bonding key coat should be applied prior to applying the main coat of render.
must be a minimum of 1500kg/m3).
A proprietary alkaline resistant mesh should be embedded throughout the render, the key coat should provide a sound substrate and
be compatible with the subsequent render system.
Proportions for masonry chimneys A specialist render system and mortar should be employed for chimneys with a masonry background.
Traditional hand mix render using standard sand and cement is not accepted. Only a pre-blended bagged render system will be
accepted as a suitable render system that has a third party accreditation such as BBA or ETA certification and backed up with a
manufacturer's specification.
The chimney which is to be rendered should be examined for excessive moisture content prior to rendering. This is particularly
H H important where the masonry background has no upper limit on its soluble salt content, e.g. 'N' designation clay bricks.
W W
Ensure that all joints are finished flush with the surface to avoid shade variations.
To minimise the potential for differential thermal movement and effects that the different suction that each type of background
material may create; the section of walling to receive the render should be constructed using the same type and density of material
throughout.
To control suction always apply a specialist sealer key coat or suitable render preparatory coat. Allow a minimum of 48 hours for the
key coat to fully dry before applying the next coat.
It is recommended that throats or drips to chimneys should project beyond the finished faces to throw water clear, a minimum of
40mm to the drip.
Level of highest point of Angles, stop beads and jointing sections should be secured with drilled or shot-fired fixings, and not with gypsum plaster.
intersection For further guidance, please see the 'External Walls - Traditional Masonry Cavity Wall - Rendered Masonry Clad' section.
Key: Coastal Locations

W - is the least horizontal dimension of the chimney measured at the same point of intersection.
H - is measured to the top of any chimney pot or other flue terminal. For the selection of construction materials and additional design requirements that may apply in coastal locations please refer to
'Appendix B - Coastal Locations' and 'Appendix C - Materials, Products, and Building Systems'.
Chimneys and flues
Flue liners should be used as specified with sockets uppermost and jointed with fire-resisting mortar. Flue liners should be:
· Non-combustible.
· Reasonably smooth internally.
· Correctly jointed with mortar with the space between the liners and the brickwork filled with weak insulating concrete, unless the manufacturer
recommends an alternative specification.
· Properly jointed at the junctions with the starter block or lintel and outlet terminal.
A notice plate containing safety information about any hearths and flues should be securely fixed in an unobtrusive but obvious position within the
building.
Where a chimney forms part of a wall, the foundation should project at least 100mm wider than the chimney base and should be the same depth as
the adjacent wall foundation. Factory made insulated chimneys should have a life of at least 30 years and be designed in accordance with BS 4543
and BS EN 1859, and installed in accordance with BS 7566. Where a chimney is not directly over an appliance or opening, a soot box accessible for
emptying should be formed.
© MD Insurance Services Limited 2020 371 CHIMNEYS AND FLUES

CHIMNEYS AND FLUES
13. 13.2
Flues - Gas
Chimneys
and Flues

13.2.1 FLUES
13.2.1 FLUES- -GAS:
GAS:Typical
Typical flue
flue installations
installations
Flues
Flue pipe within roof space
Ensure that all gas flues terminate to the open air, i.e. flueblocks must
terminate at an appropriate ridge vent or similar even where no
Support to flues at maximum appliance is fitted prior to the sale/occupancy of the property.
Max 1.8m
1.8m centres and located centres To demonstrate that flues comply with Building Regulations, reports
beneath each socket showing that flues have passed appropriate tests are to be made
available to the Warranty Surveyor upon request.
Angle of flues to be a maximum
Max A suggested checklist for these reports is provided in Approved
of 45° from vertical 45° Document J (England and Wales).
Bends and offsets should be Special blocks are made to accommodate gas fire flues, which tend to
formed only with matching be slightly thicker than normal units. When used in external cavity walls
care should be taken not to reduce the clear cavity width below 50mm.
factory made components
A notice plate containing safety information about any hearths and flues
should be securely fixed in an unobtrusive but obvious position within
the home.
Dry lining
Guidance in the relevant regional Building Regulations must be followed
Concealed space within for the siting of flues in close proximity to combustible materials;
the same dwelling including floors, roof and also external walls of timber frame
construction.
Boiler
Flue within concealed space
Means of access inspection hatches Flue to be adequately supported through its length
to be provided. Hatch size to be
minimum 300mm x 300mm
Balanced Flue
Flueblock chimneys
Where the flue passes through the external envelope, the flue should be
Joints to be sealed in suitably sealed to prevent water ingress
accordance with the flueblock
manufacturers instructions
For flues through timber frame, please see 'Chimneys and Flues - Flues
Boiler -Gas - Flue Outlet - Weather Protection and Differential Movement'
Factory made flueblock chimney
must have a performance equal to
designation T400 N2 D3G (BS EN Provision of guarding
1443) e.g. clay flue blocks meeting
requirements for class FB1 n2 (BS
EN 1806) (see Building Regulations) Minimum distance from flue
outlet to boundary must meet
Gas fire
appliance.
Boundary
Dry lining to be sealed
around the flue opening
Flue block chimneys in masonry Flues for gas appliances

cavity walls

CHIMNEYS AND FLUES
13.2.2 FLUES
13.2.2 FLUES - GAS:
- GAS: Concealedflues
Concealed flues
Concealed flues Example locations of access panels for concealed flues
Where a flue is routed within a void, appropriate means of access should be

provided to allow visual inspection of the flue.
Flue terminal Flue terminal
Means of access should be: External Wall
· Sufficiently sized and positioned to allow visual inspection to be under taken of

the flue.
· The access hatch should be at least 300mm x 300mm or larger where
necessary, to allow sufficient access to the void to look along the length of flue.
Means of access should not: Joint

Joint x
· Pass through another dwelling since access for inspection may not always be
available to that dwelling and flue system running through it. (flues may pass
through communal areas including purpose- designed ducts where inspection x
access is provided). Any intervening joints
· Impair any fire, thermal or acoustic requirements of the relevant building to be visible within
regulations. 1.5m of an inspection
Inspection Hatch hatch
Inspection Hatch
x
Joint
Joint Any intervening joints
to be visible within
1.5m of an inspection
hatch x
x
Joint
Inspection Hatch
Joint Inspection Hatch
Boiler
Accessible flue
connection
x
All voids containing concealed flues should have

at least one inspection hatch measuring at least
300mm x 300mm
No flue joint within the void should be more than

1.5m from the edge of the nearest inspection
Internal Wall
hatch, i.e dimension 'x' in the diagram should be
less than 1.5m
Boiler Where possible, inspection hatches should be

located at changes of direction. Where this is not
possible, bends should be viewable from both
Concealed flue directions
connection
CHIMNEYS AND FLUES

Services 2020 2020
Limited 374374
CHIMNEYS AND FLUES
13.2.3 FLUES
13.2.3 FLUES- -GAS:
GAS:Flue
Flue outlet
outlet locations
locations
Minimum separation distances for terminals in mm (England and Wales) Location of flue outlets
Location Balance flue Open Flue Flues serving gas appliances should be located as shown in the images below, and the table to the left.
Natural draught Fanned draught Natural draught Fanned draught
A Below an opening (1) Appliance rated 300 (3) 300 P

head input (net)
0-7kW 300 Q
>7-14kW 600 Q D,E Q
>14-32kW 1500
>32kW 2000 N
B Above an opening (1) 0-32kW 300 300 (3) 300 B I Boundary
>32kW 600 M C
C Horizontally to an opening 0-7kW 300 300 (3) 300 K F
(1) >7-14kW 400 A
H H
>14kW 600 H L J
G
D Below gutters, soil pipes or 300 75 (3) 75
I
drainpipes
E Below eaves 300 200 (3) 200 Boundary
F Below balcony or car port 600 200 (3) 200

roof
G From a vertical drainpipe or 300 150(4) (3) 150
soil pipe
H From an internal or external 600 300 (3) 200
corner or to a boundary Location of outlets near roof windows or openings, on pitched or flat roofs, from flues serving gas appliances
alongside the terminal (2)
I Above ground, roof or 300 300 (3) 300
balcony level
J From a surface or a 600 600 (3) 600 600mm
boundary facing the terminal
(2)
K From a terminal facing the 600 1200 (3) 1200
terminal
600mm
L From an opening in the car 1200 1200 (3) 1200 The flue should not penetrate
port into the building the shaded area
M Vertically from a terminal on 1200 1500 (3) 1500
the same wall
N Horizontally from a terminal 300 300 (3) 300
on the same wall
P From a structure on the roof N/A N/A 1500mm if a ridge N/A
terminal. For any other 2000mm
terminal, as given in
BS5440-1:2008
Q Above the highest point of N/A Site in accordance Site in accordance with 150
intersection with the roof with BS 5440-1:2008
manufacturers
instructions
Notes:
1. An opening here means an openable element, such as an openable window, or a fixed opening such as an air vent. However, in addition, Reproduced from Approved Document J Building Regulations England and Wales.
the outlet should not be nearer than 150mm (fanned draught) or 300mm (natural draught) to an opening into the building fabric formed for the
purpose of accommodating a built- in element, such as a window frame.
2. Boundary as defined in paragraph 0.4 (4) of Approved document J. Smaller separations to the boundary may be acceptable for appliances
that have been shown to operate safely with such separations from surfaces adjacent to or opposite the flue outlet.
3. Should not be used.
4. This dimension may be reduced to 75mm for appliances of up to 5kW input (net).
N/A means not applicable.
Location of outlets from flues serving gas appliances (reproduced from Approved Document J Building Regulations England and Wales).
Requirements may differ in Scotland please refer to the Scottish Building Regulations for further information.

CHIMNEYS AND FLUES
13.2.4 FLUES
13.2.4 FLUES - GAS:
- GAS: Flueoutlet
Flue outlet- -weather
weather protection
protection and
anddifferential
differentialmovement
movement
Guarding to flues Differential settlement
A flue outlet should be protected if persons could come into contact with it or if it could be damaged. If a flue outlet is in a Allowance should be made within the structure for differential settlement around flues, as well as ensuring the water tightness of
vulnerable position, such as where the flue discharges within reach from the ground or a balcony, veranda or window, it should the external envelope is maintained.
be designed to prevent the entry of any matter that could obstruct the flow of flue gases.
· Where core drilling is used to create an opening in the external masonry cladding to timber frame or metal frame buildings;
External weather tightness it should be ensured that suitable allowance is made for differential settlement within the external masonry.
· The core drill hole created in masonry cladding, will have to be elongated downwards to allow for the timber frame shrinking
· Where flues pass through the external wall construction (external weather proof envelope), they must be suitably sealed to and the flue pipe moving with it.
protect against water ingress. · Care should be taken to ensure that the depth of the external flange is suitable to maintain weather tightness at the time of
· A proprietary cavity tray may be required to be inserted over the flue if the flue opening in the external wall is formed after construction and once differential settlement has occurred.
the external wall is completed. · Cavity trays should be provided where appropriate.
Gas flues passing through chimneys

Differential movement at services - Timber frame
Where a gas flue passes through an external masonry chimney, please see the 'Chimneys and Flues - Masonry' section for
further guidance.
Lead work
Cavity tray lapped
Lead sheet used for roofs, flashings and weathering's should, in terms of suitability, be in accordance with this Technical up 100mm behind
Manual, or be in accordance with BS EN 12588 or a UKAS (or European equivalent) valid third-party accreditation (e.g. British breather membrane
Board of Agrément, BRE, etc.) which demonstrates adequacy and durability for use (see 'Appendix C - Materials, Products, and Noggings to frame
Building Systems'). opening
Weep hole
External masonry Cavity barrier
Flange
For further guidance on masonry construction see the 'External Walls' section.
Non-combustible sleeve
(extend to form cavity
barrier around opening, or
insert separate cavity
barriers around the opening)
Boiler flue
specification
Note: Internal linings and insulation has

Allowance for not been shown for clarity. A service
differential void may be specified. Sufficient
movement support and fixings for boiler may be
provided with noggings or board
material between studs or service void
battens
The installation of extractor vents is

similar
CHIMNEYS AND FLUES

Services 2020 2020
Limited 376376
CHIMNEYS AND FLUES
CONTENTS
14.
Contents
Driveways
14.1 Driveways and Paving
and Paving


Workmanship W
Materials Ma
1. External timber used in decking and supports should be adequately treated or finished to resist insect No
attack. Timber treatment should be in accordance with the relevant British Standards and Codes of
Practice. De
1.
Design
2. External vehicular and pedestrian access routes to the principal entrance shall be designed and
constructed so that they:
a. Permit safe and convenient access from the highway;
b. Are of sufficient width;
c. Are durable and weather resistant;
d. Reasonably level and consistent with adjacent features;
e. Suitably drained to prevent water logging of the ground near the building.

guidance.
Lim
1.
DRIVEWAYS AND PAVING

378
14. 14.1
Driveways and Paving
Driveways
and Paving

14.1.1 DRIVEWAYS
14.1.1 DRIVEWAYSAND
ANDPAVING:
PAVING: Disabled
Disabled access
accesstotoprinciple
principleentrance/firefighting access
entrance/firefighting requirements
access (dwelling
requirements houses)
(dwelling houses)
Vehicle access
Where a driveway is required by relevant Building Regulations, to provide access for fire fighting vehicles to
Where parking is not provided within The construction of the driveway allow a “pump” appliance to be able to get to within 45m of the entire dwelling house, the construction of the
the curtlage of the property, must be suitable and durable
provision for access in accordance driveway must be suitable and durable to take the additional loadings (at least a minimum of 12.5 tonnes).
enough to take additional
with Approved Document M should loadings where required The access width of the drive must be adequate (at least 3.7m) and if the driveway length is in excess of
be provided from the nearest drop 20m a turning circle or hammer head should be provided (see image below 'Turning facilities').
off point
A vehicle access route maybe a road of other route which, including any inspection covers should meet the
requirements in the table below 'Typical fire and rescue service vehicle access route specification'.
Typical fire and rescue service vehicle access route specification

900mm
Appliance type Minimum width Minimum width Minimum turning Minimum turning Minimum Minimum
Where a driveway forms all or of road between of gateways (m) circle between circles between clearance height carrying capacity
part of an approach route to a kerbs (m) kerbs (m) walls (m) (m) (tonnes)
principal entrance door, an Pump 3.7 3.1 16.8 19.2 3.7 12.5
additional allowance of at least High reach 3.7 3.1 26.0 29.0 4.0 17.0
900mm should be provided to
Notes:
allow wheel chair users to pass a
1) Fire appliances are not standardised. Some fire and rescue services have appliances of greater weight or different size. In
parked car. Further guidance can
consultation with the fire and rescue authority, the Building Control Body (BCB) may adopt other dimensions in such
be found in in the regional
circumstances.
Building Regulation requirements
for access to visitable dwellings
2) Because the weight of high reach appliances is distributed over a number of axles, it is considered that their infrequent use of
and buildings
a carriageway or route designed to 12.5 tonnes should not cause damage. It would therefore be reasonable to design the road
base to 12.5 tonnes, although structures such as bridges should have the full 17 tonnes capacity.
There should be vehicle access
for a pump appliance to within
45m of all points within the
dwelling house
Turning facilities
Turning circle,
hammerhead, or other point
Fire and rescue service vehicles should not at which vehicle can turn
have to reverse more than 20m from the end
of an access road
Turning facilities should be provided

in any dead end access route which
3.7m
is more than 20m long Where an access route is
required by relevant Building Exit
Regulations to provide access
for the firefighting vehicles, the
width of the route must be at
least 3.7m between the kerbs Max 20m
Limitations of the Technical Manual Functional Requirements
This guidance for drives and external pathways only applies to a drive and pathway that leads to the principal entrance to the
visitable dwelling/building.

Services 2020 2020
Limited 380380
14.1.2 DRIVEWAYS
14.1.2 DRIVEWAYSAND
AND PAVING:
PAVING: Driveway
Drivewayconstruction
construction- general requirements
- general requirements
Driveway construction Preparation of ground
Sub-base The area to be surfaced should be prepared by stripping away all vegetation and organic material. Land drainage should be considered for
A suitable sub-base that is capable of supporting the finished surface material should be provided. ground that is saturated.
Suitable sub-base material is considered as:
Excavation trenches e.g. service trenches, should be backfilled with granular type material to the required level. The backfill should be
· Weak mix concrete ST1 (site mixed acceptable). compacted in layers no greater than 150mm, and the fill material should at least have the same bearing capacity as the adjacent ground.
· Well graded crushed stone or recycled concrete (minimum aggregate size 75mm).
The minimum thickness of sub-bases are indicated in the below table.

Backfilling of trenches
Minimum thickness of sub-bases
Well graded crushed rock or concrete (maximum
size of aggregate 75mm) or lean mix concrete
Min sub-base
Use of surface Comments
thickness
Pathway 75mm
150mm
Driveway
(light duty) 100mm Light domestic traffic
Driveway Suitable for carrying small lorries e.g. refuse, vehicles, or

150mm
(medium duty) fuel delivery
150mm
Crushed stone or recycled aggregate sub-bases should be well compacted to adequately support 75mm well graded granular
the pathway or drive (see the table below). Where the ground below the sub-base is weak or soft fill laid and consolidated in
(typically <10% CBR), the sub-base should be designed by a Structural Engineer. max 150mm layers
150mm
Suitable compaction of sub-bases
Compactor type Compactor size Minimum number of passes
100mm sub-base 150mm sub-base
Vibrating plate 1400-1800kg/m² 8 Unsuitable

1800-2000kg/m² 5 8 Reduced ground level
>2000kg/m² 3 6
Vibrator roller 700-1300kg/m width 16 Unsuitable

1300-1800kg/m width 6 16
Retaining walls
1800-2300kg/m width 4 6
Engine driven <65kg 5 8 Retaining walls are outside the scope of this guidance, however where a retaining wall provides support to the structure or the primary
vibro-tamper 65-75kg 3 6 entrance to the property they should be designed by a suitably qualified Structural Engineer.
>75kg 2 4
© MD Insurance Services Limited 2020 381 DRIVEWAYS AND PAVING

14.1.3 DRIVEWAYS
14.1.3 DRIVEWAYSAND
ANDPAVING:
PAVING: Drainage
Drainage of
ofdriveways
drivewaysand
andpaths
paths
All paving and drives, with the exception of the principle level access into the dwelling, should be
Sloping sites towards property laid at least 150mm below the damp proof course (DPC) of the dwelling.
Laying of paths and drives
· Paths and driveways should be effectively drained to prevent ponding of water adjacent to
Suitably designed the building.
drainage system · Paths and drives should be laid to fall away from the building at a minimum of 1:80 and a
maximum of 1:12.
Catch pit provided · Rainwater should either discharge into a trapped gully or drain to garden land that is well
before discharging into drained.
drainage system. · Gullies should be trapped when discharging to a soakaway or combined drainage system
(the approval of the statutory sewerage undertaker may be required).
On sloping sites where external ground Drainage and gradients of access drives and paths
levels may direct surface water towards the
property, it is recommended that a
drainage channel is provided at a minimum 1:80
of 2m away from the property, with the fall
external level between the property and
drainage channel falling away from the
property at a minimum of 1:80
Min
2m
Min
1:80
Paving laid to falls away from building
When a drainage channel is provided, it must be connected to the storm drainage system to
prevent flooding occurring and water ingress into the building. An accessible silt trap should Rainwater should not discharge onto a
also be included to prevent excess debris entering the system. highway
Min Min
Where slotted surface water drainage channels are proposed to be used near the building 1:80 1:80 All paving and drives, with the exception
(e.g. in front of garage door openings) and the ground levels would otherwise cause water to of the principle level access into the
concentrate towards the building wall and potentially flood the building; a gradient should be
dwelling, should be laid at least 150mm
created for at least 2m away from the wall of the building to divert the water towards the Gully
slotted drain channel. below the damp proof course (DPC) of
the dwelling

Services 2020 2020
Limited 382382
14.1.4 DRIVEWAYS
14.1.4 DRIVEWAYSAND
AND PAVING:
PAVING: Ramped/level
Ramped/levelthreshold to principle
threshold entrance
to principle doordoor
entrance (dwelling houses)
(dwelling houses)
The construction of the access landings and ramps must not

compromise the DPC in the walls. A recommended 150mm gap
between the ramp and the external wall (as shown) should be
provided.
* See regional Building Regulations for disabled ramp design and

landing dimensions. Ramps should not exceed 1:12 gradient.
Where the outside ground levels slope towards the property, an
effective gully system should be provided to prevent flooding e.g. in
front of garage doors.
Underfloor
Ventilators Where access requirements are required under regional Building
Landing to a 1:60 Regulations to the principal entrance of the visitable dwelling the
fall away from ground surface of the defined approach route must be firm, even,
door smooth enough to be wheeled over, not covered by loose laid
DPC materials such as gravel and shingle and have a minimum cross-fall
of 1:40.
*
A drainage channel
(drained to a suitable
outfall) should be provided
to exposed level
entrances.
*
DPC
Tolerances for surfacing of paths and drives

RAMP
1:12 Max
Drives and paths: standing water
Min
Differences in the surface should not exceed +/-10mm from a 2m
150mm
straight edge with equal offsets. Some fracturing or weathering
may also appear if using natural stone due to the make-up of the
material. This tolerance applies to principle pathways and
Min 150mm
driveways to the dwelling that are required to meet regional
Building Regulation standards for access to visitable dwellings
and buildings.

Drainage system covers in hard standing areas should line up
neatly with the adjacent ground.
Further guidance on level thresholds can be found in the

'Windows and Doors' section

14.1.5 DRIVEWAYS
14.1.5 DRIVEWAYSAND
ANDPAVING:
PAVING: Edging
Edging details
details
Minimum thickness of surfaces for drives and paths Concrete Paving
(1)
Surface type Material specifications Minimum thickness British Standard Paving slabs should be placed on a 25mm bed of sharp sand or semi-dry mortar mix (sand/cement mix ratio 3:1). Joints between slabs
Path Drive should be no greater than 4mm for straight edge paving slabs, and should be filled with kiln-dried sand. A neat consistent joint should be
provided to rustic slabs. Slabs should be cut with a diamond blade cutter or similar to give a neat finish.
Macadam single course 40mm coated macadam 75 75 BS 4987
Rolled asphalt Coarse asphalt 10mm nominal 60 60 BS 594
size For paths the minimum thickness of pre-cast
Macadam two course Nominal 20mm coated 60 60 BS 4987 concrete paving (dense concrete) is 50mm
macadam
Nominal 6mm wearing course 20 20 BS 4987
Block paving Clay or calcium silicate 50 50 BS 6677
Block paving Pre-cast concrete 60 60 BS 6717
Concrete paving
Concrete Designated mix 75 100(2) 200x100mm precast concrete
Pre-cast concrete paving Dense concrete 50 n/a BS 7263:1 25mm sharp sand/semi
Concrete ST1 haunching:
Notes: dry mortar mix
The concrete should be haunched up the side of the
(1) Drive minimum thickness assumes standard loadings for a typical family car. Additional thicknesses are required where edging to give adequate support
increased loads are applied e.g. LGV vehicles. Sub-base
(2) Drives increased to 150mm on poor ground or clay Concrete edgings should be bedded on a 200mm
Reduced ground level
wide x 100mm deep ST1 mix concrete base
Edgings
Edgings are to be provided to paths and driveways to prevent movement or displacement. Edgings should be laid to ensure that
there are no excessive gaps and laid with smooth alignment along the top of the edging.
Macadam
Asphalt
Ensure that sub-bases are dried and primed and that the surface us appropriately rolled with a vibratory roller to the required finish.
Ensure that sub-bases are dried and primed and that the surface is appropriately rolled with a vibratory roller to the required finish.
For driveways and paths the minimum thickness of rolled Typical edging detail - Single course macadam
Coarse asphalt asphalt covering is 60mm for a typical family car; additional For driveways and paths the minimum thickness of
10mm nominal size thicknesses are required where increased loads are applied macadam single course is 75mm for a typical family
e.g. LGV vehicle car; additional thicknesses are required where
increased loads are applied e.g. LGV vehicle
200x100mm precast concrete
Single course
Sub-base
Concrete ST1 haunching: macadam. 200x100mm precast concrete
Reduced Concrete ST1 haunching:
edging to give adequate support
ground level The concrete should be haunched up the side of the
Concrete edgings should be bedded on a 200mm wide x edging to give adequate support
Sub-base.
100mm deep ST1 mix concrete base
Concrete edgings should be bedded on a 200mm
Block paving
Block paving should be laid on a minimum of 50mm sharp sand, and gaps between blocks should not exceed 5mm. All joints
should be filled with kiln-dried sand or similar. Blocks should be cut using a block splitter and the finished path or driveway
For driveways and paths the minimum thickness of
should be compacted with a plate vibrator. Care should be taken to ensure that the surface of the paving is not damaged or
scuffed.
Typical edging detail - Macadam two course macadam two course is 60mm for the base coat and
20mm for the wearing course. This is for a typical
family car; additional thicknesses are required where
Porous block paving joints increased loads are applied e.g. LGV vehicle
Where paving is designed to allow ground water to drain through the joints, the gaps between blocks and the material within Macadam 6mm
the joints should meet the initial design specification. The joint material should be sufficient to prevent blocking and prevent wearing course
moss growth. 200x100mm precast concrete
Nominal 20mm
coated macadam
For driveways and paths the minimum thickness of clay or Concrete ST1 haunching:
calcium silicate block paving is 50mm, for precast concrete Sub-base The concrete should be haunched up the side of the
the minimum thickness of block paving should be 60mm for edging to give adequate support
a typical family car; additional thicknesses are required
Block Paving Concrete edgings should be bedded on a 200mm
where increased loads are applied e.g. LGV vehicle
50mm
sharp sand
Sub-base Concrete ST1 haunching:

edging to give adequate support
Concrete edgings should be bedded on a 200mm wide x
100mm deep ST1 mix concrete base

Services 2020 2020
Limited 384384
14.1.6 DRIVEWAYS
14.1.6 DRIVEWAYSAND
AND PAVING:
PAVING: Edging
Edgingdetails
details
In-situ concrete
In-situ concrete should be laid in areas of 20m² maximum to allow for movement. Where abutting an adjacent structure, the
concrete should be isolated using a flexible jointing material. Where the sub-base is well drained, it is recommended that the
concrete is cast onto a damp proof membrane.
Typical cast in-situ drive or path abutting the dwelling
Typical edging detail - In-situ concrete
For paths the minimum thickness of concrete is

75mm and for driveways the minimum thickness of
concrete is 100mm. This should be increased to
150mm on poor ground or clay. This is for a typical
family car; additional thicknesses are required where
increased loads are applied e.g. LGV vehicle
Concrete

Sub-base
Concrete ST1 haunching:

Maximum bay
length 6m edging to give adequate support
Concrete edgings should be bedded on a 200mm

DPC
Isolation joint between concrete drive and

abutting wall i.e. bitumen impregnated
fibreboard. Drive located 150mm below
DPC in adjacent walls

14.1.7 DRIVEWAYS
14.1.7 DRIVEWAYSAND
ANDPAVING:
PAVING: Timber
Timber decking
deckingononaccess
accessroute
route
Limitations of guidance Board fixing
The following guidance is applicable to timber decking that forms part of the principle entrance to the property.
This guidance is limited to decking that is no more than 600mm above the adjacent ground level.
Timber decking on access route to principal entrance door
Where a driveway forms all or part of an approach route, an additional allowance of at least 900mm should be
provided to allow wheel chair users to pass a parked car. Further guidance can be found in Approved Document M.
Screw positioned
25% in from side
900mm
Fixing points at board ends shall be no closer than 25 mm
to the board end and should always be predrilled
to prevent splitting.
Timber decking
On grooved boards the fixing point should always be at
the bottom of a groove, flush with the surface of the
wood.
Screw heads should be countersunk level with the surface

of the board.
Pre drilling pilot holes will prevent splitting. Always drill

pilot holes 2mm oversized when fixing hardwood boards.
Screws should
be at least 2.5
x the depth of
the deckboard
The construction of the

driveway must be suitable and All metal fixings shall be made from corrosion-resistant
durable enough to take the materials, such as stainless steel, hot dipped, galvanised
additional loadings or other specialist coating. Before use, verify with the
manufacturer that the fixings you have chosen are
suitable for use with treated timber.
Aluminium fasteners should not be used with treated

wood. Prevent galvanic corrosion by using the same type
of metal for both fixings and connectors.
Screws should be at least two-and-a-half times the

thickness of the board being fixed.
All joist bearing points shall be secured by two

screws positioned at the quarter points of the board i.e.
25% in from the side.
Take care using high-pressure nail guns as they can

damage timber.

Services 2020 2020
Limited 386386
14.1.8 DRIVEWAYS
14.1.8 DRIVEWAYSAND
AND PAVING:
PAVING: Timber
Timberdecking
deckingonon
access route
access route
Timber decking
Only timber naturally resistant to decay, or which can be treated by an industrial process to give long-term protection from
decay, shall be used.
Hardwoods: Only use species rated as durable or moderately durable.

Softwoods: Only use species/components with natural durability or which have been treated in accordance with BS EN
335 to a 'Use Class' standard appropriate to their use i.e. 'Use Class 4' treatment for posts and other structural components
in direct ground or freshwater contact, or 'Use Class 3' treatment for all components out of direct ground contact subject to
frequent wetting.
Please note:
· Whitewood should not be used for posts embedded in the ground or for other elements (joists) in the ground or other
non-permeable surface e.g. concrete slab. Timber decking
· All crosscuts, notches or large boreholes shall be treated on site with a suitable preservative. For full guidance on
wood preservation specification, contact the Wood Protection Association.
Where the board abuts a post, allow
Timber grade (strength class): C16 minimum a 5mm gap
The grade (strength class) of timber used for structural components such as posts, beams and joists shall be sufficient to Where board ends meet, allow a
cope with the loads placed upon it during its service life. Softwood with a strength class rating of C16 is considered the 3mm gap
minimum standard for decks above 600mm in height, and is a requirement of Building Regulations for such raised-level
structures. The higher strength classes, typically C18 and C24, should be specified where smaller component sections,
longer spans or commercial deck performance design considerations are required. Allow for a min 5mm to max 8mm
gap between boards
For decks below 600mm in height, the use of C16 timber is also recommended.
DPC
Posts can be made from laminated sections, solid timber or round poles, and should have a load-bearing Timber decking
capability/size/spacing appropriate to the scale and end use of the structure. For extended life, the surface mounting of Min
posts on precast piers or metal shoes is recommended. 150mm
If site is sloping towards the
property, a drainage channel should
Note: be provided to prevent water logging
beneath decking
· Do not exceed the recommended load and span for each strength class; for detailed recommendations, refer to span
tables in TDA/TRADA Timber Decking: The Professionals' Manual.
· Use 'noggins'/blocking to strengthen frames where appropriate to prevent flexing. Ground level
· Timber moisture content at installation should be 20% maximum.
To minimise the effects of shrinkage, e.g. cupping, cracking, warping, etc. install timber as close as possible to the
equilibrium moisture content of the site. For outdoor wood, moisture content varies from 19% in winter to 13% in summer in
the UK. For best results, always install wood with moisture content lower than 20%. The stability of all wood used outdoors
can be improved by the use of water-repellent treatments.
Board spacing
When laying timber decking boards: Granular fill
· Allow for a 5mm minimum to 8mm maximum gap between board lengths.
· Where the board abuts a post, allow a 5mm gap. Water permeable layer
· Where board ends meet, allow a 3mm gap.
Fall
To aid drainage, build a gentle fall of 1:100 into the deck, away from any adjacent property. Grooved deck boards are
designed to assist the drainage of surface water, so lay them in the direction of the fall.
Level threshold
For further guidance on the formation of level thresholds please see the 'Windows and Doors' section.
Preparation of ground
The area to be surfaced should be prepared by stripping away all vegetation and organic material. Land drainage should be
considered for ground that is saturated.

14.1.9 DRIVEWAYS
14.1.9 DRIVEWAYSAND
ANDPAVING:
PAVING: Timber
Timber decking
deckingstandards
standards
Further specification references
· TDA/TRADA Timber Decking: The Professionals' Manual - second edition November 2006
· TDA Technical Bulletin TB 02: Statutory requirements
· TDA Technical Bulletin TB 04: Parapet design and construction
· TDA Technical Bulletin TB 08: Metal fixings
· TDA Code of Practice TDA/RD 08/01: Raised timber decks on new homes - desired service life 60 years
· Wood Protection Association: Timber Preservation Manual
British Standards
The standards set out below all have a relevance to the creation of high-performance timber decks:
· BS EN 335-1 Use classes of wood and wood-based products against biological attack - Part 1: Classification of Use
classes
· BS EN 335-2 Use classes of wood and wood-based products against biological attack - Part 2: Guide to the
application of use classes to solid wood
· BS EN 335-3 Durability of wood and wood-based products - Definition of hazard classes of biological attack - Part 3:
Application to wood-based panels
· BS EN 350-1 Durability of wood and wood-based products - Natural durability of solid wood - Part 1: Guide to the
principles of testing and classification of the natural durability of wood
· BS EN 350-2 Durability of wood and wood-based products - Natural durability of solid wood - Part 2: Guide to natural
durability and treatability of selected wood species of importance in Europe
· BS EN 351-1 Durability of wood and wood-based products - Preservative-treated solid wood - Part 1: Classification of
preservative penetration and retention
· BS EN 351-2 Durability of wood and wood-based products - Preservative-treated solid wood - Part 2: Guidance on
sampling for the analysis of preservative-treated wood
· BS EN 460 Durability of wood and wood-based products - Natural durability of solid wood: Guide to the durability
requirements for wood to be used in hazard classes
· BS EN 599-1 Durability of wood and wood-based products - Performance of wood preservatives as determined by
biological tests - Part 1: Specification according to hazard class
· BS 8417 Preservation of timber - Recommendations. Guidance for specifiers on the treatment of timber drawing on
relevant sections of BS EN standards
· BS 5756 Specification for visual strength grading of hardwood
· BS 6105 Specification for corrosion-resistant stainless steel fasteners
· BS 6399-1 Loading for buildings. Code of Practice for dead and imposed loads
· BS 7359 Nomenclature of commercial timbers, including sources of supply
· BS 5268-2 Structural use of timber. Code of Practice for permissible stress design, materials and workmanship
· BS 6180 Barriers in and about buildings - Code of Practice
· BS 6399-1 Loading for buildings. Code of Practice for dead and imposed loads

Services 2020 2020
Limited 388388
CONTENTS
15.
Contents
Heating
15.1 Standard Boiler - Gas
Services


Workmanship W
1. A commissioning certificate is required for any work completed by an approved installer. 1.
Materials Ma
No additional requirements. No
Design De
1. Heating services - shall be designed, constructed and installed so that they: 1.
a. Conform to all relevant statutory requirements;
b. Do not adversely affect the structural stability of the building;
c. Prevent the entry of hazardous ground substances, external moisture or vermin;
d. Are constructed using non-hazardous materials;
e. Are durable and robust;
f. Are safe and convenient in use.
2. An adequate and efficient hot water service shall be provided which is:
a. Sufficient for normal domestic purposes; Lim
b. Insulated to prevent unintended heat losses. 1.
3. Where provided, the central heating system shall be:
a. Efficient and suitable for normal domestic purposes;
b. Insulated to prevent unintended heat losses;
c. Capable of being adequately controlled;
d. Capable of maintaining suitable room temperatures.

guidance.
HEATING SERVICES
390
HEATING SERVICES
15. 15.1
Standard Boiler - Gas
Heating
Services

15.1.1STANDARD
15.1.1 STANDARD BOILER
BOILER - GAS:Service
- GAS: Serviceto
to the
the building,
building, controls,
controls,and
andspace
spaceheating requirements
heating requirements
Gas service Minimum efficiencies of heating systems
Where provided, the gas service shall be of a suitable scale for normal domestic usage. The boilers chosen for each building should be based on their efficiency within the PCDF list. The efficiency of the boiler should be no
less than indicated in the table below.
A meter control valve is to be fitted on
Gas service pipes in external masonry the supply side of the meter.
Central heating system fuel PCDF% (2009)
Mains natural gas 88
Cavity tray Mastic sealed duct Space heating
Any whole-house heating system should be designed to meet internal temperatures to the levels set out as per below. External
High level entry external meter box To appliances temperature is to be -3°C.
containing control valve and meter
position to be agreed with gas Whole house heating system - temperature
authority, requires brick opening
450mm wide x 530mm height Location Temperature Air changes
Living room 21°C 1 per hour
Dining room 21°C 1 per hour
Pipe covered or housed in duct 2 per hour
Kitchen 18°C
if required
Bedrooms 18°C 1 per hour
Bed-sitting room 21°C 1 per hour
Pipe clips if necessary
Bathrooms 22°C 2 per hour
Hall and landing 16°C 2 per hour
Separate WC 18°C 2 per hour
Gas main
Controls for combined space heating and domestic hot water

Service pipe extends to and
includes meter
Gas service pipes in a timber frame Space heating

A meter control valve is to be fitted on
zone
Timber sheathing the supply side of the meter
Cavity tray Allow for differential movement 3 way motorised

Spigot in wall, filled with non-setting valve
Cavity tray should extend 300mm compound and sealed at inner end with mastic
each side of box, dressed behind
breather membrane with weep holes Room thermostat to
each side Metal box wall control space heating
To appliances
Rear spigot
High level entry external meter box
containing control valve and meter Installation pipe Domestic hot water
position to be agreed with gas cylinder
authority, requires brick opening
450mm wide x 530mm height
Cylinder thermostat
15mm min air space between back
of box and breather membrane
Breather membrane carried
down behind meter box
Pipe covered or housed in duct Mastic seal Pump
if required Time switch
Holes in timber sheathing and
Pipe clips if necessary plasterboard elongated upward
by recommended differential
Gas main
movement gap to accommodate Boiler
Service pipe extends to and any downward movement of the thermostat
timber frame and sealed with Controls
includes meter
flexible mastic
Controls for wet heating systems are to be provided as follows:
External meter boxes should be of a type approved by the supply authority and located as close as practical to the main access point · A room thermostat controlling the heater unit.
to the building. · A time switch allowing at least two heating periods a day. In the case of electrically heated storage systems (Electricaire), there will
normally be a further time switch to control the electrical 'charging' periods to conform within the chosen tariff.
Domestic meters may be of the following type: · A programmer to select:
· Hot water.
· Built-in to the outer leaf of the wall. · Space heating.
· Surface-mounted on an external wall. · Hot water and space heating.
· Semi-concealed: sunk into the ground adjacent to the outer wall. A thermostat sensitive to the room air temperature should be provided for independent heaters.
· Individual, purpose-made compartments, in accordance with British Standards.
HEATING SERVICES
© MD Insurance LimitedLimited
Services 2020 2020 392 392
HEATING SERVICES
15.1.2 STANDARD
15.1.2 STANDARDBOILER
BOILER -- GAS:
GAS: Installation
Installationofofservices
services
Hot water services Installation of building services
Hot water systems may have provision for storage or may be of the instantaneous type e.g. combi boilers. All items should be installed to ensure satisfactory operation.
Vertical installation of cylinders is required with access, and cylinders are to be insulated as specified in the design.
Where an immersion heater is fitted, it should be:
· Locations and fittings of pipes and cable service entries through the substructure.
· Appropriate for the type of water supplied to the building. · Services must be sleeved or ducted through structural elements (and not solidly embedded) to prevent damage. Fire stopping
· Thermostatically controlled. may also be required. Services should not to be located in the cavity of an external wall, except for electricity meter tails.
· Located so that it can be withdrawn for replacement. · Only to be buried in screeds where permitted by relevant Codes of Practice.
· Fitted with an on/off switch.
Cisterns, vent pipes and all water services in unheated spaces should be insulated against freezing as specified in the design. Insulation is not to be placed below Pipes in floor screeds
a cold waste tank where it can benefit from heat from beneath. Tanks that are raised need to be insulated on all sides in an unheated roof space.
Where copper pipes are permitted in floor screeds, they should be:
Fully insulated bends and junctions are required, especially near openings to the outside air, such as the eaves. If possible, water pipes should not be located
within a loft space where they could be affected by cold ventilation air. · Sleeved or wrapped so that they can move freely along the length and at joints and bends.
· Jointed with capillary joints.
Provision for expansion
An expansion pipe is to be provided on vented systems for hot water. Services within or beneath floors
Unvented hot water systems Protection through wrapping or ducting is necessary when pipes are situated under floor screeds. Thermal expansion allowances are
to be made, especially at changes of direction.
Third-party accreditation is required where an unvented hot water system with a storage capacity greater than 15 litres is required by the design. Installation is to be
completed by a competent person.
Draining down facility

Recommended positioning of pipes in screeds
Hot water installations require the capability to be drained down.
Use of materials
Materials that are safe and minimise the risk of corrosion are to be used for pipes and fittings for water services. The recommendations of the water supplier with
regard to materials and fittings should be followed.
It may be necessary to fit aluminium protector rods in areas where the corrosion of copper cylinders occurs. These are to be fitted during manufacture, in
accordance with the relevant British Standards. Avoid locating pipe
runs within 200mm
Notches and drillings Radiator wide zone adjacent to
walls, except for final
Floor joists should not be excessively notched or drilled. Further information can be found in the Upper Floors guidance. branches to radiators
and where main runs
Concealed services through door openings
It is recommended that
If the services are hidden in walls or floors, they need to be positioned so that any significant cracking of the surface cannot occur.
pipes are laid in
accessible pipe ducts.
Chasing of masonry cavity walls
If chases in walls are necessary, their depth should not exceed:
200mm
· One-sixth the thickness of the single leaf for horizontal chases.
· One-third the thickness for vertical chases.
Hollow blocks should not be chased unless specifically permitted by the manufacturer.
Positioning of pipes in screeds Screed cover should be a minimum 25mm over the pipe
Pipework in walls and insulating materials. The screed thickness should still
be at least 25mm where pipes cross over.
A metallic tape should be applied to the pipework where plastic pipework is hidden within or behind wall surfaces, which would otherwise not be located by a metal Minimum
detector. 25mm cover
Jointing of pipes and fittings

Proprietary joints should be made strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Insulated pipe
within screed
Only fluxes recommended by the pipe manufacturer should be used, and all traces should be removed immediately after jointing. Fluxes containing lead are not
acceptable.
Suitable clips or brackets are to be used to secure. Fixings should be installed adequately and spaced to stop sagging but not restrict thermal movement. Where
needed, pipes should have adequate falls.
Sufficient room should be allowed for thermal expansion and contraction to avoid damage and noise from pipe movement.
Fire stopping
Fire stopping is required around services that penetrate fire-resisting floors, walls or partitions. If proprietary systems are used, they should be installed using the
manufacturer's recommendations. Further information can be found in the 'Upper Floors' and 'Internal Walls' guidance.
© MD Insurance Services Limited 2020 393 HEATING SERVICES

HEATING SERVICES
CONTENTS
16.
Contents
Ventilation
16.1 System 1 - Background Ventilators and Intermittent Extract Fans
16.2 System 2 - Passive Stack Ventilation
16.3 System 3 - Continuous Mechanical Extract (MEV)
16.4 System 4 - Continuous Mechanical Extract with Heat Recovery


Workmanship Wo
1. A commissioning certificate is required for any work completed by an approved installer. 1.
Materials Ma
Design De
1. Ventilation services - shall be designed, constructed and installed so that they: 1.

guidance.
VENTILATION
©
© MD
MD Insurance
Insurance Services
Services Limited
Limited 2020
2020 396
396
VENTILATION
16. 16.1
System 1 - Background
Ventilation Ventilators and Intermittent
Extract Fans

16.1.1SYSTEM
16.1.1 SYSTEM
1 -1BACKGROUND
- BACKGROUNDVENTILATORS
VENTILATORS AND
ANDINTERMITTENT
INTERMITTENTEXTRACT
EXTRACTFANS: General
FANS: requirements
Background ventilators and Mechanical extract ventilation rates

intermittent extract fans
Room Intermittent extract Continuous extract
30 l/s adjacent to hob

Kitchen 13 l/s
60l/s elsewhere
Utility (access via dwelling) 30 l/s 8 l/s
Bath/shower room 15 l/s 8 l/s
Sanitary accommodation 6 l/s 6 l/s
Extract ducts
Condensation trap Duct sloping to outside
Pipe to drain
condensate to
Insulating a vertical eaves Insulating a horizontal
extract duct extract duct
Correct duct installation
Flexible ducting Sealant

supports Sleeve
Adequate support is required for extract
Maximum length of ducts, and they also need to have
flexible ducting sealed joints where required. Insulation
Intermittent extract fans and background ventilation
needs to be provided where ducts pass
Max radius = the Airflow
A System 1 is suitable for use in houses and many flats or apartments with multiple external elevations. In some through unheated spaces, such as roof
diameter of the
circumstances, it can be difficult to comply with System 1, especially in dwellings with a single external elevation. voids, to the outside air, or a
flexible ducting used
condensation drain should be provided
The System comprises of background ventilators, usually trickle ventilators fitted to windows, and extract fans fitted in moisture Room terminal/ in accordance with the design.
producing areas or “wet rooms” such as kitchens and bathrooms. extract grille
Airflow
The background ventilators provide the whole building ventilation and also supply air to the intermittently operated extract fans Where ducts penetrate external walls
which provide the extract ventilation removing odours and excessive humidity. these should be adequately protected
Incorrect duct installation against adverse weather and moisture
Extractor fans ingress.
Where ductwork from extractor fans goes through unheated spaces such as roof voids, action should be taken to minimise the
chance of condensation forming in the ducting and any consequential damage caused to finishes and the fan unit. Peaks and Preferred flexible
troughs ducting route
· Ensure ducting discharges to the outside air.
· Provide insulation to the outside of the ductwork, and lay to a fall away from the fan.
The system should provide extraction rates in accordance with Building Regulation requirements Approved Document F. All Restrictions
habitable and service rooms within dwellings should have some form of ventilation as a requirement. It may be permanent
background ventilation, mechanical ventilation or an opening window.
VENTILATION
© MD Insurance LimitedLimited
Services 2020 2020 398 398
VENTILATION
16.1.2 SYSTEM
16.1.2 SYSTEM11- -BACKGROUND
BACKGROUND VENTILATORS
VENTILATORSAND
ANDINTERMITTENT EXTRACT
INTERMITTENT FANS:
EXTRACT Installation
FANS: of services
Installation of services
Background ventilation Services in timber frame
Background ventilation should be provided in accordance with the relevant regional Building Regulations. Where background In addition to general provisions for the installation of services, the following are of particular note for timber frame
ventilators (trickle vents) are installed in windows and doors, they must be correctly specified for the location and should be construction external walls:
installed so as not cause potential damage to render finishes or restrict the ability to open the window/door.
· The routing and termination of services should not affect the fire resistance of the structure.
Purge ventilation · Electrical services are to be rated for their location with consideration for insulation.
· Service penetrations through the VCL should be tight fitting to reduce air leakage and the passage of moisture vapour.
Purge ventilation should be provided in accordance with the relevant regional Building Regulations. Purge ventilation · Avoid running electrical services in the external wall cavity, except for meter tails.
provision is required in each habitable room and should be capable of extracting a minimum of four air changes per hour · Services should be protected with metal plates if they pass within 25mm from face of stud.
(ach) per room directly to outside. Normally, openable windows or doors can provide this function, otherwise mechanical · Adequate allowance for differential movement to occur without causing damage should be provided for rigid services
extract should be provided. rising vertically through a building.
· Services that pass through the external wall cavity and provide an opening (such as flues/vents) should be enclosed
with a cavity barrier and protected with a cavity tray.
Installation of building services
Further information can be found in both the 'Upper Floors', 'Internal Walls', and 'Electrical Services' guidance.
All items should be installed to ensure satisfactory operation.

· Locations and fittings of pipes and cable service entries through the substructure. If chases in walls are necessary, their depth should not exceed:
· Services must be sleeved or ducted through structural elements (and not solidly embedded) to prevent damage. Fire
stopping may also be required. Services should not to be located in the cavity of an external wall, except for electricity · One-sixth the thickness of the single leaf for horizontal chases.
meter tails. · One-third the thickness for vertical chases.
· Only to be buried in screeds where permitted by relevant Codes of Practice.
· Should not adversely effect the fire or sound performance of an compartment wall or floor. Hollow blocks should not be chased unless specifically permitted by the manufacturer.
Jointing of pipes and fittings Further information can be found in the 'Internal Walls' guidance.
Proprietary joints should be made strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Fire stopping
Suitable clips or brackets are to be used to secure. Fixings should be installed adequately, and spaced to stop sagging but Fire stopping is required around services that penetrate fire-resisting floors, walls or partitions. If proprietary systems are
not restrict thermal movement. Where needed, pipes should have adequate falls. used, they should be installed using the manufacturer's recommendations.
Sufficient room should be allowed for thermal expansion and contraction to avoid damage and noise from pipe movement. Issues that should be taken into account include:
Notches and drillings · Suitable design detailing of components passing through elements of the building.
· The location and type of dampers and firestops to be used.
Floor joists should not be excessively notched or drilled. Further information can be found in the Upper Floors guidance. · The integrity of protected stairs and halls.
· The integrity of walls and floors.
Concealed services · Additional requirements for flats and apartments with a floor above 4.5m.
Further information can be found in the 'Upper Floors' and 'Internal Walls' guidance.
If the services are hidden in walls or floors, they need to be positioned so that any significant cracking of the surface cannot
occur.
© MD Insurance Services Limited 2020 399 VENTILATION

VENTILATION
16. 16.2
System 2 - Passive Stack
Ventilation Ventilation

16.2.1 SYSTEM 2 - PASSIVE STACK VENTILATION: General requirements
16.2.1 SYSTEM 2 - PASSIVE STACK VENTILATION: General requirements
Passive stack ventilation Stack ducts Extract ducts
Where ductwork from extractor fans goes through unheated spaces such as roof voids, action should be
If the duct penetrates the roof more taken to minimise the chance of condensation forming in the ducting and any consequential damage
than 0.5 m from the ridge, it should caused to finishes.
extend above the roof slope to at least
the ridge height to ensure the duct The system should provide extraction rates in accordance with regional Building Regulation requirements
terminal is in a negative pressure Approved Document F.
region above the roof
All habitable and service rooms within dwellings should have some form of ventilation as a requirement. It
may be permanent background ventilation, mechanical ventilation or an opening window.
· Ducting should be insulated where it passes through unheated areas and voids (e.g. loft spaces) with
the equivalent of at least 25mm of a material having a thermal conductivity of ≤0.04W(m.K) to reduce
the possibility of condensation forming.
· Where a duct extends externally above roof level the section above the roof should be insulated or a
condensate trap should be fitted just below roof level.
Adequate support is required for extract ducts, and they also need to have sealed joints where required.
Insulation needs to be provided where ducts pass through unheated spaces, such as roof voids, to the
outside air, or a condensation drain should be provided in accordance with the design.
Passive stack ventilation (PSV)
The ducting should be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
The system is to meet the relevant third-party
accreditation.
Extract ducts
The PSV layout should be designed to:
· Avoid cross flow between the kitchen and

bathroom/WCs.
· Prevent, as far as possible, air flow in the ducts
being adversely affected by the prevailing wind
speed and direction, or by sudden changes in these.
· Minimise resistance to air flow by having ducts that
are as near to vertical as possible. Condensation trap
To ensure good transfer of air throughout the dwelling,

there should be an undercut of minimum area 7600mm2 Pipe to drain
in all internal doors above the floor finish (equivalent to condensate to eaves
an undercut of 10mm for a standard 760mm wide door).
Insulating a vertical extract duct
Whole-building ventilation
Suitable bends for passive stack ducts Unsuitable bends for passive stack ducts
The whole-building ventilation rate for the supply of air to the habitable rooms in a dwelling should be no
less than the rates stated in the table below.
Ducts should use no more than one offset (i.e. no more than two
bends) and these should be of the "swept" rather than "sharp" type to Whole-building
minimise flow resistance. Offset at an angle should be no more than
<45° 45° to the vertical.
>45° Number of bedrooms in dwelling
Ventilation
1 2 3 4 5
a, b
Whole building ventilation rate (l/s) 13 17 21 25 29
Notes:
a. In addition, the minimum ventilation rate should be not less than 0.3 l/s per m2 of internal floor area
Swept bends and Sharp bends and (this includes all floors, e.g. for a two-storey building add the ground and first floor areas).
shallow angles are angles reduce
preferred performance b. This is based on two occupants in the main bedroom and a single occupant in all other bedrooms.
This should be used as the default value. If a greater level of occupancy is expected add 4 l/s per
occupant.

401
401 VENTILATION
VENTILATION
16.2.2 SYSTEM
16.2.2 SYSTEM 22 -- PASSIVE
PASSIVE STACK
STACKVENTILATION:
VENTILATION:Installation of services
Installation of services
Ductwork installation Jointing of pipes and fittings
· Separate ducts should be taken from the ceilings of the kitchen, bathroom, utility room or WC to separate terminals on Proprietary joints should be made strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
the roof. Do not use common outlet terminals or branched ducts.
· Ducting should be properly supported along its length to ensure the duct can run straight without distortion or sagging Suitable clips or brackets are to be used to secure. Fixings should be installed adequately, and spaced to stop sagging but
and that there are no kinks at any bends or the connection to outlet terminals. not restrict thermal movement. Where needed, pipes should have adequate falls.
· In the roof space the duct should be secured to a wooden strut that is securely fixed at both ends
· A ridged duct should be used for system stability for the part of a PSV system which is outside, above the roof slope. It Sufficient room should be allowed for thermal expansion and contraction to avoid damage and noise from pipe movement.
should protect down into the roof space far enough to allow firm support.
Notches and drillings
Background ventilation
Floor joists should not be excessively notched or drilled. Further information can be found in the Upper Floors guidance.
Background ventilation should be provided in all rooms accept the rooms where PSV is located in accordance with the
relevant regional Building Regulations. Where back ground ventilators (trickle vents) are installed in windows and doors, they
must be correctly specified for the location and should be installed so as not cause potential damage to render finishes or
Services in framed structures
restrict the ability to open the window/door.
In addition to general provisions for the installation of services, the following are of particular note for timber frame
Please note: open flued combustion appliances will still require an air supply in accordance with Approved Document J. construction external walls:
Purge ventilation · The routing and termination of services should not affect the fire resistance of the structure.
· Adequate allowance for differential movement to occur without causing damage should be provided for rigid services
Purge ventilation should be provided in accordance with the relevant regional Building Regulations. Normally, openable rising vertically through a building.
windows or doors can provide this function, otherwise mechanical extract should be provided.
Further information can be found in both the 'Upper Floors', 'Internal Walls', and 'Electrical Services' guidance.
All items should be installed to ensure satisfactory operation.
Fire stopping
· Locations and fittings of pipes and cable service entries through the substructure. Fire stopping is required around services that penetrate fire-resisting floors, walls or partitions. If proprietary systems are
· Services must be sleeved or ducted through structural elements (and not solidly embedded) to prevent damage. Fire used, they should be installed using the manufacturer's recommendations.
stopping may also be required. Services should not to be located in the cavity of an external wall, except for electricity
meter tails. Issues that should be taken into account include:
· Should not adversely effect the fire or sound performance of an compartment wall or floor.
· Suitable design detailing of components passing through elements of the building.
· The integrity of protected stairs and halls.
· Additional requirements for flats and apartments with a floor above 4.5m.
Further information can be found in the 'Upper Floors' and 'Internal Walls' guidance.
VENTILATION
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 402
VENTILATION
16. 16.3
System 3 - Continuous
Ventilation Mechanical Extract (MEV)

16.3.1 SYSTEM
16.3.1 SYSTEM3 3- -CONTINUOUS
CONTINUOUS MECHANICAL
MECHANICAL EXTRACT
EXTRACT(MEV): General
(MEV): requirements
Continuous mechanical extract Design
The MEV system should be designed as a complete package, the performance of all materials and components should be considered
to ensure compatibility and performance of the system.
The MEV system should:
· Be designed to ensure that a satisfactory level of performance is achieve in accordance with the domestic ventilation compliance
guides supporting the relevant regional Building Regulations.
· The design should ensure even distribution of airflow taking account airflow resistance, including the bends and fittings.
· Have adequate fan capacity accounting for airflow resistance of the system.
· The ductwork should be as direct as possible.
· Installed in accordance with the design and manufacturers recommendations.
· Airflow resistance should be calculated in accordance with BS EN 13141-2 and manufacturers data.
Extract system The design should outline
· The location of all ductwork runs, the position of the fan units and controls.
· The size, type and position of ductwork and terminals.
· Direction of falls for all horizontally laid ductwork.
· Type of fixings and specified fixing centres.
· The location and type of ancillary components e.g those used for fire safety.
· Demonstrate the airflow-balancing figures for the proposed system.
MEV fan unit
The MEV fan unit should be adequately fixed to a part of the building that can support the load and fixed in accordance with the design
and manufactures recommendations.
Ductwork
The ductwork should provide suitable performance for the life of the system and should be ridged/semi ridged of a material that is
suitable for use in MEV systems and installed in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
It is important to ensure that all ductwork is:
· Suitably supported in accordance with the ductwork manufactures recommendations, this is generally secured with evenly spaced
clips at no more than 750mm centres.
· Horizontal ductwork should be laid to a fall in accordance with the design to prevent condensate collecting and should be installed
to a true line to prevent localised dips.
· Laid to a slight outfall when passing through an external wall to reduce the risk of water ingress.
· Suitably jointed using purpose design products that are durable, securely fixed and air tight in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations.
· Suitably insulated where it passes through uninsulated parts of the property or carrying cold air through insulated parts of the
dwelling e.g the roof space using pre insulated ductwork or propriety insulation system.
· Flexible ducting should be limited to use adjacent to fan units or air valves and should not be used to form bends.
· Ductwork should not be in direct contact with other surfaces e.g. ceilings.
Access and operation
MEV systems must be installed so that:
· The fan units and controls are easily accessible.

· Identify maintenance and servicing requirements.
· Ducts and air valves should have either fitted filters or be accessible for cleaning.
Commissioning
The MEV system should be commissioned to confirm performance to ensure compliance with the design. A copy of the commission
certificate should be made available upon request.
© MD
© Insurance Services Limited 20202020 404 VENTILATION
VENTILATION
16.3.2 SYSTEM 3 - CONTINUOUS MECHANICAL EXTRACT (MEV): Installation of services
16.3.2 SYSTEM 3 - CONTINUOUS MECHANICAL EXTRACT (MEV): Installation of services
Background ventilation Services in framed structures
Background ventilation should be provided in accordance with Approved Document F. In addition to general provisions for the installation of services, the following are of particular note for timber frame
construction external walls:
To ensure good transfer of air throughout the dwelling, there should be an undercut of minimum area 7600mm² in all internal
doors above the floor finish. This is equivalent to an undercut of 10mm for a standard 760mm width door. · The routing and termination of services should not affect the fire resistance of the structure.
Ensure that the air transfer provision is unrestricted after floor finishes have been laid (e.g. carpets should not encroach). · Adequate allowance for differential movement to occur without causing damage should be provided for rigid services
rising vertically through a building.
Purge ventilation · Services that pass through the external wall cavity and provide an opening (such as flues/vents) should be enclosed
Purge ventilation should be provided in accordance with the relevant regional Building Regulations.
· Services should be protected with metal plates if they pass within 25mm from face of stud.
Installation of building services Further information can be found in the 'Upper Floor', 'Internal Walls' and 'Electrical Services' sections.
All items should be installed to ensure satisfactory operation. Fire stopping

Fire stopping is required around services that penetrate fire-resisting floors, walls or partitions. If proprietary systems are
used, they should be installed using the manufacturer's recommendations.
· Services must be sleeved or ducted through structural elements (and not solidly embedded) to prevent damage. Fire
Issues that should be taken into account include:
stopping may also be required. Services should not to be located in the cavity of an external wall, except for electricity
meter tails.
Notches and drillings · Additional requirements for flats and apartments with a floor above 4.5m.
Floor joists should not be excessively notched or drilled. Further guidance can be found in the 'Upper Floors' section. Further information can be found in the 'Upper Floor' and 'Internal Walls' sections.
Noise
All continuous running fans should be quiet as to not discourage there use by occupants.
Controls
· Any manual boost controls should be provided locally to the areas being served.
· In kitchens, any automatic controls must provide sufficient flow during cooking with fossil fuels (e.g. gas) to avoid build
up of combustion products.
· Ensure the system always provides the minimum whole dwelling ventilation rate.

405
405 VENTILATION
VENTILATION
16. 16.4
System 4 - Continuous
Ventilation Mechanical Extract with Heat
Recovery

16.4.1 SYSTEM 4 - CONTINUOUS MECHANICAL SUPPLY AND EXTRACT WITH HEAT RECOVERY: General requirements
16.4.1 SYSTEM 4 - CONTINUOUS MECHANICAL SUPPLY AND EXTRACT WITH HEAT RECOVERY: General requirements
Continuous mechanical supply and extract with heat recovery (MVHR) Design
The MVHR system should be designed as a complete package, the performance of all materials and components should be
considered to ensure compatibility and performance of the system.
The MHVR system should:
· Be designed to ensure that a satisfactory level of performance is achieve in accordance with the Domestic ventilation compliance
guides supporting the relevant regional Building Regulations.
If the duct penetrates the roof more than · The design should ensure even distribution of airflow taking account airflow resistance, including the bends and fittings.
0.5 m from the ridge, it should extend · Have adequate fan capacity accounting for airflow resistance of the system.
above the roof slope to at least the ridge · The ductwork should be as direct as possible.
height to ensure the duct terminal is in a · Installed in accordance with the design and manufacturers recommendations.
negative pressure region above the roof. · Airflow resistance should be calculated in accordance with BS EN 13141-2 and manufacturers data.
The design should outline:
Supply and extract system · The location of all ductwork runs, the position of the fan units and controls.
· The size, type and position of ductwork and terminals.
· Direction of falls for all horizontally laid ductwork.
· Type of fixings and specified fixing centres.
· The location and type of ancillary components e.g those used for fire safety.
· Demonstrate the airflow-balancing figures for the proposed system.
MVHR fan unit
The MVHR fan unit should be adequately fixed to a part of the building that can support the load and fixed in accordance with the
design and manufactures recommendations.
Ductwork
The ductwork should provide suitable performance for the life of the system and should be ridged/ semi ridged of a material that is
suitable for use in MVHR systems and installed in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
It is important to ensure that all ductwork is:
· Suitably supported in accordance with the ductwork manufactures recommendations, this is generally secured with evenly spaced
clips at no more than 750mm centres.
· Horizontal ductwork should be laid to a fall in accordance with the design to prevent condensate collecting and should be installed
to a true line to prevent localised dips.
· Laid to a slight outfall when passing through an external wall to reduce the risk of water ingress.
· Suitably jointed using purpose design products that are durable, securely fixed and air tight in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations.
· Suitably insulated where it passes through uninsulated parts of the property or carrying cold air through insulated parts of the
dwelling e.g the roof space using pre insulated ductwork or propriety insulation system.
· Flexible ducting should be limited to use adjacent to fan units or air valves and should not be used to form bends.
· Ductwork should not be in direct contact with other surfaces e.g. ceilings.
Access and operation
MVHR systems must be installed so that:
· The fan units and controls are easily accessible.

· Suitable access for any maintenance and service requirements is provided.
· Ducts and air valves should have either fitted filters or be accessible for cleaning.
Commissioning
The MVHR system should be commissioned to confirm performance to ensure compliance with the design. A copy of the commission
certificate should be made available upon request.

407
407 VENTILATION
VENTILATION
16.4.2 SYSTEM
16.4.2 SYSTEM 44 -- CONTINUOUS
CONTINUOUS MECHANICAL
MECHANICAL SUPPLY
SUPPLYAND EXTRACT
AND WITH
EXTRACT HEATHEAT
WITH RECOVERY: Installation
RECOVERY: Installation
Purge ventilation Services in framed structures
Purge ventilation should be provided in accordance with the relevant regional Building Regulations. In addition to general provisions for the installation of services, the following are of particular note for timber frame
construction external walls:
All items should be installed to ensure satisfactory operation. · Service penetrations through the VCL should be tight fitting to reduce air leakage and the passage of moisture vapour.
· Adequate allowance for differential movement to occur without causing damage should be provided for rigid services
Items to be taken into account include: rising vertically through a building.
· Locations and fittings of pipes and cable service entries through the substructure. with a cavity barrier and protected with a cavity tray.
· Services must be sleeved or ducted through structural elements (and not solidly embedded) to prevent damage. Fire · Avoid running electrical services in the external wall cavity, except for meter tails.
stopping may also be required. Services should not to be located in the cavity of an external wall, except for electricity · Services should be protected with metal plates if they pass within 25mm from face of stud.
meter tails.
· Only to be buried in screeds where permitted by relevant Codes of Practice. Further information can be found in the 'Upper Floor', 'Internal Walls' and 'Electrical Services' sections.
Fire stopping
Fire stopping is required around services that penetrate fire-resisting floors, walls or partitions. If proprietary systems are
Floor joists should not be excessively notched or drilled. Further guidance can be found in the 'Upper Floors' section. used, they should be installed using the manufacturer's recommendations.
Issues that should be taken into account include:

Noise
All continuous running fans should be quiet as to not discourage there use by occupants. · The location and type of dampers and firestops to be used.
Controls · The integrity of walls and floors.
· Additional requirements for flats and apartments with a floor over 4.5m.
· Any manual boost controls should be provided locally to the areas being served.
· In kitchens, any automatic controls must provide sufficient flow during cooking with fossil fuels e.g. gas, to avoid build up Further information can be found in the 'Upper Floors' and 'Internal Walls' sections.
of combustion products.
· Ensure the system always provides the minimum whole dwelling ventilation rate.
VENTILATION
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 408
VENTILATION
CONTENTS
17.
Contents
Electrical
17.1 Mains
Services


Workmanship W
1. A commissioning certificate is required for any work completed by an approved installer. No
Materials Ma
Design De
1. Electrical services - shall be designed, constructed and installed so that they: 1.

guidance.
Lim
1.
ELECTRICAL SERVICES
410
ELECTRICAL SERVICES
17. 17.1
Mains
Electrical
Services

17.1.1 MAINS:
17.1.1 MAINS:Positioning
Positioningand
and protection
protection of
of cables
cablesand
andfittings
fittings
Supplementary bonding in a bathroom - plastic water supply pipe installation

General
General provisions for installation:
· All electrical installations should be in accordance with the relevant regional Building Regulations and BS 7671.
· A suitable electrical service of the appropriate size for normal domestic use shall be provided.
· PVC-covered cables should not be in contact with polystyrene insulation.
· Electrical cables should not be diagonal, and their locations should be in accordance with the image below and current
· Cables routed within the shaded zones must be in accordance with BS 7671 (see detail below).
Safety zones for electrical cables in walls
Locate cables preferably in ceiling void Zone 2 Zone Outside zones

3 Luminaire The protective conductors of all power
wherever possible or in shaded zone: Shower
· horizontally 150mm below ceiling and lighting points within the zones must
level or coving (if fitted) be supplementary bonded. The bonding
Radiant fire connection may be to an earth terminal
· Within 150mm of a junction Cord
between two walls. Shaver unit of a switch or accessory supplying
Zone 1
3m Zone 3 equipment.
Provide vertical cable
NB timber frame walls can not be drilled
run from ceiling to all Zone Circuit protective conductors may be
in horizontal shaded zone unless 2
sockets and switches used as supplementary bonding
designed the timber frame designer. Plastic pipes
conductors.
Zone 0
Supplementary bonding of short lengths
Avoid locating of copper pipe installed where the pipes
cables over are visible is not necessary.
Cables to switch or windows
outlet must be
horizontal or vertical
Supplementary bonding in a bathroom - metal water supply pipes
Alternative supply vertically Socket outlets located at

from floor void below or least 450mm above
horizontally from corner zone floor level
The protective conductors of all power

Supplementary earth bonding and metal lighting points within the zones
must be supplementary bonded to all
conductive parts in the zones including
For domestic situations, supplementary bonding is required in areas of increased risk, which are rooms containing a bath or metal waste, water and central heating
shower. It is not required within kitchens, utility rooms or washrooms. Zone 2 Zone Outside zones pipes, metal baths, and shower basins.
3 Luminaire
Shower
Supplementary bonding is not required to the pipes or metal fittings attached where plastic pipes are used within a bathroom or Circuit protective conductors may be
shower room. used as supplementary bonding
Radiant fire
Cord conductors.
This also applies where short lengths of metal pipes connected to bathroom fittings are attached to plastic pipes. Shaver unit
Zone 1
3m Zone 3 Metal baths not connected to a metal
Supplementary bonding is still required to electrical equipment such as electric showers or electric heaters. This type of bonding building structure do not require
must also be connected to the protective conductor of all circuits supplying electrical equipment in the bathroom. Zone
2 supplementary bonding if all metal pipes
Metal pipes connected to them have been bonded.
Zone 0 Connection to pipes to be made with BS

951 clamps (complete with "Safety
Electrical Connection" label).
© MD
© Insurance Services Limited 20202020 412 ELECTRICAL SERVICES
ELECTRICAL SERVICES
17.1.2 MAINS: Socket and outlet requirements
17.1.2 MAINS: Socket and outlet requirements
Socket outlets Positioning of sockets and switches
Socket outlets are to be conveniently positioned in close proximity to the TV aerial and telephone outlets, thus Sockets and switches should be positioned in accordance with the details on this sheet and the relevant regional Building Regulations.
allowing for electrical equipment including TVs etc. Rooms should be provided with the following 13a outlets:
Consumer units should be between 1350mm and 1450mm above floor level.
Room Number of 13A Outlets Comments
· Where separate kitchen and Heights of wiring accessories Setting out sockets in proximity to internal walls
utilities are provided, each room
should have at least 4 outlets.
Kitchen/Utility 8
· Where appliances are provided, Return wall
three outlets should be available
for general use.
Dining room 4
Two outlets should be near the TV ariel

Living/family room 8 100mm
outlet.
1200mm max 1200mm max
Main bedroom 6
Other bedrooms 4 Light switch

Doorbell
Entry phone 150mm
Landing 2
(where applicable) Double socket (electric).
Hall 2 Double socket (electric).
Combined TV socket and BT line.
Note: the above refers to individual socket outlets e.g. a double socket would count as 2 outlets. Electrical sockets
450mm TV sockets
Cooking min BT point 450mm min 450mm min
Cooking appliances provided to the cooker space in a dwelling must be suitably switched and terminated with a
minimum 30a electricity supply.
If a cooker panel is provided, it needs to be positioned to the side of the cooker space. A 13a socket outlet should
be positioned at the cooker space where a gas supply is provided to the dwelling.
Co-axial cable
A concealed co-axial cable should be provided from the roof void to a terminal outlet within the main living room.
Where the co-axial cable is not provided, a conduit and draw wire, or an alternative, should be provided. The
provision of an aerial is not required.
Gas appliance
Where a gas appliance requires an electrical supply, a suitably fixed spur or socket outlet should be provided.
Light fittings
At least one fixed lighting outlet should be provided to all rooms. Areas greater than 25m2 are to be provided with
two fixed lighting outlets.
Halls, landings and staircases are to be provided with lighting outlets and two-way switches.
Down lighters and other flush-fitting attachments should not be installed through a ceiling if the ceiling is providing
part of the required acoustic insulation or fire resistance to the property.
If down lighters are provided to ceilings below roof voids (excluding thatched roofs), precautions are to be taken to
ensure that no fire risk is caused by the proximity of other materials.
Passive infrared (PIR) sensors are to be used in common and external areas.

413
413 ELECTRICAL
ELECTRICALSERVICES
SERVICES
17.1.3 MAINS:
17.1.3 MAINS:Cabling
Cabling and
and services
serviceswithin
withinwalls
wallsand
andfloors
floors
Notching and drilling Staggered services on party walls (section plan view)
Floor joists should not be excessively notched or drilled. Further information can be found in the
'Upper Floors' guidance.
Concealed services
If the services are hidden in walls or floors, they need to be positioned so that any significant
cracking of the surface cannot occur.
Socket outlet box fixed Insulation
Services in framed walls through plasterboard
plank into 19mm
In addition to general provisions for the installation of services, the following are of particular note plasterboard box
for timber frame construction external walls:
12.5mm plasterboard
· Service penetrations through the VCL should be tight fitting to reduce air leakage and the
passage of moisture vapour. 19mm plasterboard plank
· Services should be protected with metal plates if they pass within 25mm from face of stud.
· Adequate allowance for differential movement to occur without causing damage should be
19mm plasterboard box
provided for rigid services rising vertically through a building.
· Services that pass through the external wall cavity and provide an opening (such as meter Socket outlet box fixed
boxes) should be enclosed with a cavity barrier and protected with a cavity tray. through plasterboard plank
into 19mm plasterboard box
Further guidance can be found in the 'Internal Walls' and 'Upper Floors' guidance.
Chasing of masonry cavity walls Continuous 50mm x

75mm battens to
provide fixing for
If chases in walls are necessary, their depth should not exceed:
plasterboard
Fire stopping
Fire stopping is required around services that penetrate fire-resisting floors, walls or partitions. If
proprietary systems are used, they should be installed using the manufacturer's Please note: The installation services within a party wall should not compromise the sound or fire resistance.
recommendations.
Further guidance can be found in the 'Internal Walls' and 'Upper Floors' guidance.
ELECTRICAL SERVICES
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 414
ELECTRICAL SERVICES
CONTENTS
18.
Contents
Water
18.1 Cold Water Supply to Plumbing, Boilers, and Appliances
Services


Workmanship W
Materials Ma
Design De
1. Water services - shall be designed, constructed and installed so that they: 1.
2. Cold water service - an adequate cold water service shall be provided which is:
a. Suitable for normal domestic purposes;
b. Protected against frost.

1. The Functional Requirements are limited by the recommendations applied in this specific Building Part Lim
guidance. 1.
WATER SERVICES
416
WATER SERVICES
18. 18.1
Cold Water Supply to
Water Plumbing, Boilers,
Services and Appliances

18.1.1 COLD
18.1.1 COLDWATER
WATERSUPPLY
SUPPLY TO
TO PLUMBING,
PLUMBING,BOILERS,
BOILERS,AND APPLIANCES:
AND Installation
APPLIANCES: of incoming
Installation water water
of incoming services
services
Installation of incoming water services Cold water services
Each building should have an adequate supply of cold water. The water supply should be fed
from below ground and insulated to prevent freezing.
External wall Service pipe or
Cold water systems may have provision for storage or be directly connected to the main supply.
rising main
Drinking water needs to be supplied directly from the main supply.
Drain down
Cold water pipes and storage cisterns located in roof spaces and other unheated areas should
valve
be appropriately insulated to the relevant standards.
Stop valve
Cold water storage cisterns will require the capacity specified in the design. Suitable support
Property of water authority Property of consumer should be given for the cistern filled with water.
To stop the cistern bottom being deformed, permanent support is to be given where necessary.
Adequate materials for support platforms are:
· Softwood boarding.
· Marine plywood.
· Chipboard type P5.
· Oriented Strand Board type OSB3 to British Standards.
Cast iron surface
box (BS 5834-2) All water tanks should be accessible. Gangway boarding is required to each cistern opening
from the roof space access. An area of 1m2 of boarding is to be provided next to cisterns to
permit routine maintenance.
Water storage cisterns should be protected from contamination by a rigid, close-fitting cover
(which is not air tight) that excludes light and insects.
Holes should be formed with a cutter in the positions shown in the design.
150mm stop valve
guard in clayware Overflows in warning pipes should be no less than 19mm diameter and situated 25mm from the
(BS 5834-1) shut off water level in the cistern. The pipe may dip below the water level in accordance with
water regulations. Alternatively, the pipe should terminate vertically downwards, or a tee should
be fitted horizontally at the discharge end.
Stop valve 750mm
Draining down facility
750mm minimum
Expansion loop to Cold water installations require the capability to be drained down.
unless insulated
relieve stress on
connection due to Use of materials
pipe settlement
Materials that are safe and minimise the risk of corrosion are to be used for pipes and fittings for
Screw down cock water services. The recommendations of the water supplier with regard to materials and fittings
should be followed.
It may be necessary to fit aluminium protector rods in areas where the corrosion of copper
cylinders occurs. These are to be fitted during manufacture, in accordance with the relevant
British Standards.

Water main - fully
Service pipe must not pass Waterproof
charged with water All items should be installed to ensure satisfactory operation.
through a drainage insulation
under pressure
inspection chamber
End of pipe sealed with
plastic or mastic
· Services must be sleeved or ducted through structural elements (and not solidly
embedded) to prevent damage. Fire stopping may also be required. Services should not to
Pipes passing through be located in the cavity of an external wall, except for electricity meter tails.
foundations should be · Only to be buried in screeds where permitted by relevant Codes of Practice.
suitably ducted to avoid
damage to the pipework Where copper pipes are permitted in floor screeds, they should be:
from settlement
· Sleeved or wrapped so that they can move freely along the length and at joints and bends.
· Jointed with capillary joints.
A metallic tape should be applied to the pipework where plastic pipework is hidden within or
behind wall surfaces, which would otherwise not be located by a metal detector.
© MD
© Insurance Services Limited 20202020 418 WATER SERVICES
WATER SERVICES
18.1.2 COLD WATER SUPPLY TO PLUMBING, BOILERS, AND APPLIANCES: Allowance for services within the structure
18.1.2 COLD WATER SUPPLY TO PLUMBING, BOILERS, AND APPLIANCES: Allowance for services within the structure
Jointing of pipes and fittings Positioning of pipes in screeds
Proprietary joints should be made strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Only fluxes recommended by the pipe manufacturer should be used, and all traces should be removed immediately
after jointing. Fluxes containing lead are not acceptable.
Suitable clips or brackets are to be used to secure pipes. Fixings should be installed adequately and spaced to stop Minimum
sagging but not restrict thermal movement. Where needed, pipes should have adequate falls. 25mm cover
Sufficient room should be allowed for thermal expansion and contraction to avoid damage and noise from pipe
movement.
Floor joists should not be excessively notched or drilled. Further information can be found in 'Upper Floors' guidance.
Taps
Cold taps should be located to the right of the hot water tap. Insulated pipe
within screed
Concealed services
If the services are hidden in walls or floors, they need to be positioned so that any significant cracking of the surface
cannot occur.
If chases in masonry walls are necessary, their depth should not exceed:

Further information can be found in the 'Internal Walls' guidance.
Services within or beneath floors
Protection through wrapping or ducting is necessary when pipes are situated under floor screeds. Thermal expansion
allowances are to be made, especially at changes of direction.
The insulating material around the pipework needs to be a minimum of 25mm in thickness. The screed thickness
should still be at least 25mm where pipes cross over.
Fire stopping
Fire stopping is required around services that penetrate fire-resisting floors, walls or partitions. If proprietary systems
are used, they should be installed using the manufacturer's recommendations.
Further information can be found in the 'Internal Walls' and 'Upper Floors' guidance.
Supplementary bonding
Where required the pipework should be fitted with supplementary earth bonding.

419
419 WATER
WATERSERVICES
SERVICES
CONTENTS
19.
Contents
Outbuildings
19.1 Garages


Workmanship W
Materials Ma
Design De
1. Outbuildings should be constructed to resist lateral and vertical loads adequately. 1.
2. Foundations should be designed and constructed to suit local ground conditions and adequately support
the weight of the structure and imposed loads.
3. Specialist works must be provided and supported by structural calculations completed by a suitably
qualified engineer where necessary.
4. Outbuildings shall be designed and constructed so that they:
a. Are structurally sound and do not impair the stability of adjacent structures; Lim
b. Are durable and resistant to weather and ground moisture; 1.
c. Have adequate provision for drainage of roof water;
d. Have resistance to the spread of fire to the building or adjacent structures;
e. Offer reasonable resistance to unauthorized entry.

guidance.
OUTBUILDINGS
422
OUTBUILDINGS
19. 19.1
Garages
Outbuildings

19.1.1 GARAGES:
19.1.1 GARAGES:General
Generalrequirements
requirements
Limitations Roofs
This section does not apply to outbuildings where: Roofs should be weather tight. Flat roofs should have a minimum design fall of 1:40. Tiled roofs should be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions, including pitch, fixing and lap.
· The building is heated or protected against frost damage.
· The building is used as a habitable space, including home offices. Roof structures should be durable enough to support roof loadings adequately. Timber trusses should be adequately braced and traditional cut
· It is essential that the walls will resist wind-driven rain. roofs should have timber elements that meet relevant Building Regulations and supporting documents.
Where a building is intended to be built to meet the above requirements (i.e. be heated and habitable and weather resistant), Further information can be found in the 'Roofs' guidance.
the building will need to meet all the requirements of this Technical Manual.
Introduction
In order to achieve a satisfactory standard of performance, garages, conservatories, small outbuildings and extensions should
be designed and constructed so that:
· They are able to sustain and transmit all normal loads to the ground without affecting their own stability or that of the
housing unit (or any adjacent buildings) by excessive deflection or deformation that would adversely affect the Small detached buildings
appearance, value and serviceability of the building or the housing unit.
· They provide an acceptable and durable external surface and are not adversely affected by harmful or toxic materials in
the atmosphere or from the ground.
· They are resistant to moisture and do not allow the passage of moisture to parts of the building that would be adversely
affected by it. 3m
· They encourage the rapid discharge of moisture due to rain or snow from their surfaces to suitable gutters and down
pipes, or to some other form of collection and discharge that prevents moisture from re-entering the building, where it
might have adverse effects. 2m
· In the event of fire, they resist fire spread to the housing unit and to adjacent buildings. No other Max 3m between
· They are provided with sufficient locks or other devices to resist unauthorised entry. openings in piers/returns,
· Where additional services installations are provided (such as central heating boilers or electrical or plumbing installations), this zone thickness of which
these comply with the relevant additional guidance contained in this manual. depends on site
· The risk of injury from accidental breakage of the glazing (where fitted) is reduced to a minimum. exposure
Lateral restraint to tops of
A satisfactory performance for the design and construction of garages, conservatories, small outbuildings and extensions may walls at maximum 2m centres
be achieved by meeting the relevant parts of the guidance supporting the relevant regional Building Regulations. if required by the design
Foundations Holding down straps to be

provided at maximum 2m centres
Foundations should be constructed so that loads are adequately transferred. Further information can be found in the if required by the design
'Foundations' section.
Lintels over door and
Garage floors window openings
100mm min ST4/GEN3 concrete
Floors should have a minimum concrete thickness of 100mm and bear onto a suitable subbase. The concrete should be float slab on min 100mm hardcore
finished and to at least a GEN3 grade, as the garage is not a habitable space some surface imperfections of the floor finish are (DPM recommended)
acceptable. The effects of normal drying shrinkage of concrete floors could cause some small gaps around the perimeter at wall
junctions.
Garage floors should be laid to falls to comply with the relevant regional Building Regulations.
Further information can be found in the 'Ground Floors' section.
Walls
Single leaf 100mm walls are considered acceptable, providing that the following provisions are met: The floor slab should be
thickened to 350mm at garage
· The height of wall does not exceed 2400mm from ground level. door openings
· Intermediate piers are provided, in accordance with adjacent detail. The piers should extend the full height of the wall. Door between garage and dwelling
· The piers should be built off a suitable foundation. must achieve 30 minutes fire
· The wall is adequately restrained at ceiling and verge level. resistance and there must be a
· The walls are capable of adequately transferring the roof loadings to the foundation. 100mm step down between the
· Walls are pointed both internally and externally. house and garage floor levels
· Walls should be provided with a suitable DPC located at least 150mm above ground level.
· Proprietary lintels should be provided over window/door openings.
· Where walls are constructed that exceed 2.4m in height e.g. Gable walls, the overall thickness must be increased to at
least 190mm thick.
© MD
© Insurance Services Limited 20202020 424 OUTBUILDINGS
OUTBUILDINGS
19.1.2 GARAGES: Fire separation between garages on boundary’s
19.1.2 GARAGES: Fire separation between garages on boundary's
Walls between outbuildings Example 2: Linked to dwelling and linked to another garage across boundary
Where walls separate outbuildings under two different ownerships or tenancies, the separating wall should be taken up to the The dividing wall (on the boundary) forms a compartment situation between two properties and must be taken up to the
underside of the roof and fire stopped. underside of the roof covering and fire stopped.
The following guidance is provided for typical examples of multiple ownership situations.
Garages linking two properties
Note: The dividing walls should have the appropriate fire resistance in accordance with the relevant regional Building
Regulations.
Example Plan 1: Linked detached garages
The dividing wall (also boundary) forms a compartment situation between two properties and must be taken up to the
underside of the roof covering and fire stopped.
Detached garage away from dwelling
Garage Garage
Dividing wall between

garages to be taken up
to the underside of the
roof and fire stopped
Garage Garage Dividing wall between
garages to be taken
up to the underside of
the roof and fire
stopped
Linked carport/parking bay
Note: red dashed line can be a site boundary position.
Example 3: Linked carport (open fronted -

no dividing walls) / parking place in under croft
car parking area:
i.e. Where an allotted car park space is provided and no

legal boundary situation exists between bays.
Parking 1 Parking 2 Parking 3 In this situation, where no ownership boundary will exist
and just allotted parking bays, no requirements for
compartment walls will exist, therefore can remain open.
The above information is for guidance purposes only in all situations compliance with the appropriate
relevant regional Building Regulations should be achieved.

425
425 OUTBUILDINGS
OUTBUILDINGS
19.1.3 GARAGES:
19.1.3 GARAGES: Fire
Fire stopping
stopping
Fire stopping at roof level between party walls Fire stopping at roof level between party walls
Fire-stop between
Compartmentation batten and above
The spread of fire within a building can be restricted by sub-dividing it into compartments separated underlay
from one another by walls and/or floors of fire-resisting construction. The roof void, like most spaces
within a building, can provide a route for the spread of fire and smoke. As an often-concealed space,
it is particularly vital that fire-resistant cavity barriers are provided at the following points:
Fire-stop below
· At junctions of separating wall and external cavity wall. underlay
Vertical cavity barrier

omitted for clarity
A compartment wall should be taken up to meet the underside of the roof covering or deck, with fire
stopping, where necessary, at the wall/ roof junction to maintain the continuity of fire resistance. The
compartment wall should also be continued across any eaves cavity. If a fire penetrates a roof near
a compartment wall, there is a risk that it will spread over the roof to the adjoining compartment. To
reduce this risk, a roof zone 1500mm wide on either side of the wall should have a covering of Cavity barrier of
designation AA, AB or AC on a substrate or deck of a material of limited combustibility. mineral wool or
fire-resisting board in
boxed eaves
Cavity closed at eaves

AB, or AC on deck of material of limited combustibility.
Fire stopping should be provided in accordance with the relevant regional Building Regulations
· Party/separating walls 25mm below the top of the rafter line and a soft fire-resistant packing, such as mineral wool,
should be used to allow for movement in roof timbers and prevent distortion of the roof tiles.
· The fire stopping should be continuous to eaves level and a cavity barrier of fire-resisting board or a wire reinforced
1500mm 1500mm
mineral wool blanket nailed to the rafter and carefully cut to fully seal the boxed eaves should be installed.
Note: Fire stopping should be

At least
375mm
covering
Roof
At least
covering
375mm
Wall
Roof covering
Wall
OUTBUILDINGS
© MD Insurance
© MD Services
Insurance Limited
Services 2020
Limited 2020 426
OUTBUILDINGS
CONTENTS
20.
Contents
Ground
20.1 Site Investigation Requirements
Conditions


Workmanship W
Materials Ma
1. All samples to be stored and kept in such a way that will not cause inaccuracy when soils are tested. No
Design De
1. The site investigation should be completed at an appropriate level for the risk in accordance with the No
relevant British Standard.
2. Site investigation and remedial measures must meet the relevant regional Building Regulations and Lim
additionally; those standards specifically referred to in the references section in the guidance that follows 1.
this Functional Requirement.

guidance.
GROUND CONDITIONS
428
GROUND CONDITIONS
20. 20.1
Site Investigation
Ground Requirements
Conditions

20.1.1 SITE
20.1.1 SITE INVESTIGATION REQUIREMENTS:
INVESTIGATION REQUIREMENTS: Responsibilities
Responsibilitiesand requirements
and requirements
Flow chart of Site Investigation procedures
This section sets out the requirements for an acceptable Site Investigation. It is intended to be flexible and user-friendly, and includes simple
checklists aimed at ensuring compliance. The aim is to raise standards in the interests of both the Warranty provider and the Builder or Phase 1: Geoenvironmental Assessment (desk study) Phase 3 Geoenvironmental
Developer. This will lead to a safe and economic design that will minimise the risk to all those involved in the project. Assessment
(Please note that Phase 2 can
Where projects run over time and over budget, this is usually as a direct result of problems within the ground. It is therefore vitally important to be preliminary investigation)
reduce the risk of unforeseen conditions that can directly affect the overall cost of the project. It is believed that Builders and Developers will Site description
view this work as an important safeguard, rather than unnecessary expenditure. Site history
Geology and mining
Hydrology and flooding
To ensure a consistently high standard, all stages of the work should be carried out by a Chartered Engineer or Chartered Geologist with at least Have the Geotechnical and
Environmental setting
Geoenvironmental risks been
five years' experience of this type of work. Specifying properly qualified personnel will considerably increase the overall industry standard. Radon
adequately defined
Geoenvironmental risk assessment
Geotechnical assessment
The geological environment: Cross section of a river valley
Yes No
Any Geoenvironmental/
Geotechnical hazards known or
suspected No further action
Limestone
No Yes
Commence construction
Spring or remediation
Sand
None - No significant Phase 2 Geoenvironmental
geotechnical or plausible Assessment (intrusive ground Unforeseen hazards
Gravel pollution investigation)
Refine brief and objectives
Mudstone
Consider the need for
Made ground, soft No further action additional investigation
deposits, peat and although an intrusive The investigation - scope and or remediation on all or
ground water investigation would methodology only part of the site
always be advisable to Strata profile - soil descriptions
minimise later costs In-situ and laboratory testing
Glacial till Detailed quantitative risk assessment
(boulder clay) (Revise in light of investigation
recommendations) Complete build
Fault Consider the need for
Coal additional investigation or
remediation
Glacial till Alluvial clay
(boulder clay) Phase 1: Geoenvironmental Assessment (desk study)
Sandstone
Introduction
The aim of the Phase 1 Geoenvironmental Assessment is to identify and assess the potential geotechnical and geoenvironmental
(contamination) hazards on the site. Since all sites are different, it is important to identify the scope and purpose of the desk study. This
Roles and Responsibilities will include who commissioned the work, the development proposals, the relevant procedures followed and the objectives. Any issues
specifically excluded should also be noted if these might normally be expected as part of the desk study.
The roles and responsibilities of those parties involved in the development are the owner, developer, builder and self-builder.
Site description
The site description should define the exact extent of the site, and should include a site address, grid reference and elevation. The
Owner/developer/builder/self-builder boundaries and topography of the site should be defined.
The provision of clear development proposals for the site, and the implementation of a competent Site Investigation using appropriately qualified
personnel, is now a priority for regulators. These demonstrate that any geotechnical and contaminated land risks can be safely dealt with. A site inspection should always be carried out not only of the site itself, but also the immediate surrounding area. This should include
Specific Health and Safety responsibilities, in particular the CDM Regulations also require compliance. any information not apparent from the maps and describe what currently occupies the site, such as buildings, hard standing,
watercourses, vegetation, trees and any particular features.
Environmental Health/Contaminated land officer
The provision of advice to the local Planning Department on technical matters and planning conditions requires a competent and comprehensive The type and distribution of vegetation can indicate soil and ground water conditions, and note should be made of any invasive plants,
Site Investigation and associated risk assessment. such as Japanese Knotweed and Giant Hogweed. Adjacent features and land use should be reported if there is likely to be an impact on
the development. It is not uncommon for features such as tanks to be known about but unrecorded. The walkover should note any
potential sources of contamination and geotechnical hazards, such as slopes, excavations, land slipping, ground subsidence, soft
Local Authority Building Control ground or desiccated/shrinkable soils.
Building Control is responsible for enforcing the Building Regulations, which also requires a competent and comprehensive Site Investigation.
All structures on the site should be inspected both internally and externally for any evidence of structural damage, such as tilting,
Health and Safety Executive cracking or chemical attack. Any evidence of underground features should be noted. Where practical, the local residents can often give
The HSE are responsible for Health and Safety at work, including the CDM Regulations. valuable information, although caution should be used in respect of their 'memories'. Local place names can give useful indications of
former uses, e.g. Gas Works Lane, Water Lane, Tannery Road, etc. Aerial photographs and their interpretation can also prove helpful.
A photographic record of the site, and any specific features of the site, should be included with the report.
© MD
© Insurance Services Limited 20202020 430 GROUND CONDITIONS
GROUND CONDITIONS
20.1.2SITE
20.1.2 SITE INVESTIGATIONREQUIREMENTS:
INVESTIGATION REQUIREMENTS: Site
Site history,
history,geology,
geology,mining
miningand solution
and features
solution features
Site history
The potential effects of soakaways, leaking drains, run off, etc. on the chalk will need to be considered and addressed in the design.
The history of the site and the surrounding areas is extremely important when assessing the likelihood of contamination or geotechnical hazards.
CIRIA C574: Engineering in Chalk, 2002 gives the following recommendations:
Historical Ordnance Survey maps date back to the mid-19th Century and often specify the actual industrial use of particular sites or buildings. They may
show areas of quarrying or infilling, and indicate where buried obstructions, such as underground tanks or old foundations, can be expected.
Concentrated ingress of water into the chalk can initiate new dissolution features, particularly in low-density chalk, and destabilise the loose backfill of
existing ones. For this reason, any soakaways should be sited well away from foundations for structures or roads, as indicated below:
The influence or impact of off-site past industrial use will depend upon the type of industry, the underlying geology and the topography. However,
consideration should normally be given to any such features within a 250m radius of the site (or further where appropriate) with the potential to affect it.
· In areas where dissolution features are known to be prevalent, soakaways should be avoided if at all possible but, if unavoidable, should be sited at
least 20m away from any foundations.
Historical maps are available from libraries and commercial providers, such as Ground Sure or Envirocheck. The latter provide a cost-effective method
· Where the chalk is of low density, or its density is not known, soakaways should be sited at least 10m away from any foundations.
of obtaining maps, and include the ability to superimpose current site boundaries on older maps. Issues regarding possible breaches of copyright are
· For drainage systems, flexible jointed pipes should be used wherever possible; particular care should be taken for the avoidance of leaks in both
also avoided by using licensed products.
water supply and drainage pipework.
· As the chalk is a vitally important aquifer, the Environment Agency and Local Authority must be consulted when planning soakaway installations
It should be remembered that historical maps only provide a snapshot in time, and care must be taken when interpreting what may have occurred in the
where chalk lies below the site, even where it is mantled with superficial deposits.
intervening years. For example, a quarry may be shown on one map and infilled on the next. However, in the intervening period, it could have
expanded prior to infilling; similarly, industrial uses may not always be recorded while many military or sensitive uses may have been omitted. Other
For further guidance on foundation and drainage proposals in areas where solution features in soluble rocks are present or known to exist, please refer to
sources of information may include the ubiquitous internet search and historical aerial photographs. Additionally, it may be necessary to search the
the Warranty Good Practice Guide: 'Solution features in soluble rocks' available on the Warranty website.
libraries of Local Authorities and Local History departments.
Geology and mining Hydrogeology and flooding
The geology of the site should be recorded by reference to published geological maps, which most commonly exist at 1:50,000 (1 inch to 1 mile) and The assessment should include the flood risk and hydrogeology of the site, particularly whether the site lies on a Principle Aquifer and/or Source
1:10,000 (6 inch to 1 mile). The British Geological Survey Geo-Index also provides existing ground investigation records, including logs and reports. It Protection Zone, which are both, susceptible to pollution of ground water. The presence of surface water features and drainage should be described, and
should be noted that these records can relate not only to the surrounding areas but may also include previous investigation of the site itself. The the overall risks of flooding to the site should be determined, primarily with reference to the Environment Agency flood map data and Local
information on the geological maps can also be supplemented with British Geological Survey technical reports, flood risk appraisals and memoirs. Authority-commissioned Strategic Flood Risk Assessments. Flood risk data is continually being updated by the Environment Agency and Local Authority.
The bedrock geology, any overlying superficial deposits and the effects of weathering should all be described, together with any geological faults that Any ground water or surface water abstraction points 'downstream' of the site, particularly any potable (drinking water) abstraction points, should be
may affect the site. An explanation of the likely ground conditions should be given, together with reference to any other mapped geological features, recorded, as this may have liability implications should the development cause any pollution.
particularly if there are likely to be any natural cavities or solution features.
Environmental setting
Mining areas
In former coalfields, or other areas of mineral extraction, the maps may not always record the presence of old or active workings. The likelihood of The question as to whether a site poses an actual or potential environmental risk, or is at some external risk from pollution, will be determined by its
shallow coal workings affecting surface stability should be established in conjunction with a Coal Authority report. Such reports also record areas that environmental setting. This will in turn depend upon the site's topography, geology, hydrogeology and hydrology, amongst other site-specific
have been affected by the extraction of brine, which is particularly prevalent in the Cheshire area. Other forms of mineral extraction will require considerations.
site-specific research.
It is necessary to consider other potential sources of contamination, such as pollution control licenses, discharge consents, hazardous sites (COMAH,
NIHHIS), pollution incidents, landfills, waste treatment sites and past and current industrial sites.
Key requirements for foundations constructed in mining areas
The foundations shall be designed to clearly demonstrate that the design loads are safely transferred to known soil strata that are, in turn, capable of
Current industrial operations rarely provide a risk of pollution to a site. Pollution is most likely to have been caused by historical activities and processes
supporting the loads. Foundations should be designed to ensure that long-term settlement does not exceed 25mm (or 10mm for piles) or 1:500
that were often deemed normal practice in the past, but which are considered unacceptable today. In this regard, the past history is invariably highly
(differential), unless more stringent criteria are required by the Project Structural Engineer.
significant in respect of possible ground pollution.
The potential for mine workings and mine entries within an influencing distance of the proposed development should be addressed by a suitably
The site should be considered in relation to any designated environmentally sensitive sites, such as Special Areas of Conservation, Special Protection
qualified and experienced engineer prior to commencement of works, and in accordance with CIRIA guidance (including CIRIA SP 32: Construction
Areas, Nature Reserves and Sites of Special Scientific Interest. In particular, could contamination on the site be affecting such sensitive areas, whether
Over Abandoned Mine Workings, 2002), Coal Authority Technical Guidance Notes (including TGN01/2019) and our "Mining - Structural Requirements"
these are on or adjacent to the study site?
document.
Data relating to current industrial licensing, consents and the like, together with information relating to environmentally sensitive sites, is typically available
Reference should be made to reports on geological hazards, such as Envirocheck or GroundSure reports, both on-site and locally.
through commercial data suppliers. As with the historical maps, this is usually a cost-effective method of obtaining data.
For further guidance on foundation proposals in mining areas, please refer to the Warranty Good practice guide: 'Mining - Structural Requirements'
For both the historical maps and datasets, there is usually little or no interpretation of the information, and it is essential that this interpretation is carried
available on the Warranty website.
out by an experienced and qualified individual. Automated risk assessments do not include appraisal by qualified staff, and should therefore be viewed
with caution and are not usually acceptable to Regulators.
Solution features in chalk
An example of this was a contaminated former petrol filling station site recorded as having no past industrial use. The historical maps never recorded the
Solution features (such as pipes, swallow holes and solution cavities, sometimes loosely infilled with drift deposits) are commonly found in chalk, site as a filling station, nor did the environmental data. However, the walkover quickly identified former bases for pumps and filling points for underground
caused by water draining through the chalk and dissolving it. They can also be found in Limestone and other soluble rocks. The British Geological storage tanks (USTs).
Survey categorises the five main soluble rocks found in the UK as Chalk, Limestone, Gypsum, Dolomite, and Salt. The risk of solution features should
be addressed in the Site Investigation Report (commonly from an Envirocheck or GroundSure report on geological hazards, both on-site and locally). Radon
Hazard maps are available with different coloured areas representing different levels of risk. Where the risk is moderate or high, special precautions The need to incorporate radon protection measures should be determined by reference to risk maps produced by the Health Protection Agency. Such
should be taken, which for strip foundations would include careful inspection of the excavation, probing and use of reinforcement to span potential information is also usually included within commercially available datasets.
voids.
Geoenvironmental risk assessment and conceptual site model
Key requirements for foundations constructed in chalk areas
The foundation scheme shall be designed to clearly demonstrate that the foundations are capable of supporting and transferring the design loads safely A quantitative health and environmental Risk Assessment should be carried out as part of the assessment. The process of a Risk Assessment is set out in
to known soil strata that can be demonstrated from the appropriate project Site Investigation report to be capable of carrying the load, using the Part IIA of the Environment Protection Act 1990, and amended in subsequent legislation.
appropriate soil properties obtained from geotechnical testing. Where there is a moderate to high risk of voids being present, the foundations shall be
designed in the first instance to span across a void of at least 5 metres without settlement greater than 25 mm (10mm for piles) or differential settlement This act introduces the concept of a pollution linkage, which consists of a pollution (contaminative) source or hazard and a receptor, together with an
tilt greater than 1:500 for low rise buildings unless more stringent criteria are required by the Project Structural Engineer. For buildings greater than established pathway between the two. For land to be contaminated, a pollution linkage (hazard-pathway-receptor) must exist; this forms a so-called
three storeys please contact the Warranty surveyor. 'conceptual model' of the site.
Source Pathway Receptor
© MD Insurance Services Limited 2020 431 GROUND CONDITIONS

GROUND CONDITIONS
20.1.3SITE
INVESTIGATION REQUIREMENTS: Pollution
Pollutionand
andcontamination
contaminationof pathways
of pathways
Examples of pathways and the effects of land contamination (after PPS 23) are shown on the diagram below 'Pathways of potential contaminants'. Physical
Blast-furnace and steel-making slag (and some natural materials) may expand. Degradation of fills may cause settlement and voids in buried
Pathways of potential contaminants tanks, and drums may collapse as corrosion occurs or under loading.
Flora and fauna Natural environment (pathway 6, receptors D-E)

(Receptor E)
Residents (Pathways 1-5)
Present occupiers (A) Phytotoxicity
Groundworkers (B) (Prevention/inhibition of plant growth)
Future residents (C) Some metals essential for plant growth at low levels are phytotoxic at higher concentrations. Methane and other gases may give rise to
phytotoxic effects.
Contamination of water resources

Ingestion and inhalation Soil has a limited capacity to absorb, degrade or attenuate the effects of pollutants. If this is exceeded, polluting substances may enter surface
(Pathways 1-5) and ground waters.
Ground gases Ecotoxological effects

(Pathway 8) Contaminants in soil may affect microbial, animal and plant populations. Ecosystems or individual species on the site, in surface waters or areas
where migration has occurred may also be affected.
Leaching to groundwater
(Pathway 6) For any contaminant source identified, judgement is required to assess the probability of a pollution linkage occurring and the potential
consequences of that linkage. Based on the probability and likely consequences, the overall risk (significance) can be established. The
definitions that are used for this purpose should be clearly stated. The probability of a hazard, combined with its consequences, can be used to
assess risk, and this forms the so-called Conceptual Site Model. This is in accordance with the Statutory Guidance for Contaminated Land
Building fabric and Made Ground/Hazard Groundwater Watercourses (Defra 2006).
water supply pipes (Receptor D) (Receptor D)
(Receptor F) The following tables may be used to explain the decision-making process:
Consequences of pollution linkage

Pathways Receptors
1. Ingestion of contaminated soil. A. Present site occupiers. Severe Damage to human health
2. Ingestion of contaminated food. B. Site development personnel. Substantial pollution of controlled waters
3. Ingestion of contaminated water. C. Future residents. Significant change in ecosystem population
4. Inhalation of contaminated vapours. D. Controlled waters. Irreparable damage to property
5. Dermal contact with contaminated soil/dust or water. E. Flora and fauna.
6. Pollution of controlled water and off site migration. F. Building and services. Moderate Non-permanent damage to human health
7. Attack on building materials and services. Minor pollution of controlled waters
8. Migration of landfill gases and radon. Change in ecosystem
Damage to property
Human health (pathways 1-5, receptors A-C)
Mild Short term health effects
Slight pollution of controlled waters
There is an uptake of contaminants by food plants grown in contaminated soil. The uptake will depend on their concentration in the soil, their
Slight effect on ecosystem
chemical form, soil pH, plant species and prominence in diet.
Minor repairable damage to property
Ingestion and inhalation
Substances may be ingested directly by young children playing on contaminated soil if they eat plants that have absorbed metals or are Near Zero No noticeable effect on human health
contaminated with soil or dust. Ingestion may also occur via contaminated water supplies. Metals, some organic materials and radioactive No significant pollution to controlled waters
substances may be inhaled from dusts and soils. No measurable effect on ecosystem densities
Non-structural cosmetic damage to property
Skin contact
Soil containing tars, oils and corrosive substances may cause irritation to the skin through direct contact. Some substances, e.g. phenols, may
be absorbed into the body through the skin or through cuts and abrasions. Decision making
Irradiation
As well as being inhaled and absorbed through the skin, radioactive materials emitting gamma rays can cause a radiation response. Probability of a Consequences of a pollution linkage
hazard and an (hazard pathway target)
Fire and explosion associated linkage
Severe Moderate Mild Near zero
Materials such as coal, coke particles, oil, tar, pitch, rubber, plastic and refuse waste are all combustible. Both underground fires and
biodegradation of organic materials may produce toxic or flammable gases. Methane and other gases may explode if allowed to accumulate in
High Very High High Medium/Low Low/Negligible
confined spaces.
Medium High Medium Low Low/Negligible
Buildings (pathways 7 and 8)
Low High/Medium Medium/Low Low Negligible
Fire and explosion
Underground fires may damage services and cause ground subsidence and structural damage. Accumulations of flammable gases in confined Unlikely High/Medium/Low Medium/Low Low Negligible
spaces leads to a risk of explosion.
Chemical attack on building materials and services

Sulphates may attack concrete structures. Acids, oils and tarry substances may accelerate the corrosion of metals or attack plastics, rubber and
other polymeric materials used in pipework and service conduits or as jointing seals and protective coatings to concrete and metals.
© MD©Insurance Services Limited 2020 2020 432432 GROUND CONDITIONS

GROUND CONDITIONS
20.1.4SITE
INVESTIGATION REQUIREMENTS: Geoenvironmental
Geoenvironmentalassessment
assessment
Final overall risk is based on an assessment of the probability of a hazard and its consequences. Phase 2: Geoenvironmental Assessment (ground investigation)
Risk categories are shown shaded in the table 'Decision making', and are defined in the table 'Overall risk' below. Pre-ground investigation
Overall risk The initial investigation should comprise a desk study as described in the flow chart of Site Investigation procedures at the beginning of this section.
The investigation
Risk Description of risk levels
After the desk study has been carried out, the objective of the intrusive investigation is to provide detailed information for the safe and economic development of the
site at minimum cost. Clearly, no guarantee can be given that all relevant conditions will necessarily be identified, but the work carried out should be aimed at
reducing risk to acceptable levels.
High Site probably or certainly unsuitable for present use or environmental setting. Contamination Increasing expenditure on the Site Investigation will reduce the risk of unforeseen conditions, but professional judgement and experience is also required. Not all
probably or certainly present and likely to have an unacceptable impact on key targets. Urgent forms of investigation will be needed, and that which is necessary in the best interests of the client should be carefully assessed for each individual project.
action needed.
The investigation must be designed to provide the appropriate level of information on ground and ground water conditions on the site, together with identifying
potential areas of contamination. The investigation should be undertaken in accordance with the principles of:
· BS EN 1997-1: Eurocode 7 - Geotechnical design - Part 1: General rules.
Medium/Moderate Site may not be suitable for present use or environmental setting. Contamination may be · BS EN 1997-2: Eurocode 7 - Geotechnical design - Part 2: Ground investigation and testing.
present, and likely to have unacceptable impact on key targets. Action may be needed in the · BS 5930 and BS 10175.
medium term.
It will also require the full-time supervision of a Chartered Geologist or Chartered Engineer.
Low Site considered suitable for present use and environmental setting. Contamination may be The dates of the investigation and the methods used should be stated, with the exploratory hole positions being shown on a drawing.
present but unlikely to have unacceptable impact on key targets. Action unlikely to be needed
in present use. An intrusive investigation may comprise the following:
Trial pitting
Normally, these should be at least three times the foundation depth where possible, or sufficient to prove competent bedrock. They should be excavated outside
Negligible Site considered suitable for present use and environmental setting. Contamination may be proposed foundation positions where possible. On completion, the excavations are normally backfilled.
present but unlikely to have unacceptable impact on key targets. No action needed while site
remains in present use. This method enables soil conditions to be closely examined at any specific point and samples to be taken. It also gives useful information on the stability of
excavations and water ingress. In-situ gas, strength and California Bearing Ratio (CBR) tests can also be carried out.
Window sampling
Geotechnical assessment Window sampling consists of driving a series of 1m and 2m long tubes into the ground using a dropping weight. On completion of each run, the tube is withdrawn.
The next tube is then inserted and the process repeated to provide a continuous profile of the ground. On each run, the tube diameter is reduced in order to assist
in its recovery. When complete, the borehole is normally backfilled. It is also possible to carry out standard penetration tests (SPT) using the window sampling
Although no intrusive investigation may have been carried out on the site at the desk study stage, it should be possible to give equipment.
preliminary indications in respect of the geotechnical matters set out in the table 'Geotechnical Assessment: Preliminary
Indicators' below. Shell and auger boring
This technique uses a tripod winch and a percussive effect with a variety of boring tools, where disturbed and undisturbed samples can be taken. This is the most
Geotechnical Assessment: Preliminary Indicators suitable method for soft ground investigation as it enables the maximum amount of information to be obtained. However, minor changes in lithology may be
overlooked unless continuous undisturbed sampling is used.
Foundations Are normal to deep strip footings likely to be suitable or might piling or ground improvement Disturbed samples of soils can be taken for identification and classification purposes. In cohesive soils, 'undisturbed' samples 100mm in diameter can be taken by
be necessary? Will made ground, old foundations, cellars or services be encountered? an open drive sampler for laboratory testing of strength, permeability and consolidation characteristics.
Mining and quarrying Will the possibility of shallow mine workings or quarrying on the site need to be addressed? SPT are used in granular and cohesive materials and in soft or weathered rocks. The resulting 'N' value can be compared to empirical data on strength and relative
density. Difficulties in obtaining true 'N' values mean they should only be used as a guide, and not as an absolute value in foundation design.
Soakaways Are soakaways likely to be suitable based on the mapped geology? (Actual on-site
permeability tests would need to be carried out to determine suitability or not). Rotary drilling
Two main types of rotary drilling can be carried out in rock. Rock coring using a diamond or tungsten carbide-tipped core bit provides samples and information on
Roads What is the sub-grade strength (CBR) likely to be? (The actual design will be dependent on rock types, fissuring and weathering. Open-hole drilling only produces small particles for identification purposes, and the information gained is therefore limited. The
the CBR measured on-site). latter is, however, useful as a quick method of detecting major strata changes and the location of coal seams and old workings. Water, air, foam or drilling muds
may be used as the flushing medium in either case.
Excavations Will soft ground plant be suitable or will rock breakers be needed for deeper excavation?
Rotary open-hole drilling is carried out to determine the existence of any voids or broken ground that could affect surface stability. Due to the risk of combustion, the
drilling is normally done using a water flush. On completion, the boreholes are backfilled with bentonite cement. A Coal Authority Licence is required in advance of
Ground water Is shallow ground water expected?
any exploratory work intended to investigate possible coal workings.
Earthworks Are any significant earthworks anticipated?
Geophysics
Gas protection Will gas protection measures be required or would they be prudent in accordance with good Geophysics can be used in certain situations and is useful where significant anomalies exist in the ground. Ground-penetrating radar is probably the most common
for defining near-surface features. The results from geophysics can be variable and, combined with the relative high cost, should be used advisedly.
practice?
Strata profile
The above can only be provided on the basis of limited site data, and it is recommended that the scope of any intrusive ground Full strata descriptions should be given based on visual identification and in accordance with the requirements of:
investigation is set out here if the desk study is to be presented as a stand-alone document. · BS EN ISO 14688-1: Geotechnical investigation and testing - Identification and classification of soil - Part 1
· BS EN ISO 14688-2: Geotechnical investigation and testing - Identification and classification of soil - Part 2
· BS EN ISO 14689-1: Geotechnical investigation and testing - Identification and classification of rock - Part 1
Soil description
Samples from boreholes or trial pits should be fully described in accordance with the latest guidance from the British Standards and Eurocodes. They should
include colour, consistency, structure, weathering, lithological type, inclusions and origin. All descriptions should be based on visual and manual identification as per
recognised descriptive methods. The methodology for soil and rock description is given in more detail in the 'Ground Conditions - Site Investigation Requirements:
Soil and rock descriptions' section.

GROUND CONDITIONS
20.1.5SITE
INVESTIGATION REQUIREMENTS: In-situ
In-situand
andlaboratory testing
laboratory testing
In-situ and laboratory testing Construction

During construction, if unforeseen conditions are encountered then the builder/developer should seek additional advice from the consultant as to
In-situ gas monitoring whether the new conditions will affect the continued development of the site, and whether any additional investigation or testing is necessary.
Methane is the dominant constituent of landfill gas, and can form an explosive mixture in air at concentrations of between 5% and 15%. Thus,
5% methane in air is known as the Lower Explosive Limit (LEL). Concentrations less than this do not normally ignite. Carbon dioxide can also be Example detailed quantitative risk assessment
a potential problem, especially where it occurs in concentrations greater than 1.5%.
Source Potential Pollutant Pathways Receptor Risk
In-situ gas tests should be carried out in the boreholes on completion, and in probe holes made in the sides of the trial pits. Testing is with a
portable meter that measures the methane content as its percentage volume in air. The corresponding oxygen and carbon dioxide
Potentially Oils, fuels, grease, 1-5 A. Present occupants Site unoccupied
concentrations are also measured. Care is needed with this, since the rapid mixing and dilution of any gases within the atmosphere can occur
contaminated made hydraulic fluid, metals,
very quickly.
ground asbestos B. Ground workers Low risk involved with
Possible past minor excavation work,
A more accurate method used to monitor over the longer term consists of gas monitoring standpipes installed in boreholes. These typically
spillages and metals provided personnel
comprise slotted UPVC pipework surrounded by single sized gravel. The top 0.5m to 1m of pipework is usually not slotted and is surrounded by
adopt suitable
bentonite pellets to seal the borehole. Valves are fitted and the installations protected by lockable stopcock covers normally fitted flush with the
precautions, together
ground. Monitoring is again with a portable meter and is usually done on a fortnightly or monthly basis, with at least six visits being appropriate
with washing facilities
for most sites.
C. Future Low risk for residential
The risks associated with the gases should be considered in accordance with documents such as:
residents/occupants use, provided made
ground is capped by
· BS 8485: Code of Practice for the characterisation and remediation from ground gas in affected developments. clean sub-soil and
· CIRIA Report C665 Assessing risks posed by hazardous ground gases to buildings. topsoil
· NHBC Report No. 4 Guidance on evaluation of development proposals on-sites where methane and carbon dioxide are present.
6 D. Controlled waters Low to moderate risk at
In-situ strength testing present. Provided
Hand vane and MEXE cone penetrometer tests can be carried out in trial pits in order to assess the strengths and CBR values of made ground, on-site monitoring is
soils and heavily weathered bedrock materials. undertaken throughout
the piling and ground
Soakaway testing work phases of
If sustainable drainage is being considered, soakaway testing should be carried out. This is preferably done in trial pits, with the aim of development show no
intersecting permeable soils or naturally occurring fissures within bedrock. adverse effects, the risk
will be low
Soakaway testing involves filling the trial pits with water from a bowser or such like, and measuring the fall in water over time. Where possible,
two tests should be carried out to allow the immediate surrounding ground to become saturated. By knowing the dimensions of the trial pit, the E. Ecosystems Low risk as leaching is
permeability and/or rate of dissipation can be calculated. not a problem
Soakaway test results obtained from small hand-dug pits or shallow boreholes should be treated with caution. 7 F. Building materials Low to moderate. Install
and services pipes in clean bedding
materials. Adequate
Geotechnical laboratory testing
precautions to be taken
Soil testing should be carried out to BS 1377: Methods of test for soils for civil engineering purposes, and the laboratory used should be recorded
in respect of buried
and conducted by an approved UKAS laboratory. Normally, the results are summarised and the full results appended; a summary of the main concrete
types of test is presented in the 'Laboratory testing' page of this section.
Organic material Landfill gases, Radon, 8 A-F Low to moderate. Low
Contamination laboratory testing VOCs, SVOCs values of ground gases
As with the investigation, the sampling should be under the full-time direction of either a Chartered Engineer or Chartered Geologist. All the present during the
recovered soil samples should be screened on-site for any visual or olfactory evidence of contamination, including the presence of Volatile investigation, although
Organic Compounds (VOCs). Samples should be selected from the trial pits and boreholes based on those most likely to be contaminated, and basic gas protection
those that will give the most appropriate indication of the spread of any contaminants. The samples should be stored in either glass or plastic measures are
containers and where necessary kept in cooled conditions. Testing should be carried out by a UKAS accredited laboratory, in accordance with recommended
the Environment Agency's Monitoring Certification Scheme; MCERTS performance standards.
Waste materials Fly-tipping All waste materials to be
The aim of this is to make a preliminary assessment of the level of any contamination on the site, in order to determine if there are any significant removed from site
risks associated with contaminants in respect of both human health and the environment, including controlled waters. In addition to the soil,
ground water samples should be tested where appropriate.
Geoenvironmental risk assessment (conceptual site model)

The qualitative health and environmental risk assessment carried out as part of the desk study should be revised, based on the findings of the
ground investigation and the results of the contamination testing, to produce a Detailed Quantitative Risk Assessment (DQRA). See table
'Example detailed quantitative risk assessment'.
The DQRA is again based on the conceptual site model, and might look similar to the following example summary of hazards, pathways and
receptors. On-sites with known contamination, further investigation and testing may be necessary, together with recommendations for
remediation and its validation.
© MD©Insurance Services Limited 2020 2020 434434 GROUND CONDITIONS

GROUND CONDITIONS
20.1.6SITE
INVESTIGATION REQUIREMENTS: Report
Report requirements
requirements
Recommendations DEFRA
· Contaminated land report CLR 11, 2002 (7-10 withdrawn)
The report must include a site location plan and a plan showing any special features plus borehole and trial pit locations (factual reports will · R & D Publications TOX 1 - 12, 14, 16 - 25
describe the work carried out, and will include borehole/trial pit logs and the results of all in-situ and laboratory testing, but there will be no
· R & D Publications SGV 1, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15 and 16 (withdrawn)
interpretation of the data and no recommendations).
· Improvements to contaminated land guidance - Outcome of the “Way Forward”, 2008
The interpretative report should make recommendations in respect of the main points or issues related to design and construction: · Exercise on soil guideline values, 2008
· Guidance on the legal definition of contaminated land, 2008
· Normal strip or deep trench footings
· Piling DETR
· Vibro replacement
· Raft foundation
· Circular 02/2000. Contaminated land, 2000
· Building near trees · Guidelines for environmental Risk Assessment and management, 2000
· Landfill and Radon gas
· Existing drains and services Environment Agency
· Road construction · Guidance for the safe development of housing on land affected by contamination, 2000
· Sustainable surface water drainage (soakaways)
· Guidance for waste destined for disposal in landfills, Version 2, 2006
· Excavations and ground water
· Reuse of materials · Protective measures for housing on gas-contaminated land remediation position statements, 2006
· Contamination · Guidance and Monitoring of Landfill Leachate, Groundwater and Surface Water
· Capping mine shafts · Human Health Toxicological Assessment of Contaminants in Soil (Science Report SC050021/SR2), 2008
· Site soil reuse · Updated Technical Background in the CLEA Model (Science Report SC0520021/SR3)
· Slope stability and retaining walls · Using Soil Guideline Values, 2009
· Further geotechnical considerations
· Change of use
HMSO
Advice in respect of specific recommendations is given on the 'Phase 1 and 2 checklists' page of this section. · Environmental Protection Act 1990
· Environment Act 1995
Main References · UK Water Supply (Water Quality) Regulations 2000
· The Water Act 2003
British Standards Institution
· BS 1377: Methods of test for soils for civil engineering purposes (Parts 1 to 8) Institution of Civil Engineers
· BS 3882: British Standard specification for topsoil
· Contaminated Land: Investigation, Assessment and Remediation (2nd Edition)
· BS 5930: British Standard Code of Practice for Site Investigations
· BS 8485: British Standard Code of Practice for the characterization and remediation from ground gas in affected developments
· BS 10175: British Standard Code of Practice for the investigation of potentially contaminated sites Joyce, M.D.
· BS EN 1997-1: Eurocode 7 - Geotechnical design - Part 1: General rules · Site Investigation Practice, 1982
· BS EN 1997-2: Eurocode 7 - Geotechnical design - Part 2: Ground investigation and testing
· BS ISO 14688-1: Geotechnical investigation and testing - Identification and classification of soil - Part 1
OPDM
· BS ISO 14688-2: Geotechnical investigation and testing - Identification and classification of soil - Part 2
· BS ISO 14689-1: Geotechnical investigation and testing - Identification and classification of rock - Part 1 · Planning Policy Statement 23: Planning and Pollution Control Annex 2: Development on Land Affected by Contamination
BRE
· Radon: Guidance on protective measures for new dwellings, BR 211
· Protective measures for housing on gas-contaminated land, BR 414, 2001
· Cover systems for land regeneration, 2004
· Concrete in aggressive ground, Special Digest SD1, 3rd Edition, 2005
CIEH
· The LQM/CIEH Generic Assessment Criteria for Human Health Risk Assessment (2nd Edition)
CIRIA
· Assessing risks posed by hazardous ground gases to buildings, CIRIA C665
· Shaft friction of CFA piles in chalk 2003, CIRIA PR 86
· Engineering in chalk 2002, CIRIA C574
· Construction over abandoned mine workings 2002, CIRIA SP 32
DoE
· CLR Reports 1-4
· Waste Management Paper No. 26A, Landfill Completion: A technical memorandum…
· Waste Management Paper No. 27, Landfill gas: A technical memorandum…

GROUND CONDITIONS
20.1.7
20.1.7SITE INVESTIGATION
SITE INVESTIGATIONREQUIREMENTS: Phase 11and
REQUIREMENTS: Phase and22checklists
checklists
Phase 1 and 2 checklists

Checklist for Phase 1: Geoenvironmental assessment (Desk Study) Checklist for Phase 2: Geoenvironmental assessment (Ground Investigations)
Site Description (and surrounding area of relevance) Trial pits

· Location, O.S. grid reference and plans · Strata profile and description
· Topography, le

Labc Warranty Technical Manual v9 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Labc Warranty Technical Manual v9 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TECHNICAL MANUAL

T 0800 183 1755 E [email protected]

The Manual is then divided into Building Part sections which:

Main Changes in the Technical Manual Version 9 Windows and Doors

© MD Insurance Services Limited 2020 2

© MD Insurance Services Limited 2020 4

© MD Insurance Services Limited 2020 5

Additional Functional Requirements Ad

© MD Insurance Services Limited 2020 7

Min 15mm Min 15mm

Level of bed joints

Steel frame Timber frame

Site tolerances Manufacturing tolerances Location

Tolerances Max 10mm deviation in 2m

Rain screen cladding systems

Internal walls and ceilings

Max deviation +/- 5mm from 2m Junctions

Non load-bearing timber partitions 2m

Window frame should not be distorted in the opening

Gaps and distortion in doors Straightness of external reveals Glazing

Distortion across doors: Acceptable faults include:

© MD Insurance Services Limited Limited

Finishes and fitted furniture

Painted and varnished surfaces

Drives and paths: standing water

Drainage system covers

© MD Insurance Services Limited 2020 13

Additional Functional Requirements Ad

Limitations of Functional Requirements Lim

© MD Insurance Services Limited 2020 15

Walls below ground Site and risk assessment

These drawing sheets discuss type A, B, and C protection.

Example of combined waterproofing A, B, and C

External land drain positioned below slab level

Sump pump system within concrete

45° line of foundation loading

© MD Insurance Services Limited Limited

Land Drain Positioning & External Drainage Exclusion of surface water

© MD Insurance Services Limited Limited

© MD Insurance Services Limited 2020 20

Combined protection Commentary on Type A barrier protection

Type A barrier protection Existing structures

45° line of foundation Type A assumes no or limited resistance to penetration

© MD Insurance Services Limited Limited

Combined protection Commentary on Type B protection

45° line of foundation

· Structural design and specification of materials (based in part on-site assessment).

© MD Insurance Services Limited 2020 23 BASEMENTS

Externally applied tanking barrier.

Installation of external tanking, which

Alternatively, tanking applied to the

External land drain positioned below slab level and drained to

Example of reinforced masonry wall

Dry lining fixed over membrane linings via

Cavity membrane concealed

Sump pump system within

External land drain positioned below slab level

© MD Insurance Services Limited Limited

Reinforced concrete designed and constructed

Degree of resistance dependent on concrete

Cavity membrane fixed to retaining wall via

Dry lining fixed over membrane linings via

Cavity membrane concealed